Skip to main content

Full text of "Te Karere"

See other formats 


€  KAR€R€ 


Wahanga  35  Hanuere,   1941  Nama   1 


j* 


m      <e$ 


TE  TAU  HOU,  1941 


mmntittism*ma& 


# 


*V 


4  P-cayec  foe-  tAe  Hew  Ifeac 

By  Solveig  Paulson 

Oh  Lord,  in  this  new  year, 
May  I  be  strong  and  quick  to  see 
The  graces  You  have  planted  deep 
In  all  creation,  tenderly. 

I  would  be  wise  to  see  the  things  worth 

while, 
And  generous  with  Thy  gifts  to  me, 
Have  ready  hands  for  heavy  toil, 
And  bear  misfortune  buoyantly. 

I  would  have  healthy,  friendly  thoughts, 
Clean  swept,  like  rocks  beside  the  sea, 
And  wit  to  find  life's  crevices 
Packed  full  of  mirth  and  jollity. 

Oh,  Lord,  may  all  the  days  that  come 
Just  find  me  sweet  and  pliable  and  free, 
Like  grass  that  yields  itself  to  wind 
Then  rises,  after,  gracefully! 

— Improvement  Era. 


1 5«_  sd  m.  sd  m.  . 


R£5F 


ff 


Te  Karere 


w 


Established  in  1907 


Wahanga  35 


Hanuere,   1941 


Nama   1 


Matthew   Cowley 
Kelly  Harris 
Hohepa  Meha 
Eru   TV  Kupa 
Waimate   Anaru 


Tumuaki    Mihana 

Nga  Etita 

Kaiwhakamaori 
Kaiwhakamaori 


"Ko  tenei  Pepa  i  zvhakatapua  hex  hapai  ake  i  te  iwi  Maori  ki 
roto  i  nga  whakaaro-nui.' 

"Te  Karere"  is  published  monthly  by  the  New  Zealand  Mission  of  the  Church 
of  Jesus  Cnrist  of  Latter-day  Saints,  and  is  printed  by  TE  KARERE  PRESS,  No.  2 
Scotia  Place,  Upper  Queen  Street,  Auckland,  C.l,  N.Z.  Subscription  Rates:  3/-  per 
six  months;  5/-  per  year;  £1  for  five  years;  £2/10/-  for  life.  (United  States  Cur- 
rency:  $1.00   per   year;    $4.00   for   five   years;    $10.00   for   life.) 

Address    Correspondence,    Box    72,    Auckland,    C.l,    New    Zealand. 


L^ 


CONTENTS 

Editorial —  Page 

"A   Day  of  Warning"    522 

Special  Features — 

Te  Kirihimete,  na  Hori  Hooro      502 

He  Rongo  Korero  Mo  Te  Whawhai,  na  Paepae  Witehira  503 

Pakiwhara,  na  Waimate  Anaru  i  Whakamaori    504 

He  Mihi  Kia  Ta  Apirana  Ngata  507 

"The  Eastern  Orthodox  Church,"  by  John  T.  Georges     518 

"The  Health  of  the  Maori  Race,"  by  Wi  Pere  Amaru,  A. P..,  M.A.  526 

"What  to  do  with  Your  Genealogy,"  by  Mark  E.  Petersen 529 

"Are  Poets  Inspired  of  God?"  by  Elder  H.  W.  Kirkham   532 

Church    Features — 

Mahi   Kura  Hapati    510 

News  from  the  Field   513 

Sunday   School       516 

Statistics  517 

Branch  Teacher's  Message      531 

"From    the    Desk    of   the    General    Superintendency,"    In    Elder 

Wallace  F.   Bennett       " 533 

( renealogy    I  department        

Primary  536 

Mutual   hupp j\ uncut   Association    541 


f 


502  TE  KARERE  Hanmn  .  1941 

TE  KIRIHIMETE 

Na  Hori  Hooro 

TIMATA  mai  ia  Molii  tae  mai  ki  nga  whakapaparanga  Poropiti 
o  muri  iho  i  koa  katoa  ratou  i  te  koa  o  te  ra  Kirihimete. 
Ahakoa  e  whia  mano  tau,  ran  tan  rand  te  tawhiti  atu  ia  ratou, 
o  te  ra  whanau  ai  te  Ariki  i  whiwhi  tonu  te  hunga  whakapono  o 
nehera  ki  te  koa,  ki  te  rangimarie  o  te  Kirihimete  Na  ratou  nei 
hoki  i  whakaatu  nga  tohu  o  taua  ra  ki  te  ao. 

Ko  ta  Ihaia  kupu  whakaari  i  rangona  i  te  \va  e  po  atarau  ana  te 
hitori  o  Iharaira;  i  roto  i  te  kino,  i  te  whakaheke  toto  e  takatu  ana; 
i  raro  ano  hoki  i  nga  taumaha-tanga  o  te  ture;  ka  homai  enei  kupu 
hei  taanga  manawa  mo  ratou.  Heaha  te  he  o  te  kii  ahakoa  i  roto 
i  te  hohonutanga  o  nga  mano  tau  o  nga  whakatupuranga  tangata  o 
mua  i  koa  tonu  te  hunga  whakapono  i  te  koa  o  te  Kirihimete?  i  wai- 
ata  ano  ratou  i  te  waiata  Atua,  o  te  maungarongo  ki  te  whenua  o  te 
whakaaro  pai  ki  nga  tangata.  I  roto  i  o  ratou  koringa,  kahore  he 
hoaketanga  ko  tenei  anake;  pumau  tonu  te  whakamau  atu  a  o  ratou 
mata  ki  te  wa,  ki  te  ra  me  te  haora  e  tatu  ai  nga  waewae  o  te 
Mihaia  ki  runga  ki  te  whenua — te  "Tino  Kirihimete." 

E  tata  ana  tenei  te  eke  ki  te  rua  mano  tau  e  Kirihimete  ana 
ia  tau,  ia  tau.  Tena  ra  e  hoki  a  tatou  mahara  ki  te  takoto  o  nga 
kupu  whakaari  e  tutuki  tonu  nei  i  tenei  ra.  Te  Kirihimete  i  mahue 
ake  nei  me  te  Kirihimete  e  tumai  nei  kei  roto  i  te  po  atarau  He 
mano  tini  nga  whaea  ka  uhunga  kia  ratou  tamariki  e  whakaeke  atu 
ra  i  nga  maunga  o  te  riri  i  nga  raorao  o  te  mate;  ka  whakangaro 
atu  ki  roto  i  te  mura  o  te  ahi  e  rauna  nei  i  te  ao 

He  ra  pouri  enei  ki  te  ran  o  te  ropu  tangata  pera  me  te  ra 
ia  Rahera  me  ona  tamariki  kua  turakina  e  te  hoari  a  Herora 

No  reira  whakatapatahi  atu  o  tatou  manawa  ki  to  tatou  Atua, 
kia  whakatauria  te  wikitoria  ki  tana  i  pai  ai,  kia  tau  iho  te  tomairangi 
o  Tona  aroha  kia  hohoro  mai  te  Kirihimete  o  te  Maungarongo,  kia 
awhinatia  te  hunga  e  pouri  ana,  e  mamae  ana  i  te  mata  o  te  hoari. 

Ahakoa  i  roto  i  te  pouri  me  Meri  Kirihimete  tonu  tatou,  me 
man  hoki  nga  whakaaro  ki  te  tau  hou  kia  tika,  kia  toa. 

HE  POWHIRI  HUI  PARIHA 

He  panuitanga  tenei  ka  tu  te  Hui  Pariha  o  te  takiwa  o  Here- 
taunga  nei  ki  Waipawa,  a  te  Ratapu  tuatoru  o  Hanuere,  1941,  ara, 
i  te  Hatarei  me  te  Ratapu,  te  18  me  te  19  o  nga  ra. 

Haere  mai  tatau  ki  konei :  he  wa  pai  tenei  kia  tutaki,  kia  kite 
kia  rongo  hoki  i  te  Timuaki   Mihana. 

Na  te  Timuakitanga  o  te  Takiwa. 


Hanuere,   1941  TE   KARERE  503 

HE  RONGO  KORERO  MO  TE  WHAWHAI 

Na  Paepae  Witehira 

Kei  te  horapa  haere  tonu  te  whawhai  ki  etahi  a.tu  motu  ara  ko 
te  hoa  o  Tiamani  ko  Itari  kua  takahi  i  te  whenua  o  nga  Kariki. 

E  rua  rau  mano  nga  hoia  o  Itari  kua  whakaeke  atu  ki  runga  o 
taua  whenua  a  kei  te  kaha  nga  Kariki  ki  te  tu  atu  ki  aua  taua.  Ka 
nui  te  kaha  o  te  whawhai  a  tenei  hunga  engari  e  haere  raru  ana  i  Itari 
inaianei. 

Ka  nui  te  parakura  o  taua  iwi  i  nga  Kariki  ara  (Greece).  E 
haere  kaha  ana  te  whawhai  a  tenei  iwi  a  e  pera  ana  ano  hoki  ta  te 
Ingarihi  raua  ko  Tiamana.  Kahore  te  whawhai  e  ahu  mai  ana  ki  te 
mama  engari  e  ahu  ke  atu  ana  ki  te  taimahatanga.  Kahore  ano  i 
ruarua  noa  te  whakaaro  a  tetahi  taha  me  tetahi  taha  engari  kei  te 
tapatahi  tonu  te  whakaaro  a  te  tokorua  kia  haere  kaha  tonu  te  riri. 
Kei  te  titaritaria  tonutia  nga  taonga  nga  whare  nga  tangata  me  nga 
mea  rere  rangi. 

Ka  tokowha  inaianei  nga  iwi  kei  te  haere  kaha  te  whawhai. 
Ko  Tiamana  raua  ko  Ingarangi  me  Itari  raua  ko  Kariki.  He  nui 
te  parekura  o  te  tangata  o  nga  mea  rere  rangi  me  era  atu  o  nga 
mea  o  enei  whenua  e  wha. 

Ko  nga  mea  rere  rangi  kua  pakaru  e  5058  o  te  Tiamana  e  1648 
o  te  Inarihi  e  299  o  Itari  e  whitu  tekau  o  nga  Kariki.  Na  kei  te  kaha 
te  haere  o  nga  wheketere  ite  ao  ite  po  kei  te  hanga  i  nga  mea  wha- 
whai atetahi  taha  me  tetahi.  Kei  te  u  tonu  te  whakaaro  o  Amerika 
kite  hanga  me  te  tuku  i  nga  mea  whawhai  ki  Ingarangi. 

Ko  tu  ano  te  Timuaki  a  Ruhiwhera  (Roosevelt)  ki  taua  turanga 
i  te  toru  o  nga  wa.  He  tangata  tuatahi  tenei  ki  pera  te  hikoi.  Kote 
kaupapa  tuturu  kia  rua  ano  wa  ka  mutu  ai  ka  riro  i  tetahi  atu.  He 
nui  te  koa  o  tenei  taha  mo  te  tunga  ano  o  tenei  tangata  ko  te  take 
ko  tona  kaha  katoa  e  whakapaua  ana  ki  te  awhina  i  a  Ingarangi. 

He  ripoata  poto  mo  te  motu  nei.  Kua  haere  te  ture  mum 
inaianei  mote  pakeha  kia  uru  ki  te  whakareri  mote  whawhai  a.  ka 
rua  putanga  o  te  tono.  Kua  puta  te  tono  a  te  Kawanatanga  ki  nga 
kura  katoa  Maori,  pakeha  kia  kohia  he  moni  hei  whakatu  whare 
hokohoko  ma  nga  hoia  ite  whawhai,  ko  nga  kura  Maori  mo  nga  hoia 
Maori  nga  kura  Pakeha  mo  nga  pakeha.  Kati  mo  tenei  wa.  Kia 
ora  te  iwi  kua  haere  me  te  hunga  kei  te  kainga. 
(Taria  te   Roanga) 


BOUND  VOLUME  OF  "  TE  KARERE,"  1940 

A  limited  number  of  hound  volumes  of  the  1940  issue  of 
Te  Karen'  will  soon  be  available.  Place  your  orders  as  soon 
as  possible  with  Te  Karere,  Box  72,  Auckland. 


SW  TE  KARERE  Hanuen-.  1941 

PAKIWHARA 

Tona  takenga  mai,  tona  horapatanga  ki  etahi  atu  mc  tona  taeatanga 
te  mahi  kia  ora. 

No  Waimate  Anaru  i  Whakamaori 

He  mate  wehi  rawa  tend  mate.  Ko  tona  timatanga  i  aim  i  roto 
i  nga  ahuatanga  paruparu  o  te  tane  raua  ko  te  wahine.  T  puta  ake 
i   enei   ahuatanga  he  ngarara   ririki   rawa   kahore  e  kitea  ana  e  te 

kanohi  maori,  ma  te  karaihe  anake  ka  kitea.  E  kia  ana  lie  spirochete. 
E  rere  ana  tenei  mate  i  tetahi  ki  tetahi  atu.  Tera  noa  ake  ko  te  tane 
e  pa  atu  ana  ki  te  wahine-  kei  tetahi  nei  o  raua  tenei  mate,  tera  ano 
etahi  e  pangia  ana  i  nga  kihinga,  taoretanga  ranei  i  nga  taore  o  nga 
mea  pera,  me  nga  inumanga  i  te  kapu,  karaihe  ranei  i  inu  ai  ana 
hunga  e  pangia  ana  e  tenei  ahua  mate.  E  hara  i  te  mea  kotahi 
anake  te  mate  nei,  engari  he  maha  noa  atu  ahua  rere  ki  tetahi  i 
tetahi  me  nga  ngarara  ano  hoki  rereke  ano  tetahi  i  tetahi. 

Ko  te  mate  "pakiwhara"  he  tino  kai  kohuru  tangata.  Kei  etahi 
taone  o  Amerika  nuku  atu  i  te  100,000  e  mate  ana  ia  tan  ia  tan  i 
tenei  mate,  e  40,000  e  mate  ana  ia  tau  i  te  mate  a  ngakau.  Na 
tana  mate  ano  e  25,000  pepi  e  mate  ana  ia  tau  no  te  mea  he  paki- 
whara nga  matua.  Kei  taua  takiwa  ano  nuku  atu  i  te  10,000,000 
nga  mea  kua  pangia  e  tenei  mate.  Nui  atu  hoki  nga  tamariki  e 
kapotia  ana.  E  wha  nga  ahuatanga  o  tenei  mate.  I  te  10  ra  ki 
te  toru  wiki  katahi  ano  ka  kitea  kua  puta  ki  waho,  ahua  penei  me 
te  hakihaki  nei  me  he  komaoa  nei.  Ko  nga  tane  e  kitea  ana  nga  tohu 
ki  runga  i  te  kirimatamata,  ko  nga  wahine  e  kitea  ana  nga  tohu  ki 
te  wahanga  o  te  aroaro  me  te  takotoranga  tamariki.  Tera  nga  tohu 
nei  e  kitea  ki  etahi  wahi  atu  o  te  tinana,  ki  nga  ngutu,  ki  te  arero, 
nga  matimati  waewae  ranei.  Nga  wahi  i  pa  ai  nga  ngarara  mate  nei 
kua  pa  ki  taua  wahi  ka  hari  te  tangata  e  tae  wawe  ana  ki  te  "takuta" 
e  wa  tuatahi  ana.     E  ngawari  ana  hoki  ki  te  rongoa  ina  tere  te  mahi. 

Wahi  tuarua :  e  timata  tenei  wa  i  te  toru  wiki  ki  te  ono  wiki. 
He  nui  nga  tohu  o  te  mate  nei  e  puta  i  tenei  wa.  Ka  komaoa  katoa 
te  tinana.  Ko  te  tikanga  kahore  e  rekareka  ana.  Ka  komaoa  a  roto 
o  te  mangai,  a  muri  o  te  te  kauae  me  nga  tako  ano  nei  he  kainga 
na  te  piwa  me  te  makariri.  Ka  puta  he  pukupuku  ririki  ki  runga 
i  te  wahi  ngaro  o  te  tinana  a  ka  horapa  atu  ki  nga  wahi  katoa  o  te 
tinana.  Tera  nga  huruhuru  nga  ngakuru,  tera  e  mamae  te  korokoro 
me  he  piwa.  Ko  te  wa  tenei  e  mohiotia  ai  te  mate  ina  whaka- 
matauria  nga  toto  o  te  tangata.     Kia  mau  ki  nga  tohutohu  ka  ora. 

Te  wahi  tuatoru :  He  maha  nga  tangata  e  pangia  ana  e  tenei 
mate  kahore  e  mohiotia  ana,  tera  pea  kihai  he  tohu  o  waho,  kahore 
hoki  he  mamae  o  roto  e  mohiotia  ana,  ma  te  whakamatau  anake  i 
nga  toto  ka  mohiotia  ai  koia  kei  roto  nga  ngarara  nei  e  ngau  ana. 
Ka  puta  tenei  ahua  o  te  mate  pakiwhara  nei  ki   te  hunga  kahore 


Hanuere,   1941  TE  KARERE  505 

nga  toto  e  tirohia  ana,  otira  nga  ngarara  nei  e  tae  atu  ana  ki  nga 
paipa  toto  ki  te  aho  turuturu,  ki  te  ngakau  me  era  atu  wahi  o  te 
tinana, 

Te  wahi  tuawha :  e  rima  tau  ki  te  tekau  tau.  A  20  ki  30  tau 
i  muri  iho  i  enei  mahinga  katoa  me  he  mea  kahore  i  tino  ora  ka  waiho 
hei  whakore  kaha  i  te  tinana  me  nga  waewae.  Ka  matapotia  te 
tangata  a  he  nui  etahi  atu  mate  me  he  mea  ka  mohiotia  koia  nei  te 
mate  he  toenga  mai  na  te  pakiwhara  nei.  Ma  te  hoki  anake  ki  nga 
tohutohu  nei  ka  ora  ai,  na  reira  me  whakamatau  nga  toto  ia  tau 
ia  tau,  kia  mohiotia  ai  kahore  tenei  mate  i  roto  i  nga  tangata  me 
nga  wahine  ano  hoki. 

"Ko  te  pakiwhara  he  mate  kaha  ki  te  hopu  tangata/' 

I  roto  i  te  wahi  tuatahi  me  te  wahi  tuarua  o  tenei  mate  koia 
nei  te  wa  kaha  o  te  mate  nei  ki  te  rere  ki  tetahi  atu.  Ma  te  mea 
e  mate  ana  e  tupato  ka  puta  ake  i  tenei  wa  nga  tohu  o  enei  wahi  e 
rua.  E  ma  ana  a  runga  o  nga  mate  e  pararahi  ana  a  runga  o  nga 
mata.  Kia  tino  tupato  kei  whara  i  nga  mata  o  te  pu  nei.  Waiho 
hei  tauira  me  penei  te  ahua.  Kauarawa  te  tane  me  te  wahine  kei  a 
raua  nei  tenei  mate  e  tutu  ki  etahi  atu  no  te  mea  ka  riro  tonu  atu 
taua  pakiwhara  i  tetahi  atu.  Kaua  e  kihi  ki  nga  mangai  pera.  Kaua 
e  taore  i  nga  taore  o  etahi  atu.  Kaua  e  inu  i  te  karaihe  e  inu  ai 
etahi  atu,  karaihe  niho  ranei,  paipa  me  era  atu  mea  e  riro  ai  nga 
ngarara  mate.  Ina  mutu  te  raweke  i  to  wahi  e  mate  ana  me  horoi 
rawa  o  ringa  ki  te  hopi. 

"Ko  te  pakiwhara  i  roto  i  te  ha  puta  nga." 

E  kaha  ana  te  mate  nei  ki  te  rere  atu  i  te  whaea  ki  te  pepi  i  roto 
i  te  takotoranga  tamariki.  E  rima  ra  i  roto  i  te  ono  o  nga  wahine 
kahore  e  rongoatia  ana  e  kokiri  ana  te  pepi  e  mate  roto  ana.  Ko 
nga  mea  i  puta  ahua  pararuki  noaiho  te  ahua  o  te  ora.  Ko  tenei 
ahuatanga  he  mea  kore  noaiho  ina  rongoatia  te  whaea  i  te  wa  tonu 
e  noho  ai  te  pepi  i  roto  iaia  hei  awhina  i  te  whaea  me  tona  pepi. 

Ko  etahi  wahine  kahore  e  tino  mohio  ki  te  ahua  o  te  huringa 
o  tona  wa  ara  te  whakaaturanga  o  te  tamingi  i  roto  i  te  wahine.  Nga 
wahine  katoa  e  hapu  ana  kia  tere  tana  haere  kia  tirohia  ana  toto 
kei  raru  te  pepi  i  tenei  mate.  Ki  te  kitea  kei  roto  tenei  mate  i  nga 
toto  me  timata  tonu  atu  te  mahi  i  mua  atu  i  te  taenga  o  te  kopu 
ki  te  rima  marama,  ki  te  timata  te  rongoa  i  muri  i  te  rima  marama 
e  toru  ano  tamariki  e  ora  i  roto  i  te  rima. 

Ko  te  mea  nui  inaianei  ko  te  oranga  o  tenei  mate  i  nga  takuta 
mohio  kei  te  ao  nei.  Ko  ta  ratou  whakahaere  he  mea  penei.  Ko 
te  pakiwhara  ka  ono  marama  te  panga  mai,  ka  nui  te  tere  o  te 
mahinga  kua  mutu  te  kai  o  nga  ngarara  ki  roto  i  te  tinana,  ko 
nga  mea  i  pangia  i  raro  mai  i  te  11   tau  e  70  nga  papunga  e  30  e 


506  TE  KARERE  Hanuere,  1941 

mapua  ana  he  spirochet  ki  nga  ringaringa  hei  patu  i  nga  ngarara  i 

roio  1  nga  toto.  E  40  enei  mapunga  (bismuth  compound)  ki  te 
hunui  o  te  tangata.     Ko  tend  alma  mahi   me  mapu  tonu  kotahi   i 

roto  i  te  wiki.  Kanaka  e  mutu  ai  pau  noa  nga  wiki  e  70.  Kaua 
e  taoki  i  muri  iho  i  nga  mapunga  tuatahi  ka  kore  haere  atu  nga  tohu 
kei  runga  i  te  tinana  e  man  ana.  Kaua  e  haere  ki  nga  whare  mahi 
rongoa  rongoa  ai  ia  koutou.  Heoi  ano  ta  ratou  e  whakaaro  ana  ko  a 
koutou  moni  me  te  tere  ano  hoki  o  te  ora,  engari  e  kore  e  roa  kua 
hoki  mai  ano  tana  mate  kia  koutou. 

Me  mahara  mau  ki  enei  maharatanga  o  te  "pakiwhara." 

1.  Me   whakamatau   nga   toto   i   nga   tan   katoa. 

2.  E  kite  i  te  takuta  i  te  \va  ano  e  pa  a.i  tenei  mate  kia  koe. 
Kaua  e  haere  ki  nga  whare  rongoa. 

3.  Kua  whakamaramatia  e  runga  ake  nei  ki  70  mapunga  katahi 
ano  ka  ora  pai  tenei  mate  i  roto  i  te  tinana. 

4.  Te  spinal  fluid  me  tirotiro  i  te  wa  e  mania  ana  tenei  mate 
hei  mohiotanga  mo  te  takuta  mo  te  ahua  o  nga  roro  me  nga  nana 
haerenga  toto.     Tera  pea  kua.  he  te  takotoranga  i  te  mate  nei. 

5.  Ko  nga  wahine  katoa  kua  pangia  e  tenei  mate  haere  kia 
tirohia  nga  toto  e  te  takuta  mo  te  whai  tamarikitanga  e  kore  e  pangia 
e  tenei  mate  kino.  Kia  tino  noho  tatou  i  runga  i  te  whai  whakaaro 
mo  enei  mate  kikino  o  te  ao  nei  hei  peehi  i  nga  whakaaturanga  c 
heke  mai  nei  kua  homai  e  te  Atua  he  tangata  mohio  ki  tenei  ao 
hei  awhina  i  aia  i  waenganui  i  nga  tamariki  a  te  tangata.  Kei  whaka- 
whirinaki  tonu  tatou  ki  te  whakamahi  i  te  Atua  mo  nga  mate  e 
taea  e  taiou  te  mahi  nga  rongoa  tae  atu  hoki  ki  nga  takuta  mohiotanga 
kei  te  ao  nei  kua  homai  hei  painga  mo  tatou  katoa. 

HE  MAHI  WHAKAMIHARO 

I  tu  he  marena  ki  roto  i  Takahiwai  i  te  26  o  nga  ra  o  Oketopa 
i  raro  i  te  whakahaere  o  Hirini  T.  Heremaia.  T  tana  wa  i  hou 
he  wairua  uiui  ki  roto  i  nga  matua  o  te  tane,  a  i  riro  na  Hirini  i 
whakamarama  nga  whakahoki  me  te  kauwhau  hoki  i  te  Rongopai. 
He  wairua  ora  ia  matou  katoa  i  roto  i  tenei  ra.  I  whakapono  te 
whanau  a  Te  Reweti  Penehia  me  tana  wahine,  a  i  konei  ka  vvhakae- 
tia  kia  iriiringia  eta.hi  o  nga  tamariki  a  ko  etahi  i  manaakitia.  Ko 
nga  mea  i  hou  ki  roto  i  te  wai  o  te  iriiritanga  ko  Ra.ngi  Marama  Te 
Reweti  Pendiia  me  Iritana  Te  Reweti  Penehia,  a  ko  nga  mea  i 
manaakitia  ko  Hemi,  Mereana  me  Tui  Penehia.  Ko  nga  matua  o 
'"nei  tamariki  ko  Te  Reweti  Penehia  me  Pira  Te  Reweti  Penehia. 
He  tika  he  mea  whakamiharo  tenei. 

— Tuwharerangi  Hcnare. 


Hanuere,   1941  TE  KARERE  5^7 

HE  MIHI  KIA  TA  APIRANA  NGATA 

TENA   ra  koe  Ta  Apirana   Ngata  e  whai   kupu  nei   ki   to   iwi 
Maori.     Te  matua  o  te  Iwi  tena  koe.     Kia  nui  nga  manaaki- 
tanga  a  te  Kai-hanga  kia  koe  e  whakahua  nei  hoki  koe  i  te 
Tiriti  o  Waitangi  me  te  whakanuinga  o  te  huri  rau  tau  ia  Pepuere 
te  6  o  te  tau  nei.     I  taua  ra  i  whakaaro  pehea  tatou?     Kei  te  whaka- 
aro  pehea  tatou  inaianei? 

I  tenei  ra  kua  kore  he  whenua,  a  ko  te  kaute  o  te  Maori  i  te 
1914  piki  ake  i  te  50,000  a  inaianei  e  tata  ana  ki  te  80,000,  a  e  3 
miriona  (3,000,000)  eka  tonu  e  toe  ana. 

Tuatahi — Kia  mail  ki  to  Maoritanga,  te  reo  Maori  kia  mau, 
akona  a  koutou  tamariki  i  runga  tonu  i  nga  turi  o  o  ratou  whaea  ki 
te  reo.  Kaua  e  tukua  ki  nga  kura  ako  ai  i  te  reo.  Kia  mau  ki  nga 
tikanga  Maori,  mahi  Maori,  mahi  a  ringaringa  me  era  atu. 

Tuarua — Tukua  a  koutou  tamariki  ki  nga  kura  ki  te  ako  mai  i 
nga  matauranga  katoa  o  te  Pakeha  a  kia  mau  ki  te  Maoritanga, 
ahakoa  pehea  to  haere  tahi  i  te  pakeha  e  kore  koe  e  kiia  he  pakeha. 

Tuatoru — ko  te  tono  ki  te  Kawanatanga  kia  riteriie  te  Maori  ki 
te  Pakeha  i  roto  i  nga  turanga  whakahaere  mahi,  ara  (equality  of 
opportunities)  i  te  mea  e  pehia  ana  te  Maori  ki  raro  ano  i  te  Pakeha. 

Tuawha — Me  tono  ki  te  Kawanatanga  ko  tana  hoko  whenua  mo 
te  Pakeha  me  ahu  mai  ano  mo  te  Maori,  tena  rawa  ia  i  te  mea  kua 
haere  nei  a  tatou  tamariki  ki  te  awhina  i  roto  i  te  pakanga  nei.  Te 
take  mutunga  hei  maimai  mini  kia  koe  e  hoa  kia  inoi  te  iwi  mo 
a  tatou  tamariki  i  te  pakanga. 

— Tokc  Watene. 

RIPOATA  HUI  PARIHA 

la  Noema  te  23  me  te  24  o  nga  ra  ka  tu  te  Hui  Pariha  o  Hau- 
raki  i  te  Wairoa,  Tauranga.  He  tino  kaha  nga  tangata  whenua  ki  te 
manaaki,  ara  nga  mea  i  eke  mai  o  Whatawhata,  Mangere,  Akarana  me 
Hauraki.  I  te  mea  ko  tenei  te  Hui  Pariha  tuatahi  i  muri  iho  o  te 
hokinga  atu  o  nga  kaumatua  he  nui  nga  mi  hi  ki  te  iwi  mo  tenei  Hui 
Pariha  pai. 

I  te  po  o  te  haterei  ka  timata  te  Hui  i  raro  o  te  whakahaere  o  te 
Paraimere,  na  Marjorie  Bryan  i  whakahaere.  He  tino  pai  nga 
waiata,  poi  me  nga  haka  a  nga  tamariki,  a  i  muri  iho  na  Hohepa 
Kohu  o  te  ropu  Miutara  i  whakahaere.  lie  nui  nga  mea  pai  o  tenei 
karakia.  Ko  le  purei  he  mea  whakataetae  na  teiahi  tangata  ko 
"Nicotine"  ki  tethi  atu  ko  "Alcohol"  mo  runga  i  te  ahua  o  ta  raua 
whakamate  i  te  tangata  i  te  nui  o  te  paihana  i  roto  ia  raua. 

Nga  karakia  o  te  Ratapu  i  timta  lie  "kura  rongopai"  me  nga  patai 
me  nga  whakahoki.  I  te  8  o  nga  haora  ka.  hui  te  Tohungatanga  me 
te  llui  Atawhai.  I  korerotia  nga  mahi  a  nga  apiha  o  te  Tohunga- 
tanga me  etahi  patai  e  pa  ana  mo  ana  main.  ko  te  korero  a  te 
Timuaki  Mihana,  kia  kaua  e  pehia  e  te  Tohungatanga  nga  mahi  a  te 

Miii    Atawhai    no    te    mea    he    ropU    whakahaere   ano    ta    nga    wahine. 


508  TE  KARERE  Hanucre,  1(M1 

Te  karakia  Kura  Hapati  i  timata  i  te  hapahi  o  te  10.  Na  te  koea  o 
Huria  i  raro  i  te  whakahaere  o  Roy  Matthews  i  waiata  te  nuinga  o 
nga  himene,  a  na  Oriwa  Omipi  i  whakahaere  te  karakia.  1  timata 
te  karakia  kauwhau  i  te  2,  na  Timuaki  Toke  Watene  o  Hauraki  i 
whakahaere.  T  tautokona  i  tenei  karakia,  Ilui  hoki,  te  Timuaki 
Mihana  me  ana  kaiawhina  katoa  me  te  hoatu  hoki  i  nga  ingoa  lion  mo 
nga  turanga  i  mahue  iho  i  nga  kaumatua,  a  Ilori  Watene  hei  teputi 
hekeretari  mo  te  Mihana,  a  Kelly  Harris  me  Hohepa  M.  Meha  hei 
Etita  mo  "Te  Karere."  Ko  nga  kai  korero  mo  tenei  Hui  e  whai 
ake  nei — Tangatai  Teito,  Timuaki  o  Mangere,  nga  Te  Hira 
(brothers)  o  Waikato,  Hare  Piahana,  Sister  Kewene,  Eru  Nikorima 
me  te  Timuaki,  a  Matin  Kauri.  Te  karakia  mutunga  na  te  Ilui  Ata- 
whai  i  timata  i  raro  o  te  whaka.haere  a  Sister  Rosie  Watene  a  na 
Hori  Watene  i  whaka  haere  te  waahi  mo  te  Tohungatanga. 

Na  Rosie  Wat  cue. 

HE  PANUITANGA 

Ka  tu  he  hui  Tohungatanga  me  he  Hui  Atawhai  me  nga  Timua- 
ki tanga  o  nga  ropu  awhina  o  te  Takiwa  o  Hauraki  ki  HUKIA,  Tau- 
ranga  a  te  26  o  Hanuere  1941.  Kua  tae  tenei  ki  te  mutunga  o  te 
Tan  1940.  Tenei  ra  matou  ka  tuku  atu  i  ta  matou  mihi  ki  nga 
Hunga  Tapu  katoa  o  te  Takiwa  me  nga  Apiha  whakahaere  o  nga 
ropu  awhina  ia  matou  i  mama  ai  nga  mahi  o  te  Takiwa.  Ma  te 
Atua  koutou  katoa  e  manaaki,  kia  kaha,  kia  ora  hoki  i  roto  i  te 
Tau  1941.  Waiho  enei  take  hei  whakamaunga  ma  te  whakaaro,  i 
roto  i  te  tau  hou. — "Te  inoi  i  te  ata  i  te  ahiahi,  te  kupu  o  te  matau- 
ranga,  te  kohi  ohaoha  o  nga  wiki  nohopuku,  whakatekau,  me  nga  mahi 
i  o  tatou  whakapapa,  a  ko  tenei  hei  kupu  pepeha  ma  tatou — 'Mahia 
te  mahi  i  te  mea  e  ao  ana,  me  ake  ko  te  po  e  kore  ai  e  taea  te  mahi.'  " 
— Hoani  9:4.  "Mo  reira  nei  hoki  me  whakapu  rawa  o  koutou  uaua 
a  honoa  iho  te  pai  ki  runga  i  to  kautori  whakapono :  ki  runga  hoki  i 
te  pai,  ko  te  matauranga  ki  runga  i  te  matauranga,  ko  te  pehi  i  te 
hiahia,  a  ki  runga  ki  te  pehi  i  te  hiahia,  ko  te  manawanui  ki  runga 
ki  te  manawanui,  ko  te  karakia  pai  ki  runga  ki  te  karakia  pai,  ko  te 
atawhai  ki  nga  teina  ki  runga  i  te  atawhai  ki  nga  teina,  ko  te  aroha 
ki  te  mea  kei  ia  koutou  enei  mea  a  e  nui  ana,  ka  meinga  koutou  kia 
kaua  e  mangere." — 2  Pita   1  :  5-8. 

Hapi  Xu  Ia  .  .  .  Na  te  Timuakitanga  o  Hauraki. 

HE  MATENGA 

Utaina  atu  ra  enei  kupu  ki  runga  ki  te  tuara  o  to  tatou  Karere 
maana  hei  waha  atu  ki  nga  marae  o  nga  motu  o  te  ao  hei  titiro  ma 
nga  iwi  i  te  matenga  o  ta  matou  tamaiti  o  Mairepuhangahau  Day- 
mond  i  te  ra  horoi,  30  o  nga  ra  o  Noema,  1940.  E  18  noahio  ona 
tau,  a  he  tamaiti  kaha  ki  te  whakarite  i  tona  karangatanga  Rikona 
o  te  Peka  o  Manaia.     He  nui  ra  te  aroha. 

— Turake  Hana,  Timuaki  Peka. 


Hanuere,   1941  TE  KARERE  509 

E  Te  Karere, 

Mau  e  panui  atu  te  matenga  o  te  kotiro  a  Robert  Miljak  raua  ko 
te  Aurere  Miljak.  No  te  ahiahi  ka  pa  mai  te  mate,  ao  ake  ka  mate 
i  te  13  o  Noema,   1940. 

Ko  tona  mate  ki  te  korero  a  te  Rata  he  niumonia.  I  mauria  mai 
e  ona  matua  kia  manaakitia  e  au  i  mua  atu  o  te  taenga  ki  te  rata. 
Otirawa  te  manaaki  ka  mauria  ki  te  rata,  heoi  e  rima  meneti  te 
taenga  ki  reira  ka  mate.  Koia  ano  enei  ko  etahi  o  nga  mate  uruta  e 
korerotia  nei. 

Ko  tona  papa  he  tino  pakeha  engari  he  mea  tuku  ano  ana  tama- 
riki  katoa  ki  roto  i  te  hahi  o  te  Hunga  Tapu.  Ko  ia  anake  kei  waho. 
He  Hunga  Tapu  ano  hoki  tona  hoa  wahine.     Kia  ora, 

*  *  *        Hirini  T.  Heremaia. 

Ki  nga  Etita  o  Te  Karere, 

E  hoa  ma  tena  korua.  Panuitia  atu  te  matenga  o  Renata 
Komene  i  te  15  o  nga  ra  o  Noema,   1940. 

Ko  tona  mate  he  mate  rereke,  ara,  i  moe,  kore  tonu  atu  i  korero. 
E  kore  e  haere.  I  etahi  taima  ka  korerotia  atu  ka  tungou,  hoi  ano 
tino  kore  e  kiki.  E  waru  nga  ra  ka  mate.  Kihai  ana  tamariki  me 
te  iwi  i  mohio  ki  ona  whakaaro.  Ka  tutuki  nga  kupu  whakaari  ka 
puta  nga  mate  uruta ;  koia  enei  ko  aua  mate  uruta. 

Ki  te  korero  a  te  rata  he  pararaiha.  He  nui  ona  iwi  i  taemai 
kia  kite  i  tona  matenga.  Ko  17  o  nga  ra  ka  nehua  atu  ia  ki  te  wahi 
tapu  o  te  wharekarakia  o  te  peka  o  Kaikohe.  Na  Hemi  Whautere 
i  whakatapu  tona  rua.     Kia  ora  ra, 

Na  Hirini  T.  Heremaia. 

No  te  25  Noema,  1940,  ka  mate  a  Keita  Kereama  (Tungane 
Kingi)  ki  te  Napier  Hospital.  E  waru  marama  ia  e  oke  ana  i  te 
taumaha  o  tona  mate.  I  whanau  ia  ki  Te  Aute  i  te  tau  1861,  he  mea 
tapa  tona  ingoa  a  Keita  e  Archdeacon  Samuel  Williams  he  ingoa  no  to 
na  tuahine  no  Kate  Williams.  Ko  tona  matua  tane  a  te  Kereama 
Hupata  ko  ia  te  tahi  o  nga  kaumatua  na  ana  i  whakanoho  a  Arch- 
deacon Samuel  Williams  ki  Te  Aute  i  wehea  ai  a  Te  Aute  College, 
Hawke's  Bay.  No  taua  takiwa  ka  whakaritea  taua  kaumatua  he 
Reimana  (Layman)  mo  te  Hahi  Ingarangi.  I  piri  pono  taua  kau- 
matua ki  te  Kawanatanga  o  Niu  Tireni  ite  whawhai  kia  Te  Kooti 
i  raro  ia  Major  Henare  Tomoana.  Ko  tona  Hapu  ko  Ngai- 
Terangikoianake,  Ngai-Tewhatiapiti,  he  wahanga  no  roto  o  Ngati- 
Kahungunu  ki  roto  o  Heretaunga,  he  uri  rangatira  no  roto  i  nga 
Hapu  i  whakahuatia  ake  nei.  He  mea  iriiri  te  kuia  nei  ki  Papawai 
takiwa  o  Wairarapa  25  Aperire  1897,  e  Elder  II.  Lee  Bradford. 
E  rima  ana  tamariki  e  rua  kua  mate  ko  nga  una  kei  te  ora  ko  Teao 
Wirihana  (hekeretari  o  te  mahi  whakapapa  o  te  Mihana),  Tareha 
Kingi,  me  Ereatara  Kingi.  I  te  wahine  kaha  ki  nga  main  o  te 
rongopai  i  roto  ite  Peka  o  Heretaunga.  Nga  karakia  whakamutunga 
me  te  whakatapu  i  tona  urupa  na  Eriata  Nopera  Timuaki  takiwa  o 
I  laki  Pei,  i  whakahaere.  He  mea  tanu  tona  tinanai  te  26  Noema  1940. 


510  TE  KARERE  Hanuere,  1941 

MAHI  KURA  HAPATI 

RATAPU  TUATAHI: 

AKORANGA  37 

Ta  Te  Tangata  Whakaaturanga.     Upoko  2. 

I  te  mea  ko  te  oranga  he  whakamutungakore  no  reira  kaore  ona 
timatanga  kaore  rawa  hoki  ona  whakamutunga,  i  tetahi  ahua  tena 
wahi  me  tena  wahi  o  te  hanganga  ake  he  timatanga  ano  tona  a  i  roto 
i  nga  tu  ahua  katoa  o  te  oranga  e  whakaaturia  na  e  tena  ropu  me  tena 
ropu  o  nga  mea  kuahanga  kaore  nei  hoki  e  taea  te  tatau  he  tuatahi  ano 
tona,  a  he  whakamutunga  hoki;  ahakoa  hoki  ko  nga  whakamutunga 
me  nga  whakaotinga  o  nga  mea  o  te  ao  (nature)  he  timatanga  atu  ano. 
No  reira,  na  to  te  tangata  matauranga  i  kite  he  mea  hei  whakaatu  hei 
whakamarama  hoki  mo  nga  tukunga  iho  i  tu  ai  te  whenua  mai  i  tona 
turanga  korekore  noa  iho  ki  tona  ahua  inaianei,  he  wahi  e  pai  ana 
hei  nohoanga  i  runga.  Otira,  na  runga  i  enei  tirohanga  ka  kitea  ko 
tenei  ao  he  wahi  titohea  i  mua.  Ko  nga  mea  hoki  e  ora  nei  i  runga 
inaianei  kaore  i  te  ora  i  runga  i  mua.  No  reira  i  runga  i  enei  whaka- 
aturanga e  ahei  ana  kia  timata  he  oranga  i  runga  i  te  whenua,  e  ahei 
ai  tenei  timatanga  ma  tetahi  hanganga,  tipunga  noa  ake  ranei,  he 
homaitanga  ranei  i  waho  atu  o  te  whenua.  Mehemea  ki  te  whakaaetia 
he  mea  homai  nga  mea  e  ora  nei  i  runga  i  te  whenua  no  tetahi  atu  ao 
tawhito  atu  i  tenei  ka  horapa  whanui  ana  kimikimi  mo  te  timatanga 
o  te  oranga ;  e  kore  hoki  e  ahei  kia  kiia  te  roohi  e  tipu  nei  i  roto  i 
ta  tatou  kaari  putiputi  i  te  mea  he  mea  tango  mai  i  tetahi  atu  roohi, 
a  koia  tera  te  timatanga  mai  o  te  roohi.  Ko  te  matauranga  o  te 
tangata  e  mea  ana  he  timatanga  o  nga  mea  kei  runga  i  te  wrhenua  a  he 
wa  mutunga  mo  te  whenua  i  roto  i  nga  mea  e  tupu  haere  nei ;  a  ki  te 
pera  te  whenua  ka  pera  atu  ano  hoki  era  atu  tinana  penei  i  raro 
i  te  rangi.  Te  mutunga  kore  o  te  oranga  kaore  i  konei  ake  i  te  mutunga 
kore  o  te  huringa  o  te  ahua  o  ia  mea  no  te  mea  ia  ahua  he  timatanga 
he  whakamutunga  e  whakaatu  katoa  ana  i  te  Kai-whakahaere  mau  tonu. 

Te  putake  o  nga  mea  kua  hanga,  te  timatanga  o  te  ao  kua  topu 
he  pakeke  rawa  te  whakamarama  i  tona  ake  kaha  ki  te  whakawhiti  i 
tona  ahua  e  mohiotia  atu  nei  te  hua  noa  ake  ranei  o  te  whakamahi 
ona  mea. 
Nga  Patai: 

1.  He  aha  i  noho  ai  te  timatanga  me  te  whakaotinga  o  nga  mea 
o  te  ao,  hei  timatanga  mo  tetahi  atu  mea? 

2.  He  pehea  te  ahua  o  tenei  ao  i  mua  atu  i  te  nohoanga  e  te 
tangata? 

3.  Pehea  nga  mea  e  ora  nei  i  runga  i  mua  atu? 

4.  Me  pehea  e  ahei  ai  he  timatanga  mo  te  whenua  i  te  mea  kaore 
he   oranga  i  runga  i  te  tuatahi? 

5.  Te  roohi  i  tupu  ake  he  mea  whawhati  mai  na  tatou  i  tetahi  atu 
roohi  e  ahei  ana  ranei  kia  kiia  ko  ia  tera  te  timatanga  mai  o 
tenei  mea   o  te   roohi? 

RATAPU  TUARUA 

AKORANGA  38 

Te  Atua  me  te  Tokoturu  Tapu.     Upoko  2. 

E  kore  e  taea  e  te  tangata  ake  i  roto  i  ana  wananga  te  whakaatu 
pono  mo  te  mohiotanga  ki  te  Atua  i  te  mea  e  he  noa  ana  ia  i  roto  i  nga 
mea  ngawari  ake;  otira  te  whakamahinga  i  tana  wananga  hei  awhina 
iaia  i  roto  i  ana  rapurapunga  hei  whakakaha  hei  whakapuman  hoki 
i  te  mohiotanga  e  tupu  nei  i  roto  i  aia  mo  tona  Kai-hanga.  "E  ki  ana 
te  kuare  i  roto  i  tona  ngakau  kaore  he  Atua"  I  roto  i  tenei  rarangi 
korero  pera  ano  i  era  rarangi  karaipiture,  ko  te  kuare  he  tangata  tutu, 
tona  matauranga  kua  kauparengia  e  ana  mahi  he  riro  mai  ana  ko  te 


Hanuere,   1941  TE  KARERE  511 

pouri  hakere,  kaore  hoki  he  maramatanga  ki  tona  hinengaro,  kua  riro 
te  mohiotanga  i  te  kore  mohio.  Na  tenei  ahua  ka  he  haere  te  hine- 
ngaro kua  kore  e  ahei  te  hapai  ake  i  nga  mea  tautoko  i  roto  i  nga  mea 

0  te  (nature).  Te  tangata  totohe  tonu  kia  hara  ia  ka  tupu  haere  te 
turi  ki  te  reo  o  te  mohio  e  tupu  nei  i  roto  i  aia  me  te  whiriwhiri 
marama  i  roto  i  nga  mea  tapu,  na  konei  ka  makere  atu  i  aia  te  wahi 
hei  kohimuhimu  atu  ki  tona  Kai-hanga,  a  na  konei  ka  tino  kaupareatu 
e  ia  te  tino  huarahi  e  whiwhi  a  tinana  ai  ia  ki  te  mohiotanga  ki  te 
Atua. 

Nga    Patai: 

1.  He  aha  i  kore  ai  e  tino  taea  e  te  tangata  ake  te  whakaatu  pono 
mo  te  Atua? 

2.  Pehea  ta  te  kuare  korero  mo  te  Atua? 

3.  He    aha   te    tangata   kuare,    pehea   hoki   te    ahua   mo    taua   tu 
tangata? 

4.  Na  te  aha  i  kore  ai  e  whiwhi  a  tinana  ia  ki  te  mohiotanga  ki  te 
Atua? 

RATAPU  TUATORU 

AKORANGA  39 

Te  whakakitenga  e  whakawhiwhi  ana  i  te  tangata  i  te  mohiotanga 
tuturu  mo  te  Atua. 
He  maha  nga  whakaaturanga  karaipiture  ara  o  Ihowa,  e  whaka- 
mohio  ana  i  aia  ki  ona  poropiti  i  nga  wa  o  mua  tae  mai  hoki  ki  nga 
wa  o  muri  mai.  Kua  kitea  iho  e  tatou,  hei  kaupapa  mo  nga  kupu  maha 
tuku  iho  o  nehe,  e  pa  nei  ki  te  oranga  me  te  tangatatanga  o  te  Atua, 
ko  nga  whakakitenga  a  te  Atua  i  aia  ano  kia  Arama  me  era  atu 
peteriaka  o  mua  atu  o  te  waipuke;  tuku  iho  hoki  kia  Noa,  kia  Apera- 
haraa,  kia  Ihaka,  kia  Hakopa  tae  noa  kia  Mohi.  Hei  tauira  tera  he 
whakaaturanga  poto  kei  a  Kenehi  mo  Enoka  te  matua  o  Metuhera; 
mo  ona  kua  korero  ra  tatou  i  tona  whakaaturanga  i  haere  tahi  ia  me 
te  Atua;  a  tera  atu  ano  i  tino  whakaatu  marama  mai  te  Atua  i  aia 
ano  ki  tenei  poropiti  tika,  me  te  whakakite  mai  ki  aia  nga  mea  e 
tupono  tae  noa  mai  ki  te  wa  i  whakaritea  ai  a  te  Karaiti  ki  tana 
mihana  i  roto  i  te  kikokiko,  te  tauira  o  te  whakaoranga  ma  roto  i  te 
whakahere  o  Tana  Tama  Kotahi  tae  noa  ki  nga  mea  e  whai  ake  ana  i 
enei  ki  te  whakawakanga  ra  ano. 
Nga  Patai: 

1.  He  aha  i  whakaatu  tuturu  ki  te  tangata  te  mohiotanga  ki  te 
Atua? 

2.  He  maha  ano   ranei   nga  whakaatu-ranga  karaipiture   mo   nga 
whakakitenga  a  te  Atua  i  Aia  ano  ki  te  tangata? 

3.  He   aha  hei   kaupapa  mo   nga  kupu  tuku   iho   o   nehe   e   pa  na 
ki  te  Atuatanga  me  tona  oranga? 

4.  Whakaaturia    te    whakaaturanga    mai    mo    Enoka,    a    kei    hea 
taua  whakaatu? 

RATAPU   TUAWHA 

AKORANGA  40 

Nga  whakakitenga  mai  mo  Mohi  kua  korerotia  e  tatou  i  rangona  e 
ia  te  reo  o  te  Atua.  i  korero  mai  ki  aia  i  waenganui  o  te  ngahere  e 
mura  ana  i  maunga  Horepi,  e  mea  mai  ana  "Ko  Ahau  te  Atua  o  to 
matua,  te  Atua  o  Aperahama,  te  Atua  o  [haka  me  te  Atua  o  Hakopa." 

1  hunaia  e  Mohi  tona  inata;  u<>  to  mea  i  wohi  ia  ki  to  titiro  atu  ki  to 
Atua.  Kia  Mohi  me  Iharaira  e  huihui  ana,  ka  puta  mai  te  Atua 
i  roto  i  te  kapua  i  runga  hoki  i  te  haruru  whakawehi,  te  whatitiri 
me  te  uira  i  Hinai.  "Kia  penei  tan  kupu  ki  nga  tama  a  iharaira,  ka 
kite  koutou  kua  korero  ahau   i  te  rangi   kia  koutou."     E   mea   ana   i 


512  TE  KARERE  Hanuere,  1941 

tetahi  whakaaturanga  o  muri  mai  "Na  ka  piki  ake  a  Mohi  ratou  ko 
Arona,  ko  Natapa,  ko  Apihu  me  nga  kaumatua  e  whitu  tekau  o  Iha- 
raira.  Na  ka  kite  i  te  Atua  o  Iharaira,  kei  raro  ano  i  ona  waewae 
me  te  mea  ko  te  hapira  i  hanga  hei  whariki  he  rite  tonu  ano  ki  te 
tino  rangi  te  marama. 

Nga    Patai: 

1.  Kei  hea  te  whakaaturanga  mo  te  korerotanga  mai  o  te  Atua 
kia  Mohi  i  maunga  Horepi? 

2.  He  aha  te  korero  mai  kia  Mohi  a  he  aha  hoki  a  Mohi  i  huna 
ai  i  tona  mata? 

3.  Pehea   te    ahua   o   te   whakaputanga   kia    Mohi    me    Iharaira   e 
huihui  ana? 

4.  Pehea  te  whakakitenga  kia  Mohi  me  nga  kaumatua  o  Iharaira? 

HE  POWHIRI  HUI  PARIHA 

Ki  nga  iwi,  ki  nga  reo  ki  nga  huinga  tangata ;  He  panui  atu 
tenei  kia  tae  a  tinana  mai  ki  ta  tatau  Hui  Pariha  ka  tu  ki  Porirua, 
takiwa  o  Wairarapa  me  Manawatu  i  te  25  me  te  26  o  nga  ra  o 
Hanuere,  1941.     Haere  Mai.     Haere  Mai. 

Na  to  koutou  pononga, 
Timuaki    Takiwa. 
Eruera  Taurau. 
*  *  * 

Some  people  mistake  license  for  liberty.  The  freest  man  is  he 
who  walks  with  a  still  and  quiet  conscience.  Happy  is  the  man  who 
walks  humbly  with  his  God  with  a  daily  testimony  that  he  is  pleasing 
the  Almighty.  This  is  the  man  who  enjoys  the  sweetest  and  most 
lasting  liberty. — Elder  Charles  A.  Callis. 


Our  mission  is  to  every  nation,  kindred,  tongue  and  people,  no 
matter  what  their  faith  or  nationality.  Our  mission  is  unique.  We 
recognise  no  competitors  and  yet  we  recognize  men  doing  good  in 
all  churches,  insomuch  as  they  teach  men  to  honour  Christ,  to  be- 
lieve in  God  and  attempt  to  live  up  to  some  at  least  of  the  teachings 
of  the  Master. — Elder  Melvin  J.  Ballard. 


The  prime,  indeed  the  sole,  responsibility  for  starting  a  child 
along  the  right  way,  rests  upon  the  parents.  This  responsibility  is 
the  inescapable  result  of  bringing  children  into  the  world.  It  cannot 
go  unheeded,  nor  can  it  be  cast  off  or  shifted  to  another.  It  is  a  re- 
sponsibility that  comes  by  divine  decree. — Pres.  J.  Reuben  Clark,  Jr. 


If  we  would  succeed  in  developing  true  leadership  within  our 
own  groups,  then  let  us  remember  that  the  first  essential  is  to  follow 
willingly  the  advice  and  counsel  of  those  who  preside  over  the  Church. 
— Elder  Samuel  O.  Bennion. 


Hanuere,   1941 


TE  KARERE 


513 


3\ews  from    the    Cfield 


NGAPUHI 

Reported    by    Patrick    Wi    Hongi, 

and  Lois  Going 

A  very  successful  Hui  Peka  was  held 
at  Awarua  from  November  30  to  Decem- 
ber 1st,  1940.  Much  credit  is  due  the 
young  people  who  were  responsible  for  the 
direction  of  the  marae  activities,  especi- 
ally Koni  Tari  and  his  co-workers.  The 
auxiliary  organizations  each  presented 
their  messages,  and  throughout  them  all 
the  spirit  of  the  Gospel  permeated.  Presi- 
dent Cowley  presided  at  all  meetings  and 
with  him  were  Sister  Cowley  and  Bro. 
George  Watene,  Mission  Secretary.  The 
Genealogical  Presidency  of  the  district 
were  very  busy  with  the  many  visitors, 
who  were  shown  the  new  office  of  the 
Society  and  had  many  questions  explained 
to  the  inquirers.  Through  the  generosity 
of  Bro.  William  Mannering,  numerous 
volumes  of  the  Polynesian  Society  Journal 
are   available   to    the    Society. 

The  reorganization  of  the  Tautoro 
Branch  occurred  October  27th,  1940, 
where  both  Presidents  Hohepa  Heperi  and 
Henare  Pere  Wi  Hongi  attended.  The 
occasion  was  a  Hui  Peka,  which  com- 
menced with  a  Primary  programme,  with 
the  M.I.A.  following.  The  Sunday  meet- 
ings began  at  6  in  the  morning,  and  at 
9  o'clock  Priesthood,  with  the  Sunday 
School  at  10.30.  The  Genealogical  meet- 
ing commenced  at  12.30  and  the  General 
Session  at  2  o'clock,  which  ended  in  the 
evening  with  the  Relief  Society  and 
Priesthood.  A  worthwhile  contribution  to 
the  success  of  the  Hui  were  the  render- 
ings of  the  choir  under  the  leadership 
of  Bro.  Rangi  Wharemate,  particularly  so 
when  the  majority  of  the  members  were 
non-Mormons.  This  same  choir  were  in- 
vited to  attend  the  Church  of  England 
Conference  which  was  to  be  held  at  Kai- 
kohe. 

The  newly-organized  personnel  of  the 
branch  are: — Branch  Presidency:  Rangi 
Pere  Wharemate,  President;  Tuhiwai 
Wharemate,  First  Counsellor;  Hone  Wa- 
hapu,  Second  Counsellor;  Matekino  Pere 
Wharemate  Secretary.  Sunday  School: 
Aperahama  Pere  Wharemate,  Hone  Ka- 
nuta,  Rangi  Whaikawa  and  Wiremu  Te- 
whata.  Relief  Society:  Tewakeroa  Whare- 
mate, Henrietta  McOnie,  Ngarangikahui 
Wharemate  and  Heeni  Wharemate. 
Y. M.M.I. A.:  Matekino  Pere  Wharemate, 
Tame  Tai  Rakena,  Petu  Tuhiwai  and 
Teaorewa  Whaikawa.  Y.W.M  I. A.:  Tewa- 
keroa Wharemate,  Rehuwairua  Hawea, 
Ngarangikahui     Wharemate     and     Ngairo 

Komene.  Primary:      Maud      Wha  renin  I  e, 

Nj-rairo      Komem,      Heeni      Wharemate     ami 
Rehuwairua   Hawea. 

The   Saints   and    friends    of    the    Takahi- 
wai     Branch    have    contributed    approxi- 
mately   £30    to    the    Patriotic    Fund    and 
have   sent   parcels,    12    in    number, 
forces  overseas.    A   lett<  •  of  appreciation 

was   received   from    Egypt,   from    Driver    W. 

Robertson,    formerly    of   Christchurch. 

Ani  Pirihi,  daughter  el  Mr  and  Mrs. 
Friday    Pirihi,    is    at    present    sitting    tor 


her  school  teacher's  certificate,  and  all 
her   friends    wish   her   the   best. 

The  Whangarei  Branch  is  carrying  on 
its  meetings  with  Bro.  R.  H.  Osborne 
as  leader.  The  Sunday  School  and  Cot- 
tage meetings  are  held  weekly.  A  visit 
by  Bro.  and  Sister  Ray  Going  was  en- 
joyed by  all.  The  Primary,  under  the 
leadership  of  Sister  G.  A.  Jones,  had  a 
"Bring  and  Buy"  afternoon  party,  and 
the    children    responded    very    happily. 

Reported   by   Kate   Ngakuru. 

During  the  past  two  months  Brother 
Hohepa  Heperi  has  been  kept  busy  visit- 
ing the  different  branches  and  reorganiz- 
ing them.  Many  changes  have  been  made 
with  the  aim  in  view  of  making  year 
1941  a  bigger  and  better  one  as  far  as 
this  part  of  the  vineyard  is  concerned. 
Brother  Katuhi  Ngakuru  is  visiting  vari- 
ous branches  in  the  Whangarei  district 
and  then  up  to  the  far  north  on  Gene- 
alogy Research  work. 

To  our  gain  and  to  swell  our  numbers, 
the  Kaikohe  Branch  welcomes  Sister  Pare 
Ngakuru  of  Waimamaku.  We  can  use 
you,  Sister  Pare,  so  be  like  the  boy  scout 
and   "be  prepared." 

The  Elders  mail  box  in  Kaikohe  has  not 
been  claimed,  as  yet,  by  anyone.  The 
Postmaster  misses  the  Elders'  smiling 
faces  as  well  as  their  "iron  horses" 
pushed  up  against  the  fence.  He  also 
enquires  if  the  Elders  have  all  reached 
home    safely. 

AUCKLAND  DISTRICT 
Reported  by  Rona  V.  Attenborough 

The  Auckland  Branch  M.I.A.  closed 
for  the  year,  with  a  fanfare  of  trumpets 
— so  to  speak — on  Tuesday,  November  26. 
Present  were  some  very  distinguished 
people,  and  Bro.  William  O.  Brosnan  (I 
don't  know  what  the  "O"  stands  for), 
who  by  the  way  was  in  charge  of  the 
very    classical    programme. 

Bro.  William  R.  Perrott  has  been 
called  to  the  office  of  District  President 
for  the  Auckland  District  —  good  for 
Auckland. 

A  new  personality  has  been  presenting 
itself  on  Queen  Street  of  late,  and  it  is 
no  less  than  the  youngesl  edition  of  the 
Cowley  household,  in  effect.  Master  Ton\  . 
He  stands,  and  with  one  hand  on  the 
Signboard  on  the  front  lawn  (just  to  add 
a  little  dignity  to  the  occasion)  inspects 
all  and  sundry  who  come  and  go.  and 
after      silently      "O-kayinr"      the      lot.      he 

pass,  a  on  probably  to  see  what  pos- 
sibilities   tin-    kitchen    holds.     You    can'1 

fool  this  little  man  he  knows  what 
time   it    is. 

The  "Love-bug"  has  paid  another  \i>it 

to     Auckland,     and     this     time     the     victims 

are  Bro.  [van  Reid  ami  Sister  Gladys 
Boyne,  n\1io  mi  Saturday,  December  7. 
became    Mr.    ami    Mrs.      Congratulations 

and     hest     w  [|heS 

Bro.  Hemi  Paki  i  -  still  a  pat  lent  at  t  he 

Auckland  Hospital,  and  we  rev  ret  to  re- 
port      thai       there      li:i  •      been      no      mipro\e- 

m, -nt    in    his    condit  [on. 


514 


TE  KARERE 


Hanuere,  1(M1 


We    take    off   OUT    hats    to    Bro.    Matthew 

Tarawa,    of    0n<  bunga    I  aged    1 6 

who,    last    Sunday,    baptized    two    children. 

The  first  child  Bubmitted  easily  to  the 
immersing,   but    the   Beeond   one   persisted 

in    Boating    on    top    of    the    water,    and    so 

our  youthful  baptizer  had  to  have  assist- 
ance in  order  to  fully  immerse  the  candi- 
date. However,  we  are  glad  to  reporl 
that  the  ceremony  concluded  and  the  bap- 
tisms are  now  on  record.  Kia  Kaha, 
Matthew. 

A  silent  but  steady  worker  in  Auck- 
land is  Bro.  George  Watene,  who  is  as- 
sisting President  Cowley  in  the  office.  We 
are  happy  to  have  Bro.  Watene  with  us, 
and    hope   he   will   enjoy   his    stay. 

Since  the  departure  of  the  Elders  few 
changes  have  taken  place  in  the  Mangere 
Branch.  The  activities  of  the  Priesthood 
are  now  centered  on  regular  visits  and 
"teaching"  in  the  homes  of  the  people. 
Tracts  are  distributed  by  the  brethren 
and  from  reports  to  hand  favourable 
hopes  are  brought  to  pleasant  realities. 
Brother  Taikehu  Mateono  and  his  family 
have  come  to  swell  the  membership  of 
our  branch,  and  he  with  Matthew  Tarawa 
have  been  ordained  priests  along  with 
Tema    P.    Kewene,    Jnr. 

A  Hui  Tau  Social  Committee  has  been 
organized  and  has  already  gone  into 
action.  Brother  Tema  P.  Kewene,  Snr., 
former  Branch  President,  is  the  chairman. 

Many  Saints  in  the  New  Zealand  Mis- 
sion will  be  interested  to  hear  the  com- 
ings and  goings  of  some  of  our  American 
friends  who  throughout  the  past  have 
been   very   dear   to   us. 

The  Woods  family  are  the  most  out- 
standing in  their  recent  contributions  to 
the  hirth  rate  in  the  United  States  of 
America:  Charlene  Davis  has  a  bonny 
baby  boy;  Roger  Woods  is  a  proud 
father  of  a  cute  little  daughter,  and 
v  asper  Woods  also  proudly  boasts  of  a 
blonde  beauty  (I'm  referring  to  his 
daughter) . 

Our  own  little  Janet  has  certainly  had 
a  hectic  time  since  returning  to  the 
States,  what  with  having  her  appendix 
•  d,  filling  an  important  position  as 
dental  nurse  to  Dr.  Petty  of  Ogden 
and  at  the  same  time  trying  to  keep  all 
her  beaus  happy,  she  hardly  has  time 
to  '  .  so  maybe  that  accounts  for  that 
streamlined    figure. 

Family  News. — Here's  a  line-up  that's 
hard    to    beat: 

Elder    B.    Holey    Bigler — daughter. 

Elder    Crawford — daughter. 

Elder    Wayne   Jensen — daughter. 

Elder    Cannon    Q.    Lambert — daughter. 

In  the  matrimonial  circles  we  have 
Elder  Clarence  S.  Johnston,  Elder  Richard 
Lambert,  Elder  Mark  Wheeler,  Elder  Garn 
Dastrup,  and  we  hear  that  Mr.  and  Mrs. 
Rushby  C.  Midgeley  have  just  moved  into 
their   new   home. 

We  hear  that  Elder  Barry  T.  Wride 
is  having  a  hard  time  to  decide  whether 
to   he  a  farmer  or  a  cop. 

Since  Elder  Glenn  Rudd  has  returned 
to  the  States  we  hear  the  chicken  busi- 
ness   has    picked    up    100    per    cent. 

Elder  A.  Harper  Wallace,  after  much 
meditation  and  thought,  has  decided  to 
qrive  the  prirls  a  break  and  is  now  attend- 
ing the  University  of  Utah,  where  he  is 
in  popular  demand.      Elder  Richard  Evans 


is  bo  tied   up  in  his   new  garage  thai    lie 

can't  take  time  out  to  go  to  classes 
(that's    his    story    and    he's    going    to    stick 

to       it    I. 

Well,    ta-ta,    more   news    next    time. 
That's    all.    folks! 

MAHIA 
Reported   by   Elsie  Loader 
Members    of    the   Nuhaka    Branch    have 
been    working     very    diligently    in    improv- 
ing   our    marae— the    hedges    and     lawns 

are  expertly  manicured,  with  llower-heds 
cleaned  and  newly  planted.  Several  meet- 
ings have  been  held  to  make  preparations 
for  the  coming  Hui  Tau  at  Easter.  The 
Saints  of  the  district  are  eager  to  give 
of  their  best.  We  will  he  very  happy  to 
welcome  you  all. 

Sister  Molly  Tengaio  and  Bro.  Oranoa 
Tengaio  are  inmates  of  the  Wairoa  Hos- 
pital, where  both  are  improving.  We  hope 
to   have  them   home  for  Christmas. 

Fay  Loader  has  been  set  apart  as  as- 
sistant teacher  to  the  Primary  S.S.  class, 
and  she  has  also  joined  the  staiF  of  the 
local  post  office.  We  hope  she  will  be 
very     happy    in    both    callings. 

The  District  Presidency  with  the  Re- 
lief Society  and  Primary  Hoards  have 
been  very  active  in  the  district  and  are 
happy  to  report  that  the  organizations 
are  all  working  hard.  Baptisms  were 
performed  by  Pera  Tengaio,  with  Barney 
Brown  a  convert  and  Joyce  Hapi  and 
William  Walker  as  candidates.  Brother 
Joe  Pilmer  and  his  wife  with  their  family 
returned  to  Nuhaka  from  Matewai,  Gis- 
borne,  to  spend  their  holidays  with  his 
mother,     Newa     Tuahine. 

The  Saints  of  the  Mahia  District  send 
New  Year  Greetings  to  President  Cowley, 
his  wife  and  family,  to  all  Zion  Elders  and 
the  Saints  throughout  the  Mission.  May 
the  year  1941  bring  peace  and  happiness 
to  us  all. 

At  Tahaenui,  a  double  marriage  cere- 
mony was  performed  by  Eru  Tengaio 
at  the  home  of  the  late  Wi  Smith  on 
November  3rd,  19^0.  unifing  David  Smith 
to  Ripeka  Raureti,  and  Harney  Brown  to 
Bernice    "Tusk"    Smith. 

WAIKATO 

Reported    by    Douglas    Whatu    and 
Percy  Hill 

October  and  November  have  been  two 
particularly  busy  months  for  Percy  Hill 
(Tetana  Te  Hira),  President  of  the  Dis- 
trict Genealogical  Committee,  where  he 
has  traversed  the  entire  district,  sitting 
up  boards  in  the  various  branches,  which 
are   as   follow  : — 

Aria:  James  Heperi,  Here  Tangihaere, 
Wanihi  Tangihaere  and  D.  Tangihaere  as 
Secretary  and  Mipi  Tangihaere  Assistant 
Secretary.  Address,  Mahoenui,  via  Te 
Kuiti.  Hamilton:  Tupana  R.  Te  Hira 
and  Dave  Ormsby.  Address,  Whatawhata. 
Puke  Tapu  :  Ngaha  Rotana,  Kio  Tarawhiti 
and  Ivan  Noda.  Address,  Box  24  Huntly. 
Hoeotainui :  Rei  Tuhua,  Tatana  Arona, 
Hami  Pohutuhutu  and  John  Apiti.  Ad- 
dress, Hoeotainui,  via  Ohinewai.  Puke- 
kohe  and  Wairoa:  Teawe  Whareponpra. 
Address,  Pukekohe.  Wairoa  and  Wha- 
ngape:  Henry  Marshall.  Address,  Ra- 
ngiri.  Kopuku :  Wiremu  Tauira  H.  Paki. 
Address,     Kopuku,     via     Pokeno.      Indica- 


Hanuere,   1941 


TE  KARERE 


515 


tions  are  that  this  very  important  work 
will    move    forward    in    the    Waikato. 

The  Sunday  School  District  Presidency 
have  been  going  through  their  district 
and  have  received  more  than  £6  for  the 
"Sixpenny    Fund." 

Of  interest  to  Maori  visitors  to  Hamil- 
ton and  those  who  have  sick  friends  and 
relatives  in  the  hospital,  is  the  erection 
of  a  hostel  for  their  use.  This  is  the 
culmination  of  the  tireless  efforts  of  Sis- 
ter Whatu  of  Frankton  who,  as  a  member 
of  the  Hostel  Administrative  Body,  has 
found  justifiable  cause  to  agitate  to  the 
extent  that  brought  about  the  desired 
effect. 

An  innovation  that  will  be  of  added 
interest  to  the  activities  of  the  Mata- 
kowhai  Branch  and  especially  to  the 
M.I. A.  is  the  opening  of  a  new  tennis 
court,  which  was  set  for  the  7th  Decem- 
ber, 1940.  Both  young  and  old  alike 
are  looking  forward  to  wielding  a  rac- 
quet that  day,  and  as  there  are  no  pro- 
ficient players  to  provide  an  exhibition 
it  should  be  an  interesting,  if  not  a 
mirth-provoking  day  from  the  spectators' 
viewpoint. 

Kahunumu  Nuihaere  Paki  was  bap- 
tized by  John  Paki  and  confirmed  by 
Douglas    Whatu    on    December    1st,    1940. 

A  competition  for  the  best  review  on 
past  concert  recitations  for  the  year 
1940  ending  November  24th,  was  won  by 
Myrtle  Paki,  the  prize  being  "Te  Karere" 
subscription  for  one  year,  commencing 
January,  1941.  The  competition  was  open 
to  all  and  any  not  already  "Te  Karere 
Wise"  and  was  sponsored  by  the  branch 
Sunday   School   officers. 

MANAWATU 
Reported    by    Polly    Wi    Neera 

Olive  Elkington  Hippolite,  daughter  of 
Brother  and  Sister  James  Elkington,  has 
been  transferred  from  Nelson  to  Welling- 
ton to  continue  her  training  in  the  St. 
Helen's  Hospital.  In  an  amazing  short 
time  she  has  been  able  to  adapt  herself 
to  nursing  life,  performing  her  duties 
without  trouble.  Visiting  during  her  days 
off  included  going  to  Porirua  among  rela- 
tives   and    the    Saints. 

Brothers  Tony  Walker  and  Bob  Hippo- 
lite  have  left  the  Madsen  Branch,  sail- 
ing from  the  Wellington  Harbour  for 
overseas  service.  Friends  and  relatives 
bade    them    bon-voyage    and    "Haere    ra." 

Elder  George  Katene,  Jnr.,  on  active 
service  overseas  reports  that  "The  Mor- 
mon Battalion"  have  come  in  contact 
with  the  Saints  in  London  and  attended 
several  meetings,  which  have  helped  them 
much.  Sister  Madeline  Hill,  president  of 
the  Y. W.M.I. A.  in  London,  has  taken  it 
upon  herself  to  see  that  the  boys  are 
well  cared  for  —  now,  mothers,  your 
troubles    are   over. 

WELLINGTON 
Reported  by  Alice  Scott 

June  Taylor  was  baptized  by  Elder  D. 
Curtis,  October  17th,  1940.  June  lias 
been  investigating  the  Gospel  for  the  lasl 
year,  and  it  is  wild  miirli  pleasure  and 
happiness  we  welcome  her  into  the  Wel- 
lington  Branch. 

Bro.  Charles  Billman  of  the  Auckland 
Branch  Presidency  visited  us  on  Sunday 
evening .    I  >ec<  tnber    Lst,    l  9  1 0,    and    grave 

interest  inc.         thOUghtfl        and        ene.  mi  i  a  r  i  nr 


words  to  the  Saints.  Visits  like  these 
are  really  appreciated,  and  we  look  for- 
ward to  them  with  great  interest.  Church 
and  Cottage  meetings  are  carried  on  with 
the  same  amount  of  enthusiasm  and 
success. 

TARANAKI 

Reported    by    Zena    Stent    and 

C.    Arthur   Stinson 

Since  the  Elders  left  we  have  man- 
aged to  keep  our  regular  attendances,  and 
still  more  investigators  coming.  "Mick" 
Arthur  Stinson  seems  to  be  the  one  upon 
whom  most  of  the  work  has  fallen,  and 
with  his  previous  experience  as  Mission- 
ary in  Dunedin  things  are  doing  well. 
He  has,  however,  mentioned  something 
about  "going  grey."  Who  knows  ?  Bro. 
William  Katene  is  also  contributing  his 
portion,    which    is    very,    very    useful. 

His  daughter  Esther,  who  for  some 
time  past  has  been  making  a  name  for 
herself  in  Wellington,  returned  to  us  on 
Sunday,  December  lst.  1940,  to  bid  fare- 
well to  her  friends  and  relatives  before 
leaving  for  Sydney,  where  she  endeavours 
to  climb  higher.  We  sincerely  wish  Esther 
the  best  there   is. 

POVERTY    BAY. 

Reported    by    Bros.    Tipi    Kopu   and 

Hixon   Hamon. 

Funeral  services  were  held  on  Novem- 
ber 30  for  Lily  White,  17-year-old  daugh- 
ter of  Brother  Pat  White  of  Tokomaru 
Bay.  The  funeral  service  was  conducted 
by  Brother  Kopua  as  was  also  the  dedi- 
cation of  the  grave.  Lily  had  been  a 
student  at  Hukarere  School,  Napier, 
whence  she  was  taken  to  the  Napier  Hos- 
pital. Her  body  was  brought  back  to 
Tokomaru  by  Brother  and  Sister  Sid 
Crawford  of  Korongata.  Our  apprecia- 
tion and  thanks  go  to  them  for  their 
kindness    and    generosity. 

HAWKE'S    BAY. 

Reported    by    Taylor    Mihaere    and 

Tuheni  Pohatu. 

We  have  large  attendances  at  our 
regular  Sunday  meetings  of  the  Te  Hauke 
Branch,  in  spite  of  the  fact  that  the 
people  are  all  away  at  the  shearing  sheds. 
They  all  return  at  the  week-end  in  order 
to   attend   to   their   church   duties. 

On  Sunday  morning,  November  17,  Sis- 
ter Makere  Tangaroa  passed  away  at  the 
Dannevirke  Public  Hospital.  A  very  im- 
pressive service  was  held  in  the  Taho- 
raiti  L.D.S.  Chapel,  Brother  Whati  Mi- 
haere conducting.  Sister  Makere  is  sur- 
vived by  her  husband  Winae  and  five 
children.  Sister  Makere  is  well  known 
throughout  this  mission  and  was  a  stead- 
last  worker  in  this  branch.  The  mem- 
bers of  this  branch  who  are  no1  oul 
shearing  are  helpins  wholeheartedly  with 
the  patriotic  work.  Sgt.  Karens  of  Hast- 
itationed  at  Dannevirke  with  the 
ii. is.  Regiment.  He  is  Bergeanl  in  com- 
mand   of    the    Mami    platoon.       The 

B03   Scouts  of  this  branch  are  also  ., 

Ina    differ*  m    organ!  at  Ions    In    t  he    *\r\\  a 

for   raising   funds   for   patriotic   purp 

Brother  Tapsell  BCeha  bas  been  trans- 
ferred from  the  public  bospital  to  the 
Pukeors  Sanatorium)  where  he  is  pro- 
■  i .  in-  satisfactorily  Brol  her  x- 
PaewsJ  has  returned  home  from  Dunedin 
on   his  summer  vacal  ions. 


516  TE  KARERE  Hanuerc,  1941 


Sunday   £chool 


Hohepa    M.    Meha,    Superintendent  Eru    T.    Kupa,    Assistant   Superintendent 

James    R.    Elkington,    Assistant    Supt.  James    V.     Hasiam,    Secretary 

Lessons    compiled    by    Hohepa    M    Meha    and    Eru    T.    Kupa. 

PRELUDE 

Adapted  from  Handel, 
Slowly.  by  Edw.  P.  Kimball. 


SACRAMENT  GEM 

Prepare  our  minds  that  we  might  see 
The  beauties  of  Thy  grace ; 

Salvation  purchased  on  that  tree 
For  all  who  seek  Thy  face. 

POSTLUDE 


eres.  f 

a    i    a-i 


£_■'     uS^ 


a  r.  4  s  4  •>  I      U    ' 

CONCERT  RECITATION 

Acts,  Chapter  1,  Verse  11. 

"Ye  men  of  Galilee,  why  stand  ye  gazing  up  into  heaven?  This 
same  Jesus,  which  is  taken  from  you  into  heaven,  shall  so  come 
in  like  manner  as  ye  have  seen  him  go  into  heaven." 

KORERO  A  NGAKAU 

Nga  MM  a  nga  Apotoro,  te  TaJii  o  nga  Upoko,  te  tekau  ma  tahi 
o  nga  rarangi. 
"E  mea  ana,  E  nga  tangata  o  Kariri,  he  aha  ta  koutou  e  tu,  e 
matakitaki  atu  na  ki  te  rangi?  ko  tena  Ihu  kua  tangohia  atu  na  i  a 
koutou  ki  te  rangi,  ka  pera  ano  tona  haerenga  mai  me  ia  i  tirohia 
atu  na  e  koutou  e  haere  ana  ki  te  rangi." 


Hanuere,   1941 


TE  KARERE 


517 


SINGING  PRACTICE 

No.  171.   "Accept  the  Tribute  of  Our  Hearts" 

KAI  WHAKAHAERE  O  NGA  HIMENE 

"Kurangia  Ou  Mahara" 

Please  Note. — For  the  month  of  January  Superintendents  of 
the  Branch  Sunday  Schools  choose  your  own  subjects  for  the  Two- 
and-a-half  Minute  Talks  and  make  your  assignments.  The  subjects 
need  not  be  doctrinal  or  scriptural,  so  long  as  they  contain  a  lesson 
or  a  moral. 

STATISTICS. 


BIRTHS. 

WIHONGI — To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Te  Ahu 
Wihongi,  a  son,  November  13,  at  Kaikohe. 

SOLOMON — To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Rutene 
Solomon,  a  daughter,  July  15,  1940,  at 
Hastings. 

ROHE — To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Whaingakau 
Rohe.  a  daughter,  August  1,  1940,  at 
Pukehou. 

MATAIRA — To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Ratu 
Mataira  of  Nuhaka,  a  son,  February  12th, 
1940. 

MATENGA — To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Karepa 
Matenga  of  Nuhaka,  a  daughter,  Septem- 
ber  20th,    1940. 

WINIANA — To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Winiana 
(Joseph)  of  Nuhaka,  a  son,  August  4th, 
1940. 

WINIANA— To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  William 
Winiana  of  Nuhaka,  a  son,  April  5,   1940. 

PEAKMAN— To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  James 
Peakman  of  Wairoa,  a  son,  September 
9th,    1940. 

HARMER — To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Noema 
Harmer  of  Hastings,  a  daughter,  October 
28th,    1940. 

RAKENA— To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Tame  Tai 
Rakena,    a    daughter,    August    28th,    1940. 

KOMENE— To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Pereha- 
tara    Komene,    a    son,    July    13th,    1940. 

PAREKURA— To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Erueti 
Parekura,  a  daughter,  September  15th, 
1940. 

TE  NAMU — To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Te  Kapo 
Te  Namu,   a  daughter,   August  4th,   1940. 

KANUTA— To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Hone 
Kanuta,   a   son. 

APITI — To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  John  Apiti, 
Hoeotainui,    a    son,    October    18th,     1940. 

TITO— To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Kepa  Tito, 
Hoeotainui,  a  daughter,   August  31,   1940. 

RYAN — To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  John  Ryan, 
Tahuna,   a   son,   November   14th,    1940. 

ONEHI — To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Tahi  Onehi, 
Parawera,  a  daughter,  October  30th,  1940. 

DEATHS. 

MILJACK — Claire  Hazel  Miljack,  B 
months,    November    18,    1940,    at    Kaikohe. 

KOMENE  -Renata  Komene,  58,  No- 
vember   15,    1940,    at    Kaikohe. 

MOON  Kahi  Moo...  November  29th. 
1940. 

SMITH  Ariria  Smith  al  YVairoa  Hospi- 
tal,   October    13th,    1940. 

HAPUKU  Oriwia  Hapuku,  B6,  Octo- 
l.cr    21st,    at    Napier 


ERUETI — Tiaina,  Mereana  Erueti,  51, 
October    23rd,    at    Waipukurau. 

TE  HIRA — Parewhakarongotai  Te  Hira 
at   Aramiro,   September   29th. 

MARRIAGES 

SMITH— RAURETI  —  David  Smith  to 
Ripeka  Raureti  at  Tahaenui,  November 
2nd,    1940. 

BROWN— SMITH  —  Barney  Brown  to 
Bernice  Smith  at  Tahaenui,  November 
2nd,    1940. 

REID— BOYNE  —  Ivan  P.  Reid  to 
Gladys  Boyne  at  L.D.S.  Chapel,  Auck- 
land,   December   7th,    1940. 

CURTIS — BAKER  —  Patumona  Curtis 
to  Merehana  Baker,  November  23,  1940, 
at   Hastings,   by    Elder   Te  Ao    Wirihana. 

BAPTISMS. 

ASPINALL — Micky  Aspinall,  8,  of 
Tokomaru  Bay,  was  baptized  by  Elder 
Phil    Aspinall. 

HAWKINS  —  David  Tamati  Hawkins, 
29,  of  Mohaka,  by  Elder  Robert  L.  Card- 
well. 

TIMU— Ropata  Timu,  13,  of  Te  Hauke, 
by  Tamanohorakau  Timu. 

TIMU— Noel  Timu,  12,  of  Te  Hauke, 
by    Tamanohorakau    Timu. 

TIMU — Rex  Timu,  10,  of  Te  Hauke, 
by    Tamanohorakau    Timu. 

TIMU — Wiripina  Timu,  9,  of  Te  Hauke, 
by    Tamanohorakau    Timu. 

CAMPBELL — Faith  Arohanui  Camp- 
bell of  Opoutama,  October  13th,  by  Ruka 
Rarere. 

WALKER— William  Parker  Walker  of 
Nuhaka,  November  3rd.  by   Pera  Tengaio. 

BROWN — Barney  Brown.  November 
3rd,    by    Pera   Tengaio. 

HAPI — Joyce  Hapi  of  Nuhaka.  Novem- 
ber  3rd,   by    r*  r;i   Tengaio. 

IHAIA  -Adelaide  ("Bubbles")  Hams 
H.a.a  of  Nuhaka  and  T«  Hauke,  October 
1st.    by    Benjamin    Christy. 

RANGIAWHA  Ta  Ropiha  Niho  Rangi- 
awha    by  Tupana  Te  Hira. 

ORMSBY  Bfanawarewa  Dave  Ormaby, 
by    Dave  Ormaby. 

ORMSBY  Tipiwhenua  Dava  Ormaby, 
by   Dava  Ormaby. 

JONES  Valerie  M.  M.  Jonei  of  wh.i- 
ngarei,  bj  Bldi  r  Clyda  B.  Jonea,  October 
6th,    1940. 


518 


TE  K  KRERE 


Hanuere,  1941 


THE  EASTERN   ORTHODOX  CHURCH 

(Second  Instalment) 
By  John  T.  Georges 

ACCORDING  to  the  teaching  of  the  Eastern  Orthodox 
Church,  Jesus  Christ  the  Lord,  is  the  only  begotten  Son  of 
God,  the  King  of  kings  and  Lord  of  lords,  who  with  the 
Father  and  the  Holy  Ghost  is  glorified.  Hence  the  Church  acknow- 
ledges and  confesses  one  God  in  three  persons  glorified,  the  Father, 
the  Son  and  the  Holy  Ghost,  but  in  one  nature  and  substance,  in 
one  «lory  and  kingdom  undivided.  He  then  is  in  three  persons  one 
God,   without  beginning  and   without  end,  eternal  and  everlasting, 


uncreate,  inco  r- 
porial,  invisible,  in- 
finite, incomprehen- 
sible, alone  and 
righteous,  immut- 
able, who  h  a  s 
created  all  things 
whether  visible  or 
invisible. 

This  God,  first 
He  made  the  hea- 
venly and  invisible 
powers,  the  count- 
less multitudes  im- 
material and  bodi- 
less ministering 
spirits  of  the  ma- 
jesty of  God.  Then 
visible  world,  the 
He  created   our 


The  first  instalment 
of  this  very  interesting 
article  appeared  in  the 
Hurae  (July)  issue  of 
"Te  Karere." 

A  personal  friend  of 
President  Cowley,  the 
writer,  John  T. 
Georges  of  Salt  Lake 
City,  was  born  in  Tur- 
key of  Greek  parents. 
Specially  written  for 
"Te  Karere"  these 
articles  are  exception- 
ally interesting  and  we 
would  recommend  all 
readers  to  read  the 
first  instalment  in 
order  to  appreciate  all 
subsequent  instalments. 
— The    Editors. 


heaven    and    earth 

sea.  which  also  1  [e 
made  glorious  with 
1  i  g  h  t  and  richly 
adorned  it.  The 
heavens  with  the 
sun.  the  moon  and 
the  stars,  and  the 
earth  with  all  man- 
ners of  herbs  and 
divers  living  beasts, 
and  the  sea  in  turn 
with  all  kinds  of 
fishes.  "He  spake 
the  word  and  all 
these  were  made ; 
He  commanded  and 
they  were  created." 
Then  with  his  own 
hands     He    created 


the  man,  taking  dust  of  the  ground  and  breathed  into  his  nostrils 
the  breath  of  life,  giving  him  a  reasonable  and  intelligent  soul,  which, 
as  it  is  written,  was  made  after  the  image  and  likeness  of  God.  The 
man  made  after  the  image  of  God,  because  he  was  endowed  by  his 
creator  with  reason  and  free  will ;  after  His  likeness,  because  of 
the  likeness  of  virtue  in  its  degree  to  God.  He  endowed  the  man 
with  free  will  and  immortality  and  appointed  him  sovereign  over 
everything  upon  the  earth;  and  from  man  He  made  woman  to  he 
his  helpmate. 

Then  He  planted  a  garden  eastward  in  Eden,  full  of  delight 
and  all  heart's  ease,  and  there  He  put  the  man  whom  He  had  formed, 
and  commanded  him  to  eat  freely  of  all  the  heavenly  trees  therein, 
except  of  the  tree  of  the  knowledge  of  good  and  evil,  thus  saying : 
"In  the  day  that  ye  eat  thereof  ye  shall  surely  die." 


Hanuere,   1941  TE  KARERE  519 

But  one  of  the  angel  powers,  the  marshall  of  one  host,  though 
he  bore  in  himself  no  trace  of  natural  evil  from  his  Maker's  hand, 
but  had  been  created  for  good,  yet,  by  his  own  free  and  deliberate 
choice  turned  aside  from  good  to  evil,  and  has  stirred  up  by  mad- 
ness to  the  desire,  to  revolt  against  his  Lord  God,  as  a  consequence 
of  which  he  was  cast  out  of  his  rank  and  dignity,  and  instead  of  his 
former  blissful  glory  and  angelic  name  received  the  name  of  the 
devil  and  "Satan"  for  his  title,  for  which  offense  God  banished  him 
from  heaven  as  unworthy  of  the  glory  above.  And,  by  completely 
renouncing  the  good  and  assuming  an  evil  nature,  the  devil  had  con- 
ceived a  spite  and  evil  design  against  the  man,  whom  he  could  not 
tolerate  to  see  being  raised  to  such  an  honour  and  glory,  and  there- 
fore, he  schemed  to  oust  him  from  that  blissful  state.  To  accom- 
plish this,  he  took  the  serpent,  the  most  subtle  of  all  the  beast  of 
the  field,  for  the  workshop  of  his  own  guile,  and  through  it,  he  con- 
versed with  the  woman  and  persuaded  her  to  eat  of  that  forbidden 
tree,  which  is  in  the  midst  of  the  garden,  in  the  hope  of  becoming 
as  God,  and  through  her  he  deceived  Adam  also.  So  Adam  ate  of 
the  fruit  of  the  tree  and  for  his  disobedience  he  was  banished  by 
his  Maker  from  that  pleasant  and  resplendent  garden  and  in  lieu  of 
those  happy  and  blissful  days  that  he  and  his  wife  were  enjoying 
and  the  immortal  life  which  was  their  heritage,  they  fell  alas!  into 
this  life  of  misery  and  woe,  and  at  last  they  received  the  sentence  of 
death.  The  devil,  from  there  on  became  strong  and  boastful  for  his 
victory,  and,  as  the  race  of  man  multiplied,  he  prompted  them  in  all 
manner  of  wickedness. 

But,  God,  wishing  to  cut  short  the  growth  of  sin  brought  a 
deluge  on  the  earth  and  destroyed  every  living  soul,  with  the  excep- 
tion of  one  righteous  man  whom  He  found  in  that  generation 
and  whom  He  ordered  to  build  an  Ark  and  save  himself  and  his  wife 
and  children.  But  when  the  human  race  again  began  to  multiply, 
they  forgot  God,  and  ran  into  worse  kind  of  wickedness,  1  icing  in 
subjection  to  divers  sins  and  strange  delusions  thus  wondering  apart 
into  many  branches  of  error.  Some  of  them  deemed  that  every- 
thing they  saw  in  the  Universe  moved  by  itself  by  a  mere  chance, 
and  taught,  as  yet  some  men  they  do  to-day,  thai  there  was  no 
Providence,  since  there  was  no  master  to  govern.  Others  brought 
in  the  theory  of  fate,  and  committed  everything  to  stars  at  birth. 
Others  worshipped  many  evil  deities  subject  to  many  passions,  to 
the  end  thai  may'have  them  to  advocate  their  own  passions  and 
shameful  deeds.  They  builded  For  their  false  deities  magnificenl 
temples  and  enclosed  therein  the  dumb  figures  and  senseless  idols 
they  set  Up,  and  rendered  homage  to  them,  serving  the  creature  more 
than    the    Creator.      Some    worshipped    the    sun,    the    moon    and    the 

stars,  which  the  Almighty  God  has  placed  upon  the  firmament  to 

give   lighl    to   our   earthly    planet      things    without    soul    or    sense,    en- 


520  TE  KARERE  Hanuere,  1941 

lightened  and  sustained  by  the  providence  of  God,  and  unable  to 
accomplish  anything  of  themselves.  "And  there  was  none  that  did 
understand  and  seek  after  God." 

So  when  the  human  raee  had  sunk  once  more  to  the  depth  of 
the  new  disobedience,  misery  and  misfortune,  God,  in  his  mercy  for 
the  human  race,  did  not  suffer  his  own  handy  work  utterly  to  perish. 
By  the  good  pleasure,  therefore,  of  our  God  and  Father,  and  the  co- 
operation of  the  Holy  Ghost,  the  only  begotten  Son,  even  the  Word 
of  God,  which  is  in  the  bosom  of  the  Father,  being  ol  one  sub- 
stance with  the  Father  and  with  the  Holy  Ghost,  He  that  was  before 
all  worlds,  without  beginning,  who  was  in  the  beginning,  and  was 
with  God.  and  was  God,  was  made  perfect  man,  of  the  Holy  Ghost, 
and  of  Mary  the  Holy  Virgin  and  Mother  of  God  not  of  the  seed 
of  man,  nor  of  the  will  of  man,  but  of  Holy  Ghost  conceived  a 
perfect  God  and  a  perfect  man  with  an  intelligent  soul,  and  preserved 
undefiled,  even  after  birth,  the  virginity  of  her  that  bore  him.  He 
being  made  of  like  passions  with  ourselves  in  all  things,  yet  without 
sin,  took  our  infirmities  and  bare  our  sicknesses.  For,  since  by  sin 
death  entered  into  the  world,  need  was  that  He,  that  was  destined 
to  redeem  the  world,  should  be  without  sin. 

For  thirty  years  He  lived  among  the  men,  and  was  baptized 
in  the  Jordan  river  by  John,  a  holy  man  and  a  great  prophet,  and 
there  came  a  voice  from  heaven,  from  God  the  Father,  saying:  "This 
is  my  beloved  Son,  in  whom  I  am  well  pleased,"  and  the  Holy  Ghost 
descended  upon  him  in  the  likeness  of  a  dove. 

Soon  after  that,  Jesus  began  to  do  great  things  and  wonders, 
raising  the  dead,  giving  sight  to  the  blind,  casting  out  devils,  healing 
the  lame  and  maimed,  cleansing  lepers,  instructing  men  both  by  word 
and  deed,  and  teaching  the  way  of  virtue,  turning  men  from  destruc- 
tion and  guiding  their  feet  toward  life  eternal. 

And,  in  order  to  propagate  His  Ministry,  Jesus  chose  twelve 
disciples  whom  He  called  Apostles,  and  commanded  them  to  preach 
the  Kingdom  of  Heaven,  which  He  came  upon  to  declare,  and  to 
make  heavenly  the  men  who  are  low  and  earthly,  by  virtue  of  His 
incarnation. 

But,  because  of  envy  of  His  marvellous  and  divine  conversation 
and  endless  miracles,  the  chief  priests  and  rulers  of  the  Jews,  in 
their  madness  forgetting  all,  condemned  Him  to  death,  having  seized 
one  of  the  twelve  to  betray  Him.  And,  when  they  had  taken  Him, 
they  delivered  Him  to  the  Gentiles,  Him  that  was  the  life  of  the 
world,  for  of  His  free  will  consenting  thereto,  because  He  came 
for  our  sake  to  suffer  all  things,  that  He  might  free  us  from  suffer- 
ing. But  when  they  had  done  Him  much  despite,  at  the  last,  they 
condemned  Him  to  the  cross.  All  these  He  endured  in  the  nature 
of  that  flesh  which  He  took  from  us,  His  divine  nature  remaining 
free  of  suffering ;  for  being  of  two  natures,  the  divine  and  that  which 


Hanuere,   1941  TE  KARERE  521 

He  took  from  us,  His  human  nature  suffered,  while  His  Godhead  con- 
tinued free  from  suffering  and  death. 

So  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ  being  without  sin  was  crucified  in  the 
flesh,  for  He  did  no  sin,  neither  was  guile  found  in  his  mouth.  He 
was  not  subject  unto  death,  for  by  sin  only,  as  I  said  before,  came 
death  into  the  world.  But,  for  our  sake,  our  Lord  Jesus  suffered 
death  in  the  flesh  that  he  might  redeem  us  from  the  death.  Thenr 
He  descended  into  Hell,  and  having  harrowed  it,  he  delivered  thence 
many  souls  that  had  been  imprisoned  therein  for  ages.  He  was 
buried  and  on  the  third  day  He  rose  again,  and  by  vanquishing 
death,  He  granted  to  us  victory  over  death  and  immortality.  He 
was  seen  of  His  disciples,  and  bestowed  upon  them  peace,  and 
through  them  peace  on  the  whole  human  race. 

Forty  days  after,  He  ascended  into  heaven  and  has  taken  His 
seat  on  the  right  hand  of  the  Father.  But,  He  shall  come  again  to 
judge  the  living  and  the  dead,  and  shall  reward  every  man  accord- 
ing to  his  works.  After  His  glorious  ascension  into  heaven,  He 
sent  forth  upon  His  disciples  the  Holy  Ghost  in  likeness  of  fire,  and 
they  began  to  speak  with  other  tongues  as  the  Spirit  gave  them  utter- 
ance. And  from  thence  by  His  grace,  the  Apostles  were  scattered 
among  all  nations  and  they  began  preaching  the  true  faith,  baptizing 
them  in  the  name  of  the  Father,  and  of  the  Son  and  of  the  Holy 
Ghost,  and  teaching  them  to  observe  all  the  commandments  of  the 
Saviour. 

From  thereon,  the  Apostles  conscious  of  the  importance  of  their 
divine  mission  not  only  faithfully  discharged  that  which  was  in- 
structed of  them  to  do,  but  they  began  giving  to  others  their  divine 
power  and  priestly  authority  by  ordaining  in  the  name  of  the  Lord  and 
appointing  in  Holy  Ghost  deacons  and  presbyters,  and  in  that  man- 
ner, establishing  permanent  successors  to  their  Apostolic  diaconate. 

As  a  result  of  the  propagation  of  the  Christian  faith  the  first 
established  churches  were  that  of  Jerusalem,  Antioch,  of  Halep  and 
Damascus,  and  those  that  believed  in  the  new  faith  were  called 
Christians.  In  a  short  while,  due  to  the  rapid  dissemination  of  the 
New  Faith,  many  Christian  churches  were  established  in  almost  all 
the  Greek  territories  of  Asia  Minor,  especially  in  Thrace,  Macedonia 
and  Greece  proper.  The  most  important  of  these-  ancient  churches 
are  the  Church  of  Antioch  of  Damascus,  and  Hale])  in  Syria,  the 
Church  of  Laodicia,  of  Ceasaria,  of  Smyrna,  of  Ephesus  and  Nico- 
media  in  Asia  Minor,  the  Church  of  Byzantium  and  of  Andrinople 
in  Thrace,  and  the  Churches  of  Philippi,  Thessalonica,  Verria  in 
Macedonia,  and  the  Churches  of  Athens,  Corinth.  Crele  and  Cyprus. 

As  a  visible  fellowship,  the  Eastern  Orthodox  Church  is  a  self- 
governing  system  exercising  the  threefold  mission  of  the  Lord,  by 
preaching  of  the  gospel,  by  administering  the  Lord's  priestly  office 
through  the  performance  of  the  sacraments  and  by  governing  the 
f  (  Out i iiucd  on  tone  524) 


TE  KARERE 


Hanuere,  1(M1 


idliodat 


A  DAY  OF  WARNING 

This  is  a  day  of  warning  and  not  a  day  of  many  words,  for  I .  the  Lord, 

am  not  to  be  mocked  in  the  last  days.    (Doc.  &  Cov.  63:  $5) 

Since  the  date  upon  which  the  foregoing  statement  was 
given  in  a  revelation  through  Joseph  Smith,  the  Prophet 
(August,  1831)  many  additional  warnings  have  been  given 
to  the  people  through  Church  leaders. 

Tn  view  of  conditions  in  the  world  to-day.  it  is  well  for 
Latter-day  Saints  to  consider  seriously  the  advice  and 
admonitions  which  have  been  given,  and  to  prepare  them- 
selves against  the  time  when  the  prophecies  will  be  fulfilled. 
From  an  article  by  Elder  Joseph  Fielding  Smith  in  the 
Dcscrct  News  Church  Section,  February  10,  1940,  the  fol- 
lowing quotations  have  been  taken: 

President  Joseph  Smith  said: 

Look  to  the  Presidency  and  receive  instruction.  Every  man  who 
is  afraid,  covetous,  will  be  taken  in  a  snare.  The  time  is  soon 
coming,  when  no  man  will  have  any  peace  but  in  Zion  and  her 
stakes.  .  .  . 

These  things  are  at  our  doors.  They  will  follow  the  Saints  of 
God  from  city  to  city.  Satan  will  rage,  and  the  spirit  of  the 
devil  is  now  enraged.  I  know  not  how  soon  these  things  will 
take  place;  but  with  a  view  of  them,  shall  I  cry  peace?  No! 
I  will  lift  up  my  voice  and  testify  of  them.  How  long  you  will 
have  good  crops,  and  the  famine  be  kept  off,  I  do  not  know ; 
when  the  fig  tree  leaves,  know  then  that  summer  is  nigh  at  hand. 

President  Brigham  Young  gave  this  warning- 
Do  you  think  there  is  calamity  abroad  now  among  the  people? 
.  .  .  All  we  have  yet  heard  and  all  we  have  experienced  is 
scarcely  a  preface  to  the  sermon  that  is  going  to  be  preached. 
When  the  testimony  of  the  Elders  ceases  to  be  given,  and  the 
Lord  says  to  them,  "come  home ;  I  will  now  preach  My  own  ser- 
mons to  the  nations  of  the  earth,"  all  you  now  know  can  scarcely 
be  called  a  preface  to  the  sermon  that  will  be  preached  with  fire 
and  sword,  tempests,  earthquake,  hail,  rain,  thunders  and  light- 
nings, and  fearful  destruction. 

President  Jedediah  M.  Grant  added  this  comment: 

Consequently,  when  we  see  nation  stirred  up  against  nation,  and 
on  the  other  hand  see  other  nations  exerting  a  powerful  influence 
to  bring  about  negotiations  of  peace,  shall  we  say  they  can  bring 
it  about  ?     Do  we  expect  they  can  stay  the  outward  course  of  war  ? 


Hanuere,   1941  TE  KARERE  523 


The  Prophet  of  God  has  spoken  it  all,  and  we  expect  to  see  the 
work  go  on — and  see  all  things  fulfilled  as  the  prophets  have 
declared  by  the  spirit  of  prophecy  in  them. 

President  John  Taylor's  statement : 

Were  we  surprised  when  the  last  terrible  war  took  place  here  in 
the  United  States  ?  No !  Good  Latter-day  Saints  were  not,  for 
they  had  been  told  about  it.  Joseph  Smith  had  told  them  where 
it  would  start,  that  it  should  be  a  terrible  time  of  bloodshed  and 
that  it  should  start  in  South  Carolina.  But  I  tell  you  to-day  the 
end  is  not  yet.  You  will  see  worse  things  than  that,  for  God  will 
lay  His  hand  upon  the  nations,  and  they  will  feel  it  more  terribly 
than  ever  they  have  done  before ;  there  will  be  more  bloodshed, 
more  ruin,  more  devastation  than  ever  they  have  seen  it  before. 
Write  it  down!  You  will  see  it  come  to  pass,  it  is  only  just 
starting  in. 

President  Wilford  Woodruff,  more  recently,  said : 

I  heard  the  Prophet  Joseph  bear  his  testimony  to  these  events 
that  would  transpire  in  the  earth.  .  .  .  We  cannot  draw  a  veil 
over  the  events  that  await  this  generation.  No  man  that  is 
inspired  by  the  Spirit  and  power  of  God  can  close  his  ears,  his 
eyes,  or  his  lips  to  these  things. 

The  warnings  from  the  Lord,  Himself,  are  clear.    He  says : 

The  Lord's  scourge  shall  pass  over  by  night  and  by  day,  and  the 
report  thereof  shall  vex  all  people ;  yea,  it  shall  not  be  stayed 
until  the  Lord  come ;  for  the  indignation  of  the  Lord  is  kindled 
against   their    abominations    and   all    their   wicked   works. 

But  the  promise  has  been  made  to  Zion  and  the  pure  in 
heart,  that  they  shall  escape  if  they  "observe  to  do  all  things 
whatsoever  I  (the  Lord)  have  commanded." 

The  Doctrine  and  Covenants   (45:38-41)    reads: 

Even  so  it  shall  be  in  that  day  when  they  shall  see  all  these  things, 
then  shall  they  know  that  the  hour  is  nigh.  And  it  shall  come  to 
pass  that  he  that  feareth  Me  shall  be  looking  forth  for  the  great 
day  of  the  Lord  to  come,  even  for  the  signs  of  the  coming  of  the 
Son  of  Man.  And  they  shall  see  signs  and  wonders,  for  they  shall 
be  shown  forth  in  the  heaven  above,  and  in  the  earth  beneath. 
And   they   shall   behold  blood,   and   fire,   and  vapours  of   smoke. 

The  Bible  (St.  Luke  21  :  36)  gives  this  admonition: 

Watch  ye  therefore,  and  pray  always,  that  ye  may  b<  accounted 
worthy  to  escape  all  these  things  thai  shall  come  to  pass,  and  to 

stand  before  the   Soil  of   Man. 

All  Latter-day  Saints  should  give  heed  to  the  counsel 
of  the  servants  of  the  Lord.  We  should  prepare  ourselves 
by  observing  the  teachings  of  the  Gospel  and  the  command- 
ments of  the  Lord,  by  refraining  from  evil  practices,  by 
observing  our  prayers,  and  by  showing  brotherly  love  in  our 

dealings    With   each    other. 


524  TE  KARERE  1  lanuere,  1941 

(Continued  from  page  521) 

faithful.  In  order  to  realize  this  divine  purpose,  our  Lord  selected 
the  twelve  and  the  seventies  to  whom  He  gave  Mis  own  authority 

and  power,  and  endowed  them  with  the  power  of  the  Holv  Ghost. 
(Math.  10:  1  ;  John  6:  71  ;  Acts  2:  1.)  Thus  the  Church  has  been 
divided  into  two  classes,  the  clergy  and  the  lay — the  Hierarchy  in 
the  hroad  signification  of  the  word,  and  the  flock. 

The  existence  of  hierarchy  is  plainly  manifested  in  various 
places  of  the  Holy  Scriptures  (Heb.  5:4),  and  that  what  is  stated 
there  does  not  in  any  way  conflict  with  the  salutation  of  Peter  to  the 
Christians  (2:9)  because  he  plainly  tells  them  that  the  privileges 
enjoyed  by  the  Jewish  people  referred  to  in  the  Old  Testament  were 
simply  transferred  to  them.  We  know  from  the  Old  Testament 
that  the  chosen  people  of  God  had  its  own  priesthood — the  Aaronic 
Priesthood,  so  that  when  the  King  of  Israel  refused  to  burn  incense, 
and  those  of  the  tribe  of  Rheuben  and  Levi  disputed  the  connection 
of  the  priesthood  with  the  house  of  Aaron,  were  punished  severely 
for  their  disobedience,  the  king  was  afflicted  with  leprosy,  and  the 
others  were  swallowed  by  the  earth.  (Numbers  16:32.)  Peter  in 
his  salutation  to  the  Christians  does  not  intend  to  designate  them, 
according  to  the  orthodox  interpretation,  as  priests,  a  theory  so 
held  by  the  protestants,  neither  does  it  deny  the  existence  of  a  proper 
priesthood.  It  is  in  justification  of  this  theory  that  John  says:  "The 
anointing  that  you  received  from  him  dwells  in  you  and  you  have 
no  need  so  that  anyone  to  teach  you."  (Epist.  2:  27.)  This  admoni- 
tion, however,  does  not  imply  the  omission  of  a  teaching  priest- 
hood, but  merely  aims  to  safeguard  them.  The  existence  of  the 
priesthood  is  also  shown  by  ancient  ecclesiatical  monuments,  and 
it  is  also  evidenced  by  the  writings  of  Clement  of  Alexandria,  who, 
reprimanding  the  Corinthians  for  their  acts  of  disloyalty  to  the  faith 
and  the  Church,  he  is  accusing  them  for  having  dethroned  presbyters 
ordained  by  the  Apostles  with  the  approval  of  the  entire  Church. 
(2  Cor.  43-44.) 

This  divinely  constituted  hierarchy  is  a  special  order  founded 
by  our  Lord,  and  it  comprises  three  degrees  consecrated  by  a  proper 
service  of  the  Church  called  ordination. 

This  Bishop,  ordained  by  three  bishops,  is  the  centre  of  the 
spiritual  authority  of  the  local  church,  its  visible  head  and  the  indis- 
pensable pillar  of  the  church  in  whom  alone  resides  the  power  and 
authority  to  ordain  the  presbyters  and  the  deacons. 

The  deacons  aid  the  pastors  in  the  discharge  of  their  threefold 
office,  and  the  presbyters  since  they  receive  from  the  bishop  the 
authority  to  exercise  their  spiritual  authority  over  the  flock,  they 
administer  the  Church  by  performing  some  of  the  duues  of  the 
bishop,  save  the  ordination  and  the  consecration  of  myrr,  which  is 
exclusively  reserved  to  bishops.  The  priest,  however,  is  permitted 
to  make  use  of  the  anointing  with  myrr,  a  practice  which  differs  from 


Hanuere,   1941  TE  KARERE  525 

that  of  the  westerners.  They  are  called  priests,  because  of  the  offer- 
ing of  the  Eucharist — a  sacrifice  in  reality. 

Regarding  the  above  mentioned  three  degrees  of  hierarchy, 
there  is  an  ample  evidence  in  the  Bible.  It  is  stated  in  the  Bible  that 
the  deacons  were  selected  by  the  Apostles  and  ordained  to  that  office 
by  the  laying  of  the  hands,  and  are  mentioned  as  the  firm  ministry 
of  the  church.  (Ph.  1:1;  Tim.  3:8.  12.)  The  presbyters  are  re- 
ferred to  as  presiding  over  the  church  by  the  authoritv  of  the  Apostles. 
(Rom.  12:8;  Cor.  16:16;  Thes.  5:12;  Heb.  13:7,  17,  24.)  It  is 
stated  in  the  Acts  that  Paul  with  Barnabas,  ordaining  presbyters  in 
various  cities  (Acts  14:23)  he  sent  to  Ephesus  from  Militus  and 
called  to  him  the  elders  of  the  church  (Acts  20:17),  and  James 
likewise  commands  that  the  sick  may  be  anointed  with  oil  in  the 
name  of  the  Lord,  by  the  elders  of  the  church.  (James  5  :  14.)  From 
a  careful  and  diligent  study  of  the  New  Testament,  one  may  safely 
conclude  that  at  the  formative  period  of  the  church  the  names  elder, 
or  bishop  (presbyteros)  were  used  interchangeably.  Thus  we  find 
that  the  presbyteries  of  Ephesus  and  Philippians  1:1,  Acts  20:28 
are  called  bishops.  But  it  is  noteworthy  in  this  instance  that  the 
presbyteries  and  the  bishops  were  distinguished  from  the  Apostles, 
who,  evidently,  were  the  first  bishops  of  the  Christian  Church,  the 
successors  of  whom  were  the  laterly  ordained  Seven  Bishops.  Ac- 
cording to  the  testimony  of  a  good  authority  the  name  of  the  Apostle 
was  given  exclusively  to  the  first  founders  of  the  Christian  Church. 
John  Chrysostome  "First  Address  to  the  Philippians."  Also,  we  learn 
from  the  same  source  that  Paul  ordained  Timothy  a  bishop  and 
stationed  him  in  Crete,  and  Titus  in  Ephesus  with  the  authority  to 
ordain  priests  and  deacons  under  their  jurisdiction.  (Titus  1:5; 
Tim.  3:2-8.) 

From  the  foregoing  Biblical  facts,  and  as  a  consequence  of  the 
divine  authority  vested  upon  the  bishops,  they  are  of  equal  degree 
and  dignity  among  themselves.  But  in  the  early  days,  on  account 
of  administrative  purposes  and  territorial  jurisdictions  in  the  exercise 
of  their  authorities,  a  distinction  in  the  ranks  of  the  bishops  has 
been  made.  For  instance,  the  bishop  of  a  Metropolis  has  been  called 
Metropolitan;  but  following  the  separation  of  the  Eastern  from  the 
Western  Church,  upon  the  four  thrones  of  the  Christendom,  the 
Eastern  Orthodox  Church  has  elevated  the  four  Patriarchs,  namely, 
the  Patriarch  of  Constantinople,  of  Jerusalem,  of  Antioch  and  of 
Alexandria.  Also,  there  is  the  Autoccphalus  Orthodox  (lunch, 
which  is  governed  by  its  Holy  Synod  independently,  but  acknowledg- 
ing the  spiritual  authority  of  the  Patriarchate  of  Constantinople  in 
matters  pertaining  to  the  interpretation  of  dogmatical  questions. 
In  the  Eastern  Orthodox  Church  tin-  bishop  is  the  highest  rung  in 
the  ladder  of  Hierarchy  established  directl)  l>\  die  Lord  and  the 
Apostles.  He  is  the  highest  pastor  of  the  ehnreh  under  whose 
spiritual   authority    remain    the   clergy   and    the   laity. 


526  TE  KARERE  Hanuere,  1941 

THE  HEALTH  OF  THE  MAORI  RACE 

( Fourth  Instalment) 
By  Wi  Pere  Amaru,  A.B.,  M.A. 

(Brigham  Young  University,  U.S.A.) 

Since  the  beginning  of  the  white  man's  regime  in  New  Zealand 
our  Maori  people  have  looked  upon  the  pakeha  ways  of  life  with  pre- 
judice because  of  their  belief  in  the  superiority  of  the  old  Maori 
order  over  civilization.  In  all  probability  that  may  have  been  true 
five  or  six  generations  ago,  when  our  people  were  still  living  according 
to  the  statutes  of  the  "wharewananga."  However,  with  the  passing 
of  this  ancient  order  and  its  tohungas  had  gone  the  "mana"  and 
foundation  of  Maori  economic  and  social  life,  and  in  its  transition 
from  the  savage  to  the  civilized  life  the  race  lost  the  art  and  science 
of  good  living  and  good  health  which  was  the  lot  of  our  illustrious 
ancestors. 

Indeed  the  pakehas  introduced  disease  when  they  invaded  the 
serenity  of  our  snores,  but  the  pakehas  also  brought  the  only  possible 
means  by  which  disease  may  be  overcome — the  medical  profession. 
Now,  consider  the  statistics  quoted  in  a  previous  article  and  it  is 
obvious  that  the  rate  of  infant  mortality,  although  four  times  greater 
than  that  for  the  pakehas,  had  been  appreciably  reduced.  We  can 
help  the  medical  profession  and  the  Plunket  Society  to  rebuild  our 
race,  but  first  we  must  forget  the  prejudices  and  superstitutions  of 
the  past  and  look  forward  with  more  confidence  and  faith  in  the 
medical  science  of  to-day,  accepting  the  counsels  and  advice  of  our 
doctors  and  nurses  in  all  matters  of  health,  particularly  in  regards 
to  the  rearing  of  our  children. 

In  order  to  have  a  healthy  baby,  the  mother  must  generally 
be  healthy.  An  untreated  syphilitic  mother  will  definitely  give  birth 
to  a  syphilitic  child,  and  likewise,  a  mother  suffering  from  "con- 
sumption" will  almost  certainly  infect  her  baby  with  that  dreaded 
disease.  If  a  mother  (or  expectant  mother)  is  suspicious  of  having 
either  one  of  these  diseases,  she  should  consult  a  doctor  immediately 
and  submit  herself  to  the  treatment  prescribed,  because  both  of  these 
diseases  are  quite  curable  in  their  early  stages.  So  give  the  doctor 
a  chance  by  consulting  him  as  soon  as  any  sort  of  sickness  or  physical 
disorder  is  noticed.  The  mother  who  ignores  this  timely  advice  will 
be  guilty  of  a  grave  sin  and  crime,  because  the  child  born  to  a  diseased 
mother  is  doomed  to  an  early  death. 

A  few  Maori  mothers  still,  perhaps,  insist  on  visiting  a  "tohunga" 
instead  of  a  doctor,  but  it  must  be  remembered  that  the  "mana"  of 
our  ancestors  went  with  the  passing  of  the  "wharewananga,"  and  the 
cure  and  treatment  for  these  new  diseases  can  only  come  through  the 
hospitals  and  doctors  which  are  the  "wharewananga"  and  "tohungas" 
of  the  pakeha. 


Hanuere,   1941  TE  KARERE  527 

The  parents  of  to-day  should  submit  themselves  for  complete 
medical  examination  each  year  and  thus  be  assured  of  a  perfect 
physical  condition,  because  it  is  only  through  healthy  parents  that 
healthy  babies  may  be  born.  The  usual  fee  of  a  medical  examina- 
tion is  only  one  guinea ;  however,  this  one  guinea  seems  to  be  a 
very  sore  point  with  Maoris.  But  one  guinea  of  prevention  is  better 
than  ten  guineas  of  cure. 

The  teeth  of  the  Maori  mother  should  receive  daily  attention 
and  care.  The  condition  of  the  teeth  seriously  affects  the  health  of 
an  individual,  and  a  healthy  mouth  generally  means  a  healthy  person. 
There  are  only  two  people  in  the  whole  world  who  can  keep  your 
mouth  healthy — you  and  the  dentist.  You  brush  your  mouth  at 
least  once  a  day,  and  see  your  dentist  at  least  once  a  year. 

Taking  it  for  granted  that  the  Maori  mother  is  quite  healthy,  here 
are  a  few  rules  she  should  observe  during  pregnancy  (te  wa  o  te 
haputanga)  : — 

l.Take  proper  daily  exercise,  of  which  walking  is  perhaps  the 
best.  Not  just  walking  around  the  house,  but  taking  leisurely 
strolls  of  at  least  a  mile. 

2.  Eat  good  and  nourishing  food  with  plenty  of  green  vegetables, 
fruit,  and  cereals  (foods  made  from  wheat,  barley,  oats,  rice, 
and  corn — but  definitely  not  "kaanga  pirau"). 

3.  Drink  plenty  of  milk,  cocoa  and  water,  for  the  pregnant  mother 
requires  more  liquid  than  a  normal  person.  Avoid  tea  and 
coffee  because  of  the  harmful  alkaloids — tannin  in  tea  and 
caffeine  in  coffee. 

4.  Get  plenty  of  sleep,  remembering  to  keep  the  room  well  ven- 
tilated and  the  windows  kept  open  summer  or  winter. 

5.  Bathe  regularly,  but  with  most  of  our  Maori  homes  dependent 
on  rainwater  stored  in  tanks,  bathing  becomes  a  luxury  in 
the  summer  months  when  rain  is  so  scarce.  But  try  to  have 
at  least  a  sponge  to  cleanse  the  tiny  pores  of  the  skin. 

6.  Don't  drink  alcohol  in  any  form.  Foods  taken  into  the  body 
are  converted  into  substances  which  are  assimilated  into  the 
bloodstream  to  be  utilized  by  the  tissues  and  eventually  elimin- 
ated as  something  entirely  different  from  the  original.  But 
alcohol  enters  the  body  as  alcohol  and  goes  through  the  system 
— even  passing  into  the  child  within  the  womb — and  ultimate]} 
passes  out  of  the  body  as  alcohol. 

7.  Do  not  over-eat.  The  baby  within  the  womb  of  a  fat  mother 
is  congested  by  the  fat  of  the  abdomen.  Delivery  becomes 
difficult,  and  the  chances   for  the  baby  endangered. 

8.  Do  not  smoke,  as  the  harmful  effects  of  the  nicotine  inhaled 
by  the  mother  will  definitely  affect  the  unborn  child. 

9.  Do  not  over-work  during  confinement.  .Maori  husbands 
should  see  that  their  wives  refrain  from  doing  an}  strenuous 
work  around  the  home 


528  TE  KARERE  Hanuere,  1941 

10.  ])o  nut  fast  or  diet  unless  under  a  doctor's  supervision,  be- 
cause babe  within  the  womb  might  be  starved  or  ill-nourished. 

Most  Maori  mothers  nurse  their  own  babies,  and  this  is  indeed 
the  best  thing  to  do,  as  mother's  milk  is  nature's  food  for  the  child. 
Mothers  who  do  not  make  every  effort  to  nurse  their  babies  do 
them  a  great  wrong.  Statistics  have  shown  that  of  children  horn 
healthy  and  \vd  on  the  breast,  very  few  die  in  the  early  years  of  life. 
On  the  other  hand  children  fed  on  bottles  and  patent  foods  die  before 
they  are  a  year  old,  it  being  ascertained  that  about  ten  bottle-fed 
babies  die  to  one  that  is  breast  fed. 

When  baby  arrives,  here  are  a  few  things  to  remember  outside 
of  the  usual   routine  prompted  by  a  mother's  instinct: — 

1.  Train  the  baby  to  sleep  at  the  same  time  every  day  and  all 
night. 

2.  The  baby  should  sleep  outdoors  as  much  as  possible  summer 
and  winter,  and  when  indoors  the  windows  should  always  be 
open  and  the  baby  warmly  wrapped. 

3.  The  baby  should  be  fed  at  regular  hours.  Sometimes  when 
baby  cries  it  is  only  thirsty,  give  her  plenty  of  cool  boiled 
water  to  drink.  Don't  over- feed  baby  because  too  many  babies 
die  from  this  cause. 

4.  If  baby  is  on  a  bottle,  don't  change  her  food  every  day  of 
the  week.  Babies  sometimes  die  because  the  food  is  changed 
too  often.     Let  the  doctor  direct  any  such  changes. 

5.  Do  not  give  baby  a  "dummy,"  because  "dummies"  are  unclean. 
Thumb-sucking  is  the  same  as  sucking  a  "dummy." 

6.  Do  not  take  baby  to  the  Maori  huis  and  dances.  The  best 
place  for  baby  is  at  home. 

7 .  Keep  all  of  baby's  soiled  napkins  away  from  flies.  In  fact 
keep  flies  away  from  anything  that  belongs  to  baby. 

8.  If  baby  appears  sick  call  a  doctor  immediately.  It  is  better 
to  pay  him  ten  shillings  and  find  that  baby  is  quite  well,  than 
to  save  ten  shillings  and  risk  losing  baby. 

These  few  hints  that  I  have  listed  are  only  a  few  of  the  ones 
I  consider  most  important.  However,  don't  hesitate  to  call  your 
district  nurses  and  ask  for  advice  regarding  the  welfare  of  your 
children.  Give  your  babies  a  better  chance  of  surviving  the  first  few 
years  of  life  and  the  only  way  to  do  this  is  by  constantly  acquainting 
yourselves  with  the  problems  of  to-day,  and  learning  what  you 
can  from  books,  from  the  Women's  Institute,  from  the  Hui  Atawhai, 
and  from  the  Plunket  nurses. 

NEW  YEAR  BIRTHDAYS 

JANUARY 

Marjorie  Efne  Wilson  (23rd)  ;  Edith  Wilson  (24th)  ;  Rangi 
Wilson  (27th). 


Hanuere,  1941  TE  KARERE  529 

WHAT  TO  DO  WITH  YOUR  GENEALOGY 

By  Mark  E.  Petersen,  Deseret  News 

How  should  genealogical  data  be  compiled  and  prepared  for 
use  after  it  has  been  collected? 

Careful  consideration  must  be  given  this  question  by  every 
Latter-day  Saint,  for  unless  it  is  wisely  used,  what  doth  it  profit? 

In  preparing  our  data,  we  must  keep  in  mind  the  object  of  all 
our  work — the  salvation  of  our  dead  through  vicarious  ministration 
of  the  Gospel  ordinances  in  the  Temples  of  the  Lord. 

These  ordinances  are  to  provide  baptism  and  the  gift  of  the 
Holy  Ghost  to  the  dead ;  to  provide  the  higher  ordinances  of  the 
House  of  God,  including  the  sealing  blessings  by  which  families  are 
united  for  eternity  under  the  power  of  the  priesthood. 

Then  if  families  are  to  be  preserved  as  units  through  Gospel 
ordinances,  we  must  arrange  our  names  in  family  groups,  and  deter- 
mine accurately  the  relationship  of  every  individual  in  our  family  tree. 

Our  first  task  after  gathering  our  data  then  is  to  arrange  it  in 
correct  order.  To  accomplish  this,  we  will  use  pedigree  charts  and 
one  of  the  family  group  sheets  spoken  of  in  the  early  part  of  this 
series  of  articles. 

To  assure  correct  linking  of  each  generation,  showing  where, 
in  our  family  tree,  each  person  belongs,  we  will  commence  with  our- 
selves, placing  our  own  name  on  our  chart  first.  Then  we  will  record 
the  names  of  our  father  and  mother.  This  ties  these  two  generations 
together  for  record  purposes.  But  our  father  had  parents,  and  so 
did  our  mother.  Then  in  our  pedigree  we  will  record  the  names 
of  the  parents  of  our  father  and  mother ;  that  is,  the  names  of  our 
four  grandparents.  Going  back  after  this  manner  we  will  record 
the  names  of  those  who  make  up  each  generation  in  our  descent, 
showing  clearly  how  we  are  related  to  every  person  on  our  gene- 
alogical line.  We  carry  this  line  or  chain  of  parentage  back  as  Ear 
as  our  information  will  permit. 

Now  let  us  look  at  this  chart.  We  notice  that  each  father  and 
each  mother  appear  side  by  side,  in  pairs.  Each  pair  represents  the 
nucleus  of  one  family  group.  We  say  nucleus,  because  we  must  list 
the  names  of  the  children  with  the  parents.  I  towever,  because  there 
is  insufficient  space  on  the  pedigree  chart  for  this  information,  we 
will  arrange  the  data  for  each  family  group  separately  on  a  sheet 
specially  prepared  for  this  purpose.  This  sheet  is  known  as  the 
One  Family  Group  Record,  because  it  provides  spaces  only  for  Lhe 
information  on  a  single  family     a   father,  mother  and  their  children. 

On  the  pedigree  chart,  under  each  name  we  list  the  vital  statistics 

for  that  individual.      (  >n  the  one  family  group  sheet   we  list  this  same 

information   for  each  individual,  only  more  completely.    This  sheet 
provides  that  the  names  of  the  parents,  together  with  all  necessary 


530  TE  KARERE  Hanuere,  1941 

information  regarding  their  dates  and  places  of  birth,  marriage, 
death  and  parentage,  be  written  in  the  upper  part  of  the  sheet.  Below, 
with  separate  spaces  for  each,  the  names  of  the  children  are  listed, 
with  data  on  their  birth,  marriage  and  death. 

If  we  follow  this  plan  for  each  family  in  our  record,  we  have 
an  orderly  array  of  information,  well  classified,  with  each  family 
grouped  as  a  unit.  In  other  words,  we  have  prepared  our  informa- 
tion in  such  a  way  that  it  will  most  easily  lend  itself  to  orderly 
ordinance  work. 

The  first  ordinance  is  that  of  baptism.  We  must  place  the  names 
of  all  the  dead  who  make  up  our  ancestral  record,  on  specially  pre- 
pared sheets  for  this  purpose.  The  sheet  is  known  as  the  baptism 
and  endowment  sheet,  since  it  is  used  for  both  these  types  of 
ordinances. 

These  sheets  require  that  we  copy  upon  them  not  only  the  names 
of  our  ancestry  as  they  appear  on  our  pedigree  and  one  family  group 
sheets,  but  also  that  we  write  in  spaces  supplied,  sufficient  informa- 
tion (as  we  have  written  it  on  our  one  family  group  sheets)  to 
identify  beyond  question,  the  individuals  for  whom  those  names 
stand.  The  baptism  and  endowment  sheets  ask  for  the  names  of 
parents  and  wife  or  husband  of  each  person  listed ;  also  the  dates 
and  places  of  their  birth  and  death,  and  the  relationship  of  the  dead 
to  the  person  in  the  Church  who  is  known  as  the  heir  to  the  record. 
The  selection  of  an  heir  to  the  record  is  required  in  establishing 
correct  relationships,  and  does  not  mean  that  the  heir  is  the  only 
one  who  has  a  right  to  work  on  that  record,  or  that  he  alone  obtains 
credit  for  work  accomplished.  The  naming  of  the  heir  is  merely 
for  convenience  in  record  keeping.  The  heir  should  be  the  oldest 
male  member  of  the  family  to  join  the  Church.  The  name  of  the 
heir  is  retained  even  though  he  be  dead,  since,  as  we  say,  choice  of 
the  heir  is  for  convenience  in  record  keeping.  A  space  is  provided 
at  the  top  of  each  baptism  and  endowment  sheet  for  the  name  of 
the  heir. 

After  the  baptism  and  endowment  sheet  is  filled  out,  one  more 
step  is  needed  before  temple  work  can  be  performed.  The  names 
on  the  sheet  must  be  checked  at  the  central  clearing  house  for  all 
temple  work — the  Temple  Index  Bureau,  80  North  Main  Street, 
Salt  Lake  City,  Utah.  This  is  required  to  prevent  duplication  of 
temple  work,  since  various  members  of  families  often  do  research 
simultaneously,  without  either  knowing  that  the  other  is  so  engaged. 
No  temple  work  is  permitted  in  any  temple  of  the  Church,  without 
the  names  on  the  baptism  and  endowment  sheets  being  first  checked 
at  this  bureau.  Names  which  are  approved  are  so  indicated,  and 
the  sheets  are  returned  to  the  individual  in  charge  of  the  family 
work.    Then  they  may  be  sent  to  the  temple  for  ordinance  work. 


Hanuere,   1941  TE  KARERE  531 

Arrangements  must  be  made  for  the  ordinance  work,  each 
person  being  responsible  for  seeing  that  the  work  is  accomplished 
for  his  ancestors  on  both  father's  and  mother's  sides  of  the  family. 

After  the  baptism  and  endowment  work  is  completed,  then  "seal- 
ing" work  is  in  order.  Two  types  of  sealing  must  be  done — the 
wife  must  be  sealed  to  the  husband,  and  the  children  must  be  sealed 
to  the  parents,  thus  uniting  the  family  as  a  group  for  all  eternity. 

Special  sheets  must  be  used  for  each  of  these  sealing  ordinances. 
Information  to  identify  each  individual  must  be  supplied  for  sealings, 
as  for  baptisms.  WJjen  the  sheets  are  properly  filled  out,  following 
performance  of  all  necessary  prior  ordinances,  the  sealings  may  be 
performed,  preferably  by  relatives  of  the  dead,  in  the  temples. 

It  is  advisable  that  these  permanent  records  be  preserved  in  a 
safe  place,  and  for  further  protection  against  loss  of  these  records, 
it  is  urged  that  copies  of  all  records  thus  obtained  be  placed  in  the 
Archive  of  the  Genealogical  Society  of  Utah,  80  North  Main  Street, 
Salt  Lake  City,  Utah. 

BRANCH  TEACHERS   MESSAGE 

The  Sacrament 

Latter-day  Saints  should  be  urged  to  make  attendance  at  Sacra- 
ment meeting  a  regular  habit.  It  is  the  one  meeting  of  the  Church 
which  the  members  are  directed,  by  commandment,  to  attend.  It 
has  been  considered  so  important,  so  necessary  to  spiritual  welfare, 
and  so  helpful  in  strengthening  faith  and  fortifying  against  tempta- 
tion that  the  Lord  has  commanded  his  people  to  attend. 

Section  59  of  the  Doctrine  and  Covenants  contains  the  following : 
And  that  thou  mayest  more  fully  keep  thyself  unspotted  from  the  world, 
thou  shalt  go  to  the  house  of  prayer  and  offer  up  thy  sacraments  on  my  holy 
day;  for  verily  this  is  a  day  appointed  unto  you  to  rest  from  your  labours, 
and  to  pay  thy  devotions  unto  the  Host  High;  nevertheless  thy  vows  shall  be 
offered  up  in  righteousness  on  all  days  and  at  all  times;  but  remember  that  on 
this,  the  Lord's  day,  thou  shalt  offer  thine  oblations  and  thy  sacrmaents  unto 
the  Most  High. 

Nothing  could  be  more  direct.  The  command  is  clear.  Atten- 
tion should  be  called  to  the  fact  that  observance  of  the  Sabbath  day 
is  very  closely  associated,  also  by  commandment,  with  attendance 
at  Sacrament  meeting.  It  is  evidently  the  desire  of  our  Heavenly 
Father  that  the  Sacrament  meeting  shall  be  a  spiritual  benediction 
to  the  Sabbath  day.  Glorious  promises  are  made  to  those  who  obey 
these  commandments.  See  Doctrine  and  Covenants,  Section  59, 
verses  L4-24.  One  of  the  best  resolves  a  Latter-day  Saint  can  make 
is  to  determine  to  keep  the  commandments  of  the  Lord  and  attend 
Sacrament  meetings  regularly. 

(Teachers  should  read  all  of  Sec.  5(>  and  call  attention  to  the 
obligation  placed  upon  all  members  by  the  Lord.) 


532 


TE  KARERE 


Hanuere,  1941 


ARE  POETS  INSPIRED  OF  GOD? 

By  Elder  H.  W.  Kirkham 

''The  wind  bloweth  where  it  listeth,  and  thou  hearest  the  voice 
thereof,  but  knoweth  not  whence  it  cometh  and  whither  it  goeth ; 
so  is  everyone  that  is  born  of  the  Spirit." — John  3  :  8. 

To  the  man  who  is  in  tune  with  spiritual  things  the  voices  of 
the  spirit  come  from  many  different  sources.  As  varied  as  are  the 
ever-changing  sounds  of  the  wind,  even  so  varying  are  the  voices 
of  inspiration  to  those  who  have  ears  to  hear  and  minds  and  hearts 
to  understand.  Think  from  how  many  different  sources  religious 
inspiration  comes  to  men. 

Poetry,  for  example,  and  poetic  prose  have 
been  religion's  ministers.  All  the  truly  great 
poets  are  religious  teachers.  They  give  us  more 
noble  impulses  and  more  divine  inspiration.  They 
make  us  feel  that  we  are  heirs  of  pure  delights, 
but  have  not  yet  entered  into  our  inheritance. 
In  the  best  English  poetry  the  highest  ideals  of 
right  living  are  grandly  and  inspiringly  set  forth. 
He  who  neglects  Shakespeare  and  Browning,  Mil- 
ton and  Tennyson,  and  many  others,  does  so  at 
the  risk  of  loss  to  his  spiritual  life.  He  misses 
certain  rich  formative  influences  that  strengthen 
faith,  purify  conscience,  and  show  us  how  to  make 
our  human  life  more  divine.  And  this  is  true 
also  of  the  sacred  writings  of  Isaiah,  the  Book  of 
Job,  the  Psalms  and  the  sublime  poetry  of  the  Old  Testament. 

Here  are  a  few  verses  from  poems  of  poets  whom  I  believe 
were  inspired  of   God. 

Montgomery  expressed  the  desire  of  immortal  life  in  these 
words : 

Who  that  hath  ever  been 

Could  bear  to  be  no  more? 
Yet  who  could  tread  again  the  scene 
He  trod  through  life  before? 

The  poet  Wordsworth  obtained  an  inspirational  glimpse  of  the 
eternal  doctrine  of  pre-existence  when  he  wrote  the  following : 
Our  birth  is  but  a  sleep  and  a  forgetting; 

The  soul  that  rises  with  us,  our  life's  star, 
Hath  had  elsewhere  its  setting, 

And  cometh  from  afar; 
Not  in  entire  for  get  fulness, 

And  not  in  utter  nakedness, 
But  trailing  clouds  of  glory  do  we  conic 

From  God  who  is  our  home. 


Elder     Kirkham 


Hanuere,   1941  TE  KARERE  533 

Then  there  is  Robert  Browning's  "Prospice,"  which  was  written 
six  months  after  the  death  of  his  beloved  wife,  Elizabeth  Barrett 
Browning,  in  1864.     Here  are  the  last  two  lines  of  this  poem: 
O  thou  soul  of  my  soul.  I  shall  clasp  thee 

again, 
And  with  God  be  the  rest. 
Another  thought   from  Browning:   "Life  is  probation  and  the 
earth  no  goal  but  starting  point  of  man." 

Space  will  not  permit  me  to  use  other  poems  of  inspired  poets. 
But  my  hope  is  that  these  few  will  make  you  dig  and  delve  into  these 
religious  riches  of  which  we  have  such  an  abundant  source  to  read 
from. 

Someone  has  said :  "Too  much  of  our  reading  is  on  a  low  level. 
We  chatter  with  clowns  when  we  might  talk  with  kings." 

FROM  THE  DESK  OF  THE  GENERAL 
SUPERINTENDENCY 

WHY  GO  TO  SUNDAY  SCHOOL? 
By  Elder  Wallace  F.  Bennett 

Every  man  or  woman  who  grew  up  in  a  Mormon  family  and 
a  Mormon  community  spent  most  of  his  childhood  Sunday  mornings 
in  Sunday  School.  There  he  learned  much  of  what  he  knows  to-day 
about  the  Gospel.  There  he  acquired  those  habits  and  attitudes  to- 
ward the  Church  which  mark  him  to-day  as  a  Latter-day  Saint. 
Among  the  useful  habits  so  developed  was  the  obvious  one  of  going 
to  Sunday  School,  and  even  after  many  years  of  irregular  attendance, 
that  old  habit  gives  a  little  tug  every  Sunday  morning  when  Sunday 
School  time  conies  around.  No  matter  what  else  we  may  plan  on 
Sunday  morning,  somehow  that  old  habit  seems  to  remind  us,  often 
in  a  voice  too  faint  to  be  clearly  heard,  that  we  should  be  in  Sunday 
School.  Next  Sunday  morning,  when  the  ghost  of  your  childhood 
says,  "I  wonder  if  you  shouldn't  be  in  Sunday  School?  I  suggest 
that  you  answer  "Yes,"  and  reach  for  your  hat.  I  can  give  you 
several  interesting  reasons  why  you  should. 

The  first  three  of  my  reasons  are  personal.  When  you  spend 
the  morning  in  Sunday  School,  you  create  an  attitude  of  worship; 
you  create,  within  your  own  soul,  and  by  your  influence  on  others, 
an  atmosphere  of  well-being  that  will  last  through  the  whole  day. 
The  Sabbath  is  a  day  Eor  worship,  and  we  cannot  turn  it  to  any  other 
purpose  without  robbing  ourselves  of  the  week's  greatest  satisfac- 
tion, and  if  we  start  the  day  with  worship,  the  sense  of  j<>\  ml  well- 
being  we  achieve  is  carried  through,  to  reach  its  climax  in  the  wor- 
ship of  the  Sacrament  Meeting  at  the  Sunday's  close,  and  if  we 
give  up  the  day  to  worldly  things,  even  attendance  at  Sacrament 
Meeting   fails  to  make  up   Eor  <>nr  lost   opportunity. 


534  TE  KARERE  Hanuere,  1941 

Our  early  leaders  must  have  realized  the  importance  of  the  Sun- 
day School  in  establishing  this  Sabbath  atmosphere,  because  they 
provided  a  place  in  its  programme  for  the  administration  of  the 
sacrament — that  ceremony  which  gives  tangible  expression  to  our 
relationship  with  the  Deity,  and  when  we  can  have  the  sacrament 
at  the  beginning  and  the  end  of  the  day,  it  stands,  both  as  a  promise 
and  a  fulfilment,  through  tn.tr,  opportunity  on  the  Sabbath,  to  live 
closer  to  Him  whom  it  commemorates. 

In  addition  to  the  privilege  of  morning  worship,  the  Sunday 
School  offers  us  all  a  practical  opportunity  to  teach  and  be  taught  the 
truth  of  the  Gospel.  Its  scope  is  so  broad,  and  its  beauty  so  deep 
that  none  of  us  can  comprehend  it,  even  in  a  lifetime  of  study. 
Sunday  School  offers  us  a  continual  weekly  privilege  of  discovering 
and  rediscovering  the  many  facets  of  its  glory. 

All  these  reasons  why  we  should  go  to  Sunday  School  are  per- 
sonal. There  are  others  outside  ourselves  equally  important.  The 
first  of  these  is  based  upon  our  membership  in  the  family.  Most  of 
us,  who  grew  up  as  children  in  the  Sunday  School,  are  determined 
that  our  own  children  shall  have  the  same  privilege  of  learning  the 
Gospel,  so  we  arrange  our  schedules  at  home  for  them  to  attend. 
How  much  better  if  we  go  with  them,  not  only  setting  an  example 
for  attendance  by  our  presence,  but  testifying  to  our  friends  and 
neighbours  that  our  love  of  the  Gospel  is  a  family  possession,  in  the 
pride  of  which  our  family  is  united. 

But  there  are  other  reasons  yet  why  Sunday  morning  should 
find  you  in  your  place  in  Sunday  School,  not  the  least  of  which 
expresses  the  demand  your  religious  community  has  on  you  as  a 
member.  The  very  nature  of  our  Church  organization  gives  each  of 
us  a  share  in  the  responsibility  for  the  success  of  all  branch  activities. 
If  the  Sunday  School  in  your  branch  is  the  kind  of  Sunday  School 
that  can  give  your  children  the  intelligent  understanding  of  the  Gospel 
you  wish  them  to  have,  it  will  be  so  because  yours  is  the  kind  of 
branch  that  is  made  up  of  men  and  women  who  have  a  keen  and  liv- 
ing interest  in  its  success.  That  interest  cannot  be  expressed  con- 
vincingly except  through  your  personal  participation  in  the  affairs  of 
the  Sunday  School,  whether  as  officers,  teachers,  or  simply  as  loyal 
students  in  an  adult  class.  The  officers  and  teachers  cannot  succeed 
without  your  understanding  and  co-operation,  and  you  can't  give 
that  by  absent  treatment. 

From  another  point  of  view,  your  branch — your  religious  com- 
munity— is  greatly  enriched  in  fellowship  and  understanding  when 
you  go  to  Sunday  School.  There  you  meet  your  neighbours  and 
friends  in  an  atmosphere  of  spiritual  understanding — an  atmosphere 
which  brings  them  out  in  their  best  light,  in  which  prejudice  and  fault- 
finding have  all  disappeared.    Your  branch  will  be  a  happier  place 


Hanuere,   1941  TE  KARERE  535 

in  which  to  live,  and  your  share  in  it  will  bring  more  happiness  to 
you  if  you  will  meet  your  neighbours  often  in  Sacrament  Meeting 
and  in  Sunday  School. 

Why  should  you  go  to  Sunday  School?  To  all  these  reasons, 
you  can  add  many  personal  ones  of  your  own ;  in  fact,  your  reasons 
will  multiply  with  your  attendance  until  you  regain  the  old  habit  of 
going  to  Sunday  School  on  Sunday  morning. 

A  FULL  VISION  NEEDED. 

In  order  to  appreciate  the  value  of  the  Sunday  School  in  its 
entirety  one  needs  more  than  a  fragmentary  acquaintance  with  its 
genious  and  power.  It  has  a  history  and  a  record  of  achievement 
recognized  as  worthy  by  those  who  are  most  familiar  with  its  develop- 
ment. It  has  been  more  than  an  institution — it  has  been  and  is  a 
movement.  One  needs  to  realize  its  potency  in  order  to  evaluate  its 
contribution  to  the  church  and  the  nation.  This  fact  is  strikingly 
revealed  in  such  gatherings  as  the  World's  International  and  State 
Conventions,  in  which  widespread  activities  of  the  Sunday  School 
are  apparent.  Attendance  upon  these  conventions  is  often  an  eye 
opener  to  even  the  most  intelligent. 

The  late  Dr.  F.  B.  Meyer,  president  of  the  World's  Sunday 
School  Convention  in  1907,  said :  "I  received  at  the  World's  Sunday 
School  Convention  at  Rome  a  new  vision.  If  the  world  is  ever  to  be 
saved  it  must  be  saved  through  its  childhood."  To  judge  the  value 
of  the  Sunday  School  by  the  local  school — however  large  or  efficient 
— is  like  evaluating  the  worth  of  public  education  from  an  acquant- 
ance  with  one  district  or  town  school.  A  full  vision  is  needed,  and 
that   is   secured   only    from   a   study   of  the   movement-in-the-large. 

— The  S.S  Executive. 

GENEALOGY 

Cottage  Meetings  for  the  month  of  January. 

Jan.    9 — Lesson  12,  "The  Dream  of  Yellow  Face." 
,,     1(5 — Lesson  13,  "A  White  and   Blessed  People." 
,,     23 — Lesson  14,  "Our  Indian  Brethren." 
„     30 — Lesson  15,  "The  Noble  House  of   Salazar." 

An  Urgent  Appeal. 

As  general  officers  of  the  Genealogical  Society  of  the  Mission, 
we  feel  that  a  heavy  and  urgent  responsibility  is  resting  upon  us. 
To  you  as  our  representatives  we  are  passing  the  duty  that  is  right- 
fully yours  to  yon  and  your  workers  pertaining  to  "Whakapapa." 
With  a  world  trembling  on  the  brink  of  total  war  and  devastation 

We  are  appealing  to  yon  to  aet   swiftly  and  decisiveh    aboul  acquiring 

and  working  for  your  ancestors. 

"E  moe  ana  te   matahi  tnna,  e  ara  ana  te  matahi-tana." 


536  TE  KARERE  Hanuere,  1941 


^Primary 


Elva    T.    Cowley,    President  Rona    V.    Attenborough,    Second    Counsellor 

Waima   Davits,   First   Counsellor  and   Secretary 

Lessons    compiled    by    Rona    V.    Attenborough 

MEMORY   GEM: 

"If  a  thing  is  worth  doing, 
It  is  worth  doing  well." 


— Selected. 


LESSONS: 


FIRST  WEEK 

DAVID   THE    SHEPHERD   BOY 


Objective: 

To  help  the  child  to  feel  that  the  Lord  knows  the  thoughts  of  our 
hearts,  even  though  we  do  not  express  them. 

Suggestions  for  Teaching: 

That  the  children  may  fully  understand  and  appreciate  this  story, 
they  should  know  a  little  about  the  shepherds,  of  the  East.  Pictures 
will  help.  It  will  be  interesting  for  them  to  know  that  shepherds  have 
small  flocks;  that  they  lead  the  sheep  instead  of  driving  them;  that 
the  sheep  know  the  shepherd's  voice  and  will  come  at  his  call. 

The  shepherd  is  very  kind  to  his  sheep.  He  leads  them  to  green 
pastures  and  sees  that  no  harm  comes  to  them  while  feeding.  He 
knows  where  fresh  water  is  to  be  found,  and  here  he  takes  his  sheep 
to  drink.  At  night  he  leads  them  to  his  sheep  fold.  At  the  door  of 
the  fold  he  stands  with  his  crook  and,  as  the  sheep  pass  in  one  by  one 
he  looks  at  each  carefully:  If  any  aie  bruised  or  scratched  they  receive 
his  special  care.  If  one  little  lamb  has  strayed  away  during  the  day, 
and  has  not  been  missed  the  loss  is  known  as  soon  as  the  sheep  are 
brought  into  the  sheep  fold  for  the  night. 

You  can  enrich  your  lesson  by  making  a  sheep  fold.  Add 
interest  also  by  cutting  from  cardboard  several  sheep  and  lambs.  A 
little  white  cotton,  or  wool,  if  available,  and  some  mucilage  will  make 
them  white  and  woolly.  You  may  care  also  to  include  the  shepherd 
with  his  crook. 

A  large  box  lid  will  make  a  very  good  base  for  the  cut-outs. 
Song: 

"Can    a    Little    Child    Like    Me,"    No.    6    Primary    Songs    for    the 
Missions. 
Prayer: 

Let  the  children  say  the  following  verse  before  the  prayer  is  said 
by  the  teacher. 

"Father  of  all  in  heaven  above, 

We  thank  Thee  for  Thy  love; 

Our  food,  our  homes  and  all  we  wear 

Tell  of  Thy  loving  care.    Amen." 

Story: 

THE  LITTLE  LOST  LAMB 

Long  ago,  in  a  country  far  across  the  big,  wide  ocean,  there  lived 
a  shepherd.  Such  a  good  kind  man  he  was!  Everyone  who  knew  him 
well  loved  him. 

This  good  shepherd  kept  his  sheep  in  a  beautiful  meadow.  There 
was  nice  soft  grass  for  miles  around,  and  running  right  through  the 
centre  of  the  meadow  was  a  brook  where  the  sheep  and  lambs  could 
drink  whenever  they  were  thirsty.  In  one  corner  of  the  meadow  the 
shepherd   made    a    sheep-fold.      Every   night   this   good   kind    shepherd ' 


Hanuere,   1941  TE  KARERE  537 

let  his  sheep  through  the  gate  into  the  fold.  While  they  were  going 
through  he  would  stand  and  watch  them.  He  knew  every  one  and 
loved  them  so  much  that  he  wanted  them  safe  for  the  night. 

Big  tall  mountains  stood  around  this  beautiful  meadow,  and  some- 
times the  shepherd  let  the  sheep  climb  up  on  the  sides  of  the  moun- 
tains. One  day  while  they  were  climbing  on  the  mountain  sides,  a 
big  storm  came  up.  The  shepherd  called  to  the  sheep.  It  was  the 
call  they  all  knew  and  they  started  home.  The  wind  blew,  and  the 
rain  came  down,  but  they  hurried  on.  Soon  they  came  to  the  sheep- 
fold.  The  shepherd,  wet  and  cold,  stood  there  to  watch  them,  but 
there  was  one  little  lamb  he  could  not  find.  It  must  have  been  back 
in  the  mountains.  It  was  dark.  The  shepherd  loved  his  sheep.  He 
couldn't  let  even  one  be  in  trouble  and  alone.  So  he  went  back  to  the 
mountains,  calling  in  his  kind,  gentle  voice.  Soon  he  heard  a  weak 
little  voice  saying,  "Baa,  baa,"  just  as  if  it  were  trying  to  say  "Here 
I  am,  here  I  am.  I  climbed  too  far,  and  could  not  get  back."  The 
good  shepherd  hurried  to  the  place  and  in  between  two  rocks,  he  found 
the  little  lamb  with  his  leg  hurt  and  his  coat  all  black  with  mud  and 
rain.  The  shepherd  knelt  down  and  picked  the  little  lamb  up  in  his 
arms  and  carried  him  home.  He  took  him  into  the  sheep-fold,  where 
he  was  safe  with  the  other  sheep. 

Conversation  After  the   Story: 

Compare  the  love  of  our  Heavenly  Father  with  the  love  of  this 
shepherd  and  let  the  children  relate  any  experiences  which  will  show 
how  our  Heavenly  Father  cares  for  His  children. 

SECOND  WEEK 

THE   JOY   OF   BROTHERS   AND    SISTERS 
Objective: 

To  help  the  children  to  be  grateful  to  Heavenly  Father  for  brothers 
and  sisters  and  for  the  joy  they  give. 

Lesson    Story: 

TWO    SISTERS 

Janet  and  Margie  were  two  sisters  who  helped  each  other  and 
played  together  every  day.  Janet  was  eight  but  Margie  was  just  five 
and  was  a  rolly-polly  little  girl.  She  was  a  good  sister  and  liked  to 
help  Janet.  One  night  Janet  was  taking  her  dolls  to  bed.  She  had 
five  in  her  arms  and  couldn't  turn  the  light  on. 

"Wait  a  minute,"  said  Margie.  "I'll  turn  it  on  for  you."  She 
couldn't  reach  the  switch  so  she  pushed  a  chair  to  the  wall,  climbed 
up,  and  on  went  the  light. 

One  day  when  Janet  and  Margie  went  to  school,  the  sun  was  shin- 
ing, but  when  they  started  home  the  wind  was  blowing.  "Woo-oo," 
went  the  wind,  and  both  little  girls  buttoned  their  coats  up  tight.  Soon 
Mr.  Wind  came  harder.  "Woo-oo,  woo-oo,"  he  said,  blowing  right  into 
their  faces. 

"That  hurts  my  cheeks  and  nose,"  said  Margie. 

"It  goes  right  through  my  coat,"  said  Janet.  "Let's  try  walking 
backwards." 

They  tried  that  a  little  way  but  Margie  stumbled. 

"Oh  dear!"  she  cried,   "we  can't  get  home." 

"Yes  we   can,"   said   Janet.      "Come,   I'll   take    your   hand." 

Then  Mr.  Wind  became  fierce.  "Woo-oo,  woo-oo,  woo-oo."  be 
shrieked.  He  pushed  so  hard  that  Margie's  little  feet  just  couldn't 
STO,  and  she  began  to  cry.  Janet  felt  like  Crying  too.  hut  she  thought, 
*'I  mustn't.  T  must  get  Margie  home."  So  she  said  "\ow  just  duck 
your  head  like  this  so  the  wind  won't  hit  your  fare  so  hard.  See  wo 
are  nearly  to  the  corner.  When  we  turn  up  the  next  street  niayhe  the 
wind    won't,   bo   so   strong." 


538  TE  KARERE  Hanuere,  194] 

So  they  went  on,  one  step,  then  another,  then  another,  until  they 
reached  the  corner.  The  wind  wasn't  nearly  so  bad  on  that  block,  and 
then,  they  were  home. 

Mother  had  them  sit  by  a  nice  warm  fire  and  gave  them  warm 
milk  to   drink.      Soon  they   were   feeling;   fine   again. 

"I  wonder,"  said  Margie,  "what  the  other  children  did,  the  ones 
that  don't  have  a  sister  like  Janet  to  help  them  home?" 

SPECIAL  MEMORY  GEM    (For  This  Week  Only) 

We  thank  Thee,  Lord,  for  all  good  things; 

For  Sister,  and  for  Brother, 
For  life,  for  health;  for  food  and  friends; 

For  Father  and  for  Mother. 

— Janet  Tooke. 

THIRD  WEEK 

THANKSGIVING    IS    THANKS    LIVING 
Objective: 

To  help  the  children  to  know  that  we  can  give  thanks  to  God  for 
plenty  by  snaring  with  others. 
Suggestions    for   Teaching: 

If  we  would  help  the  children  to  develop  a  thankful  attitude  our 
own  hearts  must  overflow  with  gratitude  for  all  God's  gifts.  Thankful- 
ness strengthens  faith  and  courage.  We  can  acquire  this  invaluable 
treasure  by  counting  our  blessings — not  once  in  a  year  only,  but  every 
day  and  often  during  the  day.  There  is  no  finer  method  of  increasing 
our  own  joy  than  by  giving  someone  else  a  cause  for  gratitude. 

Read  the  ninety-fifth  Psalm  for  your  own  inspiration  and  comfort. 

Lesson   Story: 

"THE   PIE  THAT  GREW" 

"There,"  his  mother  said  to  Bobby  as  she  packed  the  little  mince 
pie  in  a  box,  "it  isn't  a  very  large  pie  but  I  know  how  Mrs.  Murphy 
will  manage  to  make  it  go  around  among  the  little  Murphys.  It  is 
too  bad  that  Mr.  Murphy  is  out  of  work  and  so  they  can't  have  a  fine 
dinner  like  us.      Take  your  bicycle,  Bobby,  and  hurry." 

Bobby  tied  the  box  which  held  the  mince  pie  to  the  handlebars 
of  his  bicycle  and  started  off  in  the  direction  of  the  lane  where  all 
the  little  Murphys  lived,  but  on  the  way  he  met  his  friend  Polly. 

"What  have  you  in  that  box,  Bobby,  and  where  are  you  going?" 
she  asked. 

"A  small  mince  pie  for  Mrs.  Murphy's  dinner,"  Bobby  told  her. 
Polly's  eyes  shone.  "Wait  a  moment,"  she  said.  Then  she  ran  into 
the  house  and  came  out  with  another  box.  "Molasses  taffy!"  she  said. 
"I  just  made  it  but  I  want  it  to  go  to  the  little  Murphys  with  your 
mince  pie." 

Bobby  tied  the  second  box  to  his  bicycle  and  started  on,  but  he 
was  in  such  a  hurry  he  almost  ran  over  his  grandmother  who  was 
sweeping  up  leaves  from  her  front  walk. 

"Where  are  you  going  with  those  boxes,  Robert?"  she  asked  him. 

"I'm  taking  a  small  mince  pie  and  some  taffy  to  the  Murphys  for 
their   dinner,"   Bobby  told  her.      Grandmother's   eyes  twinkled. 

"Thev  will  need  more  than  that,"  she  said.  "Wait  a  second!" 
Grandmother  went  in  the  house  and  came  out  with  a  basket  of  sugar 
and  potatoes.  "It  isn't  much,"  she  said,  "but  I  want  it  to  keep  the 
mince  pie  company." 

Bobby  hung  the  basket  to  the  handlebars  of  his  bicycle  underneath 
the  two  boxes  and  went  on,  but  he  had  not  gone  very  far  when  he 
almost  ran  into  an  old  gentleman  who  looked  severely  at  him  over  his 
spectacles.  The  old  gentleman's  arms  were  full  of  parcels  and  he  had 
not  been  looking  where  he  was  going  any  more  than  had  Bobby. 


Hanuere,   1941  TE  KARERE  539 

"What  are  you  doing;,  young-  man?"  asked  the  old  gentleman, 
"blocking  the  sidewalk  with  your  bicycle  that  has  so  many  bundles  on 
it  that  you  can't  see  the  passerby?" 

Bobby  got  down  and  took  his  hat  off  politely  as  he  explained. 
"I  am  taking:  a  small  mince  pie  and  some  taffy  and  a  basket  of  sugar 
and  potatoes  to  Mrs.  Murphy,  sir.  They  are  for  the  little  Murphys' 
dinner." 

"Well,  well!"  said  the  old  gentleman,  "and  how  about  some 
oranges.  Here  I  am  taking  home  a  larger  bag  of  oranges  than  I  could 
carry  or  use,  since  I  live  alone.  Could  you  manage,  do  you  think, 
to  tie  a  bag  of  oranges  to  the  seat  of  your  bicycle?" 

Bobby  could  and  he  did.  The  old  gentleman  was  quite  jovial  as 
he  helped  him  and  then  watched  him  ride  off.  There  really  seemed 
to  be  some  kind  of  magic  in  the  little  mince  pie,  and  Bobby  wondered 
what  would  happen  next.  He  did  not  have  long  to  wait.  The  butcher's 
boy  stopped  him. 

"Won't  you  help  me  deliver  these  parcels?"  he  asked  Bobby.  "You 
can  leave  your  parcels  here  in  the  shop,  but  I  won't  be  able  to  get  all 
the  orders  out  if  I  can't  have  some  help." 

Bobby  knew  the  butcher's  boy  in  school,  so  he  wanted  to  help  him. 
He  delivered  parcels  for  an  hour,  and  when  he  finished  and  was  tying: 
on   the   Murphy's   dinner   once   more   the   butcher's   boy   spoke   to   him. 

"What  are  all  those  bundles?"  he  asked  Bobby. 

"A  small  mince  pie  and  some  taffy  and  sugar  and  potatoes  and 
oranges  for  Mrs.  Murphy's  dinner,"  Bobby  said. 

"But  no  chicken?'  asked  the  butcher. 

Bobby  shook  his  head  and  the  butcher  went  into  his  shohp  and 
brougrht  out  a  fine  roasting  chicken  in  a  bag. 

"Can  you  tie  this  on,  too?"  he  asked.  "I  am  sure  you  have 
earned  it." 

Indeed  Bobby  could!  He  raced  off  to  the  lane  where  th^  Mur- 
nhys  lived.  How  that  little  mince  pie  had  grown  into  a  whole  dinner! 
It  had  spread  itself  into  a  dinner  from  the  chicken  to  the  dessert,  as 
all  kind  deeds  grow  into  something-  larger  and  better. — Carolyn  S. 
Bailey.     (Courtesy  Albert  Whitman  &   Co.,   Chicago,  111.) 

FOURTH  WEEK 

LET'S  KEEP  CLEAN 
Objective: 

To  help  the  child  to  feel  that  God  gave  him  his  beautiful  body. 
Lesson    Approach: 

Show  a  picture  of  a  bathroom.  (There  are  very  many  beautiful 
ones  in  the  magazines.)  Let  a  child  point  to  the  bathtub.  What  is 
it  for?  What  other  kinds  of  baths  may  we  take?  Which  kind  do  you 
like  best?  We  like  to  swim  and  we  like  to  shower  but  a  nice  warm 
soapy  bath  makes  us  feel  fine,  doesn't  it?  We  found  out  many  reasons 
why  we  should  have  clean  hands,  now  let  us  write  down  some  good 
reasons  why  we  should  bathe. 

THE  SPICK  AND  SPAN  TWINS 

In  a  bright,  clean  town  not  very  far  from  here  live1  a  boy  and  a 
girl  who  are  twins.  Their  names  are  Keith  and  Kay.  Their  fairs 
are  so  bright  and  rosy  that  people  love  to  see  them  coming  down  the 
street.  Keith  always  wears  a  clean  suit  and  Kay  wears  a  spotless 
dress.  They  wear  smiles  instead  of  frowns  and  help  everybody 
they  can. 

One  day  the  twins  heard  some  children  who  were  called  in  from 
play  to  take  their  baths  say  thai  (hey  did  not  like  to  bathe.  The  twins 
thought  this  was  very  odd,  because  they   liked   to  get    into   the   I > i u"  tnb 


540  TE  KARERE  Hanuere,  1941 

and  scrub  and  scrub  and  scrub.  One  little  girl  said,  "Oh,  mother,  I 
want  to  stay  out  and  play.  Anyway  it's  too  late.  The  water  is 
always  too  hot,  or  else  it's  too  cold.     The  soap  gets  in  my  eyes." 

So  the  twins  talked  to  Mary  and  the  other  children  and  said, 
"Why,  we  take  a  bath  all  over  at  least  twice  a  week.  We  just  love 
nice  warm  water  and  soap-suds.  We  wash  our  faces  and  necks  and 
ears  every  morning-  and  we  don't  even  count  how  many  times  a  day 
we  wash  our  hands.  We  always  wash  them  before  eating."  So  Mary 
decided  she  would  like  to  be  sweet  and  clean  too,  so  that  she  would  look 
like  Kay. 

Soon  they  went  into  a  house  and  found  a  little  girl  scolding  be- 
cause she  had  played  so  hard  and  she  was  too  tired  to  take  a  bath. 
Kay  told  her  about  a  poor  little  girl  who  didn't  even  have  a  tub  to  bathe 
in.  Every  time  she  wanted  a  bath,  she  had  to  put  buckets  of  water  on 
the  stove  to  heat.  Then  she  would  go  outside  and  bring  in  a  wash- 
tub  in  which  she  put  the  warm  water  so  that  she  could  be  bathed  and 
be  sweet  and  clean.  The  little  girl  who  was  scolding  was  surprised, 
because  she  had  a  nice  white  tub  to  bathe  in,  and  didn't  have  to  worry 
about  getting  nice,  warm  water. 

A  little  girl  called  Sunny  was  the  next  child  they  saw.  She  was 
washing  her  hair,  and  then  she  dried  it  in  the  sunshine.  Keith  and 
Kay  told  her  what  a  fine  thing  it  was  to  keep  the  hair  bright  and 
shining  by  washing  it  often  and  brushing  it  well. 

Then  they  saw  a  little  girl  called  Careless  Carrie  who  always  had 
unclean  finger  nails.  She  just  could  not  remember  to  clean  them  and 
keep  them  clean.  So  the  twins  thought  of  a  plan  to  help  her.  They 
took  a  piece  of  paper,  put  their  right  hands,  palms  down,  and  drew 
around  each  finger  and  thumb  with  a  pencil.  This  made  a  picture  of 
a  hand,  and  on  it  they  wrote,  "I  will  clean  my  nails." 

Keith  and  Kay  saw  so  many  children  and  talked  to  them  about 
clean  bodies  and  hair  and  finger  nails,  that  before  they  knew  it,  it 
was  time  for  them  to  go  home  and  bathe.  So  home  they  skipped, 
happy  because  they  had  helped  someone  else  to  be  clean,  and  the  last 
thing  they  said  was: 

"When  you  have  had  a  nice  warm  scrub, 
Always  remember  to  clean  the  tub." 


We  can't  hope  to  be  always  on  the  crest  of  the  wave.  Deep 
shadows  but  serve  to  accentuate  the  high-lights  of  life.  And  though 
we  arise  to  a  day  shattered  with  disappointments,  let  us  remember 
that  even  the  darkest  day  has  its  to-morrow — a  to-morrow  that  may 
restore  our  lost  yesterdays. — Leila  Marler  Hoggan. 


Though  justice  be  thy  plea,  remember  this,  that  in  the  course  of 
justice  none  of  us  should  see  salvation.  We  do  pray  for  mercy ;  and 
the  same  prayer  doth  teach  us  all  to  render  the  deeds  of  mercy. 
— Shakespeare. 

*  *  * 

A  man's  true  wealth  is  the  good  he  does  in  this  world.  When  he 
dies,  mortals  will  ask  what  property  has  he  left  behind  him,  but  angels 
will  inquire,  "What  good  deeds  hast  thou  sent  before  you?" — 
Mahomet. 


Hanuere,  1941  TE  KARERE  541 

^Mutual  improvement  Association 

Y.M.M.I.A. 
George  R.  Biesinger,  President  Tapsell  Meha,  Secretary 

Gleyre  C.   Frederickson,   First   Counsellor 

Y.W.M.I.A. 
Una    Thompson,    President  Wiki  Katene,  Second  Counsellor 

Hene  T.  Ngaio,  First  Counsellor  Annie   W.   Meha,   Secretary 

"Wherefore  be  not  weary  in  well  doing  for  ye  are  laying  the 
foundation  of  a  great  work  and  out  of  small  things  proceedeth  that 
which  is  great.  Behold  the  Lord  requireth  the  heart  and  a  willing 
mind." 

Greetings  to  you  all.  As  most  of  you  are  aware,  the  Elders  have 
been  released  and  returned  to  Zion,  and  we  want  to  encourage  the 
M.I. A.  workers  to  continue  diligently  in  building  and  spreading  the 
Mutual  ideals  among  the  people  of  our  land.  Be  not  too  worried  by 
the  changes  in  the  present  march  of  events,  but  let  us  take  heed  of  the 
Lord's  counsel — "stand  ye  in  holy  places" — and  show  our  respect  and 
love  to  those  who  have  sacrificed  so  much  in  bringing  the  light  of 
truth  to  the  people  here,  by  emulating  their  faithfulness  to  service. 
Let   us   not   be   weary   in   well   doing. 

May  the  Lord  bless  you  all  for  every  righteous  effort  that  you 
have  put  forth  during  the  past  season  and  pray  continually  for  strength 
to  carry  on  in  the  year  to  come. 

ORGANIZATION 

Officers,  we  request  that  you  organize  your  Associations  properly, 
as  set  forth  in  the  Manual,  and  study  the  prescribed  lessons  as  closely 
as  possible.  Let  us  endeavour  to  incorporate  the  open  programmes 
that  are  so  prevalent  in  some  of  the  districts,  even  though  one  class 
only  may  be   available. 

LESSONS 

We  do  not  know,  as  yet,  when  the  new  Manuals  will  be  sent  from 
Zion,  however  we  advise  you  to  continue  studying  last  years  lessons, 
viz. — 

Adults:  "Way  to  Perfection." 

M-Men  and  Gleaners:  "Youth  and  Its  Religion." 

Juniors:  "Happy  Landing." 

Explorers:    "Scouting."     (Proceed   to    your   nearest    Scout   Depot; 
have  yourselves  registered  and  follow  out  their  lesson  work.) 

MEMBERSHIP  CARDS 

Money  for  all  Membership  Cards  must  accompany  the  orders  for 
same.  The  fee  is  one  shilling  per  card  or  member.  Every  branch 
should  make  an  endeavour  to  increase  its  membership  over  last  year's. 
Remember  each  membership  fee  will  be  credited  to  your  Hui  Tau 
Queen. 

OPENING  DATE 

Mutuals  will  commence  on  the  last  Tuesday  in  January,  and  officers 
should  plan  a  very  attractive  opening  programme  to  encourage  mem- 
bers to  attend.      It  is  surprising  what  fust   impressions  can  do. 

HUI   TAU 

1.  Each  M.I. A.  Group  shall  be  allowed  one  entry  in  each  event 

excepting  the  Cooking  and  Sewing,  when  each  entrant  may  enter  as 
many  articles  as  she  may  wish  to  <h».  However,  only  one  entry  point 
will  be  allotted  in   each   particular  group  or  class. 

2.  All  members  of  the  Mission  Hoard  are  ineligible  for  competition. 

3.  In  order  to  compete   in    Hui   Tau   Competitions,   a   person   must: 


542  TE  KARERE  Hanuere,  1941 

(a)  Be  a  financial  member  of  the  New  Zealand  M.I. A. 

(b)  Be  prepared  to  show  his  or  her  Membership  Card  upon  re- 
quest of  judges  or  officials. 

(c)  Attend  at  least  three  Mutual  "lesson  meetings"  in  1941. 

(d)  Reside  in  Branch  to  be  represented  for  at  least  one  month 
before  Hui  Tau. 

4.  All  entries  to  be  sent  to  Tapsell  Meha,  Box  61,  Dannevirke, 
H.B.     Closing  date  will  be  given  in  a  later  issue  of  "Te  Karere." 

5.  Those  living  away  from  organized  Branches  or  are  unable  to 
abide  with  above  regulations  who  wish  to  compete  at  Hui  Tau  must 
present  their  case  through  the  mail  to  the  M.I. A.  Board,  Box  61,  Dan- 
nevirke. Permission  will  be  granted  providing  the  request  is  a  legiti- 
mate one. 

ACTIVITIES 
Mixed  Contest. 

1.  Parade.      Judged    according    to    Interhouse    Standards. 

2.  One-Act   Play,    "Jean's   Awakening."      Copies   now   available. 

3.  Dance,    "Senorita   Mia."      Music   copies  available. 

4.  Tennis  (Men  and  Women) — Singles,  Doubles,  and  Mixed.  Entry 
Fee,   2/6   each  group. 

5.  Haka  and  Action  Song. 

6.  Wood  Chopping  Competition.     Entry  Fee,  7/6. 

7.  Horse-shoe  Pitching. 
M.    Men: 

1.  Oration.      Theme,   Proverbs  6:20-22.    Time  limit,  8  minutes. 

2.  Vocal  Solo.     Own  Choice.     Sacred  or  Secular. 

3.  Chorus,  "Pale  Moon."     No  less  than  8  or  more  than  16  members. 

4.  Quartette,  "Sweet  Sabbath  Eve." 

5.  Athletics. 

Explorers: 

1.  Quartette,   "Abide   With   Me."      Age  limit,    17  years. 

2.  Hand  Craft.     Leather  purse. 

3.  Athletics. 

Ladies    (Adults    and    Gleaners): 

1.  Oration.      Theme,  Proverbs  6:20-22.    18  years  and  upwards. 

2.  Vocal   Solo.      Own  selection. 

3.  Chorus,   "The  Prayer  Perfect."     (9  to   15  contestants.) 

4.  Trio,   "In  a  Green   Cathedral." 

5.  Poi.      Three   rows — Long,    Short,   Double-short. 

6.  Basketball.      (5   a  side.) 

7.  Athletics. 
Adults: 

1.  Rongopai,  "Nga  Apiha  o  te  Hahi." 

2.  Embroidered   Cushion   Cover   in   Wool. 
Gleaners: 

1.  Cooking. 

2.  Sewing.  (1)  Knitting  Bag  made  from  sugar  bag  and  embroidered 
in  wool.  (2)  Three-piece  Dressing  Table  Set.  Hairpin  work  as 
demonstrated  at  Hui  Tau. 

3.  Athletics. 

Junior   Girls: 

1.  Cooking. 

2.  Trio,   "Stars  of  the  Summer  Night."     Age  limit,   17  years. 

3.  A  Maori  Story  (Legend). 

4.  Elocution. 

5.  Sewing.  (1)  Embroidered  Apron  (Maori  design).  (2)  Knitted 
Scarf.    (Own  design  and  choice  of  colours) 

6.  Athletics. 


Hanuere,   1941  TE  KARERE  543 

Scouting: 

1.  Handicraft  Work — Models,  etc. 

2.  Aerial  Runway.    (1)    Own  blocks  and  tackles  and  ropes.    (2)    Not 
less  than  20ft.  span. 

3.  Signalling.         Morse    and    Semaphore    (sending    and    receiving    the 
greatest  number   of  words  within   4   minutes). 

4.  Fire  Lighting  and  Boiling  the  "Billy."     Own  materials. 

5.  Flagpole   Raising.      Use  any  number  of  guide  ropes. 

Note. — All    Scout    Units    must   be    registered    with    the    New    Zealand 

Council  at  your  nearest  Depot. 
Queen  Voting    (Queen  Entry  Fee,   10/-)  : 


Votes 

Votes 

Marae  Ticket   .  . 

100 

"Te  Karere"  Subscrip 

Contest  Ticket 

5 

tion — 1    Year 

100 

1st   Place 

50 

5   Years 

300 

2nd  Place 

25 

Life     .  . 

500 

3rd  Place             .  . 

15 

Queen  Entry    .  . 

200 

Membership      .  . 

100 

Elocution  (Junior  Girls)  : 

"HOMEWARD  BOUND" 
By  Una  Thompson 

1.  As  I  gazed  at  the  sea  at  sunrise, 

I  thought  of  the  ship  that  was  homeward  bound, 
And  prayed  in  my  heart  that  she  would  reach  port  safely, 
That  there  might  be  nothing  to  run  her  aground. 

2.  I  thought  of  the  noble  souls  aboard  her, 

The  missions  they  had  fulfilled  so  well, 
Of  hundreds  of  miles  they  had  come  to  our  homeland 
With  the  Gospel  Message  to  tell. 

3.  Oh,  Lord!  in  your  tender  mercy,  watch  o'er  them, 

Till  that  ship  reaches  the   other  shore, 
To  deliver  them  safely  in  the  arms  of  their  loved  ones, 
To  travel  the  seas  no  more. 

4.  Thankful  am  I  for  their  guidance, 

And   the   gospel   they  had   brought, 
Of  the  many  trials  and  hardships 
That  they  so   bravely  fought. 

5.  And  may  I  always  be  found  worthy 

Of  the  sacrifices  they  made, 
Doing  my  part,   cheerfully, 
In  valleys,  hills  or  glades. 

6.  I  looked  again  at  sunset, 

At  the  close  of  another  day, 
And   knew  that  ship  was  somewhere, 
Riding  the  crest  of  a  wave. 

7.  With  her  load  of  precious  cargo, 

Sailing   o'er   the   mighty   main, 
Oh,    Father — protect   our   brothers 
Until  we  meet  again. 

COOKING  EVENTS  FOR  NEXT  HUI  TAU 

Try  these  recipes  out  on  your  families.     Start  your  training  now. 
You  might  even  serve  them  for  supper  after  this  month's  social  evening. 

ADULT   CLASS 
Sultan  Cake:  ',     lb,    Sultanas 

1  lb.   Butter  1  cup  Sugar 

4  Eggs  2J  cups  Flour 

I   cup  Milk  2  teaspoon  Baking  Powder 


544  TE  KARERE  Hanuere,  1941 

Cream  butter  and  sugar,  add  eggs  well  beaten;  lastly  dry  ingredi- 
ents: flour,  fruits  and  milk. 
Blackberry   and   Banana  Jam: 

6  lbs.  Blackberries;    2  lbs.  Bananas;    6  lbs.  Sugar. 

Mash  up  the  fruits  and  boil  for  20  minutes  without  water.  Then 
add  the  sugar  and  boil  for  about  15  minutes  longer.  Test  as  usual 
and  seal  when  cold. 

GLEANERS 

Sponge   Sandwich   with   Butter    (Own   choice   of   filling): 
3  Eggs  3   cup  Sugar 

3  tablespoon  Boiling  Water  1   dessertspoon  Butter 

1   cup  Flour  I   small  teaspoon  Soda 

1   small  teasn.  Cream  of  Tartar 
Beat  the  eggs     lightly  for  20  minutes,  then  add  sugar,  flour  and 

powder.      Then  add  melted  butter  and  water. 

Rolled  Oat   Shortbread: 

6   oz.  Butter  2  cups   Rolled   Oats 

i   cup  light  brown  Sugar  1  teaspoon  Baking  Powder 

1   cup   Coconut 

Mix   dry   ingredients   well   together,   melt   butter   and   add   to   dry 

ingredients.      Press  into  well  buttered  tin  and  bake  II  to  2  hours  in  a 

slow  oven.      Cut  into  shapes  while  hot. 

JUNIOR  GIRLS 

Plain  Sponge  Sandwich.  (Own  choice  of  filling.     Same  as  Gleaner  recipe 

without  butter.) 
Afgans: 

6   oz.    Butter  4   oz.    Sugar 

6   oz.   Flour  6   oz.   Cornflakes 

1  tablespoon  \  teaspoon  Salt 

1   small  teaspn.  Baking  Powder 

Cream  together  butter  and  sugar,  add  other  ingredients.  Corn- 
flakes last  of  all. 

DANCE 

1.  Originality  of  Figures  5.     Introduction  and  Finale 

2.  Execution   of   Figures  6.      Rhythm  and  Time 

3.  Poise  and  gracefulness  7.     Execution  of  Steps 

4.  Dress  and  Manner 

COMBINED  ACTION  SONG  AND  HAKA 

Ladies  in  front  and  men  at  back  for  action  song — leader  must  be  a 
lady,  and  men  must  confine  themselves  to  action  song,  not  haka. 
Party  must  not  retire  from  platform,  nor  should  the  curtain  be  drawn 
at  the  end  of  the  action  song.  The  men  must  advance  to  the  front  and 
the  ladies  retire  to  the  rear  immediately.  The  haka  is  then  executed 
under  the  leadership  of  a  male.  The  ladies  must  haka  in  the  rear, 
otherwise  it  is  not  a  combined  action   song  and  haka. 

The  music  for  an  action  song  must  come  from  the  performers, 
although  help  may  be  allowed  from  anyone  else  not  necessarily  a  parti- 
cipant in  the  action  song.  Instruments  may  be  used  in  the  wings  or 
off  stage. 

Notice. — Will  all  associations  which  have  contributed  towards  the 
National  War  Fund  through  their  Gold  and  Green  Ball  efforts  please 
send  the  name  of  the  Branch  and  the  amount  of  the  sum  donated.  We 
would  like  to  have  this  data  on  our  records. 

The  Board  Officers  stand  united  in  extending  heartfelt  thanks  to 
all  Mutual  Members  and  friends  who  have  co-operated  so  splendidly 
to  make  last  year's  work  so  outstanding. 

— M.I.A.    Board. 


ff 


Te  Karere 


•)•) 


Established 


1907 


Wahanga  35 


Pepuere,   1941 


Nama  2 


Matthew    Cowley 
Kelly   Harris 
Eru    T.    Kupa 
Waimate   Anaru 


Tumuaki    Mihana 
Etita 

Kaiwhakamaori 
Kaiwhakamaori 


"Ko  tenei  Pepa  i  zvhakaiapua  hei  hapai  ake  i  te  izvi  Maori  ki 
roto   i  nga  ivhakaaru-uuL' 

"Te  Karere"  is  published  monthly  by  the  New  Zealand  Mission  of  the  Church 
of  Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-day  Saints,  and  is  printed  by  TE  KARERE  PRESS,  No.  2 
Scotia  Place,  Upper  Queen  Street,  Auckland,  C.l,  N.Z.  Subscription  Rates:  3/-  per 
six  months;  5/-  per  year;  £1  for  five  years;  £2/10/-  for  life.  (United  States  Cur- 
rency:  $1.00    per   year;    $4.00   for   five   years;    $10.00    for   life.) 

Address    Correspondence,    Box    72,    Auckland,    C.l,    New    Zealand. 


Contents 

Editorial —  Page 

The  Sacrament  Service,  by  Matthew  Cowley   562 

Special   Features 

Hohepa  Mete,  na   Rawiri  Kainau    550 

!  !e  Mihi,  na  Kemi  \Y.  Witehira  552 

Ala  Nga  Kaiwhakaako — Zion   Back  Cover 

Branch  Teachers'   Message — Zion    Front  Cover 

To  a  World  at  War.  by  First  Presidency  561 

Special   Greetings,  by   President   Rufus  K.   i  tardy   564 

I  Sack-  Picture  Competition   576 

Church    Features 

Mahi    Kura    I  tapati    5?7 

Ripoata  Hui   Pariha   554 

( renealogy   556 

M.I. A.  .  ' 565 

Hui   Tan    566 

Sunday   School    55° 

Primary     571 

News    ?<)7 

Statistics    57'> 

I  Unclaimed  I  on     p  ndeno  560 


550  TE  KARERE  Pepuere,  1941 


HOHEPA  METE 

Poropiti   Pono,  Tika   Hoki 

"  Taku  tautoko  i  aia  " 
¥    Na  RAWIRI  KAMAU 

HE   MIHI — Ki   nga   Etita   o    Te   Karere,   e   hoa 

ma   tena  ra   koutou   katoa,   nga   memo   zchakahaere  o 

tenet  "Mann  Tangi  Pax."     E  mihi  ana  mo  te  pai,  mo  te 

marama  o  nga  ripoata  me  nga  mahi  katoa  e  whaka- 

aturia   ana,    mahi   Kara   Hapati,   Hui   Atawhai,   Miu- 

tara,  nga  korero  o  te  Ao  me  nga  korero  Rongo  Paka- 

nga.    E    mihi   atu   ana   hoki   ki   nga    Hunga    Tapu   otc  Rawiri   Kamau 

Mihana  i  roto  i  te  Tan  Hon,  a  lie  mahara  hoki  ki  te 

ra  o  te  Kirihimete — ki  ta  te  ao — te  ra  whatum  o  te  Ariki,  lac  noa  hoki  te  ra 

whanau  a  tona  pononga  o  Hohepa  Mete,  te  23  o  Tihema.     He  mihi  aroka  hoki 

ki  to  tatou  Timuaki — to  tatou  matua — kia  Kauri  me  tona  whanau,  ara  ki  ton  i 

wahine  me  a  raua  tamariki,  a  Jewell  me  X opera  Takana   Meha. 

Na  Nga  Etita: 

He  Timuaki  Peka  a  Rawiri  Kamau  o  Korongata  i  mua  atu  o  tona  teina 
o  Hamiora  e  Timuaki  ana  i  naianei.  He  tangata  kaha  tenci  i  roto  i  te  Rongopai 
—he  kaha  ki  te  kawc  korero  mo  te  pono  o  tenci  mahi.  Tirohia  ana  korero  pai 
i  roto  i  nga  wharangi  o  nga  "Karere"  o  nga  tan  kua  mutu,  me  nga  "Karere" 
e  haere  ake  net. 

ETE  HUNGA  TAPU,  i  te  mea  kua  hokihoki  o  tatou  tuakana 
kua  tae  ki  te  wa — ki  te  haora  i  mohio  ai  te  Atua  hei  karanga- 

tanga  i  nga  Kaumatua  kia  hoki  atu  .  .  .  kua  noho  rite  tatou ;  kua 
oti  ke  o  tatou  "pa  tuwatawata"  me  o  tatou  whare  tapu,  te  tohunga- 
tanga  tapu  o  Merekiherika  me  to  Arona,  te  mana  tapu  o  te  Atua  i 
tohutohu  ai  o  tatou  Timuaki  Mihana  katoa :  "E  tu  i  runga  i  o  koutou 
turanga  tapu"  kaua  hei  whakawhirinaki  ki  runga  i  tetahi  tangata 
hei  pou  whakawhirinakitanga,  kei  whati,  na  kua  hinga  koe — ka  mate. 
Kahore  tatou  i  te  kuare  ki  nga  whakaaturanga  a  nga  pononga  a  te 
Atua — nga  kaumatua,  "kei  te  haere  mai  te  ra  e  karangatia  ai  matou 
kia  hoki  atu  ki  Hiona." 

E  te  Hunga  Tapu,  kua  tutuki  tenei  korero  panga  whakamua  a  o 
tatou  Timuaki,  no  reira  e  aku  hoa  mahi  puta  noa  te  Mihana — kia  man 
whakawhirinaki  ki  runga  i  to  Tohungatanga  me  nga  ture  o  te  Hahi. 
Te  Kupu  o  te  Matauranga — utua  o  whakatekau — me  utu  hoki  nga 
moni  ohaoha.  Koia  nei  ra  nga  ture  i  whakatakotoria  hei  pupuri  ma 
tatou.  Ki  te  puta  mai  te  wa  o  te  mate-kai,  penei  kei  te  rite  ia  tatou 
enei  ture  te  whakarite — e  noho  rite  ana  tatou.  Ko  taua  wa  o  te 
mate-kai  kei  te  kitea  atu  i  naianei.  Kei  te  tata  mai  kia  tatou.  Kei 
te  mate  ra  te  ao.  E  miriona  ana  nga  tangata  e  mate  ana  o  nga 
whenua  e  pakanga  ana,  a  kei  te  horapa  haere  ki  te  ao  katoa.     Ki 


Pepuere,  1941  TE  KARERE  551 

te  pa  kia  tatou  tenei  mate  e  hara  i  te  Hahi  te  he,  no  nga  Kaumatua 
ranei.  Nuku  atu  i  te  50  tau  inaianei  e  korerotia  ana  tenei  take. 
Nuku  atu  i  te  100  tau  i  korero  a  Hohepa  Mete  i  enei  ture,  noreira 
kihai  tatou  i  waiho  kuaretia  e  nga  pononga  a  te  Atua.  Ki  te  a.hua, 
akuanei  pa  ai  tenei  mamae  kia  tatou  ki  te  Hunga  Tapu — he  kore 
kaore  i  tautoko,  ko  nga  mea  anake  i  whakarite  i  te  ture  noho-puku 
me  te  utu  i  nga  ohaoha  e  whiwhi  a  taua  ra — penei  e  pera  ana  kei  te 
pai,  e  tika  ana  hoki — no  wai  te  he? 

Kaati  mo  enei  wahi  hei  matakitaki  ma  o  tatou  whakaaro  puhoi 
ki  te  whakarite  i  nga  whakahau  a  te  Hahi. 

E  whai  ake  nei  etahi  o  nga  kupu  panga  whakamua  a  Hohepa 
Mete  mai  te  tau  1832  mo  nga  whawhai.  I  tohungia  e  ia  i  mua  atu 
o  te  whawhai  nui  ki  Amerika  ara  te  Civil  War,  ka  timata  ki  Kararaina 
(Carolina),  ka  pakanga  katoa  a  Amerika  ki  aia  ano,  ara  te  tonga  ki  te 
nota,  a  i  muri  iho  ka  karanga  tetahi  taha  kia  Ingarangi  ki  te  awhina 
i  aia.  I  rite  katoa  enei  kupu  panga  whakamua.  Me  titiro  i  roto  i 
te  hitori  o  Amerika  ka  kitea  te  pono  o  tenei  poropititanga.  I  pa  hoki 
ana  korero  i  roto  i  tana  poropititanga.  mo  nga  iwi  taurekareka  o 
Amerika,  ara,  nga  mangu-mangu.  Kaati  i  roto  i  taua  pakanga 
(Civil  War)  ko  tera  tetahi  o  nga  take  nui  o  te  whawhai. 

I  puta  hoki  i  te  Poropiti,  ara,  ia  Hohepa,  etahi  korero  mo  nga 
pakanga  nui  i  pa  ki  te  ao  i  muri  iho  o  te  pakanga  i  Amerika  (Civil 
War).  I  ahu  ki  te  pakanga  nui  o  te  tau  1914-18,  ara  mo  te  nui  o 
nga  mea  kikino  o  taua  wa,  tae  noa  ki  te  mate  "Flu"  i  horapa  ki  te  ao 
katoa  i  muri  iho  o  te  whawhai-nui  "World  War."  I  korero  whaka- 
tupato  ia  ki  tona  iwi,  ki  te  Hahi  mo  aua  ra,  tae  mai  ki  enei  ra,  ki 
nga  ra  o  tenei  pakanga  kino  e  mahi  nei  i  tana  mahi,  nga  tohu  e  tata 
ana  te  wa  o  te  "Hokinga  tuarua  mai  o  te  Tama  o  te  Atua."  Ko  enei 
nga  korero  nui  kaha  a  Hohepa  Mete  hei  matakitaki  ma  tatou  i  roto  i 
tenei  wa  o  te  whawhai.  Kia  man  mahara  Hunga  Tapu  ma.  Tirohia  te 
Akoranga  me  nga  Kawenata,  wahanga  45,  kei  reira  e  hoa  ma  nga  tino 
korero  mo  enei  ra.  E  marama  ana  i  reira  nga  ahuatanga  kei  roto 
nei  tatou  i  naianei  tonu. 

Kei  te  tino  tautoko  ahau,  me  te  whakapono  hoki  i  roto  i  ahau 
lie  Poropiti  pono,  tika  hoki  a  Hohepa  Mete.  He  pononga  tapu  ia 
na  te  Matua  me  te  Tama  i  roto  i  tenei  ritenga  wa.  E  kore  ahau  e 
whakama  ki  te  tautoko  i  nga  main'  me  nga  korero  a  tenei  tangata  tapu, 
a  Hohepa  Mete. 


BOUND  VOLUME  OF  "TE  KARERE,"  1940 

A  limited  number  <>i  bound  volumes  of  the  L940  issue 

of 

Te 

Karcrr  will    s<«>n   lie  available.      Place   your  orders  as   m 

on 

as 

possible  with  Te  Karere,  Box  72,  Auckland. 

552  TE  KARF.RE  Pepuere,  1941 

HE  MIHI 

Na  Hemi  //'.  Whautere 
Kite  Te  Karere : 

Tena  koe  te  kai  waha  i  nga  tikanga  me  nga  mahi  o  te  Mihana 
o  Niu  Tireni  whiti  atu  ki  te  whenua  o  te  Kupu  Whakaari.  Te 
Tumuaki  o  te  Mihana  me  tona  hoa  wahine  me  ta  korua  kotiro,  kia 
ora  ite  tau  hou. 

E  nga  Etita  o  te  Karere  me  te  Hekeretari  o  te  Mihana,  ko  kou- 
tou  nei  nga  Maori  kua  whiriwhiria  hei  mahi  i  ena  mahi  nui  o  te 
Mihana,  e  tuku  atu  ana  ahau  i  aku  mihi  kia  koutou.  Kia  ora  i  te 
tan  hou.     Panuitia  atu  enei  kupu  e  whai  ake  nei. 

Tuaiahi  he  mihi  ki  te  iwi  Maori  o  te  motu.  Tena  koutou  e  nga 
rangatira  e  noho  mai  na  i  o  koutou  marae  waihotanga  iho  a  o  koutou 
matua  kua  poto  kite  po  waiho  iho  ko  koutou  hei  waihotanga  iho  i 
muri  i  a  ratou.  E  nga  mate  o  te  motu,  haere  koutou  ki  nga  iwi 
e  pai  ana  koutou  i  takoto  ki  te  whare  i  tangihia,  i  tanumia ;  no  reira 
haere  i  te  rangimarie,  moe  pai  i  te  moenga  mo  te  katoa. 

Tena  ko  te  mano  e  hinga  mai  ra  i  tera  taha  o  te  ao,  e  kore  e  taea 
te  whakaaro  atu  te  kino.  Kore  he  tangi,  kore  he  tanumanga,  kahore 
he  takotoranga.  Aue,  te  nui  o  tenei  pouri  e  hipoki  nei  ki  nga  iwi 
katoa  o  te  ao.  Me  pehea  ra  he  whakaaro  ake  i  enei  ahuatanga?  E 
te  iwi  Maori,  taku  titiro  tenei  pakanga  mo  nga  tauiwi,  mo  nga  kingi 
e  hara  mo  taua  mo  te  Maori.  Heoi  ano  na  te  mana  o  Ingarangi  me 
te  Tiriti  o  Waitangi  hei  tirohanga,  ae  pea,  kua  tika.  E  te  iwi  Maori 
e  hoki  ki  to  Atua  i  arahina  mai  ra  koe  i  Ihipa  ki  Kenana,  te  whenua 
whakaari.  Kua  wareware  koe  ki  to  Atua:  me  hoki  ano  koe  kia  ara- 
hina ai  koe  ki  te  Whenua  Whakaari  mo  Hohepa.  Kei  nga  puke- 
puke  tu  tonu  te  whenua  e  rerengia  ana  e  te  miraka  me  te  honi. 
Tirohia  a  Amerika  e  rerengia  ana  e  te  miraka  me  te  honi,  e  te  koura 
e  te  hiriwa,  e  te  matauranga  o  runga  o  raro. 

E  te  whanau  ma  e  haere  nei  ki  te  pakanga  e  mail  ki  te  whaka- 
pono  hei  whakangungu  rakau  e  taea  ai  e  koutou  nga  mana  whaka- 
muramura  a  te  wairua  kino  e  inu  ai  i  te  wai  whakama.  E  te  Hunga 
Tapu  e  tino  tika  ana  kia  ataahua  ta  tatou  haere,  kia  kite  ai  nga 
tangata  i  a  tatou  hanga  pai  ka  whakakororia  te  ingoa  o  to  tatou 
Matua  i  te  rangi,  ina  rite  i  a  tatou  nga  tikanga  o  te  Rongopai. 

Ko  te  kai  tupeka,  rama,  hikareti,  piriota,  pai  ke  te  hoatu  hei 
whakatekau,  te  tuku  ranei  mo  te  pakanga  hei  awhina  i  nga  hoia. 
E  kitea  ana  te  raruraru  o  te  ao  kua  kore  e  mohio  pehea  e  tika  ai.  I 
penei  ai  na  te  kore  whakapono.  Nui  ke  te  whakaaro  ki  te  whaka- 
mate  i  te  whakaora.  I  enei  ahua  ka  tino  pohehe  nga  whakaaro. 
Kua  whakaporopiti  etahi  o  nga  Maori. 


Pepuere,  1941  TE  KARERE  553 

Taku  titiro  kua  tino  tika  te  karaipiture  inaianei.  Kua  huna  te 
matauranga  ite  hunga  nunui,  i  te  hunga  whakaaro.  Kua  huri  ki 
nga  kohungahunga  me  nga  kahore  noa  iho  e  mea  e  whakama  ai  te 
hunga  nunui  me  te  hunga  whakaaro. 

Kati  nei  ra  e  nga  taitamariki  mohio  ki  nga  mea  pakeha.  Panuitia 
nga  mea  o  te  ao  ki  te  reo  Maori  hei  titiro  ma  nga  Maori  kia  mohio  ai 
ki  te  pai  o  to  panui  me  to  matauranga  ki  nga  mea  o  te  ao. 

Ki  ora  nga  kaituhi  korero.  Ma  te  Atua  e  homai  nga  pai  mo 
tatou  i  tenei  tau. 


JANUARY  "TE  KARERE"  FRONT-COVER  PICTURE 

For  the  information  of  "Te  Karere" 
readers  who  are  not  acquainted  with  the 
young  man  whose  picture  appears  on  the 
front-cover  of  the  January  (Hanuere) 
Karere,  let  us  introduce  you  to  Nopera 
Takana  Meha  Kauri,  adopted  son  of  Presi- 
dent and  Sister  Cowley. 

Better  known  as  Tony,  this  young  mem- 
ber of  the  Cowley  family  has  been  a  resi- 
dent at  the  Mission  Home  since  he  was 
eleven  months  old.  He  has  endeared  him- 
self to  all  who  have  met  him,  and  nobody 
on  these  islands  has  more  "uncles"  than 
Tony.  Every  Elder  who  has  laboured  in 
this  Mission  since  President  and  Sister 
Cowley  acquired  him  has  claimed  Tony  as 
his  nephew.  And  is  he  proud  of  it?  Just 
ask  Tony. 

A  trait  of  his  Maori  ancestors  is  betrayed  by  the  fact  of  his 
gift  of  oratory.  With  his  hands  gesticulating  and  the  expression 
on  his  face  equalled  only  by  a  seasoned  campaigner,  Tony's  ances- 
tors, to  put  it  colloquially,  "  has  got  nothin'  "  on  Tony.  Of  course 
his  sister,  Jewell,  is  proud  of  him  as  we  all  are  who  have  lived 
with  this  young  man. 

HE  WHAKAATURANGA 

Te  whakaahua  o  te  tamaiti  e  kite  nei  koutou  i  runga  i  te 
whare  (outside  front  cover)  o  te  Karere  o  Hanuere  ko  te  tamaiti 
whangai  a  te  Timuaki  Mihana  raua  ko  tona  wahine,  ko  Sister 
Cowley. 

I  te  Kirihimete  nei  ka  taemai  te  powhiri  a  Eriata  Nopera 
me  tona  iwi  katoa  e  nohomai  ra  i  Porangahau,  Haki  Pei,  kia  tae 
atu  te  Timuaki  me  tona  whamere  katoa  ki  taua  Kirihimete.  Heoi 
ra  i  tae  atu  te  Timuaki  ki  reira.  I  te  po  o  te  Kirihimete  ka  mana- 
akitia  te  tamiti  nei  e  Eriata  Nopera  huaina  ana  te  ingoa  ko 
Nopera  Takana  Meha  Kauri. 

Tekaumawaru  marama  te  pakeke  o  ta  raua  tamaiti  whangai. 
E  peepi  tonu  ana  ka  riro  niai  ta  raua  whangai  a  kua  riro  pu  t<>nu 
naianei  i  a  raua.  He  tamiti  Maori  a  Nopera  a  tino  whakahihi 
raua  ki  ta  raua  whangai.  He  tamiti  matau  rawaatu  hoki  to 
tangata  nei — kua  akona   ki   te   ru   ki   te  hongi  hoki. 


554  TE  KARERE  Pepuere,  1941 

HE  RIPOATA  HUI  PARIHA 

Pei   Whairangi-Ngapuhi 

Na  Hirini  T.  Heremaia 

Te  ripoata  tenei  no  te  hui  pariha  i  te  Takiwa  o  te  Pewhairangi 
i  tu  ki  Puhimoana-Ariki,  Kaikohe,  i  te  21  me  te  22  o  nga  ra  o  Tihema, 
1940. 

Ko  nga  manuhiri  i  taemai  ko  te  Timuaki  Mihana,  me  tona  hoa 
wahine  me  ta  raua  kotiro ;  Te  Ao  Wirihana,  Hekeretari  o  te  Mihana 
mo  nga  mahi  Whakapapa  me  tokowhitu,  no  Tauranga. 

Te  huihuinga  tuatahi  o  tenei  hui  i  tu  i  te  1.30  p.m.  i  te  Ra 
horoi  i  raro  i  te  whakahaere  a  te  Ropu  Whakapapa,  ara,  na  te  kau- 
nihera  Tuarua  o  tenei  Takiwa  na  Hone  Paea  i  whakahaere.  Tino 
pai  tenei  huihuinga.  Ko  te  Kaupapa  o  tenei  karakia  ko  te  whaka- 
marama  i  nga  kororia  o  nga  ao :  te  wahi  i  haeremai  ai  nga  wairua, 
te  ahua  o  te  hokinga  me  era  atu  tini  kupu  pai.  I  whaikorero  hoki 
a  Paepae  Witehira,  he  korero  tino  pai. 

Ko  te  karakia  tuarua  na  te  Paraimere  i  te  7  o  nga  haora  i  raro 
i  te  whakahaere  a  Keita  Ngakuru.  He  nui  nga  mahi  a  tenei  ropu ; 
he  haka,  he  waiata,  he  korero.  No  te  Ngawaha  etahi  o  nga  tamariki. 
Mutu  mai  ta  te  Paraimere  ka  hurihia  te  taima  kite  Miutara.  Note 
Ngawha  ano  etahi,  no  Waimamaku  hoki  etahi.  I  roto  i  tenei  hui- 
huinga ka  poi  te  tiima  tane,  tino  maia  hoki  taua  tiima.  Na  Hoana 
Rapatini  i  ako  enei  tane  ki  te  poi.  Heoi  he  Ratana  ia  ko  ia  tetahi  o 
nga  apiha  wahine  o  te  Miutara  o  te  Pei.  I  whai  kupu  te  wahine  a 
te  Timuaki  a  he  nui  ana  kupu  ki  nga  tamariki  me  nga  matua,  ki  te 
Hunga  Tapu  me  te  hunga  o  waho. 

I  te  Ratapu  te  22  o  nga  ra  i  te  waru  o  nga  haora  ka  tu  nga 
karakia  a  te  Hui  Atawhai  raua  ko  te  Tohungatanga.  Na  Hemi 
Whautere  i  whakahaere  te  Tohungatanga.  I  konei  ka  tukuna  ma 
Hirini  Heremaia  e  karanga  nga  ingoa  o  nga  kaikaiwhau  o  nga  marama 
e  toru  kua  pahure  kia  homai  i  a  ratou  ripoata.  Ka  nui  te  kaha  o  nga 
kaikauwhau  ki  te  haere  kite  whakarite  i  o  ratou  karangatanga. 

I  roto  i  tenei  huihuinga  toko  ono  nga  tangata  i  whakaritea  hei 
kaumatua,  kotahi  i  whakaritea  hei  kai  whakaako.  I  tono  etahi  o 
Ngapuhi  ki  te  Tumuaki  kia  homai  te  Hui  Tau  kia  Ngapuhi  a  tera  tau. 
Ka  mea  te  Timuaki  kia  tae  kite  Hui  Tau  ki  Nuhaka  whiriwhiri  ai. 
I  roto  i  nga  kupu  a  te  Tumuaki  ka  mea  ia  ahakoa  kua  hoki  nga  kau- 
matua he  kaumatua  ano  kei  konei,  no  reira  kaua  e  awangawanga.  He 
tini  nga  patai  marama  katoa  i  te  Timuaki. 

I  te  10.30  o  nga  haora  ka  tu  te  Karakia  a  te  Kura  Hapati.  Na 
Hare  Nehua  i  whakahaere,  Timuaki  takiwa  o  nga  Kura  Hapati  ote 
Pei.  I  roto  i  tenei  karakia  ka  tu  te  mahi  whakataetae  mo  te  pere 
koura  ate  Timuaki  Mihana  me  te  kapu  mo  te  Waiata  Rongopai. 
Ko  te  whakataetae  mo  te  pere  koura  ma  nga  taitamariki  e  waru  tau 


Pepuere,  1941  TE  KARERE  555 

ahu  iho  ki  raro  me  korero  e  ratou  te  Korero  a  ngakau  mo  Tihema 
i  roto  i  te  reo  Maori  i  te  reo  pakeha  ano  hoki.  Tokoiwa  nga  tama- 
riki  i  urn  ki  te  whakataetae — 1  no  Awarua ;  e  4  no  Tautoro ;  e  2 
no  Kaikohe  he  1  no  Mangamuka.  Ko  te  mea  i  wiini  no  Kaikohe, 
a  Meriana  Heremaia.  E  toru  nga  Peka  i  tomo  ki  te  Waiata  Kura 
Rongopai  whakataetae  mo  te  Kapu  ia  Awarua  e  pupuri  ana.  Nga 
ropu  i  uru  no  Awarua,  Tautoro  me  Kaikohe.  I  roto  i  nga  whaka- 
taetae nei  na  te  Timuaki  Mihana  i  tohu,  a  i  roto  i  tenei  whakataetae 
i  wiini  ano  ia  Kaikohe.  I  roto  i  nga  korero  a  te  Timuaki  i  mihi 
ia  ki  nga  matua  o  nga  tamariki  e  kaha  nei  ki  nga  mahi  o  te  Rongopai. 
Na  Hone  Paea  i  whakahaere  te  karakia  Whakapapa  i  te  12  o  nga 
haora.  I  kauwhau  a  Teao  Wirihana  i  runga  i  nga  mahi  whakapapa. 
a  i  muri  iho  ka  whakamarama  ia  i  etahi  take  nui.  I  korero  ano  te 
Timuaki  Mihana  i  roto  i  tenei  karakia.     I  tu  te  karakia  kauwhau 

0  te  2  i  raro  o  te  whakahaere  o  Hemi  W.  Witehira,  a  i  roto  i  tenei 
huihuinga  na  te  Timuaki  Mihana  i  whakahaere  te  pootitanga  o  nga 
Apiha  o  te  Hahi  me  te  Mihana.  I  te  7  i  te  po  i  timata  te  karakia 
mutunga  i  raro  i  te  whakahaere  o  te  Hui  Atawhai,  na  Keita  Xgakuru 
i  whakahaere  i  muri  iho  na  te  Tohungatanga  i  whakamutu  i  raro  ia 
Hirini  T.  Heremaia.  He  nui  ra  nga  mihi  mo  tenei  Hui  ataahua  i 
roto  i  nga  ahua  maha,  i  nga  waiatatanga  a  nga  Koea  o  Kaikohe  me 
Tautoro,  nga  whakahaere  o  te  marae  me  nga  mea  katoa.  Ki  te 
Atua  te  kororia  me  te  honore  mo  tenei  Hui  pai. 

NGA  HUI  PARIHA 

Auckland. 

Ka  tu  te  Hui  Pariha  o  te  Takiwa  o  Akarana  ki  te  taone  a  te 

1  me  te  2  o  nga  ra  o  Pepuere  1941.  He  powhiri  tenei  ki  nga  iwi 
kia  mahara  ki  enei  ra,  haere  mai  ki  te  tautoko  i  tenei  Hui  Pariha  i 
raro  i  te  whakahaere  a  te  Timuaki  Takiwa  hou,  a  William  R.  Perrott. 

Poverty   Bay. 

Ki  nga  huihuinga  tangata.  He  karanga  tenei.  "Haere  mai"  ki  te 
marae  hou— te  POHO-O-RAW  I  R  I.  Gisborne,  i  te  8  me  te  9  o  nga 
ra  o  Pepuere.  Katahi  ano  tenei  marae  ka  ekengia  e  te  Hahi,  no 
reira — HAERE  MAI — mauria  mai  nga  kupu  ora  ki  nga  morehu  a 
te  Kani-a-takirau,  rangatira  nui  o  te  Tai-rawhiti  nei.     Haere  mai. 

I [enare    I [anion 
Tipi  Kopua 
I  Mn'l  Aspinall 

Timuakitanga   Takiwa. 

Waikato. 

Haere  mai  ki  te   Hui    I'anhaka  in  ki    Puke  TapU,   MnnlK    West, 

ate  22  me  te  23  o  nga  ra  o  Pepuera,  1941.     Haere  mai  e  hoa  ma 

ki  te  matakitaki   i  nga  malii   e  tika  ana   mo  tan  mi   i   roto  i   enei   ra. 

Iluirx    .Marshall. 

Timuaki  Takiwa. 


556  TE  KARERE  Pepuere,  1941 

KO   NGA   KAI-KAUWHAU   MO   NGAPUHI    MO   NGA 
MARAMA  O  PEPUERE,  MAEHE  ME  APERIRA 

WIKI  TUARUA 

Hare  Nehua  me  Pita  Nehua    Mangamuka 

Tiata  Witehira  me  Pane  Herewini    Matauri  Bay 

Rangi  Wharemate  me  Pane  Herewini Ngawha 

Rehopoama  Heke  me  William  Palmer Mangakahia 

Wiremu  Tamihana  me  Hohepa  Tanu Whangaruru 

Tirarau  Renata  me  Waimate  Wihongi    Kaikou 

Marore  Piripi  me  Wi  Wharekura  Heta Whangaroa 

WIKI TUATORU 

Pere  Hereroa  me  Haki  Paewhenua Waiomio 

Hemi  Joyce   me   Mahuika  Otene    Kaikohe 

Em   T.   Kupa  me   Huiki   Kupa    Waimamaku 

Hori  Ruwhiri  me  Hare  Herewini Mataraua 

Pita  Pene   me   Hirini   Pita    •  . Waikare 

Frederick  Beezley  me  Iraia  Palmer Mokau 

Rangi  Te  Haki  me  Remana  Heke    Mangakahia 

Ray  V.  Going  me  Paepae  Witehira 59  Kamo  R.,  Whangarei 

WIKI  TUAWHA 

Hirini  T.  Heremai  me  Wehi  Heta Whare  karakia  Mihinare 

me   te   Ratana,    Kaikohe 

Mairangi  Ngakuru  me  Katuki  Ngakuru    Whirinaki 

Manihera   Kauwhata   me   Whakaita  Kauwhata    Utakura 

Wiremu  Te  Whata  me  Tamatai  Rakena    Mataraua 

Aperahama  Wharemate  me  Tuhiwai  Wharemate    Kaikohe 

Taite  Rewi  me  Henare  Hoterene    Takahiwai 

Wiremu  Peihopa  me  Hone   Peepe    Ruatangata 

Hepi  Haika  me  Wi  Hetaraka Punaruku 

Koroniria   Tari   me   Hono   Wihongi    Tautoro 

Ngaro  Tia  me  George  Telford    Awarua 

Riki  Reihana  me  Tane  Heringitana Te  Horo 

Hare  Pita  me  Haehae  Taniora    Whananaki 

— Na  nga  Timuakitanga  Takiwa. 


GENEALOGY 

By  Teao  Wirihana 

Cottage  Meetings  for  the  month  of  February. 

Feb.     6 — Lesson   16,   "Other   Children   of   Lehi." 
„      13 — Lesson   17,   "Ancestry   of   Hyrum   De   Fries." 
„      20 — Lesson   18,   "Maori  Traditions  and  Genealogies." 
„     27 — Lesson   19,   "The  Gathering  of  the  Nations-Pagent." 

Home  Teaching. 

Mahia  nga  whakapapa,  kua  noho  mokemoke  te  Mihana,  ite 
kore  kaumatua.  Te  whakahau  mai  o  Hiona  ki  te  Poari  Mahi 
Whakapapa  kia  nuku  atu  te  kaha,  no  te  mea  kua  waiho  te  mahi  ki 
te  Iwi  Maori.  Awhina-tia  te  Timuaki  Mihana  kia  teretere  nga 
whakapapa  "Ko  wai  kahua  ko  wai  ka  tohu."  Ka  hoki  te  Timuaki 
ka  noho  tonu  ra  nei. 
Whakatauki. 

"Mauri  mahi  mauri   ora,   mauri  mangere  mauri  mate." 


Pepuere,  1941  TE  KARERE  557 

MAHI  KURA  HAPATI 

RATAPU  TUATAHI: 

AKORANGA  41.  Upoko  2 

Te  Atua  me  te  Tokotoru  Tapu: 

Tae  noa  ki  te  wa  o  Hohua  me  nga  kai-whakariterite,  a  i  te  wa  hoki 
o  nga  Kingi  kua  whakaatu  tonu  te  Atua  i  Tona  mana  me  la  hoki  kia 
Iharaira.  I  kite  a  Ihaia  i  te  Ariki  e  noho  ana  i  runga  i  te  Torona  i 
waenganui  i  tetahi  ropu  whai  kororia,  na  ko  tana  kianga  ake  "aue  te 
mate  moku  ka  ngaro  hoki  ahau,  he  tangata  ngutu  poke  hoki  ahau  e 
noho  ana  i  waenganui  i  te  iwi  nugutu  poke,  kua  kite  nei  oku  kanohi  i 
te  Kingi,  ia  Ihowa  o  nga  Mano."  I  tetahi  wa  i  muri  mai  i  te  puea- 
tanga  ake  o  te  Karaiti  i  nga  wai  o  te  iriiritanga  rumaki,  i  rangona  te 
reo  o  te  Matua  e  mea  ana  "Ko  taku  Tama  tenei  i  aroha  ai,  ko  Taku 
i  ahuareka  ai."  Ia  Tipene  e  ngaua  ana  e  te  mamae  i  aia  i  mate  i  raro 
i  nga  ringa  o  tona  iwi  tutu,  matapo  hoki  i  runga  i  o  ratou  whakaaro 
ake,  ka  tuwhera  nga  rangi  a  ka  kite  ia  i  te  kororia  o  te  Atua,  me  Ihu 
e  tu  ana  i  te  ringaringa  matau  o  te  Atua. 

Nga  Patai: 

1.  Tae  noa  ki  tehea  wa  te  whakaatu  tonu  o  te  Ariki  ki  te  whanau 
o  Iharaira? 

2.  He  aha  te  take  i  aue  ai  a  Ihaia? 

3.  Pehea  te  reo  i  rangona  i  te  wa  o  Tona  iriiringa? 

4.  He  aha  te  whakakitenga  kia  Tipene  i  te  wa  i  whakamatea  ai  ia? 

RATAPU  TUARUA 

AKORANGA  42 

Kii  pu  te  Pukapuka  a  Moromona  i  nga  mea  e  pa  ana  mo  nga 
korero,  take  hoki  i  waenganui  i  te  Atua  me  tona  iwi,  ko  te  nuinga  he 
kitenga  a  nga  minitatanga  o  nga  anahera  me  te  whakaatu  tonu  mai 
ano  hoki  o  te  Atua  i  Aia  ake.  Na,  kua  korero  tatou  mo  tetahi  iwi 
i  mahue  atu  nei  ia  ratou  te  pourewa  o  Papera  a  ahu  atu  ana  ta  ratou 
haere  ki  te  tuawhenua  ki  te  hauauru  i  raro  i  te  whakahaeretanga  o 
tetahi  o  ratou,  e  karangatia  nei  i  roto  i  nga  tuhituhinga  ko  te  teina  o 
Iarere.  I  aia  e  takatu  ana  mo  te  haere  a  moana  ka  inoi  taua  tangata 
ki  te  Ariki  kia  whakapa  mai  ki  tona  ringa  ma  reira  hoki  e  marama 
ai  etahi  kohatu  e  whiwhi  ai  te  hunga  haere  he  maramatanga  mo  roto  i 
o  ratou  kaipuke.  Te  whakahoki  mo  tenei  inoi  .  .  .  ka  totoro  mai  te 
ringa  o  te  Ariki,  ka  pa  ki  nga  kohatu  kitea  atu  ana  Tona  ringa,  whaka- 
miharo  tonu  taua  tangata  i  te  kitenga  atu  i  te  ringa  ano  no  te  tangata, 
katahi  te  Ariki,  i  te  ahuareka  ki  te  nui  o  te  whakapono  o  taua  tangata 
ka  whakakite  mai  i  Aia,  a  ka  whakaatu  mai  ki  te  teina  o  Iarere,  ko 
te  tangata  he  mea  ata  hanga  ki  te  ahua  ake  o  te  Kai-hanga. 

Ki  nga  Niwhai  i  noho  nei  ano  ratou  ki  te  tuawhenua  ki  te  hauauru 
ka  whakakitea  e  te  Karaiti  a  Ia  ano  kia  ratou  i  muri  mai  i  tona  ripe- 
katanga  me  te  kakenga  atu.  Ki  enei  hipi  o  te  kahui  ki  te  hauauru  i 
whakaatu  tuturu  Ia  mo  Tona  mana  i  raro  mai  Ia  i  te   Matua. 

Nga  Patai: 

1.  He   whakaaturanga   ano    koi   te    pukapuka    a    Moromona    mo   to 
ahua  i  waenganui  i  te  Atua  me  Tona  iwi? 

2.  Ko  wai  tetahi  tangata   i   korero,   i   kite  hoki   i   te   Atua   no  te  wa 
o  te  Pourewa  o   Papera? 

3.  He  aha  i  ahuareka  ai  te  Atua  ki  aia? 

4.  He  aha   te    una    i    tono   ai    ia   ki    te    .Atua   a    he   alia    hoki    to   mea 
i  miharo  ai   ia? 

5.  I  roto  i  te  whakautu  Ki  tona  inoi  mo  nga  whakakitenga  ki  aia. 

he  aha  to  maramatanga  nui   i   puta  kia  tatou? 


558  TE  KARERE  Pepuere,  1941 

RATAPU  TUATORU 

AKORANGA  43 

Nga  whakakitenga  i  tenei  wehenga  o  nga  wa.  Kua  whakakite  te 
Atua  i  Aia  ano  ki  tona  iwi.  Na  te  whakapono  me  te  whakaaro  pono 
ka  whiwhi  a  Hohepa  Mete  i  aia  ano  e  tu  tamarikitia  i  te  whakakitenga 
mai  a  te  Atua  i  Aia,  me  te  whiwhi  nui  kia  kite  tonu  i  te  Matua  Ora- 
tonu  me  Ihu  Karaiti  ;Tona  Tama.  Ko  tana  whakaaturanga  mo  Te 
Matua  kaore  i  tuaina  ki  runga  ki  nga  kupu  tuku  iho  o  nehe.  Ki  ana 
whiriwhiri  i  roto  i  nga  akoranga  e  whakamohio  ai  ia  ki  te  ao — "e  ora 
ana  Raua  tokorua,  te  Matua  me  te  Tama,  i  te  mea  kua  kite  ia  i  o  raua 
tinana,  kua  rongo  hoki  i  o  raua  reo."  Hei  tapiri  ki  tenei  whaka- 
aturanga kua  tuhia  ake  nei  tera  ano  a  Hohepa  Mete  me  Hirini  Riki- 
tana  ia  Pepuere  16,  1832,  i  kite  raua  i  te  Tama  a  te  Atua,  i  korero 
tahi  hoki  me  Ia  i  roto  i  tetahi  whakakitenga.  "I  a  maua  e  whaka- 
aroaro  ana  ki  enei,  i  meinga  e  te  Ariki  o  maua  kanohi  kia  kite  i  te 
maramatanga,  e  kanapa  ana  te  kororia  o  te  Ariki,  a  i  kite  ano  mua  i  te 
kororia  o  te  Tama  kei  te  ringa  matau  o  te  Matua,.  i  wtawhi  hoki 
ki  tona  raneatanga,  a  i  kite  hoki  i  nga  anahera  tapu,  nga  tangata  hoki 
kua  whakapaua  nei  i  mua  i  Tona  torona,  e  karakia  ana  ki  te  Atua  raua 
ko  te  Reme,  a  ka  koropiko  hoki  ratou  ki  Aia  mo  ake  ake  tonu  atu. 
Ko  tenei,  ahakoa  ra  he  maha  nga  whakaaturanga  kua  oti  noa  te  whaka- 
atu  mona  ko  tenei  te  mutunga  o  nga  whakaaturanga  katoa  te  hoatu  nei 
e  maua  Mona,  ara,  kei  te  ora  Ia,  no  te  mea  i  kite  maua  i  Aia,  kei  te 
ringa  matau  hoki  o  te  Atua,  i  rongo  hoki  maua  ki  te  reo  e  whakaatu 
mai  ana  ko  Ia  anake  te  tamaiti  a  te  Matua  i  roto  i  te  kikokiko.,  Nana 
hoki,  na  roto  i  Aia  e  tu  nei  nga  ao,  Nana  hoki  i  hanga,  a  ki  nga  iwi  o 
te  ao  Nana  hoki  i  hanga,  a  ko  nga  iwi  o  te  ao  nei  kua  oti  te  karanga 
he  tamariki  na  te  Atua."  .  .  .   (Ako.  me  nga  Kawe,  76:  19-24) 

Nga   Patai: 

1.  He  aha  te  kaupapa  o  nga  korero  mo  tenei  wahanga? 

2.  He   pehea  te   whakaaturanga   a   Hohepa   Mete? 

3.  He   aha  ia  i  whiwhi   ai  ki  tenei  whakaaturanga? 

4.  He   aha  te  whakaaturanga  hei  tapiri  mo  te  mea  kia  Hohepa 
Mete? 

5.  Ko  wai  ma  hoki  i  whiwhi  ki  tenei  whakaaturanga? 

6.  Korerotia  nga  wahi  nunui  o  taua  whakaaturanga? 

RATAPU   TUAWHA 

AKORANGA  44 

Ia  Aperira  3,  1836,  i  roto  i  te  temepara  i  Katarani,  Ohaio,  ka 
whakaatu  mai  te  Ariki  i  Aia  ano  kia  Hohepa  Mete  me  Oriwa  Kautere, 
i  mea  ia  i  taua  wa,  "I  kite  maua  i  te  Ariki  e  tu  ana  i  runga  i  te  papa- 
rewa,  i  mua  ia  maua,  i  raro  i  Ona  waewae,  tetahi  mahi  whakamiharo, 
koura  para  kore  tonu,  rite  ki  te  ngarehu  wera,  Ona  kanohi  ano  he 
mura  ahi,  Ona  huruhuru  ma  tonu  ano  he  hukarere,  Tona  mata  whiti 
tonu,  kei  runga  ake  i  te  maramatanga  o  te  ra,  Tona  reo  ano  ko  te 
harurutanga  o  nga  wai  maha,  ko  te  reo  o  Ihowa  e  mea  ana — "Ko  Ahau 
te  Tuatahi  me  te  Mutunga,  ko  Ahau  ano  e  ora  nei,  i  mate  ano  Ahau,  ko 
Ahau  ta  korua  kai-whakaatu  ki  te  Matua." 

Nga    Patai: 

1.  No  tehea  wa  tenei  whakaaturanga  kia  Hohepa  Mete  me  Oriwa 
Kautere? 

2.  Ko  wai  ta  raua  i  kite  ai? 

3.  Pehea  hoki   Tona   ahua   i   to   raua  kitenga   atu? 

4.  He  aha  te  reo  i  rangona  e  raua? 

5.  Pehea  nga  kupu  mai  a  taua  reo  kia  raua? 


Pepuere,  1941 


TE  KARERE 


559 


Sunday   £chool 


Hohepa   M.   Meha,   Superintendent  Eru   T.   Kupa,   Assistant  Superintendent 

James   R.    Elkington,   Assistant   Supt.  Kelly    Harris,    Secretary 

Lessons    compiled   by    Hohepa    M    Meha   and    Eru    T.    Kupa. 


Andante. 


After  Co  wen. 


i        -0-     •&- 


SACRAMENT  GEM 

Hush,  hush !  be  ev'ry  sound  subdued, 
They  may  not   softly  harmonize 

With  faith  and  trust  and  gratitude, 
For  Christ's  atoning  sacrifice 

The  matchless  love  betokened  thus 

Claims  most  sincere  response  from  us. 

POSTLUDE 


Soft  9ft  stop 


is  «,        a    no  in  CONCERT  RECITATION 

Matthew  4:  18-19. 

"And  Jesus  walking  by  the  Sea  of  Galilee,  saw  two  brethren, 
Simon,  called  Peter,  and  Andrew,  his  brother,  casting  a  net  into  the 
sea;  for  they  were  fishers.  And  he  said  unto  them,  Follow  me  and 
T  will  make  you  fishers  of  men." 

„,    .     f        ',n  KORERO  A  NGAKAU 

Matin  4:  18-19. 

"A  i  a  Ihu  e  haere  ana  i  te  taha  o  te  moana  o  Kariri,  ka  kite  la 
i  etahi  tangata  tokorua,  he  tuakana,  he  teina,  i  a  Haimona,  tona  ingoa 
nei  ko  Pita,  raua  ko  tona  teina,  ko  Anaru,  e  tnaka  ana  i  te  Inip'enga  ki 
te  moana;  he  kai  hao  hoki  raua.  Na  ka  mea  ia  ki  a  raua.  Arumia  mia 
ahau,  a  maku  korua  e  mea  hei  kaihao  tangata." 

HYMNS 

"Te  Kupu  a  te  Atua,  te  Reo  Poropiti" Page  10 

"The  Joy  and  the  Song"    Page    1  I  »*> 


560  TE  KARERE  Pcpucrc.  1941 

UNCLAIMED  CORRESPONDENCE 

N.B. Anyone     knowing     the     whereabouts     of     the     persons     given 

hereunder  kindly  forward  the  correct  addresses  to  "Te  Karere." 
Numerous  issues  of  "Te  Karere"  have  been  returned  unclaimed  and 
we   are   endeavouring    through   this   column    to   better   serve   all    Readers. 

Editors. 

Since  July. 

Graham  Kauwhata,  unknown. 
Since  September. 

Rosina  Watene,   Pukekohe. 

Henry  M.  Davies,  Rotorua ;  also  Air  Training  Base,  Hobsonville 

Wikitoria  Poutu,  c/o  Wi  Taylor,  Kawakawa. 

Since  October. 

Patukohuru   Paraha,   Waiomio,   Kawakawa. 

Hone  Kapa,  Pokere,  via  Kawakawa. 

Rebecca  Smith,  Nuhaka,  P.O. 

Rangi  Te  Haki,  R.M.D.,  Mangakahia,  Whangarei  and  Kaikohe. 

Kohi  Moon,  R.M.D.,  Awarua,  Whangarei  and  Kaikohe. 

Wahangu   Neho,   R.M.D.,   Awarua,   Whangarei. 

Jimmy  Kemp,  Box  16,  Waharoa. 

Since  November. 

Ada  Hira,  19  Second  Ave.,  Wairoa,  H.B. 
Mrs.  Wiki  Aramakutu,  Te  Araroa  P.O. 
Tamati   Ngatoro,  Te  Araroa  P.O. 
Kathleen  Williams,  P.O.  Kaikohe. 

Since  December. 

Miss  Betty  Aubrey,  Thames  Public  Hospital,  Thames. 

Hori  Eramiha  Neho,  R.M.D.,  Awarua,  Whangarei  and  Kaikohe. 

Marjory  Bryan,  Box  72,  Auckland. 

Grace  Haratua,  Box  72,  Auckland. 

Again  let  us  remind  all  who  can  be  of  service  to  their  neighbour 
to  communicate  with  "Te  Karere"  as  soon  as  possible  about  the  above 
names.  Perhaps  it  would  be  to  our  mutual  good  if  proper  postal 
address  is  given  along  with  rural  address,  viz.:  Awarua,  via  Whangarei, 
which  by  the  returned  mail  has  been  changed  by  P.O.  officials  to  read, 
Awarua,    Kaikohe. Editors. 


AUCKLAND  DISTRICT  CONFERENCE 

President  William  R.  Perrott  of  the  Auckland  District  is 
pleased  to  announce  that  during  the  week-end  February  1st 
and  2nd,  1941,  a  Conference  (Hui  Pariha)  will  be  held  at 
the  L.D.S.  Chapel,  Queen  Street,  Auckland,  and  the  Manchester 
Hall,  corner  of  Hobson  and  Victoria  Streets,  Auckland.  All 
are  cordially  invited  to  partake  of  the  spiritual  good  that  bless 
those  who  attend. 


Pepuere,  1941 


TE  KARERE 


561 


TO  A  WORLD  AT  WAR 

The  meeting  of  the  Saints  in  this  General  Conference  finds  the 
world  still  war-torn.  Millions  of  the  Lord's  children  are  suffering 
and  mourning.  All  the  woes  and  misery  that  attend  armed  conflict 
are  spending  their  force  upon  them. 

From  these  afflicted  peoples  comes  the  prediction  that  the 
approaching  winter  will  bring  famine.  If  famine  shall  come,  the 
history  of  the  past  shows  it  will  likely  bring  plagues  with  it. 

Our  brethren  and  sisters  are  found  on  both  sides  of  this 
terrible   struggle.      On   each   side  they  are   bound   to  their   country 

by    all    the    ties    of     come  to   aim  at  the 

blood,       relationship  A   statement   t0   all        complete  subjugation 

and  patriotism.  men    from    the    First        or   extermination   of 

As  always  happens        Presidency      of      the        the  other, 
in    such   cases     each        S"f*^"ffl        .    This  would  be  an 
side     claims     to     be-        presented  at  the  open-        inhuman     and     un- 
lieve  it  is  in  the  right.        ing     session     of     the        righteous       purpose. 
Each  claims   to    feel        }}lt]?>       semi-annual        Gocps  requires 

•  ,    •      r    t,-         r        -x  Conference,  October  4,         ,.     ,         .     J     .  1,, 

it  is  fighting  for  its        194q  that  nations  shall  live 

very  existence.  As  Taken  from  the  De-  m  peace  and  amity, 
the  war  progresses  cember,  1940,  issue  of  one  with  another, 
in  its  cruelty  and  The  Improvement  Era.  The  Master's  corn- 
horror,    each    may     mand  was : 


"Love  your  enemies,  do  good  to  them  which  hate  you.  Bless 
them  that  curse  you,  and  pray  for  them  which  dcspitefullx  use  you." 
—Luke  6 :  27-28. 

The  Saints  on  either  side  have  no  course  open  to  them  but  to 
support  that  Government  to  which  they  owe  allegiance.  But  their 
prayers  should  go  up  day  and  night  that  God  will  turn  the  hearts 
of  their  leaders  towards  peace,  that  the  curse  of  war  may  end. 

God  is  not  pleased  either  with  war,  or  with  the  wickedness 
which  always  heralds  it.  When  He  uses  war,  it  is  to  wipe  out  sin 
and  unrighteousness.  The  hearts  of  all  the  Saints  arc  torn  with  grief 
over  the  sufferings  of  their  brethren  and  sisters  who  are  taking  part 
in  this  struggle.  So,  for  the  Saints  this  is  a  fratricidal  conflict. 
They  so  mourn  over  it.  Their  prayers  ascend  to  our  Heavenly 
Father  that  the  war  may  come  to  a  speed)   end. 

To  those  Saints  who  are  stricken  by  this  great  tragedy,  we  say 
live  righteously,  pray  constantly,  and  the  Lord  will  answer  as  your 
faith  and  works  and   I  lis  all-wise  purposes  allow    Mini. 

To  those  whose  wickedness  lias  brought  this  strife  and  turmoil, 

we  say  repent  lest  the  I  «ord  shall  smite  you  in  I  lis  wrath.  He  Will 
not  hold  you  guiltless  of  the  innocent  blood  of   your   fellow    nun. 

To  all  the  nations,  we  say  adjust  your  differences  b)  peaceful 
means.     This  is  the  Lord's  way. 

"Blessed  are  the  peachtnakerss  for  they  shall  be  called  the  child- 
ren of  God"      Matt.  5:9.  (Continued  on  page  564) 


562  TE   KARERE  Pepuere.  1941 


&lutx\uil 


THE  SACRAMENT  SERVICE 

"Wherefore  whosoever  shall  eat  this  bread,  and  drink  this  cup  of  the  Lord, 
unworthily,  shall  be  guilty  of  the  body  and  blood  of  the  Lord. 

"But  let  a  man  examine  himself,  and  so  let  him  eat  of  that  bread  and  drink 
of  that  cup. 

"For  he  that  eateth  and  drinketh  unworthily,  eateth  and  drinketh  damnation 
to  himself,  not  discerning  the  Lord's  body. 

"For  this  cause  many  are  weak  and  sickly  among  you,  and  many  sleep." 
(1st  Cor.  11:27-30.) 

The  most  sacred  service  of  religious  worship  is  that  of  the 
sacrament.  Through  this  service  the  religionist  is  brought  into 
proximity  to  the  spiritual  force  and  exalting  power  of  the  perfect 
character  of  the  Son  of  God. 

The  law  of  the  sacrifice  instituted  in  the  days  of  Adam  was 
filled  in  the  death  of  the  Saviour.  The  greater  law,  that  of  the 
sacrament,  is  fulfilled  only  in  the  eating  of  the  bread  and  the  drink- 
ing of  the  cup,  worthily,  during  the  sacrament  service  of  the  Church. 

There  is  no  substitute  for  this  divine  ritual  in  God's  plan  of 
redemption  and  regeneration. 

Adam  and  his  posterity,  down  through  the  ages,  offered  the 
firstlings  of  their  flocks  and  the  best  of  their  fruits  in  anticipation 
of  the  fulfilment  of  the  law  of  sacrifice  in  the  death  of  "The  Lamb 
without  blemish,"  which  fulfilment  would  bring  to  them  a  redemp- 
tion from  transgression  of  divine  injunctions. 

Only  the  best  was  acceptable  to  the  Lord  as  a  sacrifice.  The 
excellence  of  the  sacrificial  offering  was  a  convincing  reminder  that 
a  redemption  from  sin  should  come  only  through  the  supreme  sacri- 
fice of  one  possessed  of  the  attributes  ascribed  to  Jesus  the  Christ. 

As  the  day  approached  for  the  fulfilment  of  the  old  law  the 
new  law  of  the  sacrament  was  instituted.  Christ,  as  the  days  of  the 
earthly  ministry  drew  to  a  close,  called  His  disciples  together  and 
administered  unto  them  the  "Sacrament  of  the  Last  Supper." 
He  blessed  the  broken  bread  and  the  cup,  and  as  He  passed  to  each 


Pepuere,  1941  TE  KARERE  563 

the  sanctified  emblems,  He  admonished  the  disciples  to  "do  this  in 
remembrance  of  me,  for  as  often  as  ye  eat  this  bread  and  drink 
this  cup,  ye  do  shew  the  Lord's  death  till  He  come." 

In  showing  the  Lord's  death  by  obedience  to  this  holy  ordinance, 
the  partaker  of  the  sacrament  solemnly  reaffirms  the  baptismal 
covenant  to  take  upon  himself  the  name  of  the  Son,  and  always 
remember  Him,  and  keep  His  commandments  which  He  has  given 
him. 

The  Lord,  being  aware  of  man's  tendency  to  transgress  the 
law,  and  that  "it  is  human  to  err"  has  enjoined  His  Church  to  "meet 
together  often"  and  partake  of  the  emblems  of  His  redeeming  sacri- 
fice, and  to  offer  up  their  sacraments  that  they  may  more  fully  keep 
themselves  unspotted  from  the  world. 

The  administration  of  the  sacrament  as  a  component  of  religi- 
ous worship  is  so  essential  that  the  words  in  the  prayer  of  sanctifica- 
tion  have  been  given  by  direct  revelation  from  God  for  this  specific 
purpose.  Words  other  than  those  contained  in  the  revelation  will 
fail  to  sanctify  the  bread  and  the  cup  to  the  souls  of  those  worthy 
to  partake  of  them.  In  the  blessing  pronounced  upon  the  sacred 
emblems  of  the  Master's  great  sacrifice  the  Priest  repeats  God's  own 
words — words  which  carry  inspiration  to  the  heart  and  soul  of  every 
participant  in  this  holy  ritual. 

The  sabbath  is  the  day  appointed  for  sacrament  service.  In  the 
religious  worship  of  this  day  every  member  of  the  Church  is  ex- 
pected to  present  himself  before  the  sacrament  board  and  renew 
his  covenants  with  his  Redeemer.  For  those  who  neglect  this  duty 
there  is  no  covenant  renewal  and  the  Lord  will  not  hold  them 
blameless. 

The  vitality  of  the  Church  lies  in  the  obedience  of  ils  members 
to  the  divine  plan  and  this  vitality  comes  Erom  the  frequent  com- 
munion ol"  the  Saints — meeting  together  often,  and  with  contrite 
spirits,  partaking  of  the  sacrament  of  the  Lord's  Supper. 

"But  remember  that  on  1 1 1  i ->  the  Lord's  day,  then  shalt  offer  thine  oblations 
and  thy  sacraments  unto  the  M<>^i  High,  confessing  thj  sins  unto  thy  brethren, 
and  before  the  lord." 

— Mai  rii  k\\    t  o\\  i  i  \ 


564 


TE  KARERE 


Pepuere,  1941 


Special ! 

CHRISTMAS  GREETINGS  to 
President  Cowley's  Family, 
Saints  and  Friends  from 
President  RUFUS  K.  HARDY 

Received  after  the  Christmas  holi- 
days the  following  cablegram  from 
former  Mission  President  Rufus  K. 
Hardy,  of  the  Council  of  Seven  Presi- 
dents of  Seventies,  reads  thus : — 

"Salt  Lake  City,  Utah.  President 
Matthew  Cowley,  Box  72,  Auckland, 
New  Zealand:  Merry  Christmas.  The 
Lord's  blessing  upon  you,  wife  and 
daughter  and  all  Saints  and  Friends  whom  we  love  in  your  beloved 
land. — Rufus  K.  Hardy." 

President  Cowley  regrets  that  this  message  has  been  so  late 
in  reaching  the  Saints  and  Friends,  but  owing  to  the  Christmas  holi- 
days its  arrival  at  Headquarters  was  delayed.  Suffice  to  say,  how- 
ever, the  thoughts  and  spirit  of  Timuaki  Ruwhara  was  not  far  away 
from  us,  and  this,  we  feel  sure,  more  than  compensates  its  late  arrival 
to  the  Saints  and  Friends  in  the  Mission. 

— The  Editors. 


(Continued  from  page  561) 

How  infinitely  greater  it  is  to  lead  nations  to  peace,  than  to  sub- 
due a  nation  to  chains.  Let  America  put  her  house  in  order,  for- 
sake selfishness,  greed  and  avarice,  abolish  unrighteousness,  wipe 
hate  from  her  heart,  hold  in  loyal  friendship  the  good  and  upright 
of  all  nations  and  peoples.  Then  to  her  shall  come  the  high  destiny 
of  the  peacemaker. 

We  humbly  pray  our  Heavenly  Father,  that  He  will  send  to 
the  earth  His  messengers  of  peace,  that  this  terrible  war  shall 
afflict  no  more  nations  and  spread  no  farther  over  the  face  of  the 
land,  that  fear  and  frenzy  shall  be  driven  out  from  their  place  among 
the  peoples,  that  hate  shall  be  banished  from  the  souls  of  men,  for 
where  hate  abides,  there  righteousness  cannot  live,  that  sanity  shall 
again  assert  its  sway,  and  that  love  shall  fill  the  hearts  of  men  even 
to  overflowing. 

THE  FIRST  PRESIDENCY. 


Pepuere,  1941  TE  KARERE  565 

^Mutual  improvement  ^Association 

Y.M.M.I.A. 
Tapsell    Meha,    Secretary 
Y.W.M.I.A. 
Una    Thompson,    President  Wiki    Katene,    Second    Counsellor 

Heni   T.    Ngaio,    First  Counsellor  Annie    W.    Meha,    Secretary. 

HUI  TAU  M.I.A.  ATHLETIC  PROGRAMME 

(Some  of  the  events  are  in  January  issue  of  "Te  Karere") 
ACTIVITIES    continued    from    page    542,    January,    1941 
Mixed    Contest. 

8.  Tug-o-War — 8   a  side. 

9.  Dance,   "Valeta  Waltz."    Fifty  years  and  upwards. 

M.  Men. 

5.  100   Yards   Sprint. 

6.  220  Yards  Sprint. 

7.  440  Yards  4  men  Relay. 

8.  880   Yards  Dash. 

9.  Hop,  Step  and  Jump. 

10.  High  Jump. 

11.  Javelin  Throw. 

12.  Throwing  the  Discus. 

13.  Shot  Put. 

Gleaners. 

3.  75  Yards  Sprint. 

4.  100  Yards  Obstacle  Race. 

5.  400  Yards  4  Gleaners'  Relay. 

Explorers. 

3.  75  Yards  Sprint. 

4.  100    Yards    Sprint. 

5.  440  Yards  4  Explorers'  Relay. 

Junior    Girls. 

6.  50  Yards  Sprint. 

7.  220  Yards  4  Junior  Girls'   Relay. 

8.  75  Yards  Skipping.     Bring  own   rope. 

9.  Basketball.  (7  players.)  Rules  same  as  last  year  for  both 
Gleaner  and  .Junior  Girls.  Each  .M.l.A.  MUST  Bupply  own  ball 
and  provide  a  competenl   referee. 

Ladies    (Adults   and   Gleaners): 

i.  Trio,  "There's  a  Home  in  the  Heart  of  the  Hills"  instead  of 
what   was  announced  in  January  "Te  Karere." 

{Cooking: 

N.B.     On  page  6  i  I  of  the  Hanuere  Issue  of  "Te  Karere"  th< 
a   recipe   r<>r  the  Junior  Girl     cooking  with   which  there   i-  an  added 
correction.     The  item  winch  reads  "i  tablespoon"  should  be  completed 
and  Its  correcl   reading  Is  "i   tablespoon  of  Co< 


566  TE  KARERE  Pepuere,  1941 

HUI  TAU 

The  New  Zealand  Mission  of  the  Church  of  Jesus  Christ  of 
Latter-day  Saints  announce  that  during  the  "Easter  1941"  the  HUI 
TAU  will  be  held  at  Nuhaka,  Hawke's  Bay. 

President  Cowley  invites  all  peoples  to  avail  themselves  of  this 
opportunity  of  witnessing"  the  work  of  God  among  this  people. 

President  Hirini  Christy  of  the  Mahia  District  Presidency  and 
Nuhaka  Branch  President  welcome  you  all  and  will  assure  you  that 
everything  possible  will  be  done  for  your  temporal  well-being  during 
this  great  Conference  of  the  Church. 

President  Rahiri  Harris  as  Chairman  of  the  Hui  Tau  Board  and 
on  their  behalf  extends  their  "Haere  mai  ki  to  tatou  Hui  Tau"  to  all. 

On  the  Front  Cover  of  this  issue  are  composite  pictures  which 
were  taken  at  Nuhaka  during  the  Hui  Tau  of  1940.  People  who 
attended  last  year  will  remember  the  good  that  was  to  be  had.  Come 
this  year  and  renew  acquaintances,  hear  the  Word  of  God,  enjoy  the 
spirit  of  the  people,  listen  to  your  leaders,  and  mingle  your  hearts 
and  hopes  in  prayer  for  the  cause  of  the  righteous  in  the  conflict  that 
is  about  us.  Let  us  as  Latter-day  Saints  be  united  in  praying  for 
the  peace  of  the  Saviour  to  fill  the  hearts  of  men. 

The  following  poem  is  for  us  all — 

IT'S    YOU  ! 

If  you  want  to  work  for  the  kind  of  a  branch 

Like  the  kind  of  a  branch  you  like, 
You  needn't  slip  your  clothes  in  a  grip, 

Or  start  on  a  long,  long  hike. 
You'll  only  find  what  you  left  behind 

For  there's  nothing  that's  really  new. 
It's  a  knock  at  yourself  when  you  knock  your  branch. 

It  isn't  the  branch — it's  you  ! 

Real  branches  are  not  made  by  men  who  are  afraid 

Lest  somebody  else  gets  ahead, 
When  everyone  works,  and  nobody  shirks, 

You  can  raise  a  branch  that  is  dead, 
And  if  while  you  make  your  personal  stake, 

Your  neighbour  can  make  one,  too, 
Your  branch  will  be  what  you  want  it  to  be. 

It  isn't  the  branch — it's  you ! 

— From  Ka  Elele  O  Hazvaii. 


HUI  TAU  MUSIC 

All  M.I. A.  and  Choir  Music  may  be  obtained  by  writing 
immediately  to  Walter  Smith,  16  Turner  Street,  Auckland, 
and  ordering  your  requirements.  The  cost  will  be  very  small  and 
a  small  charge  will  be  made  per  copy  and  sent  you  when  price  is 
determined.  Write  now  for  your  copies  to  Walter  Smith  for 
ALL  Hui  Tau  Music,  M.I.A.  and  Choir. 


Pepuere,  1941 


TE  KARERE 


567 


rjA(ews  from    the    Cfield 


CORRECTION.— In  the  last  issue  deal- 
ing with  this  "column,"  news  from  over- 
seas was  inserted  in  the  Auckland  re- 
port, which  should  have  been  captioned 
"Overseas."  We  apologise  to  Miss  Jean 
Porteous,  who  was  specially  asked  to 
contribute  the  information,  for  our  ne- 
glect and  oversight  in  the  matter.  The 
Overseas  news  in  the  last  issue  was 
reported  for  you  by  Jean  Porteous. — 
Editors. 

AUCKLAND  DISTRICT 
Reported  by  Rona  V.  Attenborough 

On  December  23,  the  Auckland  Chapel 
was  a  scene  of  much  gaiety  and  frolic, 
when  the  children  of  the  Sunday  School 
were  entertained  by  their  usual  Christmas 
Tree  and  Party.  Fun  was  rampant  and 
all  voted  the  evening  tops.  President  and 
Sister  Cowley  attended  the  Hui  at  Kai- 
kohe  on  December  21,  22  and  23,  and  re- 
turned to  Auckland  in  time  to  leave 
again  for  Porangahau,  where  they  spent 
Christmas.  We  believe  that  they  had  a 
very  enjoyable  holiday,  but  we  are  glad 
that    they   are    back    in   Auckland. 

There  has  been  an  almost  general  exo- 
dus of  Saints  from  Auckland,  but  only  on 
vacation,  and  on  the  other  hand  we  are 
entertaining  some  visitors  from  down 
under  —  namely,  good  old  Hswke'a  Bay 
(refer  Hepa  Meha).  The  visitors  include 
Hine  and  Ruth  Meha,  who  are  hou 
Headquarters,  and  Api  Meha  who  is  shar- 
ing his  big  brother's  lot.  We  understand 
that-  Sister  Mabel  Meha  is  still  in 
Hawke's  Bay — knowing  Hepa  we  are  in- 
clined to  think  that  the  one-way  ticket 
was  not  merely  coincidental  we  11  watch 
him,    Mabel. 

Seen  on  Queen  Street,  escorted  by  a 
very  handsome  policeman — Sister  Cecily 
Pentecost,  who  is  convalescing.  \V<  are 
not  quite  sure  whether  (he  escort  was 
Cecily's  d->'-  ehoiee,  <>r  whether  the  law 
.nitially  caught  up  with  her,  but 
this  we  do  know,  that  her  eonvalt 
exercises  take  her  looking  at  and  for 
bon  es.     Oh-ohl  Cecily,  bake  care,  for  the 

Auckland       Love-DUg       bites       awful       hard 

when   it    bites. 

The    Auckland    Saints     have    sincerels 

mi     ed    t  in     pink-cheeked,    beaming,    little 

i  ».,\  i     a  bo   u  ed   to   frequent    I  be  e 

pari    .     bul     Auckland's     loss     is     Idaho's 

>a  \  is     now    h  i" 
Sister   Hollingsworth     ma]    be  dl 
among    I  be   Bainl      In    Zion.      Qui p 

>'ii   i  v    t  boui  b.   i n.    ei  si    more   mei  11  ed 

the  opportunitj  than  did  tins  little  lady, 
and  o  v,  ,■  .-.ii  Join  In  a  i  bins.  h<  i  all  t  be 
j"v  and   bappins       t"  i"-  obtained 

Two  i  la  nd*      >  ouni    man 

are  rallying  t-.  the    tandard 
ir. .       Brol  h<  i      H«  pa      M<  ba      * 
Auckland    on 

...i.  and   w,-  win  wiafa 

linn    : d    luck    and    <  k>d     p-  ad    I  hi  i  e  and 

i . :  i .  i    again      Broth         o n n      B i  1 

Into  Papah  ura    Militar]    I  lam] Januarj 

8,     and     t0     blm,     tOO  hand 

of     f.dluw  |hip     a  nd     .mi      \  I      w  i     In 


Sister  Billman,  inmate  of  the  Auck- 
land Hospital,  is  making  very  satisfac- 
tory progress,  as  also  is  Brother  Hemi 
Paki,    in    the    same    hospital. 

Saints,  beware!  There  are  a  goodly 
number  of  sleepless  nights  ahead  for 
both  young  and  old — Brother  Harold 
Stokes  has  taken  a  position  manufactur- 
ing matresses.  Well,  we  still  have  the 
park    benches. 

Here    endeth    the    report. 

HORO    HORO    BRANCH 
Reported   by    Edward   K.   Kiel. 

The  Horo  Horo  Orchestra  played  for  a 
dance  held  by  the  Saints  of  Ohaki  to 
raise  funds  towards  the  "Maori  Battalion 
Mobile  Canteen."  The  dance  was  an  out- 
standing success.  Elder  Dave  Moore  of 
our  branch  is  perhaps  one  of  the  proudest 
fathers  in  the  Dominion.  He  has  eight 
sons  in  khaki.  Bill  is  serving  with  the 
Australian  Forces  in  Egypt,  Arthur  in 
England,  Gordon  gone  away  with  the 
Third  Echelon,  and  Henry  in  the  Fourth. 
The  remaining  four  sons  are  in  training. 
All  these  boys  are  members  of  the 
Church.  A  farewell  karakia  and  party 
was  given  Brother  Henry  M.  Davis,  mem- 
ber of  the  Royal  New  Zealand  Air  Force, 
who  is  shortly  to  go  overseas,  at  Waikuta 
Pa,  Ngongotaha.  It  was  a  most  im- 
pressive gathering  and  there  were  few- 
dry  eyea  seen  at  the  end  of  the  speeches. 
Elder  Dave  Moore  presented  Brother 
Davis  witli  a  pocket  edition  of  the  Bible 
with  air  force  blue  cover,  also  a  carved 
walking  cane  carved  by  Brother  Tom 
McKinnon.  Brother  and  Sister  Amadio 
of  Auckland  were  presenl  and  their  talks 
were  very   much   appreciated   by 

Relief    Society     is    doing    marvellous    work 
among    the   poor   and    the    sick    of    t!, 

trict.      Member   or   aon-member,    the   Re- 
lief Society  sisters  have  been  visiting  the 

hospital    giving    succour    to    thoSI     Who    are 

iii     need.        Con    i<  I.  1:1 1  ■  le     amount     ha-     heen 
s|  ent      in     this     direction     and     ha\. 
greatl]      appreciated      by      thoBC     Who 

aided. 

NGAPUHI 
Reported  by  Patrick  WIHoa 

and    Kate    NgaJrUI  u. 

Brother   Hetaraka     ' 

bar  oi    the    Mi     Ion    M  I   \     and    P 
of  the  D 

where    thej 
v.  ill     reside    Indefln 

Genealogical    Commil 
vited   to  the  home 

I 
aai  ■  h    and    d 

and    Dl 


568 


TE  KARERE 


Pepuere,  1941 


have  been  interesting,  a  fact  testated  to 
by    the    visitors    upon    their    return. 

All  the  district  books  and  records  for 
Whangarei  were  removed  from  their  pre- 
vious office  to  the  new  Genealogical  office 
in  Awarua  by  the  district  secretaries. 
This  action  is  due  to  the  generous  atti- 
tude of  the  Genealogical  Committee  in 
allowing  a  portion  of  their  building  to  be 
used    for    district   purposes. 

Many  thanks  to  the  Zion  Elders  who 
have  recently  returned  to  the  States  for 
their  many  expressions  of  "Christmas 
Cheer"  sent  to  us.  We  make  special 
mention  of  Elder  Ted  R.  Kindred.  May 
the  New  Year  bring  much  to  you  too. 

Morgan  Clark,  accountant  in  the  Social 
Security  Office,  Auckland,  spent  his 
Christmas  and  vacation  with  his  parents. 
Auckland  Saints,  this  man  is  a  Church 
member. 

People  representative  of  both  Maori 
and  Pakeha  paid  their  last  respects  to 
Tautohe  Paki  of  Takahiwai,  who  passed 
this   life  on  the   16th  December,   1940. 

Mrs.  Ellen  Hulme  and  her  daughter 
Patricia  spent  several  days  in  the  North 
with  her  folks,  and  on  her  return  to 
Auckland  visited  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Cyril  Go- 
ing, but  had  to  cut  that  short  because 
Mr.  Hulme  was  expected  to  go  into  camp 
for  overseas  training.  Perhaps  it  would 
interest  many  to  know  that  before  leav- 
ing for  camp  Mr.  Hulme  was  baptized 
in  Auckland  under  the  supervision  of 
President    Matthew   Cowley. 

WAIKATO  DISTRICT 
Reported  by  Douglas  Whatu. 

Under  the  direction  of  President  Cow- 
ley, members  of  the  Waikato  Priesthood 
gathered  at  the  Puketapu  Recreation  Hall, 
Saturday,  December  14th,  1940.  Here  we 
received  wonderful  counsel  and  advice 
and  encouragement  in  our  duties  in  the 
Church  from  our  beloved  Mission  Presi- 
dent. All  Branch  Presidents  present  re- 
ported their  activities  and  all  pledged 
continued  support  and  renewed  vitality 
in  Church  work.  Brothers  William  Man- 
nering,  James  Heperi,  Tupana  Te  Hira 
and  George  Watene,  Mission  Secretary, 
were  also  called  to  speak.  Out  of  it  all 
President  Cowley  called  Brother  Henry 
Marshall  to  be  President  of  the  Waikato 
District,  into  which  office  he  was  sus- 
tained by  the  priesthood. 

Elders  Percy  Hill  and  Douglas  Whatu 
visited  all  Maori  and  Hunga  Tapu  patients 
of  the  Waikato  Hospital  at  Hamilton,  and 
we  are  happy  to  report  everyone  as 
cheerful  as  can  be.  Sister  Maisie  Turi- 
nui,  with  her  guitar  and  proficient  fingers 
strumming  haunting  melodies  which 
sometimes  break  out  into  "swing"  music, 
does  much  to  help  her  "companions-of- 
the-realm"  patients,  as  well  as  visitors 
enjoy  themselves.  Among  the  others  there 
are  Huia  Paki,  Ani  Wini  Kerei,  Janie 
Ryan,  Dave  Honetana  and  Whei  Te  Hira, 
daughter  of  Brother  and  Sister  Tupana 
Te  Hira.  Administrations  were  performed 
to  Ani  Wini  Kerei  and  baby  Whei 

The  first  meeting  of  the  Waikato 
Genealogical  Committee  was  held  at  the 
home  of  Percy  Hill  at  Whatawhata  on 
the  29th  of  December.  The  response  and 
interest  in  this  important  work  is  very 
heartening  indeed. 


Another  Sunday  School  has  been  organ- 
ized in  the  district  by  the  District  Super- 
intendency.  Gordonton  now  becomes  a 
regular  Sunday  School  stronghold.  The 
new  superintendency  are  Hare  Puke 
superintendent,  Ray  Puke  1st  assistant, 
Keita  Puke  2nd  assistant  and  Hare  Puke, 
Jr.,  secretary,  and  their  meeting  place 
is   at   the   Puke   home. 

Reihana  Gilbert  Paki  of  the  Matako- 
whai  Branch  was  ordained  a  Deacon  by 
John  Paki  on  December  16th,  1940,  which 
day  is  also  a  birth  anniversary  for  Ray. 
Congratulations  and  birthday  greetings 
are    in    order.      Heoi    ra. 

MAHIA  DISTRICT 
Reported  by  Sister  Elsie  Loader. 

On  Sunday,  December  1,  Brother  Perea 
Smith  was  ordained  a  Priest  by  Elder 
Eru  Tengaio.  Brothers  Tamahau  Haro- 
nga  and  William  Christy  visited  the 
Saints  at  Mahia  on  December  15th  and 
held  a  meeting  at  the  home  of  Brother 
Hare  Taumata.  The  Saints  were  happy 
to  receive  these  brethren  and  all  enjoyed 
the  spirit  of  this  meeting.  Four  babies 
were  blessed  during  this  karakia.  Nuhaka 
Scouts  held  a  silver  coin  party  on  Decem- 
ber 16,  to  which  a  large  number  of  young 
folks  attended.  They  quickly  put  away 
all  edibles  in  sight,  much  to  the  joy  of 
the  hostesses,  Elsie  Loader  and  H.  Smith. 
Quite  a  gloom  was  cast  over  the  district 
at  the  death  of  Walter  McAneney,  hus- 
band of  Sister  Maggie  Brown,  who  met 
his  death  in  an  accident  at  Morere  No.  2 
Oil  Wells.  The  Saints  of  the  district  and 
friends  extend  their  heartfelt  sympathy 
to  Sister  Maggie  and  her  two  children. 
The  many  friends  of  Violet  Moana, 
daughter  of  the  Rev.  Wi  Moana,  will  be 
pleased  to  know  that  she  has  accepted  a 
good  position  in  Gisborne.  Violet  has 
been  very  active  in  the  Nuhaka  M.I. A. 
Brother  Parata  Pirihi  of  the  Wellington 
Branch  was  a  visitor  to  Nuhaka.  We 
were  privileged  to  have  him  speak  at 
our  services,  and  his  address  was  most 
inspirational.  We  trust  that  he  enjoyed 
his  visit  with  us  as  we  enjoyed  having 
him.  Very  dear  friends  of  the  Saints  and 
Zion  Elders,  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Kahutia 
Whaanga  entertained  over  three  hundred 
guests  at  a  dinner  and  dance  in  the  Unity 
Hall  to  celebrate  the  coming-of-age  of 
their  daughter,  Kura.  An  interesting 
feature  of  the  occasion  was  the  cutting 
of  the  cake  with  a  sword,  presented  to 
Kura's  great-grandfather,  Major  Tu  Ihaka 
Whaanga  by  Queen  Victoria  for  services 
in  the  British  (Colonial)  Army  during  the 
Hau  Hau  wars  fought  in  H.B.,  Mohaka 
and  Waikaremoana  districts.  Kura  is  a 
very  active  member  of  the  M.I. A.,  and 
we  extend  our  heartiest  congratulations 
to  her.  Visiting  the  Saints  of  the  Wairoa 
Branch,  Brothers  Sydney  and  William 
Christy  with  Tamahau  Haronga  were  in- 
deed pleased  at  the  manner  in  which 
these  people  are  carrying  on.  Although 
only  a  small  branch  in  numbers,  still 
they  are  very  active  and  alive  in  their 
Church  duties.  They  are  now  engaged 
in  renovating  their  present  meeting-house 
with  the  object  in  view  of  having  it  ex- 
clusively as  a  place  for  holding  Church 
meetings     only.         Each    member    of    the 


Pepuere,  1941 


TE  KARERE 


569 


branch  contributes  a  cash  donation  each 
week  towards  preparing  their  table  for 
the  forthcoming  Hui  Tau.  "Be  Prepared" 
is  also  their  motto. 

Brother  Ora  Tengaio  has  returned  from 
the  hospital,  happy  and  ora.  Just  as 
well  he  wasn't  named  "Mate."  Sister 
Mojly  Tengaio,  who  has  been  confined  to 
the  Wairoa  Hospital  with  rheumatic  fever, 
is  very  much  the  same.  Sister  Mary 
Lewis  is  also  there  suffering  with  the 
same  complaint.  Sister  Milly  Tengaio  is 
also  in  the  same  hospital.  We  trust  and 
pray  that  these  good  Sisters  will  soon 
be  well  enough  to  return  to  their  homes 
in    the    near   future. 

Nuhaka  Branch  Sunday  School  had  a 
very  splendid  Christmas  programme,  and 
the  large  congregation  present  thoroughly 
enjoyed  it.  We  are  happy  to  report  that 
the  attendance  of  members  of  this  S.S.  is 
75%,  while  80'/  keep  the  Word  of  Wis- 
dom. Attendance  of  officers  97  '/<  and 
99%  of  the  officers  are  tithe  payers. 
Kia  kaha  Nuhaka.  Let  100'/  be  your  aim 
for  1941-2000.  The  Genealogical  Com- 
mittee held  a  special  service  on  Novem- 
ber 29th,  Brother  Hohepa  Te  Kauru  offi- 
ciating. Those  who  attended  were  full 
of  praise  for  the  lessons  and  things  that 
were  learned  in  this  meeting.  Kia  ora 
Nuhaka. 

The  Relief  Society  Sisters  are  well 
ahead  with  their  Hui  Tau  Handwork  and 
should  have  a  very  excellent  display. 
These  good  Sisters  visited  the  sick  in  the 
hospitals  and  distributed  Christmas  pres- 
ents. Their  kindness  was  greatly  appre- 
ciate,!. Whakaki  and  Tahaenui  Primaries 
held  Christmas  parties  and  presented  each 
child  with  a  gift  and  plenty  of  good 
things  to  eat.  Kia  ora  the  Sisters  who 
were    responsible    for    these    functions.     We 

feel  sure  the  kiddies  more  than  appreci- 
ate   your    kind    efforts.     Brother   and    Sister 

Moraro     Walker     have     pleasure     in     an- 
nouncing the  engagement   of  their  daugh- 
ter   Me  sine      to    Bro.    Richard    I  Barney  > 
Holli  .    son    of    Mrs.    G.    Anderson    I 
and   the   late  Thomas    Hollis   of   Hastings. 

HAURAKI    DISTRICT 

Reported    by    George    Watene    and 

Roy  Matthews. 

Before  thl  a  lit  t  le  older 

t  he    Eiaurakl    Disl  rid 

b  'I    reader     and    wish    i  hem 
linable     (among     them     "Te 
Karei  •        Ed     I        rhe  old    year   ha 

not     fulls     forgotten     isn't     thai 
right  v      Let    It      111     and     ...-rows    be   bu1 

nt     the    path    of    better 

and    much    m<  :  \\  e 

•    in   our    irea 
let   'I     fill  i  hat   page  dailj    w  Ith  pi 

1 1  aural  I,   your  ,  ,   i.   ,     before 
w  it  h    i  h.  re    \\  Ml    be 
ral    conference    oi    th<     Pri<    thood, 
Bram  h     Pre  Idem  ie       and 

to 
i  in.  d.    and    I    want    to    warn    j  ou 

that      lln  |      \.ar     will     I tl 

methodical   and     v   tematic   In    It 

|d  I      Ion.    Ml         \\ 

bei     "i     thi     Church 

veritable     tatl 

tal  ■    thi    place  of   the   Zion    E  d< 

to   Zion   about    oui   ah  i      and   i  he 


Mission.  This  will  be  our  big  task  at 
the  conference — to  organize  ourselves  to 
enable  all  to  partake  zealously  in  the 
work.  Your  conference,  as  some  of  you 
might  already  know,  will  be  at  Judea 
(Huria),    Tauranga,   January    26th. 

On  Boxing  Day  the  Huria  Relief  Society 
again  held  another  "Haangi."  The  occa- 
sion was  in  conjunction  with  the  local 
Regatta  Committee,  and  all  proceeds  were 
donated  towards  the  Tauranga  Patriotic 
Funds.  These  Sisters  are  to  be  com- 
mended for  their  splendid  efforts,  as  this 
is  the  third  occasion  upon  which  they 
have  held  "haangis"  for  such  purposes. 

Koi  Tarawa  and  family  paid  us  a  visit 
which  was  certainly  appreciated.  Among 
the  many  things  that  transpired  was  the 
story  told  of  the  efforts  of  Matthew  to 
immerse  the  little  fellow  who  would  not 
go  under.  The  M.I. A.  concluded  a  suc- 
cessful year  with  a  closing  social.  The 
winners  of  the  best  attendance  was  Zella 
Tawa  for  the  Junior  Girls  and  Nau  Tawa 
for   the    Boys. 

That's  all  the  news  folks.  I  almost 
forgot,  the  news  from  Mr.  Stork  for  the 
last  of  last  year  will  be  found  in  the 
"Statistics"    column.       Thank    you. 

HAWKE'S   BAY 
Reported   by  Tuheni  Pohatu. 

President  Stuart  Meha  of  the  H.B. 
District  Presidency,  visited  the  Te  Hauke 
Branch,  and  during  his  talk  to  the  Saints 
the  spirit  of  the  Lord  was  very  much  in 
evidence.  The  Saints  were  asked  to  live 
the  Gospel  more  faithfully,  particularly  to 
pay  tithing  and  fast  offerings. 

The  Christmas  Sunday  programme  al- 
lowed us  to  meet  visitors  from  Welling- 
ton— Misses  Miriama  Heketa  and  Meri 
Black;    Whaiepouri    Heke    from    Otaiu    and 

Barria   from  Tamaki.    The  meeting 

was  conducted  hy  Tumanaku  Kaihania 
id'      the      Sunday      School      Superint  endency 

with    Branch    President     Lester    II.    [haia 

presiding.  The  meetings  were  well  at- 
tended     and      very      well      received,      which 

speaks    much     for    preparation    and     the 
the   Gospel. 
\   combined  Sunday   School  and   G 
logical  Dana    was  held  in  the  L.D.S.   Hall 
on    the    evenini    of    the    26th    December, 
1940,    with    luother    Wi    "Bob"    EU 
of  ceremoniea.     The  funct  li  • 

.11     pat  roniaed    and    ended     up     \  cry 

-  torily. 

TARANAKI 

•  i.  (i   by    />  ni   St«  nt   and 
hui    S tin  .ni 

Street      I  with 

ihe  Reverend   Niche 

numbi  i 

Ma\      Cornl   h     and      I 

hoi)    wedlock.     Theln 

help  In  t  he  m  ■  >  n  know  n  In 

Robbie,  who  hail     from  Pain    •    ton  North, 

i  .in  act  h  •■  membei 
ii,.-  newlj    w .  • 

n    in     \  hi  k  land    and    w  ill    Rnallj     Ih  a 

\\  |    m    h    thi 


570 


TE  KARERE 


Pepuere,  1941 


man.  The  Christmas  Sunday  School  Pro- 
gramme held  December  22  was  a  won- 
derful meeting  and  was  thoroughly  en- 
joyed by  the  large  congregation  that  at- 
tended. Thus,  Brothers  and  Sisters, 
Wanganui   continues   onward. 

WELLINGTON 
Reported  by  Alice  Scott. 

Parata  Pirihi  has  returned  from  his 
holidays.  Where  he  spent  them  isn't 
very  clear,  but  wherever  it  was  we  are 
sure  that  Brother  Pirihi  seems  to  have 
really  enjoyed  himself.  Arrangements 
were  made  at  Porirua  for  a  Hui  Pariha 
to  be  held  there  during  the  week-end  of 
25    January,    1941.  Among    those    who 

have  just  come  into  the  limelight  is  my 
own  brother— Sid  Scott — who  has  been 
very  much  praised  for  his  work-outs  with 
Boxer  Maurice  Strickland.  It  seems  that 
fisticuffs  isn't  the  only  thing  Sid  is  good 
at — no  sir!  The  manly  art  of  self- 
defense,  "wrestling" — also  lays  claim  to 
having  made  quite  a  stir  in  its  semi- 
professional    ranks    last    season. 

It  may  be  of  interest  to  some  to  know 
that  Elders  Bodell  and  Kirkham  had 
their    names    featured    in    Honolulu    news- 


papers upon  their  outstanding  perform- 
ances in  basketball.  Elder  Grant  has 
been  assigned  to  labour  in  the  Japanese 
Mission  and  was  out  on  the  Island  of 
Kauai    to    continue    his    missionary    work. 

DUNEDIN 
Reported   by   Beatrice   Dalziel. 

Sunday,  22nd  December,  1940,  marked 
the  conclusion  for  the  year  of  the  Sunday 
School  meetings,  where  every  child  in  at- 
tendance received  a  gift  in  the  form  of 
an  appropriate  book  for  their  attendance 
and  diligence.  The  gifts  were  generously 
provided  by  the  Saints  of  the  Branch. 
Sister  Grace  Westlake  during  her  stay 
here  has  helped  us  tremendously  with  her 
services  as  pianist  for  our  meetings  and 
we  shall  miss  her  very  much,  as  she  has 
now  left  us  to  reside  in  Auckland.  The 
Dunedin  Saints  welcome  into  their  midst 
with  joy  and  thanks  to  our  Father  in 
Heaven,  Evelyn  May  Paton  Perriton,  wife 
of  William  John  Perriton  of  Christchurch 
and  daughter  of  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Robert 
Hislop  of  Brighton,  Otago,  who  was  bap- 
tised into  the  Church  of  the  Jesus  Christ 
of  Latter-day  Saints  by  Elder  Henry 
Murray   on  Saturday,   December  28,   1940. 


TRAINING  AT  LEVIN 
Editor  Leaves  for  Air  Force  Training  School 


With  the  removal  of  Te  Karere  to  Auck- 
land after  the  Hawke's  Bay  earthquake  in 
1931,  Elder  Hohepa  M.  Meha  was  soon 
after  called  by  President  Rufus  K.  Hardy  to 
labour  in  Auckland  with  Elder  Gibb  as 
Assistant  Editor  until  the  release  of  Elder 
Gibb,  when  he  became  its  first  Maori  Editor 
until  1938.  Since  that  time  Hepa  has  had 
much  to  do  with  Te  Karere,  and  its  life 
from  then  on  has  always  benefited  from  his 
associations  with  it.  With  the  release  of  the 
Zion  Elders  in  October  of  last  year,  "Hepa" 
was  again  called  to  the  Editor's  chair  in 
company  with  myself  by  President  Cowley. 
Te  Karere  and  I  miss  you,  Hepa,  but  ser- 


Hohepa    Meha 


vice  and  duty  are  trade  marks  that  will  always  follow  you,  for 
your  life  has  been  one  of  unselfish  service  to  your  Church  and 
fellow-men. 

The  only  tribute  that  is  yours  is  the  reward  of  the  faith- 
ful and  obedient.  Kia  kaha  e  hoa.  He  leaves  behind  his  good 
wife,  Mabel,  who  will  continue  to  reside  in  Auckland  until 
more  pleasant  information  is  obtained  about  Elder's  Meha's 
future.  K.H. 


Pepuere,  1941  TE  KARERE  571 

Primary 

Elva  T.  Cowley,  President  Rona   V.   Attenborough,  Second  Counsellor 

Waima    Davies,    First    Counsellor  and    Secretary 

Lessons    compiled    by    Rona    V.    Attenborough 

MEMORY  GEM: 

"Do  unto  others  as  ye  would  that 
They  should   do   unto   you." 

— Adapted. 
LESSONS: 

FIRST  WEEK 

THE  JOY  OF  FRIENDS  AND  PLAYMATES 
Objective: 

To  help  the  boys  and  girls  to  know  that  if  they  want  to  have 
friends  and  playmates  they  must  be  kind  and  friendly. 

Suggestions    for    Teaching: 

Blessed  are  they  who  have  the  gift  of  making  friends,  for  it  is 
one  of  God's  best  gifts.  It  involves  many  things,  but  above  all,  the 
power  of  going  out  of  one's  self,  and  appreciating  whatever  is  noble 
and  loving  in  another. 

— Thomas    Hughes. 
Song: 

"I  Thank  Thee  Dear  Father,"  No.  17,  Primary  Songs  for  the 
Missions. 

Prayer: 

Before  the  prayer  by  one  of  the  children,  repeat: 
When  I  run  about  all  day, 
When  I  kneel  at  night  to  pray,  God  sees. 
When    I'm   dreaming    in   the    dark, 
When  I  lie  awake  to  hark,  God  sees. 
Need  I  ever  know  a  fear? 
Night  and  day  my  father's  near — God  sees. 

— Mary  M.  Dodge. 

Song: 

Teach  the  second  verse  of  "I  Thank  Thee  Dear  Father,"  No.  17, 
Primary  Songs  for  the  Missions. 

Lesson    Approach: 

With  whom  do  you  play,  Mary?  With  whom  do  you  play.  John? 
What  name  do  wo  give  to  the  boya  and  girls  whom  we  play  with?  There 
is  another  beautiful  name;  can  you  toll  me  what  it  is?  Which  name 
do  you  like  best,  playmates  or  friends? 

Some  boys  and  girls  have  more  friends  than  others,  l><>  you  know- 
why? 

Jane  ran  into  Ikt  home  one  morning.  She  was  crying.  She  said 
to   her   mother,   "Nobody   likes   me!     None  of   the   children    will   play 

with    mo." 

Hor  mother  knew  I  be  reason  in  a  moment. 

('an  you  guesf  the  rea  on?  This  is  what  Jane's  mother  found  out 
when  she  talked  with  her.  When  the  other  girli  and  boys  said,  "Lot's 
play  ball,"  -lane  would  poul  and  lay,  "No!  I  don't  like  to  play  ball." 
When  they  asked  to  play  with  any  of  hor  toys  she  would  tuck  them 

in    hor   arms  and   say,   "No,    you    might    break   them.*'       She   wasn't    at    all 

kind  and  friendly. 

Whose  fault  d<>  you  think  it  was  that  .lam'  was  unhappy  that 
morning?  What  do  you  think  hor  mother  told  hoi  to  do?  fhat  is 
exactly  what  .lam-  did.  and  when     he  came  in  from  hor  playins  that 

day    she    had    a    hie;    smile    on    her    l'aee    and    was    as    ha|>p\     as    eould    he. 


572  TE  KARERE  Pepuere,  1941 

Jane  found  out  that  if  you  want  to  have  friends  and  playmates  you 
must  be  kind  and  friendly. 

When  you  are  ready,  here  is  a  story  about  Fred  who  knew  how  to 
be  a  good  friend. 

Lesson   Story: 

THE  BIRTHDAY  SLED 

It  was  Fred's  fifth  birthday,  and  a  great  day  to  him.  When  he 
went  down  to  breakfast  he  found  beside  his  chair  a  bright,  new,  red 
sled — -just  the  very  thing  that  he  wanted  more  than  anything  else.  He 
and  his  mother  were  going  down  town  that  morning  to  stay  nearly  all 
day,  but  he  wanted  so  much  to  try  the  new  sled  that  when  breakfast 
was  over  she  helped  him  to  wrap  up  warmly,  and  let  him  go  out  with 
it  for  a  little  while. 

The  hill  back  of  the  house  was  short,  but  Fred  liked  it  all  the 
better  for  that,  because  he  didn't  have  so  far  to  haul  the  sled  to  the 
top,  each  time  that  he  slid  down.  What  fun  it  was  to  go  flying  over 
the  ground! 

He  had  gone  down  twice  and  was  just  starting  up  again  when 
he  noticed  another  boy,  standing  by  the  big  oak  tree,  watching  him 
longingly. 

"Hello,   Jack,"   he   called,    "see   my  new  sled?" 

Jack  nodded.      "It's  certainly  fine,"  he  said. 

Fred  walked  on  up  the  hill.  "It's  my  sled  and  my  birthday,  and 
I'll  only  have  time  for  two  or  three  more  rides,"  he  kept  saying  over 
and  over  to  himself,  trying  to  forget  about  the  other  boy. 

All  at  once  he  turned  and  ran  back.  "Don't  you  want  a  ride?" 
he  asked.  Jack  was  too  delighted  to  say  a  word,  but  how  he  did  smile 
as  he  ran  over  and  began  helping  Fred  pull  the  sled  up  the  hill! 

"It's  my  birthday,  and  I'm  five  years  old!"  explained  Fred. 

"It's  mine,  too,   and  so   am  I  five!"   said  Jack. 

"Honest!"  cried  Fred.  "What  did  you  get?"  and  then  he  was 
sorry  that  he  had  asked,  for  Jack  grew  very  red  as  he  said  in  a  low 
voice: 

"Nothing.  My  mother  didn't  have  the  money  to  buy  anything  with 
for  me." 

But  he  was  happy  again  in  a  minute  as  the  gay  sled  went  skim- 
ming down  the  hill  with  him.  He  put  the  rope  over  his  arm  and  kept 
his  hands  in  his  pockets  as  he  trudged  up  the  hill  with  it.  "I  had 
some  mittens,  but  I  lost  them,"  he  said.      "Your  sled  goes  fine." 

"We'll  take  turns  till  I  have  to  go,"  said  Fred.  They  did  so,  but 
soon  his  mother  called  him  and  he  had  to  hurry  into  the  house. 

"Mother,"  he  asked  suddenly  as  he  stood  warming  his  hands  and 
telling  her  about  its  being  Jack's  birthday,  "couldn't  we  buy  Jack  a 
sled   and   some   mittens?" 

"Perhaps,"   said  his  mother.      I'll  see." 

"I'll  give  a  quarter  out  of  my  bank,"  he  urged. 

"Then  I'm  quite  sure  we  can  get  them,"  she  said,  and  she  did — a 
red  sled  and  red  mittens. 

If  Fred's  eyes  shone  when  he  saw  his  sled,  I'm  sure  I  don't  know 
what  to  say  Jack's  did  when  he  saw  his  and  the  warm  mittens.  He 
was  as  happy  a  boy  as  could  be,  and  Fred  was  as  happy  as  he  was. 

— Louise  M.  Oglevee. 
Conversation  After  the  Story: 

Let  us  name  some  of  the  things  we  can  do  to  make  our  friends 
happy.  (The  teacher  may  have  to  give  helpful  suggestions — taking 
turns  for  rides;  sharing  toys;  sharing  play  places;  sharing  good  things 
to  eat;  giving  kind  words;  helping  playmates  who  are  hurt;  giving 
kind  words  instead  of  cross  ones.) 


Pepuere,  1941  TE  KARERE  573 

SECOND  WEEK 

SELF-CONTROL 
Objective: 

To  help  the  children  to  learn  self-control  that  they  may  have 
strength  and  peace. 

Song: 

''Jesus,  Friend  of  Little  Children." 

Prayer: 

In  concert,  led  by  the  teacher. 

Song: 

"I  Think  When  I  Read." 

For  the  Teacher: 

"Strength  of  character  consists  of  two  things — power  of  will  and 
power  of  self-restraint.  It  requires  two  things,  therefore,  for  its 
existence — strong  feelings  and  strong  command  over  them." 

This  very  important  truth  to  be  developed  in  this  lesson  will  need 
earnest  study  and  prayerful  thought. 

Teachers,  we  begin  our  preparation  of  the  lesson  to  be  taught  when 
we  decide  that  the  child  needs  our  help  in  any  given  direction.  Does 
he  need  self-control?  His  success  in  life  depends  upon  his  being  able 
to  control  his  thoughts,  emotions,  temper,  words,  actions,  appetites, 
etc.  Self-control  means  making  one's  self  do  the  right  or  necessary 
thing.  It  means  patience,  too,  to  wait  for  what  we  want,  until  the 
right  time.  It  is  necessary  often  to  make  ourselves  do  things  that  are 
disagreeable  in  order  to  gain  control,  and  be  sure  that  one  is  master 
over  one's  self.  It  is  an  everyday  necessity — it  is  needed  every  hour. 
It  is  the  most  important  habit  to  acquire  and  fix. 

A   MAN   WHO  COULD   SAY   "NO" 

Robert  and  David  were  having  a  hard  time  to  decide  whether  or 
not  they  should  go  to  a  picture  show  on  Sunday. 

"If  others  can  go  I  don't  see  why  we  can't,"  said  David. 

"What  others  do  or  do  not  do  is  not  our  business,"  said  their 
mother.  Everyone  has  a  right  to  decide  for  himself  what  he  thinks 
is  right.  The  important  thing  for  each  of  us  to  do  is  to  have  Strength 
enough  to  do  what  we  think  is  right  regardless  of  the  decisions  of 
others." 

"I  know  the  story  of  a  man  who  was  willing  to  risk  his  life  to  do 
what  he   thought   was   right,"   she   said. 

Ami  as   neither  of  the   boys  spoke,  she  continued.     "The 
name  was  Daniel.     He  lived  hundreds  of  years  ago.     Hf  was  one  of 
the  great  prophets  of  Israel.     When  his  people  were  conquered  by  the 

Babylonians,  Daniel  was  taken  captive  and  went  to  live  at  the  court 
<>!'  the  king. 

"Because   Daniel  was  a  brave  ami  wise  and  | I  man.  the  king 

of  Babylon  thought  very  highly  of  him.     And  so  did  King  Darius,  the 

king  of  the  A1.mIi  .  !!<•  thoughl  BO  well  of  Daniel  that  he  set  him 
in  a  very  high  place  and  gave  him  much  power.  This  made  the  prinees 
and  the  rest  of  the  king's  advisers  very  jftJoUS.  Ami  they  planned 
how    to   gel    rid    of    Daniel. 

"So  they  persuaded  Kin-  Darin    to  pan  a  law  which    aid  that,  for 
a  certain  time,  everyone  mu  I  wor  tup  and  pray  to  the  kii 
that  anyone  refu  [xifl  to  do    o  would  be  cast  Into  a  dm  of  lions,  Daniel 
know  it   w a    wrong  to  worship  the  kins  a    a  Do, i,  ami  hf  refused  to 
do   it.     So  he  kept    right   on   praying  three  timet    a  day   to  tin-  one. 

t  riio    ( rod,     JUI  t     :i       In-    had    a!  v.  :i\       done. 


574  TE  KARERE  Pepuere,  1941 

"Then  the  princes  told  King  Darius  about  Daniel.  The  king  felt 
very  sad,  for  he  loved  Daniel  dearly.  And  he  was  sorry  indeed  that 
he  had  ever  passed  such  a  law.  But  it  was  too  late.  For  even  though 
he  was  such  a  powerful  king,  he  couldn't  change  this  wicked  law.  So 
Daniel  was  cast  into  a  den  of  lions. 

"But  Daniel  wasn't  afraid.  He  knew  that  his  God,  whom  he  had 
obeyed  so  faithfully,  would  take  care  of  him.  I  remember  having  seen 
a  beautiful  picture  of  Daniel  in  the  lion's  den.  Through  a  tiny  window 
high  up  in  the  wall  shines  a  bright  light  into  the  den.  And  standing 
in  the  light  is  Daniel,  his  face  is  lifted,  his  back  to  the  lions.  They 
are  slinking  back  into  the  shadows,  quite  harmless.  The  next  morn- 
ing, when  King  Darius  went  to  the  lions'  den,  he  found  Daniel  as  brave 
and  as  strong  as  ever.  Not  so  much  as  a  hair  of  his  head  had  been 
hurt.  The  king  was  so  pleased  at  this  that  he  said  that  he,  too,  would 
worship  the  God  that  Daniel  worshipped — the  God  who  did  such  won- 
derful things  for  his  obedient  children. 

Daniel  is  one  of  the  great  characters  of  the  Bible,  and  we  are 
very  grateful  for  his   example   of   courage   and   obedience. 

The  boys  were  silent  for  a  few  moments.  Then  David  said,  "My 
mind  is  made  up.      I  don't  go." 

"I'm  staying  home,  too,  added  Robert,  quickly. 

— Adapted. 

THIRD  WEEK 

HOW  DO  YOU  ACT? 
Objective: 

To  inspire  the  child  to  radiate  happiness  by  seeking  to  improve  his 
behaviour   in   the   home. 
Suggestions    for    Teaching: 

The  final  and  sure  test  of  the  value  of  what  we  teach  is  how  it 
finds  expression  in  the  lives  of  the  children.  Are  they  stronger  to 
meet  temptation,  etc.?  Do  the  lessons  you  teach  find  expression  in  the 
home?  This  and  other  lessons  in  this  course  should  improve  the  child's 
behaviour. 

The  suggestions  for  the  presentation  is  suggestive  only.  If  you 
can  find  a  more  effective  method  by  all  means  use  it. 

Song: 

"The  Light  Divine,"  No.  18,  Primary  Songs  for  the  Missions. 

Prayer: 

Concert  prayer,  led  by  the  teacher. 

Lesson    Approach: 

"My  mirror  is  a  tattletale."  Who  can  finish  it?  Let  us  all  say  it. 
Has  your  mirror  helped  to  remind  you  how  to  look  your  best?  (Let 
the  children  report  what  they  have  done  during  the  month  to  improve 
their  looks.  Take  a  few  minutes  to  look  at  hands,  hair,  position. 
Compliment  the.  children  as  a  group.  It  isn't  safe  to  single  any  one 
child  out  on  any  account.) 

Lesson    Story: 

"  BUT  THEN  " 

Have  you  ever  heard  the  story  of  "But  Then"?  Her  real  name 
was  Ann,  out  they  called  her  "But  Then,"  and  I  will  tell  you  why. 
Her  face  was  like  a  sunbeam  and  she  was  always  looking  for  every 
bit  of  good  she  could  find  in  everybody  and  everything.  When  Freddie 
came  home  and  told,  in  a  ridiculous  way,  the  story  of  the  new  boy's 
first  day  at  school,  and  how  odd  he  looked  in  his  brother's  out-grown 
coat  and  trousers,  little  Ann  began  with  her  most  earnest  air,   "Yes, 


Pepuere,   1941  TE  KARERE  575 

but  then  I  didn't  hear  him  say  one  naughty  word  all  day.  And  he 
helped  poor  little  Kelly  out  of  the  mud  when  he  fell  down." 

"That's  the  way  with  you,  little  "But  Then,"  laughed  Freddie.  He 
always  loved  Ann  more  than  ever  after  such  a  speech  as  that;  he 
couldn't  help  it. 

When  the  day  for  the  picnic  which  Ann  and  Fred  had  planned 
dawned  grey  and  cold,  Freddie  puckered  up  his  mouth,  ready  to  com- 
plain, but  Ann  soon  snatched  away  all  the  frowns.  "I  know  it's  going 
to  rain,  Freddie,  but  then  you  know  we  can  cut  those  paper  chains  and 
hang  them  all  over  the  attic  and  eat  our  picnic  dinner  up  there.  And 
it  will  be  nearly  as  nice  as  the  woods." 

"All  right,  little  'But  Then',"  said  Freddie,  cheering  up.  A  play 
with  little  "But  Then"  was  almost  as  good  as  a  picnic,  any  day.  When 
she  fell  down  and  broke  her  arm  and  had  to  have  it  bandaged  for  many 
days,  she  said  over  and  over  again  to  her  friends,  as  they  sympathised 
with  her,  "Yes,  but  then,  it  could  have  been  worse,  you  know." 

All  the  other  children  made  fun  of  poor  old  Mosey  Crosby,  but 
not  so  little  "But  Then."  "Of  course  I  know  he's  queer,"  she  said, 
"but  then  he  has  no  one  to  love  or  care  for  him,  and  it  makes  him 
cross  to  have  the  boys  tease  him  so.  I  took  him  flowers,  and  you 
ought  to  have  seen  him  smile  and  thank  me  over  and  over  for  them." 

And  so  it  was  by  always  trying  to  see  the  good  and  cheerful  side 
of  life  that  Ann  came  to  be  called  "But  Then." 

Conversation   After  the   Story: 

How  would  you  like  Ann  to  live  at  your  house?  Couldn't  you  act 
like  her?  What  does  it  mean  to  have  a  glad  heart?  When  is  it  easv 
to  be  glad?  When  is  it  difficult?  What  kind  of  folk  shall  we  try  to 
be?  Happy  boys  and  girls  say,  "Please"  and  "Thank  you";  have  you 
noticed  that? 

FOURTH  WEEK 

Objective: 

To  give  the  children  a  happy  hour  of  self-expression. 

Suggestions   for  Teaching: 

This  period  should  be  a  happy  hour  for  the  boys  and  girls.  Some 
one  has  said  that  play  must  make  a  child  a  better  player,  a  better 
listener,  a  better  loser,  and  a  better  comrade.  This  can  only  l>e  done 
through  thorough  planning  and  careful  preparation.  The  discipline  for 
the  day  depends  largely  on   a  good   beginning. 

Song: 

"Happiness,1'  No.  'ix.   Primary  Songs   for  the   Missions. 

Inasmuch   as   this    is   the   "Thank    Y<m"   month   you    might    BUbstitute 

the  word  thankful    for  happy   in   the  tir  t    line. 

Prayer: 

By  one  of  the  children. 

Song: 

Sing   all    the   song's    learned    thus    tar   this    year. 

Programme  for  the  Hour: 

Plan   your  own   programme.     The   following 

helpful  th.it  the  children  knew  and  enjoy  play 

:    plan    to    follow    an    act  i\  e   game    with    a    quiet    one    in 

order  to  rive  the  children  i 

gam<    while  the  children  are  enjoying  it.     Arrange  the  programme  <>( 

game     o  I  hut  the  children  cat  ime  that  fol 

t  hout  coiiin  [on.     Some!  ime-  ,-i  i  ong  ma 

M;i'  I  ut  her   u  ho   li\  ed 

in  Germany.     When  he  was  :i  /ounji  man  he  wa    a  carol     inger  in  the 


576 


TE  KARERE 


Ptpuere,  1941 


city  where  he  lived.  He  loved  music.  He  thought  it  made  people  more 
gentle  and  kind.  He  wrote  many  lovely  songs  for  his  own  children. 
One  tells  the  story  of  Christ's  birth.  It  is  called  "Cradle  Hymn"  or 
"Away  in  a  Manger."  Children  all  over  the  world  love  to  sing  it. 
Would  you  like  to  learn  it,  too? 

If  there  is  time  a  short  story  unifies  the  group  before  dismissal. 

The  closing  exercises  should  be  the  same  as  other  periods. 
Song: 

"Cradle  Hymn." 
Prayer: 

By  one  of  the  children. 

STATISTICS. 


BIRTHS 

WAIRAU — To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Rakato 
Wairau,  a  daughter,  August  29,  1940,  at 
Kaiuku,  Mahia. 

GEAR — To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Herbert  Gear 
of  Opoutama,  a  daughter,  November  2, 
1940,  at   Kaiwaitau,   Mahia. 

KIEL — To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Reginald  Kiel 
of  Opoutama,  •  a  son,  July  23,  1938,  at 
Kaiwaitau,    Mahia 

KIEL — To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Kiel  of  Opou- 
tama, a  daughter,  July  15,  1939,  at  Kai- 
waitau,   Mahia. 

McKAY — To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Pamea  Mc- 
Kay of  Opoutama,  a  son,  September  15, 
1940,  at   Kaiwaitau,   Mahia. 

GREENING — To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  C. 
Greening  of  Opoutama,  a  son,  December 
14,    1940,    at    Wairoa. 

MIKAERE — To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  George 
Mikaere,  a  son,  September  9,  1940,  at 
Te  Puke,  Hauraki. 

ORMSBY — To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Lambert 
Ormsby,  a  son,  August  2,  1940,  at  Te 
Puna,    Hauraki. 

ORMSBY — To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Robert 
Ormsby.  a  daughter,  August  3,  1940,  at 
Tauranga,    Hauraki. 

MARSH — To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Dick  Marsh 
(not  the  D.  Marsh  of  H.B.),  a  son,  No- 
vember  12,   1940,  at  Te  Puke,  Hauraki. 

CHASE — To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Geo.  Chase, 
a  son,  September  13,  1940,  at  Taupo, 
Hauraki. 

NGAHERE — To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Winiata 
Ngahere,  a  baby,  July  26,  1940,  at  Roto- 
rua,   Hauraki. 

TE  WHAT  A — To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Tatiu 
Te  Whata,  a  daughter,  November  8,  1940, 
Tautoro,    Ngapuhi. 

McDONALD — To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Gallo- 
way McDonald,  a  son,  August  8,  19  10. 
at   Waipukurau,   Hawke's   Bay. 


NERI — To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Nerata  (Sham- 
rock) Neri,  a  son,  December  2,  1940,  at 
Hastings,    Hawke's    Bay. 

HART — To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  William  Hart, 
a  son,  December  12,  1940,  at  Hastings, 
Hawke's    Bay. 

POHATU— To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Tuheni 
Pohatu  of  Te  Hauke,  a  daughter,  Decem- 
ber 13th,  1940,  at  Hastings,  Hawke's  Bay. 

BAPTISMS. 

PUKE — Pakete  Te  Amoana  Puke,  10, 
of  Hamilton,  by  Percy  Hill,  December  8, 
1940. 

GOODALL  —  Eric  Tomoana  Goodall. 
convert  by  George  Chase,  October  6,  1940. 

PAKU — Rawhiti  Paku,  convert  by  H. 
R.    Greening,    October    27,    1940. 

ORMSBY — Paul  Ormsby,  8,  by  George 
Chase,   October   6,    1940. 

GREENING —Kauri  Tamatea  Greening, 
8,   by   H.   R.   Greening,   October   27,   1940. 

MARRIAGES 

TIMU — HAU — Irimatao  Timu  to  Mere- 
ana  Maria  Hau  at  Hastings,  December  1, 
1940,  by   Elder  Teao   Wirihana. 

ROBINSON— CORNISH.  —  Joseph  R. 
Robinson  to  Thelma  M.  Cornish  at  Wa- 
nganui,    December    21,    1940. 

GARDINER— WIHONGI  —  Robert  Gar- 
diner to  Rose  WiHongi,  December  22, 
1940,  at  Elder's  Home,  Kaikohe,  by  Presi- 
dent   Matthew   Cowley. 

COFFEE— WILLIAMS— William  Coffee 
to  Kathleen  Williams,  December  22,  1940, 
at  Elder's  Home,  Kaikohe,  by  President 
Matthew    Cowley. 

DEATHS. 

RAP  AT  A — Matekino  Puru  Rapata,  4  3. 
December   10,    1940,   at   Tauwhare. 

ARONA — Miringa  Taiana  Arona,  19, 
December    20,    1910,    at    Ploeotainui. 


BACK  PICTURE  COMPETITION 


The  person  sending  in  to  "Te  Karere"  the  most  correct  names  of 
those  contained  in  the  picture  on  back  of  this  issue  of  "Te  Karere" 
before  the  10th  March,  1941,  will  receive  a  year's  subscription  to  "Te 
Karere,"    beginning    at    Hui    Tau. 

There  is  only  one  rule  you   must   follow.       The   winner   must  attend 

Hui  Tau  and  will  be  formally  presented  there  in  person  with  "A  Year's 

Subscription    to    Te    Karere."       This    rule    will    be    iron-clad.       No    "buts" 

or    "ifs"    about    it.  e-j*.. 

— Editor. 


C£ 


Te  Karere 


Established  in  1907 


H 


Wahanga    36 


Maehe,    1941 


Matthew    Cowley 
Kelly  Harris 
Eru   T.    Kupa 
Waimate   Anaru 


Tumuaki    Mihana 
Etita 

Kaiwhakamaori 
Kaiwhakamaori 


"Ko  tenet  Pepa  i  whakatapua  hei  hapai  ake  i  te  vwi  Maori  ki 
roto  i  nga  whakaaro-nui.' 

"Te  Karere"  is  published  monthly  by  the  New  Zealand  Mission  of  the  Church 
of  Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-day  Saints,  and  is  printed  by  TE  KARERE  PRESS,  No.  2 
Scotia  Place,  Upper  Queen  Street,  Auckland,  C.l,  N.Z.  Subscription  Rates:  3/-  per 
six  months;  5/-  per  year;  £1  for  five  years;  £2/10/-  for  life.  (United  States  Cur- 
rency:  $1.00    per   year;    $4.00   for   five   years;    S10.00    for   life.) 

Address    Correspondence,    Box    72,    Auckland,    C.l,    New    Zealand. 


Contents 

Editorial —  Page 

"Support  Your  1  lui  Tau,"  by  Matthew  Cowley  595 

"Awhinatia  To  Hui  Tan,"   Matin   Kauri     594 

Special  Features — 

"Etahi  <>  Nga  Whakaaro  i  Man."  rta  Wiremu  Takana  582 

"lie    Kitenga   i   te    Maraniatan.ua,-'   na    Mirini   T.    Ilemnaia    584 

"Ik-  Rongo  Korero,"  na  Witehira  585 

"Nga  Matenga"   586 

"Health  of  tin-    Maori    Race,"   na   Wipere   Amaru      591 

"Sing  We  Now  At  Parting,"  by  Isabel  Amadio  593 

"Photo  -i  the  Month"   596 

Arc  You  With  Us?"  Karere  Special    597 

"Back  Picture  (  ompetition"   607 


Church   Features — 

••Main  Kur.i  Hapati" 

I  lui    Tau    

( lenealogy     

Sundaj  School 

I  'niii.ii  \  

New s  from  ' 
Statistic 


583 

i.l  603 


582  TE  KARERE  Mache,  1941 

ETAHI  O  NGA  WHAKAARO  I  MAU 

He  Kupu  Whakamarama  enei  na  Wiremu  Takana  (kua  mate)  o 
Tahoraiti,  Niu  Tireni,  Mo  Runga  i  nga  Mana  Maori  kua  Ngaro,  me  te 
Whakaatu  atu  te  huarahi  e  hoki  mai  ano  Taua  Tohungatanga  Tapu 
o   te   Atua   ki   te   Iwi   Maori. 

HE  KUPU  WHAKAATU. — Ko  ia  tetahi  o  nga  Maori  i  lac 
ki  Amerika.  Ko  te  patai  tenei,  E  Iwa,  me  pchca  c  kaha  ai  te  iwi 
Maori  ki  te  whakarite  i  nga  tikanga  e  ova  ai  o  ratou  tinana,  e  inutu 
ai  hoki  tc  wehi  me  tc  mate  c  pitta  mai  ana  kia  ratou  i  roto  i  nga  mahi 
Atua  Maori  katoaf  Ko  wai  lie  kai  awhina  ma  ratou ?  Ko  enei 
ana  kupu  c  whai  akc  nci.  Na}  c  te  iwi,  tiroliia — he  tangata  aroha 
ia,  lie  tangata  pai  ano  hoki.  He  nui  tona  mohio  ki  nga  akoranga 
Pakclia  me  nga  akoranga  o  nga  Maori.  Na  tona  matua  ia  i  whaka- 
ako  ki  nga  matauranga  i  puta  mai  i  roto  i  nga  whare  IVananga  o  nga 
Tupuna. 

Ko  ana  korero  e  whai  ake  nei : 

Me  marama  tatou,  E  te  iwi  Maori,  he  iwi  whakapono  tatou, 
no  te  whare  o  Iharaira  hoki  tatou. .  .  Titiro  ki  te  kaha  o  o  tatou 
tupuna  ki  te  whakapono.  Kaore  rawa  o  ratou  ruarua  ki  te  pono 
o  nga  mea  kaore  nei  e  kitea  e  te  kanohi  tangata,  nga  mea  ra  whaka- 
te-Atua.  Kite  tonu  ana  ratou  i  nga  mahi  merekara  me  nga  mahi  o 
te  Atua  Ngaro.  I  pera  hoki  a  Iharaira  i  mua.  Kaore  rawa  e  rite 
ana  nga  Tauiwi,  ara  nga  Pakeha  nei ;  e  whakaaro  ana  te  nuinga  a 
ratou,  e  horihori  ana  te  whakapono  o  nga  Maori  ki  nga  mea  Atua, 
ara,  nga  mea  e  kore  nei  e  kitea  e  te  kanohi  tangata.  Ko  te  wehi  ki 
nga  mea  Atua  katoa,  ko  ia  tetahi  taonga  nui  o  te  iwi  Maori  i  runga 
i  ta  ratou  whakaaro.  he  pono  ana  mea.  Na,  ka  kite  tatou  i  konei, 
he  taonga  whakaheke  mai  tenei  mea  te  whakapono  no  o  tatou  tupuna. 
E  te  iwi  Maori,  ehara  i  te  mea  hanga  noa  ake  na  te  whakaaro,  i  te 
mea  homai  ranei,  e  te  tangata,  engari  he  mea  tuku  iho  no  onamata. 
Ehara  ia  i  te  mea  whakaako,  engari,  he  homaitanga  ki  a  ratou,  ina 
hoki,  he  aha  te  mahi,  he  karakia,  he  mahi  tohunga,  makutu,  tohu 
aitua,  moemoea,  he  ruru  ranei,  ngarara  ranei,  taniwha  ranei,  he 
whetu  rere  ahi  ranei,  he  wairua  tangata  mate  ranei,  patu  paiarehe 
renei,  kehua  ranei,  ahi  ranei,  tae  tonu  mai  te  wehi  ki  a  ratou  i  runga 
i  enei  mea ;  na  ta  ratou  whakapono  hoki  ki  ana  mea. 

Na,  he  aha  te  take  i  pera  ai?  Ina  te  take.  I  mohio  ratou 
he  tino  mana  i  o  ratou  tupuna  i  heke  mai  nei  i  Hawaiki.  me  to  ratou 
mohio  hoki  e  pono  ana  o  ratou  tupuna  i  a  ratou  aua  mana  tapu,  e 
whakakitea  ano  hoki  e  o  ratou  tupuna  nga  kaha  i  roto  i  aua  mana, 
koia  tenei  e  whai  ake  nei.  Ko  nga  rakau,  ko  nga  kohatu,  ko  nga 
ngaru  o  te  moana,  ko  nga  ika,  me  nga  whatitiri,  me  nga  uira,  me  nga 
tupuhi,  me  nga  hau,  me  era  atu  mea  e  rongo  ana  i  a  ratou  i  runga 
i  a  ratou  karakia,  i  puta  mai  nei  i  roto  i  o  ratou  whare  Wananga ; 
na,  he  tino  tohu  tenei  ki  a  tatou,  kaore  o  tatou  kaha  i  waho  atu  i  te 
whakapono.     Kei  te  mohio  tonu  tatou,  he  kino  te  haurangi,  te  moe 


Maehe,  1941  TE  KARERE  583 

tahae,  te  puremu,  te  petipeti  moni,  purei  kaari,  patu  tangata,  me 
era  atu  mea  e  rite  ana  ki  enei.  Kaore  hoki  he  tangata  e  ahei  te  ki 
pono,  he  mea  pai  enei  e  ora  ai  te  tinana  maori.  Engari,  e  whakaae 
ana.  te  katoa  he  kino  ana  mea.  Otira,  e  kore  e  taea  e  te  tangata 
te  pupuri  mai  i  a  ia,  kei  pa  atu  ki  ana  mea.  Na  te  aha  koia?  Na 
te  kore  kai  awhina  niona  e  taea  ai  e  ia  te  whakakahore  atn  i  ana  mea 
kino,  kei  pa  atn  ia.  Kei  te  mohio  tonn  tatou,  koia  tonu  nga  mea 
e  tere  ai  to  tatou  ngaro  atu  i  runga  i  te  mata  o  te  whenua.  Ko  te 
mea  hoki  tenei,  ara,  te  mate  o  te  tinana  e  tino  wehinga  ana  e  tatou 
katoa. 

Tenei,  ki  te  mahi  koia.  tatou  i  enei  mahi  ka  ora  koia  o  tatou 
tinana  maori  nei  ?  Kaore  rapea,  engari,  ka  mate  rawa.  Otira, 
kaore  pea  o  tatou  whakapono  e  mate  ana  te  tangata  i  enei  e  whai 
ake  nei,  i  te  mea  ehara  enei  i  te  taonga  tuku  iho  no  o  tatou  tupuna, 
ara,  te  kai  waipiro,  te  kai  paipa,  te  kai  tii,  te  mau  he  i  nga  kakahu  : 
ko  nga  huarahi  hoki  ia  e  putake  mai  ai  nga  mate  Pakeha  ki  te  Maori. 
e  mate  ai  tona  tinana. 

Me  hoki  ana  tatou  ki  te  kupu  ra,  ko  wai  he  kai  awhina  i  a  tatou, 
me  te  kupu  ano,  kaore  o  tatou  kaha  i  vvaho  atu  i  te  whakapono. 
Hoki  atu  ra  te  whakaaro  ki  nga  wa  onamata.  Na  te  whakapono  o  o 
tatou  tupuna.  i  taea  ai  e  ratou  te  u  ki  nga  tikanga  e  ora  ai  te  tinana 
tangata.  Ka  rereke  koia  o  ratou  uri?  Kaore  rapea.  Kei  roto  hoki 
i  o  ratou  nana  e  rere  ana  o  ratou  toto  me  te  mana  i  homai  ki  a 
ratou,  he  tukunga  iho  ki  tenei  whakatupuranga,  ki  tenei  whakatupu- 
ranga.  I  te  mea  kua  araai  tatou  e  nga  mahi  tinihanga,  e  nga  mahi 
poka  noa,  e  te  ngakau  kuare,  ka  puta  tenei  whakaaro  i  a  tatou.  kua 
kore  o  tatou  hokinga  atu  ano  ki  ana  mana  tapu  o  0  tatou  tupuna. 
Mehemea,  e  tika  ana  tenei.  kua.  kore  rawa  e  ora  o  tatou  tinana  no 
te  una,  na  te  whakapono  o  ratou  i  ora  ai  ratou  i  mua.  ara.  o  tatou 
lupuna.  No  reira,  me  hoki  ano  tatou  ki  reira  ki  ta.ua  whakapono 
ano  e  ora  ai  tenei  tinana.  Me  whakapono  tatou  ki  te  Atua,  ki  te 
Kai  Hanga  o  te  whenua,  o  te  Rangi,  me  nga  mea  katoa  e  hua  nei  ki 
roto,  me  Tana  Tama  hoki.  me  Ihu  Karaiti;  ko  ia  nei  te  Kai  Whaka- 
ora  o  te  ao,  ara.  tenei  tinana  maori,  me  tenei  tinana  wairua  ano  hoki. 
Me  whakapono  hoki  ki  te  Wairua  Tapu,  me  te  mana  o  te  Tohunga 
tanga  Tapu  o  Merekehereke  raua  ko    Vrona.     Kei  reira  nei  e  man 

ana  nga  kaha,  nga  mana  o  roto  i  te  \tuataiiga.  na  reira  nei,  i  taea 
ai   te  te  Atua  ana   malii   nunui. 

(  Tana  /<•  roanga  > 


BOUND  VOLUME  OF  "TE  KARERE,' 

1  1940 

A  limited  number  of  bound  volumes  of  the  I 

940  issue  oi 

Te 

Karere  will  soon  l>e  available.     Place  youi  or 

lers  as  soon 

IS 

possible  with   Te  Karen,  Bo*  72,    Auckland. 

584 


TE  KARERE 


Maehe,  1941 


HE  KITENGA  I  TE  MARAMATANGA 

He  Ripoata  Kauwhau  i  te  Rongopai 

Me  te  Iriiritanga  i  Muri 

No  Hirini  T.  Heremaia 

I  te  26  o  nga  ra  o  Hanucre  ka  tonoa  mai 

ahau  kia  tae  atu  ki  te  kainga  o  tetahi  tangata 

L.  hoa-aroha,  i   Pua  Onetai,  Kaikohe.     Aku  hoa 

haere  ko  Ripeka  Heremaia  raua  ko  Moe  Wi- 

r:  '  Hongi.    la  matou  ka  tae  atu  ki   te  kainga  ka 

kitea  kua  rite  pu  taua  whanau  mo  te  iriiri,  te 

matua  me  ana  tamariki  tokorua.    He  pani  te 

whanau  nei,  ara  pouaru  te  papa. 

Ka  iriiritia  rumaki  e  ahau  ratou  katoa,  a  Walter  Ashby,  Edward 

Ashby  me  Marshall  Ashby.     I  tino  whiwhi  ratou  ki  te  wairua  kia 

tomo  ratou  ki  te  Rongopai,  a  i  kite  matou  i  te  pono  o  te  whakaaro 

ki  te  Hahi. 

I  muri  i  te  iriiringa  ka  tu  he  karakia  kauwhau  ki  te  whare.  I 
tino  whakamaramatia  te  nuinga  o  nga  tikanga  o  te  Rongopai  i  konei, 
i  mutu  tenei  ra  ora  o  matou  i  runga  i  te  pai,  i  te  manaaki  hoki  i  te 
whare-hou,  ara  i  te  whanau  o  Walter  Ashby.  Ki  te  Atua  ano  te 
kororia  me  te  honore  mo  enei  mahi  whakapono  i  roto  i  enei  ra. 


Hirini    T.    Heremaia 


MO  NGA  MAHI  KURA  HAP  ATI 

Mau  e  kawe  tenei  ripoata  ki  nga  Timuaki  me  nga  Hekeretari 
o  nga  Kura  Hapati  o  te  Pei  Whairangi,  kia  mataara  i  roto  i  tenei  tau 
hou,  tonoa  mai  a  koutou  ripoata  i  nga  toru  marama  katoa.  Me 
timata  te  ripoata  mo  nga  Kura  Hapati  ia  Tihema  o  te  tau  kua  pahure, 
me  Hanuere  me  Pepuere  o  tenei  tau,  ara  ko  enei  nga  marama  toru 
tuatahi  o  te  Tau  Hou,  a  muri  atu  i  tera  me  waiho  kia  tae  tatou  ki  te 
Hui  Tau  ka  homaingia  te  tino  kaupapa  ripoata  mo  tatou.  Kaati  te 
waiho  i  nga  ripoata  kia  takoto  roa,  mehemea  kei  nga  Hekeretari  te 
takaware,  rapua  he  Hekeretari  hei  mahi  i  te  mahi.  Kei  te  kaha  te 
hoa-riri  ki  te  whakangoikore  i  te  hunga  e  hiahia  mahi  ana  ki  te  Atua. 
Kia  kaha  Pei  Whairangi  kia  koutou. 

Ma  te  Atua  koutou,  ara  tatou  katoa  e  tiaki  e  manaaki  i  roto  i  • 
enei  wa  o  te  pakanga. 

Na  te  Timuakitanga  Kura  Hapati  o  te  Takiwa  o  Pei  Whairangi. 
Timuaki,   Hare   Nehua. 
Kaunihera  tuatahi,  Kato  Kauwhata. 
Kaunihera  tuarua,  Raniera  Paora. 
Hekeretari,  Hinehou  Nehua. 


Maehe,  1941  TE  KARERE  585 

HE  RONGO  KORERO  MO  TE  WHAWHAI 

Na  Paepac  JJritchira 

He  maha  nga  rongo  hou  o  te  whawhai  i  tenei  marama,  tuatahi  ko 
te  maha  o  nga  mea  rere  rangi  kua  pakaru  inaianei.     Tiamana 
Ingarihi  1948,  Itari  416  me  te  Kariki   120. 

Nga  tima  whawhai  kua  ngaro-pakaru,  nga  manuao,  mea  ruku 
moana  me  era  atu — Tiamana  34,  Ingarihi  68,  Itari  42,  kahore  he 
korero  mo  Kariki  mo  tenei  wahanga.     I  penei  ai  te  nui  o  te  parekura 

0  nga  tima  o  Ingarangi  no  te  mea  ko  te  nuinga  o  te  moana  katoa  kei 
aia,  na  ka  whai  wahi  te  hoa  riri  ki  te  tukutuku  mai  i  ana  maina,  ara, 
men  whakapahu  tima.  Tetahi  he  maha  o  ona  tima  i  haere  ki  te 
awhina  i  nga  inotu  ke,  ko  te  Tiamana  i  pakarukaruhia  ona  tima  ki  ona 
rohe  ake,  ara  te  nuinga.  Ka  nui  tona  wehi  ki  te  puta  mai  ki  waho 
i  ona  rohe  kei  pera  te  nui  o  te  parekura  me  ona  mea  rere  rangi. 

Ka  nui  te  haere  mate  o  Itari,  e  rua  ona  taha  e  patua  ana.  ko  te 
Ingarihi  kei  te  patu  mai  i  tetahi  taha,  ko  Kariki  kei  tetahi.  Kua  nuku 
atu  i  te  90,000  nga  tangata  o  Itari  kua  man  herehere  i  tenei  taha,  lie 
tohu  tenei  kahore  tera  ivvi  e  aro  ana  ki  te  whawhai,  heoi  ano  kei  te 
mea  kei  raro  ratou  i  te  ture  here  e  haere  ana.  Xa  ahakoa  tenei  rongo 
mate  o  tetahi  o  nga  hoa  riri  o  te  Ingarihi,  kahore  ano  i  marie  noa  te 
wahi  tino  kino  rawa. 

I  te  marama  o  Tihema  nei  ka  whai  korero  a  Timuaki  Reuwhera 
(Roosevelt)  ki  te  ao  katoa  mo  tona  whakaaro  ki  te  whawhai  nei.  A, 
i  whakaatu  ano  ia  ka  whakapaua  tona  kaha  katoa  me  te  iwi  kei  raro 
i  aia  ki  te  malii  mea  ma  Ingarangi  me  ana  hoa.  I  penei  tana  kupu 
whakarite,  "ina  torn  te  whare  o  tou  hoa  i  te  ahi  ka  tikina  mai  lie  mea 
tine  kia  horo  te  lioatn,  a  kia  pirau  te  alii  hei  muri  whakahoki  ai  taua 
mea,  whakariterite  ai  hoki  i  te  utu."    E  pera  ana  tana  huarahi  inaianei 

1  te  mea  kua  toro  a  Ingarangi  kia  lioatn  noa  tana  mea  tine  ahi  a.  kahore 
lie  nini  kia  pirau  ra  ano  te  ahi  hei  reira  whakariterite  ai. 

I  roto  lioki  i  tana  w  liaikorero  ka  whakaatnria  e  ia  kia  ron 
ao  katoa  me  Tiamana  me  ona  hoa  katoa  e  kore  a  Tiamana  e  wikitoria 
i  tenei  whawhai,  engari  e  mea  ana  ia  ka  hemanawa  te  ao  i  mua  o  te 
mutunga.  E  kore  ia  e  whakaae  kia  man  te  rongo  kia  hinga  ra  ano  a 
Tiamana.  E  kii  ana  ia  ko  t€  putake  a  Tiamana  i  tOtoro  mai  ai  ia 
Mapani  kia  inn  atu  kia  rana  ko  Itari  hei  huarahi  e  whawhai  ai  a 
Merika  a  e  mutu  ai  hoki  te  tuku  i  nga  mea  whawhai  ki   Ingarangi. 

Ina  takoto  penei  e  mohio  ana  a  Tiamana  ka  alina  iti  tana  mate  i  te 
hoa.  Ko  nga  wheketere  (  factor)  i  nunui  katoa  «>  Amerika  kua  hurihia 
hei  hanga  mea  whawhai.  E  kii  ana  te  Timuaki  <>  ^merika  kei  reira 
te  tangata,  te  taonga,  te  matauranga  me  te  huarahi  hei  tautoko  i  te 
whawhai.     Kaati  mo  kona.      Mr  whai  korero  iti  mo  te  motu 

Ko  nga  moni  i  pan  ia  Niu  rireni  mo  te  whawhai  i  te  tan  kua 
I  aha  ii<  i  e  £37,000,000.  I  mea  ana  te  Pirimia  a  Te  Pereiha  nuku 
atu  nga  moni  e  pan  a  tenei  tau.  b  mea  ana  ia  e  hara  tenei  wa  i  t« 
w.i  tautohe  paremata  engari  he  wa  whakaaroaro  kia  horo  te  mutu 
o  te  w  hawliai.  i  l  .M  ia  te  i  oangra  I 


586  TE  KARERE  Maehe,  1941 

NGA  MATENGA 

Te  Aamihi  Marc  Gregory. 
la  Hanuere  te  11,  1941,  i  wehe  atu  a  Te  Aumihi  Mare  Gregory 
i  tenei  ao.  Ko  te  Hohipera  o  Thames,  Hauraki  te  wahi  i  ngaro  atu 
ai,  he  mate  whanau.  Kei  te  whai  ake  nei  etahi  o  nga  ahuatanga  o 
tona  matenga.  Na  te  moto-ka  i  mau  ki  te  Hohipera  i  te  9  o  nga  haora 
o  te  ata,  i  te  12  ka  whanau  te  peepi  kotiro,  i  whanau  mate  mai,  e  toru 
haora  i  muri  maika  haere  te  wairua  o  te  whaea. 

Te   Nehunga 

Ko  Kiri  Kiri  te  marae  i  taungia  e  nga  iwi,  hui  mai  ana  hapu 
maha  ki  te  tangi  ki  aia  me  tona  peepi.  No  Ngati-maru  me  Ngati- 
te-aute.  Ona  tamariki  i  pae  mai  ko  nga  mea  i  konei.  Ko  te  16 
whanautanga  tenei  mona  i  roto  i  te  46  tau.  I  iriiritia  ia  e  Elder  Jesse 
McBride  i  te  tau  1908,  kaati  i  aia  i  moe  tana  tane  ka  riro  hei  Katorika, 
a  na  te  Katorika  ano  i  whakahaere  te  karakia  mutunga  mo  raua  i  te 
13  o  nga  ra  o  Hanuere. 

Nga  Tamariki 

I  tae  mai  enei  o  ona  tamariki  ki  te  tangi,  a  Ivan  Gregory  me 
tona  hoa  wahine,  a  Raharuhi  Pururu  o  Horohoro,  a  Frances  i  Aka- 
rana  e  mahi  ana,  me  Pauline  Gregory  Clark  hoa  wahine  o  Tom 
Clarke  kua  hoki  nei  raua  ki  Haaki  Pei.  Ko  te  whakatekau  o  ona 
tamariki  i  riro  mai  i  ahau,  a  ko  tenei  anake  kei  roto  i  te  Hahi  ki 
taku  mohio.  Na  Rose  Watene 

Meri  Heperi 
Na  te  Piwa  Rumatiki  i  mate  ai  a  Meri  Heperi  o  te  Peka  o  Wai- 
hou  i  te  3  o  nga  ra  o  Hanuere  nei.     E  8  noaiho  ona  tau. 

Te  Karakia  Whakamutunga 

He  kotiro  aroha  tenei  no  matou  katoa,  e  ona  hoa  tamariki,  me 
ona  matua.  Na  tona  tupuna  matua,  na  Hohepa  Heperi,  i  whakatapu 
te  rua  takoto  o  tona  tinana  maori  i  te  nehunga,  na  Hare  Nehua  i 
whakahaere  nga  himene.  Nga  tangata  katoa  i  tae  mai  i  taua  ra, 
i  te  5  o  nga  ra  o  Hanuere  nuku  atu  i  te  200. 

Haere  e  hine.  Haere  i  nga  haerenga  o  nga  tupuna,  matua,  me 
era  atu  tini  hunga  kua  hoki  atu  nei  ki  te  kainga  tuturu  mo  o  tatou 
tinana  kikokiko.     Haere-haere.  Na  Hare  Nehua. 

Miring  a  Arona  Matetaka. 
Te  tamahine  o  muri   a  Tatana  Arona,  me  te  wahine  aroha  a 
Hohepa  Matetaka,  a  Miringa  Arona  Matemate  i  mate  ki  te  kainga 
o  ona  matua  i  te  19  o  Tihema  1940.  Na  John  Apiti 

Hurae  Hare  Reihana. 
I  mate  ta  matou  peepi,  a  Hurae  Hare  Reihana  i  te  31  o  nga  ra  o 
Hanuere.     Haere  e  te  uri.     Haere  ki  te  kainga  tuturu  o  nga  tupuna 
me  te  iwi.     Haere  hoki  ki  te  Ringa  Kaha  o  te  Kai-hanga. 

Na  Mete  Kingi  Reihana. 


Maehe,  1941  TE  KARERE  587 

MAHI  KURA  HAPATI 

RATAPU  TUATAHI: 
Whakaaturanga:  AKORANGA   45.      Upoko   2 

Nga  tikanga  o  te  whakapono  ki  te  Atnatanga.  Te  Tokotoru. 
Nga  tangatanga  e  toru  ko  ratou  nei  te  tino  timuakitanga  o  te  ao  katoa 
kua  whakakite  mai  ia  ratou  ano  ki  te  tangata:  (1)  Ko  te  Atua  Matua; 
(2)  Tana  Tama  a  Ihu  Karaiti;  (3)  Te  Wairua  Tapu.  Ko  enei  e  toru 
he  hunga  wehe  tonu  tetahi  i  tetahi,  motuhake  tonu  te  tinana  o  tetahi  i 
to  tetahi,  e  whakaaturia  ana  e  nga  tuhituhinga  kua  whakamana  nei  e  te 
tangata  o  nga  mahi  i  waenganui  i  te  Atua  me  te  tangata.  I  te  wa  o 
te  iriiringa  o  te  Kai-whakaora,  i  kite  a  Hoani  i  t2  tohu  o  te  Wairua 
Tapu,  i  mua  i  aia  i  roto  i  te  tapenakara  kikokiko  a  Te  Karaiti  nana  nei 
na  Hoani  i  whakarite  te  tikanga  tapu  o  te  iriiringa;  i  rangona  hoki  e  ia 
te  reo  o  te  Matua.  Nga  tangatatanga  e  toru  o  te  Atuatanga  i  reira,  i 
whakaatu  ia  ratou  rereke  ake  tetahi  i  tetahi,  motuhake  tonu  hoki  tetahi 
i  tetahi.  I  muri  mai  i  whakaari  mai  te  Kai-whakaora  ki  Ana  akonga 
ko  te  kai  whakamarie  ko  ia  nei  ko  te  Wairua  Tapu  tera  e  tukua  atu 
kia  ratou  e  Tona  Matua.  Na  ka  kitea  iho  ano  i  konei  nga  mema  e  toru 
o  te  Atuatanga  e  whakaaturia  wehewehetia  ana.  Ia  Tipene  i  te  wa  o 
tona  whakamatenga  i  manaakitia  ki  te  mana  o  te  kite  atu  i  nga  mea  o 
te  rangi  a  i  kite  ia  i  a  Ihu  Karaiti  e  tu  ana  i  te  taha  matau  o  te 
Matua.  A  Hohepa  Mete  i  aia  e  karanga  ana  ki  te  Ariki  i  roto  i  te 
inoi  kaha,  i  kite  ia  i  te  Matua  me  te  Tama  e  tu  ana  i  waenganui  o  te 
maramatanga  nuku  nuku  ake  i  to  te  ra,  i  mea  mai  tetahi  o  raua  mo 
tetahi:  "Ko  Taku  Tama  tenei  e  arohatia  nei  e  Ahua,  whakarongo  ki 
Aia."  Tenei  me  tenei  o  nga  mema  o  te  Tokotorutanga  e  kiia  ana  ko 
te  Atua  ratou  katoa  e  huia  ana  ko  te  Tokotorutanga. 

Nga    Patai: 

1.  Ko  v/ai  ma  te  Atuatanga? 

2.  E  hia  ratou? 

3.  Mehemea  he  wehewehe  o  ratou  tinana,  whakaaturia  te  rarangi 
karaipiture  e  tautoko  ana? 

4.  Mehemea  ranei  he  tinana  kotahi  tonu  ratou  e  toru  whakaaturia 
ano  te  tautoko? 

5.  Ko  wai  te  mea  i  whakaaria  mai  e  te  Atua  ki  Ana  akonga  tera 
e  tukua  mai  e  te  Matua  kia  ratou? 

6.  Pehea  te  ahua  o  te  Matua  mo  te  Tama   i  to  kitenga  a   Hohepa 
Mete? 

RATAPU  TUARUA 

AKORANGA  46.    Te   Kotahitanga  <>  te   Atuatanga. 

Whakaaturanga: 

Nga  tikanga  o  te  whakapono.  Te  Atuatanga  ho  ahua  kotahitanga  i 
roto  i  nga  paanga  mana  me  nga  whokamaunga  atu  o  Ona  mema.  la 
Ihu  i  runga  i  be  whenua  a  i  Tona  whakaaturanga  i  Aia  ano  ki  Ona 
pononga  Niwhai,  e  honotonu  te  whakaatu  kia  ratou  i  te  kotahiti 

waenganui    ia    raua    ko    t'-    Maiua    a    i    waenganui    hoki    ia    ratOU    ko    te 

Wairua  Tapu.      El  kore  hoki  e  ahei  kia  Kiia  t»-  tikanga  o  tenei   n 

lie  kotahi  tonu  to  tinana  0  to  Matua  mo  to  Tama  mo  to  Wairua  Tapu 
mo    o    ratou    wahi    hoki.        E    Imra    hoki    i    to    mea    no    to    tinana    kotahi    ana 

Ingoa  i.i  i  roto  i  tetahi  atu  ahuatanga.  Hei  whakaatu  i  te  he  o  enei 
whakaaro  ko  te  whakaaturanga  e  whai  ake  nei.  I  muri  tata  iho  i  te 
tukinonga  la  te  Karaiti,  ka  Inoi  la  mo  Ana  akonga,  mo  nga  tekau  ma 
rua,  me  era  atu  mema  tahuri  hou  mai  Ida  purltia  ratou  i  roto  i  te 
kotahitanga,  kia  kotahi  ai  ratou  katoa  pera  me  te  .Matua  raua  ko  te 
Tama  e  kotahi  nei.     E  kore  e  ahei  tatou  ki  te  whakaaro  penei  e  Inoi 

aria    a    to     karaiti    kia    makoio    atu     i    aim    . 


588  TE  KARERE  Maehe,  1941 

whakatoputia  ratou  ki  roto  ki  te  tinana  kotahi,  ahakoa  hoki  ko  tenei 
whakarereketanga  e  poka  ke  noaatu  ana  i  te  ahuatanga  kua  whakata- 
kotoria.  Ko  te  Karaiti  e  hiahia  ana  kia  kotahi  katoa  o  ratou  ngakau 
o  ratou  wairua  me  a  ratou  mahi,  he  penei  hoki  te  kotahitanga  i  wae- 
nganui  ia  raua  ko  te  Matua  i  waenganui  hoki  ia  ratou  ko  te  Wairua 
Tapu. 

Nga  Patai: 

1.  Pehea  te  whakaaturanga  nui  a  te  Karaiti  ki  nga  Niwhai? 

2.  I  roto  i  aua  rarangi  ki  nga  Niwhai,  he  aha  te  mea  e  kore  e 
ahei  kia  whakaarotia  e  tatou? 

3.  He  aha  te  tikanga  o  te  inoi  a  te  Karaiti  ki  te  Matua — "kia 
puritia  ana  akonga  i  roto  i  te  kotahitanga  pera  me  la  me  te 
Matua  e   kotahi  nei"? 

RATAPU  TUATORU 

AKORANGA  47.      He  roanga  o  te  Kotahitanga  o  te  Atuatanga. 

Tenei  kotahitanga  he  tauira  no  te  pai  mutunga,  te  whakaaro  kau 
o  tetahi  o  te  Tokotoru  he  whakaaro  pera  ano  no  tetahi,  a  kite  nei  tenei 
me  tenei  o  ratou  ma  te  kanohi  tino  kite  e  kite  ana  e  mohio  tahi  ana. 
Ahakoa  he  aha  te  tikanga  e  whakatakotoria  ana  e  meatia  e  tenei  me 
tenei  o  ratou  i  runga  i  te  ahua  kotahi  he  mea  arataki  ano  na  aua 
tikanga  o  te  pono  tuturu  me  te  mahi  tika.  Te  kotahi  tonu  o  te  Atua- 
tanga e  tino  maha  nei  nga  whakaaturanga  i  roto  i  nga  karaipiture  e 
hara  i  te  hononga  ngaro  no  nga  mea,  e  hara  hoki  i  te  huinga  o  nga 
tinana  kia  kotahi,  he  pokanga  ketanga  hoki  tena  i  te  tikanga.  Te 
Matua,  te  Tama  me  te  Wairua  Tapu  e  wehe  motuhake  tonu  ana  te 
tinana  me  te  ahuatanga  o  tenei  me  tenei  o  ratou  penei  ano  me  era 
tangata  e  toru  i  roto  nei  i  te  kikokiko.  Ahakoa  ra  ko  te  kotahi  o  a 
ratou  mahi  me  nga  whakahaerenga  kua  noho  he  whakahaunga  na  ratou 
katoa  a  ko  o  ratou  hiahia  he  hiahia  no  te  Atua,  tae  noa  hoki  ki  te 
ahua  a  tinana  o  te  Matua  e  rite  ana  ano  ki  to  te  Tama,  no  reira  e 
mea  ana  a  te  Karaiti  i  te  honohono  tonu  o  te  uiui  a  Piripi  kia  whaka- 
aturia  mai  ki  aia  te  Matua:  "Ka  mea  a  Ihu  ki  aia,  roa  noatu  Taku  noho 
kia  koutou  a  kahore  ano  koe  i  matau  noa  ki  Ahau  e  Piripi?  ko  ia  kua 
kite  i  Ahau  kua  kite  hoki  i  te  Matua,  a  he  aha  koe  ka  mea  ai,  whaka- 
kitea  mai  te  Matua  kia  matou?  E  kore  ianei  koe  e  whakapono  ko 
Ahau  kei  roto  i  te  Matua,  ko  te  Matua  kei  roto  i  Ahau?  Ko  nga  kupu 
e  korero  nei  Ahau  kia  koutou  e  hara  i  te  korero  Naku  ake,  engari  na 
te  Matua  e  noho  ana  i  roto  i  Ahau,  ko  Ia  te  mea  ana  i  nga  mahi. 
Whakapono  mai  ki  Ahau  kei  roto  Ahau  i  te  Matua,  ko  te  Matua  hoki 
kei  roto  i  Ahau." 

Nga    Patai: 

1.  He  pehea  te  ahua  o  te  Tokotoru  i  roto  i  o  ratou  whakaaro? 

2.  Kotahi  tonu  ranei  to  ratou  tinana,  e  toru  ranei  nga  tinana 
wehewehe? 

3.  I  pehea  te  ritenga  mai  o  te  Atua  ki  te  tangata? 

4.  Ko  wai  te  mea  i  pono  tonu  te  uiui  kia  te  Karaiti  mo  te  Matua? 

5.  Pehea  te  whakahoki  a  te  Karaiti  ki  te  patai  a  Piripi,  a  kei  hea 
te  rarangi  karaipiture  tautoko? 

RATAPU   TUAWHA 

AKORANGA  48.     Upoko  2 

Te  whakatangatatanga  o  ia  mema  o  te  Atuatanga.  I  nga  whaka- 
aturanga kua  oti  nei  te  whakatakoto,  kua  marama  ko  te  Atua  he 
tangata  kei  Aia  nei  te  tinana  me  ona  wahi  katoa  me  ona  whakaaro. 
A  Ihu  Karaiti,  ko  Ia  nei  i  te  Matua  i  roto  i  te  wairua  i  mua  i  te  haere- 
nga  mai  kia  noho  i  roto  i  te  kikokiko,  a  nana  nei  i  hanga  nga  ao,  i 
noho   Ia  i  waenganui   i   nga  tangata  penei   ano   me   te   tangata   me   te 


Maehe,  1941  TE  KARERE  589 

kaha  katoa  a  tinana  o  te  tangata.  I  muri  mai  i  tona  kakenga  atu  i 
whakaputa  mai  la  i  roto  i  Tana  ahua  ano,  i  roto  hoki  i  Tana  ahua 
ka  kake  atu  la  ki  te  rangi,  i  Tana  ahua  ano  i  whakakite  la  i  Aia  ki 
nga  Niwhai  me  nga  poropiti  o  enei  ra.  E  tino  whakaae  ana  tatou  ko 
te  Karaiti  i  roto  i  te  ahua  motuhake  o  Tona  Matua,  i  hanga  hoki  te 
tangata  ki  taua  ahua  ano.  No  reira  e  mohio  ana  matou  tera  ko  te 
Matua  raua  tahi  ko  te  Tama  i  roto  i  o  raua  ahua  me  te  tupu  he  tino 
tangata  pakari,he  tinana  tuturu  to  tenei  me  tenei  o  raua,  he  he-kore, 
e  taiawhiotia  ana  hoki  e  te  kororia  e  kore  nei  e  matauria  e  te  tangata 
tona  kanapa,  ahakoa  ano  ko  Tana  tinana  he  tinana  whai  kikokiko 
wheua  hoki. 

Nga  Patai: 

1.  He  aha  te  maramatanga  kia  tatou  i  roto  i  nga  whakaaturanga 
mo  te  Atuatanga  kua  oti  ake  nei? 

2.  He  pehea  te  ahua  o  Ihu  Karaiti  i  mua  atu  i  Tona  whiwhi  ki  te 
tinana  kikokiko? 

3.  Pehea  Tona  ahua  i  Tona  kakenga  atu  ki  te  rangi? 

4.  I  hanga  te  tangata  kia  rite  ki  te  ahua  o  wai? 

5.  He  pehea  te  kororia  e  taiawhio  ana  i  te  Matua  raua  ko  te  Tama. 

RATAPU   TUARIMA 

Me  hoki  whakamuri  ki  nga  akoranga  o  nga  wiki  e  wha  o  mua  atu. 
(Review.) 

MAHIA  DISTRICT  MISSIONARIES 

FOR  THE  MONTHS  OF  MARCH,  APRIL,  MAY 

Second   Week:  MARCH 

Munro  Smith,  Perea  Smith    Wairoa 

L.  T.  Nelson,  Ru  Hoetawa Nuhaka 

Third   Week: 

Tuehu  Smith,  Hohepa  Te  Kauru,  Oranoa  Tengaio, 

Tearawhiti  Smith Opoutama 

Te  Amo  Tengaio,  Pakimana  Taurima,  Sarah  Whaanga.  .  .  .   Nuhaka 

Fourth    Week: 

Sam  Haronga,  Taka  Toroaiwhiti,  Ellen  Mataira, 

Te  Wai  Haronga Opoutama 

Runga  Tengaio,   Oranoa  Tengaio,    Rangi    Tengaio, 

Heni  Tengaio Wairoa 

Fifth    Week: 

All  Whakapapa  Committees  to  meet   in  their  own  branches. 

APRIL 

No  \l<-  lionaries  other  than  the  District  Presidency  to  visit  all  branches. 

First    Week:  Al  A  Y 

Distrid    Presidency   Opoutama 

Peter  Campbell,  Kui  Campbell,  Emma  Brown     Nuhaka 

Second    Wcclt: 

District    Presidency    Waif. -a 

Moraro  Walker,  Parae  Walker,  Ellen  Mataira Opoutama 

Te  Amo  Tengaio,  Tihema  Taurima    Nuhaka 

Third    Wn-k: 

Runga    Tengaio,    Tuati    Whaanga,    Tureiti    Solomon, 

aio N 

Munro  Smith,  Taka  Toroaiwhiti   Opoutama 

James   Brov  n,   Emma   Brown    Nuhaka 

Fourth    W««kl 

Tuehu  Smith,  Hohepa  Te  Kauru,  Oranoa  Tengaio  w 

llirini  Campbell,    Rai  Opoutama 


590 


TE  KARERE 


Maehe,  1941 


^unday    ^chool 


Hohepa    M.   Meha,   Superintendent  Eru   T.   Kupa,   Assistant   Superintendent 

James   R.    Elkington,   Assistant   Supt.  Kelly    Harris,    Secretary 

Lessons   compiled   by   Hohepa   M   Meha   and   Eru   T.   Kupa. 


PRELUDE 


A  Uegreito. 


A.rr.  from  8CHUBEKT 
by  T.  Y.  C. 


p  8ft. 


mm=m 


#       *    .  5::     ■    * 


Ei=^fe 


SACRAMENT  GEM 

Prepare  our  minds  that  we  may  see 
The  beauties   of   Thy  grace; 

Salvation  purchased  on  that  tree 
For  all  who  seek  Thy  face. 


POSTLUDE 


Stately  ivith  expression. 
8  ft 


Tracy  Y.  Cannon. 


wmmmmmmm 


CONCERT  RECITATION 

1  Corinthians  2:  11. 

"For  what  man  knoweth  the  things  of  a  man,  save  the  spirit  of 
man  which  is  in  him?  Even  so  the  things  of  God  knoweth  no  man, 
but  the  Spirit  of  God." 

KORERO  A  NGAKAU 

1  Koroniti  2: 11. 

"Ko  wai  hoki  te  tangata  e  matau  ana  ki  nga  mea  a  te  tangata? 
Ko  te  wairua  anake  o  te  tangata  i  roto  i  aia ;  waihoki  ko  nga  mea  a  te 
Atua,  e  kore  e  matauria  e  tetahi,  engari  e  te  Wairua  o  te  Atua." 

HYMNS 

"Let  Us  Treat  Each  Other  Kindly"   Page  146 

"Kia  Koa,  E  Iharaira"   Wharangi  13 


Maehe,  1941  TE  KARERE  591 

THE  HEALTH  OF  THE  MAORI  RACE 

Wi  Pere  Amaru,  A.B.,  M.A. 

(Fourth  Instalment) 
THE  MAORIS  AXD  THEIR  TEETH 

Where  our  race  of  a  century  ago  was  eulogized  by  the  medical 
world  for  its  superior  physique  and  dental  perfection,  to-day,  after 
only  five  generations  of  existence  under  this  so-called  civilization, 
the  physical  and  dental  health  of  our  people  has  deteriorated  deplor- 
ably until  now  every  Maori  home  has  its  share  of  toothaches  and  dis- 
ease so  uncommon  in  days  of  old.  However,  it  is  still  within  the 
power  of  the  race  to  readjust  our  eating  and  living  habits  and  finally 
re-attain   perfection  in  physical   and   dental   health. 

The  initial  step  towards  this  goal  has  already  been  instituted  by 
the  Government  with  dental  clinics  and  a  daily  supply  of  milk  to 
every  schoolchild  within  the  Dominion.  The  teeth  of  the  children 
both  Maoris  and  pakehas  are  now  being  well  treated  by  these  dental 
clinics,  but  all  this  work  will  amount  to  naught  if  we  at  home  do  not 
give  our  children  the  proper  care  and  food  required  as  a  foundation 
for  good  healthy  teeth. 

Our  teeth  and  mouth  form  one  of  the  most  important  parts  of 
our  body.  They  can  be  sources  of  disease,  or  health,  as  we  choose. 
This  is  so  because  it  is  by  our  teeth  that  the  various  foods  that  go 
to  the  nourishing  of  our  1  todies  are  first  prepared  for  digestion  by 
the  stomach,  and  other  digestive  organs.  Without  our  teeth  the  kinds 
of    food   we  could   lake   would  be  limited   to  liquids  and   sop. 

Our  teeth  are  composed  roughly  of  three  substances.  That  por- 
tion which  you  sec  in  the  mouth  (the  "crown")  is  made  of  enamel. 
The  root  or  the  body  of  the  tooth  is  made  up  of  a  substance  called 
"dentine."  Inside  these  IS  the  "pulp"  or  the  part  which  has  the 
tiny  blood  vessels  and  tiny  nerves  which  cause  toothaches, 

Nature  gives  us  two  sets  of  teeth  which  have  to  last  through  life. 
The  fust  set  arc  the  "milk"  or  "baby"  teeth  numbering  20,  and  the 
second  are  permanenl  teeth  numbering  32. 

Long  before  the  baby  comes  into  tin-  world,  the  busines 
building   its   teeth    is   begun.     About    a   month   before   the   baby   is 

born,   the   enamelling    of    the  crowns   of    these   "milk"   teeth    is   almost 

complete,  and  there  the  teeth  themselves  are  kept  in  little  sacs  until 

the   time   is   ready    for   their   "cutting." 

Xow  the  material  for  building  these  little  teeth  must  come  from 

somewhere,    for  nature  cannot    build   unless   she  has   materials.     Since 
the  work  is  done  before  birth,  it  is  easily  seen  that  the  materials  must 

come  direcl    from  the  mother,  and  so  we  gel  our  firsl    facts  about 
teeth.     Good  teeth  depends  firsl   upon  the  health  of  the  expectant 

mother  and   not    upon    the  child's    first    visit    to   the   denial   chuu        The 

expectant    mother  must   therefore  eat    foods   recommended   b)    the 
I  'lunket  m  dist  i  id  nu 


592  TE  KARERE  Maehe,  1941 

The  milk  teeth  upon  which  the  child  has  to  depend  for  at 
least  six  years  cannot  he  looked  after  too  carefully,  because  they 
have  a  great  effect  for  good  or  ill  upon  the  second  and  permanent 
teeth.  The  process  of  building  the  second  teeth  is  the  same  as  the 
first,  with  this  great  difference,  that  the  materials  for  the  building- 
come  not  from  the  mother  (as  is  the  case  of  the  milk  teeth),  but 
from  the  child  itself. 

If  the  permanent  teeth  are  to  come  out  in  proper  order  and 
arrangement,  exercise  of  the  jaws  must  take  place  right  from  birth. 
That  is  one  of  the  reasons  a  baby  should  be  breast-fed,  because  this 
makes  the  baby  work  for  its  food.  The  action  of  sucking  brings  a 
rush  of  blood  to  the  jaws,  which  carries  with  it  all  the  materials 
needed  for  building  strong  jaws  and  a  roomy  mouth.  When  the 
baby  is  weaned,  its  general  food  should  contain  a  proportion  of  hard 
foods,  so  that  it  is  compelled  to  chew  and  thus  exercise  its  jaws.  It 
is  therefore  necessary  to  give  a  baby  at  the  age  of  nine  months 
some  hard,  dry  food,  such  as  tough  crust,  hard,  plain  biscuits,  and  so 
forth. 

It  is  very  important  that  the  mouth  should  be  exercised  because 
lack  of  it  is  one  of  the  main  causes  of  badly  arranged  second  teeth, 
and  badly  arranged  teeth  are  more  liable  to  decay  because  nature  is 
not  permitted  to  cleanse  the  teeth  properly.  Nature  alone  cleansed 
the  teeth  of  the  old  Maoris,  but  to-day  because  of  our  eating  habits 
(and  the  type  of  food  we  eat)  nature  alone  is  not  able  to  rid  the 
mouth  of  the  film  formed  on  our  teeth  after  each  meal.  Consequently 
we  must  rely  upon  the  toothbrush  and  dentrice  twice  daily  and  visit 
our  dentist  at  least  twice  a  year. 

Now,  if  we  eat  only  such  food  as  apples  or  raw  cabbages,  we  will 
notice  that  no  film  is  left  on  our  teeth.  But  we  cannot  live  on  apples 
and  cabbages  alone.  On  the  other  hand  let  us  eat  bread  and  pudding 
and  we  shall  readily  discern  a  smudgy  covering  on  our  teeth  after 
a  couple  of  meals.  This  then  is  the  type  of  food  for  which  the 
toothbrush  is  needed  to  rid  the  teeth  of  this  film  which  is  a  very 
suitable  breeding  place  for  those  bacteria  which  will  soon  break 
through  the  enamel  of  the  teeth  to  start  their  work  of  not  only 
causing  toothaches,  but  of  causing  germs  and  decayed  matter  to  enter 
the  digestive  system. 

Tartar  is  deposited  on  the  teeth  largely  through  the  action  of 
the  saliva  on  some  of  the  foods  that  we  eat.  This  deposit  cannot 
be  removed  by  the  toothbrush,  although  it  is  easily  removed  by  the 
dentist.     So  don't  neglect  to  see  your  dentist  regularly. 

Those  of  you  with  defective  teeth  in  your  mouths,  go  at  once  to 
your  dentists.  You  are  Latter-day  Saints.  You  defile  your  bodies 
just  as  much  as  if  you  would  if  you  were  heavy  smokers.  Bad  teeth 
cause  bad  health,  and  a  body  with  bad  health  cannot  expect  to  retain 
the  spirit  of  God  which  will  definitely  not  dwell  within  an  unclean 
tabernacle. 


Maehe,  1941  TE  KARERE  593 

"  SING  WE  NOW  AT  PARTING  " 

By  Isabel  Amadio 

I  come  to  record  the  passing  of  Marge  Whiwhikiterangi  Waugh, 

wife  of  Phillip  Waugh  of  Tarukenga  and  daughter  of  Brother  and 
Sister  John  Ormsby  of  Ngongotaha  Valley,  Rotorua. 

If  you  will  come  with  me  we  will  watch  the  beauty  and  peace  of 
her  journey. 

On  Sunday,  29th  December,  1940,  we  heard  that  she  was  very 
ill  and  visited  her.  In  the  cool  room  where  she  rested,  supported  In- 
ner husband  and  surrounded  by  her  other  dear  ones,  the  quiet  peace 
illuminating  the  fragile  face  was  inspiring.  She  was  quite  con- 
scious, and  we  talked  together  of  the  Gospel,  of  the  many  testimonies 
of  the  help  of  the  Lord  which  we  both  had.  She  listened  eagerly, 
waiting  ever  to  hear  more  of  the  Lord  whom  she  loved,  ever  whis- 
pering "Did  you  hear  that,  daddy?"  to  her  earthly  father.  She  told 
me  how  happy  she  felt  at  this  time,  and  particularly  of  leaving  this 
earth  to  go  when  her  Heavenly  Father  called  her.  I  could  see  that 
it  was  genuine  and  took  joy  in  the  joy  that   was  hers. 

The  Lord  did  call  her,  at  5  p.m.  on  New  Year's  Day.  Before 
leaving  she  asked  her  family  to  gather  with  her  in  "family  prayers," 
when  she  also  said  her  own. 

The  following  evening  a  large  gathering  of  relatives  and  friends. 
Maori  and  Pakeha,  were  present  to  say  farewell  to  the  Marge  who 
lay    in    her   earthly   casket   outside   under   an    electrically-lit    awning. 

How  can  I  tell  you  of  the  impressiveness  of  that  meeting  under 
the  stars?  The  hymns  of  the  Saints  (lowing  on  the  night  air,  the 
majesty  of  the  Gospel  spoken  in  the  presence  of  the  dead,  and  the 

Sweet    voices   of    Sisters    Thompson    and    Puku    singing    "Nearer    My 

God  to  Thee,"  and  the  courage  of  the  bereaved  mother  bearing  her 
testimony,  I   For  one  felt  very  humble. 

At    noon    on    Friday,    Saints   and    friends    met    again    to   hold    the 

last  service,  which  if  possible  was  even  more  beautiful.  The  old 
favourite,  "Come,  Come  Ye  Saints,"  rung  out  in  the  wanning  rays 
of  a  beautiful  day,  held  new  promise  i<>  all.  The  inspiring  words 
of  "Oh  M \  Father"  seemed  to  fill  all  the  world,  though  the  Saints 
were  few.  The  speakers  were  blessed  with  inspiration  that  I  felt  and 
knew  thai  "death  had  no  sting"  and  "grave  no  victory."  \t  the 
close  of  the  meeting,  when  all  the  expressions  of  love  which  poured 
from  our  hearts  for  the  departed  Sistei  had  been  voiced,  we  sang 
the  song  which  she  had  asked  to  be  sung,  "Sing  We  Nov  \i 
Parting.  "  Ai  the  graveside  we  ang  ll  again,  dun  we  left  oui  M 
to  sleep  until  that  time  when  the  Lord  >hall  come  with  the 
"Thousands"  of   I  (is  Saints. 


594  TE  KARERE  Maehe,  1941 

Edit 

AWHINATIA  TO  HUI  TAU 

Kei  te  haere  nga  mahi  katoa  o  te  marae  kia  tino  rite  ko 
tenei  te  tino-o-nga  Hui  Tau — te  Hui  Tau  nui  ake — te  Hui  Tau 
mahi  mo  te  katoa — te  Hui  Tau  whaka-te-Atua  o  nga  Hui  Tau 
kua  karangatia  e  te  Hahi  o  Ihu  Karaiti  o  te  Hunga  Tapu  o  nga 
Ra  o  Muri  Nei  i  Niu  Tireni.  A  Nuhaka  kua  takatu  noatu  kia 
timata  nga  huihuinga  i  te  Paraire,  11  o     nga  ra  o  Aperira. 

E  tuatahi  ana  tenei  i  roto  i  te  hitori  o  tenei  Mihana  kia 
kore  he  "Kaumatua"  o  Hiona  e  takatu  ana  i  tenei  Hui  Tau. 
E  tika  ana  kia  whakatapua,  ae  hoki,  e  whakatapua  ana  tenei 
Hui  Tau  ki  te  "mahara"  o  nga  rau  Kaumatua  kua  haere  mai  ki 
enei  motu  i  roto  i  te  60  tau  kua  pahure  ki  te  ako  kia  tatou 
te  Rongopai  i  whakahokia  mai  nei.  Tera  te  tini  rau  o  enei 
tangata  e  whakaaro  mai  ana  kia  tatou  i  tenei  wa,  a  e  inoi  ana 
hoki  kia  tautokongia  tenei  Mihana. 

Whakahonoretia  enei  pononga  a  te  Atua,  ia  tatou  kia 
tae  ki  te  Hui  Tau. 

Kei  a  koutou  Takiwa  nga  tikiti  whitu-hereni  me  te  hiki- 
pene.  Me  mau  mahara  koutou  katoa  ko  enei  tikiti  ma  koutou 
e  tango,  a  ko  te  moni  he  awhina-hoatu-noake  na  koutou  mo  te 
Hui  Tau.  Kahore  tenei  moni  nei  utu  i  to  uru  ki  te  Hui  Tau, 
engari  he  awhinatanga  i  te  haere,  noho  ranei.  Ko  te  powhiri 
haere  mai  ki  te  Hui  Tau,  mo  te  katoa — awhina — awhina- 
kore  ranei.      Haere  mai — Haere  mai. 

Ki  te  kore  koe  haere  ki  te  Hui  Tau,  kahore  tena  he  take 
kia  kore  koe  e  hoatu  i  to  moni  awhina.  Ko  te  tikanga  ke,  ko 
nga  mea  kahore  e  haere  kia  awhina  utu  i  runga  i  te  ngawari, 
ko  nga  mea  e  haere  ana  kei  te  utu  i  a  ratou  haere  ki  te  Hui 
me  te  hoatu  ano  i  te  awhina.  He  tono  tenei  kia  koutou  e  nga 
Hunga  Tapu  me  nga  Hoa  Aroha  tautokongia  tenei  whakaaro. 
Me  hoko  katoa  i  te  tikiti  "whituhereni  me  te  hiki-pene"  kei 
nga  tangata  kua  whakaritea  i  roto  o  ia  Takiwa  o  ia  Takiwa. 

Tatou  katoa  e  mohio  ana  ko  nga  moni  o  nga  kanikani  a 
te  Miutara — "Gold  and  Green" — i  riro  mo  nga  "ropu-awhina- 
taha-whawhai"  (Patriotic  Funds).  Nuku  atu  i  te  whitu-rau 
pauna  te  nui  o  te  moni  i  riro  i  tenei  ropu.  Ka  kite  tatou  i 
konei  ka  noho  pohara  te  Miutara.  Me  pehea  ta  tatou  whakaatu 
ki  te  Miutara  i  te  whakamihi  mo  tenei  mahi  whakamiharo  i 
mahia  e  ia  i  roto  i  te  tau  kua  huri. 

Koutou  katoa  e  haere  ana  ki  te  Hui  Tau  me  koutou  katoa 
e  noho  ana  i  te  kainga,  ina  hoatu  koutou  i  te  awhina  ki  nga 
moni  mo  te  Hui  Tau,  tera  ka  ea  nga  raruraru  katoa  o  tenei  Hui 
me  te  toe  ano  tetahi  wahi  hei  hoatu  ki  te  Miutara. 

A  koutou  moni  awhina  i  te  Hui  Tau,  ara,  "whitu-hereni  me 
te  hiki-pene"  me  tuku  mai  ki  te  Tari  o  te  Mihana,  Box  72, 
Auckland,  i  naianei  tonu  mehemea  kahore  koe  e  haere  ana  ki 
tenei  Hui  Tau  whakahonore  i  a  tatou  "Kaumatua." 

"  MANAAKITIA  NGA  ROPU  E  MANAAKI  ANA  IA  KOE." 

MATIU  KAURI,  Timuaki  Mihana. 


Maehe,  1941  TE  KARERE  595 


ial 


y 


SUPPORT  YOUR  HUI  TAU 

Preparations  for  the  largest,  most  attractive  and  most 
inspirational  Hui  Tau  ever  convened  by  the  Church  of  Jesus 
Christ  of  Latter-day  Saints  in  New  Zealand,  are  now  well  under 
way.  Nuhaka  is  alive  with  activity,  and  reports  are  coming 
in  that  all  will  be  in  readiness  for  the  first  meetings,  which 
will  commence  on  Friday,  11th  April. 

This  will  be  the  first  Hui  Tau  in  the  history  of  the  Mission 
at  which  there  have  been  no  Zion  Elders  present.  This  con- 
ference will  be  dedicated  to  the  memory  of  the  hundreds  of 
Elders  who  have  come  to  New  Zealand  during  the  past  60 
years  or  more  to  teach  the  restored  Gospel.  There  will  be 
hundreds  of  these  same  men  thinking  about  us  on  this  occa- 
sion and  praying  for  the  continued  success  of  the  New  Zealand 
Mission. 

Let  us  honour  these  men  by  our  presence  at  the  Hui  Tau. 

Subscription  tickets  have  been  forwarded  to  the  various 
districts  and  the  campaign  for  the  seven  shillings  and  sixpence 
donations  is  now  in  full  swing. 

It  should  be  kept  in  mind  by  everyone  that  this  small  con- 
tribution is  not  a  charge  for  admission  to  the  Hui  Tau.  Your 
attendance  is  desired  whether  you  can  afford  the  donation  or 
not.      All  will  be  welcome. 

Staying  away  from  the  Hui  is  no  excuse  for  not  supporting 
it  with  your  donation.      Indeed  it  should   be  much   easier   for 
those  who  do  not  attend  to  contribute  the  seven-and-six  than 
for  those  who   do   attend   and   have   the   additional   expens< 
transportation,  etc. 

As  you  all  know  the  proceeds  from  the  Green  and  Gold 
halls  of  the  M.I. A.  last  year  were  given  over  to  the  Patriotic 

Fund.      The    sum    contributed    amounted    to    more    than    Beven 
hundred    pounds.      As    a    result    of    this    praiseworthy    gesture, 

however,  the   Mutuals  of  the   Mission   have  been   left   without 

funds   with   which   to   finance   their  activities   for   the   current 

year.       What    can    be    done    to    show    th<     .M.I. A.    that    We    really 

do   appreciate   their   fine    patriotic   activities   daring   the    past 
year? 

If  those  who  do  not  attend  as  well  as  those  who  do  attend 
the  Hui  Tau,  will   make  a  voluntary    contribution  to  the   Hui 

Tau  fund,  it   will  he  possible  to  defray  all   Hui  Tau  expenses  and 
still    have    seme    money    to    turn    over    to    the    M.I. A. 

If   you   do    not    go   to   the    Hui   Tau     « ml    \.uir   -even  and  six 

or  other  contribution   t<>    Box    72,    Auckland. 

BLESS  THE  ORGANIZATIONS  WHICH  BLESS  Vol  . 

M  \  ill  1 1;\\   COWLE1  .  If]    Ion  President 


596 


TE  KARERE 


Maehe,  1941 


PHOTO  OF  THE  MONTH 

We  have  before  us  another  reminder  of  the  joys  and  blessings 
that  have  come  to  us  in  this  land  because  of  the  Gospel.  These  young 
men  brought  us  the  new  hope  in  which  we  live — the  Gospel  of  Christ. 
Theirs  has  been  a  task  that  only  time  and  faith  will  bear  witness.  Here 
are  34  missionaries  aboard  the  Mariposa  en  route  to  Zion  at  the  call 
of  the  First  Presidency  to  evacuate  New  Zealand. 

This  picture  is  taken  from  "Te  Karere" — Haerere,  Wahanga  1, 
Tihema  1940,  Nama  1,  published  and  edited  by  the  34  New  Zealand 
missionaries  aboard  the  s.s.  Mariposa,  and  was  printed  at  the  Hawaiian 
L.D.S.    Mission    Headquarters,    1124    Kalihi    Street,    Honolulu,    Hawaii. 

N.B. — The  only  Elder  not  showing  himself  so  well  in  the  group 
picture  is  Elder  Biesinger,  therefore  you  see  him  at  the  left  bottom. 
His  picture  was  inserted  in  "Te  Karere  Haerere"  as  the  result  of  win- 
ning a  competition  which,  according  to  their  own  story,  was  only  one 
of  the  many  that  they  won  from  the  Australian  Elders  and  other 
passengers  aboard. 

HUI  TAU— IMPORTANT  ! 

All  M.I  A.  contestants  must  be  prepared  to  show  Membership 
Tickets  before  entering  any  competition. 

All  winners  of  singing  competitions  will 
night  M.I. A.  programme  with  own  selection, 
number. ) 

All  M.I. A.  competition  entries  must  be  in  the  hands  of  the 
M.I.A.  Secretary,  Box  61,  Dannevirke,  three  weeks  before  HUI 
TAU.  The  entries  from  all  sources  whatever  for  any  M.I.A.  com- 
petition will  not  be  allowed  unless  ENTRIES  are  sent  to  the  Secre- 
tary with  a  post-mark  not  later  than  MARCH  22,  1941. 

All  District  M.I.A.  Officers  are  asked  to  come  prepared  to  assist 
Mission  M.I.A.  Officers  at  Hui  Tau.     Please! 


appear  on   Saturday 
(Other  than  contest 


Maehe,  1941  TE  KARERE  597 

ARE  YOU  WITH  US? 

This  is  an  appeal  to  Te  Karere  Correspondents  to  make  them- 
selves available  for  an  intensive  campaign  beginning  March  15th  until 
April  14th,  1941,  to  raise  the  subscription  list  to  OXE  THOUSAND. 
All  members  of  the  Church  should  keenly  realize  that  the  Mission 
President  and  his  family,  which  includes  Te  Karere,  are  now  the  only 
missionaries  we  have.  President  Cowley  has  often  said  since  the 
Elders  left  that  Te  Karere  is  the  only  missionary  now.  Are  the 
people  taking  in  to  their  homes  this  "missionary"  ? 

Correspondents,  Te  Karere  is  really  grateful  to  you  for  your 
wonderful  work.  Your  contributions  of  "news"  has  had  much  to 
do  with  the  added  appeal  Te  Karere  now  has  for  its  readers.  Your 
further  assistance  is  needed  to  take  our  message  to  more  people. 
If  the  Saints  do  not  need  to  be  visited  regularly  with  the  Gospel 
messages  during  this  period  of  uncertainty  and  strife,  then  it  is  time 
that  we  knew  it.  This  is  the  time  when  we  are  to  live — "not  by 
bread  alone,  but  by  every  word  that  proceedeth  out  of  the  mouth 
of  God." 

Let  us  look  at  these  figures,  and  then  what  are  our  hopes? 
Auckland  district  450;  Bav  of  Islands  800;  Hauraki  850;  Hawke's 
Bav  900;  Mahia  750;  Manawata  400;  Otago  50;  Poverty  Bay  7?^\ 
Taranaki  200;  Waikato  1,100;  Wairarapa  300;  Whangarei  1.5(H).  and 
Wairau  200.  These  represent  the  districts  in  this  Mission  and 
approximate  number  of  Saints  in  each.  These  will  help  you  to 
gauge  what  should  be  done.     Will  you  help? 

Kindly  notify  this  office  before  March  8th,  1941,  of  your  willing- 
ness to  assist  in  raising  our  subscription  list,  primarily  to  have  more 
of  the  Church  members  particularly,  receiving  Te  karere.  Your 
names  will  be  published  in  the  April  issue  of  Te  Karere  as  well  as 
in  the  llui  Tau  Programme,  and  special  identification  and  apprecia- 
tion ribbons  will  be  sent  to  you  with  our  most  grateful  appreciation. 

"  Te  Karere1'1  and  its  11  orkers. 


GENEALOGY 


/>'  v  Teao  Wirihana 


Cottage    Meetings    for    the    Month    of    March: 

March    6     Lesson   20,  "Early    Israelite   Colonies." 
L8 — Lesson  1 1 .  "Ancient   Irish  Pedigre< 

20 — Lesson    22,    "Who    air    t  In-    An-I"  Saxims'.'" 

27-   Lesson  'j:;.  "Earls    Welsh  Customs." 

Home    Teaching: 

\ra   kai   torotoro  o   nga   Peka   haere   l\i   nga   kail 
Hunga  Tapu  ki  te  whakahau   Ida   mahia  nga   "P< 
me  nga  "One  Family  Group  Record." 

WliaU.it  auki : 

"Ta  Ice  raumal  i  whakapiri  Qgahuru." 


598  TE   (CARERE  Mai-he,  1941 

' Primary 

Elva  T.  Cowley,  President  Rona  V.  Attenborough,  Second  Counsellor 

Waima    Davies,    First    Counsellor  and    Secretary 

Lessons    compiled    by    Rona    V.    Attenborough 

MEMORY  GEM: 

"Little  children,  Love  one  another." 

LESSONS: 

FIRST  WEEK 

"STILLING  THE  STORM" 
Read   Matthew   14:  23-32. 

This  story  will  help  the  children  to  feel  that  if  they  have  faith  in 
a  kind  Heavenly  Father,  they  may  be   protected  from  danger.    Choose 
songs  and  prayer  in  keeping  with  the  story  to  be  told. 
Point  of  Contact: 

Have  you  ever  looked  into  the  water  of  a  lake  when  it  is  perfectly 
still?  Show  a  picture  to  illustrate.  What  does  it  remind  you  of? 
A  mirror,  because  we  can  see  the  trees  and  birds  and  sky  reflected  in  it. 
Does  the  same  lake  look  the  same  in  a  storm?  No,  the  waters  seem 
angry  and  the  smooth  surface  is  changed  to  waves  with  white  caps. 
(Show  picture  of  an  angrv  sea  with  a  ship  on  it.)  How  would  you 
feel   if  you  were   sailing  on  such  a  lake   or  sea? 

A  large  cardboard  box  lid  or  a  cookie  tin  makes  a  very  satisfactory 
sand  board  which  may  be  held  "on  the  lap.  It  might  be  interesting  to 
use  such  a  one  with  a  little  lake  scene  worked  out  on  it.  Paper  boats 
would  give  a  suggestion  that  would  help  you  in  telling  the  story. 

Story: 

"THE  STILLING  OF  THE  STORM."  (Matt.  14:  23-32) 

We  have  a  wonderful  story  to  hear  now  about  a  storm  at  sea. 
It  happened  many  years  ago  when  Jesus  was  living  in  Palestine. 

Late  one  afternoon  He  stood  by  the  seashore,  surrounded  by  a 
crowd  of  people,  men  and  women,  boys  and  girls,  whom  He  had  been 
healing  and  comforting  and  cheering.  He  had  been  feeding  them,  too, 
with  five  bailey  loaves  and  two  small  fishes.  Do  you  remember  the 
story  of  a  little  lad's  offering? 

After  Jesus  had  helped  all  those  people  He  was  tired.  So  He 
told  His  disciples  to  take  their  little  boat  and  sail  to  the  other  side  of 
the  sea,  and  He  sent  the  crowd  of  people  away.  When  He  was  all 
alone  and  the  sun  was  setting  over  the  water,  what  do  you  suppose 
He  did?  When  we  are  tired  we  want  to  lie  down  and  go  to  sleep.  But 
when  Jesus  was  tired  He  almost  always  went  off  alone  into  the  country 
and  prayed  to  God.  That  rested  Him  more  than  going  to  sleep.  So 
this  evening  He  climbed  a  mountain  by  the  seashore,  and  there,  with 
the  stars  shining  over  His  head,  He  prayed  to  His  Father  in  heaven. 

While  Jesus  was  on  the  mountain  top  what  were  His  disciples 
doing?  Sailing  without  Him  across  the  sea.  The  wind  was  against 
them,  the  waves  were  high  and  rough,  and  they  were  having  a  hard 
time.  Some  of  them  were  great,  strong  men  who  had  rowed  nearly  all 
night,  they  were  not  more  than  half-way  across  the  little  sea.  But 
some  one  was  watching  them.  On  the  mountain  alone  stood  Jesus. 
He  had  seen  the  storm  come  up,  the  great  dark  clouds,  the  howling 
wind,  and  the  waves,  high  and  black,  crested  with  foam.  As  the  moon- 
light struggled  through  a  break  in  the  clouds  He  saw  the  little  boat 
tossing  beneath  Him  on  the  great  waves.  Then,  when  it  seemed  to  the 
disciples  they  could  row  no  further,  they  saw  a  light  in  the  darkness, 


Maehe,  1941  TE  KARERE  599 

and  a  bright  figure  came  towards  them  walking  on  the  water.  At 
first  they  were  frightened;  they  did  not  know  who  or  what  it  could  be, 
but  out  of  the  darkness  and  above  the  noise  of  the  wind  and  the  waves 
they  heard  the  beloved  voice  of  their  Master:  "Be  of  good  cheer," 
He  said;  "it  is  I,  be  not  afraid." 

At  once  Peter,  one  of  the  fishermen  disciples,  you  know,  wanted 
to  go  right  to  Jesus;  he  could  not  wait  for  Him  to  come  to  them. 
"Lord,"  he  said,  "if  it  be  Thou,  bid  me  come  unto  Thee  on  the  water." 
So  Jesus  said:  "Come,"  and  over  the  side  of  the  boat  Peter  sprang, 
and  walked  towards  Him.  While  his  eyes  were  fixed  on  his  Master's 
face  he  was  safe.  The  wind  might  toss  his  hair,  the  spray  wet  his 
clothes,  but  all  was  well.  But  when,  becoming  afraid,  he  glanced  from 
Jesus  to  the  high,  fierce  waves  and  the  blackness  underneath  them,  he 
began  to  sink,  and  cried  in  despair:  "Lord,  save  me."  At  once,  with 
a  smile  of  pity,  Jesus  stretched  out  His  hand  and  caught  him.  "0  thou 
of  little  faith,"  He  said,  "wherefore  didst  thou  doubt?"  Together  they 
climbed  into  the  boat,  and  then  the  wind  stopped  howling  about  them, 
the  waves  grew  small  and  quiet,  and  above  their  heads  shone  the  bright 
moon.  The  disciples  fell  upon  their  knees  and  worshipped  Jesus.  "Of 
a  truth,"  they  said,  "Thou  art  the  Son  of  God." 

(Show  a  picture  of  Jesus  walking  on  the  water.  Sing  "Jesus  Unto 
Thee  I  Pray"  once  more.) 

The  next  time  we  are  frightened  about  anything,  about  being  alone 
in  the  dark  or  being  out  in  a  storm  or  anything  else,  let  us  remember 
this  story.  What  did  Jesus  do  when  he  needed  to  be  brave?  We  can 
pray  just  as  He  did.      What  did  Jesus  say  to  His  disciples  that  night? 

Let  us  say  it:  "Be  of  good  cheer,  it  is  I,  be  not  afrand." 

Let  the  children  make  a  paper  boat  and  take  it  home.  It  will  per- 
haps help  them  to  remember  the  story  so  that  they  can  tell  it  to  mother. 

SECOND  WEEK 

~.  .     .  "GOOD  POSTURE" 

Objective: 

To  help  the  children  form  the  habit  of  sitting  and  standing  pro- 
perly. To  make  them  aware  of  their  responsibility  to  care  for  the 
bodies  God  has  given  to  them. 

To    the    Teacher: 

The  privilege  of  the  Primary  teacher  is  unlimited  in  directing,  en- 
couraging and  inspiring  the  right  kind  of  growth;  the  most  valuable 
habits,  and  the  most  healthful  and  helpful  attitudes  towards  the  care 
and  growth  of  our  bodies  and  minds.  Deepen  the  children's  apprecia- 
tion for  God's  gift  of  good  health  and  help  them  to  be  aware  that  tiny 
must  work  with  Him  to  be  well  and  strong. 

"The  body  is  the  temple  of  the  soul." 

Know  ye  not  that  ye  are  the  temple  of  God,  and  that  the  spirit  o 
God  dwelleth  in  you?     (1   Cor.   3:16.) 

Lesson: 

Old  Scowly  Spine  Pack  looked  at  all  the  hoys  and  girls  who  lived 
in  the  beautiful  city.  He  chuckled  to  himself  and  said,  "Good,  good! 
I'll   get    every  one   of  them." 

"Whom  will  you  get  and  how  will  you  gel  them?"  asked  Merry 
Brown    Robin. 

"The  hoys  and  .u-irls,  the  hoys  and  .uirls,"  said  Old  Scowly  Spine 
Pack."  They  sit  bent  over  their  hooks,  or  huddled  in  their  chain. 
When  they  do  thifl  I  make  the  little  cushions  between  the  hones  of  the 
hack  all  packed  hard  so  that   they  can  never  he  straightened  out   again." 

"Oh,"  said  Merry  P.rown  Robin,  "that  will  make  the  boya  and  girls 
weak  and  hollow  chested.  Poor  children!  They  will  not  he  happy  at 
all."      And    Merry    BrOWH    Robill    did    Like   t"   see   everybody    happy. 


600  TE  KARERE  Maehe,  1«M1 

"Happy?"  said  Old  Scowly  Spine  Pack.  "What's  that?  I  like 
to  see  them  all  crooked,  cross  and  crabbedy." 

"Oh,"  said  Merry  Brown  Robin  in  a  little  sorry  voice.  "Nobody 
likes  to  be  near  them  or  to  play  with  them  when  they  look  all  cross 
and  crabbedy." 

Merry  Brown  Robin  flew  to  the  west  waving  willow  tree,  perched 
among  the   branches  on  the  sunny  side   and  thought  and  thought. 

"What  can  I  do?  What  can  I  do?  Whom  shall  I  tell?"  he 
chirped.  "We  do  want  our  girls  and  boys  to  be  happy.  Wo  want 
thorn  to  look  straight  and  tall  and  brave.  Maybe  if  they  look  strong 
and  tall   and  brave  they  will  grow  to  be  that  way." 

Bui  he  could  think  of  no  way  to  help  them,  so  he  sang  his  even- 
ing song,  tucked  his  head  under  his   wing  and  went  to  sleep. 

The  next  morning  he  saw  some  boys  and  girls  going  into  a  big 
building  with  many,  many  windows.  (What  was  it.)  He  flew  to  a 
tree  near  one  of  the  windows  that  was  open  and  looked  in  at  the  boys 
and  girls.  Old  Scowly  Spine  Pack  was  just  outside  looking  very  cross 
indeed. 

Merry  Brown  Robin  saw  a  sweet  pretty  lady  talking  to  the  boys  and 
girls.  They  were  listening  eagerly  to  what  she  was  saying.  He  saw 
her  take  a  silk  flag,  hold  it  up  before  the  children,  and  say:  "This  is 
the  flag  we  love  so  well.  This  is  the  flag  of  our  own  country.  Its 
colours  say,  be  strong,  be  brave,  be  faithful.  But  no  one  can  be  strong 
who  sits  huddled  over  in  school  or  at  home.  No  one  can  be  brave 
whose  head  is  not  erect,  who  does  not  try  to  sit  straight  and  stand  tall. 
No  one  can  be  faithful  who  does  not  try  to  grow  strong  and  be  brave. 

"This  is  the  message  that  the  flag  brings  to  you.  Because  you  love 
it,  we  know  you  want  to  do  what  it  wants  you  to  do.  This  is  not  always 
easy  but  we  know  you  will  try.  It  means,  every  day,  to  sit  erect,  to 
stand   straight,   at  home,   at  school,   everywhere. 

"It  means  washing  your  hands  before  placing  food  in  your  mouth 
or  before  preparing  it  for  others,  bathing  often,  brushing  the  teeth; 
eating  wholesome  food,  breathing  fresh  air;  getting  sufficient  sleep  and 
being  helpful  to  others.  All  this  means  hard  work,  but  it  makes  you 
good  looking,  healthy  and   happy. 

"To  be  all  this,  to  do  all  this,  shows  better  our  love  for  our  flag 
and  our  country  and  Our  Heavenly  Father  than  anything  else  can  do." 

How  old  Scowly  Spine  Pack  did  scowl.  He  knew  that  the  boys  and 
girls  would  learn  the  very  things  that  would  keep  him  away  for  ever 
and  a  day.  But  Merry  Brown  Robin  sang  a  song.  He  sang  so  merrily 
that  he  tumbled  head  first  off"  the  branch  of  the  tree,  and  had  to  spread 
his  wings  very  quickly  to  keep  from  falling  right  into  the  school  room. 

"Now  I  know  who  can  help,"  he  sang.  "The  mothers  and  teachers. 
They  can  drive  old  Scowly  Spine  Pack  away  because  they  are  teaching 
boys  and  girls  to  form  habits  that  will  make  them  well  and  strong. 
But  the  boys  and  girls  themselves  must  help.  They  must  try  every 
day  to   keep  him  away." 

If  Merry  Brown  Robin  looked  in  our  window  to-day  would  he  find 
somebody  who  is  helping  to  keep  Old   Scowly   Spine   Pack  away? 

— Thresa  Dansdill. 

THIRD  WEEK 

"FEEDING    FIVE    THOUSAND" 
Text: 

Matthew  14:13-21;  Mark  6:32-44;  Luke  9:10-17;  John  6:1-14. 
Objective: 

To  help  the  children  to  know  that  Christ's  understanding  kindness 
extended  to  the  physical  needs  of  the  people  as  well  as  to  the  spiritual. 

Make  the  child  aware  that  the  Saviour  taught  by  example  many 
beautiful  lessons  and  that  all  who  try  to  do  the  things  he  preached 
and  practised   are   better  and  happier  people. 


Maehe,  1941  TE  KARERE  601 

Lesson    Story: 

In  this  story  we  find  Jesus  in  a  little  town  on  the  east  coast  of  the 
beautiful  Sea  of  Galilee. 

He  had  been  travelling  from  place  to  place  preaching  to  the  people 
and  healing  their  sick,  and  now  His  body  was  weary. 

The  Twelve  Apostles,  whom  Jesus  had  sent  two  by  two  into  other 
cities  to  preach,  had  returned  from  their  missionary  labours.  They 
""gathered  themselves  together  unto  Jesus,  and  told  Him  all  the  things, 
both  what  they  had  done  and  what  they  had  taught."  They  were 
weary,  too,  and  no  doubt  Jesus  noticed  it,  for  "He  said  unto  them,  come 
ye  yourselves  apart  into  a  desert  place,  and  rest  awhile." 

This,  of  course,  the  disciples  were  glad  to  do.  They  would  cer- 
tainly enjoy  a  quiet  rest  with  their  Master.  So  they  all  went  quietly 
down  to  the  shore,  got  into  a  boat  and  sailed  across  the  sea  to  the 
eastern  shore. 

It  was  only  six  miles  across  the  Sea  of  Galilee  and  perhaps  the 
little  vessel  with  its  load  of  weary  passengers  sailed  very  slowly. 

When  Jesus  and  His  Apostles  reached  the  shore  they  climbed  a 
near-by  grassy  hill,  below  which  was  an  uninhabited  plain  covered  with 
grass  and  dotted  with  flowers.  They  wanted  peace  and  rest  for  so 
many  people  constantly  came  to  them  that  "they  had  no  leisure  so 
much  as  time  to  eat." 

They  thought  that  no  one  had  seen  them  leave,  but  in  this  they 
were  mistaken.  Very  soon  on  the  plain  below  them  a  great  crowd  of 
people  began  to  gather.  These  people  when  they  saw  Jesus  and  the 
Apostles  leave,  walked  around  the  sea  to  meet  them.  As  they  passed 
through  the  villages,  many  more  joined  them  until  there  was  a  mighty 
throng.  And  as  it  was  the  time  for  the  Passover  Feast  in  Jerusalem 
perhaps  many  people  who  were  going  there  followed  also. 

Can  you  see  two  pictures:  one,  of  Jesus  and  His  Apostles  at  rest 
on  the  hillside,  the  other,  a  great  crowd  of  people  on  the  plain  below? 

When  Jesus  looked  down  upon  the  people  who  were  waiting  for 
Him  He  "was  moved  with  compassion  toward  them."  He  could  not 
rest  when  they  needed  Him.  "So  in  His  love  and  pity  He  came  down 
among  them  and  spake  unto  them  of  the  Kingdom  of  God,  and  healed 
them  that  had  need  of  healing." 

Hour  after  hour  passed  as  the  charmed  crowd  listened  to  the  v 
of  the  Master. 

The  day  wore  on  until  the  sun  was  setting  and  still  the  great  crowd 
listened,  without  a  thought  of  leaving.  Then  the  Apostles  remembered 
how  tired  Jesus  was  and  they  also  romemlx  rod  the  people  who  were 
so  far  from  their  homes,  without  food.  So  they  went  to  Jesus  saying. 
"This  is  a  desert  place,  and  the  time  is  now  past;  send  the  multitude 
away,  that  they  may  go  into  the  villages,  and  buy  themselves  bread; 
for  they   have   nothing   to    eat." 

They  were  surprised  when  they  heard  His  reply,  which  was,  "they 
heed    not    depart  ;   give   ye   them   to    eat." 

This  seemed  Btrange  and  impossible  to  them.  They  wondered 
what  Jesus   meant   and    how    it    could    be   done. 

One    Apostle   asked,    "Shall    we   go    and    l>uy    food    and   give   them   to 

eat?"     To  this  Jesus   replied:   "How   many   loaves  have   ye?     Go   ami 

Andrew,   who   was  one   of   t  ho    Apostles,   said:   "There   IS   a   lad   here, 

which  hath  five  barley  loaves  and  two  small  fishes;  but   what  are  they 

among  so   many?" 

When    JeSUS    heard     this     He    told    the    disciples    to     bid     the     people 

sit   down   by   fifties  and   by   hundred.,     in   ;i   short   time   live  thousand 

men.    Inside-    the    women    and    children,    were    seated    oil    tfl 

was  springtime  and  tie  >id  green.     What   a  beautiful 

sight  it  must  have  beenl     Someone  has  said  that  they  must  have  looked 
like  beaut  iful  flower  bed    in  ,-t  garden. 


602  TE  KARERE  Maehe,  1941 

When  they  were  all  seated,  Jesus  "took  the  five  loaves  and  two 
fishes,  and  looking  up  to  heaven,  He  blessed,  and  brake;  and  gave 
the  loaves  to  the  disciples,  and  the  disciples  gave  them  to  the  multi- 
tude. And  likewise  of  the  fishes  as  much  as  they  would."  The  dis- 
ciples passed  the  food  to  the  multitude,  and  when  they  were  all  fed 
"they   took   up  the   fragments  that  remained,   twelve  baskets  full." 

This  miracle  made  a  great  impression  on  the  people.  Many  of 
them  said  to  each  other,  "This  is  of  a  truth  that  prophet  that  should 
come  into  the  world."      Others  said,  "This  is  the  Christ." 

They  were  ready  to  crown  Jesus  as  their  King.  They  were  ex- 
cited and  were  planning  to  compel  Him  to  do  as  they  wished. 

Jesus  was  grieved  to  think  that  they  misunderstood  Him  and  what 
was  meant  when  He  spoke  of  "His  Kingdom."      He  urged  the  Apostles 
to  leave  the  crowd  and  go  back  to  the  other  shore.      When  th< 
gone  and  the  multitude  had  gone  away  He  went  up  into  the  mountain 
and  there   again   he   was  alone  with   His  Father  in   Heaven. 
Teach: 

"Lett's  Be  Kind  to  One  Another." 

Prayer: 

One   of   the   girls. 

FOURTH  WEEK 

„,.     .  "CHOOSING  RIGHT  OR  WRONG" 

Object: 

To  help  the  children  to  realise  that  there  is  a  right  way  and  a 
wrong  way,  and  to  help  them  to  remember  which  is  which.  To  help 
them  to  understand  that  every  person  has  a  right  to  act  as  he  chooses, 
but  he  must  abide  by  the  consequences  of  his  choice.  We  hope  by 
pointing  out  the  lasting  peace  and  happiness  that  is  found  in  right 
choice,  and  the  suffering  and  unhappiness  that  comes  from  wrong 
choice,  to  create,  in  the  hearts  of  the  children,  a  desire  to  choose  the 
right. 

JACK'S  CHOICE 

Jack  had  done  something  that  was  wrong.  His  father  had  found 
out  about  it  that  morning  and  Jack  had  been  worried  and  afraid  all 
day.  He  had  been  puzzled  too,  because  his  father  had  said  nothing 
about  it.  Now  his  father  had  asked  him  to  go  for  a  ride  and  he  won- 
dered more  than  ever.  His  father  said  nothing  about  where  they 
were  going  but  talked  of  other  things.  At  last  they  reached  the  city 
which  was  about  twenty  miles  from  their  home,  but  instead  of  going 
down  to  the  business  district,  as  they  usually  did,  his  father  turned, 
went  up  a  long  winding  hill  and  stopped  outside  some  huge  gates  which 
were  set  in  a  great  stone  wall. 

Jack's  heart  almost  stopped  beating.  He  knew  this  was  the 
penitentiary.  They  had  passed  it  a  number  of  times  but  they  had 
never  stopped  before.  He  knew  that  this  was  the  place  where  "bad 
men"  were  kept.  For  one  wild  moment  he  thought  that  his  father 
had  brought  him  here  for  the  thing  that  he  had  done. 

His  father  seemed  to  know  what  he  was  thinking  because  he  put 
his  arm  around  Jack's  shoulders  and  said,  "It's  all  right  Jack.  .I'm 
going  in  here  for  just  a  few  minutes,  do  you  want  to  come  in  with  me 
or  would  you  rather  wait  here  in  the  car?" 

Jack's  voice  trembled  a  little  as  he  said,   "I'll  wait  here,  father." 

As  he  was  waiting  a  car  drove  up,  and  three  men  got  out  of  it. 
Jack  noticed  that  one  of  the  men  had  handcuffs  on  his  wrists. 

After  a  few  minutes  Jack's  father  came  out  and  they  drove  off 
to  the  city.  This  time  they  stopped  in  front  of  a  big  building.  Jack 
had  seen  this  building  many  times  before.  On  the  big  plate-glass  doors 
it  said  "First  National  Bank.' 


Maehe,  1941 


TE  KARERE 


603 


"Come  on  Jack,"  his  father  said.  They  went  in  together  and  in 
a  few  minutes  they  went  through  a  door  marked  "James  Graham, 
President."  Here  Jack's  father  made  him  acquainted  with  a  tall  man 
with  smiling  blue  eyes.  This  was  Mr.  Graham,  but  Jack  noticed  that 
his  father  called  him  "Jim." 

On  the  way  home  Jack's  father  told  Jack  a  story.  It  was  about 
three  boys:  a  boy  named  "Jim,"  who  was  now  the  president  of  the 
First  National  Bank,  and  a  boy  name  "Frank,"  who  had  been  in  the 
penitentiary  for  five  long  years,  and  himself  when  he  was  a  boy.  He 
told  how  they  played  together  when  they  were  boys  and  some  of  the 
things  they  did  as  they  became  older. 

When  the  story  was  finished  Jack  thought  for  a  little  while,  then 
he  said  "Father,  I'm  going  to  try  to  be  like  you  and  Mr.  Graham." 

Why  do  you  suppose  Jack's  father  took  him  to  these  two  places? 


CHOIRS  AT  HUi  TAU 

On  paper^this  year's  competition  numbers  are  the  best  that 
we  have  chosen.  Now  it  is  up  to  the  Branches  or  Districts  send- 
ing competitors  to  practice  and  rehearse  nightly,  that  they  may 
have   their   choirs   and   choruses   proficient. 

In  my  opinion,  the  "Hallelujah  Chorus,"  which  is  the  choral 
test  piece,  is  not  difficult.  The  intervals  in  all  the  parts  are  easy 
and,  what  is  better  still,  melodious.  It  is  written  purely  for 
choir,  and  not  one,  and  everyone  has  the  melody.  It  is  considered 
by  critics  the  world  over  as  the  musical  masterpiece  of  man's 
creation,  and  by  many — a  heavenly  inspiration.  I  think  that  you 
will  agree  with  me  that  the  Maori  translation  enhances  its  beauty 
with  added  dignity  and  at  the  same  time  we  will  be  making  his- 
tory as  it  has  never  before  been  sung  in  Maori  for  a  choral  test. 

The  "b"  number  for  the  choirs  is  "Onward,"  an  adaptation  of 
"Onward  Christian  Soldiers,"  by  Burnham,  and  is  a  very  fine 
anthem.  The  book  which  contains  these  pieces  includes  last 
year's  contest  numbers  "The  Lord's  Prayer,"  "Hangu  Te  Po"  and 
a  special  arrangement  of  "I  Need  Thee  Every  Hour."  Please  look 
these  over  carefully  for  HUI  TAU,  and  is  it  too  much  to  ask  that 
you  look  over  "Hosannah"? 

The  M.I. A.  numbers  that  arc  in  the  same  book  are  "Sweel 
Sabbath  Eve,"  "Pale  Moon"  for  men.  male  quartette  and  chorus, 
"A  Prayer  Perfect"  and  "In  the  Heart  of  the  Hills"  for  women's 
trio  and  chorus.  All  are  harmoniously  and  beautifully  arranged. 
Truly  a  wonderful  musical  programme  for  any  occasion.  Th  ! 
Explorer  Boys'  quartette  is  "Abide  With  Me,"  found  in  the  Deserel 
Song  Hooks,  page  103,  and  the  L.D.S.  Hymns,  page  L80.  The 
Junior  Girls'  trio  is  in  the  M.I.A.  Song  Polder,  page  18,  "Si 
the  Summer  Night." 

NOTE. — Most  of  those  numbers  arc  unprocurable  in  printed 
form,  hence  their  value.  LOOK  AFTER  Yuri;  COPIES.  Some 
copies  may  be  a  bit  faint  ami  unreadable.    1  would  ask  conductors 

to  write  in  with  ink  the  correct  QOtefl  :iml  WOrdS.  Send  for  the 
MINIMUM  number  of  copies  yen  require,  with  sixpence  in  stamps 
to    eover    postage,    and    ymir    order    will    he    tilled    immediately.       A 

small  charge  will  be  made  t.»  cover  printing  which  will  he 

sent    to    you    ill    due    time. 

WALTER   SMITH. 

Director  of   Hui  Tan   Music. 


604 


TE  KARERE 


Maehe,  1(M1 


rj\ews  from    the    Cfietd 


FROM     FAR     AND     NEAR 

By    A.    Dudley    Amadio 

During  the  early  pari   of  December  my 

wife   and    I    visited    Bro.    E.   A.   C.    Scott, 
formerly    of    Auckland    and    Cleved 
his   present    home,  Scotsman    Vail 
whare,    near    Morrinsville.      At    a    ,    i 
convened    there,    the    family    not    only    had 
strong  testimonials  hut   also  that    the  Lord 
was    blessing    them. 

At  Putaruru  who  should  we  meet  hut 
Brother  Hotaraka  Anaru  and  another 
Brother  whose  name  I  did  not  hear 
plainly  enough  to  he  able  to  spell  They, 
as  were  we,  were  glad  to  meet  fellow- 
members  of  the  Church. 

Sunday,  December  22nd,  marks  what 
I  believe  will  be  the  beginning  of  much 
progress  in  the  Rotorua  district.  The 
occasion  served  a  double  purpose.  First 
and  most  important  was  the  dedication 
of  Brother  T.  McKinnon's  home  as  a 
place  for  holding  service.  This  will  give 
the  Saints  a  meeting-place  close  to 
Rotorua.  Brother  Rangi  Greening  offered 
the  dedicatory  prayer.  The  second  part 
pertained  to  a  farewell  arranged  for 
Elder  Henry  Davis,  who  expects  to 
shortly  depart  overseas  with  the  Air 
Force.  Elder  Davis  fought  in  the  last 
war  and,  before  enlisting  in  this,  has 
done  much  good  work  for  the  Church  in 
Rotorua  and  Taupo.  He  was  pr< 
with  a  carved  and  inlaid  stick  by  Bro. 
Moore  on  behalf  of  the  local  Saints.  The 
gathering  was  provided  with  a  splendid 
dinner  served  on  the  grounds  in  front  of 
the  house. 

It  will  be  sufficient  for  me  to  mention 
here  the  passing  of  Sister  Marge  Whi- 
whikiterangi  Waugh  on  Wednesday,  Janu- 
ary 1st,  1941.  (Further  mention  of  this 
demise  is  included  in  this  issue  under  an 
article  by   Sister  Isabel  Amadio. — Ed.) 

MAHIA  DISTRICT 
Reported   by   Elsie   Loader 
7      Brother    L.    T.    Nelson,    Superinti 
of     the     District     Sunday     School     Board, 
visited    the    Nuhaka    Branch,    accompanied 
by     his     wife     and     daughter     on     Jaruary 
5th.       We    appreciated    the    visit    and     the 
instructions    which    were  given   us. 

Sister  Maggie  Winiana  has  been  ap- 
pointed Second  Counsellor  and  Secretary 
to    the   Tahaenui    Neighbourhood    Primary. 

A    week    later    Sydney    Christy, 
Walker,     Eru     and     B<  tti     Tengaio     visited 
Kaiuku,   Mahia,  and   attended   the  services 
which    were    thoroughly    enjoyed,    and    the 
report    is    that    the    Saints    there    ar< 
faithful    and    working    hard. 

The  following  week  many  of  our  people 
went  to  Waipawa  to  attend  the  H.B.  Hui 
Pariha,  and  among  them  were  Sydney 
Christy,  Stuart  Whaanga,  Haerengarangi 
Tengaio,  Raiha  Tengaio,  Kapu  Smith  and 
Mana  Mahanga.  They  rejoice  in  having 
the  privilege  of  again  meeting  with  Pre- 
sident   and    Sister    Cowley    and    the    many 


people     who     came     from     far    and     wide     to 

t  he     Com',  rence  The     N  uhaka     M.I. A. 

Tennis     Club     played     their     first     match     in 

the   Short    ('up    competition   on    the    18th, 

Saturday,    againsl     tin     Nuhaka    Club    with 

a     comfortable     tnai 
against    four. 

hers     I'era     Tengaio,     Wheti     Nohi 

Nohi,     Benjamin    and     Epaum; 

now    in    Hastings.       What    is   Nuba!. 

is     surely     Hastings' 

Our  Nj  e    and    Tohv 

bands  of  I  lie    i  ■ 

ters    (M  i    have   entered    mili- 

tary training  at  Trent  ham.  Since  leav- 
ing for  camp  i  ome  I  be  proud 
father  of  a  cute  little  baby  girl,  and  Tohv 
has  just  as  cute  a  daughter  too.  We 
lOd  luck  may  follow 
them  and  that  (heir  return  to  their  loved 
i'e  assured. 
Sister:  "  Wpia  and  l'arae  Walker 
visited  Nuhaka  Valley  and  held  a  Hui 
Atawhai  meeting  at  the  home  of  Brother 
John  Campbell  on  Sunday,*^l9th  January. 
where  quite  a  number  of  Saints  were  pres- 
ent and  showed  their  willingness  to  par- 
take in  the  work  of  the  Hui  Atawhai  and 
regu  lar  monthly  meeting 
he  held  among  them.  Kia  kaha  Sisters, 
we  like  to  see  the  work  go  ahead.  The 
Tahaenui  Primary  are  to  be  commended 
for  their  untiring  efforts  in  uplifting  the 
work  at  Tahaenui.  They  held  a  "Bring 
and  Buy"  sale  and  have  donated  £1  out 
of  the  proceeds  to  assist  the  Mission 
Primary.       We   admin    your    spirit    and   ap- 

preciate    very    much    your    help. 

The    n  lency    consists 

of  Sydney  Christy,  president;  Eru  H. 
Tengaio,  1st  counsellor;  [riparete  Pomare, 
2nd  counsellor,  and  William  Christy, 
has  taken 
hold  well  and  set  things  going  by  an- 
nouncing publicly  through  "Te  Karere" 
local  missionaries  for  the  district  for  the 
months  of  March,  April  and  May.  Bro. 
Christy  will  also  continue  on  as  Branch 
President  for  the  Nuhaka  Branch.  Saints 
of  the  district,  find  your  assignments  and 
fill    them. 

Mrs.  Celia  McKay  ha-  pleasure  in  an- 
nouncing tin  engagement  of  her  daugh- 
ter, Monica,  to  Leading-Aircraftsman 
Geoffrey  S.  Moore,  son  of  Mr.  and  Mrs. 
Alfred  Moore,  Carbes  Bay,  St.  Ives,  Corn- 
wall.   England. 

Farewells   were   tendered    to    Ernie   Nye, 

who    has    hern    home    on    final    leave    after 

amp,    at    the    homes    of 

Brother   Ora   and   Sister   Tengaio   and    Bro. 

rlohepa    Te    Kaura    and    family.  ■ 

WAIKATO    DISTRICT 
Reported    by    Dave    Ormsby 

Teao  Wirihana  of  the  Mission  Gene- 
alogical Society  is  now  in  the  Waikato 
assisting  in  that  important  work.  On 
the  2  5  th  he,  in  company  with  Tetana 
(Percy)   Te  Hira,  President  of  the  Society 


Maehe,  1941 


TE  KARERE 


605 


in  Waikato,  visited  Te  Awamutu,  and 
there  imparted  needed  information  per- 
taining to  the  work.  While  there  they 
also  attended  the  funeral  services  which 
were  held  for  Whei  Te  Hira,  daughter  of 
Tupana  Te  Hira.  Our  aroha  and  tangi 
so  out  to  Brother  and  Sister  Tupana  Te 
Hira  in  their  loss,  and  also  to  Tetana  Te 
Hira  and  his  family  in  the  death  of  their 
six-month-old    baby    boy. 

MANAWATU     DISTRICT 
Reported   by   Polly   Wineera 

The  Hui  Pariha  for  the  Manawatu  and 
Wairarapa  districts  was  held  under  ideal 
weather  conditions  at  Porirua  on  the  25th 
and  26th  of  January.  Visitors  included 
many  from  Taranaki,  Hawke's  Bay,  Wai- 
rarapa and  near-by  villages.  The  Pri- 
mary began  the  activities  at  8.15  p.m., 
where  the  children  gave  fine  perform- 
ances, which  were  followed  by  the  Mutual 
programme,  during  which  Sister  Una 
Thompson,  President  of  the  Mission 
Y. W.M.I. A.  passed  on  useful  information 
pertaining     to     Mutual     work.  Sunday 

morning  dawned  gloriously,  and  its 
"  beauty  and  strength  enhanced  the  spiri- 
tual saga  that  was  enjoyed  by  all  during 
the  services  of  the  day,  commencing  with 
the  Priesthood,  Relief  Society,  Sunday 
School,  where  the  theme  of  "Clean  Liv- 
ing" was  inspiring  to  all.  Brother  Walker 
Enoka,  superintendent  of  the  District 
School,  directed  the  meeting.  The  after- 
noon meeting  at  2  p.m.  was  very  well 
attended  where,  needless  to  say,  much 
was    received    spiritually. 

The  kai,  which  was  provided  for  all, 
apparently  was  quite  the  thing.  (Did 
you  notice  Timuaki  at  the  first  and 
second  sittings?)  Appreciation  is  given 
to  those  responsible  for  providing  the 
same,  which  is  indeed  a  vital  and  im- 
portant   part    of    most    huis. 

The  genealogical  meeting  conducted  by 
President  Stuart  Meha  of  the  Mission 
Society  preceded  the  evening  meeting 
conducted  by  the  Relief  Society,  where 
I  lie  portrayal  of  "Queen  Esther"  came  as 
a  fitting  climax  of  the  amount  of  work 
and    activity    that    is    being   enjoyed    by    the 

Pn  lidenl  Eruera  Taurau  of  the  district 
has  selected  as  counsellors  to  him  Eruha 
Kawana    and    Peneamine    W  i    Neera    and 

Walker  Enoka  secretary,  with  I'arata 
I'irihi  assistant  secretary.  The  Relief 
Sociel  y    of    I  be     listri  ed    wit  h 

Raiha     Kawana     pre  idenl     and     M- 

Maari    and    Paeroa     VV  i    Neera    as    her    able 

eoun  ellors.       The     Porirua     Branch     lias 
also    undergone    changes    which    we    hope 
will  put   renew  ed  \  igour  and     |  r<  ng  t  h  into 
our   a<  >  I 
pre  lidenl .    Maker*     1  ■■    Hiko    and    Paeroa 

r\  Ineeri in  .  Hoi      and    Kauhoe    An  bur 

I    of  t  be   Branch   R<  lief  Society. 
Honda]     even!  ranu 

ii  ied    i o   bonou i    klatuai        Hoi 
Eruera    Rihia    In    farewell 
..n   tin.-.  I   lea>  e  befoi  i    •  mba 

"•■as.       Pr<  Rental included     a 

watch  and   money   belt    for  ea<  h  of  them. 

M.in\    people  "i    i... 1 1 

i..    wish    i  Ihiii    i  be    \  .i  \    i..-  i    under    t  be 


circumstances.  The  following  day  they 
were  again  entertained  by  their  parents 
at  a  dinner  at  Barrett's  Hotel,  where 
friends" and  relatives  again  joined  in  the 
expressions    of   aroha    and    "bon    voyage." 

Just  before  Christmas  Elder  Arthur 
Elkington  and  his  nephew,  Herbert  Elk- 
ington,  passed  through  Wellington  on 
their  way  to  Papakura.  where  they  are 
now  training  as  members  of  the  Maori 
Battalion.  News  has  just  reached  us  that 
Sam,  the  twin  brother  to  Herbert,  has 
taken  to  himself  a  wife  in  the  holy  bonds 
of  matrimony.  Is  that  right,  Sam?  Let's 
get  back  to  Arthur  again — the  people  in 
Nelson  and  Madsen  are  just  wondering  if 
"those    buttons     will     do     up?" 

Mr.  and  Mrs.  Claude  Hawea  (nee  Ella 
Wi  Neera)  are  vacationing  here  at  Pori- 
rua, where  their  little  daughter  Hariatta 
has  taken  over  the  wrecking  business  and 
has  established  headquarters  at  her 
"grannies." 

POVERTY     BAY    DISTRICT 
Reported  by  Tipi  Kopua 

January  19th  found  the  District  Presi- 
dency gathered  and  discussing  and  trans- 
acting business  for  the  betterment  of  the 
work  that  is  tantamount  to  being  a  living 
and  workable  memorial  to  the  Zion  Elders 
who    have    laboured    in    this    land. 

Sister  Hine  H.  Potae,  who  is  employed 
at  Waipawa,  H.B.,  by  Dr.  Allan,  spent 
a  few  pleasant  days  with  the  folks  and 
Saints   on  the   coast. 

Brother  Wi  Pere  Amaru  is  definitely  a 
useful  one  to  have  around.  The  latest 
development  since  a  visit  to  his  home 
in  Tologa  from  Palmerston  North,  is  thai 
he  and  Brother  James  Marino  are  dis- 
mantling an  old  meeting-house  which 
they  intend  to  ,U'o  towards  the  erection  of 
a  proper  place  of  worship  for  the  Tologa 
Bay   Saints. 

HAWKE'S   BAY  DISTRICT 
Reported    by    Olive    Edwards 
Mr.    and    Mrs.    Mane    "Monty"    King]    of 
Korongata      entertained      ;i      numbi 

friends    and    relatives    at    dinner    in    honour 

"i'  their   nephew.    Heber  G.  Smith,   son  of 

the  late  Wi  Smith  of  Xuhaka.  who  has 
entered  1'apakura  Camp  for  service  over- 
seas with  the  Maori  Battalion.  (I  met 
"Nil"    and    Core,-    Barney    in    Auckland    on 

Saturday.  February  16th,  and  have  In- 
vited   them    along    with    Ronny     Kit 

dinner    at    our    hom,     whenever    th.\ 

in  again.     This   Invitation   is  open   i..  an 

of    the    home    hoys    and    anyone    the\     would 

long.      Ed.) 

I  be    Cotter    family,    with    that     neat     fel- 
Chief,    has    I. ecu    Iran 

Kopuawhara    with    t  he     P.WJ 
wh,  iv    We    hope    that    their 
ciai  ion    w  ill   I.,,   ui  [Used   to   the   ut  mi 

ible    ''ut  hdaj    pari  v    wa  ■    held    at 
tin-   borne   of    Brother   and    Sister   Sydnej 

Ciaw  ford     in    honour    of    I  h.ir    two    I 

kmelia,    aged    i  i .   and   .i.-w ,  i    | 

;i  .    pal  I     Of    I  I  I 

Wh.ii    Nohi    Nohl    and    Pen 
Nuhaki 

■ih. i  of   Porangahau  and   thi 


006 


I  E  KARERE 


Maehe.  1941 


haka     Saints     who     were    at     the     Waipawa 
Hui    Pariha. 

Mr.   and   Mrs.    Kelly    Harris    of    Auckland 

(Ahem)  arrived  in  time,  Christmas  Day, 
to  take  the  wishbones  from  the  man;. 
poultry  pieces  that  graced  his  family's 
dinner  table.  With  them  were  Thelma 
Pritchard  and  Mrs.  Maria  Bernard  and 
her  little  baby  Edward  (remember  Mac?), 
and  during  the  evening  much  gaiet]  was 
enjoyed  by  all,  especially  bo  when  the 
couple  were  disturbed  in  the  wee  hour 
of  the  morning  to  participate  in  "wel- 
coming celebrations"  commonly  known  as 
"Tin-can." 

A  really  fine  Hui  Pariha  was  enjoyed 
by  the  many  Saints  and  friends  who  at- 
tended at  Waipawa  the  third  week-end  of 
January.  Much  appreciation  is  extended 
to  the  Waipawa  and  Porangahau  people 
who   made   the   Hui   the   success   it  was. 

The  M.I. A.  District  Boards  extend 
wishes  and  greetings  for  the  continued 
success  of  Mutual  activity  and  trust  that 
our  representation  in  all  phases  of  M.I. A. 
work  will  speak  volumes  about  our  inter- 
est and  desire  and  will  to  serve  the  Lord 
the    Mutual    way. 

AUCKLAND  DISTRICT 
Reported  by  Rona  V.  Attenborough 

Greetings  to  all,  from  the  Auckland 
District.  Sounds  like  Christmas  or  some- 
thing, but  it  isn't,  we  just  want  to  greet 
you. 

During  the  past  month,  the  climatic 
condition  in  Auckland  has  supplied  us 
with  so  much  liquid  sunshine  that  the 
Mission  Home  lawn  is  now  quite  green 
again,  and  we  have  had  to  call  for  vol- 
unteers to  hoe,  scythe  or,  well  anyway, 
cut  it.      Don't  all  speak  at  once. 

The  Auckland  District  held  a  very  suc- 
cessful conference  week-end  February 
1st  and  2nd.  The  Saturday  night  meet- 
ing, under  the  auspices  of  the  Mutual 
Improvement  Association,  featured  the 
members  of  the  Onehunga  District  in 
action  songs,  hakas  and  trios,  and  we 
enjoyed  their  performances.  But  they 
had  nothing  on  the  Auckland  Branch 
action-song  team.  Watch  for  their  next 
appearance  at  Hui  Tau.  The  programme 
was  conducted  by  Bill  Brosnan,  Presi- 
dent of  the  Y. M.M.I. A.  On  Sunday  morn- 
ing the  Sunday  School  had  charge,  and 
the  District  Presidency  conducted  the 
afternoon  meeting  and  the  evening  Priest- 
hood session,  while,  of  course,  the  Relief 
Society  conducted  the  first  part  of  the 
evening  meeting.  It  was  a  grand  con- 
ference, and  well  worth  attending. 

Sister  Jewel  Cowley  spent  two  or  three 
days  in  the  Huia  Hospital  under  observa- 
tion, but  we  are  happy  to  report  that  she 
is  back  home  again,  and  as  perky  as 
ever.  You  can't  keep  a  good  man  down, 
can    you    Jewel? 

Sister  Billman  is  home  again  and  out 
and  about,  and  looking  none  the  worse 
for  her  illness.  Brother  Hemi  Paki  is 
progressing  very  favourably,  and  we  ex- 
pect to  hear  before  very  long  that  he  has 
gone    home. 

Two  quite  disappointed  souls  are  wan- 
dering around  Auckland  at  the  moment 
and      they      are     Marjorie     Jackman     and 


Jeanne  Porteous,  who  could  not  get  away 
by  the  Mariposa  on  January  18,  as  they 
had  hoped,  but  youth  is  always  hopeful 
and  so  are  these  two  girls,  who  are 
planning    to    go    to    college    in    Zion.     All 

We  can  say  is  "keep  at  them,  and  th.y 
will     give     in,"     and     then     Auckland     will 

be  losing  two  more  of  its  membei 

trouble  is  that  such  talent,  etc..  etc..  etc. 
I  mostly      etc.)       is      hard      to      secure      these 

days,  and  I  guess  the  authorities  govern- 
ing this  matter  are  reluctant  to  lose  what 
they  have.  However,  we  wish  these  two 
young  ladies — or  something — success  in 
their    desires. 

On  December  28th,  Sister  Jean  Bill- 
man  discarded  the  name  of  her  parents 
to  accept  that  of  Mrs.  Frank  Martin,  and 
as  such  we  sincerely  wish  her  much  joy 
and    happiness. 

Auckland  Saints,  meet  Mr.  David  James 
McCIeary,  who  was  baptised  on  Sunday, 
February  9,  at  Auckland  by  Kelly  Harris. 
We  welcome  David  among  us  while  he  is 
stationed  at  the  Papakura  Military  Camp 
and  hope  he  will  enjoy  his  stay  here. 
(For  further  information,  please  refer 
Sister  Dorithy  Scott,  of  Wellington 
Branch.) 

I  think  this  is  all  the  news  this  time, 
but  if  there  is  any  more,  you'll  hear  about 
it    next    time. 

That's  all,  folks! 

NGAPUHI    DISTRICT 
By    Lois   Going   and   her   staff  of   Workers 

November  8th  was  the  occasion  of  a 
Monster  Green  and  Gold  Ball  in  the 
Eparaima  Makapi  Hall  at  Kaihou,  directed 
by  Hetaraka  Anaru  and  his  co-workers. 
The  funds  were  for  patriotic  purposes. 
and  the  evening  was  certainly  indicative 
of  the  feelings  of  the  many  people  who 
attended.  Queen  activities  for  the  even- 
ing's Queen  honour  were  really  interest- 
ing and  worthwhile,  netting  over  £100, 
which  was  handed  over  to  the  Patriotic 
Society.  The  coronation  pageantry  typi- 
fied the  efforts  of  all  to  aid  in  the  cause 
of  liberty  and  freedom,  and  the  queen 
candidates — Miss  N.  Timi  Mau,  Mrs. 
Erini  Te  Ropere,  Miss  Toti  Hoterene  and 
Miss  Ellen  Witute — are  to  accept  the 
appreciations  of  everyone  for  their  un- 
selfish efforts  to  assist  in  raising  the 
desired  quota.  Due  thanks  and  apprecia- 
tion is  extended  to  Mr.  Finlayson,  who 
did  the  honours  as  a  really  excellent 
Master  of  Ceremonies.  Too  much  can- 
not be  said  about  those  who  were  in 
charge  of  the  supper  arrangements.  All 
in  all  a  really  wonderful  and  satisfactory 
evening's    function    was    enjoyed    by    all. 

Brother  Hetaraka  Anaru  since  arriving 
in  Kaikou  from  Awarua  has  made  things 
go  along  rapidly,  and  we  here  in  Kaikou 
are  keeping  up  with  him.  Functions  are 
goinc  on  all  the  time  under  his  direction 
to  assist  whatever  just  cause  that  needs 
help,  and  so  far  the  Eparaima  Makapi 
Hall  funds  are  to  be  benefited  by  a  Re- 
lief Society  bazaar  during  the  day  and  a 
dance  in  the  evening.  Another  big  fea- 
ture of  the  day's  activities  will  be  a 
"Haangi"  and  "live-stock"  sale,  where 
everyone  is  cordially  invited  to  enjoy 
themselves. 


Maehe,  1941 


TE  KARERE 


607 


BEAUTY    COMPETITION    WINNER 

During  the  Christmas  festivities  held 
at  the  Napier  Mardi  Gras  were  various 
"beauty"  contests  at  the  Sound  Shell, 
Marine  Parade.  Among  the  many 
beautiful  "beauties"  we  are  pleased  to 
announce  that  in  the  contest  for  juve- 
niles Miss  Mary  Edwards  of  Korongata, 
daughter  of  Brother  and  Sister  Peter 
Edwards,  was  awarded  first  place. 
Incidentally  this  is  not  the  only  contest 
to  her  credit,  having  won  a  "baby" 
contest  previously. 


STATISTICS 


BIRTHS 

WHAREMATE— To  Mr.  and  Mrs. 
Rangi  Wharemate  a  daughter,  January 
15th,    1941,   at   Moerewa. 

GOING— To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Cyril  Going, 
a  daughter,  December  20th,  1940,  at 
Kawakawa. 

BROWN— To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  K.  Brown 
(nee  Marie  Pitman),  a  daughter,  Janu- 
ary 5th,  1941,  at  Picardy  Maternity  Hos- 
pital,   Wanganui. 

PEDERSON— To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Lionel 
(Toby)  Pederson  of  Nuhaka,  a  daughter, 
October    30th,    1940,    at    Wairoa. 

PERE — To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Arthur  Pere, 
Nuhaka,  a  daughter,  May  24th,  1940,  at 
Gis borne 

WHAANGA — To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Tureia 
Whaanga,  Nuhaka,  a  daughter,  November 
4th,   1940,  at  Nuhaka. 

NYE — To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Ernie  Nye, 
Nuhaka,  a  daughter,  January  8th,  1941, 
at   Wairoa. 

MAERE  -To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Tuehu 
Bfaere,  Korongata,  a  son.  January  13th, 
1941. 


RANDALL— To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Paul 
Randall,  Korongata,  a  son,  January  13th, 
1941. 

PAERATA— To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Te  Ara 
Kaiha  Paerata,  a  son,  January  15th,  1941, 
at    Waipiro    Bay. 

BAPTISMS 

McCLEARY — David  James  McCleary. 
now  in  Papakura  Military  Camp,  was 
baptised  by  Elder  Kelly  Harris,  in  Auck- 
land, January   9th,    1941.     (Convert). 

WHITE— Raymond  Patrick  White,  9, 
of    Tokomaru    Bay,    by    Elder   Tipi    Kopua. 

DEATHS 

HARVEY— Chris  Harvey  of  Athol. 
Christchurch,  according  to  information 
just  arrived,  has  passe-d  this  life,  and  due 
to  not  many  of  the  Saints  of  the  South 
knowing,  very  few  were  present  at  his 
death. 

TE  WHIU--Ani  Te  Whiu.  87,  February 
8th,    1941,    at    Huntly    West.    Waikaio. 

HOOK — James  Ihaia  Hook.  son  of 
Wirepine  Hook,  11  weeks.  January  9th, 
1941,    of    pneumonia,    at    Hasting! 


BACK   PAGE   COMPETITION 

With  /hi-  last  issue  oj  "Te  Karere"  a  novel  competition  was  begun  which 
u  hoped  will  be  interesting  as  well  as  informative  to  all.    We  have 
replies  which  range  from    'ten  to  twenty-five"  names  oj  people  in  the  grout. 
Old  M.A.C.  students  and  those  who  are  famib'ar  with  missionaries  shown  would 

do  well  to  send  in  their  "list  of  names"  for  this  "I  est    Your  Memory"  Competi- 
tion.   Don't  forget  the  closing  date  for  this  comfetition  is  March  Wth,  1941. 
I'h,    picture  on  the  back  of  this  issue  is  really  valuable,  in  thai  ii  comei 
from  an  ordinary  paper  print  which  is  very  easily  damaged,  and  President  ('<■:> 
fey,  sensing  its  Historic  value,  has  had  it  here  reproduced.    It  is  a  g\    u 

sionaries  that  many  oj  US  have  seen  «.  me  On  more  than  one  mission.       Xante  tin 

brethren  and  so  let  us  know  thai  you  do  RECEIVE  "Tc  Karere.' 

II  v  offet  a  Bound  Volume  of  1939  and  i{>io  of  "Te  Karere"  fot  the  most 
correct  information  pertaining  the  group  as  to  names,  place  and  time,     All  con 

teslauls  must  have  Iheir  replies  in  to  this  o/liee  by    Mai.h  31st,   1941,       The  rules 

that  apply  to  last  month's  competition  are  to  be  observed  in  this. 


[  E  K  VRERE  Madir.  1941 

SUNDAY  SCHOOL  PREPARATION 

The  Mission  Superintendency  do  thank  you  for  your  work  dur- 
ing the  past  year.  Our  condition  as  indicated  by  your  reports 
which  have  recently  been  compiled  show  a  marked  improvement  over 
last  year,  particularly  as  to  contributions  of  "Six-penny  Fund"  and 
making  good  use  of  the  "Enlistment"  roll  to  increase  active*partici- 
pation  by  members  who  have  in  the  past  not  taken  part  in  your 
school  work'.  The  number  of  schools  show  an  increase  over  the  pre- 
vious year.  Under  the  circumstances  the  work  has  its  detinue  place 
in  our  lives. 

The  Sunday  School  is  for  EVERY  member  of  the  Church. 
Branches  that  are  not  progressing  as  well  as  they  might,  arc-  asked 
to  write  their  problems  and  conditions  in  the  form  of  a  questionaire, 
to  he  sent  to  the  S.S.  Secretary.  Box  72.  Auckland,  where  they  may 
be  considered  and  suggested  helps  given  at  Hui  Tau.  It  is  import- 
ant that  all  Sunday  School  officers  be  at  Hui  Tau  this  year.  Much 
instruction  as  to  the  carrying  on  of  your  year's  work  will  he  available. 

District  Presidents  (  Priesthood)  are  here  asked  to  fully  organize 
their  districts  with  Sunday  School  workers  that  they  might  benefit 
from  Hui  Tau  contacts.  The  same  applies  to  Branch  Presidents. 
Your  Sunday  Schools  should  he  fully  set  up.  There  is  no  excuse 
for  poor  Sunday  School  organizations  in  any  branch.  Xumhers  do 
not  count.  It  is  the  good  that  may  he  accomplished  that  counts. 
Your  failure  to  provide  this  "blessing"  for  people  is  a  responsibility 
that  you  alone  must  bear.  If  there  are  no  officers  of  your  branch 
attending  Hui  Tau  either  he  there  yourself  at  the  Sunday  School 
meetings  or  appoint  someone  suitable  to  attend. 

— SS.  Superintendency. 

PRINTING  DEADLINE 

Material  for  publication  MUST  be  received  at  the  Editor's  Office 
not  LATER  than  the  10th  of  each  month.  Regular  Lesson  MATERIAL, 
such  as  Primary,  Sunday  School,  Mutual  and  Genealogical,  are  required 
on  the   FIRST   of   every   month. 

Your  co-operation  in  this  matter  is  urgently  required.  If  your 
contributions  are  late,  this  is  the  result:  "Your  'Karere'  is  late — it  is 
small  in  size — it  may  even  come  to  you  with  no  lesson  work  for  some 
organization."  Those  of  you  who  are  responsible  for  your  organiza- 
tion  work,   send   your   material   in   on   time. 

FRONT  COVER  PICTURE 

Through  the  kind  permission  of  Dominion  Museum  and  the  co- 
operation of  Tanner  Brothers  of  Wellington,  we  give  you  "Whatahoro," 
scholar,  writer,  leader  and  champion  of  Maori  culture,  whose  works  are 
priceless  gems  in  the  field  of  true  Maori  literature.  The  information 
that  was  the  constant  companion  of  his  travels  during  his  life  are  at 
the   call    of    officialdom. 

The  following  issue,  we  hope,  will  give  you  a  more  intimate  pre- 
sentation of  this  Maori,  who  is  a  proud  and  proper  descendant  of  his 
ancestors,  the  "Ma-uri." 


€  HAR€R€ 


Their    I\\r«-llrm-i<»s,    Sir   Cyril   and    Lady    Ncw.ill 


gS^K^^?OS^C^>.  -«>.  -->.  -->.  --;-.  -<j.,  -.-.. 


: 


I 

% 

7) 


BRANCH  TEACHERS1  MESSAGE 


//  is  important  that  you  go  about  your  work  with  the 

intent  to  assist  your  people.  With  this  in  view  we  recom- 
mend your  taking  from  the  Pepuere,  1941,  issue  of  "1  e 
Karere"  the  "Suggestions."     Even  use  the  information  with 

your  Saints.  They  should  be  more  conscious  of  what  is 
required  as  Latter-day  Saints. 

SECRET  PRAYER 

The  soul  with  a  broken  heart .  on  bended  knees,  with 
head  bowed  reverently,  cannot  long  remain  in  the  shadows 
or  the  night  of  spiritual  blindness.  To  pray  in  secret  to  our 
Divine  Father  in  Heaven  brings  solace  to  the  aching  heart, 
companionship  to  the  lonely,  assurance  to  the  suppressed, 
light  to  the  wayward,  power  to  the  weak,  strength  to  the 
strong,  and  the  calm  conviction  that  God,  our  Eternal  Father, 
lives  and  that  Jesus  is  the  Christ. 

What  a  privilege  to  shut  oneself  away  from  the  world 
and  be  with  God  alone  in  prayer!  He  knows  us  for  what 
we  really  are  and  not  for  what  we  may  appear  to  be.  If 
we  are  righteous,  He  is  happy.  If  we  are  sinful  and  we  go 
he  fore  Him  alone,  and  there  in  the  language  of  the  heart 
tell  Him  we  love  Him  and  we  want  His  help  in  doing  right, 
Ih-  divine  emotions  well  up  within  Him,  and  in  His  un- 
speakable majesty  and  unqualified  mercy  He  takes  us  in  I  [is 
arms,  as  it  were,  and  we  feel  the  warmth  and  infinite  love  of 
His  holy  person.  He  awaits  patiently,  hut  anxiously  to 
breathe  His  divine  essence  into  the  human  heart  upon  its  con- 
trite imitation.    Oh,  that  all  men  could  have  this  experience. 

Secret  prayer  is  the  prayer  of  the  heart.  Its  language 
is  bathed  in  simplicity.  We  kneel  before  our  Heavenly 
Father,  knowing  that  before,  and  as  we  speak,  He  knows  our 
every  weakness  and  our  every  secret  desire.  We  pray  to 
Him  in  the  light  of  this  knowledge.  There  is  no  mas- 
querade in  secret  prayer. 

Upon  the  Mount  of  Olives,  Jesus  withdrew  from  among         { 
llis  disciples  that  He  might  pray  in  secret.     His  heart  was 
heavy.      His  cross  seemed  unbearable,     lie  desired  so  much 
to  he  done  with  His  Father.  ^ 

Let  the  Saints  everywhere  pray  in  secret  as  well  as  in  the  9 
(U  family  circle,  and  so  teach  their  children.  Let  God  he  the  , 
A  confidant  of  every  member  of  the  Church,  "and  thy  Father  ^ 
«J         which   seeth   in   secret   Himself    shall    reward   thee   openly."         9 

2  i 


2 


«V 


1/ 

I 


Te  Karere   I 


Established  in  1907 
Wahanga    35  Aperira,    1941  Nama   4 


3 
$ 

Matthew   Cowley  Tumuaki    Mihana 

Kelly  Harris  Etita 

Eru    T.    Kupa       Kaiwhakamaori 

Waimate   Anaru  Kaiwhakamaori 

"Ko  tenei  Pepa  i  whakatapua  hei  hapai  ake  i  te  iwi  Maori  ki 
roto  i  nga  whakaaro-nui/ 

"Te  Karere"  is  published  monthly  by  the  New  Zealand  Mission  of  the  Church 
of  Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-day  Saints,  and  is  printed  by  TE  KARERE  PRESS,  No.  2 
Scotia  Place,  Upper  Queen  Street,  Auckland,  C.l,  N.Z.  Subscription  Rates:  3/-  per 
six  months;  5/-  per  year;  £1  for  five  years;  £2/10/-  for  life.  (United  States  Cur- 
rency:  $1.00    per   year;    $4.00   for   five   years;    $10.00   for   life.) 

Address    Correspondence,    Box    72,    Auckland,    C.l,    New    Zealand. 


CONTENTS 

Editorial —  Page 

"The  Missions  of  Europe,"  by  Matthew  Cowley    614 

"To    New  Zealand,"  by   Kelly   Harris     616 

Special  Features — 

"Etahi  o  Nga  Whakaaro  i  Man,"  na  Wiremu  Takana  617 

"Nga  Kai-Whakaako   Mo  Waikato"   621 

"Travelling   to   Hui   Tan"    

"Bles  ing     Mother,"   by   Wm     Mannering     624 

"A   Discussion  on  Prayer,"  bj    Phillip  Peterson  626 

"Picture  of  the  Month"  628 

Church  Features — 

"Mahi   Knr.i   I  [apati"   619 

Sunday  School        629 

Primary       630 


Statistics      

Mews  From  the  Field 


614  TE   KARERE  Vperira,  1941 


Editorial 


THE  MISSIONS  OF  EUROPE 

From  the  missions  of  the  Church  in  war-stricken  Europe  come 
news  of  continued  activities,  regardless  of  blackouts,  food  rations, 
privations,   mental   anxiety,   and   physical    suffering.     "Here   is   the 

news"  : — 

From  Switzerland:  "We  have  so  much  to  be  thankful  for  here 
in  Switzerland  since  we  have  not  had  any  battles  as  yet,  and  hope 

our  position  will  continue  unchallenged.  Food  materials  arc  becom- 
ing scarce.  Butter,  cream,  pork,  oils  and  fats  are  rationed.  Only 
a  pound  of  butter  a  month  is  allowed  each  of  us;  there  is  no  more 
white  flour.  A  pound  of  rice  a  month  is  the  ration  while  a  kilo  (a 
little  over  two  pounds)  of  sugar  must  suffice.  In  spite  of  this." 
Elder  Ringger  reported,  "it  is  cheaper  to  live  in  Switzerland  than 
in  any  of  the  lands  around.  "We  arc  working  unitedly  and  are 
willing  to  remain  on  duty  even  at  the  point  of  starvation  as  long  as 
there  is  opportunity  to  do  good," 

From  Denmark:  "Financially  and  spiritually  the  Mission  is  going 
well,"  reports  Elder  West.  "Tithes  have  increased,  although  a  num- 
ber of  former  tithe-payers  are  now  unemployed.  Since  the  war 
started  the  Aarhus  Church  grounds  and  buildings  have  been  given 
a  new  appearance  and  modernized.  Landscaping  has  made  the 
Church  yards  into  one  of  the  most  pleasant  scenes  in  Aarhus.  At 
the  opening  of  Mutual  Improvement  Association  work  in  Copen- 
hagen, recently.  Elder  West  reported  200  young  people  present,  most 
of   them  non-members." 

I:roin  Norway:    Elder  Olaf  Soensteby,  acting  president  of  the 

Norwegian  Mission,  has  written  of  conferences  held  in  Trondheim, 
Bergen  and  Oslo,  all  familiar  names  during  the  battle  of  Norway. 
Elder  Soensteby  reports  that  no  Mormons  lost  their  lives  during  the 
battle  of  Narvik.  Members  of  the  Church  throughout  Norway  have 
collected  clothing,  money  and  other  gifts  to  aid  war  victims.  "Fuel 
is  expensive  in  Norway  and  meeting-places  difficult  to  maintain  in 
winter,  because  we  must  heat  our  halls  with  wood,  which  is  very 
costly." 

From  Sweden:  "All  the  meeting-places  except  small  branches 
in  Sweden  are  being  maintained  for  regular  meetings,"  reports  Elder 


Aperira,  1941  TE   KARERE  615 

Johannson.  "It  is  difficult  to  obtain  speakers  enough,  however,  as 
most  of  our  male  members  have  been  drafted  for  national  prepared- 
ness." He  adds  that  tithes  were  encouraging  and  children  and  new 
members  are  being  baptized. 

From  Czechoslovakia:  Elder  Josef  Roubicek,  presiding  over 
the  Mission,  reports  that  the  members  missed  a  few  hard-working 
missionaries.  The  German  authorities  in  Prague  have  granted  the 
members  permission  to  hold  meetings  in  their  customary  places.  An 
order  from  Berlin  said  the  Nazi  regime  had  no  objection  to  lec- 
tures on  the  Mormon  religion.  Before  German  approval  was  re- 
ceived, the  members  had  held  Sunday  School  in  private  homes. 

From  the  Netherlands:  Elder  J.  Schipaanboord,  acting  president 
of  the  Mission,  has  been  successful  in  getting  his  monthly  and  quar- 
terly reports  in  good  shape  to  Salt  Lake  City.  "Tithing  and  fast 
offerings  are  holding  up  very  well,  but  meetings  are  combined  for 
lack  of  fuel." 

From  Germany:  "Tithing  has  increased  15  per  cent,  and  fast 
offerings  have  gained.  General  donations  have  doubled.  There  has 
been  some  increase  in  membership,  with  55  baptisms  in  eight  months. 
Sunday  Schools  are  well  attended.  Wives  and  mothers  have  assisted 
in  helping  wounded  and  bereaved  as  well  as  doing  work  for  the  Kid 
Cross,"  reports  Elder  Herbert  Klopfer,  acting  president  of  the 
Mission. 

From  France:  "French-speaking  members  of  the  Church  have 
held  meetings  when  opportunity  would  permit,  have  baptized  new 
members  and  have  advanced  men  in  the  Aaronie  Priesthood.  Meet- 
ings have  been  reduced  in  number  because  of  the  shortage  ^\  coal. 
The)  have  had  to  combine  M.I.A.  and  Relief  Society  groups  and 
hold  Sunday  School  and  Sacrament  meetings  together." 

From  England:  All  members  holding  the  Melchizedek  Priest- 
hood in  the  British  Isles  have  been  excused  from  military  service 
by  order  of  the  Government.  The  order  did  not  exempt  bearers  ^\ 
the  Aaronie  Priesthood,  bu1  Left  the  British  Elders  available  to  serve 
the  Church.  Acting  Presidenl  Andre  K.  Anastasiou  states  that  faith 
promoting  reports  from  members  throughout  the  Mission  told  ol 
miraculous  escapes  from  air  raids. 

There  are  no  national  boundaries  in  the  Church  of  God. 

Matthew  (  owley, 

so^x  m  - '"-  •->- •-;-.  •->.  •->. •-.-.  •->-  w 


616  TE   KARERE  Aperira.194] 


To  New  Zealand 


Governor-General  of  New  Zealand.  Marshal]  of  the  Royal  Air 
Force  Sir  Cyril  NTewall,  G.C.B.,  G.C.M.G.,  O.M.,  C.B.E.,  and  Lady 
Newall  with  their  three  children  arrived  at  Auckland,  New  Zealand, 
February  21,  1941.  Their  stay  in  Auckland  was  not  Ion-  as  they 
-••on  left  tor  Wellington,  where  the  formal  swearing-in  ceremony 
took   place. 

Te  Karere,  on  behalf  of  its  readers  and  particularl}  the  Maori 
people,  welcomes  Their  Excellencies  to  Maoriland.  Nau  mai-  Haere 
mai — Haere  mai.  The  ties  that  weld  us  together  arc  more  warmly 
appreciated  in  this  daw  Our  new  Governor-General  and  his  Lady 
may  he  assured  of  our  loyalty  and  willingness,  yes,  even  to  sacrifice. 
t<>  serve  the  cause  and  realm  they  so  ably  represent.  (  mce  again 
we  bid  you  welcome.  May  our  life  together  result  in  bettered  spirit 
and  lasting  progression  towards  the  goal  of  true  democracy. 

Kelly   II arris. 


MO  TE  HAERE  KI  NUHAKA 

E  nga  iwi — nga  iwi.  Tena  ra  koutou  e  takatu  nei  ki  te 
haere  ki  ta  koutou  Hui  Tau  e  tu  nei  ki  Nuhaka  a  te  11  ki  te  14 
o  nga  ra  o  Aperira.  E  ahua  pakeke  ana  nga  huarahi  haere  mo 
tatou,  engari  i  runga  i  te  tono  pera  i  nga  tono  o  era  tau  ka 
haere  tatou  ma  runga  i  te  "tereina"  (train)  mo  te  utu  hoki 
iho  te  rima  o  te  utu  tuturu.  Penei — Mehemea  te  utu  tuturu 
atu  i  Akarana  he  £5,  ko  te  utu  ma  koutou  he  rima  o  tenei  te 
hoki  iho,  ara,  ka  £4,  to  utu.  Pataingia  i  nga  teihana  kei  kona 
koe  te  utu  tuturu  a,  e  ahei  ana  koe  kia  hoki  iho  to  utu  i  te 
rima  o  te  utu  tuturu  (one-fifth  less).  I 

Whakarongo  mai!     Ka  tukua  atu  nga  pukapuka    (forms)         j 

j        kua   oti   te   hainatia   e  te   Timuaki   Mihana   kia   koutou.        Ina        i 
whiwhi  koutou  i  enei  pukapuka  me  mau  ki  te  teihana,  hainatia 

I        ano  e  koe,   katahi  ano  ka  hoatu  ki  nga  apiha  o  te  teihana.      Mo 
te  haere  ki  te  Hui  Tau  anake  tenei  homaitanga. 

Ka  timata  te  haere  ki  te  Hui  Tau  a  te  8  o  Aperira  mai  i        | 

♦        Kaikohe,  Ngapuhi.     Akarana  me  nga  paanga  atu  o  te  tereina        \ 
i  te  9  o  Aperira.      Atu  i  Pamutana  ki  Nepia'ko  te  10  o  Aperira 

|         te  ra  haere. 

!  ! 


AN  APOLOGY. 

The  Editor  regrets  very  much  the  omission  of  the  Genealogical 
Society's  Lesson  information.  Due  to  the  amount  of  work  during 
the  past  weeks  the  Lesson  material,  which  was  handed  in  personally 
b  Teao  Wirihana,  has  been  misplaced;  sufficient  information  is  to 
hand,  however,  to  suggest  using  the  next  THREE  Lesson  chapters 
in  the  hook  "Children  of  the  Covenant." 


Aperira,  1941 


TE   KARERE 


617 


Etahi  o  Nga  Whakaaro  i  Mau 

NA  WIREMU  TAKANA,  PAKEKE  KUA  MATE. 
(He  roanga  tuatahi.) 

Na  te  Etita. — /  timatangia  enei  korero  i  roto  i  "Te  Karere"  o  Maehe,  a  ko 
tenei  te  roanga  tuatahi,  a  kei  te  whai  ake  ano  etahi  o  ana  korero. 

Na,  i  hoatu  tenei  mana  e  Ihu  Karaiti,  ki  nga  tangata  i  whaka- 
pono  ki  a  ia,  a,  whiwhi  ana  ratou  ki  taua  mana;  na,  i  to  ratou  whi- 
whinga  i  taua  mana  me  te  Wairua  Tapu  ano  hold  o  te  Atua,  katahi 
ratou  ka  whiwhi  ki  te  kaha  i  taea  ai  e  ratou  te  whakakahore  i  nga 
mahi  kino  katoa  kua  korerotia  ake  ra,  me  te  mahi  ano  i  nga  mana 
whakaora  tinana,  i  nga  merekara,  me  nga  mea  i  taea  ai  e  ratou  te 
mahi  i  aua  ra.  Ehara  i  te  mea,  ko  ratou  anake 
i  whiwhi  ki  tenei  mana,  engari,  o  ratou  tupuna 
o  te  whare  o  Iharaira.  Na,  i  te  mea,  he  mea 
hoatu  taua  mana  ki  a  ratou  i  runga  i  to  ratou 
whakapono,  ma  te  aha  e  kore  ai  e  homai  ki 
a  tatou  mehemea  he  whakapono  ta  tatou? 
Kaore  he  take.  No  te  mea  hoki  e  hoatu  ai 
ki  te  tangata,  ehara  i  te  mea,  ka  riro  noa  mai, 
engari,  me  homai  taua  mana.  Na,  i  te  mea,  ka 
whakapono  tatou  ki  a  te  Karaiti,  ka  whiwhi 
ki  tona  Tohungatanga  Tapu  me  tona  Wairua 
hoki,  hei  kai  tohutohu  i  a  tatou,  hei  kai  whaka- 
kaha,  katahi  ka  taea  ai  e  tatou  enei  mea  kino 
katoa  te  whakarere  atu.  Tenei  ano,  ka  kore 
to  tatou  wehi  ki  nga  mea  whakamate  katoa,  ara, 
ki  nga  makutu,  ki  nga  kehua  Maori,  ki  nga 
Atua  whiowhio,  ki  nga  patu  paiarehe,  ki  ena  ritenga  Atua,  i  te  mea, 
kua  riro  mai  i  a  tatou  te  mana  o  te  Atua  nui  atu  i  era  atu  Atua 
katoa,  c  rite  ana  ki  te  mana  i  whiwhi  ai  o  tatou  tupuna,  i  heke  mai 
nei  i  Ilawa.iki.  No  te  mea  e  mohio  ana  tatou  ki  tenei,  i  te  mea,  i  a 
ratou  taua  mana  kore  rawa  o  ratou  wehi  i  nga  mea  katoa.  Tiro  atu 
ki  te  moana  nui  a  Kiwa,  i  hoea  mai  nei  e  ratou. 

Kore  rawa  o  ratou  wehi  i  te  aha,  i  te  alia.  Ko  tatou  ke,  nga 
uri,  kei  te  wehi  ki  nga  mea  katoa,  na  reira  ra,  me  whiwhi  tatou  ki 
taua  mana  Tapu  o  to  tatou  Matua  i  te  Rangi,  ara,  tona  Tohungatanga, 

kia  kore  ai  to  tatou  wehi  i  te  alia,  i  te  alia,  kia  pera  ki  0  tatou  tupuna. 

kia  whai  ora  ai  hoki  o  tatou  tinana  kikokiko  nei,  kia  ora  ai  ano 

hoki   tatou  a  te   wa  ka   hoki   atu   tatou   ki   to  tatou    Matua   i   te    Rangi. 
Kati. 

Xa  konei  ra,  E  te  iwi,  e  ki  ana  to  tatou  Ariki  a  Ihu  Karaiti, 
"Inoia,  a  ka  hoatu  ki  a  koutou;  rapua,  a  ka  kitea  e  koutou;  patukia, 
a  ka  huakina  ki  a  koutou;  ka  whiwhi  hoki  nga  tangata  katoa  ina  inoi; 
ka  kite  ina  rapu;  ka  huakina  hoki  ki  te  tangata  e  patuki  ana.'"  Me 
rapu   ki   whea,   ki   nga   whare   Wanangai     Kua   kore   ra   he   whare 


WlREMU     TAKANA 


618  TE   KARERE  Aperira,  L941 

Wananga.  Me  patuki  ki  whea,  ki  nga  tohunga  Maori?  Me  Inoi 
ki  whea,  ki  nga  Atua  whiowhio  kia  riro  mai  ai  i  a  tatou?  Kahore 
ra  pea.  Engari,  me  rapu  i  nga  Karaipiture  kia  ki  te  kupu  o  to 
tatou  AHki.  \'a,  ki  te  ki  mai  nga  Karaipiture,  me  penei  te  mahi, 
kaua  tatou  c  ki,  kaore  me  penei  ke,  me  pera  ke,  engari  me  rite  ki 
tana  i  tohutohu  mai  ai  ki  a  tatou.  Ki  te  peneitia  e  tatou  te  rapu 
i  roto  i  aua  Karaipiture  ka  mohio  tonu  tatou  kei  whea  e  takoto  ana 
taua  mana  Tapu,  ara,  tona  Tohungatanga,  na  reira,  e  taea  ai  e  la 
te  mahi  i  nga  mahi  katoa  o  roto  i  tona  Atuatanga. 

Otira,  he  whakapono  to  te  iwi  Maori  ki  nga  Karaipiture,  e  kore 
koutou  e  whakahawea  mai  ki  end  kupu  atu.  Kei  roto  i  aua  Karai- 
piture e  man  ana  te  tino  tauira  o  te  whakaoranga  a  te  tangata.  Kua 
kite  ranei  koutou  i  tenei?  Mehemea,  kaore.  me  tahuri  ano  ki  te  rapu. 
a  kia  kitea  ra  ano,  no  te  mea  kei  reira  e  man  ana  ona  ritenga  katoa  o 
te  whakaoranga,  i  whakaritea  nei  e  to  tatou  Kai  Whakaora,  ratou 
ko  ana  pononga;  nana  nei  i  tautoko  nei  ana  mahi  i  muri  iho  i  tona 
kakenga  ake  ki  te  Rangi.  Xa,  kua  kite  etahi  o  tatou,  o  te  iwi  Maori. 
Kua  whakawhiwhia  ano  ki  taua  Mana  Tapu  o  te  Atua.  Ko  nga 
mea  o  ratou  e  u  tonu  ana  ki  f>na  tikanga  katoa,  kua  kore  te  wehi  i 
roto  i  o  ratou  ki  nga  mea  katoa  e  wehinga  nei  e  tatou,  e  te  iwi 
Maori,  ara,  nga  mea  kaore  e  kitea  atu  ana  e  te  kanohi  tangata.  haunga 
ra  te  tangata  e  haere  mai  ana  ki  te  patu  i  a  ia. 

Kua  kite  ano  hoki  ratou  i  aua  tohu  ano  i  korero  ai  to  tatou 
Ariki.  ka  aru  tahi  i  te  tangata  e  whakapono  ana  ki  tona  ingoa.  Tera 
noa  ake  ra,  ko  etahi  o  ratou  i  roto  i  taua  whakapono  kua  tino  tae 
rawa  atu  ki  roto  ki  tona  Whare  Tapu.  Kua  tino  ki  o  ratou  ngakau 
i  te  hari,  i  te  koa,  a,  rere  ana  te  pouri  me  te  aue.  Otira,  ehara  i 
te  mea,  ko  enei  tangata  anake  kua  tae  atu  nei  ki  reira.  nga  mea  i 
whiwhi  ki  tenei  koa  nui,  engari,  ko  te  tokomaha  noa  iho  o  nga  mea 
e  u  ana  i  roto  i  te  whakapono  tuturu  o  te  Atua.  Kua  kaha  hoki 
ratou  ki  te  ki,  kua  whai  kaha  ratou  ki  te  whakakahore  i  nga  mea. 
kino,  i  korerotia  ake  ra,  i  runga  i  te  mea  e  mohio  ana  ratou,  ki  te 
hoki  atu  ratou  ki  aua  mea,  mahi  ai  ano,  ka  uru  ano  ratou  ki  roto 
ki  te  whakangaromanga  o  tenei  tinana  maori. 

Ehara  i  te  mea  pai,  tenei  tu  ahua,  ko  etahi  e  kite,  ko  etahi  e  kore 
e  kite,  ko  etahi  e  whiwhi  ko  etahi  e  kore  e  whiwhi,  ko  etahi  ranei 
e  rapu,  ko  etahi  e  noa  iho,  engari,  me  whiwhi  katoa,  me  kite  katoa, 
me  rapu  katoa,  kia  tae  ai  tatou  ki  roto  i  te  kotahitanga  o  te  whaka- 
pono, o  te  matauranga  hoki,  ki  te  Tama  a  te  Atua,  ki  te  tino  tangata, 
ki  te  mehua  o  te  tino  kaumatuatanga  e  tutuki  ai  ki  to  te  Karaiti. 

(Taria  he  roanga) 

REMEMBERING  YOU 

Sister  Elline  Shaw  Woods  and  her  family  still  think  of  you,  and 
at  this  time  they  express  their  "aroha"  and  "tangi"  which  was  con- 
tained in  a  letter  written  by  Janet.  "I  want  you  to  send  my  greetings 
along  with  Mother's  and  Charline's  to  all  the  Saints  and  friends  in  New 
Zealand  and  tell  them  we  still  think  of  them  and  love  them  very  dearly." 


Aperira,  1941  TE   KARERE  619 

Mahi  Kura  Hapati 

RATAPU   TUATAHI 

AKORANGA  1.      Nga  Tikanga  o  te  Whakapono. 

Whakaaturanga: 

Te  Wairua  Tapu  e  kiia  nei  ano  ko  te  Wairua,  me  te  Wairua  o  te 
Ariki,  te  Wairua  o  te  Atua,  te  Kaiwhakamarie  me  te  Wairua  o  te  Pono, 
kaore  ia  i  te  kakahuria  ki  te  tinana  kikokiko  wheua  hoki,  engari  he 
tinana  wairua,  otira  e  mohio  ana  tatou  kua  whakaatu  mai  te  Wairua  i 
Aia  i  roto  i  te  ahua  tangata.  Ma  roto  i  nga  whakahaere  minitatanga  a 
te  Wairua  ka  ahei  te  Matua  raua  ko  te  Tama  te  whakahaere  i  a  raua 
mahi  mo  te  tangata.  Ma  roto  i  taua  Wairua  e  whakaputa  mai  te  mohio- 
tanga  ma  roto  hoki  i  Aia  e  taea  ai  nga  mahi  a  te  Atuatanga.  Ko  te 
Wairua  Tapu  te  pono  o  te  Matau  raua  ko  te  Tama  e  whakaatu  ana  ki 
te  tangata  to  raua  ahuatanga,  me  te  whakamohio  tuturu  mo  era  atu 
tangata  o  te  Atuangata. 

Nga  Patai: 

1.  He  aha  etahi  o  nga  ingoa  e  mohiotia  ana  te  Wairua  Tapu? 

2.  Pehea  te  ahua  o  to  te  Wairua  Tapu  tinana? 

3.  E  whakaputa  ana  ano  ranei  Ia  i  roto  i  te  ahua  tangata? 

4.  Me  pehea  e  ahei  ai  te  Matua  raua  ko  te  Tama  te  whakahaere 
i  a  raua  mahi  mo  te  tangata? 

5.  He  pono  no  wai  te  Wairua  Tapu  a  heaha  hoki  etahi  atu  o  ana 
whakaaturanga  ? 

(Nga  zvhakaaturanga  tautoko  i  te  rchaiia  nei.)  1  Niwhai  4:6,  11:  1-12, 
Mohia  13:  5,  Maaka  1:  10,  Hoani  1:  32,  Nga  Mahi  a  nga  Apotoro  2:  4, 
8:  29,  10:  19,  Roma  8:  10,  1  Te  Haronika  5:  19  (Te  Wairua  o  te  Ariki) 
Matiu  3:16,  12:28,  1  Niwhai  13:12  (Te  Wairua  o  te  Atua)  Hoani 
14:16-26,   16-7    (Te  Kaiwhakamarie)   Hoani  15:26,  16-13    (Te  Wairua 

0  te  Pono)    Akoranga  me  nga  Kawenata   130:22    (He  tinana  wairua) 

1  Niwhai  11:  11   (Te  whakaputanga  i  te  ahua  o  te  tangata) — He  maha 
noatu  nga  whakaaturanga  hei  tirohanga.      Tirohia  nga  whakaatu-tere. 

RATAPU    TUARUA 

Whakaaturanga:  Nga  Tikanga  o  te  Whakapono. 

Etahi  o  nga  ahuatanga  o  te  Atua.  Te  Atua  kei  nga  wahi  katoa. 
Kaore  he  wahi  ahakoa  pehea  te  pamamao  o  roto  i  nga  mea  i  hangaa 
e  te  Atua,  te  kitea,  te  mohiotia  e  Ia.  Ma  roto  atu  i  te  Wairua  e  pa 
atu  ana  te  Atua  i  nga  wa  katoa  ki  nga  mea  katoa,  na  reira  kua  kiia 
kei  nga  wahi  katoa  te  Atua,  otira,  e  tiara  tenei  i  te  mea  e  mea  ana  ko 
te  tinana  ake  o  tetahi  o  nga  mema  o  te  Atuatanga  kei  tenei  wahi.  kei 
te  wahi  i  te  wa  kotahi.  Ko  nga  wahi  e  kiia  nei  e  rinia  o  to  Tokotoru, 
he  kaha-mutungakore,  ara,  to  whakarongo,  to  kite,  te  whawha,  to  rongo 
liaunga  me  to  rongo  roka  (hearing,  sight,  touch,  smell  ami  I 
Ona  whakaaro  whanui  (mind)  kahore  ho  mutunga  mai.  Tona  mana 
ki  te  whakawhiti  i  Aia  mai  i  tena  wahi  ki  tona  wahi  kalmiv  Ona 
mutunga-mai.  Me  marama  aim,  k<>  Tona  tinana  e  kore  6  tatu  ki  nga 
wahi  c  rua  i  1c  wa  kotahi.  Ina  whakaaotia  o  tatou  ho  tangata  to  Atua. 
o  ahei  ana  hoki  kia  whakaaotia  o  tatou  Tona  w  hakat  inanat  anga  (materi- 
ality), ao  ia.  to  tangata  kore  tinana  (immaterial  being)  i  raro  nei  i 
tenei  ingoa  kore  take  ko  etahi  e  mea  ana  ko  to  ahua  tera  o  to  Atua, 
o  kore  rawa  e  ora,  ma  tenei  ahua  kore  tonu  e  whakaatu.     Bfehemea 

ho  wahi   to  to   Atua    (form)    ho   roan.ua   ho   w  hanuit  anga   aim,    a   ho   mutu- 
nga aim  tona  pohe  i  roto  i  to  taldwa   (limited  extension  in  space),    E 

kore   rawa  o   taea  8   la   te   Q0h0   i    nga   wahi    maha   i   to   wa   kotahi    i 


TE   KARERE  Aperira,  1941 

i  Tana  ahua.  a  noreira,  kaore  tatou  e  tika  kia  ohorere  ki  te  ako  i  nga 
karaipiture  e  neke  haere  ana  la  i  tona  wahi  ki  tena  wahi.  Te  korero 
o  te  pourewa  <>  Papera,  "A  ko  Ihowa  te  Tama  ka  puta  mai  ki  Apera- 
hama.  a  i  Tona  whakaaturanga  ko  la  te  Matua  kaha  rawa" — ka  korero 
la  ki  taua  petereiaka  me  te  hanga  ano  he  kawenata  ki  Aia  a  ka  korero 
tatou  e  mea  ana  kua  mutu  Tona  ki  aia  a  haere  atu  ana  te  Atua  ia 
Aperahama, 

Nga   Patai: 

1.  Pehea  te  ahua  o  te  Atua  ki  nga  wahi  i  hangaa  e  Ia? 

2.  Pehea  te  tikanga  o  tenei — Kei  nga  wahi  katoa  te  Atua? 

3.  Pehea  ana  te  ahua  o  te  tinana  o  tena  o  tena  o  te  Atuatanga? 

4.  Pehea  nga  wahi  e  rima  o  te  Atuatanga? 

5.  E   ahei   ana  ranei  kia  tatu   te  tinana   o  te   Atuatanga   i   te   wa 
kotahi? 

RATAPU   TUATORU 

Whakaaturanga:    Te    mohiotanga    ki    nga    mea    katoa.      Kei    nga    wahi 
katoa  te  Atua.      Nga  Tikanga  o  te  Whakapono. 

Kaore  he  wahi  o  nga  mea  i  hangaa  e  te  Atua  ahakoa  pehea  te 
tawhiti  kaore  e  kore  te  Atua  te  mohio.  Ma  roto  atu  i  te  Wairua  o  te 
Atuatanga,  e  pa  ana  hoki  Ia  ki  enei  mea  i  nga  wa  katoa.  Kua  kiia 
hoki  kei  te  tata  mai  te  Atua  i  nga  wahi  katoa  otira,  e  hara  i  te  mea  o 
ratou  tinana  kei  nga  wahi  maha  i  nga  wa  katoa.  Kaore  e  mohiotia  e 
te  tangata  Tona  matauranga  me  Tona  kaha — Nana  hoki  i  hanga  i 
whakahaere  te  kaha.  I  te  mea  ko  Ia  he  mutunga-kore,  he  tika  katoa 
hoki  Ana  mahi,  no  reira  ko  Tona  mohiotanga  he  mutunga-kore — me 
whiwhi  ano  Ia  i  nga  whakaaro  mutunga-kore.  Ma  roto  atu  i  te  whaka- 
haerenga  o  nga  anahera  me  te  minitatanga  o  ana  pononga,  e  whai  wahi 
ana  Ia  ki  te  korero  ki  nga  wahi  katoa  i  hangaa  e  Ia,  a  ka  tae  hoki  Ia 
ki  te  torotoro  i  Ana  wahi  e  hiahia  ana. 

Nga   Patai: 

1.  E   mohio   ana  ranei   te   Atua   ki   Ana   wahi   katoa   i   hangaa   ai 
ahakoa  pehea  te  tawhiti? 

2.  Mehemea  kei  te  tata  mai  te  Atua  pehea  ai  e  mohiofia  ai  e  Ia? 

3.  E  pehea  ana  te  ahua  o  Ana  mahi? 

4.  Pehea  atu  e  whai  wahi  ai  Ia  te  korero  atu  ki  Ana  wahi  katoa? 

RATAPU   TUAWHA 
Whakaaturanga:  Te  Atua  he  tino  kaha.      Nga  Tikanga  o  te  Whakapono. 

E  tika  ana  hoki  te  kiinga  i  Aia  ko  te  Kaha-rawa.  Ka  taea  e  te 
tangata  te  kite  i  nga  tohu  o  Tona  kaha  mutunga-kore  i  nga  taha  katoa 
i  roto  hoki  i  nga  kaha  e  whakahaere  nei  i  nga  mea  o  te  whenua  me  te 
whakahaere  ano  i  nga  mea  o  te  rangi  i  runga  i  te  huarahi  kua  whaka- 
takotoria  mo  ratou.  Mehehema  e  kitea  ana  e  Tona  matauranga  tetahi 
mea  e  ahei  ana  kia  mahia  e  taea  hoki  e  Ia  te  mahi,  ahakoa  ra  e  hara 
taua  mea  ra  i  te  mutunga-kore  i  hangaa  ra  e  Ia  otira,  ko  te  putake 
mai  o  te  mana  he  mutunga-kore.  Hei  whakaarotanga  mo  te  tika  o  Ana 
mahi  me  te  mana  mutunga-kore,  ko  te  kaha  ki  te  mahi  i  nga  mea  e 
hiahiatia  ana  e  Ia  kia  meatia. 

Nga  Patai: 

1.  He  aha  te  mea  e  tika  ana  te  karangatanga  i  te  Atua? 

2.  E  kite  ana  ano  ranei  te  tangata  i  nga  tohu  o  tona  kaha? 
C.    Pehea  nga  mea  e  kitea  ana  e  ia  e  ahei  ana  kia  mahia? 


Aperira,  1941  TE   KARERE  621 


HE  MIHI 


Tumuaki  Cowley  me  to  whanau  e  noho  mai  na  i  te  tari 
o  te  mihana.      Tena  koutou  katoa  me  te  Hunga  Tapu. 
J  Tenei  ka  tukua  atu  te  rima  hereni  mo  taku   Karere  mo 

♦  tenei  tau  hou.      Kei  te  tumanako  nuitia  Te  Karere  i  naianei  e 
te  tini  o  nga  tangata  i  te  mea  e  rite  tonu  ana  koia  te  "kau- 

I        matua"  hei  torotoro  i  te  hunga  tapu  me  nga  hoa  aroha  o  ia 

♦  kainga  o  ia  whanau  i  roto  i  nga  pekanga  katoa  o  te  Hahi. 

Ka  nui  to  matou  tino  ora  i  raro  i  nga  manaakitanga  maha 
t        a  te  Atua. 

I  te  me  kei  te  whakatata  haere  atu  ki  nga  ra  o  te   Hui 

j        Tau   "Whakamaharatanga"   mo  nga  pononga  pono,  nga   "kau- 

«        matua"  me  a  ratou  mahi  papai  i  mahue  iho  nei  ki  runga  i  enei 

J        nga  moutere  o  te  Moana-nui-a-Kiwa,  ka  pupu  ake  te  aroha  mo 

ratou  me  te  tumanako  kia  tae  atu  ki  to  "ratou"  Hui  Tau. 

Kei   te    Atua   te    tikanga,    no    reira   kia    ora    mai    ano    te 


Tumuaki. 


Na  to  teina  iti, 

Pita  R.  Pene. 


NGA  KAI-WHAKAAKO  MO  WAIKATO 

M  A        .  WIKI  TUATAHI 

Marama  o  Aperira. 

Awe  Whare  Ponga  me  Waka  Huriwhenua Weraroa 

Bob  Beezley  me  William  H.  Paki    Pukekohe 

Ben  Marshall  me  Wiremu  Tamehana  Kau Rangiriri 

Dave  Ormsby  me  Harry  D.  Marshall Gordonton 

Ngaha  Rotana  me  Ivan  Noda Glen  Murray 

Hamiora  Pohutuhutu  me  Haimona  Honetana Patetonga 

Rei  Tuhua  me  John  Apiti    Morrinsville 

Tupana  Te  Hira  me  James  Forbes   Te  Awamutu 

George  Stockman  me  Darcy  Tangihaere Te  Kuiti 

Tirua  Tukiri  me  Puhi  Harihona • Otorohanga 

WIKI  TUARUA 
Waikato  Taniwharau  Haere  Katoa  Ki  Te  Hui  Tau — Nuhaka,  H.B. 

WIKI  TUATORU 

John  Paki  me  Douglas  Whatu    Makomako 

Hare  Puke  me  Tetana  R.  Te  Hira   Hoeotainui 

Ru  Tarawhiti  me  Kio  Tarawhiti    Rangiriri 

Joseph  Berryman  me  Joe  Kingi Waingaro 

Arthur  Hill  me  Joe  Rapana Raglan 

Charlie  Hill  choose  his  own  companion ETorotiu 

Mipi  Tangihaere  me  Taiki   Piopio 

Tom  Alfred  \';ihu  me  Mapu   Urutarewa   Kopuku 

Whare  Hetaraka  choose  his  own  companion Glen  Murray 

Horoke  Heke  me  Win.  Mannering Tauwhare 

WIKI   Tl  WVHA 

James  Heperi  and   family    Piopio 

Tatana  Arona  me  Okeroa  Honetana Maukoro 

Tame     Retl     me     Walter    Turinni     Te      \wamutu 

Tame  Horotini  me  tana  wahine   Matakowhai 

Ahikaka  Pum  me  Tapahia  Te  Wheki    Whatawhata 

George  Maihi  me  Niho  Rangiawha ^.ramiro 


TE  KARERE  Aperira,  l'Ml 

Peter  Whatu  me  Horace  Forbes Whatawhata 

Here  Tangihaere  me  Winiata  Kapinga Taumarunui 

Sister  Rose  Beezley  me  Sister  Hine  H.  Paki Glen  Murray 

Charlie  Marshall  choose  his  own  companion Aria  Branch 

Thomas  Amoketi  and  family    Puketapu 

KORERO  WHAKAHAUHAU 

Kia  kaha  ki  te  whakarite  i  o  koutou  karangatanga.      Kei  te  kau- 

whautia   tenei   Rongopai   puta   noa   i  te   ao   i   mua   o   te   Mutunga.      Ko 

koutou  te  tote  o  te  whenua  ki  te  hemo  te  ha  o  te  tote  ma  te  aha  e  whai 

tikanga  tote  ai.  — Na  Henry  S.  Marshall  me  tona  Timuakitanga. 

HE  POWHIRI  HUI  PARIHA 

Ki  nga  Iwi,  ki  nga  Reo,  ki  nga  Huihuinga  Tangata;  tena  koutou 
katoa.  He  powhiri  atu  tenei  na  matou  kia  tae-a-tinana  mai  koutou 
ki  ta  tatou  Hui  Pariha  tera  ka  tu  ki  Kirikiri,  Takiwa  o  Hauraki,  a  te 
wiki  tuatoru  o  Mei,  te   17  me  te   18  o  Mei. 

No  reira  haere  mai  tatou  kite  whakarongo  i  nga  kupu  whaka-te- 
wairua,  me  nga  kupu  hou  o  te  Hui  Tau,  kia  tataria,  a  kia  whakatutu- 
kitia.  Tena  ano,  haere  mai  nga  mema  o  te  Tohungatanga,  nga  Tumuaki 
Peka,  nga  Tumuaki  o  nga  ropu  Katoa  o  te  Hahi  i  raro  i  te  whakahaere 
a  nga  Tumuaki  Peka.      Kowai  ka  mohio  ki  nga  whakahaere  o  enei  ra 

0  te  pakanga.  No  reira  haere  mai  kia  kite,  kia  rongo  ano  hoki  i  nga 
kupu  aroha,  a  to  tatou  Tumuaki  o  te  Mihana.  Heoi  ano,  kia  tau  tonu 
mai  nga  manaakitanga  a  te  Matua  i  te  Rangi  ki  a  tatou  katoa. 

Tiki   Reihana  Tumuaki   Peka. 
Toke  Watene  Tumuaki  Takiwa. 

NGA  MATENGA 

Winiata  Hikairo  Kewene 

Tenei  kua  mate  a  Winiata  Hikairo  Kewene  i  te  24  o  nga  ra  o 
Pepuere  1941.     I  mate  atu  ki  te  Hohipera  o  Akarana. 

He  qui  nga  iwi  i  tae  mai  ki  te  tangi  ki  aia — Pakeha,  Maori. 

1  puta  etahi  kupu  papai,  aroha  hoki  ia  te  Timuaki  Mihana,  ia  Kauri, 
i  a  Hori  Watene  me  William  R.  Perrott.  Na  te  Mayor  o  Onehunga, 
a  Mr.  A.  Garside  etahi  kupu  mihi.  Na  Teito  Tangataiti. 

Francis  Matthew   (Kohu) 

I  mate  a  Fran.  Matthew  tamaiti  tane  tuatoru  a  Rihi  Matthew 
(Hall)  o  Tauranga.  No  te  7  o  nga  ra  o  Pepuere  i  whara  i  tana 
mihini  mahi  (tractor)  i  aia  e  mahi  ana  i  nga  taru  paahi  i  runga  i 
te  whenua  o  te  Pakeha.  E  rua  haora  i  muri  o  te  aitua  ka  kitea  e 
takoto  ana  i  raro  i  tana  mihini,  kua  maru  te  tinana.  E  mohio 
nuitia  ana  tenei  tamaiti  i  waenganui  o  tona  iwi,  i  pa  mamae  hoki 
tona  matenga  ki  tona  hapu  kia  Xgati-ranginui.  E  rua  tekau  ma 
rima  tonu  una  tau.  e  toru  ana  tamariki. 

Hei  tohu  tenei  kia  tatou,  kore  rawa  tatou  e  mohio  ki  te  haora 
e  hau  kotia  ai  to  tatou  haere  i  tenei  ao,  na  reira  kia.  mau  tonu  o  tatou 
ringaringa  ki  te  tokotoko  rino. 

Haere  e  tama  ki  te  Kai-hanga.  O  matou  roimata  hei  whaka- 
mahara  i  o  tika,  i  o  he.  Ko  te  Ariki  to  tatou  piringa.  Ko  Ia  he 
horoi  atu  i  o  tatou  he.  Na  Hori  Hooro. 


Aperira,  1941  TE   KARERE  623 

HOANI  TE  WHATAHORO  TIURI 

Na  Tuati  Meha 

Koia  tenei  tetahi  o  nga  kaumatua  i  a  ia  te  matauranga  i  heke  J 

!  iho   i  nga   Whare   Wananga.      Te   whakapapa  i   a   ia,   nga  korero  | 

\  o  nehe  i  a  ia,  me  te  mita  o  te  reo  i  a  ia.      Ka  korero  ana  tenei  ♦ 

!  kaumatua  i  roto  i  nga  hui,  kore  rawa  e  rangona  he  turituri,  huri  J 

\  tonu  atu  te  mata  o  te  tangata  ki  a  ia,  me  te  taringa  ki  te  whaka-  | 

♦  rongo.     Ko  te  kohatu  whakamaharatanga  ki  a  ia,  ko  ana  puka-  ♦ 
j  puka  "Te  Kauwae  Runga"  me  te  "Kauwae  Rare" 

I  tu  ia  i  etahi  turanga  nunui  a  te  Kawanatanga,  ara,  i  tu  » 
Ateha  ia  i  roto   ite   Kooti  Whenua   Maori. 

I   tona   kitenga   i   te   marama,   i  te   tika,   i   te   hangai   o   nga  J 

I      tikanga  o  te  Hahi  e  huaina  hetia  nei  e  te  ao,   ko  te  Hahi  Momona,  | 

|     ki  nga  whakaakoranga  i  roto   ite   Paipera,   ka  uru   mai   raua   ko  j 

J      tana  wahine  ki  roto  ki  te  Hahi.      Koia  tetahi  tangata  marama  ki  j 

♦  te  korero   i   ona  tikanga.  I 

TRAVELLING  TO  HUI  TAU 

Due  to  the  conditions  that  prevail  it  is  our  lot  that  our  trans- 
port to  Nuhaka  shall  in  the  majority  be  by  rail. 

Arrangements  have  been  finalised  with  the  Railways  Department 
that  all  people  travelling  to  Hui  Tau  will  receive  a  reduction  of  20 
per  cent,  of  the  ordinary  fare  to  Nuhaka  from  whatever  station 
they  leave. 

The  Ngapuhi  people  are  leaving  from  the  North  on  the  8th 
April,  which  is  a  Tuesday.  They  will  spend  that  night  in  Auckland 
(probably  at  the  Maori  Hostel),  and  leave  Auckland  on  the  afternoon 
express  at  about  three  o'clock  in  the  afternoon,  Wednesday,  9th. 
All  intending  passengers  from  localities  that  connect  with  the  Main 
Trunk  line  are  advised  to  enquire  at  your  nearest  railway  station 
about  trains  to  connect  with  the  3  p.m.  express  from  Auckland,  Wed- 
nesday, April  9th.  Special  carriages  are  reserved  for  yon.  These 
carriages  will  go  right  through  to  Napier  from  Auckland,  where 
the  first  change  will  be  made  to  another  train. 

Passengers  who  are  not  travelling  by  this  train  from  PalmerstOE 
North  to  Napier  are  advised  that  the  train  from  Napier  to  Nuhaka 
will  not  leave  Napier  until  after  the  arrival  of  the  Wellington-Napier 
Express,  which  is  due  in    Napier  at   about    5   p.m. 

Special  certificates  already  signed  by  President  Cowley  will  be 
made  available  to  all  who  intend  travelling  by  train  to  Hui  Tau. 
These    forms    must    be    signed    and    properly    tilled    in    by    the    person 

going  to  the  llui  and  then  given  in  at  vmir  railway  station.    This 

form   entitles   you    to   a    20   per   cent,    reduction    in    your    fare    return 

to  Nuhaka.     Your  fare  to  llui  Tau  will  be  one-fifth  cheaper  than 
the  ordinary  fare. 

Don't  miss  the  train.    There  won't  be  much  waiting  for  anyone. 

Be   at    the   Stations   on    time.      The   main    thing    to    remember      not    to 
miss   the   tram. 


TE   KARERE  Aperira,  1941 

"  Blessing  —  Mother  " 

By  Win.  Mannering 

We  all,  T  think,  arc  apt  to  take-  our  greatest  blessings  for  granted 

and  notice  more  the  less  important.  Among  our  greatesl  material 
blessings  are  such  things  as  light,  heat,  water  and  numerous  neces- 
sities that  are  ours  from  time  to  time — and  good  mothers.  Being 
almost  universal — good  mothers — they  are  nol  fully  realised  and 
appreciated  until  lost.  Who,  for  instance,  can  realise  the  blessing 
of  sight  so  well  as  he  who  lost  it — the  blind?  Just  so,  no  one  realises 
the  blessing  of  a  good  mother  except  he  who  has  lost  his. 

Mothers  themselves  sometimes  do  not  fully  realise  their  own 
importance  in  the  scheme  of  life  or  they  would  surely  he  more  care- 
ful, hoth  in  regard  to  their  own  health  and  in  their  example  to  those 
over  whom  they  exert  such  a  great  influence.  This  is  perhaps  the 
result  of  the  humility  that  great  love  brings;  and  what  love,  save 
that  of  our  Heavenly  Father  can  exceed  that  of  a  mother.  Paul's 
definition  of  charity  (love)  as  given  in  Corinthians  can  seldom  he 
fulfilled  by  any  human  love  except  a  mother's,  all  others  seem  to  he 
tainted  with  selfishness  or  mixed  with  gratitude  in  comparison. 

There  is  no  "give  or  take"  in  her  love,  it  is  all  "give."  Any 
other  human  love  may  he  killed  by  ill-treatment,  but  that  of  a  mother 
seems  at  times  to  he  almost  increased  by  it.  We  have  probably  all 
heard  of  fathers  who  have  cast  off  their  children  for  some  reason  or 
other.  but  seldom  indeed  do  we  hear  it  of  a  mother. 

Did  you  ever  wonder,  as  I  have,  when  reading  the  parable  of 
the  Prodigal  Son,  what  his  poor  mother  thought  of  it  all.  There 
was  evidently  no  need  to  mention  her.  We  know  how  she  must 
have  felt  about  it. 

Our  Saviour  yearning  over  His  people  in  Jerusalem  likened 
Himself  to  a  hen  wishing  to  gather  her  chicks  under  her  wings  for 
comfort  and  protection,  but  they  would  not.  The  hen.  although 
a  symbol  of  timidity  will  face  and  defy  the  invader  and  destroyer  in 
defence  of  her  brood.  Such  is  all  mother  love.  "By  faith  we  are 
saved."  and  by  faith  we  may  move  mountains,  yet  Paul  says  love  is 
a  greater  thing  and  no  earthly  love  is  so  pure  and  great  as  that  of 
our  mother's.  Shall  we  not  then  try  to  appreciate  it  more  and 
deserve  it  better;  and  love  and  honour  and  obey  them  while  they  are 
yet   with  us. 

You  who  are  daughters,  treat  your  mothers  as  you  would  wish 
your  children  to  treat  you.  Confide  in  them  and  trust  them  above 
all  other  humans ;  there  is  no  trouble  or  difficulty  you  can  encounter 
that  they  cannot  understand  or  sympathise  with,  for  they  were  girls 
once  themselves.  We  who  are  sons,  let  us  treat  our  mothers  as  they 
deserve ;  our  best  is  not  good  enough  for  the  worst  of  them.  Treat 
all  girls  and  women  as  you  would  wish  other  men  to  treat  your 


Aperira,  1941  TE   KARERE  625 

mothers  and  sisters  or  future  wives.  To  the  shame  of  our  sex  it  has 
been  truly  said  that  "man  gets  and  forgets,"  while  "woman  gives 
and  forgives." 

Let  us  do  more  of  the  giving  and  forgiving. 

Remember,  our  mothers  have  gone  to  the  very  gates  of  death, 
some  of  them,  alas,  through  those  gates,  that  we  might  have  our 
earthly  bodies  with  all  the  opportunities  that  they  afford  us. 

You  who  are  mothers  and  future  mothers,  try  to  realise  the 
responsibilities  and  privileges  that  you  bear  as  mothers  of  the  race. 
Your  children  are  the  "temples  of  the  Lord"  on  earth  and  your  influ- 
ence on  them  is  greater  than  all  other  human  influences  added 
together.  YOU  build  their  foundations.  You  are  the  models,  let 
us  say  into  which  the  molten  metal  is  poured  and  by  the  time  they 
leave  you,  your  imprint  is  there  for  good  or  ill.  Other  influences 
may  modify  or  alter  them  a  little,  corners  may  be  knocked  off  or 
rough  places  plastered  over  by  environment,  but  the  general  shape 
and  article  is  yours.  "Train  up  a  child  in  the  way  he  should  go  and 
when  he  is  old  he  will  not  depart  from  it." 

SPECIAL— "Te  Karere"  Salesmen!  ! 

♦ 

The  response  to  the  call  issued  in  the  last  "Karere"  did 
not  measure  up  to  expectations.      However,  kindly  accept  the        » 
publishing  of  your  names  here   as  a   "Call — Mission"  for  the 
period  designated  from  March  15th  to  April  14th,   1941 — just        { 
one  month.      Your  assistance  is  urgently  desired  and  our  aim        | 
is  ONE  THOUSAND  paid  subscriptions  by  the  14th  April,  1941. 
We  need  every  subscriber  oossible.      Seek  the  co-operation  of 
the  Branch  Presidents,  which  it  is  their  duty  to  extend  in  try-        I 
ing  to  put  "Te  Karere"  into  every  home  of  the  Saints. 

Your    slogan    is:    "ONE    THOUSAND    SUBSCRIPTIONS 
BY  HUI  TAU."     Now  go  to  it. 

Salesmen:    Paepae    Witehira,    Wharepouri    Heke,    Miriata 
Karaitiana,  Tetana  Te  Hira,  Kate  Ngakuru,  Kura  Ngakuru,  Pat 
WiHongi,  Lois  Going,  John  Paki,  Mita  Watene,  Roy  Matthews,         » 
Joe  Kohu,  Tipi   Kopua,   Wi  Clark,  Tuheni  Pohatu,  Taylor   Mi- 
haere,  Olive  Edwards,  Elsie  Loader,  Ruby  Thompson.  Polly  Wi         | 
Neera,  Zena  Stent,  C.  A.  Stinson,  Waaka  Enoka.  Rang]  Haeata,        ♦ 
Weringa    Naera,    Alice    Scott,    Emily    Mark,    Beatrice    Dalziel, 
Don  Ross,  A.  Dudley  Amadio,  Marjory  Jarkman,  Marie  Tangye. 

Begin  your  campaign  now  in  your  own  branches.     At  llui 
Tau  I  would  like  to  personally  meet   all   "salesmen"  at   your 

earliest    convenience   on    Friday,    April    Llth,   and    will   there  give 
you  detailed  in  format  ion  regarding  our  position  as  subscriptions 

on  our  "One  Thousand  Mark  Barometer"  that  we  may  all  do 
more  intensive  campaigning  during  the  Hui. 

To    the    Saints    and    "Tc    Karere"    Readers:      Please    do    H01 
COme    t<>    Him    Tan    without    the    wherewith    to    assist    us    in    this 

campaign.     Thank  \<>u  very  much. 

K.  Harris, 


626 


TE    KARERE 


Aperira,  1(M1 


A  Discussion  on  Prayer 


Elder  Peterson 


By  Phillip  Peterson 

Elder  Phillip  Peterson  arrived  in  New  Zealand  De- 
cember 23,  1938,  and  leas  released  October  22.  1940,  when 
he  left  these  shares  in  company  with  Elders  who  were 
asked  to  return  to  Zion.  His  fields  of  labour  were  ll'airau. 
Taranaki,  Auckland,  Wellington,  Dunedin  and  Christ- 
church,  working  mostly  with  the  Pakeha  people,  but  also 
having  in  his  heart  the  "aroha"  for  the  Maori  people. 

Men  who  believe  in  God  believe  in  prayer. 
It  is  man's  oldest  means  of  securing  aid,  inspiration, 
revelation  and  comfort  from  God.  Prayer  is  not 
only  the  means  of  gaining  help,  but  it  provides  the 
means  of  restoring  contact  with  Deity  after  aliena- 
tion through  disobedience  and  sin.  Just  as  physical 
exercise  is  necessary  for  bodily  health,  so  prayer  is  spiritual  exercise 
that  keeps  man's  soul  in  good  health.  As  President  Grant  once  said, 
"When  men  stop  praying  for  God's  spirit,  they  place  their  confidence 
in  their  own  unaided  reason,  and  they  gradually  lose  the  spirit  of  God." 

As  a  Church,  we  cannot  doubt  the  validity  of  prayer.  The  greatest 
proof  of  the  efficacy  of  prayer  is  the  existence  of  this,  the  restored 
Church  of  Jesus  Christ.  The  organization  of  the  Church  has  its  incep- 
tion in  the  answer  to  the  prayer  of  the  fourteen-year-old  boy,  Joseph 
Smith.  In  a  like  manner  was  the  knowledge  of  the  Book  of  Mormon 
revealed.  The  Lord  answered  the  prayer  of  Brigham  Young  by  show- 
ing to  him  in  a  dream  the  goal  of  the  westward  trek  of  the  Saints. 
So  it  was,  when  President  Young  beheld  the  Salt  Lake  valley,  he  said 
with  absolute  confidence,  "This  is  the  Place."  We  believe  in  continu- 
ous revelation,  revelation  given  as  it  has  always  been  given,  in  answer 
to  the  prayer  of  faith. 

To-day,  the  world  has  need  to  follow  the  admonition  "Return  unto 
me,  and  I  will  return  unto  you  saith  the  Lord  of  Hosts."  Judgments 
that  come  upon  the  world  are  conditional.  The  people  themselves  are 
responsible  for  the  calamities  that  befall  them,  but  when  they  repent 
and  turn  unto  the  Lord,  He  hears  their  prayers.  One  of  the  most  not- 
able instances  of  the  efficacy  of  prayer  by  a  nation  occurred  during 
the  American  Civil  War.  In  the  dark  days  of  1863,  made  terrible 
by  defeats,  heavy  taxation,  low  government  credit,  and  army  desertions, 
a  national  prayer  day  was  called  on  April  30,  1863.  The  turning  point 
of  the  war  came  in  July  at  the  Battle  of  Gettysburg,  and  from  then  on, 
the  war  was  almost  a  continual  series  of  victories  for  the  Union. 
In  his  proclamation,  Lincoln  said:  "We  have  received  the  choicest  bless- 
ings of  heaven;  we  have  been  preserved  in  peace  and  prosperity  these 
many  years ;  we  have  grown  in  numbers,  strength,  wealth  and  power 
as  no  other  nation  has  ever  grown.  But  the  great  difficulty  of  our 
nation  is,  we  have  forgotten  God.  And  we  have  vainly  imagined  in 
the  deceitfulness  of  our  hearts  that  this  unusual,  outstanding  success 
that  has  come  to  our  country  has  been  due  to  some  superior  wisdom 
or  virtue  of  our  own."  I  believe  this  quotation  is  equally  applicable  to 
us  of  this  day. 

Some  look  on  prayer  only  in  a  crisis  or  when  things  go  wrong. 
They  remind  one  of  the  little  girl  who  announced:  "I'm  not  going  to 
say  my  prayers  to-night,  nor  to-morrow  night,  nor  the  next  night. 
Then  if  nothing  happens,  I'm  never  going  to  say  them  again."  Real 
prayer  is  more  than  a  bedside  "gimme";  more  than  something  to  turn 
to  in  emergencies.  It  is  the  spirit  we  infuse  into  our  normal  daily 
lives.      That  this  spirit  is  lacking  to-day  is  only  too  apparent  and  the 


Church  of  Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-day 
Saints 

1941  HUI  TAU 

52nd  ANNUAL  CONFERENCE 

Nuhaka,  H.B.,  April  1144th,  1941 


DEDICATION 


To  the  men  and  women,  numbering  more  than  one  thousand,  who, 
during  the  past  sixty  years,  have  come  to  New  Zealand  from  their 
homes  in  America  to  serve  God  by  serving  their  fellow-men,  this  Hui 
Tau  programme  for  1941  is  respectfully  dedicated. 

For  the  first  time  in  the  history  of  the  Mission  a  Hui  Tau  will  be 
convened  without  the  attendance  of  Zion  Elders.  They  will  be  missed 
by  all,  but  not  forgotten  by  any.  The  hearts  of  all  of  us  will  be 
turned  to  them  on  this  occasion  and  their  hearts  will  be  turned  to  us. 

For  the  salvation  these  missionaries  have  brought  to  our  shores  let 
us  honour  them  by  deeds  of  righteousness ;  let  us  renew  the  covenants 
we  have  made,  through  baptism  at  their  hands,  to  the  Saints  of  the  Most 
High  God.     God  bless  their  memory. 

— Matthew  Cowley,   Mission  President. 

HUI    TAU    BOARD 

Matthew  Cowley  (Mission  President),  Rahiri  Harris  (Chairman), 
George  Watene  (Secretary),  Tema  Kewene,  Hirini  Christy,  Henare  I'. 
Wihongi,  Henare  Marshall,  Wiremu  Karaka,  Eriata  Nopera,  Eru  Kupa, 
Hohepa  Heperi,  Henare  Hamana,  Turi  Ruruku,  Tuati  Meha,  Tirua 
Tukiri,  Whati  Mihaere,  Eruera  Taurau,  Hone  Paki. 

GENERAL  AUTHORITIES 

FIRST   PRESIDENCY 

Heber  J.  Grant,  Prophet,  Seer,  Revelator  and  Presidenl  of  the 
Church  of  Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-day  Saints;  .1.  Reuben  Clark,  Jr.,  First 
Counsellor  in  the  Firsl  Presidency ;  David  0.  McKay,  Second  Coun- 
sellor 'm  the  First   Presidency. 

COUNCIL  OF  THE  QUORUM   OF  THE  TWELVE   APOSTLES 

Rudger  Clawson    (President),   Reed  Smoot,  i  Smith, 

George    F.    Richards,    Jo  eph    fnelding    Smith,    Stephen    1..    Richards, 
Richard    li.    Lyman,   John    A.    Widt  F.    Merrill,   Cha 

Callii .   Albert    E.   Bowen,  \    Cannon. 


ACTING  PATRIARCH  TO  THE  CHURCH 

George  F.  Richards 
The  Counsellors  in  the  First  Presidency,  the  Twelve  Apostles,  and  the 
Acting   Patriarch   to   the    Church    as    Prophets,    Seers    and    Revelators. 

THE  FIRST  COUNCIL  OF  THE  SEVENTY 

Rulon  S.  Wells,  Levi  Edgar  Young,  Antoine  R.  Ivins,  Samuel  O. 
Bennion,  John  H.  Taylor.  Rufus  K.  Hardy,  Richard  L.  Evans. 

PRESIDING   BISHOPRIC 

LeGrand  Richards,  Presiding  Bishop;  Marvin  O.  Ashton,  First 
Counsellor;  Joseph  L.  Wirthlin,  Second  Counsellor. 

NEW  ZEALAND  MISSION  GENERAL  AUTHORITIES 

Matthew  Cowley,  President;  Elva  T.  Cowley,  Supervisor  of  All 
Women's  Auxiliary  Organisations;  George  Watene,  Secretary;  Kelly 
Harris,  Editor  of  "Te  Karere." 

AUXILIARY  ORGANIZATIONS 

Sunday  School. — Hohepa  M.  Meha,  Superintendent;  Eru  T.  Kupa,  1st 
Assistant  Superintendent;  James  R.  Elkington,  2nd  Assistant  Super- 
intendent; Kelly  Harris,  Secretary. 

Relief  Society. — Pare  Takana,  President;  Ani  L.  Kamau,  1st  Coun- 
sellor; Erena  Hepere,  2nd  Counsellor;  Ida  M.  Smith,  Secretary. 

Primary  Association. — Elva  T.  Cowley,  President;  Waima  Davies,  1st 
Counsellor;  Rona  V.  Attenborough,  2nd  Counsellor  and  Secretary. 

Y.M.M.I.A. — Wi  Duncan,  President;  S.  R.  Tapsell  Meha,  Secretary. 

Y.W.M.I.A. — Una  Thompson,  President;  Heni  Tengaio,  1st  Counsellor; 
Wiki  Katene,  2nd  Counsellor;  Annie  W.  Meha,  Secretary. 

Genealogical  Society. — Tuati  Meha,  President;  William  R.  Perrott,  1st 
Counsellor;   Teao   Wirihana,   2nd   Counsellor   and   Secretary. 

DISTRICT   PRESIDENTS 

Hohepa  Heperi,  Bay  of  Islands;  Henare  P.  WiHongi,  Whangarei ; 
William  R.  Perrott,  Auckland;  Henry  S.  Marshall,  Waikato;  Mane 
Taurau,  Manawatu-Wairarapa;  Toke  Watene,  Hauraki ;  Eriata  Nopera, 
Hawke's  Bay;  Hirini  Christy,  Mahia;  Henare  Hammon,  Poverty  Bay; 
Turi  Ruruku,  Wairau. 


DAILY  SCHEDULE 

THURSDAY,  April  10 
ARRIVAL   DAY. 
KAI— Noon. 

M.I.A.  Board  Meeting  time  announced. 
DANCE — 9  p.m.    (Sponsored  by  Hui  Tau  Board.) 


FRIDAY,  April  11 

5.30  a.m.— MORNING  KARAKIA. 

7.00  a.m.— KAI. 

8.00  a.m.— GENERAL  M.I.A.  COMPETITORS'  MEETING.  (L.D.S. 
Hall.)  All  M.I.A.  competitors  and  members.  No  tennis 
to  go  on  until  after  this  meeting. 

TENNIS  COMPETITIONS  commence  immediately  after  above  meeting 
and  continue  throughout  the  day;  also  Saturday  and  Mon- 
day. There  must  be  no  playing  of  tennis  during  any 
Session  of  Conference. 

SPECIAL  NOTICE — The  events  of  this  day  may  at  any  time  be  sus- 
pended at  call  of  Mission  President.  The  time  that  is  lost 
due  to  such  action  will  not  in  any  way  affect  any  other 
event  unless  Mission  President  so  directs.  The  whole 
Conference  Schedule  is  subject  to  change  at  any  moment, 
the  order  for  so  doing  being  the  responsibility  of  Mission 
President. 

The   following   M.I.A.    Competitions   will    commence    at   the    time 
announced  by  M.I.A.  officials: — 

DRAMA,  ELOCUTION,  in  L.D.S.  Hall. 

ORATIONS    (Men  and  Women),  RETOLD  STORY  in  Chapel. 

12.00  noon — KAI. 

M.I.A.  SINGING  COMPETITIONS  in  L.D.S.  Hall. 

Quartettes,  Trios,  Choruses  and  Solos. 

5.00  p.m.— KAI. 

7.30  p.m.— PRIMARY    PROGRAMME    in    L.D.S.    Hall. 


SATURDAY,  April   12 

6.00  a.m. — MORNING  KARAKIA  to  be  conducted  in  Sleeping 
Quarters. 

7.00   a.m. — KAI. 

8.00  a.m. — MISSION  SECRETARY  to  meet  with  all  Branch  and  Dis- 
trict Presidencies  with  their  Secretaries.  IMPORTANT. 
PRIMARY  MEETING  for  Officers  and  Teachers  of 
Branches  and  Districts. 

10.00   a.m.— OPENING    GENERAL    SESSION    OF    CONFERENCE    in 
L.D.S.  Hall. 

12.00  noon — KAI. 

LOO  p.m.— MUTUAL  OFFICERS  AND  TEACHERS'  Meeting  with 
all  Branch  and  District  workers.  All  Presidents  and  Coun- 
sellors   under    direction    of    Y.M.    and    Y.W.'s    Presidents. 

Wi   Duncan  and   Una  Thompson.     All   Secretaries  under 

direction     of     Tapsell     M<  ha     and     Annie     \Y.     Meha.       All 

Teachers  and  Class  Leaders  under  direction  of  Heni  Te- 

and  w iki  Katene.     All  Scout  Leaders  and  Explorer 

Teachers  under  direction  of  Richard  Marsh,     All  Musical 

Leaders   UTl  ler   direction    of    Wi    Pere    Atnaru. 


SfcZA^S?^^  ^^^?S^^ 


2.00  p.m.— SECOND    GENERAL    SESSION    OF    CONFERENCE    in 
L.D.S.  Hall. 

5.00  p.m. — KAI. 

6.00— p.m.— M.A.C.    OLD    BOYS'    ASSOCIATION    REUNION.      All 

former  students  are  requested  to  attend. 

7.30  p.m.— M.I.A.  PROGRAMME  in  L.D.S.  Hall. 

M.I. A.  Competitions  to  follow.  Maori  items,  Action 
Songs,  Pois,  Hakas,  etc. 

SUNDAY,    April    13 

6.30   a.m. — MORNING   KARAKIA   in    Sleeping   Quarters. 

7.00  a.m.— KAI. 

8.00  a.m.— GENERAL  PRIESTHOOD  SERVICE  in  L.D.S.  Hall. 
GENERAL   RELIEF   SOCIETY   SERVICE  in   Chapel. 

10.00  a.m.— THIRD  GENERAL  SESSION  OF  CONFERENCE  in  L.D.S. 

Chapel.  (Sunday  School  Programme  with  the  Auckland 
District  Choir  in  attendance.)  Theme  of  the  Sunday 
School:  "Our  Homes  and  Chapels  shall  be  Beautiful." 

12.30  noon— SUNDAY  SCHOOL  OFFICERS  AND  TEACHERS'  MEET- 
ING in  Chapel. 

2.00  p.m.— FOURTH    GENERAL    SESSION    OF    CONFERENCE    in 

L.D.S.  Hall. 
4.00  p.m. — KAI. 
7.00  p.m.— CONCLUDING  GENERAL  SESSION  OF  CONFERENCE 

in  L.D.S.  Hall. 


MONDAY,    April    14— SPORTS   DAY 

6.30   a.m. — MORNING   KARAKIA   in   Sleeping   Quarters. 

7.00  a.m.— KAI. 

8.30  a.m.— GRAND  M.I.A.  SPORTS  PARADE  for  all  M.I.A.  members 
in  their  Branch  Colours.  The  Parade  is  an  M.I.A. 
Competition. 

COMPETITIONS— 

Gleaners —  220Yds.    Sprint. 

Basketball    (5    a-side).  440Yds.   Relay    (4   in  team). 

75Yds.   Sprint.  880Yds.  Dash. 

lOOYds.   Obstacle  Race.  Hop,  Step  and  Jump. 

400Yds.  Relay   (4  in  team).  High  Jump. 

Explorers—  ^Velin  ThJ?Wn- 

75Yds.   Sprint.  Throwing  the  Discus. 

lOOYds.    Sprint.  bhot-put. 

440Yds.  Relay    (4  in  team).        Junior  Girls — 

Men 50Yds.    Sprint. 

Wood-chop.    (Entrance  fee  7/6)        220Yds.  Relay  (4  in  team). 

Horseshoe  Pitching.  75 Yds.    Skipping.      (Bring    own 

Tug-o'-War   (8  a-side).  rope.) 

lOOYds.    Sprint.  Basketball   (7  in  team). 


Aperira,  1941  TE   KARERE  627 

reason  is  primarily  the  lack  of  family  prayers  in  the  home.  In  a 
survey  among  school  children,  it  was  found  that  only  one  child  in  eight 
came  from  homes  that  participated  in  daily  family  prayers  and  that 
in  only  35  per  cent,  of  the  homes  was  a  blessing  asked  upon  the  food. 
Church  leaders  have  ever  emphasized  the  necessity  of  family  prayer. 
A  sacred  responsibility  rests  upon  parents  to  see  that  this  is  carried  out 
and  to  teach  their  children  to  pray.  Parents  must  remember  that 
before  they  can  teach  their  children  to  pray,  they  must  first  have  prayer 
in  their  own  hearts.  "Let  your  first  good  morning  be  to  your  Father  in 
Heaven."  A  prayer  is  a  condition  of  the  soul  and  need  not  be  audible. 
Secret  prayer  is  a  medium  through  which  we  can  get  help  and  com- 
fort at  any  time.  Our  lives  should  be  such  that  we  can  ask  God  to 
help  us  in   anything  we   are   doing. 

Prayer  should  be  more  than  always  asking  for  something,  it  also 
is  an  opportunity  to  offer  thanks  for  past  blessings.  In  human  rela- 
tions, failure  to  express  appreciation  for  a  kindness  rendered  is  almost 
unpardonable;  it  is  more  than  fitting  to  express  our  appreciation  to 
our  Heavenly  Father,  our  best  friend.  The  spirit  of  prayer  should 
ever  govern  our  actions  in  the  religious  field.  Through  prayer  we  are 
promised  a  testimony  of  the  Book  of  Mormon;  that  the  "prayer  of 
faith  shall  save  the  sick";  and  "If  any  of  you  lack  wisdom,  let  him 
ask  of  God."  Prayer  is  the  greatest  aid  to  righteous  living;  as  one  man 
has  expressed  it,  "Praying  keeps  us  from  sinning,  sinning  keeps  us 
from  praying." 

There  is  no  reason  to  leave  the  spirit  of  prayer  out  of  the  business 
world.  The  essence  of  prayer  is  essentially  that  of  "love  thy  neigh- 
bour"; such  a  spirit  would  raise  business  transactions  to  the  highest 
level.  The  prophet  Alma  says:  "Cry  unto  him  over  the  crops  of  your 
field,  that  ye  may  prosper  in  them;  Cry  over  the  flocks  of  your  fields, 
that  they  may  increase."  But  he  goes  on  to  say  if  we  pray  and  then 
"ye  turn  away  the  needy  and  the  naked,  and  visit  not  the  sick  and 
afflicted  and  impart  of  your  substance,  if  ye  have,  to  those  in  need, 
I  say  unto  you,  if  ye  do  not  any  of  these  things,  behold,  your  prayer 
is  vain,  and  availeth  you  nothing,  and  ye  are  as  hypocrites  who  do 
deny    the    faith." 

Faith  that  God  hears  and  answers  prayers  is  a  source  of  never- 
failing  strength.  Unless  we  have  that  faith  it  is  useless  to  pray,  for 
"He  that  cometh  to  God  must  believe  that  He  is  and  that  He  is  a  re- 
warder  of  them  that  diligently  seek  Him."  And  that  faith  must  be 
of  the  active  type,  we  must  put  forth  our  own  efforts  as  well  as  asking 
for  the  Lord's  aid.  It  is  unfortunate  that  the  phrase  "Thy  will  be 
done"  has  come  to  be  associated  with  a  sort  of  spiritual  non-resistance. 
The  emphasis  should  be  placed  on  doing  rather  than  being  done  to. 
This  is  the  spirit  of  a  Scotch  preacher  who  once  explained  that  he  prayed 
as  though  everything  depended  on  God  and  then  worked  as  though 
everything  depended  on  himself.  Such  a  conception  of  prayer  makes  it 
a  vital,  dynamic  force.      "Thy  will  be  done — and  done  by  me." 

In  the  world  to-day,  there  is  a  definite  need  for  a  return  to  prayer 
and  the  prayerful  attitude  in  life.  Let  us  not  forget  the  words  of  the 
Saviour:  "Ask  and  it  shall  be  given  you;  seek  and  ye  shall  find;  knock, 
and  it  shall  be  opened  unto  you.  For  everyone  that  asketh  receiveth; 
and  he  that  seeketh  findeth;  and  to  him  that  knocketh  it  shall  be 
opened." 

*  *  * 

"The  Spirit  of  the  Lord  will  no1  always  strive  with  man.  And 
when   the   Spirit   ceaseth   to   strive   with   man   then   cometh   speedy 

destruction." — 2  Ncphi  26:11. 


628 


TE   KARERE 


Aperira,  1941 


PICTURE  OF  THE  MONTH 

Among  this  assemblage  are  many  familiar  faces  still  constantly- 
seen  at  Auckland  Branch  meetings,  however  there  are  still  many  who 
have  been  absent.  We  are  indebted  to  Sister  Eva  Hunt  for  this  photo- 
graph, which  brings  back  to  memory  the  associations  with  President 
Jenkins  and  his  family  and  a  few  others  who  have  since  migrated 
to  Zion. 


APPRECIATION 

President  Cowley  and  myself  do  sincerely  appreciate  the 
assistance  given  Te  Karere  staff  since  the  Elders  returned 
to  Zion.  Your  efforts  in  personally  helping  in  the  publish- 
ing, posting  and  other  necessary  work  that  has  made  the 
publishing  of  Te  Karere  possible  during  the  past  months 
shall  go  down  in  the  annals  of  this  Mission  as  Te  Karere 
workers,  people  to  whom  the  Saints  throughout  the  Mission 
are  indebted,  for  your  labour  has  been  that  of  love  and  service. 

Marie  Tangye,  Sybil  Duckworth,  Marie  Harris,  Harold 
Stokes,  Marjory  Jackman,  Edward  Reid,  Matthew  Tarawa, 
Mateen  Jensen  and  the  staff  of  Business  Printing  Works 
(Mr.  Apperley,  Jack,  George  and  Geoff.),  we  sincerely  thank 
you  and  say  that  what  reward  you  receive  will  come  from 
on  High. 

It  is  our  pleasure  and  wish  to  also  express  our  appre- 
ciation for  the  very  good  work  of  Te  Karere  correspondents 
and  contributors. 


Aperira,  1941 


TE   KARERE 


629 


SUNDAY  SCHOOL 


Andante. 


PRELUDE 


After  Cowex. 


gppppg-n 


mmm 


SACRAMENT  GEM 

While  of  these  emblems  we  partake 

In  Jesus'  name  and  for  His  sake, 

Let  us  remember  and  be  sure 

Our  hearts  and  hands  are  clean  and  pure. 

POSTLUDE 

Soft  9ft  stop 


mmm 


m^m^mimm 


CONCERT  RECITATION 

Doctrine  and  Covenants  84:106. 

"And  if  any  man  among  you  be  strong  in  the  Spirit,  let  him 
take  with  him  him  that  is  weak,  that  he  may  be  edified  in  all  meekness, 
that  he  may  become  strong  also." 

KORERO  A  NGAKAU 

Akoranga  me  nga  Kawenata  84:  106. 

"A  ki  te  mea  kei  waenganui  ia  koutou  tetahi  tangata  e  toa  ana  i 
runga  i  te  Wairua,  mana  e  tango  i  te  tangata  ngoikore  hei  hoa  mana 
kia  whai  pai  ai  ia  i  runga  i  te  mahaki,  kia  manga  ai  ia  he  mea  toa 
ano  hoki." 

HYMNS 

"Beautiful    Mountain    I  Ionic"    I 'age    U)2 

"He  Wa  Tona"   Wharangi  50 


630  TE   KARERE  Aperira,  1941 

PRIMARY 


MEMORY  GEM: 


"In  the  night  or  in  the  day 
Heavenly  Father  hears  us  pray.' 


LESSONS: 


FIRST  WEEK 
OUR  HEAVENLY  FATHER'S  CARE 


Objective: 

Our  Heavenly  Father  will  protect  us  if  we  put  our  trust  in  Him. 

Suggestions    for   Teaching: 

One  of  the  great  opportunities  which  come  to  the  teacher  of  small 
children  is  that  of  helping  the  child  learn  to  pray.  This  she  does  by 
building  an  attitude  of  appreciation  for  the  things  near  him  that  make 
him  happy.  The  teacher  should  in  a  kindly  way  encourage  the  child 
to  say  the  prayer  by  himself  no  matter  how  short  and  simple  it  may  be. 
Having  the  child  stand  close  to  her  with  a  loving  arm  pressed  closely 
around  him  will  give  confidence  and  encouragement.  Sometimes  a 
timid  child  may  be  encouraged  to  respond  if  the  teacher  says,  "If  you'll 
try,  I'll  help  you." 

Prayer  pictures  will  help  in  the  approach. 

Lesson   Story: 

DANIEL  IN  THE  DEN  OF  LIONS 

Ever  and  ever  so  long  ago,  there  lived  in  Jerusalem  a  prince  named 
Daniel.  He  had  a  dear  mother  who  loved  him.  She  taught  him  just  what 
he  should  do.  She  told  him  about  Heavenly  Father  and  how  He  wanted 
every  one  to  pray  to  Him  three  times  a  day — in  the  morning  and  at  noon 
and  at  night.  So  Daniel  did  pray  to  Heavenly  Father  three  times  every 
day.  His  mother  also  told  him  what  he  should  eat  and  drink  to  be  strong 
and  healthy. 

You  remember  that  Daniel  was  one  of  the  four  brave  princes  that 
was  taken  from  his  home  in  Jerusalem  to  Babylon  by  a  king.  Because 
Daniel  looked  so  strong  and  well  he  was  taken  to  the  King's  palace  to 
live.  He  was  among  a  strange  people  and  in  a  strange  land  but  he  was 
a  brave  boy.  He  remembered  what  his  mother  had  said  and  would 
eat  only  things  to  make  him  strong.  He  remembered  his  prayers,  too; 
so  that  when  he  was  a  man  he  was  strong  and  wise.  It  was  the  very 
strongest  and  wisest  man  in  the  kingdom  that  the  king  needed  to  help 
him  rule  the  people.  The  king  had  set  a  great  many  princes  over  the 
people.  Over  these  princes  he  set  three  presidents  and  he  chose  Daniel 
to  be  the  first  president.  Daniel  could  do  much  more  for  the  people 
because  he  asked  Heavenly  Father  to  help  him.  That  made  the  princes 
and  presidents  angry,  and  they  tried  to  find  out  something  bad  about 
Daniel  to  tell  the  king.  But  Daniel  was  honest  and  faithful  and  they 
could  find  nothing  about  him  that  was  not  good. 

Then  they  made  a  wicked  plan.  They  knew  that  every  morning 
and  evening  and  in  the  middle  of  the  day,  Daniel  opened  his  window 
facing  towards  his  old  home,  and  prayed  to  Heavenly  Father,  just  as 
he  had  done  ever  since  he  was  a  boy.  So  the  presidents  and  the  princes 
met  together  and  went  before  the  king.  "King  Darius,  live  forever," 
they  said.  "Will  you  make  a  law  that  whosoever  shall  pray  to  God 
or  to  a  man,  for  thirty  days,  save  to  thee,  0  king,  he  shall  be  cast  into 
the  den  of  lions."  It  pleased  the  king  to  think  that  everyone  would 
be  praying  to  him,  so  he  signed  the  wicked  law. 


Aperira,  1941  TE   KARERE  631 

Daniel  read  the  new  law  and  knew  it  could  not  be  changed.  It 
meant  that  if  he  knelt  down  to  pray  he  would  be  put  in  the  den  of  lions. 
What  do  you  think  he  did?  He  went  into  his  house  and  opened  wide 
the  windows  facing  towards  the  country  where  his  home  was.  There 
he  knelt  down  and  prayed  and  gave  thanks  to  God.  That  night  he  did 
the  same  thing  and  again  the  next  morning.  He  could  have  left  the 
windows  closed,  but  he  was  not  ashamed  to  have  anyone  see  him  pray, 
and  he  was  not  afraid.  The  presidents  and  the  princes  were  watching 
and  when  they  saw  Daniel  kneeling  beside  the  window,  and  heard  his 
prayer,  they  hurried  to  the  king. 

"0  king,  hast  thou  not  made  a  law,"  they  said,  "that  every  man 
who  prays  to  any  God  or  man  for  thirty  days,  save  to  thee,  shall  be  cast 
into  a  den  of  lions?" 

The  king  answered,   "The  thing  is  true." 

Then  they  said,  "Daniel  obeys  thee  not.  He  is  praying  three 
times  every  day  for  we  have  seen  and  heard  him." 

The  king  was  very  unhappy  when  he  heard  this,  for  he  loved  Daniel. 
He  wanted  to  save  his  friend  but  the  law  was  made  and  he  could  not 
change  it. 

With  a  heart  full  of  sorrow  the  king  sent  Daniel  to  the  lion's  den. 
The  door  was  opened  and  Daniel  walked  in  unafraid.  The  king  was 
very  sad  when  he  said  to  Daniel,  "The  God  whom  thou  serveth  con- 
tinually, He  will  save  thee." 

The  king  went  back  to  his  palace,  but  he  could  not  eat,  nor  listen 
to  music,  he  was  so  unhappy.  All  night  he  lay  awake  and  thought  of 
Daniel.  The  next  morning  early  he  went  to  the  lion's  den  and  called, 
"Daniel,  0  Daniel,  servant  of  the  living  God,  is  thy  God,  whom  thou 
servest,  able  to  deliver  thee  from  the  lions?"  He  listened  for  a 
moment.  In  a  loud,  strong  voice  Daniel  said:  "0  king,  live  forever. 
My  God  hath  sent  His  angels,  and  shut  the  lion's  mouths,  that  they  have 
not  hurt  me." 

The  king  was  filled  with  gladness.  He  sent  for  his  servants  to 
come  and  open  the  door,  and  Daniel  walked  out.  Then  the  king  made 
another  law.  He  sent  word  to  all  his  people  to  pray,  as  Daniel  did, 
to  the  Heavenly  Father. 

Conversation  After   the   Story: 

What  did  the  king  think  of  Daniel  who  had  courage  to  pray  be- 
cause he  knew  it  was  right?  What  will  our  friends  think  of  us  if  we 
stand  for  the  right?  What  is  the  very  best  way  to  begin  our  day 
right?  What  is  the  best  way  to  close  our  day?  What  may  we  expect 
if  we  ask  our  Heavenly  Father  to  watch  over  us  and  protect  us? 

SECOND  WEEK 

THE   BEAUTIFUL  WORLD 
Object: 

To  help  the  children  to  appreciate  the  beautiful  things  our  Heavenly 
Father  has  made  for  us. 

Let  them  look  through  the  window  and  name  the  things  they  can 
see.  The  trees,  the  mountains,  the  ice  and  snow  which  give  them  sleigh- 
ing and  coasting.  In  some  places  they  may  see  trees,  flowers,  birds 
and  beautiful  gardens.  If  this  is  not  possible  use  pictures  or  poems. 
Talk  about  the  goodness  of  our  Heavenly  Father  in  giving  us  so  many 
lovely  things.      Say  the  poem: 

"All  things  l»right  and  beautiful, 

All  creatures  great  ami  small. 

All  things  wise  and  wonderful, 
The  Lord  God  made  them  all." 


632  TE   KARERE  Aperira,  1941 

Lesson   Story: 

THE  CREATION 

What  makes  this  great  world  so  beautiful?  The  lovely  sunshine, 
the  rivers,  the  trees  and  flowers,  the  birds  and  animals — oh,  I  am  sure 
you  could  tell  me  many  more  things.  Long,  long  ago  Heavenly  Father 
knew  He  would  need  a  place  for  His  children  to  live,  so  He  began  to 
make  the  world. 

Once  there  was  no  daytime.  It  was  all  night.  Father  in  Heaven 
knew  that  the  people  would  not  be  happy  if  it  were  always  dark  so 
He  said  "Let  there  be  light,"  and  there  was  light.  And  God  called  the 
light  day  and  the  darkness  night. 

Heavenly  Father  knew  that  His  children  would  need  rest,  there- 
fore He  planned  to  have  the  darkness  come,  so  that  they  might  have 
a  long  restful  sleep  and  wake  up  bright  and  fresh  the  next  beautiful 
day.  Who  else  needs  rest?  Even  the  flowers  wouldn't  grow  so  well 
if  the  sun  shone  all  the  time.  Some  flowers  close  at  night  and  wait 
for  the  sunbeams  to  awaken  them.  Can  you  tell  me  a  flower  that  does 
this?      Some  leaves  close  at  night  also. 

But  Father  in  Heaven  didn't  leave  it  very  dark  all  the  time.  What 
did  He  make  to  shine  in  the  sky  at  night?  The  moonlight  is  so  beauti- 
ful! Have  you  seen  it  sparkling  on  the  snow,  so  brightly  that  there 
seemed  to  be  diamonds  shining  on  the  ground?  Heavenly  Father  was 
so  good  to  give  us  the  moon.  Ask  mother  if  you  may  go  out  of  doors 
and  see  the  moon  when  it  is  full.  Or  you  may  look  through  the  win- 
dow and  see  it.  And  be  sure  to  look  at  the  lovely  stars,  too!  How 
many  stars  did  He  make?  More  than  we  can  count.  When  you  look 
at  the  moon  and  the  stars,  will  you  remember  to  say  these  lovely  words : 
"God  our  Father  made  the  night, 
Made  the  moon  and  stars  so  bright." 

Then  Heavenly  Father  made  the  sun  to  give  us  light  by  day.  Tell 
me  some  of  the  things  the  sun  does  for  us. 

Then  Heavenly  Father  made  heavens  and  earth  and  the  great  seas 
of   water.      (Have   pictures   to   illustrate.) 

In  the  earth  there  were  many  tiny  seeds  of  all  the  trees  and  bushes 
and  flowers.  But  they  did  not  spring  up  because  the  ground  was  hard 
and  dry. 

So  God  caused  a  soft,  warm  mist  to  come  up  from  the  earth  to 
water  all  the  ground.  The  mist  made  the  ground  soft  and  warm 
and  the  seeds  sent  up  little  shoots  which  grew  tall  and  green.  There 
were  trees  and  bushes  and  flowers  and  grass  and  all  the  lovely  growing 
things.  (Ask  the  children  to  name  some  of  the  trees  and  flowers  they 
know;  talk  about  their  beauty  and  uses.  Show  pictures  of  beautiful 
places.) 

When  the  flowers  began  to  bloom,  and  the  grass  began  to  grow  in 
the  fields  Heavenly  Father  made  the  fishes  to  live  in  the  rivers  and 
seas.  Then  He  made  the  birds  to  fly  in  the  air  and  then  all  the  animals. 
(Let  the  children  tell  the  names  and  uses  of  the  animals.  Show 
pictures.) 

When  the  earth  was  all  made  and  ready  Heavenly  Father  sent  the 
very  first  people  to  live  on  the  earth.  You  see  He  made  everything 
for  His   children  that  they  might  be  happy. 

Conversation  After  the  Story: 

Have  you  ever  been  to  a  very  beautiful  place  with  your  father  and 
mother?  (Let  the  children  tell  of  trips  to  parks,  gardens,  lakes  or 
ocean.)  Whom  did  you  think  of  when  you  saw  big  mountains?  Beauti- 
ful flowers? 


Aperira,  1941  TE   KARERE  633 

THIRD  WEEK 

WHY  PEOPLE  LIKE  YOU 
Objective: 

The  surest  way  of  holding  friends  is  through  simple  acts  of  kindness. 

Suggestions    for    Teaching: 

It  will  be  well  to  review  again  the  lessons  given  on  the  third  week 
of  the  previous  months.  The  last  lesson  "How  Do  You  Act,"  should 
tie  very  closely  with  this  one.  These  lessons  should  be  helpful  to  boys 
and  girls  alike.  Both  need  development  along  these  lines.  There  is 
a  lack  of  courtesy  in  many  of  our  children  that  needs  correction. 

If  in  your  preparation  you  find  that  there  is  too  much  material 
suggested  for  this  lesson  choose  that  which  you  like  best  and  make 
your  lesson  plan  accordingly. 

Strive  for  interest,  enrich  your  lessons  with  pictures  and  personal 
experiences  and  your  problems  in  discipline  will  decrease  in  proportion. 

Lesson    Approach: 

Think  of  some  one  whom  you  like  very  much.  Don't  tell  his  or 
her  name.  Now  tell  why  you  like  that  person.  (Teacher  write  reasons 
on  the  board  or  large  piece  of  paper.  You  will  probably  find  that 
your  list  will  include :  cheerfulness,  friendliness,  cleanliness,  unselfish- 
ness, a  readiness  to  help,  etc.)  Think  now  of  some  one  who  is  not 
so  pleasant  and  whom  people  do  not  like  so  well.  What  makes  them 
unpleasant?  (Make  another  list  and  you  will  no  doubt  find  that  it 
will  include :  selfishness,  untidiness,  frowning,  complaining,  etc.  Look 
at  the  lists  with  the  children  and  you  will  observe  that  most  children 
like  cheerful  boys  and  girls  and  do  not  a  selfish  one,  etc.) 

If  you  have  been  going  around  with  a  frown  on  your  face,  try 
to  smile  oftener.  Little  "But  Then"  made  everyone  happy  because 
she  was  happy. 

Let  the  children  say: 

"Be  happy  all  day  long 
Each  day  you'll  find  it  true. 
That  he  whose  heart  has  joy  and  song 
Gives  joy  to  others,  too." 


Lesson  Story: 


THE  SILVER  SKATES 


"Hurry  up!"   shouted   Gretchen.      "It's  almost  time  to   be  there." 

"Yes,  yes,"  replied  Hans,  "I  am  coming  soon;  just  wait  until  I  can 
fmd  my  skates." 

Soon  the  two  children  were  scurrying  through  the  streets  of  a 
little  Dutch  town  toward  the  canals.  Ice  was  everywhere  that  January 
day,  and  the  daily  papers  had  announced  that  it  was  thick  enough  for 
the  thousands  of  people  who  were  to  look  on  at  the  skating  contest, 
an  annual  event,  in  which  only  the  children  took   part. 

What  a  merry  scene  it  was.  Every  yard  of  the  three-mile  run 
was  lighted  by  crackling  fires;  banners  waxed  in  the  breezes,  and  little 
booths  had  been  erected  where  the  hungry  and  thirsty  might  find  hot 
cakes  and  warm  drinks. 

The  start  for  the  race  in  which  Gretchen  and  Hans  were  to  take 
part  lay  opposite  one  of  these  booths,  and  the  first  bell  had  already  rung 

when   they    came    t<>    t  he    .anal. 


634  TE   KARERE  Aperira,  1941 

"Skates  on!"  rang  out  a  loud  voice,  and  a  hundred  children  stooped 
and  fastened  on  their  skates. 

How  bright  and  excited  they  all  looked,  for  was  not  the  prize 
to  be  a  pair  of  silver  skates,  the  finest  ever  seen? 

"Three  miles  and  back,"  rang  out  the  voice  of  the  manager  again. 
"Turn  at  the  blue  flag  and  skate  back  to  the  starting  point." 

"My,  what  a  long  distance,"  said  an  American  who  had  come  many 
miles  to  see  the  famous  race  of  the  children. 

"O,  that's  nothing  for  a  Dutch  girl  or  boy,"  said  a  man  standing 
near.  "What  would  you  think  of  twenty-five  miles  and  back?  That's 
something  like;  but  they  are  brought  up  to  it,  you  know." 

"Hark!"  Another  bell,  then  the  word,  "go!"  and  off  start  the 
children,  all  clad  in  loose-knitted  blouses,  baggy  trousers,  with  gay- 
coloured  caps  upon  their  heads! 

With  hearts  beating  rapidly,  Gretchen  and  Hans  began  the  return 
trip.  Their  round  faces  were  red  and  glowing,  and  the  sparks  fairly 
flew  from  the  irons  of  their  skates.  They  turned  not  to  the  right  nor 
left,  but  went  straight  to  the  mark,  while  the  other  skaters  were  far 
in  the  rear;  in  fact,  most  of  them,  had  given  up  the  race  long  ago. 

Only  a  mile  separated  them  from  the  booth  where  they  had  started 
— a  half  mile — a  few  yards — when  suddenly  with  a  crash,  a  fall,  and 
poor,  little  Gretchen  lay  with  her  face  to  the  cold  ice. 

"Just  a  yard  more  and  she  would  have  won!"  exclaimed  the  Ameri- 
can again,  as  Hans  turned  to  help  his  little  playmate.  Gretchen  was  a 
brave  child,  for  had  she  not  behind  her  a  race  of  brave  and  hardy 
people?  Although  she  had  stumbled  on  the  hard  ice  and  was  badly 
hurt,  not  a  tear  was  shed. 

"It  is  yours!"  she  cried,  as  she  tried  to  rise.  But  Hans  shook  his 
head.  "No,  Gretchen,"  he  said,  "the  silver  skates  are  yours.  You 
were  ahead  when  you  fell,  I  could  not  have  won,  anyway,"  and  he 
helped  her  forward  to  the  booth  where  lay  the  prize  in  its  beautiful 
red  velvet  case. 

"They  are  yours,  my  little  man,  and  bravely  won,  said  the  manager 
to   Hans,  heartily. 

Without  a  word  Hans  took  the  silver  skates  and  handed  them  to 
Gretchen.  Gretchen  was  so  happy  she  didn't  know  whether  to  laugh 
or  cry.  As  they  walked  away  together  the  great  crowd  set  up  a  shout 
for  Hans  who  was  so  unselfish. 

Conversation   After   the   Story: 

Do  you  think  Hans  really  wanted  the  skates  for  himself?  What 
proved  that  he  did?  When  he  gave  them  to  Gretchen  what  did  that 
prove?  Could  you  have  done  it?  You  needn't  answer  aloud,  just  think 
about  it. 

FOURTH  WEEK 

COURAGE  TO  DO  THE   RIGHT 
Objective: 

If  we  sincerely  try  to  do  right,  our  Heavenly  Father  will  help  us. 

Suggestions  for  Teaching: 

The  truth  to  be  taught  through  this  lesson  is  one  that  should  be 
impressed  early  in  the  life  of  the  child.  Consider  it  carefully  and  be 
sure  that  you  believe  it  yourself.  Perhaps  you  can  think  of  personal 
experiences  that  will  prove  it.  There  are  many  heroes  in  the  world, 
some  have  shown  great  courage  in  battle,  some  have  risked  their  lives 

(Continued  on  page  36) 


Church  of  Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-day  Saints 


MISSIONARIES 
from  ZION  .  .  . 

since  the  arrival  of 
Pres.  Matthew  Cowley 


^1 


Matthew  Cowley 


Eleanor  J.  Cowley  Elva  T.  Cowley  Don  L.  Cotterell 


M  .  M  .  I'.Ai    MGARTNER  (  r.   M  .  RAMSEV 


\\  .  M.  Mali 


?!S^^H^^S^^^%^^S^^^^^ 


^^^S^^p^^^^^,^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ 


J.  R.  Blackmore 


L.  F.  Toronto 


J.  V.  Haslam 


E.  Newman 


R.  A.  LAMBERT 


F.  W.  Aldous 


R.  L.  Cardwell 


C.R.  Jones 


T.  P.  Wheelwright 


S^^H^^S^^^^^^^^^^^^^H^^^^^^r  1 


M.  J.  Udy,  Jr. 


A.  H.  Lambert 


G.  P.  Langtox 


H.  R.  RURNINGHAM 


J.  M.  BODELL 


B.  T.  Wride 


I).  M.  Evans 


V.  M.  Bi 


II.  \\.  KlRKU  VM 


C.  B.  Mason 


W.  .W.  Goodwill 


G.  C.  Fredkickson 


W.  D.  Brown 


L.  G.  Dastrup 


C.  R.  Jones 


R.  L.  Simpson 


J.  B.  Grant 


R.  E.  Crandall 


s? 


Kl 

Pi 

SH    m 

■fl 

Llk 

A.  H.  Wallace 


I.  J.  Price 


T.    R.    Kindred 


L.  D.  Saunders 


C.  H.  Felt 


R..E.    I!  V.MAS 


r 


r  7  W  ««  r 


I).   V.  Taylor 


\\  .  E.  M  \\\ 


^Hs^^S^^Hs^  \^ 


R.  L.  Beasley 


W.  J.  Anderson 


M.  C.  Wheeler 


1  If— 1 

y  MB 

■mm    M 

O.  W.  Owens 


W.  E.  Smith 


D.  B.  Crawford 





■llllllllllllllllllllillllllllllillilllllllllllllflllll 
G.  R.  Beisinger 


A& 


, 


C.  D.  Kirkland 


W.  Westenskow 


Z.  P.  Murdock  E.  W.  Campbell 


W.  Grange 


E.  B.  Bigler  R.  C.  Midgley  Jr.  K.   C.   Pendleton 


A.  B.  F 


M.  .1.  Smi 


I).  M.  Handy 


H.   D.    COBBLEY 


M.  E.  Lewis 


D.  B  EEC  HER 


C.  S.  Johnston 


P.  Peterson 


H.  HOLLINGWORTH 


D.  G.  Parker 


J.  T.  Later 


E.  A.  Hutchinson 


L.  G.  Whitney 


C.  T.  Fawson 


L.  W.   Lynn 


f  fc_ 


D.    W.    Curtis 


A.  J.  Keddington 


ill 
G.  S.  Henderson 


■mffiiiiiiifliiniiiiii iiiiiiiiiiiiimiiiMiiiiiiM  m^^^^ 


-.....:■■.:.;,■  ■...■.-..■.  :;, 


I).  A.  Harri: 


W!»... 


I.I.      \lli  N 


^^#? 


V^T  griffe  4Mb  *^J 

G.    M.   Acomb  M.  M.  Browning  J.  B.  Jam 


H.   D.   Brown  A.  V.  Stirling 


L.  D.  Allen 


^ 


C.  L.  McBride 


L.  W.  Watts 


W.   S.   Ottley 


Aperira,  1941 


TE  KARERE 


635 


President  M.  Charles  Wood,  Ki.ii.m    Wood,  and  Janei 


BOUND  VOLUME  OF  "  TE  KARERE,"   1940 

A  limited  number  of  bound  volumes  of  the  L940  issue  of 
Te  Karere  will  soon  be  available.  Place  your  orders  as  soon 
is  possible  with  Te  Karere,  Box  72,  Auckland. 


636  TE   KARERE  Aperira,  1941 

(Continued  from  page  34) 

to  save  others  in  floods,  fires  and  storms,  and  have  done  it  without 
complaint  and  without  wishing  for  a  reward.  But  there  are  greater 
heroes  than  these.  The  boy  or  girl  who  can  do  his  or  her  daily  duty 
in  the  right  way,  never  afraid  to  do  what  is  right,  no  matter  what  the 
result  may  be,  and  without  complaining,  is  braver  than  those  who  do 
daring  deeds.  The  very  best  kind  of  courage  is  that  kind  that  never 
fears  to  do  right.     The  only  thing  to  be  really  afraid  of,  is  doing  wrong. 

Lesson  Story: 

THREE    PRINCES    WHO    SHOWED    COURAGE 

Our  last  Bible  story  was  about  Daniel,  one  of  the  four  boys  who 
was  taken  from  his  home  to  the  country  of  the  king  who  prayed  to 
images  of  wood  and  stone. 

This  story  is  about  King  Nebuchadnezzar  and  Daniel's  three  friends, 
Meshach,  Shadrach  and  Abednego.  They  had  become  great  men  now, 
and  helped  the  king  rule   over  the   country. 

Nebuchadnezzar  was  a  very  rich  king  and  had  princes  and  rulers 
for  his  servants.  These  servants  wanted  to  please  their  King  so  they 
praised  him  and  told  him  how  great  he  was. 

Nebuchadnezzar  heard  himself  praised  so  much  that  very  soon 
he  began  to  think  only  of  his  own  riches  and  power  and  forgot  all  about 
our  Heavenly  Father.  Then  he  did  just  the  same  thing  that  many  kings 
before  had  done.  He  built  a  gorgeous  image  of  shining  yellow  gold. 
He  set  it  on  a  plain,  a  field  with  no  trees  on  it.  Then  he  called  all 
the  most  important  people  in  the  kingdom,  the  princes,  the  governors 
and  the  rulers,  to  come  and  see  the  image  he  had  set  up.  From  all  the 
country  round  they  came,  and  when  they  were  gathered  together  they 
stood  before  the  great  image. 

Among  them  were — whom  do  you  think?  Yes.  Shadrach,  Me- 
shach and  Abednego.  The  Bible  does  not  say  that  Daniel  was  there. 
He  was  probably  in   another  part  of  the  country. 

On  one  side  of  the  great  image  there  wrere  men  with  musical  instru- 
ments. They  were  not  playing,  they  were  waiting  and  listening  to 
hear  what  the  king  wanted  them  to  do  in  honour  of  his  wonderful  image. 
Soon  a  messenger  of  the  king  came  out  before  the  people.  He  called 
in  a  loud  voice  that  all  might  hear:  "To  you  it  is  commanded,  0  people, 
that  at  what  time  ye  hear  the  sound  of  any  kind  of  music,  ye  fall  down 
on  your  knees  and  worship  the  golden  image  that  Nebuchadnezzar, 
the  king,  hath  set  up.  And  whosoever  falleth  not  down  and  worshippeth 
shall  the  same  hour  be  cast  into  the  midst  of  a  burning  fiery  furnace." 
The  king  gave  the  command.  The  musicians  began  to  play,  and  as 
soon  as  the  music  was  heard  by  the  people,  they  all  fell  down  and  wor- 
shipped the  golden  image  that  Nebuchadnezzar  had  set  up.  I  said  "all," 
but  there  were  three  who  did  not  bow  down  to  the  image.  They  stood 
up  straight  and  looked  before  them.  Can  you  tell  their  names?  They 
heard  the  music  and  they  knew  the  punishment  which  would  come  to 
those  who  disobeyed.  But  these  good  men  would  not  obey  the  king 
for  they  loved  God,  our  Heavenly  Father,  and  would  worship  no  other. 

Some  of  the  princes  went  near  to  the  king  and  said:  "O  king,  there 
are  certain  men  thou  hast  set  over  part  of  thy  kingdom,  Shadrach, 
Meshach  and  Abednego.  These  men  have  disobeyed  thee.  They  do 
not  serve  thy  gods,  nor  worship  the  golden  image  which  thou  hast 
set  up." 

Then  Nebuchadnezzar  was  angry  and  commanded  that  these  three 
men  be  brought  to  him.  He  spoke  to  them  and  said:  "Is  it  true,  O 
Shadrach,  Meshach  and  Abednego,  that  you  serve  not  my  gods  nor 
worship  the  golden  image  I  have  set  up?  Now  if  you  be  ready  when 
you  hear  the  sound  of  music  and  fall  down  and  worship  the  image 


Aperira,  1941  TE   KARERE  637 

which  I  have  made,  all  will  be  well  with  you.  But  if  you  worship  not 
you  shall  be  cast  the  same  hour  into  the  midst  of  a  burning  fiery  fur- 
nace, and  who  is  that  God  that  shall  deliver  thee  out  of  mine  hands?" 

But  they  trusted  in  their  God  and  stood  up  boldly  and  answered, 
"Our  God  whom  we  serve  is  able  to  deliver  us  from  the  burning  fiery 
furnace,  and  He  will  deliver  us  out  of  thine  hand,  O  King.  But  if  not, 
be  it  known  unto  thee,  0  King,  that  we  will  not  serve  thy  gods,  nor 
worship  the  golden  image  which  thou  hast  set  up." 

When  the  king  heard  their  brave  answer  he  was  very  angry.  He 
was  so  angry  he  commanded  that  the  furnace  be  heated  seven  times 
hotter  than  usual.  Then  he  commanded  that  the  three  princes  be  cast 
into  the  furnace. 

In  a  few  minutes  Nebuchadnezzar  called  out  to  his  men  and  said, 
"Did  we  not  cast  three  men  bound  into  the  fire?" 

They  answered,   "True,   O  King." 

Then  Nebuchadnezzar  said,  "Lo,  I  see  four  men  walking  in  the 
midst  of  the  fire  and  they  are  not  hurt,  and  the  fourth  man  is  like 
unto  the   Son   of   God." 

Nebuchadnezzar  then  went  to  the  furnace  and  cried,  "Shadrach, 
Meshach  and  Abednego,  ye  servants  of  God,  come  forth,  come  hither." 
And  they  came  out  from  the  midst  of  the  fire. 

Then  the  king  and  all  the  people  who  were  gathered  together,  saw 
the  three  men  as  strong  and  well  as  they  were  before  they  were  cast 
into  the  furnace.  They  were  not  hurt.  Not  a  hair  of  their  heads 
was  singed,  not  even  the  smell  of  fire  was  upon  them.  Then  Nebuchad- 
nezzar spoke  and  said,  "Blessed  be  the  God  of  Shadrach,  Meshach  and 
Abednego,  who  hath  sent  His  angel,  and  delivered  His  servants  that 
trusted  in  Him." 

Then  he  sent  forth  a  command  that  no  one  should  speak  against  the 
God  who  delivered  His  children  from  the  fiery  furnace. 

So  the  king  gave  even  higher  places  to  these  three  brave  men 
who  dared  to  do  right. 

STATISTICS 

BIRTHS  LOVE— To    Mr.    and    Mrs.    Luke    Love, 

WITEHIRA— To    Mr.   and    Mrs.    Paepae  a   daughter,    August    17,    1940. 

Whitehira,    a    son,    February    2,    1941,    at  HAMMOND — To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  J.  Ham- 

Kawa    Kawa.  mond,   a   son,   July    5,    1940. 

SHORTLAND — To    Mr.    and    Mrs.    John  WI    NEERA— To    Mr.    and    Mrs.    Matae 

Shortland,    a    daughter,    at    Pipiwai.  Wi  Neera,  a  son,  January   4.   1941. 

RETI — To    Mr.    and    Mrs.    Tom    Reti,    a  OSBORNE — To    Mr.    and    Mrs.    Osborne 

daughter,   February   6,   1941.  (nee  Honoria  Poananga),  a  daughter,  Julv 

TE  HIRA — To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Tupana  Te  3,    1940. 

Hira,    at    Horotiu,    a    daughter,    February  MARSH — To     Mr.     and     Mrs.     Watene 

13,   1941.  Marsh   of   Korongata.   a   daughter. 

MURPHY — To    Mr.    and    Mrs.    Murphy  CHASE — To    Mr.    and    Mrs.    George    P. 

of    Kohunui,    a    son,    January    11,    1941.  Chase,    a    son,    January     17,    1941,    at    Te 

ARTHUR — To    Mr.    and     Mrs.     Karewa  Hauke. 

Arthur    of    Porirua,    a    son,    November    3,  SMITH— To   Mr.  and   Mrs.   Dave  Smith, 

1940.  Jr.,   a    son.    December    10,    19  10. 

CHOIRS  TO  SING  DURING  SESSION  OF  CONFERENCE 

The  Sessions  of  Conference  which  commence  at  1  0  a.m.  Saturday, 
12th  April,  and  again  at  2  p.m.,  with  three  more  on  Sunday,  will  be 
the  times  when  a  choir  will  each  provide  the  music  for  the  Conference. 
The  competition  for  the  choirs  will  also  take  place  when  each  has  a 
Session. 

The  first  choir  to  take  the  stand  will  be  Nuhaka,  then  Korongata, 
Auckland    District,    Taniaki    and    Iluria    or    Ngapuhi. 

Branch  Presidents  are  here  asked  to  be  responsible  \'ov  your 
choir's  music  for  these  Sessions  of  Conference,  The  competition  num- 
ber is  the  Hallelujah  Chorus  in  Maori. 


638 


TE   KARERE 


Apcrira,  1941 


NEWS  FROM  THE  FIELD 


AUCKLAND     DISTRICT 
Reported  by  Rona  V.  Attenborough. 

Visitors  to  Auckland  during  the  last 
few  weeks  include  Sister  Isabel  Amadio, 
who  came  in  to  visit  her  father,  who  has 
been  ill.  We  were  glad  to  see  Sister 
Amadio  again,  but  sorry  that  illness  was 
the  cause  of  her  visit.  We  sincerely 
pray  that  her  father  will  speedily  recover. 
Another  visitor,  though  a  more  or  less 
permanent  one,  is  Bro.  Win  Smiler  from 
Gisborne,  who  is  attending  the  Auckland 
University  and  studying  law.  I  guess 
we  had  better  watch  our  P's  and  Q's, 
what  with  a  policeman  (Bro.  Cliff  Pente- 
cost) and  now  a  blooming — or  should  I 
say  "budding" — lawyer  in  our  midst.  Bro. 
Smiler,  by  the  way,  is  mansioned  at  the 
Mission  Home,  which  has  been  under  the 
new  management  of  Messrs.  Kelly  Harris 
and  Company  for  the  last  week  or  so, 
during  the  temporary  absence  of  Presi- 
dent and  Sister  Cowley,  who  have  been 
visiting  the  South  Island — and  I  do  mean 
South  Island,  seeing  that  Dunedin  was 
their  destination. 

Lost,  Stolen,  or  Strayed,  or  perhaps 
just  missing  from  the  precincts  of  the 
Auckland  Chapel  and  the  Mission  Home 
— the  cheery  countenance  of  Sister  Pente- 
cost, who  is  visiting  her  daughter  Cecily 
in  Wellington — we  think.  Have  a  nice 
time,  Sister  Pentecost,  but  don't  forget 
to   come  back. 

We  are  very  happy  to  report  that  Sis- 
ter Gladys  Reid  is  now  well  on  the  way  to 
recovery  after  a  nasty  illness,  and  that 
Bro.  Hemi  Paki  has  returned  to  his  home 
in    Kopuku,   Waikato. 

The  Auckland  Branch  Sunday  School 
has  been  re-organised  owing  to  the  fact 
that  Bro.  Kelly  Harris  has  been  appointed 
to  the  Mission  Sunday  School  Superin- 
tendency.  and  Brother  Chas.  Billman  is 
Acting  President,  with  Brother  Rosser 
Pprrott  and  Brother  Desmond  Billman  as 
Counsellors.  These  two  young  men  are 
dividing  their  time  between  their  mili- 
tary duties  and  the  Sunday  School,  and 
we  wish  them  success  in  both  undertak- 
ings. Expected  back  in  Auckland  is  Sis- 
ter Mar.iorie  Jackman,  who  has  been  tour- 
ing on  South  Island.  She  has  been  away 
considerably  longer  than  we  think  is  ne- 
cessary just  to  see  the  sights,  and  we 
are  wondering  what  the  added  attraction 
can  be.  However,  all  we  can  do  is  wait 
until  this  young  lady  returns  and  gives 
an  account  of  herself.  Auckland's  loss  is 
Nelson's  gain,  now  that  Brother  and  Sis- 
ter Bill  Burge  have  been  transferred  from 
here.  We  would  like  to  assure  them 
that  our  prayers  are  for  their  safe  keep- 
ing: and  their  happiness  and  prosperity  in 
thiB  new  sphere. 

Brother  Hepa  Meha,  in  training  at 
Levin  Air  Force  Camp,  is  reported  to  be 
doing  well,  but  he  misses  Auckland,  and 
we    just    cannot    imagine  why. 

The  Onehunga  Branch  of  the  Auckland 
District  is  certainly  in  full  swing,  and  be- 
lieve me  when  I  say  that  they  are  going 


to  give  a  very  good  account  of  them- 
selves at  the  coming  Hui  Tau.  There  is 
nothing  quite  so  keen  and  enthusiastic 
as  a  "Mormon"  when  he  gets  going,  and 
these  "Mormons"  have  been  going  for 
some  time — and  they  are  not  wearing  out 
either. 

Auckland  is  proud  to  announce  the 
New  Zealand  premiere  of  the  motion  pic- 
ture "Brigham  Young,"  which  will  com- 
mence at  the  Century  Theatre  on  Friday, 
March  14.  This  should  prove  an  excel- 
lent means  of  putting  Church  history  into 
the  hands  of  other  folks,  so,  Saints,  roll 
along  and  take  your  friends — if  you  are 
doubtful  about  talking  to  them,  take 
them  to  see  this  movie,  and  it  will  talk 
for  itself. 

Bro.  Ernest  Montague  (Monty  to  you) 
who  has  been  in  the  Narrow  Neck  Terri- 
torial Camp  since  last  August  or  there- 
abouts, has  been  transferred  for  overseas 
service,  and  though  it  will  be  some  time 
before  he  actually  leaves,  we  would  like 
to  assure  him  that  we  are  proud  of  our 
boys  in  uniform  who  have  answered  the 
call  of  King  and  Country,  and  we  wish 
him  the  greatest  possible  success  and 
God-speed  wherever  he  may  go.  Sister 
Nan  Montague,  however,  will  remain  in 
Auckland — I'm    afraid  ! 

Well,  I  guess  this  is  all  this  time,  so 
adieu,   kind  friends,  adieu. 

MAHIA  DISTRICT 
Reported  by   Elsie  Loader 

Nuhaka  Mutual  commenced  on  Febru- 
ary 4th  with  an  opening  social  conducted 
by  President  Eru  H.  Tengaio.  which  was 
not  attended  as  well  as  usual,  due  to  so 
many  of  the  young  people  accepting  em- 
ployment away  from  home  Practices  for 
Hui  Tau  work  have  been  going  ahead. 
Jim  Loader,  second  counsellor  in  M.I.A., 
was  confined  to  the  Wairoa  Hospital  for 
an  appendicitis  operation.  He  is  now 
home  again  but  a  little  disappointed  at 
not  being  physically  well  enough  to  take 
part  in  the  sporting  activities  of  the  Hui 
Tau. 

Tahaenui  Primary  held  another  very 
successful  bazaar,  which  further  strength- 
ened their  position  financially.  Sister  Te 
Wai  Haronga  received  appointment  as 
Teacher  of  Arts  and  Crafts  for  this 
Primary.  Kopuawhara  officers  held  a 
New  Year  gift  party  for  their  Primary 
children,  where  the  children  really  en- 
joyed themselves  as  well  as  being  happy 
over  the  gifts.  All  Primaries  in  the  dis- 
trict are  working  hard  with  their  Hui 
Tau   responsibilities. 

Greetings  to  the  Zion  Elders.  Hui 
Tau  is  here  and  your  presence  will  be 
greatly  missed,  but  we  know  that  you 
will  be  with  us  in  thought  and  prayer. 
Your  letters  and  messages  to  the  Saints 
of  this  district  have  been  greatly  appre- 
ciated. Keep  up  "our"  fine  missionary 
spirit  for  we  are  expecting  to  hear  good 
tidings  of  you.  That  is  how  you  will 
continue  to  help  us  most. 


Aperira,  1941 


TE   KARERE 


639 


The  following  were  honourably  released 
from  their  positions  in  the  Nuhaka 
Branch  Sunday  School.  Pera  Tengaio  as 
first  assistant  superintendent,  Taka  To- 
roaiwhiti  second  assistant  super.,  Perea 
Smith  as  teacher  of  the  deacon's  class. 
Appointments  were  Taka  Toroaiwhiti  to 
first  assistant  super.,  Perea  Smith  second 
assistant  super.,  Te  Wai  Haronga  teacher 
of  deacon's  class,  Mereaira  Whaanga  as- 
sistant teacher  to  the  Kindergarten  class, 
William  Winiana  assistant  teacher  to  the 
Gospel  doctrine  class  (Maori)  and  Sister 
Louie  Mataira  assistant  organist.  Sister 
Ata  Pedersen  has  been  appointed  first 
counsellor   in   the   Nuhaka   Primary. 

We  are  thrilled  to  have  another  active 
Hui  Atawhai  in  the  district.  The  Ta- 
haenui  group  are  working  under  the 
supervision  of  the  Nuhaka  Branch.  Their 
memberships  include  many  non-Mormons, 
but  display  definite  interest  and  enthusi- 
asm in  their  work,  having  already  com- 
pleted two  quilts  and  are  enjoying  their 
lesson  work.  The  Nuhaka  workers  in  the 
Belief  Society  are  very  busy  with  their 
own  Society  work  as  well  as  doing  their 
share,  and  perhaps  more,  of  the  Hui  Tau 
preparation  work.  Visitors  to  the  Hui 
are  assured  of  comfortable  places  for 
their  rest  while  at  the  Hui.  The  men 
have  been  out  gathering  in  the  wood  re- 
quired for  Conference,  having  spent  over 
a   week    in    this    project. 

Brother  Eru  Tengaio  is  to  be  heartily 
congratulated  on  his  selection  and  ap- 
pointment   to    the    Mission    M.I. A.    Board. 

Sister  Molly  Tengaio,  who  has  been 
suffering  in  the  Wairoa  and  Gisborne 
hospitals  with  inflamatory  rheumatism, 
has  now  been  transferred  to  Rotorua 
Sanatorium,  where  we  hope  she  will  re- 
cover  speedily. 

HAWKE'S   BAY  DISTRICT 

Reported   by   Olive   Edwards   and 

Taylor    Mihaere 

March  6th  was  spent  in  farewell  at 
Korongata  to  honour  Heber  "Nu"  Smith, 
who  is  home  on  final  leave.  A  large 
gathering  from  the  surrounding  villages 
and  relatives  from  Nuhaka  really  enjoyed 
themselves    in    honouring    Nu. 

This  is  to  Mutuals  in  the  district: 
Please  forward  all  reports  to  Olive 
Edwards  at  the  end  of  each  month.  Your 
co-operation  is  eagerly  sought  this  year. 
Kindly    help    us. 

Another  farewell  party  was  held  at 
Paki  Paki  in  honour  of  Ronald  Eria,  who 
was  also  on  final  leave.  People  from 
Korongata    also    did     the    honours     there. 

The  M.I. A.  Sports  Committee,  compris- 
ing  George  Randell,  Pu  Edwards,  Mane 
King]  and  Pera  Tengaio,  convened  on  the 
9th  March  to  finalise  the  Hui  Tau  sport- 
ing activities.  The  report  points  to  a  very 
satisfactory  meet. 

Sister  Harriet  Reid  is  a  patient  of  the 
Napier  Hospital  after  an  operation  ,  for 
peritonitis.  At  present  her  condition  is 
favourable.  (We  are  praying  for  your 
speedy  r. -co  very ,  Harriet.  Sell]  and 
Man'.',    the    same    goes    tor    yon     loo.    Ka.) 

Brother    Eta     Puriri     was     rushed    to    the 


Memorial  Hospital,  Hastings,  on  March 
8th  for  an  appendicitis   operation. 

Luxford  Walker  of  Tahoraiti  gained  a 
University  Scholarship  while  attending 
the  Dannevirke  High  School,  which  has 
enabled  him  to  attend  'Varsity  at  Dun- 
edin,  incidently  Nitama  Paewai,  his 
cousin,  gained  the  same  scholarship  a 
year  ago  from  Dannevirke  and  is  in  his 
second  year  at  Dunedin.  Nitama,  while 
at  Dannevirke  High  School,  gained  the 
honour  of  being  the  first  Maori  to  be 
Head  Prefect  of  the  School.  Luxford  was 
also  a  Prefect.  Both  of  these  young 
men  attained  very  high  scholastic  hon- 
ours, and  we  wish  them  continued  attain- 
ment in  their  various  fields  of  learning. 
A  farewell  for  Luxford  was  well  attended 
by  his  many  friends  and  relatives,  where 
all  enjoyed  the  many  items  that  were 
given.  Among  the  presentations  made 
was  one  on  behalf  of  the  Branch  by  Bro. 
Wi   Duncan. 

The  Tamaki  choir  is  working  so  well 
that  they  may  be  represented  at  Hui  Tau 
under  the  direction  of  Richard  Marsh,  as- 
sisted by  Wi  Duncan.  We  are  also  pleased 
that  our  "Wi"  Duncan  has  been  ap- 
pointed Mission  M.I. A.  president  for  the 
men. 

The  Tahoraiti  Maori  Scout  Troop  at- 
tended the  memorial  service  at  Danne- 
virke for  the  late  Lord  Baden  Powell, 
World  Chief  Scout,  on  February  23rd. 
March  1st  was  spent  picnicking  with  the 
Primary  and  School  children.  The  suc- 
cess of  this  day  will  be  remembered  by 
all  who  attended.  We  do  thank  and  ap- 
preciate the  efforts  of  the  School  Com- 
mittee and  teachers,  along  with  Primary 
officers,   for  making   such   a   day   possible. 

Another  farewell  was  held  March  6th 
in  honour  of  Smiler  Nikora,  John  Tatere, 
Ron  Chase,  Barney  Rautahi,  Claude 
Nicholson  and  Bob  Hoterini,  who  were  on 
final  leave  before  service  overseas.  The 
evening's  entertainment  was  under  the 
able  supervision  of  Karauria  Wirihana 
as  M.C.  Wiremu  Mihaere  made  suitable 
presentations  to  the  "boys"  from  the 
people. 

WAIKATO    DISTRICT 
Reported    by    Dave    Ormsby    and 
Douglas    Whatu 
A   very   successful   Hui   Pariha    was    re- 
cently   held    at    Puketapu,    Huntly,    where 
the     new    District     President,     headed     by 
Henry   S.    Marshall,   was   to   supervise   the 
work.      It   was    regrettable,   however,    that 
President    Marshall    was    unable    to    he    in 
attendance    and    personally     conduct     his 
Hui,     this     responsibility     fell     upon     the 

shoulders      of      Tetana      R.      Te      Hira      and 

George    Stockman,    his    counsellors,    with 

Bro.    Tetana    conduc  !  inn:. 

Many  visitors  blessed  ns  with  their 
presence.  The  Hawke's  Hay  people  were 
certainly  appreciated,  among  them  were 
Eriata  Nopera,  Stuarl  Meha.  Teao  Wiri- 
hana,   Wiremu    Mihaere.    Tare  Takana.    Kma 

Nopera.    Taratl    Pera,    Huihul    Pera    and 

Sister  Hapiiku,  while  many  came  from 
I  In       rlaurakl     and     Auckland     districts. 

The  meetings  of  the  Hui  were  very 
Well    carried    out.        The    Saturday    evening. 

meetings  commenced  with  Sister  Scotl   In 


640 


TE   KARERE 


Aperira,  1941 


charge  (Primary),  then  followed  the 
Mutual  with  Sister  Mihi  conducting.  The 
Sunday  services  were  the  same  as  is 
usual    in    most    Hui    Pariha(s). 

The  people  who  attended  were  certainly 
rewarded  for  their  attendance  in  hearing 
the  various  speakers,  particularly  so  with 
messages  given  by  President  Cowley. 

Greetings  are  not  necessarily  associated 
with  the  ushering  in  of  a  New  Year,  no 
reira,  the  Editor  of  the  "Messenger"  of 
good  tidings  —  Kia  ora  mai  koe  —  Greet- 
ings. Readers  take  note,  you  are  not 
left  out  in  the  cold — come  in  and  share 
the  greetings. 

The  next  three  months  should  see  the 
completion  of  a  modern,  well-equipped 
hostel  for  visiting  Maoris  to  Hamilton, 
particularly  those  who  may  travel  long 
distances  to  see  people  who  may  be  in 
hospital.  All  preliminary  preparations 
are  well  nigh  completed,  and  when  erected 
the  hostel  will  serve  as  a  testimony  to 
the  tireless  efforts  of  the  principal  mover 
of  the  project — Sister  Whatu  of  Frankton. 

The  call  to  the  country's  service  is 
still  taking  away  the  young  men  of  the 
district,  among  whom  are  many  church 
members.  We  trust  they  will  accept  our 
sincere  hopes  and  wishes  for  their  safe 
return. 

Brother  John  Paki  of  Matakowhai  has 
recently  been  confined  to  bed  as  the  re- 
sult of  an  abscess  in  the  leg  which  was 
timely  taken  in  hand,  and  we  are  glad 
to  report  that  he  is  now  back  with  his 
family  after  spending  his  bed-ridden  days 
— weeks   in   Hamilton. 

Dr.  Stork  of  the  "realms"  never  misses 
his  yearly  visit  to  the  family  of  Brother 
and  Sister  Tom  Reti.  Congratulations 
are   in   order. 

While  we  are  on  this  subject,  any  who 
might  be  interested  in  matrimony  are 
advised  that  the  district  is  now  provided 
with  an  agent  with  ability  and  power  to 
join  in  holy  wedlock.  Don't  be  bashful 
in  your  aspirations  and  give  this  agent 
plenty  of  time  to  allow  him  travelling 
from  place  to  place  in  the  performance 
of    his    duties. 

CHRISTCHURCH 
Reported   by    Ruby   Thompson 

Christchurch  has  been  silent  since  the 
return    of    the    Elders.  There    were    no 

meetings  until  last  Wednesday,  March 
5th,  when  members  of  the  Relief  Society 
met  at  the  home  of  Mrs.  McMillan,  who 
is  a  friend  of  Church  members.  We  de- 
cided to  continue  our  Relief  Society  work 
and  try  and  keep  in  touch  with  members 
and  friends  of  the  Church.  We  are  all 
pleased  to  have  Sister  Evelyn  Perriton 
(recently  baptized  in  Dunedin)  here  with 
us  and  hope  that  she  will  be  as  happy 
here   as   we   are  to   have   her. 

We  rejoice  in  having  our  young  secre- 
tary, Anita  Wilson,  with  us  again.  Anita 
was  in  hospital  for  quite  a  time  and  we 
are    happy    to    see    her   looking    so   well. 

I  understand  Nitama  Paewai,  who  was 
in  Burnham  near  this  city  undertaking 
military  training,  has  now  returned  _  to 
Dunedin    to    continue   his    medical    studies. 


There  isn't  much  more  to  tell,  as  our 
numbers  are  so  few,  but  it  is  the  wish 
of  us  all  to  keep  this  branch  of  the 
Church    active. 

TARANAKI  DISTRICT 
Reported   by    Zena   Stent   and   M.   Morgan 

February  9th  marked  the  beginning  of 
her  days  as  member  of  the  Church  of 
Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-day  Saints  for 
Betty  Stent,  who  was  baptized  by  Elder 
C.  Arthur  Stinson,  who  also  performed 
the  confirmation.  Her  membership  among 
the  Saints  is  certainly  appreciated,  and 
we  hope  that  everyone  will  just  help 
everyone  else  to  enjoy  each  others  asso- 
ciation   better. 

The  N.Z.  Ladies'  Baseball  Champion- 
ships for  the  Dustin  Cup  were  held  at 
the  Cook's  Gardens,  where  three  of  our 
young  women  —  Betty  Gowan,  Zena 
Stent  and  Betty  Stent,  all  of  Southern 
Aces  participated — where,  in  the  final  re- 
sults, they  were  runners-up  to  Amazons. 
Betty  Gowan  was  chosen  from  the 
Southern  Aces  to  play  in  the  representa- 
tive   team    travelling    to    Christchurch. 

Early  in  February  Gerald  Stinson  re- 
turned to  his  parents  in  Wellington  after 
spending  some  time  with  us  here  in 
Wanganui.      We  hope  he  is   doing  well. 

The  Manaia  Branch  of  the  district  is 
still  holding  their  Sunday  School  meet- 
ings and  has  just  begun  Mutual  work, 
where  the  opening  night  was  enjoyed  by 
all. 

The  Manaia  Branch  president,  accom- 
panied by  his  daughter  Shirley,  reported 
upon  his  return  from  the  South  Island 
that  the  Hui  Pariha  he  attended  at  Pori- 
rua    was    certainly    worth    while 

WAIRARAPA 

Reported  by  Polly  Wi  Neera  and 

W.    T.    Enoka 

Sister  Moehau  Haeata  has  been  set 
apart  as  Secretary  for  the  Relief  Society 
of  the  District.  Relief  Society  meetings 
in  the  Porirua  Branch  are  held  every 
Wednesday  afternoon  and  on  the  first 
Sunday  of  each  month.  A  knitting  class 
has  been  organised,  with  Molly  Martin 
as  teacher,  where  the  members  have  de- 
cided to  knit  socks,  etc.,  for  the  boys 
serving    in   the    Maori    Batallion   overseas. 

Sister  Wiki  Katene  visited  Auckland 
last  month  to  attend  a  Hui  Pariha,  and 
reports  having  had  a  very  enjoyable 
time. 

During  January  we  were  visited  in 
Wairarapa  by  Sister  Pare  Takana  in  the 
interests  of  Relief  Society  work.  Her  visit 
with  us  has  awakened  a  new  hope  in  this 
work  among  the  womenfolk.  The  Glad- 
stone Branch  has  a  newly  organized 
society,  with  Sister  Hineteuirangi  Naera 
as  president.  Accompanied  by  Sister  Wai- 
tokorau  Tamihana  another  Relief  Society 
was  organized  in  the  Kohunui  Branch, 
with  Sister  Parekura  Saunders  as  presi- 
dent. We  feel  that  these  visits  by  Sister 
Duncan  and  Sister  Tamihana  have  created 
the  spirit  that  has  always  fostered  co- 
operative action. 


MA  NGA  KAIWHAKAAKO  £ 


"A  ki  tc  mca  kei  waenganui  ia  koutou  tetahi  tangata  c  toa  ana  i 
runga  i  tc  JJTainta,  niana  c  tango  i  tc  tangata  ngoikorc  hex  hoa  niana 
kia  what  pai  ai  ia  i  runga  i  tc  niahaki,  kia  mcinga  ai  ia  he  mca  toa  ana 
hoki.  No  rcira  nic  tango  c  koutou  nga  tangata  kua  oti  nci  tc  whaka- 
ritc  ki  tc  Tohungatanga  iti  .  .  ."   Ako.  vie  nga  Kawe  84:  106-107. 

Hei  Whakaaro   Ma   Nga  Kaiwhakaako 

Me  tino  pono  to  whai-whakaaro  mo  to  iwi.  Me  torotoro  i  nga 
wa  e  mauiwi  ana  ki  nga  matenga  hoki.  E  tika  ana  kia  mohio  koutou  ki 
nga  ahuatanga  whaka-te-\vairua,  kikokiko  hoki  kia  rite  ai  nga  rongo- 
atanga  mo  te  wairua,  tinana  mate  me  te  mate  kai. 

I  roto  i  nga  whakakitenga  mo  nga  mahi  a  nga  "kaiwhakaako" 
kahore  e  he  i  te  wa  e  torotoro  ana  koutou  ki  te  patai  ki  ia  mema 
o  nga  whanau  nga  patai  e  ahu  ana  mo  nga  whakaaro  e  whai  ake  nei : — 

1.  Kei  te  noho  tautoko  awhina  koe — 

(a)  I  to  hoa  tata  me  o  hoa  awhina  katoa? 

(b)  I  nga  Apiha  whakahere  o  te  Peka,  Takiwa  me  te  Mihana? 

2.  Kei  te  mahi  ano  koe  i  o  mahi  o  te  Hahi  ? — 

(a)  He  Mema  koe — Kei  te  haere  ano  koe  ki  o  huihuinga,  noho 
puku  me  te  utu  i  to  noho  puku,  utu  whakatekau  me  te 
awhina  mahi  i  nga  whakahaere-a-ngahau  o  to  Peka? 

(b)  He  Apiha  koe — Kei  te  pai  ano  koe  hei  tirohanga  atu  ma  o 
mema,  a  kei  te  haere  ano  koe  ki  o  huihuinga  apihatanga? 

3.  Kei  te  uru  ano  koe  ki  roto  i  nga  karakitanga  ia  ata  ia  po  a  to 
whanau,  me  te  inoi  koe  anake  i  te  wahi  ngaro  ? 

"I\TOI  NGARO" 
Te  wairua  ngakau  maru  e  tuturi  ana  me  te  piko  hopohopo  ano  o 
te  matenga,  kihai  e  roa  te  noho  i  roto  i  te  pouri  me  te  po  o  nga  mea 
whaka-te-wairua.  Ina  inoi  ngaro  ki  to  tatou  Matua  i  te  Rangi  ka 
whiwhi  ora  to  ngakau  maru,  hoa  te  mea  kotahi,  pumautanga  ki  te  mea 
e  pehia  ana,  maramatanga  ki  te  mea-haere-ke,  mana  ki  te  ngoikore. 
kaha  ki  te  kaha  me  te  mohio  tuturu  tera  te  Atua  to  tatou  Matua  e  ora 
ana,  ko  hoki  Ihu  te  Karaiti. 

He  honore  kia  noho  ko  koe  ki  te  taha  o  te  Atua  i  roto  i  te  inoi. 
E  mohio  ana  Ia  kia  tatou  ake,  kahore  kia  tatou  mohio-a-waho  noaiho. 
Ki  te  pono  tatou  e  koa  ana  Ia.  Ki  te  he  tatou  a  ka  haere  ki  a  Ia  i 
roto  i  te  ngaro,  a  i  reira  i  roto  i  te  reo  o  te  ngakau  whakapuaki  i  to 
tatou  aroha  ki  a  Ia  me  te  hiahia  kia  awhinatia  tatou  e  Ia,  ka  pupu  ake 
te  aroha  Atua  i  roto  ia  Ia,  a  ki  te  korero  ka  penei,  i  roto  i  Tana  kingi- 
tanga  me  Tana  tohu  atua  ka  awhitia  tatou,  a  ka  whiwhi  i  konei  i  te 
mahana  me  te  aroha  o  Tana  tinana  tapu.  He  manawanui  Tana  tatari 
me  te  awangawanga  ano  hoki  kia  homaingia  e  Ia  te  ha  o  Tana  atua- 
langa  ki  roto  i  te  ngakau  o  te  ripeneta.  Aue,  kia  whiwhi  katoa  tatou 
ki  tenei  ahua. 

Te  inoi  o  te  ngakau  he  inoi  i  te  wahi  ngaro.  Tana  reo  he  reo  iti. 
Ia  tatou  e  tuturi  i  mua  ia  Ia  e  mohio  ana  Ia  ki  a  tatou  hiahia  katoa 
me  a  tatou  ngoikorenga.  10  inoi  ana  tatou  i  runga  i  tenei  marama- 
tanga,  kahore   he  pohehe   i    roto   i   te   inoi   ngaro. 

E  tika  ana  nga  Ilnnga  Tapu  katoa  kia  inoi  i  te  wahi  ngaro  me  te 
inoi    ano   i    roto   i   te   maha   0   te   whanau   kia    mohio   ai    nga    tamanki. 
^  Meinga  ko  te  Atua  he  hoa-korero  0  nga  mema  katoa  «.  te    Mahi.   "ko 

"Y\  to   Matua  e  kite  nei   i   roto  i   te  ngaro  ko   la  ano  ka  ntu   ia   koe  i   wae- 

*-/         nganui  i  te  maha." 


i 


€  HAfi€R€ 


Wahanga   35 


Mei,  1941  Nama   5 


Elder  Reed  Smoot  passed   this  life  February  9,  1941. 
I  \  4  ■  ■■■■■■■■■■  ^     P       ■     lllllll 


WE  REMEMBER- 


PRIL  6th,  1830.  the  Church  of  Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-        & 
dav    Saints    was    organized    at    the    home    of    Peter        ®w 


A 

Whitmer,  in  Fayette,  New  York.  The  following  six 
men  were  the  charter  members  of  the  organization — Joseph 
Smith,  Jr.,  Oliver  Cowdery,  Hyrum  Smith,  Peter  Whitmer, 
Jr.,  Samuel  H.  Smith  and  David  Whitmer.  The  ceremonies  (? 
connected  with  the  organization  of  the  Church  were  simple.  Y\ 
The  meeting  was  opened  with  "solemn  prayer."  Then  the 
Prophet  asked  the  men  present  whether  they  were  willing 
to  accept  him  and  Oliver  Cowdery  as  their  spiritual  head. 
An  affirmative  vote  resulted. 

Before  the  services  adjourned  Joseph  received  a  revela- 
tion in  which  he  was  designated  a  "seer,  prophet  and  an 
apostle  of  Jesus  Christ."  — Selected. 


Dl 


« 


4 


UE  to  the  efforts  and  love  of  Mary  Towles  Sassen  and 

Anna  Jarvis  in  creating  a  nation-wide  sense  of  appre-  (^ 

ciation  to  do  honour  to  MOTHER,  we  have  the  pri-  % 
V          vilege  and  sacred  honour  of  paying  respect  and  homage  to 

\^         our  Mothers  on  this  the  second  Sunday  in  May  of  every  year.  \A 

T\         In  your  honour.  Mother,  we  dedicate  all  that  we  ever  hope  ~V\ 
a           to  he.     It  is  fitting  that  we  bring  you  this  thought  from  the 

pen  of  Mary  Towles  Sassen:  "This  pamphlet  is  sent  forth  in  U 

the  hope  of  awakening  on  the  part  of  the  child  a  deeper  appre-  J\ 

ciation  of  her  who  is  the  central  figure  of  the  home.    May  it  X 

strengthen   the    family   bonds,   making  them   more  beautiful  yL 

and  tender.    May  it  breathe  a  hope  of  the  future  where  Ian-  J\ 

guage  is  music,  thought  is  light  and  love  is  law."  A 

*  *  *  -^ 

IN     HARMONY,     Susquehanna    County,     Pennsylvania,         *^ 
U.S.A.,   May   15th,    1829,  John  the   Baptist  appeared  to        G 
Joseph   Smith,   Jr.,   and   Oliver   Cowdery,   laid  his  hands 
upon  their  heads  and  ordained  them  to  the  Aaronic  Priest- 
hood, saying  these  words : 
^)  "Upon  you  my  fellow-servants,  in  the  name  of  Messiah, 

Ag,  I  confer  the  Priesthood  of  Aaron,  which  holds  the  keys  of 
^L  the  ministering  of  angels,  and  of  the  gospel  of  repentance, 
^)  and  of  baptism  by  immersion  for  the  remission  of  sins;  and 
(Q  this  shall  never  be  taken  again  from  the  earth,  until  the  sons 
^  of  Levi  do  offer  again  an  offering  unto  the  Lord  in  righte- 
gy         ousness."     (Doc.  &  Cov.  13.)  2 

i 


i 


/-*) 


Te  Karere 

Established  in  1907  & 

J) 
Wahanga   35  Mei,    1941  Nama   5  ^ 

Matthew    Cowley  Tumuaki    Mihana 

Kelly  Harris  Etita 

Eru   T.    Kupa       Kaiwhakamaori 

Waimate   Anaru  Kaiwhakamaori 

"Ko  tenei  Pepa  i  whakatapua  hei  hapai  ake  i  te  izui  Maori  ki 
roto  i  nga  whakaaro-nui.' 

"Te  Karere"  is  published  monthly  by  the  New  Zealand  Mission  of  the  Church 
of  Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-day  Saints,  and  is  printed  by  TE  KARERE  PRESS,  No.  2 
Scotia  Place,  Upper  Queen  Street,  Auckland,  C.l,  N.Z.  Subscription  Rates:  3/-  per 
six  months;  5/-  per  year;  £1  for  five  years;  £2/10/-  for  life.  (United  States  Cur- 
rency:  $1.00    per   year;    $4.00   for   five   years;   $10.00    for   life.) 


Address    Correspondence,    Box    72,    Auckland,    C.l,    New    Zealand. 


CONTENTS 


Editorial —                                                                                                       Page         i 
"Reed  Smoot,"  by  Matthew  Cowley   646 


Special  Features — 

"Kaikauwhau  Mo  Waikato"   648 

"America,"  by  President  J.  Reuben  Clark,  Jr 651 

"Hirini  Whaanga  and  His  Work"  654 

"Woman — Mother,"  by  Leah  D.  Widstoe  656 

"From  the  Leaves  of  an  Old  Family  Bible,"  by  Walter  Smith   .  .  658 

Church  Features — 

"Mahi  Kura  Hapati"  649 

Sunday  School       650 

M.I.A 661 

Fifty-second   Annual    Conference    663 

Primary       666 


646 


II    KARERE 


Mr,.  1941 


Editorial 


REED  SMOOT 

For  forty  years  Reed  Smoot  was  an  oracle  of  God  in 
the  Council  of  Twelve.  For  thirty  years  he  was  an  oracle 
of  the  Nation  in  the  council-  of  Congress.  In  each  capacity 
he  lived  his  sermons  and  his  ideals.  He  was  religiously 
patriotic  and  patriotically  religious.  In  his  allegiance  to 
both  In-  God  and  his  country  he  was  adamant.  In  his  politi- 
cal career  there  was  no  chicanery  and  in  his  religious  minis- 
try  there   was   no   sham.      In   the   Church   he  inspired   loyalty 

to  the  ( Jovernment,  and  in  tin-  ( lovernment  he  inspired  respect 

for  the  (  hurch. 

In  speech  in  the  halls  of  Congress  and  in  sermon  in 
the  chapels  of  his  Church  his  voice  carried  a  ring  of  convic- 
tion and  sincerity.  His  deeds,  however,  were  more  eloquent 
than  his  speech,  and  his  exemplary  character  more  inspira- 
tional than  his  spoken  word,  lie  was  straightforward  and 
honest  in  public  utterance  and  private  conversation.  <  >ne 
was  never  left  in  doubt  as  to  his  position  on  any  question. 
In  political  matters  he  adhered  inviolably  to  the  ethics  of  his 
office,  and  in  religious  matters  he  was  strictly  orthodox. 

lie  accepted  without  reservation  the  revelations  from  his 
God  to  his  Church  and  never  tampered  with  the  tenets  of  his 
faith.  The  institutions  of  the  government  he  regarded  as 
sacred,  and  believed  them  to  he  founded  upon  divine  inspira- 
tion. Indeed  his  Church  mid  his  Nation  was  tin-  Kingdom 
of  his  God. 

ddie  efficacy  of  the  saving  power  of  his  religion,  and  the 

truthfulness  of  its  concepts  he  tested  by  obedience.  The 
result  convinced  him  beyond  any  question  or  shadow  of  doubt. 
ddie  testimony  of  his  convictions  will  long  he  remembered  by 

all  who  observed  his  conduct  while  he  lived  among  nun. 

With  the  election  of  Reed  Smoot  to  the-  United  States 
Senate,  JUSl  after  the  turn  of  the  century,  came  a  "hlit/krci.^" 
of  persecution  and  calumny  which  focused  the  eyes  of  the 
world  on  the  man  and  his  Church.  I  lis  right  to  sit  as  a  mem- 
ber of  the  Senate  was  challenged.  The  charges  against  him 
were  Founded  entirely  upon  falsehood  and  yet  his  accusors 
were  legion.  The  winds  of  hatred  whirled  about  him.  and  the 
rains  of  abuse  heat  heavily  upon  him;  hut  his  faith  never 
failed.     With  each  new  tempest  the  roots  of  his  faith  struck 


Mei,  1941  TE  KARERE 

deeper  into  the  soil  and  added  strength  and  beauty  to  his 
character. 

Throughout  the  long  months  of  this  disgraceful  inquisi- 
tion he  maintained  a  magnificent  dignity — a  dignity  that  could 
stand  fire.  Both  cheeks  he  turned  to  the  enemy.  "An  eye  for 
an  eye,  a  tooth  for  a  tooth"  had  no  part  in  his  defense. 
Patience,  tolerance,  charity  and  dignity  were  his  weapons  of 
both  defense  and  attack.  Indeed,  throughout  his  life  when- 
ever an  attempt  was  made  to  sully  his  name  he  never  changed 
weapons. 

At  long  last  came  victory  and  with  it  the  inauguration  of 
thirty  years  of  service  to  his  country.  By  his  industry,  which 
was  prodigious,  he  reached  a  position  of  influence  and  power 
which  but  few  have  attained  unto  in  the  history  of  the  Senate. 
His  knowledge  of  the  business  of  government  was  profound, 
and  sound  economy  in  the  administration  of  Government 
business  was  an  obsession  with  him.  His  word  on  matters 
pertaining  to  Government  appropriations  and  finance  was 
never  questioned  He  "spoke  as  one  having  authority." 
Eventually  he  became  the  dean  of  the  Senate. 

Whatever  he  set  his  hand  to  do,  either  in  the  Church  or 
the  Senate,  he  did  with  all  his  might.  He  knew  that  salva- 
tion, whether  spiritual,  physical  or  temporal,  could  never  be 
achieved  except  by  obedience  to  the  gospel  of  work.  He 
abhorred  idleness.  Every  day  of  his  life  was  crowded  with 
strenuous  work,  and  when  he  sought  relaxation  he  did  more 
work.     He  worked  to  live  and  he  lived  to  work. 

In  private  enterprise  he  was  honest  and  dependable ;  in 
public  office  he  was  the  soul  of  honour  and  integrity ;  in 
ecclesiastical  positions  he  was  humble  and  reverent,  and  in 
his  home  he  was  a  devoted,  considerate  and  gentle  husband 
and  a  kind  and  loving  father.  In  all  suroundings  and  under 
all  circumstances  he  was  controlled  by  the  principles  of  his 
faith.  Into  whichever  period  of  his  life  the  probe  may  be 
applied  it  will  always  be  found  that  his  habits  invariably  were 
consistent  with  his  ideals ;  his  practice  consistent  with  his 
preaching. 

Not  the  least  of  his  contributions  to  his  people  was  the 
assistance  he  rendered  to  hundreds  of  young  men  and  women, 
through  senatorial  patronage,  which  made  it  possible  for  them 
to  receive  college  education  and  win  degrees  qualifying  them 
for  professional  careers.  As  a  beneficiary  of  this  patronage 
the  writer  will  eternally  bless  the  memory  of   Reed  Smoot. 

— Mat i hew  Cowley. 


TE  KARERE  Met,  1941 

Kaikauwhau  Mo  Waikato 

Mo  nga  Marama  0   MKI  me  HUNE 
Wiki  Tuatahi. 

Wanihi  Tangihaere  me  Darcey  Tangihaere  ki  Piopio — Walter 
Turinui  me  John  Paki  ki  Pirongio — Ben  Marshall  me  Dick  Marshall  ki 
Weraroa — Willie  Paki  me  Bob  Beazley  ki  Clevedon — Ru  Tarawhiti  me 
Pehi  Tarawhiti  ki  Rangiriri — Peter  Whatu  me  Horace  Forbes  ki  Gordon- 
tOD — Sam  Pohutuhutu  me  Rei  Tuhua  ki  Tauhei — Tonga  Paiaka  me  tana 
family  ki  Manunui — Koroheke  me  tana  family  ki  Cambridge — Arthur 
Hill  me  Joe  Rapana  ki  Waingaro. 

Wiki   Tuarua. 

Te  Awe  Whareponga  me  he  hoa  mana  tonu  e  rapa  ki  Kopaku 
Landing — Tatana  Arona  me  Haimona  Honetana  ki  (iordonton — George 
Stockman  me  tana  Tama  ki  Mahoenui — Tirua  Tukiri  me  Motutara  Te 
Hira  ki  Owairaka — Tetana  Te  Hira  me  Tapahia  TeWheld  ki  Morrinsville 
— Ngaha  Rotana  me  Joseph  Berryman  ki  Te  Hoe — Howard  Osborne  me 
Victor  Osborne  to  anywhere  they  decide — Dave  Ormsby  mo  Harry  Mar- 
shall ki  Puketapu — Mipi  Tangihaere  me  Taiki  ki  Te  Kuiti — John  Puru 
me   Rapata  Puru  ki  Matangi. 

Wiki    Tuatoru 

James  Heperi  me  tana  family  ki  Piopio — George  Ngaronoa  Mate 
me  tana  family  ki  te  home  o  George  Stockman — Hare  Puke  me  Rei- 
hana  Puke  ki  Frankton — James  Forbes  me  Horace  Forbes  ki  Horotiu — 
George  Maihi  mo  Tamo  Horotini  ki  Matakowhai — Kio  Tarawhiti  me 
Kare  Martin  ki  Glen  Murray — Niho  Rangiawha  mana  e  rapu  ho  hoa 
mona  ki  Motakotako — W.  Jury  me  tana  family  ki  Glen  Murray — Here 
Tangihaere  me  Winiata  Kapinga  ki  Otorohanga — Thomas  Amoketi  me 
Koti   Amoketi   ki   Puketapu. 

Wiki    Tuawha. 

Fred  Rawiri  me  tana  family  ki  Puketapu — Percival  Rowe,  Roy  and 
Albert  Osborne  to  Taumarunui — Ivan  Noda  me  Joe  Kingi  ki  Taupiri — 
Puhi  Harihona  me  tana  family  ki  Parawera — Tame  Koti  mo  Douglas 
Whatu  ki  Makomako — E.  A.  C.  Scott  and  family  to  choose  their  place 
of  visit — John  Apiti  me  Mapu  Urutarewa  ki  Morrinsville — Henare  Nga- 
whika  me  Okeroa  Honetana  ki  Patotonga — Wiremu  Kawharu  mo  tana 
family  to  choose  their  place  of  visit — William  Mannering  mana  e  rapu 
he  hoa  mona  ki  Maunga  Tautari. 

He  Kupu  Whakamarama. — I  to  marama  o  MEI  me  haere  ki  nga 
Hunga   Tapu.      I   te   marama   o   HUNE   torotoroa   nga   Hoa   Aroha. 

Na  te  Timuakitanga  o  te  Takiwa  o  Waikato. 
Henare  Marshall  me  tana  Timuakitanga. 


\2 


BOUND   VOLUME  OF  "  TE  KARERE,"   1940 

A  limited  number  of  bound  volumes  of  the  1940  issue  of 
Te  Karere  is  now  available.  Place  your  orders  as  soon  as  pos- 
sible with  Te  Karere,  Box  72.  Auckland.    Price  8/-. 


Mei,  1941  TE  KARERE  649 

Mahi  Kura  Hapati 

RATAPU   TUATAHI 

Whakaaturanga:    Upoko  2  "Nga  Tikanga  o  te  Whakapono." 

1.  He  awhina  te  Atua,  he  atawhai,  he  aroha,  he  ngohengohe,  he 
whai-whakaaro  me  te  manawanui,  e  ata  hanga  ana  ki  nga  ngoikore- 
tanga  o  ana  tamariki.  E  mahi  tika  ana  la,  he  aroha  hoki  kei  roto  i 
Tana  whakawa,  ahakoa  ano  tenei  whakaaro  ngohengohe  Ona  e  u  tonu 
ana  Tana  pehi  i  te  he.  E  puhaehae  ana  ano  la  ki  Tana  ake  mana.  Ko 
la  ra  te  kaiwhakahaere  mo  to  tatou  oranga,  e  ahei  ana  tatou  ki  te 
whakatata  atu  kia  la,  ki  to  tatou  Matua.  Ka  tupu  haere  to  tatou 
whakapono  kia  la  ina  nuku  haere  to  tatou  mohiotanga  kia  la. 

Tirohia  enei  raranga  karaipiture  tautoko — Tiuteronomi  4:31; 
Eko.  20:  6;  Tiute  7:  21,  10:  17;  Hohua  24:  19. 

Nga  Patai: 

1.  Pehea  nga  painga  o  te  Atua  kia  tatou? 

2.  Pehea  te  ahua  o  Tana  whakatau? 

3.  Kei  hea  te  tauira  nui  tautoko  i  Ana  mahi? 

4.  Ko  te  Atua  he  aroha,  he  ngohengohe,  he  atawhai,  pehea  Tana 
mo  nga  mahi  he? 

5.  Me  pehea  e  tupu  haere  ai  to  tatou  whakapono  kia  la? 

RATAPU  TUARUA 

Whakaaturanga:  Upoko  2  "Nga  Tikanga  o  te  Whakapono"  me  Ekoruho 
20:23. 
1.  Te  karakia  whakapakoko — me  te  Atua  kore.  I  te  maha  o  nga 
pono  o  te  oranga  o  te  Atua,  e  pera  ana  hoki  te  whakaaro  o  te  nuinga 
o  nga  tamariki  a  te  tangata  he  wahi  iti  ma  te  tangata  e  whakapono  kore 
ai  ki  te  Atua.  I  te  maha  hoki  o  nga  whakaaturanga  mo  te  ahua  ata- 
whai me  Tona  tapu  hoki,  kahore  rawa  he  wahi  hei  kotiti  ketanga  ki 
te  karakia  ki  nga  mea  he  noaiho,  otira,  ko  te  hitori  e  whakaatu  ana 
mo  nga  tangata  e  whakamarama  ana  ko  te  whakapono  Atua,  ara,  ko 
te  whakaakoranga  mo  te  whakapono  me  te  whakaaetanga  ki  te  Atua, 
e  haukotia  ana  e  nga  whakahaere  maha  o  te  hunga  Atua  kore,  e  paheke 
ana  taua  tangata  ki  te  huarahi  teka  i  te  mea  he  tangata  whiriwhiri 
tika  ia  e  karakia  ke  ana  ki  te  aata  o  nga  Atua  whakapono.  Ko  te  whaka- 
pono kaore  he  Atua  i  tupu  haere  noa  ake  i  nga  wa  o  muri,  ko  te  karakia 
whakapakoko  ia  kua  tupu  noa  ake,  he  hara  matamua  no  te  ao.  I  te 
wa  o  te  putanga  mai  o  te  whanau  o  Iharaira  i  te  whenua  o  Ihipa  i 
whakaarotia  e  te  Atua  e  tika  ana  kia  whakahau  a  ture  Ia:  "Kaua 
etahi  Atua  ke  atu  mou  i  mua  i  Ahau,"  ahakoa  na  ia  Ia  ano  e  tuhi  ana 
i  aua  kupu  ki  runga  i  nga  papa  kohatu  e  whakapoke  ana  Tana  iwi 
ia  ratou  i  mua  i  te  whakapakoko  kuao  kau,  he  koura,  na  ratou  nei  ano 
i  hanga  he  mea  tauira  ki  nga  Atua  whakapakoko  o  Ihipa. 

Nga  Patai: 

1.  He  aha  i  nuku  ake  ai  te  maramatanga  o  te  whakapono  ki  te  Atua 
i  to  te  tangata  Atua  kore? 

2.  He  aha  te  whakamarama  a  nga  hitori  mo  tenei  take? 

3.  He  pehea  te  ahua  o  te  tangata  kaore  e  whakapono   ana   ki   te 
Atua? 

4.  No  tehea  wa  ki  te  whakaaro  i  tupu  ake  ai  tenei  alma  te  koiv  e 
whakapono  ki  te  Atua? 

5.  No  tehea  wa  te  karakia  ki  nga  Atua  whakapakoko? 


II  KARERE  Mo.  i«Ml 

RATAPU  TUATORU  .  . 

Whakaaturanga:     He  roan^a  0  te   (Jpoko   2   "Nga  Tikan^a  0   t6   Whaka- 
P«.n<>." 
Ko   te   mohiotanga   i   tupu   ake  i  roto  i  te  tangata  he  karakia.   0 
ana  tona  ngakaa  e  rapu  ana  hold  i  tetahi  mea  hei  whakanuinga 

ma  ana.  I  te  \va  kua  taka  atu  ia  ki  te  pouritanga  i  t€  hono  t<mu  0 
tuna  uru  ki  te  hara  a  ki  wareware  i  aia  tona  Kaihanga  nie  tf  Atua 
o  ona  niatua  na  ka  rapu  ia  i  etahi  atu  Atua.  Ko  etahi  i  whakaaro 
ko  tera  ahuatanga  0  te  runga  rawa.  i  te  whitinira  mai  0  te  ra  ka  koro- 
piko  atu  kia    ia.    ko  etahi  i  whiriwhiri  ko  etahi  0  Dga  mea  kei  te  whenua 

hei  atua  mo  ratou.     I  miharo  nui  ratou  ki  tenei  mea  ki  te  ahi  he  aha 

i  ka  ai.  na  ka  karakia  atu  ratou  ki  tona  nmra.  Ko  etahi  atu  e  whakaan. 
ana  e  kite  ana  ratou  i  roto  i  te  wai  te  whakaaturanga  mo  te  he  kore 
me  te  tika  a    ka    whakahaeretia  to    ratou    karakia   i   Dga  waJ   rere. 

Nga  Patai: 

1.  He  aha  te  mea  nui  i  tupu  ake  i  roto  i  te  ngakau  0  te  tangata? 

2.  Na  te  aha  i  wareware  ai  i  te  tangata  tona  Kaihanga? 

RATAPU  TUAWHA 

Whakaaturanga:  He  manga  o  te  Upoko  2  "Nga  Tikanga  0  te  Whaka- 
pono." 
Ko  te  whakapono  kore  ki  te  Atua  he  whakakahoie  he  Atua  ano 
kei  te  rangi.  Ahakoa  ra  te  tangata  tuturu  kaore  ona  whakapono  ki  te 
Atua  e  pa  mai  ana  ano  pera  me  te  nuinga  te  hiahia  ki  tenei  mea  ki  te 
karakia.  ahakoa  kaore  ia  e  whakaae  ana  ki  te  Atua  Ora  Tonu.  Pono 
hoki.  Otira,  e  whaka-atua  ana  ia  i  etahi  ture,  etahi  tikanga,  etahi  ahua 
ranei  i  pupo  ake  i  roto  i  te  ngakau.  Kahore  rawa  he  tangata  tuturu 
e  whakakahore   ana  ki  te  Atua. 

Nga  Patai: 

1.     Rhea  te  ahua  o  te  tangata  whakapono  kore  ki  te  Atua? 

SUNDAY  SCHOOL 

SACRAMENT  GEM 

In  memory  of  the  broken  flesh 

We  cat  the  broken  bread, 

And   witness  with  a  CUp  afresh 
(  lur  faith  in  Christ  our  I  lead. 

(  <  INCERT  RECITATH  »X 

Poet riuc  and  Covenants  60:  13. 

"Thou  shall  not  idle  away  thy  time,  neither  shalt  thou  bury  thy 

talent   that   it   may   not   be   known." 

K<  IRERO  A  NGAKAU 
Akoranga  me  nga  Kawenata  60:  13. 

"Kaua  to  taima  e  moumou  noatia  iho,  kaua  ano  to  taranata  e 
kopehutia  iho  kia  kore  :i  e  mohiotia." 

HYMNS 

-What  Prize  Shall  Be  Your  Reward"  Page  84 

•  i:  Te  Ariki,  E  Ihn" Wharangi  70 


Mei,  1941  TE  KARERE  651 

AMERICA 

"A  Chosen  Land  of  the  Lord" 

From  the  beginning  even  to  the  end  of  the 
Earth 

By  President  J.  Reuben  Clark,  Jr. 
Of  the  First  Presidency 

Concerning  Zion  and  its  Destiny  and  Liberty 
and   its   Price 

You  youth  of  the  Church  —  with  these  God- 
given  promises  and  prophecies  before  you,  do  not 
let  yourselves  be  stampeded  into  this  panic  of  fear. 
.  .  .  If  subjugation  shall  come,  it  will  come  because 
we  have  reached  a  "fullness  of  iniquity,"  and  not 
because  we  fail  to  take  on  the  horrors  of  this  war.  It  is  righteousness,  not 
the  hates  of  human  slaughter,  of  which  this  nation  stands  now  in  need. 


J.  Reuben  Clark,  Jr. 


I  speak  to  the  youth  of  the  Church.  Out  of  the  ancient  past  has 
come  to  us  the  wisdom  for  the  next  year: 

My  son,  keep  thy  father's  commandment,  and  forsake  not  the  laiv  of  thy 
mother     (Proverbs  6:  20.) 

Your  presiding  officers  have  asked  me  to  say  something  to  you 
about  that  particular  aspect  of  these  words  of  wisdom  which  touches  us 
in  our  association  together  as  a  civil  government. 

While  the  scriptural  text  itself  comes  from  ancient  Israel  and 
Palestine,  yet  it  has  a  deep  and  vital  meaning  to  and  for  us  of  this 
land — the  land  of  Zion,  the  American  hemisphere. 

THE  LAW  OF  THE  HEMISPHERE 

From  the  very  beginning  of  man's  life  on  earth,  there  have  been 
commandments  for  our  fathers  and  laws  for  our  mothers  that  were 
basic  to  the  peace,  prosperity,  happiness,  and  indeed  existence,  of  those 
who  possess  the  Americas. 

One  of  the  great  motifs  running  through  the  whole  Nephitic  and 
Jareditic  records  is  that  this  land  of  ours  "is  a  land  which  is  choice 
above  all  other  lands,"  consecrated  to  the  blessing  of  those  dwelling 
thereon  while  they  shall  live  righteously,  but  plagued  with  a  curse  for 
them  when  they  shall  become  ripened  in  iniquity.  This  is  the  law 
by  which  God  measures  His  bounties  and  metes  out  His  punishments  to 
the  peoples  dwelling  in  this  land. 

A  first  great  consecration  for  blessing  came  when  God  planted 
hereon  the  Garden  of  Eden,  and  placed  therein  our  first  parents.  The 
primal  curse  came  to  it  when  "Adam  having  fallen  that  man  might  be" 
(2  Nephi  2:  25),  God  said  to  him:  ".  .  .  cursed  shall  be  the  ground  for 
thy  sake."      (Moses  4:23.) 

A  MIGHTY  LAND 

This  has  always  been  a  mighty  land  in  God's  plan.  It  was  in  the 
valley  of  Adam-ondi-Ahman  that  Adam,  prior  to  his  death,  called  the 
great  High  Priests  together  and  there  bestowed  upon  them  his  last, 
blessing.  The  Lord  appearing  there,  his  posterity  proclaimed  Adam 
to  be  Michael,  the  Prince,  the  Archangel.  (D.  and  C.  107:  5;>,  54.) 
It  is  to  that  same  spot  that  Adam,  as  the  Ancient  of  Days,  shall  come 
to  visit  his  people  (D.  and  C.  1163,  when  judgment  shall  be  set  and 
the  books  opened.      (Daniel  7:1)   ff;  Revelation   20:4.) 


IT    KARERE  \k,.  1941 

h  i-  here  on  this  land  that  the  NVu  Jerusalem  shall  be  built  "unto 
the  remnant  of  the  seed  of  Joseph"  i  those  oth<  i 

literal  descendants  of  Lehi.      (Ether  IS:  6  ff;  l  Nephi  14:1,  2;  2  Nephi 
Ind   finally,   it    is   here   on   this   hemisphere   that   Zion   shall 
be  built.      (Tenth  Article  of  Faith.)      It   is  this  fact  and  this  purpose, 
the  building  of  Zion  en   this   hemisphere,   which   is   Zion.   whi<  I 
to  be  tin-  dominant  elements  in  all  <T  God's  dealings  with  them  who 

this    land,    for    Isaiah,    speaking    more    than    two    thousand    five 

hundred  years  ago,  declared  that  "out  of  Zion  shall  go  forth  the  law. 
and  tin-  word  of  the  Lord  from  Jerusalem."    (Isaiah  2  : 

AMERICA'S  DESTINY 

Thu  ultimate  God-given  destiny,  planned  by  the  Cr< 

and  testified  by  ancient  and  modern   prophecy  and  revelation,  is  that 

out    of    her   shall   go    forth    the    law. 

Time  and  time  again,  God  has  brought  to  this  land  His  el, 
>eed  and  has  tried  to  raise  up  from  them  a  people  that  would  worship 
Him  and  would  not  depart  from  the  ways  of  His  righteousness — a 
people  that  would  work  towards  this  God-given  destiny.  For  thousands 
of  years  Satan  has  impeded  this  purpose.  Bu1  God's  plan  will  finally 
prevail. 

After  the   Flood  and   "the  waters  had   receded   from   off  the   face  of 

this  land."  the  Lord  declared  through  His  prophel   His  dedication  that 

this  had  become  a  "choice  land  above  all  other  lands,  a  chosen  land  of 
the  Lord;  wherefore  the  Lord  would  have  that  all  men  should  serve 
Him    who   dwell    upon   the    face   thereof."    (Ether    L3:  2.) 

THE   JAREDITIC    CIVILIZATION 

The  first  attempt  to  set  up  a  righteous  people  after  the  Flood, 
tame  when,  at  Babel  (Omni  L'lM.  the  Lord  "swore  in  His  wrath  that 
they  should  he  scattered  upon  all  the  face  of  the  earth."  (Ether  1:  33), 
and  Jared  and  his  brother,  he  to  whom  the  Lord  said,  "for  never  has 
man  believed  in  me  as  thou  hast"  (Ether  •'! :  1  5 ) ,  were  guided  to  these 
shores.  They  came  with  a  blessing  and  an  overhanging  judgment. 
The   promised    blessing   was   this: 

THE  BLESSING 

Behold,  this  is  a  choice  land,  and  whatsoever  nation  shall  possess  it   shall 
from    bondage,   and    from    capthnty,   an<l   from    all    other    nations    under 
heaven,   ii   they   will   hut   serve   the   (iod  of   the   land,  who   is  Jesus   Christ.   .    .   . 
(Ether  2:  12.) 

The  overhanging  judgment  was  this: 

THE  JUDGMENT 

Wherefore,  he  that  doth  possess  it  shall  serve  (iod  or  shall  he  swept  off; 
for  it  is  the  everlasting  decree  of  (iod.  .  Ind  it  is  not  until  the  fullness  of 
iniquity  among  the  children  of  the  land,  that  they  are  swept  off.  (Ether  2:10.) 
From  that  day  until  now,  the  price  of  the  promised  blessing  has 
always  been,  and  will  ever  he.  the  serving  of  Jesus  Christ,  the  God 
of  this  land.  There  is  no  other  way  to  get  the  blessing  nor  to  escape 
the    judgment.      This    fact    must     never    lie    forgotten. 

While  -Jared  and  his  brother  were  among  them,  their  families  and 
posterity  lived  for  the  promised  blessings.  The  land  was  tamed;  the 
herds  and  flocks  multiplied;  the  earth  yielded  its  riches:  the  people 
"did  wax  strong  in  the  land"  (Ether  (5:18),  they  became  exceedingly 
rich.       (Ether   10:  28.) 

"  FULLNESS   OF  INIQUITY  " 
Then   came   dissension,    then   wars,   then    wickedness,    and   finally   a 
"fullness    of    iniquity."      The    record    recites: 

And  HOW  there  began  to  he  a  great  curse  upon  all  the  land  hecause  of  the 
iniquity   of   the   people,   in   which,   if   a    man   should   lay   his   tool   or   his  srvord 


Mei,  1941  TE  KARERE  653 

upon  his  shelf,  or  upon  the  place  whither  he  would  keep  it,  behold,  upon  the 
morrow,  he  could  not  find  it,  so  great  was  the.  curse  upon  the  land. 

Wherefore,  every  man  did  cleave  unto  that  which  ivas  his  own,  with  his 
hands,  and  would  not  borrow,  neither  would  he  lend;  and  every  man  kept 
the  hilt  of  his  sivord  in  his  right  hand,  in  the  defense  of  his  property  and 
his  own  life,  and  of  his  zvives,  and  children.     (Ether  14:  1,  2.) 

The  prophet  Ether  warned  them  that  if  they  did  not  repent,  all 
but  the  leader  should  be  destroyed.  (Ether  13:20  ff.)  Repentance 
did  not  come. 

We  are  not  given  the  step-by-step  backsliding  of  this  Jareditic 
civilization  till  it  reached  the  social  and  governmental  chaos  the  record 
sets  out,  but  those  steps  seem  wholly  clear  from  the  results.  Put  into 
modern  terms,  we  can  understand  them.  First  there  was  a  forsaking 
of  the  righteous  life,  and  the  working  of  wickedness;  then  must  have 
come  the  extortion  and  oppression  of  the  poor  by  the  rich;  then  retali- 
ation and  reprisal  by  the  poor  against  the  rich ;  then  would  come  a  cry 
to  share  the  wealth  which  should  belong  to  all;  then  the  easy  belief  that 
society  owed  every  man  a  living  whether  he  worked  or  not;  then  the 
keeping  of  a  great  body  of  idlers;  then  when  community  revenues 
failed  to  do  this,  as  they  always  have  failed  and  always  will  fail,  a 
self -helping  by  one  to  the  goods  of  his,  neighbour;  and  finally  when 
the  neighbour  resisted,  as  resist  he  must,  or  starve  with  his  family, 
then  death  to  the  neighbour  and  all  that  belonged  to  him.  This  was 
the  decreed  "fullness  of  iniquity." 

Then  came  the  end;  the  Jaredites  were  wiped  out  in  accordance 
with  "the  everlasting  decree  of  God."  A  nation  had  been  born;  it  had 
grown  to  maturity;  then  to  a  powerful  manhood;  had  then  gone  on  to 
sin,  decay,  and  destruction,  and  all  because  its  people  had  refused  to 
heed  the  promises  and  commandments  of  Him  who  is  their  Creator  and 
Father,  all  because  the  people  who  possessed  the  land  had  failed  "to 
serve  the  God  of  the  land,   who  is  Jesus  Christ."    (Ether  2:  12.) 

Before  God's  first  effort  had  come  to  its  final  tragedy,  He  had 
begun  His  second. 

In  the  reign  of  Zedekiah,  king  of  Judah,  and  just  before  the  great 
Babylonish  captivity,  two  groups  left  Jerusalem,  under  the  Lord's 
direction,  to  escape  the  fate  then  pending  for  Israel,  and  to  make  a 
new  effort  to  build  a  righteous  people  in  the  promised  land.  Of  one — 
that  which  founded  the  people  of  Zarahemla — we  know  little,  save 
that  they  were  later  absorbed  by  the  people  of  Mosiah.  (Omni,  verses 
14-19.)  We  do  not  have  their  records.  (Omni,  verse  18.)  But  of 
the  other,  the  family  of  Lehi  and  their  descendants,  the  bulk  of  the  Book 
of  Mormon  gives  us  a  full  account. 

THE   LEHI   COLONIZATION 

Lehi,  with  Ishmael,  and  their  families,  came  to  this  "a  choice  land 
above  all  other  lands,  a  chosen  land  of  the  Lord,"  with  the  same  prom- 
ised blessings  and  the  same  overhanging  judgments  that  were  made  to 
Jared  and  his  brother. 

Beginning  with  an  angelic  rebuke  to  Laman  and  Lemuel,  who  were 
smiting  their  younger  brethren  with  a  rod  (1  Nephi  3:28,  29),  down 
through  a  thousand  years  of  recurring  days  of  righteousness  and 
boundless  blessings,  intermixed  with  repeating  days  of  sin,  turmoil, 
war,  even  to  final  destruction,  the  Lord  took  every  occasion  to  show 
these  peoples  the  proper  way,  to  lead  them  back  to  a  repentant  life, 
to  bring  them  to  righteousness.  In  one  of  their  moods  of  righteous- 
ness, prepared  thereto  by  a  prophet  of  God,  the  Master  Himself,  having 
finished  His  work  in  Palestine,  visited  them  and  in  person  taught  and 
ministered  unto  them.  Over  and  over  again  He  Messed  them  when  they 
were  righteous.  Over  and  over  again  He  warned  them  of  the  evils 
and  destruction  that  followed  unrepented  sin.  Over  and  over  again 
He  punished  their  wickedness.      Bui  to  no  avail.  |  To  be  continued) 


654  II.  ICARERE  Mn,  1941 

Hirini  Whaanga  and  His  Work 

A  Special  Presentation  Ceremony  during  the 

Fourth    General   Session    of   Conference   at 

Nuhaka,  II ui  Tan.  April  I3t  1941 

President     Matthew     Cowley     during     the 

Fourth  Genera]  Session  of  Conference  unveiled 

a    life-like    colour    picture    of    Hirini    Whaanga, 

Bet     in    a    gold    frame    and  mounting    resting 

*r~~--  on   a  flood-lit  pedestal,   which    brought    forth   a 

■9k      spontaneous  expression  of  surprise  and  admira- 

.  ^^  BE     tion  from  the  large  gathering  at  the  life-like 

rf,  I  likeness  of  the  picture  to  the  man. 

^^    ^^j^^^Mm  This   ceremony    in    honour   of    Hirini    Wha- 

.    4  I  I     anga  was  performed   36   years  after  his  death, 

./  I     48  years  after  his  emigration  to  Zion,  59  years 

\  ***  I     after  his  baptism  and  over  100  years  after  his 

On  the  platform  during  the  Session  was 
JliKixi  whaanga  hjs   on}y   surviving   brother,    Matene    Whaanga, 

who  spoke  most  feelingly  and  respectfully  of  his 
"tuakana"  and  his  work  for  and  among  his  people;  Mihi  and  Ka,  his 
only  living  children;  and  Sidney  Christy,  Walter  Smith  and  Ihaia 
Whaanga,  three  of  the  original  emigrants.  The  speeches  were  all 
indicative  of  the  occasion  which  significantly  blended  with  the  spirit  of 
the  Hui  Tau. 

The  musical  renditions  were  supplied  by  the  Korongata  Male 
Chorus,  "Pale  Moon";  the  Nuhaka  Women's  Chorus,  "Prayer  Perfect," 
and  a  Hawaiian  Musical  Fantasia  by  a  trio  of  Old  M.A.C.  boys  and 
B.Y.U  Maori  boys. 

From  the  inscriptions  on  the  picture,  President  Cowley  read  the 
following: — "Hirini  Whaanga,  son  of  Ihaka  Whaanga,  soldier  and  pat- 
riot of  Queen  Victoria,  beloved  Church  leader  in  this  country  and  in 
America.  Baptized  into  the  Church  of  Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-day 
Saints  in  1882.  Emigrated  to  Utah,  U.S.A.,  in  the  good  ship  'Manowai' 
in  1893  with  his  wife  Mere  and  their  children  Hirini,  Watene  and  Edna, 
also  Apikara  his  sister-in-lay,  with  her  two  sons  Ihaia  and  Isaac.  Died 
October  17th,  1905,  and  is  buried  in  Salt  Lake  City,  Utah,  U.S.A." 

Ko  ia  te  matua,  te  matamua  o  te  iwi  Maori  ki  roto  i  te  Temepara 
Tapu  a  te  Atua.  Nana  i  whakatutuki  te  poropititanga  a  Maraki :  "A 
ka  whakatahuritia  e  ahau  nga  ngakau  o  nga  matua  ki  o  ratou  tamariki 
me  nga  ngakau  o  nga  tamariki  ki  o  ratou  matua,  kei  haere  atu  ahau  a 
patua  iho  e  ahau  te  whenua  ki  te  kanga." 

Presented  to  the  Nuhaka  Branch,  to  be  hung  in  the  Chapel,  by 
those  who  will  always  love  him  and  revere  his  memory. 

It  is  fitting  that  Sydney,  son  of  Hupa  and  Mihi  Christy  and  grand- 
son of  Hirini  and  Mere  Whaanga,  on  behalf  of  the  "iwi,"  should  be 
the  recipient  of  the  Holy  Bible,  containing  a  written  history  of  which 
this  occasion  brings  to  mind,  and  the  picture  our  forbear,  as  he,  in  this 
troublous  year  of  1941,  like  his  grandsire  in  1893,  the  President  of  the 
Nuhaka  Branch.  May  the  Bible  and  the  painting  ever  remain  insepar- 
able, one  a  source  of  information,  the  other  inspiration,  that  the  two 
may  bring  consolation  to  all  who  believe  as  did  Hirini  Whaanga  in  the 
truth  of  the  Gospel  of  Christ. 


Mei,  1941  TE  KARERE 

PICTURE  OF  THE  MONTH 


655 


Potahi  Ranana — Mother  and  Grandmother 


Message  from  the  First  Presidency 

Under  date  of  March  26th  The  First  Presidency  of  the 
Church  addressed  a  letter  to  President  Cowley  as  follows: 
We  are  happy  to  learn  that  you  and  your  family  are  all 
enjoying  good  health,  and  that  the  work  of  the  Lord  is  pro- 
gressing so  favourably  in  far-off  New  Zealand. 

We  have  no  doubt  but  that  the  stalwart  native  Elders  of 
the  Church  in  New  Zealand  will  loyally  support  you  in  the 
present  crisis,  and  will  carry  on  the  work  ably,  as  the  Lord 
will  give  them  strength  and  guidance.  Please  extend  to  them 
our  commendation  and  blessing,  and  tell  them  to  rally  to  the 
standard  even  with  more  fervour  and  faith  than  they  have 
had  heretofore.  If  they  do,  there  is  no  doubt  but  that  the 
New  Zealand  Mission  will  maintain  its  high  efficiency. 
We  appreciate  your  willingness  to  carry  on  under  any 
circumstance. 

We  pray  the  Lord  to  guide  you,  and  to  grant  unto  vou 
and  yours  health  and  contentment,  -and  to  the  Saints  through- 
out your  Mission  prosperity  and  peace. 

Sincerely   your   brethren, 
Signed —    Heber  J.   Grant 

J.  Reuben  Clark,  Jr. 
Pari,!  0.  McKay 

The  First  Presidency 


TE  KARERE  Wei,  1941 

Woman  —  Mother 

( Excerpts  from  Leah  D.  Widstoe's  "Women  and  Marriage 
Among  the  Mormons."  ) 

Woman's  status  in  the  home,  in  society,  and  before  the  law 
may  be  considered  a  fair  standard  by  which  t<>  judge  the  advancement 
of  any  people  or  nation.  By  that  test  the  "Mormon"  Church  will  be 
found  to  rank  among  the  great  institutions  of  all  time.  For  nowhere 
on  earth  is  woman  more-  greatly  honoured,  or  her  independence  more 
completely  accepted  and  acknowledged. 

During  the  period  of  "The  Dark  Ages,"  women  were  shackled 
as  n>  outward  expression  and  became  little  more  than  slaves  to  their 
husbands  or  lords,  who  actually  had  power  to  pet  and  lovti,  to  beal 
or  torture  or  destroy,  to  suit  their  pleasure  or  their  will.  A  man's 
wife  ranked  as  a  part  of  his  property;  and  woman  was  virtually  a 
bond  servant  to  her  father  until  passed  <>n  by  marriage  to  her  husband 
or  master.  For  ages  she  lived  under  conditions  a  little  less  than  com- 
plete thralldom. 

The  moral  equality  of  the  sexes  was  a  yet  more  startling  result 
of  the  ministry  of  the  Prophet.  In  the  "Mormon"  Church  boys 
are  taught  at  mother's  knee  t<>  guard  virtue  and  strength  as  care* 
fully  as  arc-  their  sisters.  Chastity  of  thought  and  dc-e<l  are  enjoined 
upon  each  alike,  and  violation  being  deplored  for  one  as  for  the 
other.  A  single  standard  of  mdrality  must  always  he  an  integral 
part  of  the  true  Gospel,  and  has  been  maintained  by  the  people  of 
this  Church  for  one  hundred  years.  An  unpreiedented  family  joy 
and  peace  as  well  as  physical  strength  and  purity  has  resulted  from 
ohedience  to  this    fundamental   law. 

Family  relationships  are  everlasting  among  eternal  intelligences. 
Family  life  on  earth  is  hut  a  type  of  life  before  and  after  earth  exig- 
ence. Parenthood  did  not  begin  with  this  world  else  how  can  man 
he  the  spiritual  child  of  his  Heavenly  Father?  Much  less,  then,  may 
that  priceless  relationship  end  with  this  life.  The  scriptures  teach 
that  things  earthly  are  hut  typical  of  thin--  heavenly.  Therefore. 
marriage  in   the   restbred   Church   is   "for  time  and    for  all   eternity." 

The  family  is  the  unit  of  earthly  and  heavenly  existence,  and  the 
rearing  of  a  noble  family,  the  source  of  earth's  greatest,  most 
experience.  Parenthood  becomes  the  ideal  of  every  memher  of  the 
restored  Church  of  Christ;  for  in  that  responsible  work  they  most 
nearly  approach  their  Heavenly  Father.  Because  of  that  understand- 
ing, marriage  becomes  truly  a  sacrament,  and  parenthood,  an  act  ot 
partnership  with  the  Lord.  Naturally,  race  suicide  is  not  practiced 
nor  tolerated  by  those  who  truly  understand  the  glorious  truths  of 
the  Gospel  of  Jesus  Christ. 


Mei,  1941  TE  KARERE  657 

WOMAN'S  SPHERE 

Woman  does  not  hold  the  Priesthood,  which  is  held  by  all  righte- 
ous men  in  the  Church,  but  as  a  partaker  of  restored  truth,  she 
shares  with  father  or  husband  in  all  the  blessings  derived  therefrom. 
Her  gift  is  that  of  motherhood,  with  its  accompanying  privilege  of 
moulding  the  plastic  souls  of  children  in  their  most  impressionable 
years,  and  thus  she  shapes  largely  the  destiny  of  mankind.  Indeed, 
this  privilege  is  so  great  and  engrossing  that  if  she  magnifies  her 
life  work,  she  has  no  time  and  less  inclination  to  assume  any  priestly 
responsibility,  even  were  it  possible.  She  realizes  so  well  the  vast 
importance  and  responsibility  of  her  glorious  privilege  of  "mothering" 
the  race  and  moulding  the  minds  and  souls  of  men,  that  she  is  humbly 
and  gratefully  content  to  live  within  her  own  sphere  and  magnify 
its  possibilities. 

A  beautiful  teamwork  results  from  this  righteous  relationship  of 
man  and  woman :  He  bears  the  responsibility  of  acting  for  his 
Heavenly  Father  in  all  the  public  demands  of  the  Church,  as  well  as 
being  the  responsible  head  of  his  own  family,  providing  for  its  eco- 
nomic care  and  maintenance;  she  assumes  the  privilege  of  intelligent 
motherhood  and  home-making,  as  well  as  active  participation  in  all 
organizations  for  woman's  advancement  which  the  Church  so  gener- 
ously provides.  There  is  never  a  question  of  superior  or  inferior — 
it  is  a  question  of  organization  for  the  greatest  possible  human 
betterment. 

WOMAN'S  RIGHTS 

One  hears  much  discussion  about  woman's  rights  and  woman's 
sphere.  Woman's  right  is  to  stand  shoulder  to  shoulder  with  her 
husband  or  brother  in  the  good  game  of  life,  bearing  her  full  share 
of  all  life's  burdens  and  responsibilities,  halving  his  cares,  sharing  his 
joys  and  triumphs. 

The  truly  happy  woman  is  she  who  fills  the  full  measure  of  her 
creation  by  nobly  bearing  and  rearing  a  family  of  healthy  children, 
doing  her  part  to  make  of  them  good  citizens  for  God  and  country. 
When,  through  no  fault  of  hers,  she  fails  to  reach  this  highest  achieve- 
ment of  womanly  happiness,  she  puts  in  a  full  working  day,  for  the 
improvement  and  uplift  of  others;  then  she  shares  recreational  hours 
and  truly  "plays  the  game  fair."  These  are  they  who  have  found 
and  who  fill  completely  woman's  sphere. 

It  could  not  be  claimed  that  "Mormon"  women  are  perfect,  but 
that  they  may  constantly  climb  the  road  toward  perfection  is  the 
aim  of  their  leaders. 

So  long  as  women  cling  to  the  simple  ideal  of  home  and  a  joy- 
ous family  life,  so  long  as  the)  Till  the  measure  of  their  creation  as 
home-makers,  magnifying  to  the  full  the  greal  gift  mi"  iheir  Creator 
for  their  own  and  others'  children,  so  long  is  the  Church  and  the 
nation  safe  no  longer.  In  this  role  may  be  found  the  "Mormon" 
women   to  daw  and   we  hope    foivwr. 


TE  KARERE 


Mei.    1«M1 


From  the  Leaves  of  an 
Old  Family  Bible 

"The  First  Maoris  to  Emigrate  to  Zion" 
By  WalTEB   Smith 


(Condensed   by   Kelly   Harris) 


*     M    

I  I     \Y   -*:<^         I     Saints    left    their    homeland    for    the    land    of 
%J  I     America,  Zion.      Hirini  Whaanga,  Mere  his  wife, 

I     Hirini  (Sid  Christy,  grandson),  Watene  (Walter 
v\  j&  _***  I     Smith,  nephew),  Edna  Pomare  (adopted  daugh- 

ter), a  raua  tamariki   (their  children),  Apikara, 
Hirini  Whaanga         his  sister-in-law   (wife  of  his  younger  brother 
Ihaka,  and  her  two  sons  Ihaia  and   Isaac,  eight 
na  in  all.     The  long  journey  from  Auckland  to  San  Francisco  was 
made  aboard  the  s.s.  Manowai  under  the  supervision  of  some  returning 
Elders,    the   only   one   whose  name  I  can  recall  was  Wiremu  Takarehi 
I  w      am  Douglas). 

A  few  days  in  San  Francisco  sufficed  to  impress  us  with  the  won- 
ders of  a  large  city,  where  I   believe  the  things  that  intrigued  us  most 
were   the   horseless   cars,   underground   cable   cars,   which   went  up  hill 
and  down  without  any  apparent  reason,  so  it  seemed 
to  the  young  and  untutored  native  mind. 

Salt  Lake  City  was  our  next  stop  after  travel- 
ling by  train  amid  snow-capped  mountains,  through 
long  dark  tunnels  and  rugged  country.  There  we 
had  our  first  ice  cream  and.  thinking  it  butter,  my 
fust  act  was  to  spread  it  upon  bread,  whereupon 
a  much-amused  waitress  kindly  corrected  me,  and  to 
this  day  I  cannot  remember  whether  that  ice  cream 
was  hot  or  cold. 

Our  future  home  in  southern  Utah  was  reached 
alter  many  days'  travel  in  covered  wagons  over 
miles  of  wild  western  wasteland,  the  home  of  the 
coyote,  jack-rabbit  and  rattlesnake.-.  Kanab  was 
home  to  us  for  about  eighteen  months.  It  was  a 
little  township  containing  two  stores,  Bowman's  and 
the  Elephant  Stores.  It  was  here  that  Hirini  in- 
'1    in   the    Elephant    Stores   and   some    mining 

Stocks,  which  ultimately  left  us  financially  ruined. 
Brother  Benjamin  Goddard  urged  that  the  family 
be  moved  back  to  Salt  Laks,  which  the  Church  Authorities  were  pleased 
I.  however,  stayed  with  Brother  Hamblin  herding  sheep  for  the 
next  fifteen  months  on  the  Buckskin  Mountains,  now  known  as  the 
Kaiabab  Forest  of  the  Grand  Canyon,  Government  Reserve,  one  of  the 
beauty  spots  of  the  world,  after  which  I  went  back  to  Salt  Lake  to 
school.  From  this  period  on,  many  interesting  things  will  always  be  re- 
membered by  us  all,  and  myself  particularly,  especially  on  the  occa- 
sion when  Sid  took  me  to  see  the  first  moving  picture  that  was  ever 
taken  for  public  entertainment  which,  if  I  remember  correctly,  was 
the  record  of  the  prize  fight  between  Jim  Corbett  and  Bob  Fitzsimmons. 
Due  to  the  severe  cold  and  wet  weather  then  prevalent,  I  contracted 
a  severe  dose  of  rheumatism  which  confined  me  to  bed  for  three  years. 
My  time  while  ill  was  spent  in  learning  to  play  the  guitar,  mandolin  and 
banjo  from   C.   D.   Schettler,   one  of  the  best  guitarists  in  the   United 


Mere  Whaanga 


Mei,  1941  TE  KARERE  659 

States.  In  this  condition  I  was  able  to  assiduously  study  music,  and 
spent  eight  hours  daily  for  a  period  of  three  years  practicing  and  play- 
ing my  instruments.  You  can  well  imagine  the  progress  one  would 
make  with  such  close  application.  I  wish  to  pay  tribute  here  to  the 
goodness  and  kindness  of  those  men  who  paid  for  all  my  medical  and 
musical  fees.  When  I  was  well  enough  to  walk  with  a  cane  (which  I 
have  done  ever  since)  I  was  sent  to  the  B.Y.U.  at  Provo  for  a  course 
in  commercial  training  and  at  the  same  time  study  choral  music,  theory 
and  harmony  under  Professor  Lund. 

Hawaiian  music  at  this  time  was  taking  the  American  public  by 
storm,  and  taking  advantage  of  my  training  joined  Ed.  Montgomery's 
Royal  Hawaiian  Quintette,  which  travelled  the  country,  playing  at  Los 
Angeles,  Ocean  Park,  San  Francisco  and  all  over,  coast  to  coast  and 
north  to  the   south. 

The  New  Year  of  1910  was  still  in  its  infancy  when  I  fell  in  love 
and  married  Ida  M.  Haley  of  Sacramento,  California.  Elder  Chris- 
tiansen of  Colorado  performed  the  ceremony.  Our  lives  from  this 
time  on  were  travel,  travel,  travel. 

While  travelling  with  our  own  troupe,  the  Hawaii-Maorian  Quintette, 
we  met  many  interesting  personalities,  including  William  F.  Cody 
(Buffalo  Bill),  John  Phillip  Sousa,  John  L.  Sullivan,  Jack  Johnson,  Sir 
Maui  Pomare  and  Queen  Liliouakalani  of  Hawaii.  At  the  meeting 
with  Liliuoakalai,  she  had  quite  a  tangi  with  me. 

While  playing  an  engagement  at  Highland  Park,  Quincy,  Illinois, 
I  received  a  letter  from  Brother  Goddard  to  come  home  and  make  pre- 
parations to  go  to  New  Zealand  to  teach  music  at  a  school  recently 
built  for  the  education  of  Maori  boys.  Upon  our  return  to  Salt  Lake 
we  met  Wiremu  Takana  and  his  wife  Takare,  Takerei  Ihaia  and  his 
wife  Emma,  and  the  other  members  of  their  party,  which  travelled  to 
Salt  Lake  City  to  enter  the  Temple  of  the  Lord. 

Our  arrival  in  Wellington  aboard  the  ship  "Willochra"  was  at  a 
time  when  wharf  labour  was  striking,  which  delayed  our  departure 
from  Wellington  for  Hawke's  Bay.  President  Romney  met  us  in  the 
capital,  where  we  visited  the  House  of  Parliament  and  there  had  the 
privilege  of  meeting  Sir  James  Carroll,  which  was  the  beginning  of  a 
friendship  that  lasted  until  his  demise. 

November  of  1913  we  arrived  at  Korongata,  to  take  up  our  duties 
at  the  M.A.  College.  Our  first  Christmas  was  spent  at  Nuhaka  during 
a  hui  nui.  Here  I  met  my  mother,  whom  I  could  not  remember,  but 
the  instincts  of  aroha  and  blood  kinship  so  sensitive  in  Polynesia  soon 
burst  the  barriers  of  Pakeha  influence,  and  mother  and  son  were  shed- 
ding tears  of  aroha  for  one  another.  My  wife  was  baptized  into  the 
Church  during  this  great  gathering  by  President  Romney  at  Hirere 
Creek,  the  same  place  where  I  was  baptized  twenty  years  or  more  before. 

Our  work  at  the  M.A.C.  has  been  the  most  pleasant  of  our  whole 
career.  At  no  time  have  we  had  any  feeling  of  regret,  and  if  there 
be  any  at  all,  it  is  that  the  good  work  has  not  gone  on  and  on. 

After  leaving  Kanab  and  settling  in  Salt  Lake  City,  Hirini  Whaanga 
and  Mere  and  Apikara  opened  and  begun  the  work  for  their  dead  ances- 
tors in  the  Temple.  This  work  they  kept  up  to  the  end  of  their  days. 
Hirini  was  sent  back  to  New  Zealand  for  some  months  on  a  mission 
where  he  did  a  tremendous  amount  of  good  among  his  people.  With 
his  return  to  Zion  his  work  in  the  Temple  continued  until  his  death 
on  October  17th,  1905,  after  an  operation  for  appendicitis.  With  his 
death,  Mere  returned  to  New  Zealand  on  a  mission  where  she  accom- 
plished much  among  the  people,  after  which  she  returned  to  the  States. 
Edna  Pomare  came  to  New  Zealand,  and  since  have  not  heard  about  her, 
Apikara  and  her  younger  son  Isaac  are  buried  Bide  by  side  with  Hirini 
Whaanga  in  the  City  Cemetery  in  Salt  Lake  City.  A  very  handsome 
monument  has  since  been  erected  to  the  memory  of  this  grand  old  man, 
Hirini  Whaanga. 


\LLLL 


1 


Just  after  the  Great  War.  Mere  Whaanga  and  her  family  of  grand- 
children, which  included  Sid  Christy  and  his  wife  Kate  with  their  grow- 
ing family,  returned  to  New  Zealand.  The  old  lady  was  never  satisfied 
ind  was  always  Longing  to  be  with  "te  koroua  ra."  When  Presi- 
dent Hardy  came  i  mission  just  recently  she  urged  him  to 
ask  the  Church  Authorities  to  let  her  go  back  again  to  Zion.  She  is 
tin  re  now. 

Ihaia.  the  older  son  of  Apikara.  took  up  randy-making  as  hi-  work, 

in   which   he   became  quite   proficient    as  a   chocolate-maker.     Having 

never  married  he  also  returned  to  Now  Zealand.  Sid  Christy,  the  old 
man's  favourite  grandson,  possessing  a  pleasing  voice,  travelled  far.  and 
often  entertaining  until  the  need-  of  his  family  required  his  persona] 
attention.  Throughout  his  stay  in  the  State-.  Sid  was  acclaimed  one 
of  the  best  athlete-  in  the  country,  excelling  in  running,  basketball  and 
football.  He  married  Kate  Welsh,  a  sister  of  the  present  Mrs,  Hon*  pa 
lleperi  of  Ngapuhi.  She  and  Rawiri,  a  son  of  Rawiri  M.  Kamau  of 
Korongata,  were  adopted  by  President  Magleby  and  taken  to  tie 
with    him    after    his   second    mis-ion    to    New    Zealand. 

Although  there  have  Ween  many  of  our  Maori  people  go  to  America 
and  Honolulu  to  work  in  the  Temples  of  God,  Hirini  and  Mere  Whaanga 
are  the  pioneers  of  our  people,  the    Maori,  in  Temple  work. 

Zion  Remembers  Her  People 

Hui  Tau  Greetings  ami  Best  Wishes 

from  President  Rufus  K.  I  lardy  ami 

many  of  the  Elders. 

Matthew  Cowley.  Xuhaka.  X.X. 

Our  thoughts  and  hearts  are  with 
you  in  your  glorious  Hui  Tau.  We  love 
you  all.  Fervently  we  pray  God's  choic- 
est blessings  upon  you.  Your  assembly 
is  unique.  One  Zion  Elder  only  in  your 
midst.  Mere  sends  greetings.  God  bless 
you  all  and  grant  us  p<  .. 

— Rufus  K.  Hardy. 

Matthew  Cowley,  Mormon  Community, 

Xuhaka.  X.X. 

Kia  ora  te  Hun.ua  Tapu.    Kia  pai  to 

Hui  Tau.    Kia  ngawari  tonu,  arohanui. 

Aldous.  Henderson,  Simpson.  Wallace, 

Smith.  Curtis.  Crandall.  Acomb,  Rudd. 
Drown.  Allen.  Langton,  Later.  Baum- 
gartner,  Lambert,  Biesinger,  Price, 
Evans,  Toronto,  Wride,  Johnston. 
Wheeler,  Dastrup,  Bigler,  Mason  Ott- 
Rupus  K.  Hardy  1('>\  Stirling,  Burningham. 


Th  one — 

"OUR   HOMES  AND  CHAPELS  SHALL  BE  BEAUTIFUL" 
"For  Zion  must   increase  in  beauty  and  in  Holiness:  her  borders 
must  he  enlarged;  her  stakes  must  be  strengthened;  yea  verily  I  say 
unto  you.    Zion  must  arise  and  put  on  her  beautiful  garments.' 

I  Do,  trine  a  I  ovenants  &2:  14.) 


Mei,  1941 


TE  KARERE 


661 


The  M.I.A.  at  Hui  Tau 

t 

By  S.  R.  TapscII  Meha  and  Annie  W.  Meha 

The  competitions  this  year  reached  a  very  high  standard.  Thanks 
to  the  wonderful  efforts  put  forth  by  the  branches.  Special  men- 
tion is  here  made  of  this  year's  winner — Xuhaka — whose  all  round 
display  placed  them  at  the  top,  equalling  the  best  efforts  of  any 
branch  in  the  past  and  excelling  this  time  in  the 
spirit  of  Mutual  accomplishment  and  spirit  of  Hui 
Tau. 

The  many  defaults  in  the  contests  only  show 
[the  amount  of  effort  put  into  M.I.A.  We  are  hoping 
j  and  trusting  that  what  was  witnessed  at  this  Hui 
Tau  will  be  sufficient  stimulus  and  challenge  for  more 
complete  participation  in  M.I.A.  activities  for  the 
coming  vear,  culminating  in  fuller  and  better  displavs 
Tapsell  Meha    next  prui  Tau. 

Preparation  is  what  counts.  Officers  and  teachers  are  here 
advised  to  better  prepare  their  organizations  and  themselves  for  the 
next  day  of  "reckoning" — next  Hui  Tau.  By  active  participation  in 
all  our  M.I.A.  activities  we  grow,  we  gain  something 
and,  above  all,  we  give  something. 

We    regret    very    much    that    circumstances    pre- 
vented the  Queen  Coronation.   Plans  are  under  way  to  / 
have  the  coronation  locally.   We  congratulate  Nuhaka] 
on  attaining  this  signal  honour  of  winning  this  Queen  \ 
Contest  as  well  as  gaining  the  victory  in  the  aggregate 
points  contest. 

It  is  fitting  to  remember  the  work  of  the  Zion 
Misionaries.  Our  work  this  day,  be  it  good  or  bad, ANNtE  **.  Meha 
owes  its  beginning  and  growth  to  the  efforts  of  the  brethren  and 
sisters  from  Zion.  We  remember  them  and  pay  tribute  to  their 
memory  by  quoting  from  President  Cowley's  dedicatory  remarks  as 
found  in  the  Hui  "Fan  Programme  in  the  April  issue  of  Te  Karere. 

"To  the  men  and  women,  numbering  more  than  one  thousand, 
who,  during  the  past  sixty  years,  have  come  to  New  Zealand  from 
their  homes  in  America  to  serve  God  by  serving  their  fellow-nun. 
this  Hui  Tan  programme  for  1941  is  respectfully  dedicated. 

For  the  first  time  in  the  history  of  the  Mission  a  llni  Tan  will 
be  convened  without  the  attendance  of  Zion  Elders.  They  will  be 
missed  by  .all,  hut  not  forgotten  by  any.  The  hearts  of  all  i^i  us  will 
be  turned  to  them  on  this  occasion  and  their  hearts  will  he  turned 
to  US. 

For  the  salvation  these  misionaries  have  broughl  to  our  shores 

let    us    honour    them    by    deeds    of    righteousness;    let    us    renew    the 
Covenants   we  have  made,   through   baptism  at    their  hands,  to  he   the 

Saints  of  the  Most  High  God.     God  bless  their  memory." 


TE  KARERE 


Ma,  1941 


M.I. A.  Results 


Numbei 

of    N 

umber  of     Is 

umber  of 

KinKlt" 

Branch                                                      Firsts 

Jeeoadi 

Thirds 

Kntries 

Totals 

Nuhaka 

29 

11 

11 

431 

Korongata 

10 

19 

8 

17 

273 

Tftinaki 

14 

9 

13 

12 

273 

Takitinui 

2 

7 

3 

3 

79 

Etotoraa 

3 

4 

2 

2 

67 

A  warn  a 

2 

3 

3 

0 

52 

Huria 

1 

2 

2 

7 

38 

Auckland 

1 

1 

2 

0 

26 

Mangamuka 

1 

0 

0 

0 

11 

Te   Hauke 

0 

1 

0 

4 

10 

Mangere 

0 

1 

0 

1 

7 

Kaikou 

0 

0 

1 

0 

4 

Te   Hapara 

0 

0 

1 

0 

4 

Possible  Score 

=   660 

N.B. — A  first  counting  the  one  point 

for  entry 

=   11 

A  second  counting  the 

one  point  for  entr> 

t  =     6 

A  third  counting  the 

one  point  for  entr> 

'  —     4 

An    entry 

=      1 

QUEEN  CONTEST 

Nuhaka                 .  . 

47,215 

Votes 

Korongata 

20,125 

Votes 

Tamaki                 .  . 

14,940 

Votes 

Mange  re 

10,555 

Votes 

Ngapuhi 

10,000 

Votes 

GENEALOGY 


/>  v  Teao  II  'irihana 


Cottage  Meetings  for  the  Month  of  May 

May    8 — Lesson   27,   "A  Daughter  of  Kings." 
15 — Lesson   28, 
„      22 — Lesson   29, 


"Winning  Religious  Freedom." 
"A  Convert  from  Spain." 


29 — Lesson   30,   "Peopling  the  New  World." 

Home  Teaching 

E  nga  komiti  whakapapa  o  ia  Peka  o  ia  Peka,  mahia  nga 
rehana  i  nga  po  Taite. 

Whakatauki 

"Ka  haere  atu  ano  ra. 

whakapipiri." 


Ka  hoki  mai  ki  roto  i  nga  kapua 


Mei,  1941 


TE  KARERE 


663 


Matthew  Cowley 


52nd  Annual  Conference 

By  George   Watene,  Mission  Secretary 

Nuhaka,  a  thriving  village  centrally  located  in  the  Mahia  District, 
again  welcomed  and  served  the  gathered  Saints  and  friends  attending 
the  1941  Hui  Tau  of  the  Church  of  Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-day  Saints 
in  the  New  Zealand  Mission.  The  familiar  grounds  and  buildings  of  the 
marae  demonstrated  most  pleasantly  the  care  and  preparations  entailed 
by  the  home  people  in  providing  for  the  ade- 
quate needs  of  comfort  and  facilities  for  the 
activities  of  the  Conference. 

Historically,  this  conference  is  unique,  Presi- 
dent Matthew  Cowley  being  the  only  Zion  Elder 
present,  the  only  occasion  of  such  an  event  in  this 
Mission,  incidentally,  this  is  the  ninth  Hui  Tau 
attended  by  President  Cowley.  Although  the  Zion 
Elders  have  returned  home,  the  Mission  is  ade- 
quately supported  under  the  leadership  of  Presi- 
dent by  5  High  Priests,  1  Seventy,  402  Elders, 
328  Priests,  157  Teachers  and  528  Deacons.  The 
main  body  of  visitors  to  the  Hui  arrived  en  masse 
by  special  train  from  as  far  north  as  Okaihau, 
and  Dunedin  in  the  south,  on  Thursday  evening, 
10th.  People  were  gathering  to  the  marae  all 
that  day  even  until  Saturday  morning,  coming  by 
bus  and   automobile  from  everywhere. 

Friday  dawned  beautifully  to  commence  Hui  Tau  activity  with 
M.I.A.  competitions.  Of  importance  to  the  conference,  and  the  Maori 
people  particularly,  was  the  arrival  and  participa- 
tion of  Sir  Apirana  Ngata,  M.P.,  and  his  party, 
which  included  Turi*  Carroll  and  Lady  Ngata.  The 
honoured  guests  were  fittingly  welcomed,  and  at  the 
special  service,  where  speeches  were  made,  Sir 
Apirana  remarked  at  the  work  of  the  Church  among 
the  Maori  people,  commenting  also  on  the  fact  that 
as  a  Church  we  were  conspicuous  in  that  we  had 
no  Maori  carved  whare  wananga  in  the  Mission 
where  our  people  could  preserve  Maori  arts  and 
culture,  further  commenting  very  favourably  on  the 
remarks  of  President  Cowley  pertaining  to  the 
struggle  now  ravaging  the  nations  of  the  earth  as 
it  came  from  a  minister  of  the  Church.  The  M.I.A. 
then  continued  their  various  contests  throughout  the 
day.  The  Primary  programme  commenced  at  7.30 
p.m.  under  the  direction  of  Sister  Elva  T.  Cowley, 
where  the  children  impressively  portrayed  by  song, 
scriptural  quotations  and  tableau  the  theme,  "Gospel  of  Peace."  This 
programme  was  definitely  one  of  the  highlights  of  the  Conference. 

The  meeting  of  the  Mission  Secretary  with  all  District  and  Branch 
Presidencies  and  their  secretaries  was  convened  in  the  Chapel  Saturday 
morning,  where  matters  pertaining  to  District  and  Branch  were  dis- 
cussed and  settled.  At  this  time  also,  the  Primary  Association  officers 
and  teachers  were  receiving  their  instructions  and  suggestion  under 
the  supervision  of  Sister  Elva  Cowley.  Here  lesson  work  was 
ably  demonstrated,  new  games  and  songs  were  also  given.  A 
special  drive  for  the  "three-penny  fund"  was  inaugurated,  stressing 
particularly  the  need  for  co-operation  of  parents  in  this  campaign.  It 
is  as  well  to  mention  here  the  results  of  the  Handwork  displays  of  the 
Primary.      "Jumpers" — Whakaki  and  Nuhaka  tied   for  first   place,  both 


Sir  A.  T.  Ngata 


I  I     KARERE 


Mn.   1«M1 


belong  to  the  Mania  District.     "Scarves"     Whakaki 
winning  first  and  second  pla<  Handwork"-    Tah'aenui     The 

Primary  offering  the  most   entries  was  Opoutj 
All   of   these   award   winners   are   from   the   Mania 
District     Well  done. 

The  first  Genera]  Session  of  Conf< 
menced  at   h>  a.m.     Daring  this  period 
the    Tamaki    and    Korongata    choirs    rendered    the 
"Hallelujah  Chorus"  in  Maori,  which  was  the  choir 
tt  st   :  '   p.m.  the  Becond  General  S< 

nference  was  convened,  where  the  Nuhaka  and 
Huria  choirs  participated.  The  first  business  trans- 
:  during  the  morning  session  was  the  presenta- 
tion of  the  names  of  the  General  Authorities  i 
Church,  the  General  Officers  and  Authorities  of  the 
New  Zealand  Mission  for  the  vote  of  the  Confer- 
ence, they  were  unanimously  sustained.  Here  also 
was  honoured   the  memory  of   Elder   Heed   Smoot   of  Kj*rf| 

lined    of    the    Twelve    Apostles,    w  i  -JTsLMflflEfltT" 

died. 

The   reunion   of  the   M.A.C.    Old    Boys  took   the         r  •■ 

form  of  a  concert,  which  was  staged  in  the  L.D.S.  ",KV 

Hall,     of  special   interest   on  this  programme  was  the  appearai 

lldentS  t(»  attend  the  College,  and  only  re- 
turned after  1  1  years'  touring,  visiting  India.  Africa. 
Spain.  France.  Japan.  China  and  many  other  coun- 
tries of  Europe  and  Asia.  His  talk  of  travels  and 
experiences  were  really  flights  into  the  realm  of  ad- 
venture. The  evening's  programme  for  the  day 
was  sponsored  by  the  M.I. A.,  where  many  of  the 
winning  competitive  events  were  well  received.  A 
further  continuation  of  contest  work  was  also  a 
feature  of  the  evening,  which  took  the  form  <■:' 
hakas.    action    BOngS,    DOis    and    dan< 

Priesthood  and  Relief  Society  began  the  Sab- 
bath when  each  conducted  general  meetings.  Presi- 
dent Cowley  conducted  the  Priesthood,  where  much 
work  was  accomplished.  The  attendance  showed  5 
High  Priests,  l  Seventy,  1  LO  Elders,  9  Pries! 
Teachers,  9  Deacons  and  10  visitors.  The  Relief 
Society,  under  the  direction  of  Pare  Takana.  offered 
instructions  to  officers  and  teachers  for  the  coming 
year's  activities.  The  general  message  of  the  gather- 
ing was  very  aptly  presented  by  Sister  Eava  T. 
Cowley,  stressing  the  heautification  of  homes  and  chapels,  and  assisting 
the  Priesthood  in  the  Welfare  Project  which  was  officially  launched  dur- 
ing the  afternoon  session  on  Saturday  by  President  Cowley,  naming 
Wipere  Amaru  as  Supervisor.     Sister  Ani  I..  Kamau  demonstrated  the 

handwork  for  the  coming  year.  As  it  pertains  the  work  of  the  women 
of  the  Mission,  the  marquee  containing  the  handwork  of  the  Relief 
Societies  and  Primaries  presented  the  many  interested  visitors  a  glimpse 
Of  what  these  organizations  are  endeavouring  to  foster  and  teach.  The 
beautiful  quilts,  aprons  Of  various  typo.  Maori  art  of  many  kinds, 
ind  the  many  other  displays  typified  the  wonderful 
patience,  culture  and  thrift  of  the  women  and  children  in  the   M 

The  Sunday  School  meeting  at  10.30  a.m.  was  conducted  by  Sydney 
Crawford,  Superintendent  of  the  Hawke's  Bay  District  Sunday  Schools, 
at  the  request  of  Kelly  Harris,  Mission  Sunday  School  Secretary,  where 
the  theme,  "Our  Homes  and  Chapels  shall  be  Beautiful,"  was  the  essence 
of  the  programme.  Particular  emphasis  was  given  the  "theme"  when 
President   Cowley   spoke   to   the   conference.        Before    concluding   the 


Wipere  Amaru 


Mei,  1941 


TE  KARERE 


665 


meeting,  in  as  much  as  the  Auckland  District  choir  participated  in  the 
choir  contest  during  this  meeting,  Walter  Smith,  adjudicator  for  the 
choral  contest,  attested  Korongata  first,  Tamaki  second,  and  Nuhaka 
third.  Following  was  the  instruction  meeting  for  the  benefit  of  the 
Sunday  School  officers  and  teachers,  which  was  very  well  attended  and 
so  worthwhile  in  its  purpose  of  unifying  all  phases  of  the  work, 
'particularly  the  record  keeping.  General  questions 
were  clarified.  All  reports  by  branches  to  be  made 
in  triplicate,  one  for  own  use,  one  to  District,  and 
the  other  to  the  Mission  S.S.  Secretary  every  quar- 
ter. The  need  to  have  every  member  of  the  branch 
active  in  Sunday  School  work  was  the  high  spot  of 
the  proceedings,  and  following  in  this  vein,  more 
contributors  to  the  "six-penny  fund,"  which  will  be 
required  half-yearly. 

The  afternoon  Session  of  Conference  was  of 
special  interest  to  the  Mahia  District  people.  Par- 
ticulars of  this  meeting  will  be  found  elsewhere  in 
this  issue.  The  European  Saints  attending  the  Hui 
Tau,  met  in  the  Chapel  under  the  direction  of 
President  W.  R.  Perrott  of  the  Auckland  Branch 
and  District.  The  number  who  attended  were  few, 
but  certainly  they  were  well  rewarded. 

In    concluding   the    General    Sessions    of    Con- 
ference the  Relief  Society  began  the  evenin's  ser- 
vice with  speeches,   ending  with  a  very  impressive 
"Books  of  the  Bible"  as  its  theme.      The  Priesthood 


■- 

i 

1 . 

^v\     * 

z 

i 

Rangi.  Puriri 


pageant,  with  the 

then  assumed  control  and,  in  the  speeches,  blessed  the  people  and  re- 
membered to  thank  our  Heavenly  Father  for  His.  blessings  to  us  all. 
The  gems  of  thought  and  inspiration  presented  by  President  Cowley 
during  the  entire  Conference  and  taken  up  by  the  speakers  of  the  Hui 
will  live  spiritually  with  the  Saints  and  friends,  lifting  them  to  heights  of 
spiritual  hope  and  practical  application.  This  Hui  Tau  was  decidedly 
the  most  spiritual  in  recent  years.  In  concluding  this  report  of  such 
a  memorable  conference,  the  underlying  current  of  spiritual  vigour 
that  was  peacefully  felt  by  all  was  the  knowledge  that  Missionaries 
from  Zion  who  have  since  returned  are  remembering  this  land  during 
this  Hui  Tau,  that  their  labour  of  salvation  among  us  were  sincerely 
appreciated. 

The  Monday  was  given  over  to  sports,  which  were  expeditiously 
concluded  in  the  forenoon.  From  Thursday  afternoon  until  Monday 
afternoon  the  Lord  blessed  the  Hui  with  ideal  weather.  Warm  sun- 
shine during  the  day  and  lovely  cool  evenings  were  blessings  vividly 
appreciated  in  view  of  the  fact  that  at  approximately  noon  a  cold  wind 
warned  the  coming  of  a  storm.  A  storm  it  was.  Rair  and  wind  at 
gale  ferocity  necessitated  vacating  all  large  and  small  marquees  and 
tents.  The  people  were  moved  with  all  their  belongings  into  the  Chapel 
and  Hall,  where  unfortunately  the  Coronation  Ball,  which  was  to  take 
place  in  the  Hall,  had  to  be  suspended.  At  the  height  of  the  storm 
the  unity  of  the  people  under  one  roof  in  the  Hall  set  a  seal  of  strength 
and  courage  upon  the  gathered  Israelites  that  compensated  in  measure 
the  forfeiting  of  the  crowning  M.I. A.  achievement  of  the  Hui  Tau.  the 
coronation  of  the  winning  queen  and  the  presentation  of  awards. 

Of  noticeable  interest  during  the  Sessions  of  Conference  was  the 
appearance  on  the  stand  with  President  Cowley  of  Rangikawea  Puriri 
of  Korongata,  Hastings.  This  young  man,  nearing  the  century  in  years, 
was  accorded  this  signal  honour  by  President  Cowley  at  the  last  Hui 
Tau,  1940,  and  Brother  Rangikawea  Puriri  will  have  B  place  on  the 
stand  at  every  meeting  at   all   future  Bui  Tains)   during  his  Life. 

Tena  koutou  te  hunga  kainga.  Special  blessings  are  yours  for  your 
labours  and  sacrifices  to  give  us  such  a   Hui  Tau.   Kia  ora  koutou  katoa. 


666  TE  KARERE  Ma  l'Ml 

PRIMARY 

SLOGAN  FOR  1941 

"And  they  shall  also  teach  their  children  to  praj  and  to  walk 
uprightly  before  the  Lord."  I  Doc  &  Gov.  68:28.) 

RESOLUTION  FOR  EACH   CHILD 
"I  will  help  to  keep  m\  home,  my  chapel  and  my  marae  beautiful." 

PROJECT 
'*I  will  learn  the  'Articles  of  Faith.'  " 

LESSONS: 

FIRST  WEEK 

Objective: 

The  truest  happiness  comes  from  serving  the  Lord. 

To  the  Teacher: 

In  the  preparation  of  this  lesson  it  will  be  well  to  read  the  Bible  text 
carefully.  Talk  with  the  children  about  temples  and  show  pictures  of  one 
or  more,  that  they  may  understand  the  reference  to  the  temple  where 
Hannah  prayed.  Help  the  children  to  understand  that  Samuel's  service  in 
the  temple  brought  him  near  to  our  Father  in  Heaven.  Take  advantage 
of  the  splendid  opportunity  to  instill  in  the  minds  of  the  children  that 
there  is  joy  in  service.  Our  task  this  month  is  to  help  boys  and  girls 
fill  well  the  place  in  which  they  now  find  themselves  and  qualify  for  a 
greater  service  that  they  may  receive  greater  joy. 

Lesson    Story: 

A  BOY  WHO  LIVED  IN  THE  TEMPLE 

Hannah  was  a  woman  who  lived  long  ago.  Her  home  was  in  the 
hill  country.  In  spring  time  it  was  a  delightful  place  to  live.  The 
hills  about  Hannah's  home  were  beautiful  with  grass  and  flowers.  Han- 
nah had  a  good,  kind  husband  who  loved  her,  but  she  was  often  sad 
and   lonely   because   the   Lord   had  given  her   no   little   boys   and   girls. 

Every  year  Hannah  and  her  husband  went  to  a  place  called  Sheloh 
to  worship  God. 

Once  when  they  went  to  Sheloh  to  the  beautiful  temple  there, 
Hannah  went  away  by  herself  and  prayed  to  Our  Heavenly  Father  that 
He  would  send  her  a  son.  She  promised  the  Lord  that  if  she  had  a 
son  she  would  lend  him  to  the  Lord  all  the  days  of  his  life.  She  meant 
that  she  would  take  the  child  to  the  temple  when  he  was  old  enough 
and  let  him  stav  there  and  work  for  the  Lord  instead  of  living  at  home 
with  her. 

God  heard  Hannah's  prayer  and  sent  a  little  son  to  her.  She 
named  him  Samuel.  Oh  how  happy  Hannah  was!  She  was  very 
thankful,  too,  to  her  Heavenly  Father  and  sang  songs  of  praise  to  Him. 
Sometimes  she  was  just  a  little  sad  for  she  wanted  to  keep  her  little 
boy  always  with  her,  but  she  remembered  her  promise  to  lend  him 
to  the  Lord  and  she  kept  it. 

When  little  Samuel  was  old  enough  to  leave  his  mother  she  took 
him  to  the  Temple. 

She  went  to  Eli,  the  high  priest  in  the  temple  and  said:  "I  prayed 
to  the  Lord  for  this  child  and  He  gave  me  what  I  asked  for;  now  I 
bring  him  back  that  he  may  serve  the  Lord  here." 


Mei,  1941  TE  KARERE  667 

So  Hannah  left  her  little  boy  in  the  temple  with  Eli.  She  kissed 
him  goodbye  and  went  back  to  her  home,  which  was  a  long  way  from 
the  temple.  Eli,  the  priest,  took  charge  of  Samuel  and  treated  him 
as  if  her  were  his  own  child.  He  provided  a  little  bed  for  him  in  the 
holiest  place  in  the  temple.  When  he  grew  to  boyhood,  Eli  gave  him 
certain  duties  to  perform  in  the  temple.  The  Bible  says  "he  ministered 
before  the  Lord"  which  means  that  he  helped  Eli  in  the  temple  in  a 
quiet  gentle  way.  All  the  men  who  came  to  the  temple  loved  Samuel, 
and  the  Lord  loved  him  and  was  pleased  with  him. 

No  doubt  Hannah  was  often  lonely  for  her  little  son.  She  thought 
about  him  every  day  though  she  could  go  to  see  him  only  once  a  year. 
Every  time  she  went  to  see  him  she  gave  him  a  beautiful  white  linen 
coat. 

She  was  very  happy  when  she  found  that  all  the  people  loved  little 
Samuel,  but  more  happy  to  know  the  Lord  also  loved  him. 

One  night  when  Samuel  was  lying  asleep  on  his  little  bed  in  the 
temple  he  was  awakened  by  a  voice  calling  "Samuel,  Samuel!"  He 
arose  immediately  and  went  to  Eli  and  said,  "Here  am  I,  You  called  me?" 

The  old  priest  said,  "No  I  did  not  call  you,  Samuel.  Go  and  lie 
down  and  go  to  sleep." 

Samuel  went  back  to  his  bed,  but  no  sooner  had  he  lain  down  than 
he  heard  the  voice  again  calling,  "Samuel." 

Again  he  went  to  Eli  and  was  very  much  surprised  when  the  priest 
told  him  that  he  had  not  called  him.  Samuel  returned  to  his  bed.  Then 
for  the  third  time,  the  voice  called,  "Samuel."  The  boy  arose  and  went 
to  Eli,  saying,  "Here  am  I;  for  thou  didst  call  me." 

Eli  knew  now  that  it  was  the  Lord  who  had  spoken,  so  he  told 
Samuel  to  go  back  to  bed  and  if  his  name  were  called  again  to  say, 
"Speak,  Lord;  for  thy  servant  heareth." 

Samuel  went   and  lay  down   and   again  he  heard  the  voice. 

The  boy  answered  as  he  had  been  told  by  Eli.  Then  the  Lord 
told  Samuel  that  he  was  displeased  with  Eli,  because  he  had  allowed 
his  sons  to  do  wicked  things  and  had  not  prevented  them. 

In  the  morning  Samuel  went  about  his  work.  The  priest  saw  that 
Samuel  looked  very  sad,  so  he  called  him  to  him  and  said,  "Samuel, 
my  son,  what  did  the  Lord  tell  thee  last  night?  Do  not  fear  to  speak; 
I  wish  to  know  the  truth.      Tell  me   all." 

Then  Samuel  told  him  all  that  the  Lord  had  said.  Eli  knew  it  was 
the  Lord  who  spoke  and  was  not  angry  with  Samuel.  Samuel  grew 
and  the  Lord  blessed  him  and  all  the  people  knew  he  was  chosen  to 
be   a  prophet   in   Israel. 

Conversation   After   the   Story: 

Show  the  picture,  The  Infant  Samuel.  Help  the  children  to  feel 
that  true  joy  comes  by  doing  what  is  right.  In  your  conversation  help 
the  children  to  see  the  difference  between  the  joy  that  came  to  Samuel 
who  served  the  Lord  because  he  loved  Him  and  the  sorrow  that  came 
to  Eli's  sons  who  did  not  serve  the  Lord.  How  can  you  serve  the  Lord? 
When  is  the  proper  time  to  begin? 

SECOND  WEEK 

DOING   ONE'S   SHARE 
Objective: 

To  help  the  children  to  be  aware  that  there  is  joy  in  helping  others. 

Suggestions  for  Teaching: 

The  successful  teacher  is  one  who  feels  and  lives  the  truth  she  is 
teaching.  Happiness  may  come  to  all,  if  they  are  thoughtful  and  try  to 
help.  There  are  many  ways  a  child  can  help  father,  mother,  brother, 
sister,  teacher,  or  playmates.     Help  him  to  rind  ways. 


TE  KARERE  \ln,  1941 

Lesson    Approach: 

It  seemed  that  one  day  an  old  clock  that  lived  in  Katie's  house 
started  to  talk.     It  said  impatiently: 

"I  have  been  running  for  a  hundred  years,  let  me  rest  now.  Have 
I   not  served   people   long   enough   to   deserve   a  rest?" 

"It  shall  be  as  you  say,"  replied  Katie's  father,  laying  aside  the 
key  and  shutting  up  the  glass  door  that  enclosed  its  tarnished  face.  In 
a  few  hours  the  clock  stopped  ticking.  Its  hands  stood  still  and  the 
pendulum  no  longer  flashed  from  right  to  left.  The  day  ended,  tin- 
long  night  passed,  and  morning  came.  The  same  stirring  sounds  as 
on  other  mornings  were  heard  in  the  street;  the  other  clocks  within  and 
without  went  on  striking  as  usual.  The  family  arose  for  the  duties  of 
the  day,  each  striving  to  help  each  other  in  some  simple  way.  But 
as  they  came  down  to  breakfast  each  one  stopped  on  the  stairs  and 
looked  at  the  old  clock,  saying: 

"How  we  miss  it!      How  strange  it  seems  not  to  hear  it  ticking!" 

"I  lay  awake  last  night,"  said  Katie's  mother,  "listening  for  it  to 
strike." 

"I  cannot  tell  you  the  time  now,  mother,"  said  little  Katie. 

And  so  the  second  day  passed.  But  toward  evening,  as  the  father 
came  in  sight,  suddenly  the  clock  cried  out: 

"Come,  wind  me  up  and  set  me  going  again,  for  I  would  rather 
not  be  at  all  than  exist  without  being  a  blessing  to  someone. 

Conversation: 

When  our  feet  become  tired  and  do  not  feel  like  running  errands. 
what  can  we  remember?  How  will  the  story  help  us?  Let  the  chil- 
dren name  two  ways  that  little  hands  like  their's  may  bless  others  at 
home  each  day.  What  other  places  may  they  be  of  service?  What  can 
you  do  at  Primary  to  help? 

Lesson  Story: 

TWO  SISTERS 

Janet  and  Margie  were  two  sisters  who  helped  each  other  and 
played  together  every  day.  Janet  was  eight,  but  Margie  was  just  five 
ami  was  a  rolly-polly  little  girl.  She  was  a  good  sister  and  liked  to 
help  Janet.  One  night  Janet  was  taking  her  dolls  to  bed.  She  had 
five   in  her  arms  and  couldn't  turn  the   light  on. 

"Wait  a  minute,"  said  Margie;  "I'll  turn  it  on  for  you."  She 
couldn't  reach  the  switch  so  she  pushed  a  chair  to  the  wall,  climbed 
up  and  on  went  the  light. 

One  day  when  Janet  and  Margie  went  to  school,  the  sun  was  shin- 
ing, but  when  they  started  home  the  wind  was  blowing.  "Woo-oo," 
went  the  wind  and  both  little  girls  buttoned  their  coats  up  tight.  Soon 
Mr.  Wind  came  harder,  "Woo-oo,  woo-oo,"  he  said,  blowing  right  into 
their  faces. 

"That  hurts  my  cheeks  and  nose,"  said  Margie. 

"It  goes  right  through  my  coat,"  said  Janet.  "Let's  try  walking 
backwards." 

They  tried  that  a  little  way,  but  Margie  stumbled. 

"Oh  dear!"  she  cried,  "we  can't  get  home." 

"Yes  we  can,"  said  Janet.      "Come,  I'll  take  your  hand." 

Then  Mr.  Wind  became  fierce.  "Woo-oo,  woo-oo,  woo-oo,"  he 
shrieked.  He  pushed  so  hard  that  Margie's  little  feet  just  couldn't 
go,  and  she  began  to  cry.  Janet  felt  like  crying,  too.  but  she  thought, 
"I  musn't.  I  must  get  Margie  home."  So  she  said  "Now  just  duck 
your  head  like  this  so  that  the  wind  won't  hit  your  face  so  hard.  See,  we 
are  nearly  to  the  corner.  When  we  turn  up  the  next  street  maybe  the 
wind  won't  be  so  strong." 


Mei,  1941  TE  KARERE  669 

So  they  went  on,  one  step,  then  another,  then  another,  until  they 
reached  the  corner.  The  wind  wasn't  nearly  so  bad  on  that  block, 
and  then,  they  were  home. 

Mother  had  them  sit  by  a  nice  warm  fire  and  gave  them  warm 
milk  to   drink.      Soon  they  were   feeling  fine   again. 

"I  wonder,"  said  Margie,  "what  the  other  children  did,  the  ones 
that  don't  have  a  sister  like  Janet  to  help  them  home?" 

THIRD  WEEK 

GOOD  POSTURE 
Objective: 

To  help  the  children  form  the  habit  of  sitting  an  standing  properly. 
To  make  them  aware  of  their  responsibility  to  care  for  the  bodies  God 
has  given  to  them. 

Suggestions  for  Teacher: 

The  privilege  of  the  Primary  teacher  is  unlimited  in  directing, 
encouraging  and  inspiring  the  right  kind  of  growth;  the  most  valuable 
habits,  and  the  most  healthful  and  helpful  attitudes  towards  the  care 
and  growth  of  our  bodies  and  minds.  Deepen  the  children's  apprecia- 
tion for  God's  gift  of  good  health  and  help  them  to  be  aware  that  they 
must  work  with  Him  to  be  well  and  strong. 

Lesson   Story: 

In  a  corner  of  a  field  on  Mr.  Green's  farm,  there  stood  a  tall, 
straight  Oak  tree,  and  on  either  side  of  it  tiny  twin  Maples.  The 
three  trees  were  great  friends,  and  the  beautiful  stately  Oak  watched 
over  the  baby  Maples,  and  told  them  what  they  should  do  in  order 
to  grow  tall  and  straight  and  strong,   and  useful  as  well  as  beautiful. 

"You  must  send  your  roots  down  into  the  earth,"  he  said,  "and 
take  all  the  nourishing  food  and  water  that  you  can;  but,  above  all 
you  must  stand  very  straight  and  firm  when  the  North  Wind  blows, 
and  not  bow  and  bend  before  him."  And  each  little  Maple  said,  "I 
will  try." 

But  the  wind  was  strong  and  the  little  Maples  were  weak,  and 
it  was  very  much  easier  to  bend  and  bow  before  the  wind  than  to  stand 
firm  when  he  blew  so  hard. 

"Be  careful,"  warned  the  Oak.  "Stand  straight,  little  trees,  your 
tiny  trunks  are  growing  larger  and  harder  every  day,  and  if  you  bow 
before  the  wind  they  will  grow  crooked  and  you  will  not  be  able  to 
straighten  them." 

For  a  time  each  little  Maple  said  bravely,  "I  will  try." 

But  after  a  time  the  great  Oak  felt  sad,  for  when  he  said,  "Stand 
straight  and  firm,  little  friends,"  he  often  heard  an  impatient  and 
peevish  little  voice  answer,  "O  dear,  I  can't  stand  straight  all  the  time, 
it  is  too  much  trouble.  The  North  Wind  is  so  strong  I  must  bend  and 
bow  before  him.  When  summer  time  comes  and  soft  breezes  blow  it 
will  not  be  hard,  and  then  I  will  straighten  my  back.  And,  besides,  what 
difference  does  it  make? 

The  wise  Oak  sighed  and  sighed  for  his  little  friend.  He  spread 
out  his  arms  and  tried  to  protect  the  Maple,  but  North  Wind  swept 
through  them  and  made  the  Maple   bend. 

Time  passed  and  one  day  Farmer  Green,  showing  a  visitor  over 
his  farm,  paused  beside  the  three  trees  in  the  field. 

"What  a  beautiful  oak  tree,"  said  the  visitor. 

"Yes,"  said  the  farmer,  "and  as  useful  as  it  is  beautiful.  The 
children  love  to  play  under  its  shade;  they  use  the  acorns  for  CUDS  and 
saucers,  and  they  try  to  reach  around  its  big  trunk.      They  call  it  'their' 


TE   K  \\<\  \<l.  M,,.   I'M! 

tree.  The  animals.  tOO,  love  it;  they  seek  its  shade  when  the  sun  grows 
hot,  and  its  shelter  when  the  rain  falls,  and  people  for  miles  around 
it    knew   and   low    it.    it    is   BO    Straight    and    strong.      A    beautiful   tree    is 

a  joy  to  everyone.     Then  his  face  changed  as  he  pointed  to  the  twin 

maples. 

those   maples?"   he  aaked. 
"When   I   planted  them,  they  seemed  equally  strong  and  sturdy, 
hut  look  at  the  difference  now.     That  straight   little  fellow  will  some 

day  l>e  as  Strong  and  beautiful  as  the  old  oak.  hut  the  wind  must  have 
been  tOO  much  for  the  Other  one;  see  how  the  trunk  is  twisted  and 
bent  and  gnarled;  it  can  never  be  straight  now.  for  its  trunk  Is  too 
hard.      We  will  have  to  cut  it  down  for  firewood." 

"It  is  a  pity,"  the  visitor  agreed.  "Do  you  know  what  those  trees 
remind  me  of?  Twin  hoys  who  live  near  me.  One  is  the  straightest 
little  fellow  I  ever  saw.  and  he  walks  with  his  head  high  and  his 
shoulders  squared.  He  is  a  handsome  lad.  The  other  slouches  along:, 
shoulders  bent  and  head  down.  One  cannot  help  but  feel  that  their 
minds  are  like  their  bodies,  and  that  the  one  will  become  a  fine  strong- 
man doing  worthwhile  things,  a  man  everyone  is  glad  and  proud  to 
know;  and  that  the  other  one  will  never  be  good   for  anything." 

"That's  it."  said  the  farmer.  "If  you  could  only  make  them  under- 
stand when  there  is  yet  time — when  they  are  young;  that  would  be  fine. 
But  boys  are  all  alike,  I  fear.  They  will  not  listen  to  the  advice  of 
older  and  wiser  people.  They  want  to  go  their  own  way.  and  when 
they  get  there,   it    is  usually  too  late  to  turn   back." 

When  the  farmer  and  his  friend  had  left  the  field,  the  crooked 
little  Maple  cried  in  despair:  "Oh,  Friend  Oak,  why  did  I  not  listen  to 
you.  why  did  I  not  try  to  stand  straight  and  firm  even  though  it  was 
hard?      Now  it  is  too  late,  too  late." 

The  Oak  and  the  Brother  Maple  sighed  in  sympathy  for  him,  hut 
they  didn't  know  a  thing  they  could  do.  Through  the  long,  long  winter 
this  careless  little  tree  had  bent  and  swayed  with  the  North  Wind.  And 
when  the  summer  breezes  blew  and  everything  was  turning  green,  he 
found  he  could  not  straighten  his  crooked  back.  He  did  not  straighten 
himself  when  he  could,  and  only  he  could  keep  himself  straight. 

As  he  waited  through  the  night  for  the  next  day,  when  the  men 
were  to  cut  him  down  and  he  was  to  die,  he  thought  of  the  boy  who 
was  growing  weak  and  crooked,  and  he  longed  as  he  never  had  longed 
for  anything  before,  for  the  power  to  speak  to  him — to  tell  him  the 
lesson  that  had  come  to  him  from  the  wise  Oak — the  lesson  he  had 
not  heeded: 

"Don't  wait,  don't  wait  until  it  is  too  late.  Don't  let  your  body 
grow  bent  and  crooked  until  you  cannot  straighten  it  no  matter  how 
hard  you  try.  Stand  straight  and  strong  and  firm,  so  that  your  body 
and  your  mind  will  grow  straight  and  strong  and  firm.  Don't  wait  until 
it  is  too  late — too  late!" 

That  night  the  boy  had  a  strange  dream.  He  dreamed  he  was  the 
crooked  little  tree  in  Farmer  Green's  field.  When  it  was  winter  and 
the  winds  blew  hard  and  cold,  he  did  not  mind  being  crooked.  But  by 
and  by,  spring  came,  warm,  gentle  spring,  and  he  wanted  to  stand 
erect  and  draw  deep  breaths  of  its  soft  air.  But  try  as  he  would,  he 
could   not   straighten   out  his   trunk  and   his   crooked   limbs. 

Cold  with  terror,  the  boy  awoke  to  find  himself  in  his  little  white 
bed,  all  twisted  and  cramped  into  a  ball.  Cautiously  at  first  he  stretched 
his  legs  out  straight  and  threw  his  rounded  shoulders  back  flat  and 
erect  against  the  bed. 

"How  fine  to  be  straight  again,"  he  said  to  himself  in  the  dark- 
ness. I'm  going  to  try  to  keep  this  way  always,  and  not  be  bent  and 
ugly  like  Farmer  Green's  tree." 

Conversation: 

Talk  with  the  children  about  what  it  means  to  have  good  posture. 


Mei,  1941  TE  KAREKE  ^^^S 

FOURTH  WEEK 

JESUS  FEEDS  THE  FIVE  THOUSAND 
Text: 

Matthew     .4:13-21;   Mark  6:32-44;  Luke   9:10-17;  John   6:1-14. 

Objective: 

To  help  the  children  to  know  that  Christ's  understanding  kindness 
extended  to  the  physical  needs  of  the  people  as  well  as  to  the  spiritual. 

Suggestions   for  Studying  the  Objective: 

Because  Thy  loving  kindness  is  better  than  life,  lips  shall  praise 
Thee. — Psalms  63:  3. 

"It  is  the  little  acts  of  kindness  the  little  courtesies,  the  disposition 
to  be  accommodating,  to  be  helpful,  to  be  sympathetic,  to  be  unselfish, 
to  be  careful  not  to  wound  feelings,  to  be  considerate  of  others — these 
are  the  little  things  which  added  up  at  night  are  found  to  be  the  secret 
of  a  happy  day." 

Make  the  child  aware  that  the  Saviour  taught  by  example  many 
beautiful  lessons  and  that  all  who  try  to  do  the  things  he  preached  and 
practiced  are  better  and  happier  people. 

Suggestions  for  Teacher: 

The  picture,  Christ  Feeding  the  Five  Thousand,  would  make  a  good 
introduction.  If  you  cannot  procure  a  picture,  make  a  simple  drawing 
on  the  blackboard  or,  if  a  board  isn't  available,  a  large  sheet  of  paper 
will  answer  the  purpose. 

Lesson   Story: 

JESUS  FEEDS  THE  FIVE  THOUSAND 

In  this  story  we  find  Jesus  in  a  little  town  on  the  east  coast  of 
the  beautiful  Sea  of  Galilee. 

He  had  been  travelling  from  place  to  place  preaching  to  the  people 
and  healing  their  sick,  and  now  His  body  was  weary. 

The  Twelve  Apostles,  whom  Jesus  had  sent  two  by  two  into  other 
cities  to  preach,  had  returned  from  their  missionary  labours.  They 
"gathered  themselves  together  unto  Jesus,  and  told  Him  all  the  things, 
both  what  they  had  done  and  what  they  had  taught."  They  were  weary, 
too,  and  no  doubt  Jesus  noticed  it  for  "He  said  unto  them,  come  ye 
yourselves  apart  into  a  desert  place,  and  rest  awhile." 

This,  of  course,  the  disciples  were  glad  to  do.  They  would  cer- 
tainly enjoy  a  quiet  rest  with  their  Master.  So  they  all  went  quietly 
down  to  the  shore,  got  into  a  boat  and  sailed  across  the  sea  to  the 
eastern  shore. 

It  was  only  six  miles  across  the  Sea  of  Galilee  and  perhaps  the 
little  vessel  with  its  load  of  weary  passengers  sailed  very  slowly. 

When  Jesus  and  His  Apostles  reached  the  shore  they  climbed  a 
near-by  grassy  hill,  below  which  was  an  uninhabited  plain  covered  with 
grass  and  dotted  with  flowers.  They  wanted  peace  and  rest  for  so 
many  people  constantly  came  to  them  that  "they  had  no  leisure  so  much 
as  time  to  eat." 

They  thought  that  no  one  had  seen  them  leave,  but  in  this  they 
were  mistaken.  Very  soon  on  the  plain  below  them  a  great  crowd  of 
people  began  to  gather.  These  people  when  they  saw  Jesus  and  the 
Apostles  leave,  walked  around  the  sea  to   meet    them.     As  they   passed 


II    K  tRERE  Mn.  1«M1 

a  the  villages,   many   more  joined   them   until  there  was  a   mighty 

t»-     >ng.     And  as  it  was  the  time  for  the  Passover  Feast  in  Jerusalem 
perhaps  many  people  who  were  going  there  followed  also. 

Can  you  Bee  two  pictures:  one,  of  Jesua  and  His  Apostles  at  rest 
on  the  hillside,  the  other,  ■  great  crowd  of  people  on  the  plain  below. 

When  Jesua  locked  down  upon  the  people  who  were  waiting  for 
Him  He  "was  moved  with  compassion  toward  them."  He  could  not 
rest  when  they  needed  Him.  "So  in  His  love  and  pity  He  came  down 
among  them  and  spake  unto  them  of  the  Kingdom  of  GrOd,  and  healed 
them   that    had    need    of   healing." 

Hour  after  hour  passed  Rfl  the  charmed  crowd  listened  to  the 
words  of  the  Master. 

The  day  wore  on  until  the  sun  was  Betting  and  still  the  great 
crowd  listened,  without  a  thought  of  leaving.  Then  the  Apostle-  re- 
membered how  tired  Jesus  was  and  they  also  remembered  the  people 
who  were  so  far  from  their  homes,  without  food.  So  they  went  to 
Jesus  saying,  "This  is  a  desert  place,  ard  the  time  is  now  past  ;  send 
the  multitude  away,  that  they  may  go  into  the  villages,  and  buy  them- 
selves bread;  for  they  have  nothing  to  eat." 

They  were  surprised  when  they  heard  His  reply,  which  was.  "they 
need  not  depart;  give  ye  them  to  eat." 

This  seemed  strange  and  impossible  to  them.  They  wondered 
what  Jesus  meant  and  how  it  could  be  done. 

One  Apostle  asked,  "Shall  we  go  and  buy  food  and  give  them  to 
eat?"      To  this  Jesus  replied,  "How  many  loaves  have  ye?      Go  and  see." 

Andrew,  who  was  one  of  the  Apostles,  said:  "There  is  a  lad  here, 
which  hath  five  barley  loaves  and  two  small  fishes;  but  what  are  they 
among  so  many?" 

When  Jesus  heard  this  He  told  the  disciples  to  bid  the  people  sit 
down  by  fifties  and  by  hundreds.  In  a  short  time  five  thousand  men 
besides  the  woman  and  children  were  seated  on  the  grass.  It  was 
springtime  and  the  grass  was  long  and  green.  What  a  beautiful  sight 
it  must  have  been!  Someone  has  said  that  they  must  have  looked  like 
beautiful  flower-beds  in  a  garden. 

When  they  were  all  seated,  Jesus  "took  the  five  loaves  and  two 
fishes,  and  looking  up  to  heaven,  He  blessed,  and  brake;  and  gave  the 
loaves  to  the  disciples,  and  the  disciples  gave  them  to  the  multitude. 
And  likewise  of  the  fishes  as  much  as  they  would."  The  disciples 
passed  the  food  to  the  multitude  and  when  they  were  all  fed  "they 
took  up  the  fragments  that  remained,  twelve  baskets  full." 

This  miracle  made  a  great  impression  on  the  people.  Many  of 
them  said  to  each  other,  "This  is  of  a  truth  that  prophet  that  should 
come  into  the  world."      Others  said,  "This  is  the  Christ." 

They  were  ready  to  crown  Jesus  as  their  King.  They  were  excited 
and  were  planning  to  compel  Him  to  do  as  they  wished. 

Jesus  was  grieved  to  think  that  they  misunderstood  Him  and  what 
was  meant  when  He  spoke  of  "His  Kingdom."  He  urged  the  Apostles 
to  leave  the  crowd  and  go  back  to  the  other  shore.  When  they  had  gone 
and  the  multitude  had  gone  away  He  went  up  into  the  mountain  and 
there  again  he  was  alone  with  His  Father  in  Heaven. 

Teach: 

"Let's  Be  Kind  to  One  Another." 
Prayer: 

One  of  the  girls. 


% 


§ 


NOTICE  £ 


We  have  a  number  of  the  April  issue  of  "Te  Rarere"  on 
hand  which  contains  the  pictures  of  the  Missionaries  from 
Zion  since  the  arrival  of  President  Cowley.  These  copies  are 
available  at  6d.  each. 


i 


The  fallowing  quaint  notice  zvas  posted  on  a  church 
door: — 

MISSING 
Last  Sunday,  some  families  from  church. 

STOLEN 
Several   hours    from  the   Lord's   day,   by   a   number   of 
people  of  different  ages  dressed  in  their  Sunday  clothes. 

STRAYED 

Half-a-score  of  lambs,  believed  to  have  gone  in  the 
direction  of  "No  Sunday  School." 

MISLAID 

A  quantity  of  silver  and  copper  coins  on  the  counter  of 
a  public  house,  the  owner  being  in  a  state  of  great  excitement. 

WANTED 
Several  young  people.     When  last  seen  were  walking  in 
pairs  up  Sabbath  Breakers'  Lane,  which  leads  to  the  City  of 
No  Good. 

\      LOST 

A  lad,  carefully  reared,  not  long  from  home,  and  for 
a  time  promising.  Supposed  to  have  gone  with  one  of  two 
older  companions  to  Prodigal  Town. 

Any  person  assisting  in  the  recovery  of  the  above  shall 
in  nowise  lose  his  reward. — Selected. 


For  use  in  home  Sunday  Schools,  with  the  family,  and  very 
suitable  for  congregational  singing  at  Hui  Pariha(s)  are  a 
limited  number  of  Song  Books  containing  30  hymns  with  music 
for  25  of  them.      The  price  per  copy  is  6d.  V^ 


I 


HUI  PARIHA  —  MOTHER'S  DAY  —  PARI  PARI,  HASTINGS  <f 
The  Hawke's  Bay  District  Hui  Pariha  will  be  held  at   Paki 

( v*>          Paki,  Hastings,  May  10th  and  11th,  which  will  be  the  occasion  I 

SK           of  celebrating  Mother's  Day  and   remembering  the   restoration  )K 

*Y\          of  the  Aaronic  Priesthood.  ? 

0® 

^>i#ov<^ ■•->.  '-•>.  '-:>.  '->.  '->.  '->.  '->. 


BRANCH  TEACHERS1 
MESSAGE 

"FAST   OFFERINGS — CHURCF    WELFARE    PLAN" 

OUR  Church  is  now  engaged  in  a  great  programme  designed 
for  the  present,  the  future  and  the  permanent  welfare 
of  all  the  members  of  the  Church.  For  the  first  time  in 
more  than  a  hundred  years,  a  plan  ha-  hern  provided  which 
will  demonstrate  to  the  world  the  effectiveness,  the  brother- 
hood, and  the  divinity  of  the  Gospel  plan. 

The  world  is  in  chaos.  The  prophecies  are  being  fulfilled. 
Regardless  of  what  others  think  and  do  in  times  like  these,  our 

Church   has  chartered  a   positive  course,   has  provided   a  definite 

plan,  and  calls  upon  all  members  t<»  join  in  making  it  successful. 

There  should  he  no  mistaken  notion  harhoured  hy  anyone 
that  the  Church  Welfare  Plan  is  temporary.  Such  is  not  the 
case.  It  is  a  permanent  plan  which  has  been  Set  up  hy  inspira- 
tion at  a  time  win  n  the  need  is  apparent.  It  is  designed  to 
help  our  people  meet  the  conditions  which  every  thoughtful 
person  recognizes  are  ahead.  In  addition,  it  is  designed  to 
emphasize  in  the  church  the  true  spirit  of  brotherhood,  as  re- 
vealed through  Joseph  Smith,  and  eventually  to  end  forever 
suffering,  humiliation,  and  distress  among  the  Latter-day  Saints. 

This  can  all  be  accomplished  through  the  CO-operatiOl]  and  un- 
selfish participation  of  all  faithful  and  loyal  members  of  the 
Church. 

The  foundation  of  the  Welfare  Plan  is  the  system  of  Fast 
Offerings  instituted  by  the  Lord  for  this  very  purpose.  This 
sound,  practical  and  effective  plan,  if  accepted  and  followed  hy 
all  members  of  the  Church,  will  make  possible  the  accomplish- 
ment of  every  objective  of  the  Welfare  Plan:  and.  in  addition, 
will    benefit    and    hies-    those    who    give,    as    well    as    those    who 

receive. 

Every  member  of  the  Church  who  desires  to  keep  the  com- 
mandments of  the   Lord,   and   assist    in   carrying  <»n    His   work 

here  on  the  earth,  should  accept  and  follow  in  its  true  spirit 
the  Fast    1  >ay  plan  of  the  Church. 

To  give  money  on  Past  Day  for  the  benefit  of  others  will 
bring  blessings  to  the  giver;  to  give  of  yourself,  in  addition, 
through   fasting  and   prayer,   following  the  true  spirit   of   the 

Day  will  multiply  those  blessings. 

The  desires  of  the  Lord  for  Hi-  people  are  clear.  He  has 
asked    that    we    refrain    from   two    meals   on   the    first    Sunday    of 

each  month,  and  give  the  equivalent  of  their  cost  to  those 
in  distress.     That  plan  has  never  been   rescinded,  changed  or 

modified.  It  stands  to-day  as  the  law  of  the  Church.  When 
it  i-  accepted  ami  followed  hy  all  members  of  the  Church.  tin- 
Welfare  Plan  will  provide  for  all  who  need,  and  will  make 
possible  both  the  temporal  and  spiritual  growth  and  pro{ 
in  the  Church  far  beyond  what  has  been  accomplished  in  the 
past. 

"As    for   me   and    my   house,    we   will    serve   the    Lord." 


Wahanga  35  Hune,  1941 


Nama  6 


Maori   Display   in    front   of    Fresno   Chapel   in   California.    (See    inside) 


1««.VJ  1I1IIHMU7. 


HOHEPA  METE  MEHA 


WITH   THE   ROYAL   N.Z.   AIR    FORCE  OVERSEAS 


To  be  the  first  Maori  Editor  of 
Te  Karere  was  the  honoured  lot  of 
Elder  Hohepa  ^lete  Hepa,  who.  when 
this  reaches  you,  will  have  left   New 

Zealand's  shores  for  overseas  service 
with  the  Royal  New  Zealand  Air 
Force. 

The   October,    1932.   issue   of    Te 
jA     ^^  Karcrc  proudly  hears  his  name  on  the 

BL        /    .  editorial    stall   as    Assistant    Editor    to 

Ml  %\  i  Elder  Gerald  J.  Gibb.  Six  months 
B^  JH^  |  later  he  assumed  the  Editor's  chair 
with  the  March,  1933.  issue  of  Te 
Karere  when  Elder  Gibb  returned  to  his  home  land  in 
Canada.  From  this  time  on  Elder  Meha  laboured  dili- 
gently and  faithfully  alone  for  more  than  two  years  guid- 
ing the  life  of  Te  Karcrc.  In  this  work  his  efforts  will 
live   to   honour  and   bless   his   memory. 

Associated  with  his  literary  work  in  the  Church. 
Brother  Meha  assumed  the  leadership  of  the  Mission 
Sunday  Schools  two  years  after  his  arrival  in  Auckland, 
when  Harold  Fred  Davis  left  for  America  in  September, 
1934.  Since  then  the  Mission  Sunday  Schools  and  the 
name  Hohepa  M.  Meha  have  become  as  one,  each  syn- 
onymous with  the  other. 

[n  his  work  as  man,  member  of  the  Church,  officer 
in  any  of  the  Auxiliaries,  and  as  a  unit  defending  demo- 
cracy. Elder  Hohepa  Mete  Meha  has  always  and  will 
always  give  of  his  best,  humbly  and  conscientiously,  with 
the  happy  smile  of  joyfully  appreciating  the  companion- 
ship of  all  about  him.  There  was  nothing  he  couldn't  do 
for  anyone.  If  a  fault  there  is  about  him,  it  is  that  one 
thing — trying  his  best  to  do  something  for  everyone  else, 
in  so  doing  fail  to  remember  something  he  promised  to 
do  either  for  himself  or  another.  Because  of  this  Hepa 
(Continued  on  Inside  Back  Cover) 


Te  Karere   I 


Wahanga  35 


Established  in  1907 
Hune,  1941 


Nama  6 


&&i-sj&Z  -*j&>i&>£&Z  -^F«  b&>»&>£& 


Matthew    Cowley 
Kelly   Harris 
Eru    T.    Kupa 
Waimate   Anaru 


Tumuaki    Mihana 
Etita 

Kaiwhakamaori 
Kaiwhakamaori 


"Ko  tenei  Pepa  i  zvhakatapaa  hex  hapai  ake  i  te  izvi  Maori  ki 
roto   i   nga  zvJiakaaro-nui.' 

"Te  Karere"  is  published  monthly  by  the  New  Zealand  Mission  of  the  Church 
of  Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-day  Saints,  and  is  printed  by  TE  KARERE  PRESS,  No.  2 
Scotia  Place,  Upper  Queen  Street,  Auckland,  CI,  N.Z.  Subscription  Rates:  3/-  per 
six  months;  5/-  per  year;  £1  for  five  years;  £2/10/-  for  life.  (United  States  Cur- 
rency:  $1.00   per   year;    $4.00   for   five   years;    $10.00   for   life.) 

Address    Correspondence,    Box    72,    Auckland,    C.l,    New    Zealand. 


!. 


CONTENTS 


bv  Matthew  Cowley 


Page 

..  678 


Editorial — 

Church  Welfare  Plan, 

Special  Features 

Hohepa  A'lete  Meha  Inside  Front  G  >ver 

He  Hoa,  E  Tangihia  Ana,  by  Rawiri  M.  Kamau  680 

681 

690 

693 


Etahi  o  Nga  Whakaaro  i  Mau,  by  Wiremu  Takana  .  .  . 

America,  by  J.   Reuben  Clark,  Jr 

Priesthood,  by   Howard  Osborne    

The  Saints— The  World,  by  Hohepa  M.  Meha    

Church  Welfare  Programme,  by  Wi  Pere  Amaru,  A.B, 


M.A 


Church   Features — 

Mahi  Kura  Hapati     I  i84 

To  the  Sunday   Schools   694 

Sunday    School    696 

Primary     697 

News  from  tin-  Fields    "(M 


COVER  MOTIF— 

j.  the  return  of  the  Zion  Elders  many  of  them  were  assigned 
to  lab<  u  Elders  Biesinger,  Henderson  and  Burningham 

have  continued  their  work  in  the  Cal    i 

permitted  to  display  Maori  programmes  and  arts      We  Bee  them  here 
honouring  their  labours  in   Maoriland. 


TE    KARERE 


1 1  uno.  1041 


Editorial  .  . 


CHURCH  WELFARE  PLAN 

The  Welfare  Plan  of  the  Church  is  getting  under  wax- 
in  the  Mission.  Already  several  of  the  branches  have  started 
welfare  projects,  and  under  the  direction  of  \\  i  I 'ere  Amaru 
instructions  will  be  sent  out  and  committees  will  be  organized 
for  carrying  on  the  work. 

For  all  who  are  interested  in  this  worthwhile  activity  the 
following   remarks  by   Elder  John   A.   Widstoe  are  timely: 

"Eternal  principles  must  guide  us  in  our  efforts,  else  the 
results  will  be  temporary.  That  is  the  firsl  and  most  im- 
portant consideration. 

"WORK,  or  industry,  is  the  basis  of  economic  safely. 
True  wealth  is  produced  by  the  intelligent  application  of 
human  labour  to  the  resources  offered  by  the  earth,  and  in 

no  other  way.  All  that  we  have  to  sustain  our  lives  and 
to  give  us  comfort  is  the  product  of  human  labour.  The 
first  step  in  any  programme  for  economic  welfare  must  In' 
to  put  every  person  to  work  to  produce  wealth  from  existing 
natural  resources.  It  is  the  beginning  and  the  end  of  any 
sound  economic  system. 

"None  should  he  exempt  from  work,  if  able-bodied. 
Idleness  at  any  period  of  life  invites  uselessness,  unhappiness 
and   evil.     Productive   labour,   with   opportunity    for  ample 

leisure  and  rest,  should  he  the'  desire  of  all — men  and  women. 
young  and  old.  The  conservation  or  use  of  human  energy 
lies  at   the  bottom  of   spiritual  as  well   as  material   welfare. 

"THRIFT  is  a  companion  principle  to  WORK. 
Wealth,  won  by  intelligent  industry,  whether  much  or  little, 
should  he  used  with  discriminating  care,  with  economy  in 
view.  It  must  he  cherished  as  die  product  of  life's  best 
-ion-,  which  are:  Opportunity  for  industry,  strength 
to  labour,  and  time  in  which  to  work.  Wealth  must  not  be 
wasted  or  spent  in  useless  pursuits.  Waste  is  an  evil  second, 
only  to  idleness. 

"A  third  principle  completes  the  supporting  pillars 
safe  economic  structure.  Men  must  live  within  the  means 
obtained  by  their  productive  labour.  That  is.  DEBT  must 
he  avoided.  It  should  he  abhored.  The  burden  of  repay- 
ment is  always  heavier  than  that  of  production.  He  who 
contracts    a    debt    enters    into    partnership    with    an    cnenr  . 


Hune,  1941  TE   KARERE 

Economic  prosperity   requires  that   men  go  without  things 
rather  than  to  go  into  debt  for  them. 

"Add  to  these  principles  FAITH  and  trust  in  the  Lord, 
OBEDIENCE  to  His  commands,  and  PRAYER  to  Him  for 
help,  and  we  may  be  certain  that  success  will  smile  upon  our 
efforts  to  raise  all  Church  members  into  positions  of  economic 
prosperity.  Let  it  ever  be  remembered  that  only  the  Lord 
can  give  security  to  human  kind.  Man  can  only  advance  one 
another's  welfare.  Therefore,  the  name  CHURCH  WEL- 
FARE PLAN  is  preferable  to  CHURCH  SECURITY 
PROGRAMME. 

"Undoubtedly,  if  all  men  feared  God,  used  their  energies 
in  productive  labour,  were  thrifty,  and  lived  within  their  in- 
comes, there  would  and  could  be  no  economic  depressions. 
Any  other  procedure  of  living  causes  financial  panics,  breeds 
poverty,  and  makes  charity  necessary. 

"These  principles  of  economic  security  and  progress 
must  be  applied  by  each  individual  for  himself  in  his  life's 
endeavours.  SELF-EFFORT  is  the  key  to  self-develop- 
ment and  personal  progress.  There  must  be  no  needless 
leaning  on  others  for  support.  The  only  dependence  should 
be  self-dependence,  under  God's  will.  Self-help  brings 
greatest  happiness. 

"To  prevent  an  economic  depression  or  to  rise  out  of 
one  is  the  personal  concern  of  every  individual,  not  of  a 
central  agency,  however  rich  and  powerful.  The  long  history 
of  the  race  shows  that  individual  self-effort,  coupled  with 
self-reliance,  is  always  victorious.  If  it  does  not  yield  great 
wealth,  it  makes  big  men." 

"The  call  to  service  in  the  Church  Welfare  Plan  merely 
means  that  we  bring  into  renewed  and  more  vigorous  action 
external,  conquering  principles.  In  no  other  way  can  we 
secure  certain  progress  or  enduring  happiness.  In  no  other 
way  can  we  solve  the  problems  of  this  or  any  other  daw 
Every  Latter-day  Saint  should  understand,  respect,  and  prac- 
tice these  principles,  upon  which  the  material  happiness  of 
the  world  depends,"  (Improvement  Era,  June.  1938.)  The 
Church  Welfare  Plan  is  the  greatest  religions  movement  of 
modern  times.  In  the  New  Zealand  Mission  the  welfare  of 
every  member  of  the  Church  should  be  the  concern  of  ever) 
other  member.  There  is  no  place  in  God's  plan  of  econom} 

for  either  idle  hands  or  idle  lands.    Let   US  begin  this  plan  by 

honouring  the  1  ,ord  with  our  substance. 

— Matthew  ( 'owiey. 


TE    K  VRERE  Hum,  1W1 


.-**" 


He  Hoa,  E  Tang;ihia  Ana 

Te  Matenga  <>  [rimana  Raeana   (Edmond   Lyon) 

\(,A  AWHINA   I   TE  HUNGA  TAPU 

Na  Raxviri  M.  Kamou 

I  a  ia  e  ora  ana  e  manaaki  ana  ia  me  tona 
whanau  katoa,  ara,  ona  taina,  ia  matou  o  Koro- 
ngata  nei.  He  tino  hoa  pono  kia  matou  i  roto 
i  a  matou  ahua  hiahia  katoa.  I  te  tu  he  hui. 
kanikani  ranei,  mahi  nui  mo  te  Hahi  i  waenga- 
nui  i  to  matou  iwi,  tae  tonu  mai  ta  ratou  awhina 
hei  tautoko,  whakatuturu  hoki  i  te  kupu  ra — - 
"aroha  tetahi  ki  tetahi."  I  te  wa  o  te  maka- 
riri  ko  tona  whenua  te  ora  mo  matou,  ara,  mo 
nga  wahia  kia  ka  ai  te  ahi,  kia  maoa  hoki  te 
kai.  Ko  wai,  ko  wai  o  matou  e  haere  ana  ki  Rawiki  M.  K.wiai 
a   ia   he   tono    awhina   mo    enei   wahi   he    homai. 

noaiho  tana.  Noreira  te  aroha  ki  a  Irimana  Raeana  (Edmond  Lyon) 
o  Greenhill,  Hastings,  i  aia  i  mate  e  61  ona  tau.  He  tangata  nui  i 
waenganui  i  tona  iwi  i  te  Pakeha,  ara,  he  whenua  nui  tona.  He  hipi, 
he  kau  ona  taonga  maha  i  runga  i  te  2000  eka.  Te  nui  o  tona  whare 
me  te  ataahua  o  nga  whakapaipai  te  miharo  o  nga  kainga  o  te  takiwa 
kia  matou. 

Te  mate  nana  nei  ia  i  mau  he  huango.  E  20  nga  tau  e  mauiwi  ana 
i  tenei  mate,  a  i  te  ata  i  hemo  ai  ia,  e  rua  haora  i  nuiri  mai  i  tona 
aranga  ake  i  te  ata. 

I  runga  i  te  aroha,  mamae  ngakau,  ka  tono  mai  nga  taina  me  te 
pouaru  kia  tae  atu  matou  nga  pekeke  ki  tona  whare,  e  20  nei  nga 
ruuma  (rooms)  kia  kite  whakamutunga  matou  i  a  ia.  I  te  po  ka  tae 
matou,  ka  tangi,  heke  noaiho  nga  roimata  aroha  ki  ana  mahi  me  te  hua 
o  tona  aroha  ki  te  tangata.  He  maha  nga  Pakeha  rangatira  o  te  takiwa 
i  reira.  I  mua  atu  o  to  matou  hoki  ka  inoi  mai  te  whare-mate  mehemea 
ka  waiata  te  koea  i  te  karakia  whakamutunga  mo  te  tupapaku,  a 
whakaetia  ana. 

Te  2.30  o  nga  haora  o  te  titahatanga  o  te  ra  i  te  Wenerei  ka  timata 
te  karakia  ka  rewa  ake  nga  reo  o  te  koea  i  nga  waiata  e  tika  ana  mo 
tenei  ahau.  Nuku  atu  i  200  i  hui  ki  te  hui-koha  ki  tenei  tangata.  I 
te  koea  e  waiata  ana,  ka  patapatai  te  Pakeha  no  hea  tenei  mea  reka, 
ataahua?  I  konei  ka  whakamohiotia  atu  no  nga  iwi  e  kiia  nei  e  ratou 
— Mormons!  Te  ingoa  tika,  no  te  Hahi  o  Ihu  Karaiti  o  te  Hunga  Tapu 
o  nga  Ra  o  Muri  Nei  i  Korongata.  Tino  nui  nga  mihi  ki  tenei  taonga 
a  tatou.  Kei  ia  ratou  ano  a  ratou  korero  pakeha  whakapaipai  mo  te 
reka   o   nga  reo   waiata. 

Te  ropu  haere  ki  te-  urupa  nuku  atu  i  te  500  i  runga  i  nga  waka 
100  me  nga  pahi  (buses)  e  rua.  Te  roa  o  te  huarahi  haere  e  9  maero 
a  i  konei  ka  tino  kitea  te  nui  o  nga  tangata  i  hui  ki  te  mihi  whaka- 
mutunga ki  to  matou,   ara,  to  tatou  hoa,  kia  Irimana  Raeana. 


BOUND  VOLUME  OF  "  TE  KARERE,"   1940 

A  limited  number  of  bound  volumes  of  the  1940  issue  of 
Te  Karere  is  now  available.  Place  your  orders  as  soon  as  pos- 
sible with  Te  Karere,  Box  72,  Auckland.    Price  8/-. 


Hune,  1941 


TE   KARERE 


681 


Etahi  o  Nga  Whakaaro  i  Mau 

NA  WIREMU  TAKANA,  PAKEKE,  KUA  MATE 

(He  roanga  tvtarua) 

Na  te  Etita. — Kei  roto  i  "Te  Karere"  o  maehe  o  tenei  tau  te  timatanga  o 
enei  korero,  whaingia  te  roanga  tuatahi  i  roto  i  nga  wharangi  o  "Te  Karere" 
mo  Aperira,  a  ko  tenei  te  roanga  tuarna. 

Kati  ra.  E  te  iwi  whakarongo  ki  tenei.  Ko  te  mana  i  riro 
mai  i  o  tatou  tupuna  i  ngaro  tonu  atu  i  o  ratou  whare  Wananga, 
kaore  kia  kotahi  wahi  i  mau  mai  o  taua  mana  i  te  iwi  Maori.  Pera 
ano  hoki  te  titiro  atu  ki  te  mana  i  tukua  iho  e  te  Karaiti,  e  ana 
Apotoro,  i  mutu  tonu  atu  i  aua  ra  ano  i  a  ratou.  Ina  hoki  ra,  kua 
kore  nga  mana  whakaora,  nga  mahi  merakara,  nga  kitenga,  me  nga 
mahi  poropiti  ano  hoki,  me  nga  whakapakanga 
ringaringa  mo  te  whakaoranga  o  nga  turoro, 
me  te  whakapakanga  ringaringa  hoki,  hei  ho- 
maitanga  a  te  Wairua  Tapu  o  te  Atua.  Koia 
tonu  te  kaha  i  riro  mai  i  a  ratou  i  te  ra  o  te 
Petekoha,  e  kite  ana  inaianei  i  roto  i  nga 
akoranga  o  te  ao. 

Engari,  ko  te  ki  anake,  me  whakapono, 
ka  ora  ai.  E  ora  ana,  koia,  o  tatou  mate  i 
runga  i  tena  ki?  Kaore  ra  pea.  No  te  mea, 
ma  nga  mahi  me  te  whakapono,  ka  tika  ai.  He 
aha  nga  mahi  e  tika  ai  te  whakapono?  Ko  nga 
mahi  ra  o  roto  i  taua  Tohungatanga  Tapu  o 
te  Atua.  Mehemea,  kaore  enei  mea  e  kitea  ana 
inaianei  ka  tika  te  ki  i  mutu  atu  taua  mana  i 
aua  wa  o  nga  Apotoro  ratou  ko  nga  Poropiti. 
wahi  i  mau  mai  i  etahi  tangata,  i  tetahi,  i  tetahi  tangata  ranei,  no 
te  mea,  kahore  rawa  e  rangona  ana  aua  ahuatanga  i  enei  nga  ra  o 
muri  nei,  no  reira  hoki,  te  tangata  i  atiutiu  haere  ai  ki  te  kimi  i  aua 
mana  whakaora  i  roto  i  nga  tino  whakaakoranga  o  tenei  ao ;  heoi, 
kaore  e  kitea.  Na,  mehemea  i  ngaro  atu,  me  pehea  tatou  e  whiwhi 
ai  ano?  E  penei  ana  nga  tikanga  o  te  whare  Wananga  o  o  tatou 
tupuna.  Ma  te  tangata  kei  a  ia  taua  mana  e  tuku  atu  ki  tetahi  atu 
tangata,  ma  tetahi  atu  tangata  e  tuku  atu  ki  tetahi  atu  i  roto  i  te  ture 
o  taua  mana. 

T  pera  ano  te  mana  i  homai  e  to  tatou  Ariki  a  Ihu  Karaiti  ki 
ana  Apotoro  ratou  ko  nga  Poropiti,  he  mea  hoatu,  ehara  i  te  una. 
ka  riro  noa  mai  i  te  tangata  e  whakapono  ana. 

E  ki  ra  hoki  a  Paora,  "E  kore  ano  hoki  tetahi  e  tango  i  tenei 
honore  ki  a  ia  ano,  engari  te  tangata  e  karangatia  ana  e  te  Atua.  e 
peratia  ana  me  Arona,"  ara,  he  mea  whakapa  nga  ringaringa  o  Mohi 
ki  a  ia.  Na  reira,  i  riro  mai  i  a  ia  te  mana  a  te  Atua.  Na.  me 
pehea  ra  tatOU,  1  te   mea,   kaore  he  tangata  kei  a  ia  nei  tenei  mana  i 


WlREMU  TAKANA 

Kahore  hoki  tetahi 


682  II".    K  \\<\.\<\  Hunc.  1941 

te  whenua  nei,  mc  pehea  tatou  e  whiwhi  ai,  i  te  mea  kaore  he  tangata 

c  ki  ana  kei  a  ia  tan.'!  mana  pera  me  Mohi  i  whakahaua  nei  e  te 
Atua  kia  hoatu  te  mana  ki  toria  tuakana  ki  a  Arona?  Na,  mc  pehea 
i  at  «>u  ? 

He  pono  tenei  ki.  me  hoki  mai  ano  aua  Langata  i  hoatu  nei  e  te 

Atua  taua  mana  ki  a  ratou,  hei  whakahoki  mai  tana  mana  ki  a  tatou 
ki  nga  tamariki  a  te  tangata.  Titiro  atu  ki  te  \va  i  a  te  Karaiti  me 
ana  Akonga  tokotoru  i  runga  i  te  maunga.  I  puta  mai  ai  ki  a  ratou 
a  Iraia  raua  ko  Mohi,  i  whakahoki  a  mai  ai  te  Tohungatanga  Tapu 
o  Merekehereke.  Na,  mc  pera  ano  enei  tangata  ki  a  tatou,  ma  ratou 
ano  e  whakahoki  mai  taua  mana  tapu  ki  o  te  Atua  tangata  i  whiri- 
whiria  ai  i  runga  i  te  mata  o  te  whenua  nei. 

E  niea  ra  hoki,  a  Amoho,  "He  pono  e  kore  te  Ariki  a  [howa  e 
malii  i  tetahi  mea;  engari,  ka  whakakitea  e  la  tana  whakaaro  puku 
ki  ana  pononga,  ki  nga  Poropiti."  Na,  E  te  iwi.  E  tino  mohio  ana 
tatou  ki  tenei,  kahore  he  tangata  i  ki  mai  ko  ia  ta  te  Atua  Poropiti 
i  enei  nga  ra.  Heoi  ano  ra.  ko  nga  tangata  kei  a  ratou  nei  nga 
Atua  whiowhio  e  ki  ana  he  tohunga  ratou.  he  poropiti  hoki,  engari, 
kaore  ano  ratou  i  ki  mai.  "Tenei  te  whakaaro  puku  a  te  Atua."  Me 
penei  hoki,  kua  rite  tonu  ta  ratou  whakahaere  ki  ta  nga  Poropiti, 
ki  ta  nga  Apotoro  o  to  tatou  Ariki  a  Ihu  Karaiti?  Tirohia  atu  he 
tauira,  kia  mohio  ai  tatou.  Ko  Rua,  kei  a  ia  ano  tana  whakahaere. 
Ko  Te  Whiti  raua  ko  Tohu,  kei  a  raua  tikanga  i  a  raua.  me  era  atu 
tohunga  Maori  kei  a  ratou  ano  a  ratou  whakahaere.  Kahore  rawa 
he  mea  e  rite  ana  ki  nga  tauira  o  nga  Apotoro  ratou  ko  nga  Poropiti 
i  a  ratou  nei  te  mana  a  te  Atua.  Tera  noa  ake,  kaore  hoki  ratou  i  ki 
mai,  na  aua  Karere  Tapu  o  te  Atua  i  homai  te  mana  o  te  Atua, 
engari  ko  o  ratou  mana  he  mea  riro  noa  mai  e  ai  ki  te  titiro  atu, 
pera  atu  ano  hoki  era  atu  akoranga  i  runga  i  te  mata  o  te  whenua, 
kaore  a  ratou  kupu,  he  mea  homai  te  mana  ki  a  ratou,  e  aua  Karere 
Tapu. 

Na,  K  te  iwi  Maori.  Ehara  i  te-  mea  ko  tatou  anake  te  iwi  o  te 
ao  nei  kua  kotiti  ke.  I  roto  i  nga  whakaakoranga  maha  o  tenei  ao, 
ka  timata  tetahi  tangata,  he  tino  taitamariki  ia,  i  waenganui  i  te 
tekau  ma  wha,  te  tekau  ma  rima  tan,  ka  rapu  haere,  mehemea,  kei 
whea  taua  mana  i  roto  i  nga  whakaakoranga  maha  o  tenei  ao,  i  te 
mea,  e  karanga  mai  ana  ratou  ki  a  ia,  "Na  tenei  !  ra  tera!  haere  mai." 
Ka  ohorere  tona  ngakau,  ka  kore  mohio  hoki  me  ahu  atu  ia  ki  tehea 
o  ratou.  Heoi,  i  a  ia  e  whakaaroaro  penei  ana,  katahi  ia  ka  timata 
te  rapu  i  nga  Karaipiture.  Ko  tehea  te  huarahi  mana  e  ora  ai  ia? 
Ka  tupono  ia  ki  tenei  Karaipiture  e  mea  nei,  "Ki  te  hapa  tetahi  o 
koutou  i  te  matauranga,  me  inoi  ia  ki  te  Atua  e  homai  nui  nei  ki 
te  katoa,  kahore  ana  tawai  mai  ;  a,  ka  homai  ki  a  ia."  I  konei,  tino 
whakaae  tonu  atu  ia,  ko  ia  taua  tangata  e  hapa  ana  i  te  matauranga, 
ina  hoki,  kahore  ia  e  mohio  me  haere  ia  ki  ewhea  o  enei  e  karanga  mai 
nei  ki  a  ia,  "Haere  mai."  Xa,  whakaae  tonu  atu  ia,  me  inoi  ia  ki  te 
Atua,  kia  whiwhi  ia  ki  taua  matauranga,  kia  mohio  ai  ia  ki  te  huarahi, 
hei  tomokanga  mana. 


Hune,1941  TE   KARERE  683 

Ka  kite  tatou  i  konei,  kaore  tenei  tangata  i  hiahia  kia  tu  ia,  he 
tohunga,  he  poropiti,  he  aha  ranei,  engari,  tino  whai  ia  i  te  oranga 
mo  tona  tinana.  No  konei  ia  ka  haere  atu  ki  te  wahi  ngaro  inoi  atu 
ai  ki  tona  Matua  i  te  Rangi.  I  a  ia  e  inoi  ana,  ka  puta  whakarere 
mai  he  maramatanga  i  te  Rangi,  kei  runga  ake  i  te  tiahotanga  mai 
o  te  ra,  tu  ana  nga  tangata  tokorua  i  tona  aroaro,  e  mea  mai  ana 
tetahi  ki  a  ia  me  te  tohu  ki  tera,  "Ko  Taku  Tama  tenei  i  aroha  ai, 
Taku  i  ahuareka  atu  ai,  whakarongo  ki  a  ia." 

Ka  mea  atu  ia  ki  a  ia,  "Me  uru  atu  au  ki  tewhea  o  nga  akoranga 
nei  ?" 

Ka  mea  mai  tera  ki  a  ia,  "Kauaka,  kahore  hoki  he  mana  kei  a 
ratou,  ko  te  ahua  o  te  karakia  kei  a  ratou,  ko  te  kaha,  me  te  mana, 
kua  whakakahoretia.  Kaore  hoki  te  Rongo  Pai  pono  i  a  ratou, 
engari  ki  te  u  koe,  tera  koe  ka  mohio  ki  te  huarahi  e  haere  ai  koe." 
Katahi  ia  ka  ohorere  i  te  titiro  atu  ki  te  Atua,  he  tinana  ano  tona,  he 
wahi  kikokiko,  he  wheua  hoki,  no  te  mea,  ki  tana  whakaaro  i  runga  i 
nga  akoranga  o  te  ao,  he  tinana  kore  to  te  Atua. 

Na,  i  tona  hokinga  atu  ki  te  kainga,  tutaki  tonu  atu  ia  ki  tetahi 
o  nga  minita  i  mea  mai  ki  a  ia  i  mua  atu,  "Haere  mai,  kei  konei  te 
ora."  Ka  korero  atu  ki  a  ia,  kua  kite  ia  i  tetahi  kitenga.  Mea  tonu 
mai  ana  taua  minita,  "Ehara,  te  kitenga  he  whakaaro  pohehe  no 
tou  ngakau.  Kua  kati  ake  hoki  te  Rangi,  kua  mutu  noa  atu  tenei 
mea  te  kitenga  i  nga  wa  o  te  Karaiti  ratou  ko  nga  Apotoro."  Mea 
atu  ana  taua  taitamariki,  "Ahakoa  pehea,  e  kore  rawa  e  taea  e  au  te 
whakakahore,  i  te  mea  kua  kitea  nei  e  au."  Na,  i  timata  nga  whaka- 
toinga  ki  tenei  taitamariki  i  taua  ra  ano,  pau  noa  nga  tau  e  toru.  He 
ahakoa  i  u  tonu  ia  ki  taua  kupu.  I  te  nui  o  tona  tangi  me  tona  hiahia 
kia  mohio  ai  ia  ki  taua  huarahi  i  whakaaria  ai  ki  a  ia,  ka  whaka- 
paua  e  ia  tona  ngakau  ki  te  inoi  ano  ki  te  Atua  mo  taua  huarahi  e 
ora  ai  ia. 

Na  ka  puta  mai  k  o  tetahi  o  nga  Poropiti  o  te  iwi  Maori  ona- 
mata  ki  a  ia,  he  maha  ana  take  i  ko  rero  ai  ki  a  ia,  ko  te  mea  nui 
rawa  o  aua  take  ko  etahi  papa  koura,  kei  reira  nei  te  maramatanga 
o  te  huarahi  e  ora  ai  ia,  me  nga  whakahekenga  iho  o  te  mana  Atua 
ki  tetahi  iwi  kua  ngaro. 

Na,  ka  tangohia  tetahi  arai  i  a  ia,  a,  kite  tonu  atu  ia  kei  reira 
nei  aua  papa  e  huna  ana.  He  po  tenei ;  i  te  aonga  ake  o  te  ra,  ka 
haere  tonu  atu  ia  ki  taua  wahi  i  whakakitea  mai  ra  ki  a  ia.  Heoi, 
tutaki  ana  ia  ki  taua  Poroiti,  nana  hoki  i  whakakite  mai  te  wahi  i 
takoto  ai  nga  papa  koura,  me  tetahi  mea  potakataka,  me  nga  papa 
paraihe,  me  tetahi  hoari. 

Na,  ka  rere  atu  ona  ringaringa  ki  aua  papa  koura,  katahi  ka 
mea  mai  taua  Poropiti  ki  a  ia,  "Kaore  ano  kia  rite  te  wa  kia  riro 
enei  mea  i  a  koe.  Engari,  me  hoki  mai  koe  ki  konei,  ia  tan,  ia  tau, 
mo  nga  tau  e  wha,  ko  reira  pea  ai  enei  mea  riro  ai  ki  ou  ringaringa. 
Ma  tou  u  hoki  ka  riro,  ki  te  kore,  kahore." 

(  Turin  //<•  roanga  > 


TE   KARERE  Hune,  1941 

Mahi  Kura  Hapati 

RATAPU   TUATAHI 

Whakaaturanga:  Nga  Tikanga  o  te  Whakapono — "Te  Mohiotanga  ki  te 
Atua." 
Te  whakaaro  ki  te  Atua  he  ahuatanga  i  tupu  ake  i  roto  i  te  tangata, 
e  matau  ana  te  tangata  mohio,  e  ahei  ana  kia  penei  i  roto  i  ana  whiri- 
whiringa  mo  te  oranga.  Ahakoa  tumeke  mai  ia  ki  te  whakaatu  watea 
i  tona  whakaetanga  he  tinana  tangata  te  Atua,  otira  e  whakaae  ana 
e  ora  ana  tetahi  mana  whakahaere,  o  tetahi  mana  nui  kaore  ano  nei 
kia  mohiotia  e  te  tangata.  Te  kore  e  mohiotia,  te  kore  e  taea  te  wha- 
nganga  tona  whanuitanga,  ko  te  kahore  e  mohio  ake.  E  koe,  e  te 
tangata  e  ako  tonu  ana  kaore  nei  e  eke  ki  te  matauranga,  he  aha  i 
whakahoretia  ai  e  koe  nga  homaitanga  kia  koe  e  te  tangata  kei  a  ia 
katoa  nei  te  mana  me  te  mohiotanga  ki  nga  mea  katoa,  kei  a  ia  nei  e 
pupuri  ana  tou  oranga,  kaore  nei  koe  e  whakaae  ki  tona  ingoa.  He 
wehi,  he  whakanui  ta  te  tangata  e  whakatata  ana  kia  Ia,  iaia  e  hura- 
hura  ana  i  te  kaha  nui  me  te  tika  o  a  te  Atua  mahi.  Ina  whakaaro 
atu  kia  Ia  he  Kai-hanga  he  Atua  hoki,  ka  whakama  tatou  ia  Ia;  otira, 
kua  homai  e  Ia  te  mana  ki  te  whakatata  atu  kia  Ia  i  te  ahuatanga  ho 
tamariki  tatou  Nana,  me  te  karanga  atu  kia  Ia  i  te  ingoa  Matua  "E 
Pa."  Ahakoa  te  hunga  whakakahore  ki  te  Atua,  i  nga  wa  o  te  whaka- 
aro hohonu  i  roto  i  tona  oranga,  e  hotu  ana  te  ngakau  ki  totahi  Matua 
Wairua  pera  ano  me  tona  aroha  ki  tona  Matua  o  to  kikokiko  nei  ka 
tahuri  atu  ia  ki  reira.  Noreira  ko  te  tangata  kore  whakapono  ki  te 
Atua  o  naianei,   he  ahua  kau  no  te  tangata  karakia  Atua  whakapakoko. 

Nga  Patai: 

1.  I  tupu  ake  i  hea  te  whakaaro  ki  te  Atua? 

2.  He   aha   te    mea   kaore   e   tumeke   ki   te   whakaatu,   te   tangata 
kore  Atua? 

3.  Na  te  aha  i  whai  wahi  ai  tatou  ki  te  whakatata  atu  ki  te  Atua? 

RATAPU  TUARUA 

Nga  whakaarotanga  a  nga  hahi  mo  te  Atuatanga. 

Te  whakaakoranga  ngawari,  whai  mana  hoki  mo  te  ahuatanga  o 
te  Atua  me  Ona  wahi,  i  akona  nei  e  te  Karaiti  me  nga  Apotoro,  ka  taka 
haere  i  te  wa  kua  mutu  nga  whakakitenga,  i  te  panga  mai  hoki  o  t" 
pouritanga  hakere  ki  runga  i  te  ao  i  te  kore  whai  mana  mai  i  te  Atua 
i  te  peinga  atu  hoki  i  nga  Apotoro  me  te  takanga  atu  o  te  tohunga- 
tanga  i  runga  i  te  mata  o  te  whenua,  ka  riro  nei  tona  turanga  i  nga 
whakaarotanga  maha  me  nga  akoranga  whakapono  a  te  tangata,  he 
maha  hoki  aua  akoranga  e  tino  kore  ana  te  marama  i  te  tika  kore  me 
te  akoranga  e  whiwhi  ana  te  tangata  i  te  kupu  mai  i  te  Atua  ma  roto 
i  te  ngakau  o  te  tangata. 

Nga  Patai: 

1.  No   tehea   wa   te   takanga   haere   i   nga   whakaakoranga   me   te 
mana  i  homai  nei  e  te  Karaiti? 

2.  Na  te  aha  i  pa  mai  ai  tenei  ahua? 

3.  He  aha  te  mea  nui  i  pa  ki  te  mata  o  te  whenua  i  taua  wa? 

RATAPU   TUATORU 

Whakaaturanga:    Nga    Tikanga    o    te    Whakapono — "Te    Kaunihera    i 
Nairn." 
I  te  tau  325  i  muri  mai  ia  te  Karaiti,  ka  te  i  te  Emepara  Kanatini 
(Constantine)  te  Kaunihera  o  Naihi,  i  rapua  e  ia  ma  roto  i  tenei  ropu 


Hune,  1941  TE   KARERE  685 

he  whiwhinga  ki  tetahi  whakaaturanga  o  te  whakapono  Karaitiana  e 
noho  hei  kaupapa  whai  mana  mo  te  whakapono,  hei  pehi  hoki  i  nga 
raruraru  e  tupu  nui  haere  ake  ana  mo  te  ahuatanga  o  te  Atuatanga 
me  era  atu  putake  o  te  whakapono.  I  whakahengia  hoki  e  taua  Kau- 
nihera  etahi  o  nga  whakaarotanga  o  taua  wa,  kei  roto  i  taua  whaka- 
henga  te  whakaarotanga  a  Ariuha,  ara,  ko  te  Tama  he  mea  hanga  na 
te  Matua,  no  reira  e  kore  e  mutunga  kore  tahi  me  te  Matua.  I  whaka- 
haere  nuitia  hoki,  i  panuitia  te  whakapono  e  mohiotia  nei  ko  te  Whaka- 
pono Naihirini,  i  muri  tonu  mai  ka  puta  ko  te  whakapono  a  Ttanatiu, 
i  ara  hoki  he  tautohe  mo  tenei  whakapono.  Koia  tenei  te  whakapono 
e  whai  ake  nei:  "E  karakia  ana  matou  ki  te  Atua  kotahi  iroto  i  te 
Tokotorutanga  me  te  Tokotorutanga  i  roto  i  te  Kotahitanga.  Kahore 
hoki  e  whakararu  ana  i  nga  tangatanga  e  wehe  ana  ranei  i  nga  tinana, 
no  te  mea  he  tinana  kotahi  to  te  Matua,  me  te  Tama  me  te  Wairua 
Tapu,  otira  ko  te  Atuatanga  o  te  Matua  o  te  Tama  me  te  Wairua  Tapu, 
he  kotahi  katoa,  e  rite  ana  te  kororia,  to  ratou  mana  nui  he  mutunga 
kore.  I  te  mea  e  pera  ana  te  Matua  e  pera  ana  ano  te  Tama,  e  pera 
ana  ano  te  Wairua  Tapu.  Kahore  i  hanga  te  Matua,  kaore  i  hanga 
te  Tama,  kahore  i  hanga  te  Wairua  Tapu.  He  ora  tonu  te  Matua,  he 
ora  tonu  te  Tama,  he  ora  tonu  te  Wairua  Tapu,  ahakoa  ra  kaore  i 
toru  nga  ora  tonu  kotahi  ano.  Kahore  ano  hoki  i  toru  nga  kore  he 
mutunga  mai,  kaore  hoki  i  toru  nga  kahore  i  hanga,  otira  kotahi  ano 
te  kahore  i  hanga,  kotahi  ano  te  kahore  he  mutunga  mai,  no  reira  ko 
te  Matua  he  Kaha  Rawa,  ko  te  Tama  he  Kaha  Rawa,  ko  te  Wairua 
Tapu  he  Kaha  Rawa.  He  pakeke  rawa  ki  te  whakaro  iho  te  maha 
o  nga  kotahitanga  o  nga  taupatupatutanga  i  roto  i  nga  kupu  tino  iti. 
Nga  Patai: 

1.    He   aha  te  kaupapa  i  whakatakotoria   e   Kanatini?      Korerotia 
hoki  nga  take  nui  i  pu£a  i  raro  i  tana  whakahaere? 

RATAPU  TUAWHA 

Etahi  atu  o  nga  whakaakoranga. 

E  whakaako  ana  te  Hahi  Ingarangi  i  ta  ratou  i  kite  tuturu  ai  o. 
naianei  mo  te  Atua,  ara,  "Kotahi  ano  te  Atua  e  ora  ana,  te  Atua 
tuturu,  mau  tonu,  kahore  ona  tinana,  ona  wahi,  kahore  te  mamae  e  pa 
kia  la,  he  kaha  mutunga  kore,  he  matauranga,  ht  painga.  Nga  kahore- 
tanga  o  te  Atua  e  whakaaturia  nei  i  enei  whakaaturanga  o  nga  whaka- 
pono o  nga  hahi  e  tino  poka  ke  ana  i  ta  nga  karaipiture  a  e  tino 
whakahengia  ana  e  nga  whakakitenga  mai  o  te  tinana  ake  o  te  Atua 
kua  whakaaturia  ake  i  nga  wharangi  kua  mutu  ake  nei.  E  mea  ana 
matou  te  whakakahore  i  te  tuturutanga  o  to  te  Atua  tinana  e  whaka- 
kahore  ana  i  te  Atua,  no  te  mea  ko  te  mea  kahore  ona  wahi  e  hapa 
ana  tona  whakaotinga,  a  te  tinana  kahore  ona  wahi  kahore  ano  ona 
oranga.  Ko  te  Hahi  o  Ihu  Karaiti  o  te  Hunga  Tapu  o  nga  Ra  o  Muri 
Nei  e  whakahe  ana  ki  te  Atua  penei,  kahore  e  mohiotia,  kahore  ona 
tinana,  kahore  ona  wahi,  kahore  te  mamae.  Ko  ratou  e  tautoko  ana 
i  tona  whakapono  e  piri  pono  ana  hoki  ki  te  Atua  pono  ki  te  Atua 
ora  o  roto  i  nga  karaipiture  me  nga  whakakitenga  mai. 

Nga    Patai: 

1.  Pehea  te  whakaaturanga  a  te  Hahi  Ingarangi  mo  te  Atua? 

2.  E  eke  ana  ranei  enei  whakapono  a  nga  hahi  ki  la   nga   karai- 
piture? 

3.  Korerotia  te  whakapono  a  te  Hunga  Tapu  mo  enei  take? 

RATAPU   TUARIMA 

Me  patapatai  i  runga  i  nga  kaupapa  korero  <>   nga  rchana  0  tenei 
marama.     (Review.) 


(,M 


TE   KARERE 


Ilune.  1<M1 


AMERICA 

"A  Chosen  Land  of  the  Lord  " 

From  the  beginning  even  to  the  cud  of  the 

Earth. 

By  President  J.  Reuben.  Clark,  Jr. 
Of  the  First  Presidency 

Concerning  Zion  and  its  Destiny  and  Liberty 

and   its    Price 

(Continuation    from   page  653 

Editor's  Note. — This  summary  of  the  Past  and 
admonition  for  the  future  of  .  Imeriea  and  its  people         |_  REUBEN  Clark,  Ik. 
was   presented    by    President    Clark    to    the    closing 

Session  of  Forty-fifth  Annual  Conference  of  the  Young  Men's  and  Young 
Women's  Mutual  Improvement  Associations,  in  the  Tabernacle,  Salt  Late  City, 
I  '.S..  I.,  at  7  p.m.,  Sunday,  June  9,  1940. 

The  beginning  of  this  address  is  contained  in  the  last  issue  of  "'/<•  Karere" 
Page  651.  President  Clark,  in  speaking  to  the  youth  of  the  Church,  brings  to 
the  fore  the  wisdom  born  from  the  past,  using  as  a  motif,  "My  son,  keep  thy 
father's  commandment,  and  forsake  not  the  laze  of  thy  mother."  He  speaks 
of  the  land  of  Zion,  beginning  with  the  "Law  oj  the  Hemisphere,"  then  "A 
Mighty  Land,"  "America's  Destiny"  "The  Jareditic  Civilisation"  "The  Bless- 
ing" "The  Judgment,"  "fullness  of  Iniquity,"  and  the  "Lehi  Civilization." 

ANOTHER   ''FULLNESS   OF  INIQUITY" 

The  recounting  of  the  history  of  this  people  is  unnecessary,  be- 
cause you  know  it.  Beginning  with  mere  disputes,  there  grew  bicker- 
ings, then  quarrelings,  then  ruptures,  then  two  peoples,  then  one  cursed 
for  its  iniquities,  then  wars  and  counterwars,  while  this  people  marched 
steadily  towards  their  "fullness  of  iniquity." 

Finally  there  had  come  to  all  the  people  the  same  wickedness 
that  was  among  the  Jaredites.      Mormon   says: 

And  these  Gadianton  robbers,  who  were  anion;/  the  Lamanites,  did  infest 
the  land,  insomuch  that  the  inhabitants  thereof  began  to  hide  up  their  treasures 
in  the  earth;  and  they  became  slippery,  because  the  Lord  had  cursed  the  land, 
that  they  could  not  hold  them,  nor  retain  them  again. 

And  it  came  to  pass  that  there  were  sorceries,  and  witchcrafts,  and  magics; 
and  the  power  of  the  evil  one  was  wrought  upon  all  the  face  of  the  laud.  .  .  . 
(Mormon    IAS,  19.) 

.  .  .  Tor  behold,  no  man  could  keep  that  which  was  his  own,  for  the  thieves 
and  the  murderers,  and  the  magic  art.  and  the  witchcraft  which  WOS  in  the 
land.     (Mormon  2A0.) 

And  there  never  had  been  so  great  wickedness  among  all  the  children  of 
Lehi,  nor  even  among  all  the  house  of  Israel,  according  to  the  words  of  the 
Lord,  as  was  among   this  people.    (Mormon  4:12.) 

And  if  they  perish  it  zcill  be  like  unto  the  Jaredites,  because  of  the  wilful- 
ness of  their  hearts,  seeking  for  blood  and  revenge.      (Moroni  9:23.) 

Then  came  the  final  war  and  one  people  was  exterminated  on  the 
same  spot  that  had  witnessed  the  extinction  of  the  Jaredites — the  hill 
Ramah  to  the  Jaredites  (Ether  15:11),  to  the  Nephites,  Cumorah 
(Mormon  6:6).  For  the  utter  beastiliness  of  the  final  struggle,  I  refer 
you  to  the  record.  I  should  shock  and  horrify  you  if  I  were  to  recount 
it,  but  it  matches  God's  decrees  to  the  last  word  and  act,  in  every  jot 
and  title. 


Hune,  1941  TE   KARERE  687 

Through  their  whole  record,  every  word  of  it,  through  their  whole 
history,  every  day  and  hour  of  it,  there  had  run  the  mastery  of  the 
divine  decree:  Serve  God  or  be  swept  off — which  it  may  be  again 
said  is  the  law  of  this  land.  The  record  shows  that  whenever  God  was 
served,  He  showered  upon  them  such  a  richness  of  His  blessings  as 
taxed  them  to  gather  and  enjoy;  whenever  they  sinned,  He  warned 
them  with  afflictions. 

So  a  thousand  years  after  the  colony  of  Lehi  had  been  founded, 
the  Nephitic  branch  had  been  wiped  out  because  of  their  iniquities 
as  had  been  revealed  to  Lehi  while  the  colony  was  founding.  The 
Lamanitish  branch  remained,  but  under  a  condemnation  that  has  fol- 
lowed them  now  for  more  than  two  thousand  four  hundred  years. 

Choice  peoples  have  thus  been  tried  twice  and  each  failed  to  live 
the  law  and  obey  "the  everlasting  decree'  governing  this  land. 

The  Lord  took  every  precaution  to  see  that  nothing  might  inter- 
fere with  this  posterity  of  Joseph  in  working  out  their  God-given  destiny 
and  the  destiny  of  America.  He  provided,  and  so  told  Lehi  at  the  very 
beginning  of  his  settlement,  that: 

.  .  .  it  is  wisdom  that  this  land  should  be  kept  as  yet  from  the  knowledge 
of  other  nations;  for  behold,  many  nations  would  overrun  the  land,  that  there 
zvould  be  no  place  for  an  inheritance.     (2  Nephi  1:8.) 

The  Lord  so  kept  the  land  for  a  thousand  years  after  Lehi  landed. 
He  so  kept  it  in  His  wisdom  for  another  thousand  years  after  the 
Nephites  were  destroyed,  perhaps  to  give  the  Lamanitish  branch 
another  chance. 

"CHOICE   LAND"   AND   "LAND   OF   LIBERTY" 

But  the  Lord  knew  beforehand  the  outcome  of  the  Lehi  migration 
and  informed  Nephi,  even  before  :Lehi  and  his  family  left  the  home 
shores.  He  declared  to  Nephi  an  era  of  the  Gentiles  who  should  flee 
their  captivity  and  come  to  this  land  (1  Nephi  13),  that  the  Gentiles 
should  here  scatter  the  seed  of  Nephi's  brethren  (ibid.  13:  14),  that  the 
Gentiles  had  come  out  of  their  captivity  because  "delivered  by  the  power 
of  Gcd  out  of  the  hands  of  all  other  nations,"  (ibid.  13:19),  that  they 
had  "been  lifted  up  by  the  power  of  God  above  all  other  nations,  upon 
the  face  of  the  land  which  is  choice  above  all  other  lands,  which  is 
the  land  that  the  Lord  God  hath  covenanted  with  thy  father  that  his 
seed  should  have  for  the  land  of  their  inheritance;  .  .  ".  (abid.  13:30, 
31)  ;  and  that  the  "wrath  of  God  was  upon  all  those  that  were  gathered 
together  against  them  (the  Gentiles)  to  battle"  on  this  land  (ibid.  18). 
The  Lord  further  declared  to  Lehi: 

And  it  shall  come  to  pass,  thai  if  the  Gentiles  shall  hearken  unto  the  Lamb 
of  God.  .  .  . 

And  harden  not  their  hearts  against  the  Lamb  of  God,  they  shall  be  num- 
bered among  the  seed  of  thy  father;  yea,  I  hey  shall  be  numbered  among  the 
house  of  Israel;  and  I  hey  shall  be  a  blessed  pen  pie  upon  the  promised  land 
forever;  I  hey  shall  be  no  more  brought  down  into  captivity;  and  I  he  house  of 
Israel  shall   no   more   be   confounded. 

Therefore,  woe  he  unlo  the  Gentiles  if  it  so  be  that  thev  harden  their  hearts 
against   the   Lamb  of   God.      (I    Nephi   14:1,  2,  6.) 
Just  before  Lehi  died,  he  declared  : 

Yea,  the  Lord  hath  covenanted  this  laud  unto  me.  and  to  my  children 
forever,  and  also  all  those  who  should  be  led  out  of  other  countries  by  the 
hand  of   the   Lord. 

.  .  .  that  there  shall  none  come  into  this  land  sure  they  shall  be  brought 
by  the  band  of  the   Lord. 

Wherefore,   this   hunt   is   consecrated   unlo   him    whom    lie   shall   bring.        hut 

i!   it  so  be  that   they  shall  serve  him  according  to  the  commandments  which 

he   hath    (given,   it   shall   be   a   land   of   liberty    unto    them;    wherefore,   they   shall 

brought  down  into  captivity;  if  so,  it  shall  be  because  of  iniquity;  lor 


TE   KARERE  Hune,  1941 

it  iniquity  shall  abound  cursed  shall  be  the  land  for  their  sokes,  but  unto  the 
righteous  it  shall  be  blessed  forever,    <J  Nephi  1:5-7.) 

Later  Lehi's  son,   Jacob,   teaching  the   people,   declared: 

Hut  behold,  this  land,  said  God,  shall  be  a  land  of  thine  inheritance,  and 
the  G entiles  shall  he  blessed  upon  the  land. 

.  Ind  this  land  shall  he  a  land  of  liberty  unto  the  Gentiles,  and  there  shall 
he  no  kings  upon  the  land,  who  shall  raise  up  unto  the  Gentiles. 

And   I   will  fortify   this  land  against   all   other   nations. 

And  he  that  fight eth  against  Zion  shall  perish,  saith  God. 

For  he  that  raiseth  up  a  king  against  >nc  shall  perish,  for  I,  the  Lord. 
the  king  of  heaven,  will  be  their  king,  and  I  will  be  a  light  unto  them  forever, 
that  hear  my  words.     (2  Nephi  10:10-14). 

Wherefore.  I  will  consecrate  this  land  unto  thy  seed,  and  them  who  shall 
he  numbered  among  thy  seed,  forever,  for  the  land  of  their  inheritance,  for  it 
is  a  choice  land,  saith  God  unto  me.  above  all  other  lauds,  wherefore  I  wUl  have 
all  men  that  dwell  thereon  that  they  shall  worship  me,  saith  God.  (2  Nephi 
10:19.) 

PANIC  OR  FEAR 

You  Youth  of  the  Church!  With  these  God-given  promises  and 
prophecies  before  you,  do  not  let  yourselves  be  stampeded  into  this 
panic  of  fear  that  is  now  sweeping  over  the  country,  deliberately  pro- 
pagated by  those  who  wish  to  get  us  into  the  war  on  any  pretext — 
this  fear  that  if  we  do  not  enter  this  war  we  face  subjugation  by  a 
foreign  foe.  If  subjugation  shall  come,  it  will  come  because  we  have 
reached  a  "fullness  of  iniquity,"  and  not  because  we  fail  to  take  on  the 
horrors  of  this  war.  It  is  righteousness,  not  the  hates  of  human 
slaughter,  of  which  this  nation  stands  now  in  need. 

COLUMBUS  AND  SETTLEMENT  OF  AMERICA 

A  thousand  years  after  the  Nephites  were  destroyed,  Columbus 
came,  and  the  existence  of  America  became  known  among  the  nations. 
For  a  hundred  years  thereafter  the  Lamanites,  who  had  never  climbed 
upward  from  the  plane  where  the  destruction  of  the  Nephites  and  the 
horrors  of  that  conflict  had  left  them,  were  plaqued  by  the  Spanish 
conquistadors,  who  did  "afflict  the  seed  of  Lehi"  (2  Nephi  10:18). 
Tli"  visions  and  prophecies  of  Lehi,  Nephi,  and  Jacob  were  fulfilled. 
Then  in  the  seventeenth  century  came  the  English,  the  French,  and 
.  and  the  actual  settlement  of  America  by  the  Gentiles  began. 
Soon  commenced  the  actual  scattering  of  the  Lamanites  which  those 
same  ancient  prophets  saw  and  predicted,  a  scattering  which  may  not 
fully  finished.     (1  Nephi   15:  17.) 

These  Gentile  settlers,  many  of  whom  came  to  the  New  World 
either  to  escape  religious  persecution  in  the  Old  or  to  have  liberty  of 
*:ce  and  freedom  of  worship  in  the  New — the  Puritans  in  New 
England,  the  Quakers  in  Pennsylvania,  the  Catholics  in  Maryland,  the 
Huguenots  in  Virginia  and  the  Carolines,  the  Lutherans  in  Georgia 
rnd  other  colonies — these  Gentile  settlers  and  their  asociatcs  began 
to  prosper  in  this  "chosen  land  of  the  Lord";  the  land  became  indeed 
to  them  a  "consecrated"  land.  They  prospered  financially,  they  grew 
religiously,  but  they  went  farthest  and  fastest  in  the  development  of 
their  political  doctrines.  As  if  driven  forward  by  an  unseen  Power, 
they  planned  and  worked  towards  making  this  just  what  Jacob  of  old 
had  said  it  was  to  be,  "a  land  of  liberty  unto  the  Gentiles."  (2  Nephi 
10:  11.) 

God  Himself  was  moving  the  minds  and  souls  of  those  whom  Lehi 
said  would  be  "led  out  of  other  countries  by  the  hand  of  the  Lord"  (2 
Nephi   1:6),  moving  them  towards  unmeasured  blessings. 


Hune,  1941  TE   KARERE  689 

OUR   COLONIAL   EXPERIENCES 

I  shall  not  attempt  to  trace  the  history  of  Colonial  America;  every- 
one of  our  youth  and  maidens  knows  that  out  of  our  embroilment  in 
the  Colonial  French  and  Indian  wars — fought  over  here  without  any 
other  reason  and  excuse  than  that  our  mother  countries  in  Europe 
were  fighting  for  something  purely  European  and  wholly  foreign  to 
America — out  of  these  came  later  the  wisdom  of  Washington  and 
Jefferson  that  we  had  no  business  mixing  in  European  affairs — wisdom 
as  vital  to-day  as  when  they  first  uttered  it.  We  had  been  brought 
out,  separated  from,  the  Old  World,  to  build  a  mighty  nation,  a  land 
of  liberty;  we  had  come  to  a  land  consecrated  to  this  purpose;  how 
vain  for  us  to  join  with  those  against  whom  we  are  to  be  fortified,  with 
those  who  shall  perish  if  they  fight  against  us. 

INDEPENDENCE 

Militarily  trained  in  the  Colonial  wars,  we  fought  and  won,  with 
the  aid  of  France,  our  War  of  Independence.  Thus  we  of  the  United 
States  were,  as  Nephi  foretold  and  saw  in  vision,  "delivered  by  the 
power  of  God  out  of  the  hands  of  all  other  nations."   (1  Nephi  13:  19.) 

This  prophecy  was  to  have  a  complete  fulfilment  later,  but  God 
was  moving  us  towards  our  ordained  destiny,  towards  unnumbered 
blessings. 

WASHINGTON  AND  KINGSHIP 

At  the  end  of  the  Revolution,  guided  by  the  principle  of  which  he 
had  no  conscious  knowledge — I  speak  of  Jacob's  prophecy,  "there  shall 
be  no  kings  upon  this  land"  (2  Nephi  10:11) — Washington  declined 
a  crown  that  might  have  been  his  for  the  reaching  out,  thus  setting 
the   God-ordained  precedent  that  there   should  be   no   kings  here. 

God  had  pushed  us  forward  another  step  in  our  destiny.  Another 
blessing  had  come  to   us. 

From  then  till  now  kings  and  emperors  have  not  prospered  on 
this  land. 

Then  came  a  period  of  near-chaos  under  the  Confederation,,  a 
period  that  until  now  was  the  most  critical  period  in  our  national  life. 

THE  CONSTITUTION 

We  had  won  our  freedom  but  we  were  near  to  losing  it.  The  Con- 
stitutional Convention  met,  and  out  of  it  came  our  God-inspired  Con- 
stitution— "the  most  wonderful  work,"  said  Gladstone,  "ever  struck  off 
at  a  given  time  by  the  brain  and  purpose  of  man." 

The  Lord  Himself  has  declared  as  to  this  great  document  of  human 
liberty,  "I  established  the  Constitution  of  this  land  by  the  hands  of 
wise  men  whom  I  raised  up  unto  this  very  purpose,"  and  He  added,  re- 
ferring to  the  war  it  cost  to  gain  us  our  liberties:  "and  redeemed  the 
land  by  the  shedding  of  blood."    (D.  and  C.   101:80.) 

The  Lord  declared  the  purpose  of  this  Constitution  when  He  said 
that  it  "should  be  maintained  for  the  rights  and  protection  of  all  flesh." 
(D.  and  C.  101:  77.) 

Thus  we  had  set  up,  under  the  guidance  of  God  Himself,  a  govern- 
ment that  made  of  this  land  the  kind  of  land  Lehi  and  Jacob  had  fore- 
seen and  prophesied — "a  land  of  liberty." 

Again  the  Lord  had  moved  us  forward  towards  our  destiny.  He 
had  bestowed  upon  us  another  blessing. 

What  was  this  plan  of  the  Lord  which  had  been  established  by  the 
hands  of  wise  men  whom  He  had  raised  up  for  this  very  purpose'.'  May 
[  tell  yen  a  few  of  the  elemental  principles. 


690  TE   KARERE  Hum-.  194] 

THREE  BRANCHES  OF  GOVERNMENT 

It  £ave  us,  for  perhaps  the  first  time  in  all  history,  a  republic  with 
the  three  basic  divisions  of  government — the  legislative,  executive,  and 
julicial — mutually  and  completely  independent  the  one  from  the  other, 
under  which  it  is  not  possible  for  any  branch  of  government   legally 

to  set  up  a  system  by  which  that  branch  can  first  conceive  what  it  wants 
to  do,  then  make  the  law  ordering-  its  doing,  and  then,  itself,  judge 
its  own  enforcement  of  its  own  law,  a  system  that  has  always  brought 
extortion,  oppression — a  system  that  every  dictator  has  employed  and 
must  employ. 

(  To  be  continued) 

Priesthood 

By  Howard  Osborne 

And  God  said  unto  them:  ".  .  .  Replenish  the  earth  and  sub- 
due it  and  have  dominion  over  every  living  thing."  What  is  the 
implication  contained  in  these  words?  [mmediately  preceding  tin- 
words  given  above  we  read.  "And  God  blessed  them."  That  was  the 
blessing  of  a  loving  Father,  and  in  blessing  Adam,  the  first  man. 
God  bestowed  upon  him  the  Holy  Priesthood,  the  onl)  power  by 
which  he  could  control  the  creations  of  God,  the  power  by  which 
all  things  are  created  and  made.  What  joy  must  of  necessity  enter 
into  the  heart  of  man  in  the  knowledge  that  this  power  and  authority 
has  again  been  restored  to  earth  and  consideration  of  all  that  this 
restoration  implies.  Let  us  review  it  briefly.  Priesthood  is  the 
Power  of  God,  therefore  it  is  eternal.  Priesthood  is  the  key  of  the 
doorway  to  perfection.  Priesthood  is  the  power  by  which  all  things 
re.  or  will  be,  or  indeed  can  be,  created.  Priesthood  leads  to 
kindness,  courtesy,  chivalry,  etc.  Priesthood,  when  exercised,  com- 
mands respect. 

The  development  of  priestly  powers  leads  in  a  knowledge  of 
Theology,  Astronomy,  History.  Mineralogy,  Geology,  Soil  Cultiva- 
tion, Prophecy,  Politics,  Wars,  Kingdoms  and  Judgments.  Priest- 
hood brings  happiness  into  the  home  life  and  incidentally  Moses  the 
community  of  which  the  hearer  is  a  part.  That  a  high  standard  of 
living,  high  temporal  and  spiritual  qualities  are  required  of  those 
holding  this  exalted  and  holy  calling  is  self  evident.  This  embodies 
tlie  Following  ideals.  Physical  health,  intellectual  activity,  vocational 
and  financial  efficiency,  proper  conduct  and  spiritual  growth,  love 
and  justice.  Such  a.  high  standard  of  life  is  not  acquired  instantly, 
hut  no  sooner  is  knowledge  of  lesser  things  gained  than  new  fields 
of  investigation  are  unfolded  to  the  mind,  made  active  1>\  the  Spirit 
of  Truth/ 

Priesthood  is  without  beginning  and  without  end.  it  is  eternal, 
knowing  no  harrier  except  that  raised  by  iniquity,  which  harrier  will, 
in  due  time  he  vanquished.  The  spiritual  condition  of  a  man  is;  deter- 
mined by  the  decree  to  which  he  honours  the  Priesthood. 


Hune,  1941  TE   KARERE  691 

The  Saints— The  World 

NEED  TO  LIVE  THE  WORD  OF  WISDOM 
By  Hohepa  M.  Meha 

Through  the  channels  afforded  me  by  Te  Karcre,  I  would  like 
to  draw  the  readers'  attention  to  the  Word  of  Wisdom,  and  the 
blessings  which  we  receive  through  living  this  sacred  and  divine 
principle. 

The  Book  of  Moses  in  the  Pearl  of  Great  Price  reveals  a  con- 
versation which  took  place  between  Adam  and  an  angel  of  the  Lord 
shortly  after  our  first  parents  were  banished  from  the  Garden  of 
Eden.  Adam  had  been  commanded  in  the  Garden 
"to  be  fruitful  and  multiply  and  replenish  the  earth 
and  subdue  it."  After  the  transgression  he  and  Eve 
were  banished  from  the  Garden  into  the  world  with 
the  commandment  that  they  should  "eat  their  bread 
only  by  the  sweat  of  their  faces"  all  the  days  of  their 
lives.  They  were  also  commanded  to  offer  sacrifices 
to  the  Lord — sacrifices  that  were  without  spot  or 
blemish  from  among  the  sheep,  goats  and  cattle. 
Adam  obeyed  this  command.  After  many  days  the  angel  of 
the  Lord  came  to  Adam  and  asked  why  he  was  offering  these  sacri- 
fices. His  answer  was:  "I  know  not,  save  the  Lord  commanded  it." 
Adam  had  sufficient  love  and  respect  for  his  Heavenly  Father 
that  he  was  confident  God  would  not  ask  him  to  do  anything  contrary 
to  the  laws  of  his  own  happiness  and  development.  He  was  willing 
to  take  the  advice,  counsel  and  greetings  of  the  Lord  as  sufficient 
persuasion  to  convince  him  that  the  opportunity  to  know  and  obey 
God's  commandment  was  a  great  blessing  and  honour.  This,  my 
brethren  and  sisters  and  friends,  is  the  type  of  obedience  and  the 
level  of  response  on  which  the  Lord  desires  his  children  to  live  in 
relation  lo  the  will  of  God  laid  down  in  the  Word  of  Wisdom. 

In  this  great  "Code"  there  are  positive  and  negative  teachings. 
Certain  things  are  pointed  out  as  not  being  good  for  man,  either 
physically,  mentally,  morally  or  spiritually,  included  in  this  are 
alcoholic  beverages  and  tobacco. 

Al  the  time  when  this  revelation  was  given  to  ihe  Prophet  Joseph 
Smith,  little  was  known  of  the  harmful  effects  of  these  two  com- 
modities. However,  as  the  years  wenl  by,  medical  science  endorsed 
and  corroborated  the  truth  of  this  revelation,  staling  emphatically 

thai   these  two      tobacco  and  drink      are  not   good    for  the  body.    The 

truth  of  this  has  been  brought  to  my  notice  since  my  period  o\  train- 
ing as  a  member  of  the  Royal  New  Zealand  Air  Force.  Among 
other  requirements  expected  of  an  Air  Force  trainee,  physical  timess 
is  most  essential  and  is  demanded  most  rigidly  b\  those  iii  authority. 


TE   KARERE  Hone,  L941 

The  requisites  of  a  good  airman  arc  to  be  able  to  think,  decide 
and  act  quickly  without  hesitation.  This  can  only  be  done  by  an 
active,  clear-thinking  brain  which  is  found  only  in  a  body  that  is 

physically  and  mentally  fit.  In  the  word  of  the  medical  officer, 
"Leave  the  booze  alone  and  do  not  smoke  to  excess.       Better  still, 

leave  both  entirely  alone,  for  they  are  the  means  of  dimming  the 
eyes  and  the  brain,  the  slowing  up  of  the  muscular  reactions.  The 
machines  you  will  he  handling  are  highly  powered  and  most  sensi- 
tive, the  enemy  are  just  as  brave  as  von.  Hence  it  is  necessary  that 
you  he  in  a  state  of  perfect  physical  fitness  in  order  that  you  might 
come  out  on  top." 

From  the  above  remarks  from  one  who  is  in  a  position  to  give 
an  unbiased  and  honest,  if  not  professional  opinion,  the  use  of 
tobacco  and  strong  drink  is  strongly  taboo.  The  great  majority  of 
humanity  to-day  indulges  in  taking  into  their  bodies,  in  dangerous 
amounts,  one,  if  not  both,  of  the  above  evils.  One  thought  should 
he-  stressed  at  this  point.  God  never  asks  his  children  to  do  any- 
thing that  is  contrary  to  the  laws  that  govern  their  own  develop- 
ment and  eternal  progress.  Neither  dors  God  ever  ask  any  man 
to  refrain  from  doing  anything  that  would  secure  for  him  the  above- 
mentioned  blessings.  The  Gospel  is  not  a  joy-crushing  philosophy 
of  life,  hut  a  joy-producing  plan  of  salvation.  "Men  are  that  they 
might  have  joy."  If  then,  in  this  life  only  we  are  concerned  about 
joy  and  happiness,  then  living  the  Word  of  Wisdom  is  the  secret 
by  which  this  might  be  attained. 

The  empire  to-day  needs  men  and  women  who  are  physically 
and  menially  alive.  We,  the  Latter-day  Saints  people,  should  be 
outstanding  above  all  other  people.  But  are  we?  Every  boy  who 
is  a  member  of  the  Church  should  pass  the  high  standard  of  medical 
fitness  required  by  the  Air  Force.  And  we  can  be.  if  we  but  live  the 
simple  law  which  our  kind  and  gracious  Heavenly  Father  has  given 
Mis  people  whereby   they   might   be  a  delightsome  people. 

In  bidding  you  farewell  and  an  revoir,  I  would  like  to  say — 
lie  prayerful,  for  many  wonders  are  wrought  by  prayer;  be  merci- 
ful, for  they  that  are  merciful  shall  obtain  mercy;  let  all  thy  deal- 
ings with  thy  fellow-men  be  tempered  with  mercy  and  charity  and 
your  cup  of  joy  will  overflow. 

Assist  Te  Karere',  assist  your  district  officers;  assist  your  mis- 
sion president  and  you  will  be  happy. 

God  bless  you  all.  May  He  hasten  the  day  when  Peace  shall 
envelop  die  earth  as  the  waters  cover  the  deep.  I  want  to  thank 
you  all  for  your  help  during  my  term  as  Editor  of  Te  Karere  and 
Superintendent  of  Sunday  Schools.  I  appreciate  your  kindnesses  to 
me  and   mine. 

Kia  ora  ra  koutou  katoa.  God  bless  and  help  you  all.  members 
and  non-members  alike,  is  the  wish  of  your  brother  and  servant. 

— H.M.M. 


Hune,  1941 


TE   KARERE 


693 


Wipere  Amaru 


Church  Welfare  Programme 

By  Wi  Pere  Amaru  A.B.,  MA. 
(Mission  Welfare  Supervisor) 

Although  welfare  work  among  the  Saints 
is  the  expression  of  a  philosophy  as  old  as  the 
Church  itself,  it  was  not  until  April,  1936,  that 
the  Church  Welfare  Programme  was  introduced 
by  the  First  Presidency. 

The  main  objective  of  the  Welfare  Pro- 
gramme, after  meeting  the  emergency  relief 
needs  of  orphans,  widows,  worthy  poor  and  dis- 
lodged workers  within  the  Church,  is  raising"  the 
level  of  economic  and  social  welfare  of  the 
Saints. 

If  the  Church  Welfare  Programme  is  to 
succeed  in  the  Mission,  it  is  because  it  suc- 
ceeds in  every  Branch.  In  order  that  this  may 
be,  immediate  organization  within  the  districts 
and  branches  is  vitally  necessary.  The  District  Presidency,  District 
Relief  Society  President  and  a  Welfare  Work  Director  (to  be  chosen 
by  the  District  Presidency)  shall  constitute  the  District  Welfare 
Council.  The  District  President  (or  any  other  nominated  by  him) 
shall  act  as  chairman  with  full  responsibility  for  the  success  of  the 
Welfare   Programme  in  the  district. 

The  Branch  Presidency,  Branch  Relief  Society  President  and 
the  Branch  Work  Director  (to  be  appointed  by  the  Branch  Presi- 
decny)  shall  automatically  become  the  Branch  Welfare  Committee. 
The  Branch  President  (or  any  other  appointed  by  him)  shall  assume 
chairmanship  with  full  responsibilty  to  the  District  Welfare  Council 
for  the  success  of  the  Welfare  Programme  in  the  branch. 

Where  two  or  three  branches  may  find  it  more  to  their  advan- 
tage to  work  together  may  do  so  as  a  Regional  Unit,  each  branch 
being  represented  on  the  Regional  Unit  by  the  Branch  Welfare 
Committee. 

The  question  of  storehouses  shall  be  left  to  the  District  Welfare 
Councils  who  may  institute  District,  Regional  or  Branch  storehouses 
to  suit  the  conditions  that  exist. 

Each  district  and  each  branch  may  promote  projects  for  the  rais- 
ing of  the  living  standards  of  the  Saints,  but  the  first  project  for  the 
Mission  is — 

"The  Six-months'  Plan  for  the  Beautification  of  all  Latter- 
day  Saint   I  Ionics  and  Chapels  (places  of  worship). 

Concurrenl  with  this  programme  for  the  beautification  is  another 
project  which  has  been  preached  to  the  people  incessantly.  This 
second  project   for  the  Mission  is — 


""4  TE   KARERE  Hune,  l'Ml 

".  /  Six-months'  Plan  to  have  Ei>ery  Enrolled  Branch 
Member  Pay  Tithing  and  Fast-offering" 

Tithing  money  is  used  for  the  building  and  maintenance  of 
temples,  meeting-houses  and  other  Church  edifices;  for  the  support 
of  the  educational  and  missionary  systems;  for  the  care  of  the  sick 
and  indigent,  and  for  any  and  every  Church  activity — in  short,  the 
tithing  is  used  for  the  welfare  of  the  Church  and  its  peoples.  With- 
out that  spirit  by  which  the  Saints  pay  their  tithes  and  fast  offerings 
we  cannot  uphold  the  Church  Welfare  Programme,  hecau.se  its  very 
success  depends  upon  the  spirit  of  sacrifice  and  giving  and  of  co- 
operative effort. 

May  the  Lord  bless  the  Priesthood  that  it  may  direct  the  adminis- 
tration of  the  Church  Welfare  Programme  in  our  midst. 

(A  detailed  plan  for  the  Church   Welfare  Programme  will  be  forwarded 
to  each  District,  but  start  your  operations  using  the  information  in  the  above.) 

To  The  Sunday  Schools 

You  are  here  reminded  to  forward  your  Quarterly  Reports  Eor 
the-  periods  ending  February  and  May.  Reports  are  to  be  done  in 
triplicate,  that  is.  three  copies — one  Eor  Branch  use.  one  to  the  Dis- 
trict and  the  other  to  the  Mission  Secretary  of  the  Sunday  Schools, 
Box   72,   Auckland. 

Sixpenny  Funds  within  the  I  .ranch  Sunday  Schools  are  due 
half-yearly — with  the  Second  Quarterly  Report  and  with  the  Final 
Quarterly  Report.  Your  Sixpenny  Fund  is  to  be  sent  to  the  Dis- 
trict and  at  the  same  time  attach  to  your  Quarterly  Report  forwarded 
to  the  Mission  Secretary  the  amount  sent  to  the  District. 

This  issue  of  Te  Karere  will  bring  to  you  the  Suggested  Les- 
son (  Outlines  to  be  followed  in  your  classes.  We  realize  thai  what 
you  may  already  be  studying  and  teaching  in  your  Schools  are  more 
interesting  and  that  you  are  well  on  the  way  to  completing  your 
courses;  however,  we  would  appreciate  your  acceptance  of  the  out- 
lines as  soon  as  is  practicable  without   disrupting  your  work. 

KINDERGARTEN.     (For   children    4    and    5   years   of   age.) 

Bible  Stories 

June    8,    1941. 

"Abraham    An    Unselfish    Leader'' 

Genesis   12:  1-8   and   13.      "Objective" — God  rejoices   in   our  unselfish- 
ness towards  others. 

June   15,   1941. 

"A    Promise    Fulfilled" 

Genesis  14,  15,  17:  19-22  and  21:  1-3.      ''Objective" — Willing  obedience 
to   God's  commands  brings  great  blessings. 

June  22,  1941. 

"Jacob,    Beloved   of   God" 

Genesis  28  and  33.      "Objective" — Sincerity  and  purity  of  life  are  steps 
leading  to  God. 


Hune,  1941  TE   KARERE  695 

June   29,    1941. 

"Thy   Faith   Hath   Made   Thee  Whole 

Mark  5:25-34;  Matt.  9:20-22  and  Luke  8:43-49.  "Objective" — Im- 
plicit faith  together  with  earnest  work  bring  the  blessings  of 
heaven. 

PRIMARY.     (For  children  6,  7,  8  and  9  years  of  age.) 
Bible  Stories 

June  8,  1941 — "Daniel's  Three  Friends  in  a  Furnace"  (Dan.  3).  Objec- 
tive :  Courage  to  do  right  wins  the  favour  of  God  and  man. 

June  15,  1941 — "Daniel  in  the  Lion's  Den"  (Dan.  6).  Objective: 
Courage  to  do  right  wins  the  favour  of  God  and  man. 

June  22,  1941 — "Brave  Queen  Esther"  (Book  of  Esther).  Objective: 
Great   blessings   come  through   fasting   and   prayer. 

June  22,  1941 — "God  Sends  Food  and  Drink  to  Israel"  (Exodus  15: 
23-27  and  16).  Objective:  The  Lord  blesses  those  who  keep 
His    commandments. 

CHURCH  HISTORY.    (For  children  10  and  11  years  of  age.) 
Study  the  Book  of  Mormon. 

INTERMEDIATE.    (For  pupils  12,  13,  14  and  15  years  of  age.) 

June  8,  1941— "The  Birth  of  Jesus"  (Matt.  1:18-25);  Luke  2:1-20. 
Objective:  To  emphasize  the  fact  that  Jesus,  the  Redeemer  of 
Mankind,  the  Lord  of  this  earth,  was  born  under  conditions 
of   poverty   and  humility. 

June  15,  1941 — "The  Escape  from  Herod"  (Matt.  2:19-23).  Objec- 
tive: To  show  that  when  a  person  has  been  given  an  especially 
important  mission  to  perform,  the  Lord  will  help  him  to  accom- 
plish  it. 

June  22,  1941 — Jesus  In  The  Temple"  (Luke  2:  41-52).  Objective:  To 
impress  upon  pupils  the  fact  that  the  age  of  twelve  years  was 
— and  still  is — a  turning  point  of  very  great  importance. 

June  29,  1941 — "Jesus  Shows  His  Love  for  Little  Children  and  Blesses 
Them"  (Mark  10:13-16;  Matt.  19:13-15;  Luke  18:15-17). 
Objective:  To  teach  that  mothers  and  children  are  loved  of  God, 
and  that  the  faith  of  a  child  is  necessary  for  those  who  would 
enter  the  Kingdom  of  God. 

A  &  B  DEPARTMENTS.    (For  pupils  16,  17,  18  and  19  years  of  age.) 

June  8,  1941 — "The  Story  of  the  Creation"  (Gen.  1  and  2).  Problems: 
Discuss  scientific  and  religious  views  of  the  creation.  Who 
created  the  earth?  What  do  we  learn  concerning  the  likeness 
of  God  and  man  from  the  story  of  the  creation?  What  do  you 
understand  by  the  word  creation? 

June  15,  1941 — Continue  with  previous  lesson. 

June  22,  1941 — "The  Story  of  the  Garden  of  Eden"  (Gen.  2:  8-25  and 
3).  Problems:  Theories  of  the  location  of  Eden.  State  Adam's 
place  in  the  new  home.  Could  the  purposes  of  the  Lord  have 
been  accomplished  in  any  other  way  than  the  way  they  were? 
What  is  our  debt  to  Adam  and  Eve? 

June  29,  1941 — Continue  with  previous  lesson. 

C.  &  D.  DEPARTMENTS.     (For  pupils  20  to  25  years  of  age.) 

June    8,    1941 — "The    Greatness    of    Thy    Boy    of    Nazareth"    (Mall.     1: 

1-17;   3:17;    Mark    1:11;    Luke    1.    2:41-52,    3:28-88,    4:16). 

Problems:  What  is  a  birthright?     What  arc  the  advantages  el' 


n     KARERE  Hone,  1941 

being  well   horn?      Why  is  Jesus  often  called  the  Son  of  David? 
Do  you  Bee  any  relationship  between  a  person's  birthright,  his 

use  of  opportunities  and  his  sun. 
June  15,   L941 — Continue  with  previous  Lesson. 

June  22,  1941 — "Missionary  Work  of  John  the  Baptist  in  the  Wilder- 
ness of  Judea"  (Matt.  3:1-12;  Mark  1:1-8;  Luke  3:1-18). 
Problems:  Make  a  list  of  the  gospel  principles  John  taught.  H"w 
do  they  compare  with  the  first  principles  of  the  (iospel?  Why 
should  John  receive  his  authority  from  special  messengers; 
What  special  preparation  or  fitness  did  John's  parent-  | 
that  made  them  worthy  to  rear  such  a  great  character?  Wherein 
did  John  reject  the  opportunity  for  popularity  among  Jewish 
leaders? 

June  29,  1941 — Continue  with  previous  lesson. 

ADULT  GOSPEL   DOCTRINE.     (For  all   others  not  assigned.) 

Continue  with   present  studies  until  a  more  complete  report  is 
received  of  what  is  being  used  throughout  the  Mission. 

MAORI  CLASS— As  printed. 

SUNDAY  SCHOOL 

Theme—  j 

"OUR   HOMES   AND   CHAPELS   SHALL    BE    BEAUTIFUL" 

"For  Zion  must   increase  in  beauty  and  in  Holiness;  her  borders         I 
must  be  enlarged;  her  stakes  must  be  strengthened;  yea  verily  I  say 
unto   you.     Zion    must   arise   and   put   on   her   beautiful  garments." 

<  Doctrine  &  Covenants  *2:  14.  | 


SACRAMENT  GEM 

lie  lives,  all  glory  to   His  name. 

He  lives,  my  Jesus,  still  the  same; 
()  sweet  the  joy  this  sentence  £ives, 

1   know  that  my  Redeemer  lives. 

CONCERT  RECITATION 
/  Peter  3:  10. 

"For  he  that  will  love  life,  and  see  good  days,  let  him  refrain  his 
tongue    from  evil,  and   his   lips   diat   they   speak   no  guile." 

KORERO   A  NGAKAU 

1  Pita  3:  10. 

'*Ki  te  mea  hoki  tetahi  kia  aroha  ki  te  ora,  kia  kite  i  nga  ra 
pai,  me  pehi  e  ia  tona  arero  kei  kino,  ona  ngutu  hoki  kei  korero 
tinihanga." 

HYMNS 

"Choose  the   Right"    Page  86 

"To   Tatou   Kainga"    Wharangi    71 


Hune,  1941  TE   KARERE  697 

PRIMARY 

MEMORY  GEM 

"Politeness  is  to  do  and  say 
The  kindest  thing,  in  the  kindest  way." 
This  is  the  regular  memory  gem,  but  if  another  appears  at  the 
end  of  a  lesson,  it  is  for  that  lesson  only. 

LESSONS: 

FIRST  WEEK 

WATCH  US  GROW 
Objective: 

To  create  interest  in  health  activities  and  establish  the  daily  prac- 
tice of  right  health  habits. 

Suggestions   for  Teaching: 

The  health  lessons  that  will  be  developed  during  the  remainder  of 
this  quarter  will  be  based  on  the  subject,  "Watch  Us  Grow."  Pictures 
and  charts  will  be  useful  in  giving  this  lesson. 

Song: 

"We  Pray"  No.  13,  Primary  Songs  for  the  Missions. 

Prayer: 

Led  by  the  teacher. 
Lesson    Approach: 

Each  teacher  may  develop  her  own  approach  to  this  lesson.  The 
following  are  suggestive: 

1.  Show  a  picture  of  two  children  measuring  to  see  who  is  the 
taller.      Discuss. 

2.  Measure  each  child,  if  the  group  is  small,  and  keep  the  record 
for  future  use. 

3.  Review  last  week's  lesson  with  the  health  objective  in  mind. 
When  the  children  are  interested  in  the  idea,  tell  the  following 

story : — 

Lesson   Story: 

JANE  LEARNS  THE  VALUE  OF  FOOD 

Have  you  ever  felt  tired  just  before  dinner?  Did  you  feel  more 
rested  after  you  ate?      Do  you  know  why? 

Have  you  ever  seen  a  little  girl  or  boy  very  thin  and  white?  I 
knew  a  litttle  girl  who  was  very  pale  and  I  also  knew  that  this  same 
little  girl  would  not  eat  the  lovely  food  her  mother  prepares  in  their 
nice  clean  kitchen. 

Jane  was  this  little  girl's  name  and  she  was  just  six  years  old. 
How  many  of  you  are  six?  Often  Jane  was  not  hungry.  She  didn't 
like  to  drink  her  milk.  She  wouldn't  eat  many  vegetables  and  she 
never  wanted  her  oatmeal  or  cream  of  wheat. 

One  day  Jane  was  too  tired  to  play.  She  came  into  the  house  and 
lay  down.  Her  Aunt  Mary,  who  was  visiting  her  mother,  explained  why 
she  was  so  tired. 

"Have  you  ever  watched  a  locomotive  pull  a  long  train  el"  cars?" 
asked  Aunt  Mary.  (Show  a  picture  of  a  locomotive  and  let  the  chil- 
dren talk  about  it.)  What  do  you  think  Jane  answered  her  Aunt'.' 
"Oh,  yes!"  said  Jane.      "I  love  to  watch   a   train." 


TE   KARERE  Hunc,l941 

"Do  you  know  why  the  engine  can  pull  the  load  so  easily?"  asked 
Aunt   Mary. 

"No,   I   never  thought  about  that,"  said  Jane. 

"Well,"  explained  Aunt  Mary,  "it's  because  it  burns  fuel.  The 
fireman  puts  coal  in  the  fire-box  of  the  engine.  When  the  coal  burns, 
it  heats  the  water  in  the  boiler.  This  then  turns  water  into  steam. 
The  steam  makes  the  engine  go. 

"If  the  engine  does  not  get  enough  fuel,  it  will  not  have  power  to 
run.      If  the  body  does  not  get   enough  food,  it  will  not  have  strength. 

"If  the  engine  gets  too  much  fuel,  the  fire  will  be  smothered  and 
will  not  burn.  If  you  eat  too  much,  your  body  will  be  clogged  and  you 
will  have  no  energy." 

"Do  you  have  to  know  what  to  eat  as  well  as  how  much?"  asked 
Jane. 

"Yes,  Jane,"  answered  Aunt  Mary-  "Our  Heavenly  Father  has 
told  us  what  foods  to  eat.  He  has  promised  us  many  blessings  if  we 
eat  the  right  foods.  Men  have  studied  all  about  it,  too.  If  you  will 
follow  their  advice,  you  will  be  more  likely  to  keep  well  and  grow 
strong." 

"Tell  me  what  Heavenly  Father  says  about  right  foods,  Aunt  Mary." 

"I'll  tell  you  a  few  things  if  you  wish,"  replied  Aunt  Mary.  And 
here  is  a  thing  to  remember,  Jane :  doctors  and  men  who  have  studied 
about  foods  agree  with  what  Heavenly  Father  says.  "You  must  eat 
sugar,  bread  and  cereals  to  give  you  energy.  Fish,  milk,  eggs,  cheese, 
and  Father  in  Heaven  says  not  very  much  meat  will  help  make  you 
grow.  Fresh  vegetables  and  fruits  are  necessary  to  help  take  care  of 
the  wastes.  Then  certain  foods,  such  as  oranges  and  milk  give  us 
vitamins." 

"Why,  those  are  the  foods  mother  is  always  wanting  me  to  eat!" 
exclaimed  Jane.      "She  says  I  need  them." 

"Yes,  and  if  you  eat  them,  you  will  be  a  healthier  little  girl.  Then 
you  can  play  harder  and  enjoy  the  games  more. 

SECOND  WEEK 

FOUR  PRINCES  IN  THE  KINGS  PALACE 
Objective: 

By  keeping  the  laws  of  health  we  gain  in  physical   and  spiritual 

strength. 

Lesson  Approach: 

Show  some  pictures  of  foods  that  are  good  for  people,  or,  have  a 
bag  of  fruits  and  vegetables  with  you.  Call  a  child  to  stand  in  front 
of  you  with  back  turned  and  hands  behind  him.  Place  one  of  the 
objects  in  his  hands  and  let  the  child  try  to  name  the  object. 

After  several  children  have  had  a  turn,  continue  the  discussion. 
Why  has  Heavenly  Father  caused  all  the  good  fruit  and  vegetables  to 
grow?  Every  one  of  yc^u  wants  to  grow  big  and  strong,  don't  you? 
Here  are  some  pictures  of  boys  and  girls  who  eat  foods  that  make 
them  grow  strong.  (Show  pictures.)  Tell  me  how  they  look.  What 
do  their  happy  smiles  tell? 

This  is  a  story  about  four  boys  who  lived  in  a  king's  palace. 

Lesson    Story: 

DANIEL  AND   HIS   COMPANIONS 

Ever  and  ever  so  long  ago  there  lived  a  great  and  powerful  king 
named  Nebuchadnezzer.  He  had  a  mighty  army  and  fought  many 
battles.  This  king  did  not  know  about  our  Heavenly  Father.  He 
prayed  to  idols  made  of  stone  or  wood.  (Show  picture  of  an  idol  and 
explain  briefly.) 


Hune,  1941  TE   KARERE  699 

Once  Nebuchadnezzer  sent  his  great  army  to  fight  against  a  people 
who  believed  in  God.  The  king's  army  won  the  victory  because  the 
people  had  not  been  doing  the  things  their  Heavenly  Father  wanted 
them  to   do. 

After  the  battle  the  king  sent  one  of  his  servants  to  bring  to  him 
four  boys  from  among  the  people  he  had  conquered.  "They  must  be 
sons  of  princes,"  said  the  king.  "Children  who  are  strong  and  fine 
looking  and  clever  in  their  studies." 

The  king  wanted  the  very  finest  boys  that  could  be  found  because 
he  was  going  to  take  them  back  to  his  own  country.  He  wanted  them 
to  be  fine  looking  because  they  were  going  to  live  in  the  king's  beautiful 
palace  with  him.  He  wanted  them  clever,  because  they  would  have  to 
learn  a  new  language  which  was  very  hard  to  learn.  He  wanted  them 
strong  and  brave,  so  that  they  would  not  get  homesick  and  want  to  go 
back  to  their  own  homes. 

The  servant  went  about  among  the  people,  and  finally  found  four 
very  brave  young  princes.  They  were  taken  miles  and  miles  away  to  the 
country  of  the  king.  You  will  want  to  know  their  names  because  we 
are  going  to  have  such  fine  stories  about  them.  Their  names  were 
Daniel,  Shadrach,  Mishach,  and  Abednego.  Shall  we  all  say  their  names 
together? 

This  story  is  about  the  boys  while  they  lived  in  the  king's  palace. 

The  City  of  Babylon,  where  the  king  lived,  was  a  very  beautiful 
city.  And  the  palace  which  was  his  home  was  very  beautiful  too.  He 
rode  in  chariots  drawn  by  fine  white  horses.  He  wore  fine  clothes,  and 
when  he  sat  down  to  eat,  the  table  was  spread  with  food  that  was  rich 
and  sweet.  And  there  were  many  kinds  of  wine  for  him  to  drink. 
The  dishes  were  gold  and  silver  and  the  cups  were  set  with  jewels. 

The  king  wanted  the  four  boys  to  keep  strong  and  well,  so  he  sent 
them  the  same  kind  of  rich  food  and  wines  that  he  ate  and  drank. 
Is  that  the  kind  of  food  which  makes  boys  and  girls  well  and  strong? 
What  foods  are  the  best  to  help  children  to  grow  strong  and  big?  And 
what  is  the  very  best  things  to   drink? 

Daniel  knew  this,  and  so  did  the  other  three  boys.  Perhaps  their 
own  mothers  gave  them  good,  simple  food,  and  that  was  the  reason 
they  were  well. 

The  king's  servant,  whose  name  was  Melzar,  brought  rich  food  in 
gold  and  silver  dishes  and  wine  in  jewelled  cups.  Daniel  spoke  up 
bravely  to  the  servant  and  said,  "Please,  sir,  we  would  rather  not  eat 
that  kind  of  food.      We  are  not  used  to  it  and  it  is  not  good  for  us." 

The  servant  Melzar  loved  Daniel  very  dearly  and  would  gladly 
have  brought  other  food,  but  he  was  afraid  the  king  would  be  angry 
with  him.  He  said,  "It  is  the  best  food  in  the  land.  The  king  wants 
you  to  eat  so  that  you  can  grow  strong  and  wise.  I  fear  my  lord 
the  king.  If  he  sees  your  faces  growing  thin,  he  may  punish  me  by 
cutting  off  my  head."  Daniel  knew  they  wouldn't  grow  thin  so  he 
said,  "Only  try  us  for  ten  days,  I  pray  thee.  Give  us  pulse  to  eat, 
and  water  to  drink."      (Pulse  is  food  like  our  peas  and  beans.) 

Because  Melzar  loved  the  boys,  he  did  as  Daniel  asked.  At  the  end 
of  the  ten  days  when  the  king's  servant  looked  at  the  four  boys,  and 
then  at  the  other  children  who  had  eaten  the  king's  rich  food;  what 
do  you  think  he  found?  Yes.  You  are  right,  the  Tour  primes  were 
fairer  and  stronger  than  the  other  princes  who  had  been  eating  the 
rich  food   and   drinking   wine 

They  did  something  else  that  helped  them  to  keep  strong  and 
beautiful.      They  used  to  open   the  windows  of  their  rooms,  and.   Facing 

toward  their  old  home,  they  prayed  to  Heavenly  Father  to  help  then 
to  do  always  what  would  please  Him. 


'I  I.   ECARERE  Hune,  L941 

At  the  end  of  three  yean  the  king  had  all  the  boys  brought  be- 
fore him,  and  among  them  were  Daniel.  Shadach,  Mishach,  and  Abed- 
nego.  To  the  king's  Burprise  be  Pound  that  Daniel.  Shadrach,  Meshach, 
and  Abednego  were  taller  and  stronger  than  all  the  other  boys.  He 
found,  too,  that  they  not  only  answered  the  questions  far  better,  but 
that  they  knew  ten  times  as  much  as  the  wisest  men  in  the  kingdom. 

THIRD  WEEK 

"THOU    SHALT   LOVE   THY    NEIGHBOURS" 
Objective: 

In  order  to  be  truly  happy  we  must  love  and  help  our  friends  and 
neighbours. 

Suggestions    for    Teaching: 

Call  to  the  children's  remembrance  the  fact  that  Jesus  is  our 
Guide.  That  He  came  to  the  earth  to  teach  the  people  how  to  do  right. 
Impress  again  the  thought  that  our  Heavenly  Father  loves  all  His  chil- 
dren on  the  earth.  Because  He  loves  us  we  should  love  Him  and  serve 
Him.      He  has  asked  us,  too,  to  love  one  another. 

In  telling  the  lesson  story  enlarge  upon  the  text,  and  make  each 
incident   stand    out.      The    following   may    help: 

"Jericho  is  about  fifteen  miles  north-east  to  Jerusalem.  The  road 
is  a  very  dangerous  region  for  the  traveller,  as  robber  bands  are  con- 
stantly on  the  watch." 

Lesson    Approach: 

To    introduce   your   lesson   tell   the   following   beautiful   legend : 

Once  upon  a  time,  so  runs  the  legend,  there  lived,  in  the  far 
Judean  Hills,  two  affectionate  brothers,  tilling  a  farm  together.  One 
had  a  wife  and  a  houseful  of  children;  the  other  was  a  lonely  man. 

One  night  in  the  harvest  time,  the  older  brother  said  to  his  wife: 
''My  brother  is  a  lonely  man.  I  will  go  out  and  move  some  of  the 
sheaves  from  my  side  of  the  field  over  to  his,  so  that  when  he  sees  them 
in  the  morning,  his  heart  will  be  cheered  by  the  abundance."  And  he 
did. 

That  night  the  other  brother  said  to  his  workman:  "My  brother  has 
a  houseful  of  children  and  many  mouths  to  fill.  I  am  alone  and  do  not 
need  all  this  wealth.  I  will  go  and  move  some  of  the  sheaves  over  in 
his  field,  so  that  he  shall  rejoice  in  the  morning  when  he  sees  how  great 
is  his  store."     And  he  did. 

And  they  did  this  that  night  and  the  next,  in  the  sheltering  dark. 
But  on  the  third  night  the  moon  came  out,  and  they  met  face  to  face, 
each  with  his  arms  filled  with  sheaves. 

On  that  spot,  says  the  legend,  was  built  the  temple  of  Jerusalem, 
for  it  was  esteemed  that  there  earth  came  nearest  to  heaven. 

Conversation: 

Why  did  each  brother  try  to  help  the  other?  Why  did  each  try 
not  to  let  the  other  know  that  he  was  trying  to  help?  etc. 

One  of  the  important  lessons  that  Jesus  taught  was  that  we  should 
love  one  another.  He  said:  "Thou  shalt  love  the  Lord  thy  God  with  all 
thy  soul,  and  with  all  thy  strength,  and  with  all  thy  mind;  and  thy 
neighbour   as   thyself. 

I'm  going  to  tell  you  a  beautiful  story  about  neighbours  which 
Jesus  told.  This  is  the  way  the  story  is  told  in  the  New  Testament, 
Luke   10:  30-37. 


Hune,  1941  TE   KARERE  701 

Lesson   Story: 

THE  GOOD  NEIGHBOUR 

A  certain  man  went  down  from  Jerusalem  to  Jericho,  and  fell 
among  thieves,  which  stripped  him  of  his  raiment,  and  wounded  him, 
and  departed,  leaving  him  half  dead. 

"And  by  chance  there  came  down  a  certain  priest  that  way;  and 
when   he   saw  him,   he   passed   by   on  the   other  side. 

"And  likewise  a  Levite,  when  he  was  at  the  place,  came  and  looked 
on  him,  and  passed  by  on  the  other  side. 

But  a  certain  Samaritan,  as  he  journeyed,  came  where  he  was; 
and  when  he  saw  him,  he  had  compassion  on  him. 

"And  went  to  him,  and  bound  up  his  wounds,  pouring  in  oil  and 
wine,  and  set  him  on  his  beast,  and  brought  him  to  an  inn,  and  took 
care   of  him. 

"And  on  the  morrow  when  he  departed,  he  took  out  two  pence,  and 
gave  them  to  the  host,  and  said  unto  him,  'Take  care  of  him:  and 
whatsoever  thou  spendest  more,  when  I  come  again,  I  will  repay  thee.' 

"Which  now  of  these  three,  thinkest  thou,  was  neighbour  unto  him 
that  fell   among  the  thieves?" 

Conversation  After   the   Story: 

Who  is  your  neighbour?  Does  it  mean  necessarily,  the  one  who 
lives  next  door?  How  should  we  treat  our  neighbours?  The  Samaritan 
treated  the  wounded  man  as  he  would  like  to  be  treated.  He  was  kind 
to  him,  even  though  a  stranger.  He  remembered  the  command:  "Thou 
shalt  love  thy  neighbours  as  thyself."  Who  was  it  who  told  us  to 
do  this? 

Have  the  children  repeat  it. 

What  would  happen  if  we  all  loved  our  neighbours  as  ourselves? 
Would  anyone  steal?  Why  not?  Would  anyone  be  unkind  to  another? 
Why  not? 

Read  or  recite  to  the  class  the  following  verses: 
Who  is  thy  neighbour?      He  whom  thou 

Hast  power  to  aid  or  bless, 
Whose  aching  heart  or  burning  brow 

Thy  soothing  hand  may  press. 
Thy  neighbour?      'Tis  the  fainting  poor, 

Whose  eye  with  want  is  dim; 

0,  enter  thou  his  humble  door, 

With  aid  and  peace  for  him! 

— William  B.  0.  Peabody. 

FOURTH  WEEK 

THE  BEAUTIFUL  FLOWERS 
Objective: 

Flowers  are  Heavenly  Father's  gifts  to  beautify  the  world.  Let  us 
give  thanks  for  them. 

Suggestions    for   Teaching: 

"The  child  who  has  been  trained  that  the  constant  presence  oi' 
God  is  a  sure  conviction  can  be  trusted  anywhere. 

"He  has  a  talisman  of  protection  and  strength  which  no  amount 
of  moral  teaching  can  give  him.  He  has  been  given  a  spiritual  endow- 
ment which  will  make  him  rich  as  long  as  he  lives." 

Ask  the  children  to  tell  sonic  of  the  thing8  for  which  they  are 
thankful  and  then  let  one  oi  the  other  children  say  the  prayer, 


HE  TE   KARERE  rlune,l941 

Lesson    Approach: 

Show  pictures  of  children  working  in  gardens,  or  use  cut-out  pic- 
tures oi  gardens  set  up  in  your  Lapboard. 

Talk  about  the  flowers  that  our  kind  Heavenly  Father  has  given 
us.  Call  attention  to  the  many  kinds  of  flowers,  their  colour,  per- 
fume, etc.  (Show  pictures  and  as  you  do  so  say  a  few  lines  of  poetry 
about  each.) 

"The  red  rose  says:  'Be  sweet/ 
The  lily  bids:  'Be  pure.'  " 
"Dear  little  violet. 
Don't  be  afraid; 
Lift    your   blue    eyes 

From  the  rock's  mossy  slade ; 
All  the  birds  call  for  you 

Out   of  the   sky; 
'May    is   here    waiting 
And  here  too  am  I,'  " 

Lesson   Story: 

A  LITTLE  BOY  AND   HIS  GARDEN 

One  afternoon  in  the  spring,  father  came  home  from  the  office 
early  to  make  a  garden.  Danny  followed  him  out  in  the  yard  and 
watched  him  spade  up  the  ground  and  rake  it  until  it  was  as  smooth 
as  the  floor.      Then  he  planted  the   seeds. 

After  dinner  that  night,  Danny  climbed  upon  father's  knee  and 
whispered  in  his  ear  so  that  no  one  could  hear,  "Daddy,  could  I  please 
have  a  garden?" 

"Well,"  said  father,   "we'll  see  about  it." 

The  next  afternoon  when  father  came  home,  he  called  Danny. 
He  had  a  long  package.  "Danny,"  said  he,  "I  believe  that  you  might 
like  to   see  what  we  have  here." 

Then  father  cut  the  string  with  his  pocket-knife,  and  inside  the 
package  Danny  found  a  little  spade  and  rake  and  hoe. 

"0,   Daddy!"  cried  Danny,  "I'm  going  to  make  a  garden." 

Father  gave  Danny  a  little  piece  of  ground  beside  his  big  piece,  and 
Danny  spaded  and  raked  his  ground  until  it  was  as  smooth  as  the  floor. 
Then  father  took  him  down  to  the  seed  store  and  let  him  buy  some 
of  the  packages  with  bright  coloured  pictures.  He  bought  his  favourite 
flowers.  He  wanted  them  for  mother.  When  Danny  had  planted  his 
seeds,  father  got  the  hose  and  watered  his  garden,  and  Danny  took  the 
hose  and  watered  his  garden. 

Every  evening,  unless  it  rained,  father  and  Danny  worked  in  their 
gardens.  When  the  bowers  began  to  grow,  Danny  was  so  happy  that 
he  danced  an  Irish  jig — at  least  that's  what  father  called  it.  Then 
by  and  by  there  came  the  day  when  the  first  bud  opened  on  one  of  the 
plants.  It  was  a  lovely  red  flower.  Danny  could  wait  no  longer;  he 
picked  the  flower  and  gave  it  to — whom  do  you  think?  And  mother 
said  it  was  the  prettiest  flower  anybody  had  ever  given  her. — Adapted. 

Conversation   After   the   Story: 

Mrs.  Dee  has  a  beautiful  rose  garden.  The  roses  are  so  big  and 
so  fragrant!  She  says  they  grow  big  because  she  loves  them  and  cares 
for  them.  Some  people  think  it's  because  she  shares  them  with  her 
friends.      What  do  you  think? 

One  day  at  Primary  the  teacher  asked  the  boys  and  girls  if  they 
could  help  Heavenly  Father  to  care  for  the  sick,  and  that  was  enough 
to  make  them  all  think  of  Jack.     Jack  was  a  little  crippled  boy  who  had 


Hune,  1941  TE   KARERE  703 

to  stay  in  bed  all  the  time.  He  was  a  bright,  happy  fellow  and  all  the 
children  loved  him.  They  thought  of  many  kind  things  they  might 
do  for  Jack,  but  Bob's  plan  was  the  best.  Bob  said,  "It's  Jack's  birth- 
day soon.  Let's  make  him  a  present  that  will  last  a  long  time  and 
make  him  happy  every  day.  Let's  make  a  big  box  to  fit  right  in  Jack's 
window,  and  keep  flowers  planted  in  it  all  the  year  round." 

So  the  boys  got  their  fathers  to  help  make  the  box,  and  they  took 
it  to  Jack's  room,  put  it  in  the  window,  and  filled  it  with  rich,  soft 
earth.  They  got  some  daffodil  bulbs  and  planted  them  about  an  inch 
apart.  Every  day  Jack  watched  for  the  green  shoots  to  come  up  above 
the  earth.  By  and  by  they  came  up  and  soon  began  to  bloom.  The 
box  was  a  glory  of  yellow  flowers,  and  Jack  was  a  very  happy  boy. 

His  friends  came  every  day  to  see  them  and  to  talk  to  Jack. 

"I  have  a  beautiful  garden,"  said  Jack,  "all  filled  with  golden  suns 
that  shine  on  me  every  day.  I  don't  see  why  you  fellows  are  so  good 
to  me." 

Bob  said,  "Well,  Jack,  you  make  us  happy,  too,  and  besides,  we 
like  being  Heavenly  Father's  helpers." 

Memory  Gem: 

For  flowers  that  bloom  about  our  feet ; 
For  tender  grass,  so  fresh  and  sweet; 
Father  in  Heaven,  we  thank  Thee! 

— Emerson. 
For  the  Children: 

Fold  a  piece  of  paper  book  fashion,  any  convenient  size  will  do. 
Write  the  memory  gem  on  the  inside  and  let  the  children  draw  a  flower 
or  flowers  with  wax  crayons  on  the  outside.  This  may  be  taken  home 
to  mother. 


r 


GENEALOGY 

By  Teao  Wirihcma 

Cottage    Meetings    for    the  Month    of    June 

June      8 — Lesson   31,  "The  New  Race  of  Israel." 

12 — Lesson   32,  "Be   True  to   Your  Birthright." 

19 — Lesson   33,  "The   Spirit  of  Temple   Building." 

26 — Lesson   34,  "A   Night   of   Temple    Pictures." 

Home  Teaching 

Nga  komiti  whakapapa  o  ia  Peka  o  ia  Peka  me  hui  i  nga 
Ratapu  katoa — nga  apiha  me  nga  kai-whakaako,  ki  te  ui  ui 
mehemea  kei  te  mahi  nga  Hunga  Tapu  i  o  ratou  whakapapa. 

Whakatauki  \ 

"He  rangai  maomao  i  huri  ki  tua  o  Nukutaurua  kaore  he 
hokinga."  1 


SPECIAL  NOTICE  FOR  PIONEER  DAY 

President  Cowley  has  intimated  his  wish  1  hat  a  suitable  competi- 
tion be  had  to  climax  at  the  Pioneer  Celebrations  held  at  Hawke's  Bay. 
The  competition  to  take  the  form  of  a  "Beard  Raising"  contest,  start 
now.    Rupert  Willongi  says  he'll  be  there  and  is  going  to  commence  aa 

soon  as  his  wife  will   let   him.     Watch  the  next    issue  of  "Te   Karei 

the  minor  details  that  concern  the  contest,  hut  start  your  beards  new' 


7W  TE   KARERE  Hune,  1941 

NEWS  FROM  THE  FIELD 

HERE  AND  THERE,  by  "Now  and  Again." 

The  MANAWATU-WAIRARAPA  District  Presidency  in  i  general  travel 

and  overhaul  tour  has  imparted  new  energy  to  the  many  activities  and  people  of 
the  circuit.  Of  particular  interest  was  the  re-organization  of  the  Rangiotu  Branch 
with  Ngawhiro  Fitzgerald,  Rangi  Paki  and  Tom  Paki  as  President  and  (  oun- 
sellors  and  Sister  Rangi  Paki  Secretary.    At  Porirua  new  officers  were  installed 

to  assist  in  the  work  there,  Polly  Wincera  being  sustained  as  Assistant  District 
Relief  Society  Secretary.  Visitors  to  the  capital  included  people  from  as  far 
north  as  Xuhaka.  It  seems  that  the  storm  which  was  experienced  at  Hui  Tau 
washed  a  few  of  their  people  down  that  way,  among  whom  we  are  pleased  to 
mention  were  W'heti,  Boy  Mataira,  Joe  Smith  and  quite  a  few  others.  Have  a 
good  time.  The  war  has  hrought  to  light  many  little-known  and  interesting  things 
that  are  happening  to  our  people,  among  which  we  are  proud  to  inform  thai 
Xgahuka  Love  of  Otaki  has  five  sons  serving  in  His  Majesty's  Forces.  We 
salute  this  family  with  prayers  of  honourable  service,  asking  God  to  keep  them 
safe.  "Killed  in  Action"  was  the  tenor  of  .-,  cablegram  received  1>>  Charlotte 
Parata  as  regards  her  hrother  Peehi   Parata  of   Waikanac. 

In  the  MAI  II A  District  prior  to  the  Hui  Tan  much  work  was  done  t<,  pre- 
pare for  the  great  occasion;  now  that  that  is  over  the  normal  activit)  is  still 
keeping  the  people  very  busy  in  the  various  Branches.  Honourable  releases  were 
given  Ella  llawea  from  the  District  Primary  Board,  Eru  and  Jane  Tengaio 
from  the  Xuhaka  Y.M.  and  Y.W.M.I.A.s  respectively.  Perea  Smith.  Taka 
Toroaiwhiti,  William  Winiana  and  Angus  Christy  to  the  Y.M. M.I. A.  Presidency 
with  Heni  Christy  chorister,  Louisa  M;itaira  organist,  and  Ata  Pedersen  as 
President  of  the  Young  Women's  M.I. A.  All  other  workers  in  the 
are  here  urged  to  keep  the  good  work  going.  During  the  special  campaign 
d  by  Te  Karere  for  the  One  Thousand  Subscriptions  the  Mania  District 
sent  in  over  one  hundred  subscriptions,  which  is  definitely  a  credit  which  we  are 
pleased  to  acknowledge  and  he  grateful  to  Elsie  Loader.  The  other  one  hun- 
dred,  subs,   are  spread  out   among  all   the  other  district-   of  the    \! 

WELLINGTON  reports  tin-  loss  of  Pearl  Scott,  who  sailed  in  company 
with  Marjorie  Jackman  and  Jeanne  Porteous  aboard  one  i  f  the  Matson  liners 
about  a  week  before  Hui  Tau.  Pearl  is  now  Mrs.  Bodell,  and  we  wish  them 
the  happiness  that  is  rightfully  theirs. 

AUCKLAND  happenings  since  the  departure  of  the  College  Kids,  Jeanne 
and  Jackie,  has  kept  things  moving.  First  we  had  the  Blessed  Event,  when 
Mrs.  Kelly  Harris  and  her  baby  daughter  were  both  reported  as  doing  fine  at 
8.45  p.m.  Monday,  April  7th.  Is  Kelly  proud  of  his  daughter?  Ask  him.  The 
first  Sunday  of  the  month  she  was  blessed  and  given  the-  name  of  Kellani 
Ramarihi  Harris  by  President  Cowley.  Joyce  Billman  had  scleral  p 
her  honour  when  her  engagement  and  forthcoming  marriage  was  announced. 
The  ceremony  of  binding  the  happ  jether  in  the  holy  bonds  of  matri- 

money  was  performed  in  the  I..D.S.   Chapel   by    Elder  William    R.    Pel 
ning  of  Saturday,    17th    May.    1941.    To    Mr.   and    Mrs.    Napier   W< 
Oh.  oh!      Another  member  to  enter  the  waters  . 
Mr.   I).  Fraser,  who  has  been  a  regular  attendant  at  all   Church  functions  and 

-   for  more  than  the  past  year.     We  welcome   Doug.,  and   i 
we  appreciative  of  his  contacts  with  the  Billman  famliy. 

The   many    friends   and    acquaintances   of    Hohepa    Mel  al    the 

Lewis  Eady  Hall  in  Queen  Street  on  Tuesda: 

irior  to  his  embarkation  for  service  overseas.     The  hall  was  the  home  of 
gathering  under  the  leadership 
Rupert'  WiHongi.     President  Cowley  at 

the  party,  were  heartily  endorsed  in  their  action  by  the  Branch,  the  Auxiliaries, 
the  District  and  firm  of  Lewis  Eady  Ltd.     Every*  ne  enj<  yed  thei 
included.     We  p^v  trikre  here  to  l-:s  dear  w'fe,  Mabel,  in  her  courageous  atti- 
tude, and  pray  G'cd's  blessing  on  all  whom  she  loves. 


HOHEPA     METE     MEHA  —  Continued   from    Inside 
Front  Cover. 

will  always  be  endeared  to  the  hearts  of  his  numerous 
friends  and  relatives,  here  and  abroad. 

With  his  honourable  release  from  the  Editor's  chair 
of  Te  Karere  in  1935,  Hepa  spent  his  time  in  Auckland 
with  the  firm  of  Lewis  R.  Eady  Ltd.,  when  on  the  last 
day  of  August,  1940,  marriage  with  Mabel  Ngawaka 
added  yet  another  rung  reached  in  the  ladder  of  life.  This 
wedded  bliss  was  all  too  short  for  the 
happy  couple.  A  call  to  fill  the  Editor's 
chair  of  Te  Karere  when  the  Elders 
evacuated  New  Zealand  was  gladly  ac- 
cepted, only  to  be  terminated  three 
months  later  by  his  acceptance  of  the 
call  to  serve  his  country,  when  he  en- 
tered training  camp  for  overseas  ser- 
vice  with   R.N.Z.A.F. 

In  leaving  these  shores  Elder 
Meha  will  be  terribly  missed  by  his 
dear  wife  Mabel,  who  will  soon  mother 
their  child.  As  much  as  we  honour  and  pray  for  you, 
Hepa,  we  do  as  much  if  not  more  for  your  wife,  Mabel 
Meha.  Because  of  you  we  shall  cherish  her  and  try  to 
lighten  the  sadness  that  weighs  at  your  leaving — for  her- 
self and  your  unborn  child  we  hope  to  do  more,  so  please 
remember  us  for  these  thoughts  and  hopes. 

Our  hearts  are  heavy  in  the  grief  that  comes  from  a 
parting  prompted  by  war.  Our  only  armour  is  that  of 
righteousness  in  this  struggle  when  death  claims  us.  The 
Gospel  will  be  your  shield  as  it  will  be  ours  only  if  we 
remember  the  God  above,  the  God  Whose  Cause  you  have 
so  long  and  faithfully  adhered  to,  the  Father  to  Whom 
you  believe,  and  I  believe  we  have  every  right  to  cling  to. 
to  speak  with  and  to.   His  teaching  to  obey. 

We  bid  you  farewell  and  pray  God's  protecting  hand 
to  be  with  you.    Te  Karere  and  Kelly  will  always  remem 

ber  you   both.      (  rod   bless   VOVL, 

— Kelly   Harris 


^^S^^^^S^^H^^9S^^^  s 


BRANCH  TEACHERS' 


SUGGESTIONS  FOR  BRANCH  TEACHERS 

Teachers  should  be  actively  interested  in  their  people.  They 
should  visit  them  in  times  of  illness  and  death.  They  should  be 
aware  of  the  spiritual,  physical,  and  temporal  status  of  their  people 
to  such  an  extent  that  distress  and  want  may  be  reported  at  once, 
and  appropriate  assistance  to  the  worthy  be  provided  without  delay. 

In  keeping  with  the  duties  assigned  to  teachers  by  revelation, 
it  is  highly  appropriate,  where  making  a  formal  visit,  to  ask  each 
member  of  the  family  questions  containing  the  following  import : 

1.  Are  you  in  harmony — 

(a)  With  your  neighbours  and  associates? 

(b)  With   branch,    stake,    and    General    Authorities    of   the 
Church  ? 

2.  Are  you  attending  to  your  Church  duties — 

(a)  As  a  member 

Attending  meeting,  fasting  once  each  month  and  paying 
Fast  Offering,  paying  tithing,  and  participating  in 
branch  social  functions  ? 

(b)  As   an  officer 

Setting  proper  example,  attending  council  meetings  etc.  ? 

3.  Are  you  attending  to  secret  and  family  prayers  ? 

RESPECT  FOR  THE  PRIESTHOOD 

Those  who  respect  and  honour  the  Priesthood  and  who  qualify 
as  worthy  members  of  the  Church  will  have  an  influence  constantly 
operating  in  their  lives  that  will  bring  happiness,  satisfaction,  and 
promised  blessings. 

They  will  yearn  for  righteousness  and  follow  such  a  well- 
ordered  course  of  life  that  all  who  are  eligible  may  receive  the 
Priesthood  with  all  its  power,  authority,  and  blessings. 

They  will  exercise  the  power  of  God  which  comes  to  them 
through  receiving  the  Priesthood  by  performing  faithfully  and  well 
all  they  are  appointed  to  do  in  the  Church. 

They  will  be  kind,  generous,  and  forgiving  to  all,  and  exercise 
authority  under  appointment  in  the  true  spirit  of  love. 

They  will  govern  and  direct  in  their  homes  in  keeping  with  the 
order  of  the  Church  and  the  will  of  God,  and  yield  willing,  intelli- 
gent obedience  to  those  who  are  called  to  God  to  direct  in  spiritual 
affairs. 

Women  and  children  who  are  entitled  to  the  blessings  and 
benefits  of  the  Priesthood  through  their  husbands  and  fathers  will 
receive  those  blessings  and  benefits  through  honouring,  respecting, 
and  obeying  the  Priesthood. 

No  greater  blessing  ever  has  been,  or  could  be,  given  to  any 
people  than  has  been  given  to  the  Latter-day  Saints  in  the  Priest- 
hood. It  is  such  a  precious  and  valuable  gift  that  every  member 
of  the  Church,  young  and  old,  male  and  female,  should  honour, 
respect,  and  obey  the  Priesthood,  its  leaders,  and  its  authority  in 
every  possible   way. 

A  suitable  resolution  for  any  Latter-day  Saint  is  this  :/  will 
show  that  I  honour  and  respect  the  Priesthood  by  that  which  I 
do  in  the  daily  contacts  of  life. 


i  i 

n  § 

ril 

Ml 

€  KAR€R€ 


Wahanga    35  Hurae,  1941  Nama    7 


RULON  S.  WELLS  PASSES   (See  Page  717) 


fsammm^. 


mm^&Z£&. 


LOYALTY 


One  of  the  most  desirable  and  ennobling  traits  of  char- 
acter is  loyalty.  The  person  in  whose  life  loyalty  has  been 
made  a  cherished  virtue  is  fortunate  indeed. 

Loyalty,  too  frequently,  has  been  associated  only  with 
respect  to  the  nation  or  the  country  in  which  a  person  lives. 
Considered  as  a  broad  general  principle  it  includes  far  more 
than  that. 

Loyalty  to  our  Father  in  Heaven  should  be  the  begin- 
ning point.  Surely  every  Latter-day  Saint  understands  that 
our  first  obligation  is  to  our  Creator  and  that  loyalty  to  Him 
is  expected  of  us  all. 

Loyalty  to  the  Church  and  its  teachings  should  be,  and 
logically  is,  closely  associated  with  loyalty  to  the  Lord.  One 
follows  the  other  in  natural  sequence. 

Loyalty  to  those  whom  the  Lord  has  appointed  to  pre- 
side over  us  in  the  Church,  in  the  district  and  in  the  branch, 
is  essential  to  our  own  progress  and  the  progress  of  the 
Church. 

Loyalty  to  our  own  ideals  and  standards  will,  of  course, 
include  loyalty  to  all  to  whom  loyalty  is  due,  and  should 
form  the  basis  of  all  expressions  of  this  soul-developing 
characteristic. 

Loyalty  to  our  friends  and  associates,  to  our  families, 
to  employers,  and  to  others  whose  relationships  with  us  en- 
title them  to  our  allegiance  will  be  a  matter  of  course  if  we 
have  thoroughly  established  in  our  lives  the  priceless  prac- 
tice of  loyalty  to  our  own  ideals  and  standards. 

Loyalty  to  country,  the  most  frequently  associated  with 
considerations  and  discussions  of  this  indication  of  faithful 
devotion,  will  follow  only  if  and  when  we  have  established 
loyalty  to  our  own  ideals  and  standards  as  a  definite  guide 
in  our  lives. 

People  depart  from  the  paths  of  virtue  and  right  living, 
only  when  they  disregard  their  own  standards.  People  be- 
come untrue  to  Church,  country,  employers,  and  friends 
only  when  they  lay  aside  their  own  convictions  of  right  and 
wrong. 

As  long  as  any  Latter-day  Saint  remembers  his  own 
ideals  and  standards  and  follows  them  religiously  the  ques- 
tion of  loyalty  to  all  to  whom  loyalty  is  due,  including  our 
Father  in  Heaven,  to  whom  our  first  devotion  should  be 
given,  will  never  arise. 

Loyalty  is  a  glorious  virtue.  In  all  that  it  implies,  it 
should  be  a  guiding  principle  in  the  life  of  every  Latter-day 
Saint. 


Te  Karere 

Established  in  1907  &. 

Wahanga   35  Hurae,  1941  Nama   7  ^ 


Matthew    Cowley 
Kelly  Harris 
Eru    T.    Kupa 
Waimate   Anaru 


Tumuaki    Mihana 
Etita 

Kaiwhakamaori 
Kaiwhakamaori 


"Ko  tenet  Pepa  i  whakatapua  hex  hapai  ake  i  te  iwi  Maori  ki 
roto  i  nga  zvhakaaro-nui/ 

"Te  Karere"  is  published  monthly  by  the  New  Zealand  Mission  of  the  Church 
of  Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-day  Saints,  and  is  printed  by  TE  KARERE  PRESS,  No.  2 
Scotia  Place,  Upper  Queen  Street,  Auckland,  C.l,  N.Z.  Subscription  Rates:  3/-  per 
six  months;  5/-  per  year;  £1  for  five  years;  £2/10/-  for  life.  (United  States  Cur- 
rency:  $1.00    per   year;    $4.00    for   five   years;    $10.00    for   life.) 

Address    Correspondence,    Box    72,    Auckland,    C.l,    New    Zealand. 


CONTENTS 

Editorial —  Page 

Dominion    Reconstruction    Conference     710 

Special    Features — 

He  Takahanga  o  o  Tatou  Hoia,  na  William   Mannering  712 


Nga  Rongo  Korero  Mo  Te  Whawhai,  na  Paepae  Witehira   ... 

Kai    Kauwhau   Mo   Waikato     

The  Passing  of    president    Rulon   S.  Wells 

America,  by  J.    Reuben  (lark.  Jr 

A    I  )ay   "i    Warning     

To-day's   Heritage,  by  William   l\.   Burge 


713 

714 
717 
71S 


Church    Features — 

Mahi   K  ura   I  [apati    715 

Reports  and  Six-penny   Funds  726 

Sunday  School   

Primary 

Mutual   [mprovemenl   Association  

Mews  from  the  Field 


TE  KARERE  Hurae,  1941 


Editorial  .  .  . 


DOMINION    RECONSTRUCTION    CONFERENCE 

"In  company  with  similar  activities  in  other  parts  of  the 
world,  especially  in  Britain,  a  conference  of  leaders,  officers 
and  members  of  the  moral  and  spiritual  movements  in  New 
Zealand  is  being  convened  to  find  now  the  foundations  on 
which  the  Christian  reconstruction  of  the  Dominion  should 
be  based. 

"The  Conference  has  the  patronage  and  active  support 
of  many  of  our  Church  leaders.  They  have  signed  the  con- 
vening order  and  circular-letter  to  all  who  are  thought  able 
and  willing  to  contribute  to  its  deliberations.  The  date  and 
place  of  the  Conference  have  yet  to  be  arranged. 

"Like  the  Malvern  Conference  recently  held  in  England 
under  the  presidency  of  the  Archibishop  of  York,  the 
assembly  will  discuss  freely  and  frankly  all  moral,  social 
and  economic  problems,  the  discussions  being  led  by  men  and 
women  who  have  made  a  study  of  their  respective  subjects. 

"The  Dominion  Conference,  however,  will  be  wider  in 
its  scope  than  the  Malvern  discussions,  for  those  taking  part 
will  include  representatives  of  all  churches  and  schools  of 
thought. 

"It  is  expected  there  will  be  frank  discussions  of  the 
present  social  and  economic  order,  but,  unlike  many  similar 
discussions,  it  will  be  directed  to  a  frank  examination  of 
faults  with  the  desire  to  find  out  and  put  into  efTect  the 
necessary  remedies. 

"This  Dominion  Reconstruction  Conference  is  designed 
to  show  the  great  degree  of  unity  and  common  purpose 
existing  in  the  minds  of  moral  and  spiritual  leaders  and  in 
the  hearts  of  our  people. 

"It  will  therefore  refrain  from  discussions  on  party 
politics  and  detailed  technical  methods  but  will  positively  and 
constructively  outline  the  fundamental  Christian  Principles 
which  alone  can  provide  a  true  basis  for  the  people's  welfare 
and  a  better  order. 

"As  guiding  principles  for  the  Conference,  the  signa- 
tories of  the  convening  order  believe  that  the  wars  and  social 


Hurae,  1941 


TE  KARERE 


and  economic  ills  which  afflict  the  nations  are  due  in  the 
first  instance  to  passive,  and  in  some  cases  active,  resist- 
ance to  God's  plan  for  the  development  of  the  world  and  that 
this  plan  is  available  to  those  who  seek  it.  They  believe, 
also,  that  the  prayers  for  the  safety  and  well-being  of  our 
nation  must  be  regarded  as  hyprocrisy  unless  they  are 
accompanied  by  a  sincere  intention  to  find  God's  will  for  the 
individual  and  nation  as  a  whole  and  to  give  effect  to  that 
will  whatever  may  be  the  apparent  costs. 

"In  calling  the  Conference  at  a  time  when  the  Empire 
is  engaged  in  a  struggle  for  its  very  existence,  the  conveners 
take  the  view  that  to  defer  deliberation  on  a  plan  for  recon- 
struction until  peace  comes  would  be  disastrous.  They  point 
out  there  are  many  visible  signs  of  militant  atheism  which 
has  plans  for  the  post-war  period  and  that  if  these  are  the 
only  ones  available  to  a  war-weary  world  they  will  find  a 
fair  chance  of  being  accepted.  The  Christian  body  must 
therefore  get  ready  now.  Christianity,  being  what  it  is, 
inevitably  must  be  accepted.  What  can  and  will  happen 
unless  advantage  is  taken  of  the  present  opportunity,  is 
that  the  extension  of  God's  Kingdom  on  earth  may  be  re- 
tarded, thus  creating  more  wars  and  social  and  economic 
evils." 

The  foregoing  announcement  has  been  received  from 
the  Acting  Director  of  the  Dominion  Reconstruction  Con- 
ference and  is  published  herein  as  an  Editorial  because  of 
the  necessity,  in  these  days  of  anxiety,  For  all  Christians 
and  Church  leaders  everywhere  to  square  themselves  and 
their  creeds  to  the  Gospel  which  Christ  taught  and  obeyed 
— the  Gospel  of  "One  Lord,  one  Faith,  one  Baptism";  the 
Gospel  which  bestows  the  Comforter  to  lead  men  by  prin- 
ciples of  truth;  the  Gospel  which  would  bring  all  to  a 
"Unity  of  Faith";  the  Gospel  which  would  make  of  all 
nations  one  people  under  ( rod. 

If  the  proposed  convention  will  be  conducted  along 
the  lines  suggested  in  the  announcement  "positively  and 
constructively  outline  the  fundamental  Christian  Principles 
which   alone  can   provide  a   true   basis    for   the   people's   wrl 

fare    and    a    better    order"     the    results    should    be    \o\ 

encouraging. 

—Matthew  Cowley. 


712  TE  KARERE  Hurae,  1941 

He  Takahanga  o  o  Tatou  Hoia 

Na  William  Mannering 

I  te  mea  kua  tae  mai  nga  rongo  parekura  i  te  whenua  o  nga 
Kariki,  e  kore  e  tawhiti  i  nga  mahara  o  tenei  iwi  nga  ingoa  o  nga 
takiwa  o  reira.  Tata  kore  he  tangata  o  tenei  motu,  kahore  ona  hoa, 
whanaunga  ranei,  kua  tae  ki  taua  whenua  ki  te  kawe  i  te  ingoa  toa  o 
Aotearoa.  Ko  ratou  kua  rongo  ano  i  te  karanga  i  puta  kia  Paora  i  te 
po:  "Whiti  mai  ki  Makeronia,  whakaaro  mai  kia  matou."  Kua  hoki 
pea  nga  mahara  o  etahi  ki  te  tira  iti  i  tae  atu  ki  reira  ki  te  mau  i  ta 
ratou  pakanga  ki  te  he,  e  rima  tekau  tau  i  muri  i  te  whanautanga  o  to 
tatou  Ariki.  No  taua  wa  i  u  ai  a  Paora  ki  Uropi,  ratou  ko  ona  hoa, 
ko  Hira,  ko  Ruka  me  Timoti.  I  rere  ratou  i  Toroa  i  te  puwaha  o 
te  Dardanelles,  i  te  whenua  o  Taake,  a  ka  u  ki  Neapori,  tona  ingoa  i 
tenei  wahi  ko  Kavala.  E  iwa  maero  ki  uta  atu  i  tu  tetahi  taone  ko 
Piripai,  he  pa  nui  i  taua  wa,  he  koroni  na  nga  Romana.  No  reira  a 
Riria  te  mema  tuatahi  o  te  Hahi  i  iriiria  ki  Uropi,  a  ko  tetahi  o  nga 
pukapuka  a  Paora  i  tuhia  ki  te  iwi  o  reira.  Heoi  ko  taua  pa  i  kia 
(Nga  Mahi  16:12)  "ko  te  pa  nui  ia  o  tena  wahi"  kua  mahue  noa  atu  i 
te  tangata  ko  ona  kohatu  anake  e  takoto  ana  ki  te  whenua. 

Ka  haere  a  Paora  ma  i  Piripai,  ka  tae  ki  Teharonika,  tona  ingoa 
i  tenei  wahi  ko  Salonika,  70  maero  te  tawhiti  atu  i  Piripai.  He  maha 
nga  Hurai  o  tenei  pa  i  aua  taima  tae  mai  hoki  ki  tenei  wa.  I  karapotia 
e  te  Taake  i  te  tau  1430  a  he  mea  poro  na 
ratou  te  paipa  wai  o  reira  i  horo  ai  te  pa. 
Ko  Kemal  Ataturk,  te  tangata  nui  o  Taake 
i  whanau  ki  Salonika.  I  runga  i  te  riri  o 
nga  Hurai  o  reira  ka  haere  a  Paora  i  Salo- 
nika ki  Peria,  ko  Karaferria  ki  etahi  ko 
Verria  ki  etahi  i  tenei  wahi  ka  rongo  nga 
hoa  riri  o  Paora  kua  kauwhautia  e  ia  te  Rongo  Pai  i  Peria  ka  haere  ano 
ratou  ki  reira  ki  te  whakararuraru,  ka  haere  a  Paora  i  konei  ki  Atene 
(Athens)  ma  te  moana.  He  taone  nui  tenei  i  mua  atu  i  te  wa  o  nga 
Romana. 

No  te  tau  200  ka  mutu  te  kitea  o  te  ingoa  o  Atene  i  roto  i  nga 
hitori.  I  te  wa  e  5000  ona  tangata,  tau  1840,  i  te  putanga  i  raro  ia 
Taake,  ka  meatia  ano  ko  Atene  he  taone  nui  o  Kariki.  I  te  wa  o  te 
pakanga  nui  nei  nuku  atu  i  te  450,000  ona  tangata. 

Ka  haere  atu  a  Paora  i  Atene  ki  Koriniti,  50  maero  whaka-te- 
hauauru.  Ko  Megara,  te  tauranga  i  eke  ai  etahi  o  o  tatou  hoia  ki  o 
ratou  tima,  kei  waenganui  i  enei  taone.  Ko  Koriniti  he  taone  hou  i  te 
wa  ia  Paora,  kahore  ano  i  rau  tau  te  tawhito,  ahakoa,  he  taone  nui 
pera  ano  i  Atene;  he  taone  na  nga  kai-hokohoko,  he  moni  tona  ranga- 
tiratanga.  I  tino  mate  taua  taone  i  te  ru,  146  nga  tau  i  mua  i  te 
whanautanga  o  te  Karaiti,  a  mahue  atu  mo  te  100  tau.  Ka  hanga  ano 
he  taone  hou  i  runga  i  nga  kohatu  o  te  mea  tawhito,  a  i  te  tau  1858 
ka  horoa  ano  i  te  ru,  ka  horoa  ano  te  hangaanga  hou  i  te  tau  1928. 
Ko  te  awa-keri  o  reira  (te  wahi  i  tu  ai  nga  hoia  o  N.Z.  ki  te  paahi  i  nga 
Tiamana)   i  timatatia  i  te  wa  ano  ia  Paora. 

Ko  tetahi  o  nga  tikanga  o  tenei  iwi  te  Kariki,  mahara  tonu  ahau 
i  taku  kitenga  ki  to  tatou  iwi  Maori,  ara,  to  ratou  hahu  tupapaku.  E 
toru  tau  i  muri  i  te  tanumanga  o  o  ratou  tupapaku  ka  hahungia,  ka 
horoia  nga  whenua  ki  te  waina,  a  ka  kohia  ki  te  pouwaka,  ka  kawea 
ki  tetahi  whare  e  whakatungia  ana  ki  te  wahi  tapu  ano  hei  takoto- 
ranga  mo  aua  mea.  Hore  atu  pea  he  iwi  mahi  penei  ki  tua  atu  i  te 
Maori  me  te  Kariki. 


Mr.  and  Mrs 

Ale 

xander 

Wishart 

of   the    Auckland 

Branch 

are 

the 

proud 

parents 

of     a 

son 

born 

Monday, 

June 

2nd, 

1941. 

Hurae,  1941 


TE  KARERE 


713 


Nga  Rongo  Korero  Mo  Te  Whawhai 

Na  Paepae  Witehira 

Kua  roa  inaianei  kihai  ano  i  panuitia  nga  rongo  korero  o  te 
whawhai  i  te  nui  o  nga  take  kia  taangia  i  te  tuatahi.  Tenei  ra  ka 
tiraata  ano. 

Kei  te  tino  kaha  rawatu  te  haere  a  te  whawhai  i  naianei.  Kua 
riro  te  whenua  o  nga  Kariki,  ara,  kua  whakatahangia  nga  hoia  o 
te  Ingarihi.  Tino  nui  te  parekura  o  te  hoa  riri  i  taua  whenua,  a  i 
mate  hoki  etahi  o  o  tatou  tamariki,  o  tatou  hoia  o  Niu  Tireni  ki 
reira.  I  kitea  te  tino  toa  o  Niu  Tireni  i  reira. 
Tetahi  o  nga  mea  whakamiharo  i  kitea  i 
enei  wiki  tata  nei  ko  te  rerenga  mai  o  tetahi 
o  nga  tangata  nui  o  Tiamana  ki  Ingarangi. 
Kahore  ano  i  matauria  he  aha  te  tino  putake 
o  tana  haere  mai.  He  maha  nga  whakapae 
mo  taua  tangata.  E  mea  ana  etahi  o  nga  whaka- 
pai  i  haere  mai  ia  no  te  mea  kua  kite  ia  ka  mate 
tana  iwi.  Ko  etahi  e  mea  ana  i  haere  mai  ia  ki 
te  rapu  tikanga  e  pai  ai  te  rongo  marie  ki  te 
ao.  Ko  etahi  atu  o  nga  whakapae  mona  e 
meinga  ana  he  titiro-tahae  (spy). 

Kahore  ia  e  tukua  ana  kia  korero  nupepa,  whakarongo  ranei  ki 
nga  korero  a-rangi-nei  (radio). 

Ko  Hitara  e  mea  ana  he  mate  porangi  to  taua  tangata,  otira,  e 
he  ana,  no  te  mea  he  aha  ia  i  tohu  ai  i  tera  tangata  hei  hoa  mona 
mehemea  he  pera?  Ko  te  tuunga  o  taua  tangata  ara,  o  Hess  kei 
raro  tata  iho  ia  Hitara.     He  nui  ano  hoki. 

He  nui  ano  hoki  te  parekura  o  nga  mea  rere  rangi.  Kua  nuku 
atu  i  te  4000  o  te  Tiamana  kua  pakaru,  o  te  Ingariki  kua  nuku  atu 
i  te  1000. 

Kei  te  kaha  te  haere  o  te  whawhai  i  te  takiwa,  i  te  moana,  i  te 
tuawhenua  hoki.  Kahore  ano  i  anga  mai  ki  te  pai,  engari  e  anga 
ke  atu  ana. 


Wanganui  Dis- 
trict Presidency  or- 
ganized at  Manaia 
Hui  Pariha,  June 
14  and  15,  1941,  by 
President  Cowley, 
areTukino  Hakopa, 
Turake  Manu  and 
William   Katene. 


GENEALOGY 

By  Teao  Wirihana 

Cottage   Meetings    for    the    Month    of    July. 

July    3 — Lesson    35,   "Temple   Work    in   the    Future." 
,,     10 — Lesson  36,  "A  Chain  <>f  Families." 
„      17 — Lesson   37,   "What  Youth  Can  Do." 
,,     24 — Lesson  88,  "A   M<>m   Glorious  Principle." 
,,     31 — Lesson  89,  "The   Promise  t<>  the  Fathers." 
Kia  teretere  mai  nga  whakapapa  hei  tuku  ki  Hiona, 
te  whakatauki  nei:  "Ka  tore  raua  ka  tere  Pipiwhakao." 


714  TE  KARERE  Hurae,  1941 

Kai  Kauwhau  Mo  Waikato 

Mo  nga  marama  o   HURAE   me  AKUHATA 

Douglas  Whatu  me  Teoti  Rungaterangi  ki  Kawhia. — Turinui  Rau- 
roha  me  Ted  Reti  ki  Makomako. — Winiata  Kapinga  me  Wanihi  Tangi- 
haere  ki  Mahoenui. — Ben  and  Dick  Marshall  ki  Puketapu. — Ru  Tara- 
whiti  me  E.  A.  C.  Scott  ki  Whatawhata. — Hare  Puke  me  Reihana  H. 
Puke  ki  Whatawhata. — Arthur  Hill  me  tana  family  ki  Miro  St.,  Manu- 
nui. — Charlie  Hill  me  Puhi  Harihona  ki  Tainui  Matangi. — Kio  Tara- 
whiti  me  Ivan  Noda  ki  Taupiri. — Tonga  Paiaka  me  tana  family  ki  Miro 
St.,  Manunui. 

Wiki  Tuarua. 

Rose  Beazley  me  Hine  Hemi  Paki  ki  Glenn  Murray. — Tatana  Arona 
me  Okeroa  Honetana  ki  Gordonton. — Hami  Pohutuhutu  me  Charlie 
Ngare  ki  Puketapu. — Henare  Ngawhika  me  Haimona  Honetana  ki  Mor- 
rinsville.  —  Whatu  Apiti  me  Tetana  Te  Hira  ki  Waingaro.  —  James 
Heperi  me  Mipi  Tangihaere  ki  Te  Kuiti. — Tirua  Tukiri  me  Koroheke 
Heketanga  ki  Otorohanga. — George  Stockman  me  Wanihi  Tangihaere 
ki  Aria. — Awe  Whare  Ponga  me  he  hoa  mana  e  rapu  ki  Wairoa. — 
Ahikaka  Puru  me  Tapahia  Te  Wheki  ki  Whatawhata. — Horace  Forbes 
me  Peter  Whatu  ki  Horotiu. 

Wiki    Tuatoru. 

John  Paki  me  Paekaka  Rauroha  ki  Makomako. — Tom  Reti  me 
Peter  Rauroha  ki  Parawera. — Tani  Wetere  me  Robert  Tauira  ki  Mata- 
kowhai. — Rangi  and  Betty  Tetana  Te  Hira  ki  Frankton. — Niho  Rangi- 
awha  me  Hori  Maihi  ki  Aramiro. — Tame  Horotini  me  Papa  Maihi  ki 
Raglan. — Howard  Osborne  me  Victor  Osborne  ki  Hospital  Hill,  Tau- 
marunui. — Ngaha  Rotana  me  Pehi  Tarawhiti  ki  Waingaro. — Rei  Tuhua 
me  Mapu  Martin  ki  Morrinsville. — Dave  Ormsby  me  Harry  Marshall  ki 
Taupiri. — John  Apiti  and  companion  of  his  own  choosing  to  Tauhei. 

Wiki   Tuawha. 

Percy  Rowe  and  Ray  Osborne  to  Owhango. — Charlie  Marshall  and 
family  to  Mahoenui. — Joseph  Berryman  me  Joe  Kingi  ki  Ngaruawahia. 
— Keti  me  Thomas  Amoketi  ki  Whatawhata. — George  Mate  and  com- 
panion to  Otorohanga. — Here  Tangihaere  me  Darcey  Tangihaere  ki 
Piopio. — Wm.  Mannering  and  companion  to  Parawera. — Kare  Martin 
me  Rore  Paki  ki  Hoeotainui. — Fred  Rawiri  and  family  ki  Puketapu. — 
Jury  W.  Huriwhenua  and  family  ki  Pukekohe. — James  Paki  me  Wm. 
Paki  ki  New  Brighton. 

Ki  nga  Kai-kauwhau. — la  Hurae  haere  ki  nga  wahi  kua  karangatia 
nei  koutou  kia  haere.  I  a  Akuhata  haere  ano,  engari  ki  nga  wahi  e 
hiahiatia  ana  e  koutou  ki  te  kauwhau. 

Tukua  mai  a  koutou  ripoata  o  enei  haerenga — ara,  nga  "week-end" 
mission  reports.  Koutou  kahore  e  ripoata  mai  ana  i  te  paunga  o  ia 
marama  ka  tuhia  ki  roto  i  nga  pukapuka  ripoata  o  te  Takiwa — "kahore 
ano  i  haere  ki  te  whakatutuki  i  te  karanga  haere  ki  te  kauwhau." 


BOUND  VOLUME  OF  "  TE  KARERE,"   1940 

A  limited  number  of  bound  volumes  of  the  1940  issue  of 
Te  Karere  is  now  available.  Place  your  orders  as  soon  as  pos- 
sible with  Te  Karere,  Box  72,  Auckland.    Price  8/-. 


Hurae,  1941  TE  KARERE  715 

Mahi  Kura  Hapati 

RATAPU   TUATAHI 

Whakaaturanga:  Upoko  3.  "Te  Takanga  atu  me  te  Tukunga  iho." 
Tikanga  2. — E  whakapono  ana  matou  tera  e  whiua  nga  tangata 
mo  o  ratou  hara  ake,  e  hara  mo  to  Arama  haranga. 

To  te  tangata  herekoretanga. — Ko  te  Hahi  e  whakaako  ana  e  tino 
rite  ana  hoki  ki  ta  te  karaipiture  i  roto  i  nga  mea  katoa  kua  pai  nei 
te  Matua  ki  te  whakawhiwhi  ki  te  tangata.  Kua  hoatu  kia  ia  te  mana 
ki  te  whiriwhiri  i  tana  e  pai  ai,  ko  te  mea  pai,  ko  te  mea  kino  ranei 
i  tenei  oranga,  ki  te  whakarongo,  ki  te  takahi  ranei  i  ta  te  Atua  whaka- 
haunga. 

E  tino  hapai  ana  hoki  te  Atua  i  tenei  tikanga  i  te  mea  Nana  ano  i 
hoatu  ki  te  tangata.  I  roto  hoki  i  Ana  mahi  katoa  ki  te  tangata,  kua 
waiho  e  Ia  kei  te  tangata  ano  te  whiriwhiri,  kaore  hoki  e  akina  e  Ia 
kei  a  ratou  ano  te  tikanga  ki  te  mahi  i  ta  ratou  e  pai  ai  i.raro  i  te 
whakahaere  me  te  tohutohu  a  Tona  Matua.  He  pono,  kua  hoatu 
whakahaunga  Ia,  kua  whakaritea  e  Ia  he  ture  me  nga  oati  atu,  ka 
manaakitia  ina  puritia,  ka  whiua  hoki  ina  kore  e  whakarite,  otira  i 
roto  i  enei  mea  katoa  kaore  te  tangata  e  herea  ana  kei  ia  ia  ano  te 
tikanga  ki  te  whakarite.  I  tenei  ahua  e  rite  ana  ia  ki  nga  anahera, 
otira,  ina  paiheretia  ia  e  ia  ano  ki  nga  here  o  te  hara  kua  makere  i  a 
ia  tona  mana  kaha  ki  te  whakahaere  i  te  taha  ki  te  tinana  me  te  wairua. 
Kei  ia  ia  ano  hoki  te  mutunga  mai  o  te  kaha  ki  te  takahi  i  nga  ture 
o  te  ora,  nga  hiahiatanga  o  te  ao  me  nga  whakahaunga  a  te  Atua 
mo  nga  mea  whaka-te-tinana  whaka-te-wairua  hoki,  i  te  mea  me  ngohe- 
ngohe  ia  ki  ana  whakaritenga.  I  tetahi  ahua  e  uhia  ana  e  ia  ki  runga 
ano  ia  ia  nga  whiu  mo  te  takahi  ture;  i  tetahi  ahua  ka  whiwhi  i  nga 
manaakitanga  me  te  tapiritanga  mai  o  te  wateatanga  mo  te  hunga 
e  aru  ana  i  te  ngohengohe  ki  te  hapai  i  nga  ture.  Te  ngohengohe 
ki  nga  ture  he  wahi  nui  no  te  tangata  herekore.  Ko  te  tangata 
hara  e  wehi  ana  i  te  ture  no  te  mea  nana  ano  e  kore  ai  e  whiwhi,  e 
homaingia,  e  hara  hoki  na  te  ture,  he  tiaki  ke  nei  ia  ia  i  roto  i  tona 
herekoretanga,  engari  na  tona  hoariritanga  ki  te  ture. 
Nga   Patai: 

1.  He  aha  te  mea  nui  i  whakawhiwhia  e  te  Atua  ki  te  tangata 
i  pera  tonu  me  ta  te  karaipiture? 

2.  I  roto  i  a  te  Atua  whakahaunga  he  aha  Tana  tikanga  mo  te 
tangata? 

3.  I  tehea  ahua  i  rite  ai  te  tangata  ki  nga  anahera? 

4.  He  aha  te  tukunga  iho  ki  te  tangata  ngohengohe  ki  nga  ture? 

RATAPU  TUARUA 

Whakaaturanga:    Te  Haranga  me  tona  tukunga  iho. 

Te  wahi  nui  tonu  o  te  mahi  tika,  he  wahi  ano  hoki  whakaaro  Atua, 
e  pehi  ana  i  nga  whakaaro,  me  whiwhi  te  tangata  i  te  oati.  Ka  atua 
ia  mo  ana  mahi  pai  ka  whakatumangia  ranei  ia  i  te  whiu  ka  pa  mai  ina 
mahi  i  nga  mahi  kino,  ino  kore  e  taea  e  ia  ake  te  whakarite.  E  hara 
hoki  i  ta  te  Atua  tikanga  kia  akina  te  tangata  ki  te  main  pai  fad  te  ata 
tukua  mai  ranei  e  Ia  nga  mana  kino  hej  aki  i  Ana  tamariki  kia  main 
kino.  I  nga  ra  o  Erene  i  mua  i  te  tangata  tuatahi  he  mea  whakatakoto 
he  whakahaunga  me  te  ture,  me  te  whakamarama  atu  o  te  whiu  e  pa 
mai  ina  takahia  taua  ture.     E  Kore  rawa  hoki  eputa  te  tika  mehemea 

kaore  ia  i  whiwhi  ki  le  (ikan.ua  kei  ia  ia  ano  te  whiriwhiri  ki  te  mea  i 
tana  e  pai  ai.  "Otiia  kei  ia  koe  te  tikanga  ki  te  whiriwhiri  nioti  ake. 
kua  hoatu  na  hoki  kia  koe,  engari  kia  mahara  kua  rahuitia  tena  e 
Ahau."  E  ai  ta  le  Ariki  t;i  \r  Atua  kia  Arnina.  .Mo  Ana  whakahaere 
ki  tenei  peteriaka  tuatahi  o  te  iwi,  i  mea  te  Ariki  i  enei  ra  :    "Nana  Naku 


716  TE  KARERE  Hurae,  1941 

ake  ano  i  whakaae  kia  riro  ano  ia  hei  kai  whakahaere  tikangamona 
ake   ano." 
Nga   Patai: 

1.  He  aha  te  wahi  nui  tonu  o  te  mahi  tika? 

2.  Pehea  te  ahua  o  Arama  ia  ia  i  te  kaari  o  Erene? 

RATAPU  TUATORU 
Whakaaturanga:     Te   Takanga  Atu.      Upoko   3. 

I  te  wa  i  hoatu  ai  te  tuakana  a  Kaina  me  tona  teina  me  Apera  i  a 
raua  whakahere,  ka  riri  te  tuakana  i  te  mea  kaore  i  paingia  tana 
whakahere.  Katahi  te  Ariki  ka  korero  kia  Kaina,  a  ka  whakamata  ki 
te  ako  ia  ia  he  huanga  ka  aru  i  roto  i  ana  mahi  mo  te  kino  mo  te  pai 
ranei. 

Nga   Patai: 

1.    Ko  wai  te  mea  kaore  i  paingia  tana  whakahere? 

RATAPU  TUAWHA 

Whakaaturanga:     Mo   te   mohiotanga  ki  te   pai  ki  te   kino. 

Te  mohiotanga  ki  te  pai  ki  te  kino  i  hanga  te  Atua  e  ahei  ana 
hei  whakapiki  i  Ana  tamariki  a  ko  te  whiwhinga  ki  tenei  mohiotanga 
ma  roto  ano  i  nga  mea  e  pa  ana  e  kitea  iho  ana  e  te  tangata  te  rere- 
ketanga  o  te  mea  pai  i  to  te  kino.  Noreira  i  whakanohia  ai  te  tangata 
ki  runga  ki  te  whenua  i  waenganui  i  te  mana  o  te  pai  me  te  kino  me 
te  mohiotanga  ki  nga  mea  e  taiawhio  nei  i  a  ia  me  te  whakaaro  tua- 
rangi  i  tupu  ake  i  roto  ia  ia  kia  whiriwhiri  i  tana  e  pai  ai.  Nga  kupu 
a  te  poropiti  a  Rihai  e  tino  marama  ana.  "Noreira,  kua  waiho  iho  e 
te  Ariki,  e  te  Atua  ma  te  tangata  tana  ake  tikanga,  otira,  kihai  i  taea 
e  ia  te  mahi  i  runga  i  tana  ake  me  i  kore  ia  i  kumea  e  tenei  taha  e 
tera  taha  ranei."  No  reira  he  mea  herekore  nga  tangata  ki  te  ritenga 
o  te  kikokiko,  a  e  homai  ana  ano  kia  ratou  nga  mea  katoa  e  tika  ana 
ma  te  tangata.  A  kei  ia  ratou  te  tikanga  mo  te  whiriwhiri  i  te  tikanga 
herekore  me  te  oranga-tonutanga  ma  roto  i  te  mahi  takawaenga  nui  mo 
nga  tangata  katoa,  mo  te  whiriwhiri  ranei  i  te  hereherenga  me  te  mate, 
e  rite  ana  ki  te  hereheretanga  me  te  kaha  o  te  rewara,  no  te  mea 
e  rapu  ana  ia  i  nga  tangata  katoa  kia  pouri  ratou  kia  pera  me  ia  ano. 
Nga   Patai: 

1.  He  aha  i  noho  ai  hei  whakapiki  ake  i  te  tangata  tona  mohio- 
tanga ki  te  pai  ki  te  kino? 

2.  He  aha  i  whakanohia  ai  te  tangata  ki  runga  ki  te  whenua? 

OVERSEAS 

Here  is  an  example  of  what  "we"  like  to  receive  in  the  way  of  good  news. 
Quoting:  "Enclosed  please  find  currency  $1.00  to  renew  our  subscription  to  your 
fine  magazine.  We  have  enjoyed  it  very  much.  Our  son  Delbert  Curtis  is  now  in 
training  in  the  army  at  San  Luis,  California.  His  number  was  drawn  before  he  was 
released  from  his  mission  in  California  enabling  him  to  only  spend  a  few  days  with 
us.  His  cheerful  spirit  and  strong  testimony  of  the  Gospel  gained  through  his  mission 
under  the  guidance  of  President  Cowley  was  a  source  of  happiness  to  us  and  repaid 
us  for  any  sacrifice  we  may  have  made  for  him.  May  the  Lord  bless  Brother 
Cowley  and  his  good  family  and  those  of  you  who  are  helping  in  any  way  to  further 
this   great  work."      (Sgd.)    Mr.   and   Mrs.   A.   L.   Curtis,   Payson,    etc. 

Elder  Baumgartner  also  writes  about  the  happenings  back  home.  Of  interest  is 
the  fact  that  he,  Richard  Lambert,  Franklin  Aldous,  Gerald  Langton,  Geo.  Biesinger 
and  Garn  Henderson  travelled  740  miles  in  12  hours,  from  Salt  Lake  to  California, 
to  join  Elders  Simpson,  Bigler,  Later  and  Dastrup  to  put  on  a  Maori  programme  at 
a  British  benefit  entertainment  arranged  under  the  patronage  of  the  New  Zealand 
Executive  on  the  coast.  People  certainly  enjoyed  every  bit  of  the  programme. 
President  Cowley  received  expressions  of  appreciation  from  the  President  of  the 
organization  responsible  for  the  entertainment,  who  is  a  former  New  Zealander, 
ever  grateful  for  the  contribution  of  the  American  New  Zealanders  in  their  willing 
aid    and    assistance    to    raise    funds   for   the   cause. 

Next  month,  if  we  are  still  in  the  publishing  business,  we  will  try  to  bring  you 
more    up-to-date    news   of  the   doings    here    and    abroad. 


Hurae,  1941 


TE  KARERE 


717 


The  Passing  of  Pres.  Rulon  S.  Wells 

Elder    Wells,    Senior    President    of    First 
Council  of  Seventy,  dies  May  7th,  1941. 

Tributes  paid  at  funeral  services  by  President  David 
O.  McKay,  President  Rudger  Clawson  and  President 
Rufus  K.  Hardy.  Message  of  respect  from  President 
Heber  J.  Grant,  read  by  President  J.  Reuben  Clark,  Jr. 
The  New  Zealand  Mission  of  the  Church  of 
Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-day  Saints  associates  itself 
with  the  Church  generally,  and  particularly,  in 
mourning  the  loss  of  President  Wells.  We  add 
particularly,  with  a  sense  of  humbleness  and  re- 
gret that  he  has  passed  on,  leaving  in  this  mission 
a  contribution  to  the  faith  and  testimony  of  the 
Saints  contained  in  the  Hurae  1938  and  succeed- 
ing issues  of  "Te  Karere"  entitled  "My  Testi- 
mony of  the  Gospel." 

Speakers  at  the  funeral  services  described  his 
life  as  "he  fought  the  good  fight,  finished  his  course  and  kept  the  faith." 
President  Hardy  in  his  remarks  expressed  thankfulness  at  the  con- 
tacts with  such  a  man:  "We  assemble  here  to-day  to  pay  homage  to 
one  of  God's  choice  sons — a  real  gentleman."  Continuing  on  he  says, 
"I  know  him  as  being  proud,  but  not  haughty,  brave,  but  not  foolhardy, 
wise,  and  with  his  great  wisdom  humility  equal  to  that  of  a  child." 
Elder  Antoine  R.  Ivins  of  the  First  Council  of  Seventy,  at  sea, 
bound  for  Canal  Zone,  wirelessed  a  message  of  sympathy  which  was 
read  by  President  Clark;  Elder  Samuel  O.  Bennoin  of  the  First  Council 
of  Seventy  offered  the  invocation  at  the  funeral  service ;  Elder  John  H. 
Taylor  offered  the  benediction  and  Elder  Richard  L.  Evans  dedicated 
the  grave,  both  of  the  First  Council  of  Seventy. 


Elder  R.  S.  Wells 


NGA    MATENGA 


Tukumana  Te  Taniwha  Reihana 

— I  te  28  o  Maehe,  1941,  ka  mate 
to  matou  matua  ki  Waimangu, 
Clevedon,  i  waenganui  i  te  nui  o 
ona  iwi  o  Hauraki,  Tamaki,  Ngati 
Haua  me  era  atu  hapu  o  Waikato 
i  mine  mai  ki  te  tangi. 

Ko  Tukumana  te  Timuaki  Peka 
tuarua  o  te  Peka  o  Kiri  Kiri  i  te 
tau  1896  a  i  te  tau  1888  ka  uru 
mai  ia  ki  roto  i  te  Hahi.  E  nuku 
atu  i  te  80  ona  tau  i  tona  mate- 
nga.  Na  Toke  Watene,  Timuaki  o 
te  Takiwa  o  Hauraki  i  whakahaere 
te  karakia  whakamutunga,  a  nana 
ano  hoki  i  whakatapu  te   run. 

Raira  Careless. — I  te  13  0  nga 
ra  o  Maehe  1941,  ka  mate  to 
matou  tuakana,  whaea,  a  Raira 
Careless  o  te  Peka  o  Omahu,  Hau- 
raki. I  hui  ana  whanaunga  katoa 
ki  te  tangihanga  mona.  He  wa- 
hine  e  mohio  tiuitia  ana  i  konei  a 


i  Amerika  hoki,  no  temea  kei  reira, 
kei  Hiona,  tona  tamahine  me  etahi 
o  ona  mokopuna.  I  tae  a  Timuaki 
Kauri,  Charles  E.  Billman  mo 
Hori  Watene  o  Akarana  ki  te 
whakamaharatanga  niutun.ua  kia 
ia. 

Iraia  Palmer. — I  te  20  o  Popu- 
ere,  1941,  ka  mate  a  Iraia  Palmer 
ki  te  Hohipera  o  Whangarei.  Ho 
tangata  aroha  tenei.  Ko  ia  hoki 
to  Timuaki  o  te  Peka  o  Whana- 
naki,  takiwa  o  Whangarei.  No  te 
Greal  Harrier  tenei  tangata  mo 
tana  whanau,  a   mo  tlga  tan   o  rna 

kua    pahure   ake    aei,   ko    Whana- 

naki  to  marao  noho  o  tona  whanau 

katoa. 

Ponui    Hemi    Nikora. — I    to    7    0 

Aperira    ka    mate    a    Ponui 
Nikora  ki  Kupata,  Hauraki.     !•:  '.mi 
ona  tan.    No  to  Peka  o  Te  Aroha 
tenei  kaumatua.    Na  Tiki  Reihana 
i  whakatapu  te  ma. 


718 


TE  KARERE 


Hurae,  1941 


AMERICA 

"A  Chosen  Land  of  the  Lord  " 

From  the  beginning  even  to  the  end  of  the 

Earth. 

By  President  J.  Reuben.  Clark,  Jr. 

Of  the  First  Presidency 

Concerning  Zion  and  its  Destiny  and  Liberty 
and  its  Price 

(Continued  from  page  690) 

Editor's  Note. — With  this  issue  we  bring  you 
the  completion  of  President  Clark's  address  to  the         j  REUBEN  Clark  Jr 
Youth  of  the  Church  given  June  9th,  1940.    Fol- 
lowing the  course  of  events  in  the  life  of  to-day  we  are  better  able  to  appreciate 
the  inspirational  thoughts  given  us  by  a  servant  of  God. 

LOCAL    SELF-GOVERNMENT 

Under  this  plan  which  the  Lord  established,  we  have  a  dual  juris- 
diction— State  and  Federal.  The  Federal  Government  may  do  only 
what  we  the  people  have  authorised  it  to  do;  if  it  does  more,  it  is 
guilty  of  usurpation.  The  people  have  reserved  to  themselves  or  to 
their  State  governments  every  right  and  power  they  have  not  dele- 
gated to  the  Federal  government,  which  must  always  look  to  the  Con- 
stitution and  its  amendments  to  find  its  rights,  for  it  has  none  other. 
This  system  puts  the  great  bulk  of  our  daily  life  activities  in  the  hands 
of  our  own  neighbours  who  know  us  and  our  surroundings,  and  not  in 
the  hands  of  a  bureaucrat  in  a  far  away  national  capitol,  who,  to  all 
intents  and  purposes,  is  an  alien  to  us  and  our  affairs.  This  plan  gives 
us  the  largest  possible  measure  of  local  self-government.  Liberty  will 
never  depart  from  us  while  we  have  local  self-government  controlling 
and  directing  matters  pertaining  to  our  personal  liberties  and  to  the 
security  of  our  private  property;  it  will  not  abide  with  us  if  we  shall 
lose  this  local  self-government. 

EQUALITY  OF  MEN 
The  Lord's  plan  so  given  us  was  founded  on  the  universal  truths 
"that  all  men  are  created  equal,  that  they  are  endowed  by  their  Creator 
with  certain  inalienable  rights,  that  among  these  are  life,  liberty,  and 
the  pursuit  of  happiness." 

FREEDOM  OF  SPEECH,  PRESS,  CONSCIENCE 
The  inspired  plan  provides  that  we  might  write  what  we  wish  and 
send  to  our  friends,  without  danger  of  being  gaoled;  that  we  might 
speak  our  minds  unrestrained,  free  likewise  from  any  such  danger; 
that  we  might  print  the  truth  and  our  comment  thereon,  without  let 
or  hindrance,  provided  in  all  cases  we  were  not  libelling  or  slandering 
our  fellow-citizens.  These  rights  are  fundamental  to  freedom,  and 
to  a  society  of  freemen.  They  are  flouted  by  governments  not  estab- 
lished under  the  Lord's  plan. 

DUE  PROCESS  OF  LAW 
Under  His  plan  we  rely,  as  we  rely  on  the  coming  of  day,  upon 
the  security  that  comes  from  the  principle  that  government  shall  not 


Hurae,  1941  TE  KARERE  719 

"deprive  any  person  of  life,  liberty,  or  property,  without  due  process 
of  law;  nor  deny  to  any  person  within  its  jurisdiction  the  equal  pro- 
tection of  the  laws."  Yet  none  of  these  things  is  sacred  in  other 
countries.  There,  men  go  to  bed  at  night  seemingly  secure  in  the  fruits 
of  long  labours  and  awaken  in  the  morning  shorn  of  the  savings  of  a 
lifetime,  taken  to  enrich  some  favourite  of  government;  there,  men 
are  ruthlessly  cast  into  prison,  having  committed  no  offence  other 
than,  by  some  careless  word  or  act,  to  have  offended  the  sensibilities  of 
some  petty  official.  These  things  are  happening  where  God's  system 
is  not  in  force. 

Since  under  the  Lord's  plan  He  must  be  served  by  the  people  under 
the  penalty  of  otherwise  being  swept  off,  there  must  be  in  the  land  com- 
plete freedom  of  worship,  and  so  the  Lord  set  up  His  plan  that  men 
might  follow  and  worship  Him.  Under  His  plan  it  is  not  possible  for 
some  government  official  to  come  into  our  Sunday  Schools,  or  our 
Mutuals,  or  our  Relief  Societies,  or  our  Sacrament  meetings,  and  tell 
us  what  we  may  say,  or  prescribe  what  we  may  teach.  This  guarantees 
to  us  our  most  precious  gift.  Yet  this  kind  of  supervision,  direction, 
and  control  is  being  exercised  in  other  countries  to-day  where  these 
God-given  rights  of  men  are  being  trampled  underfoot. 

OUR   ALLEGIANCE 

God  provided  that  in  this  land  of  liberty,  our  political  allegiance 
shall  run  not  to  individuals,  that  is,  to  government  officials,  no  matter 
how  great  or  how  small  they  may  be.  Under  His  plan  our  allegiance 
and  the  only  allegiance  we  owe  as  citizens  or  denizens  of  the  United 
States,  runs  to  our  inspired  Constitution  which  God  Himself  set  up.  So 
runs  the  oath  of  office  of  those  who  participate  in  government.  A 
certain  loyalty  we  do  owe  to  the  office  which  a  man  holds,  but  even 
here  we  owe,  just  by  reason  of  our  citizenship,  no  loyalty  to  the  man 
himself.  In  other  countries  it  is  to  the  individual  that  allegiance  runs. 
This  principle  of  allegiance  to  the  Constitution  is  basic  to  our  freedom. 
It  is  one  of  the  great  principles  that  distinguishes  this  "land  of  liberty" 
from  other  countries. 

Thus  God  added  to  His  priceless  blessings  to  us. 

ENCROACHMENTS  UPON  FREE  INSTITUTIONS 

I  wish  to  say  with  all  the  earnestness  I  possess  that  when  you 
youth  and  maidens  see  any  curtailment  of  these  liberties  I  have  named, 
when  you  see  government  invading  any  of  these  realms  of  freedom 
which  we  have  under  our  Constitution,  you  will  know  that  they  are 
putting  shackles  on  your  liberty,  and  that  tyranny  is  creeping  upon 
you,  no  matter  who  curtails  these  liberties  or  who  invades  these  realms, 
and  no  matter  what  the  reason  and  excuse  therefor  may  be. 

In  the  whole  history  of  God's  dealing  with  men.  He  has  never 
urged,  counselled,  nor  advised  any  nation  or  people  to  set  up  auto- 
cracies, tyrannies,  despotisms,  or  dictatorships.  His  prophet  pleaded 
with  ancient  Israel  not  to  crown  a  king.  (  1  Samuel  S.)  He  lias  always 
condemned  that  which  takes  away  man's  free  agency.  This  is  His 
way.  You  may  judge  every  proposal  for  human  government  by  this 
principle. 

THE   RESTORATION 

But  the  same  visions  which  showed  t<>  N'ephi  I  ho  age  of  the  (.en- 
tiles on  this  promised  land,  also  showed  God'fl  purposes  for  the  usher- 
ing in  of  the  last  dispensation,  for  the  le  eMahli.  hment  of  His  Church 
in  the  last    days. 

How  could  the  people  Of  "the  chosen  land  of  the  Lord,"  serve 
.Jesus,  "the  Cod  of  this  land,"  if  Ihey  did  not  have  His  statutes  with 
them,    and    yet,    if    they    did    not    serve    Him    they    were    to    he    swept    off. 


720  TE  KARERE  Hurae,  1941 

God's  eternal  justice  required  that  Christ's  Gospel  should  be  known 
that  men  might  live  it.  So  after  our  fathers  had  fully  established 
their  new  government,  after  they  had  again  fought  the  mother  coun- 
try and  made  secure  their  independence,  the  Father  and  the  Son 
appeared  to  the  young  boy  praying  in  the  woods  and  told  him  of  the 
work  he  was  to  do  in  bringing  back  to  earth  not  only  the  fullness  of 
Christ's  Gospel  in  its  simplicity  and  purity,  but  also  in  restoring  to  the 
world  God's  Holy  Priesthood.  In  the  due  order  of  the  Lord,  the  Gospel 
was  revealed  and  the  Priesthood  bestowed  through  the  instrumentality 
of  the  young  Prophet. 

God  thus  provided  that  the  Gentiles  of  this  land  should  have  the 
truth  they  were  to  live.  He  was  moving  forward  again  on  His  ap- 
pointed way.  He  was  setting  up  "a  land  of  liberty"  not  only,  but 
He  was  revealing  His  truth  also. 

He  had  now  given  us  the  greatest  blessing,  and  without  price  to 
the  nation,  however  heavy  the  toll  to  this  people. 

BLESSINGS  FOR  WHOLE  HEMISPHERE 

Clearly,  if  the  people  of  this  land,  this  whole  land  of  America,  all 
of  it,  must  serve  Jesus  Christ,  "the  God  of  the  land,"  or  be  swept  off, 
and  this  is  the  very  gist  of  all  and  every  blessing  promised  for,  and 
every  judgment  uttered  against  this  land,  then  God  must  so  provide 
that  men  in  all  the  Americas  could  serve  Him.  The  era  of  the  Gentiles 
must  be  an  era  of  freedom  of  worship  throughout  the  hemisphere  else 
Zion  could  not  be  established.  This  was  God's  plan  and  must  be 
brought   about. 

But  our  Revolution  and  Constitution  had  brought  their  blessings 
of  freedom  and  liberty  to  the  people  of  the  United  States  only.  The 
great  territorial  bulk  of  the  hemisphere  was  still  in  bondage ;  still 
unprepared  to  take  part  in  our  God-given  destiny. 

FREEING   SPANISH  AMERICA 

Then  in  the  early  decades  of  the  last  century,  both  before  and 
after  Joseph  Smith's  First  Vision,  God  moved  upon  the  other  peoples, 
one  by  one,  to  assert  and  win  their  independence,  and  as  fast  as  they 
won  it,  they  one  by  one — I  am  speaking  with  historical  accuracy — 
set  up  their  new  governmental  systems  in  the  framework  of  our  Con- 
stitution, sometimes  in  the  first  instance,  practically  copying  it  word 
for  word.  Different  juridical  traditions  have  led  them  to  develop  their 
governmental  systems  along  diverging  lines  from  ours,  but  in  great 
principles  their  fundamental  document  is  a  replica  of  our  God-given 
instrument.  Thus  the  hemisphere — Zion  in  its  full  area — was  becom- 
ing "a  land  of  liberty." 

MONROE  DOCTRINE 

As  these  nations  began  to  throw  off  their  foreign  yokes,  a  Euro- 
pean alliance  was  planned  to  help  hold  them  in  subjection  to  their 
European  over-lords.  Then  came  our  great  Monroe  Doctrine  which 
placed  us  of  the  United  States  squarely  behind  the  efforts  of  Latin- 
America  to  gain  freedom  and  against  those  European  states  who  would 
thwart  it. 

God  again  moved  us  forward  towards  the  destiny  He  has  planned 
for  us.      He  was  preserving  the  blessings  He  had  given  to   us. 

BRITISH  NORTH  AMERICA  ACT 

This  work  for  all  the  Americas  (except  a  few  small  areas)  was 
completed  in  1867  when  the  great  British  North  America  Act  brought 
to  a  united  Canada  a  status  of  practical  independence  and  almost  com- 
plete local  automony. 


Hurae,  1941  TE  KARERE  721 

OUR  LEADERSHIP 

If  I  have  made  clear  the  course  of  events  to  this  point,  it  is  appar- 
ent that  in  the  era  of  the  Gentiles,  it  has  been  the  United  States  that 
has  always  been  called  to  carry  forward  the  banner  of  human  liberty 
and  religious  freedom. 

HUMAN    SLAVERY 

But  there  was  amongst  us  here  a  heinous  sin  of  which  we  must 
cleanse  ourselves — I  mean  human  slavery,  the  curse  of  every  people 
and  of  every  civilization  that  has  ever  harboured  it.  God  moved  the 
hearts  of  men  to  its  extinction.  It  cost  the  lives  of  a  million  of  our 
fathers.  But  sin  and  iniquity  always  exact  their  penalty.  The  mar- 
tyred Lincoln,  the  Great  Emancipator,  visioned  the  underlying  principle 
of  God's  justice  when  he  said  in  his  Second  Inaugural: 

Fondly  do  we  hope — fervently  do  we  pray — that  this  scourge  of  war  may 
speedily  pass  away.  Yet,  if  God  wills  that  it  continue  until  all  the  wealth 
piled  by  the  bondsman's  tzvo  hundred  fifty  years  of  unrequited  toil  shall  be 
sunk,  and  until  every  drop  of  blood  drawn  with  the  lash  shall  be  paid  by 
another  drawn  with  the  szvord,  as  ivas  said  three  thousand  years  ago,  so 
still  it  must  be  said,  "The  judgments  of  the  Lord  are  true  and  righteous 
altogether." 

Human  slavery  passed.  All  men  within  the  United  States  were 
free. 

Thus  God  had  almost  finished  His  fashioning  of  this  land  to  meet 
His  purposes,  to  make  of  this  a  land  of  liberty  and  a  place  where  God 
may  be  worshipped  without  let  or  hindrance.  He  had  bestowed  upon 
us  all  the  essentials  needed  to  earn  His  fullest  blessings. 

THE  SOUTH  SEA  COMMONWEALTHS 

Furthermore,  this  leaven  of  local  self-government,  of  division  of 
independent  governmental  functions,  of  realms  of  freedom  and  liberty 
beyond  the  reach  of  government,  is  working  in  the  far-off  corners  of 
the  earth.  The'  commonwealths  of  the  South  Seas,  basically  framed 
along  the  lines  set  up  by  our  Constitution,  are  bringing  other  lands 
to    enjoy   our   blessings. 

OUR  DESTINY 

And  this  is  the  mission  and  the  destiny  of  America,  of  Zion,  de- 
creed thousands  of  years  ago,  for,  I  repeat,  Isaiah  declared:  "Out  of 
Zion  shall  go  forth  the  law,  and  the  word  of  the  Lord  from  Jerusalem." 
(Isaiah  2:3.) 

And  this  destiny  of  ours  is  to  come  not  through  bloody  conquests 
of  war  and  the  oppression  and  enslavement  of  our  fellow-beings,  but 
by  conquests  of  peace  and  the  persuasion  of  righteous  example  and 
Christian  endeavour. 

Thus  far  God  has  wrought  out  His  plan.  He  will  carry  it  through 
— with  us,  if  we  are  faithful,  if  we  work  not  iniquity,  if  we  repent 
our  sins;  but  if  we  shall  fail  Him,  as  did  the  Jareditea  and  the  Nephites 
of  old,  then  He  will  work  it  through  with  some  other  people.  For  the 
divine  edict  has  gone  forth,  and  God  will  not  be  laughed  at,  nor  mocked, 
nor  thwarted. 

TO  YOUTH 

I  appeal   to  you      youth   and   maidens  of  the  Church,  o\'  (lie   Nation 

— in   these   great,   and    vital    matters   of    free   government    "keep   thy 

father's  commandment  and  forsake  not  the  law  of  thy  mother."     Sold 

fast,    to    the    blessings    which    God    has    provided    for    you.       Yours    is    not 
the  task   to   gain    them,    they    arc    hero;   y<>urs    is   the    part    of   cherishing 

t  hem. 


722  TE  KARERE  Hurae,  1941 

We,  your  fathers  and  mothers,  have  brought  to  you  some  woes; 
they  have  been  largely  an  incident  of  our  progress  and  prosperity 
which  you  have  fully  shared;  they  have  resulted  in  most  part  from 
our  failure  fully  to  observe  God's  commandments,  fully  to  live  the 
Gospel  plan.  Be  ye  not  as  weak  as  we  have  been.  In  our  aging  years 
we  admit  our  failings,  we  repent  our  sins;  we  confess  them  to  you, 
and  humbly  and  with  all  the  power  we  possess  we  beseech  you  not  to 
repeat  our  follies,  not  to  duplicate  our  transgressions,  because  we  of 
the  Gentile  era  live  under  the  God-declared  law  of  this  land  as  fully 
as  did  the  ancient  inhabitants  hereof. 

THE  JUDGMENT  AND  BLESSING  TO  US 

Moroni,  a  thousand  years  after  the  arrival  of  the  Nephites  and 
a  thousand  years  before  the  era  of  the  Gentiles,  with  a  full  knowledge 
of  the  fate  of  the  Jaredites  and  the  Nephites,  for  he  had  either  read, 
witnessed,  recorded,  or  transcribed  the  full  and  terrible  record,  looked 
down  to  the  day  of  the  Gentiles  on  this  land  and  declared: 

And  this  comet h  unto  you,  O  ye  Gentiles,  that  ye  may  know  the  decrees 
of  God — that  ye  may  repent,  and  not  continue  in  your  iniquities  until  the  full- 
ness come,  that  ye  may  not  bring  down  the  fullness  of  the  wrath  of  God  upon 
you  as  as  the  inhabitants  of  the  land  have  hitherto  done. 

Behold,  this  is  a  choice  land,  and  whatsoever  nation  shall  possess  it  shall 
be  free  from  bondage,  and  from  captivity,  and  from  all  other  nations  under 
heaven,  if  they  will  but  serve  the  God  of  the  land,  who  is  Jesus  Christ,  who 
hath  been  manifested  by  the  things  which  we  have  written.     (Ether  2: 11,12.) 

OUR  HOPE 

Thus  there  comes  to  us  as  a  healing  balm  to  our  fears  and  dreads 
in  this  war-commotioned  world,  that  great  benediction  of  the  ancient 
prophet  who  had  read  so  much  and  had  seen  so  fully  what  iniquity 
brought  to  this  land,  and  what  blessings  followed  the  living  of  the 
divine   commands. 

Listen  at  last  to  what  Nephi  of  old  said  of  an  American  Zion  that 
kept  the  laws  of  God: 

And  all  the  nations  that  fight  against  Zion,  and  that  distress  her,  shall  be 
as  a  dream  of  a  night  vision;  yea,  it  shall  be  unto  them,  even  as  unto  a 
hungry  man  which  dreameth,  and  behold  he  eateth  but  he  awaketh  and  his 
soul  is  empty ;  or  like  unto  a  thirsty  man  which  dreameth,  and  behold  he  drinketh 
but  he  awaketh  and  behold  he  is  faint,  and  his  soul  hath  appetite;  yea,  even 
so  shall  the  multitude  of  all  the  nations  be  that  fight  against  Mount  Zion. 
(2  Nephi  27:  3.) 

Should  you  ask,  what  can  the  youth  of  the  Church  do  to  make  this 
blessing  secure,  the  youth  of  a  handful  of  people  amongst  a  many- 
millioned  multitude,  I  will  reply:  If  the  youth  of  this  Church  and  if 
the  Church  membership  shall  serve  God  and  Jesus  Christ,  who  is  the 
God  of  this  land,  if  they  shall  serve  Him  fully  in  spirit  and  in  truth — 
and  I  ask  you  to  remember  this  is  the  price  demanded  for  the  blessing 
promised — there  is  no  righteous  achievement  which  they  may  not  reach. 

Furthermore,  if  we  be  fully  righteous  we  shall  stand  before  the 
Lord  as  did  Abraham  of  old,  when  he  pleaded  for  Sodom  and  Gomorrah 
which  had  been  doomed  for  destruction  because  of  their  wickedness. 

"Wilt  thou  also,"  said  Abraham  to  the  Lord,  "destroy  the  righteous 
with  the  wicked?"  Would  you,  asked  Abraham,  destroy  the  cities  if 
fifty  righteous  would  be  destroyed  also?  No,  said  the  Lord,  I  will 
spare  the  place  if  there  are  fifty  righteous  there. 

Then  Abraham  began  bargaining  with  the  Lord;  would  He  destroy 
it  if  there  were  forty-five  righteous,  then  forty,  then  thirty,  then 
twenty  and  finally  ten,  and  the  Lord  said  He  would  not  destroy  it  if 
there  were  ten  righteous.  But  ten  could  not  be  found.  Only  Lot  and 
his  family — four  in  all — were  found  worthy  of  succour  and  they  were 


Hurae,  1941  TE  KARERE  723 

warned  by  an  angel  to  flee  before  the  fiery  destruction  came,  and  an 
angel  delivered  them.      (Genesis  19  and  19.) 

This  same  great  law  of  the  saving  power  of  a  leavening  righte- 
ousness was  declared  by  Jesus,  when  He  spoke  of  the  last  days  and 
their  terrors   and   devastation: 

And  except  those  days  shoirid  be  shortened,  there  should  no  flesh  be  saved; 
but  for  the  elect's  sake  (Matt.  24:22)  whom  he  hath  chosen,  he  hath  shortened 
the  days.    (Mark  13:  20.) 

Thus  if  we,  the  youth  and  the  parents  of  the  Church,  shall  become 
fully  righteous,  may  we  not  be  the  "ten"  in  this  great  land  to  save  it? 
May  we  not  be  the  elect,  chosen  of  the  Lord,  to  shorten  the  days  of 
God's  vengeance? 

So  to  live  that  this  might  be,  is  clearly  our  duty  and  our  responsi- 
bility also. 

I  thank  the  Lord  for  this  great  body  of  workers  with  the  youth 
of  the  Church.  I  thank  them  for  their  valiant  service  of  the  past. 
I  cannot  overstate  your  duties  and  your  responsibilities  for  the  future. 
I  pray  that  God  will  bless  you  in  your  labours  that  you  may  be  able 
to  reach  the  hearts  of  the  children  of  this  people  and  to  guide  and 
direct  them  in  the  way  which  God  would  have  them  go. 

OUR  PRAYER 

And  may  God  bless  this  nation  of  ours,  keep  out  of  our  hearts 
the  hate  that  is  ruling  so  much  of  the  civilized  world.  May  God  pre- 
serve our  liberties  and  keep  us  in  the  land  of  our  inheritance,  main- 
tain our  free  institutions,  preserve  our  Constitution.  May  we,  His 
chosen  people,  be  instrumental  in  preserving  America,  which  may  God 
bless,  I  ask  in  the  name  of  Jesus.      Amen. 

A  Day  of  Warning 

This  is  a  day  of  warning  and  not  a  day  of  many  words,  for  I ,  the 
Lord,  am  not  to  be  mocked  in  the  last  days.     (Doc.  &  Cov.  63:  85.) 

Since  the  date  upon  which  the  foregoing'  statement  was  given  in 
a  revelation  through  Joseph  Smith,  the  Prophet  (August,  1831), 
many  additional  warnings  have  been  given  to  the  people  through 
Church  leaders. 

In  view  of  conditions  in  the  world  to-day,  it  is  well  for  Latter- 
day  Saints  to  consider  seriously  the  advice  and  admonitions  which 
have  been  given,  and  to  prepare  themselves  against  the  time  when 
the  prophecies  will  be  fulfilled.  From  an  article  by  Elder  Joseph 
Fielding  Smith  in  the  Deseret  News  Church  Section,  February  10. 
1940,  the  following  quotations  have  been  taken: 

I  'resident    Joseph    Smith    said  : 

Look  to  the  Presidency  and  receive  instruction.  Ever]  man  who  is  afraid, 
eovct<ms,  will  be  taken  in  a  snare.  The  time  is  soon  coming,  when  no  man  will 
have  am   peace  bul  in  Zion  and  her  stakes.  .  .  . 

These  things  are  at  our  doors.  The)  will  follow  the  Saints  of  God  from 
city  to  city.  Satan  will  rage,  and  the  spirit  of  the  devil  is  now  enraged  I 
know  not  how  goon  these  things  will  take  place;  bu1  with  a  view  of  them, 
shall   I  cry  peace?     No  I     I   will  lift  up  my  voice  and  testifj   to  them.     How 

long  you  will  have  g I  crops,  and  the  famine  be  Kept  off,   I  do  not  know  ; 

when  the  he  tree  leaves,  know  then  that  summer  is  nigh  at  hand. 


724  TE  KARERE  Hurae,  1941 

President  Brigham  Young  gave  this  warning: 

Do  you  think  there  is  calamity  abroad  now  among  the  people  ?  .  .  .  All 
we  have  yet  heard  and  all  we  have  experienced  is  scarcely  a  preface  to  the 
sermon  that  is  going  to  be  preached.  When  the  testimony  of  the  Elders  ceases 
to  be  given,  and  the  Lord  says  to  them,  "come  home ;  I  will  now  preach  My 
own  sermons  to  the  nations  of  the  earth,"  all  you  now  know  can  scarcely  be 
called  a  preface  to  the  sermon  that  will  be  preached  with  fire  and  sword, 
tempests,  earthquake,  hail,  rain,  thunders  and  lightnings,  and  fearful  destruction. 

President  Jedediah  M.  Grant  added  this  comment: 

Consequently,  when  we  see  nation  stirred  up  against  nation,  and  on  the 
other  hand  see  other  nations  exerting  a  powerful  influence  to  bring  about 
negotiations  of  peace,  shall  we  say  they  can  bring  it  about?  Do  we  expect  they 
can  stay  the  outward  course  of  war?  The  Prophet  of  God  has  spoken  it  all, 
and  we  expect  to  see  the  work  go  on — and  see  all  things  fulfilled  as  the  pro- 
phets have  declared  by  the  spirit  of  prophecy  in  them. 

President  John  Taylor's  statement : 

Were  we  surprised  when  the  last  terrible  war  took  place  here  in  the  United 
States  ?  No !  Good  Latter-day  Saints  were  not,  for  they  had  been  told  about 
it.  Joseph  Smith  had  told  them  where  it  would  start,  that  it  should  be  a  ter- 
rible time  of  bloodshed  and  that  it  should  start  in  South  Carolina.  But  I  tell 
you  to-day  the  end  is  not  yet.  You  will  see  worse  things  than  that,  for  God 
will  lay  His  hand  upon  the  nations,  and  they  will  feel  it  more  terribly  than 
ever  they  have  done  before ;  there  will  be  more  bloodshed,  more  ruin,  more 
devastation  than  ever  they  have  seen  it  before.  Write  it  down !  You  will 
see  it  come  to  pass,  it  is  only  just  starting  in. 

President  Wilf ord  Woodruff,  more  recently,  said : 

I  heard  the  Prophet  Joseph  bear  his  testimony  to  these  events  that  would 
transpire  in  the  earth.  .  .  .  We  cannot  draw  a  veil  over  the  events  that  await 
this  generation.  No  man  that  is  inspired  by  the  Spirit  and  power  of  God  can 
close  his  ears,  his  eyes,  or  his  lips  to  these  things. 

The  warnings  from  the  Lord,  Himself,  are  clear.   He  says : 

The  Lord's  scourge  shall  pass  over  by  night  and  by  day,  and  the  report 
thereof  shall  vex  all  people ;  yea,  it  shall  not  be  stayed  until  the  Lord  come ; 
for  the  indignation  of  the  Lord  is  kindled  against  their  abominations  and  all 
their  wicked  works. 

But  the  promise  has  been  made  to  Zion  and  the  pure  in  heart, 
that  they  shall  escape  if  they  "observe  to  do  all  things  whatsoever 
I  (the  Lord)  have  commanded." 

The  Doctrine  and  Covenants  (45:38-41)  reads: 

Even  so  it  shall  be  in  that  day  when  they  shall  see  all  these  things,  then 
shall  they  know  that  the  hour  is  nigh.  And  it  shall  come  to  pass  that  he  that 
feareth  Me  shall  be  looking  forth  for  the  great  day  of  the  Lord  to  come,  even 
for  the  signs  of  the  coming  of  the  Son  of  Man.  And  they  shall  see  signs 
and  wonders,  for  they  shall  be  shown  forth  in  the  heavens  above,  and  in  the 
earth  beneath.     And  they  shall  behold  blood,  and  fire,  and  vapours  of  smoke. 

The  Bible  (St.  Luke  21  :  36)  gives  this  admonition: 

Watch  ye  therefore,  and  pray  always,  that  ye  may  be  accounted  worthy  to 
escape  all  these  things  that  shall  come  to  pass,  and  to  stand  before  the  Son 
of   Man. 

All  Latter-day  Saints  should  give  heed  to  the  counsel  of  the  ser- 
vants of  the  Lord.  We  should  prepare  ourselves  by  observing  the 
teachings  of  the  Gospel  and  the  commandments  of  the  Lord,  by  re- 
fraining from  evil  practices,  by  observing  our  prayers,  and  by  show- 
ing brotherly  love  in  our  dealings  with  each  other. 


Hurae,  1941 


TE  KARERE 


725 


Wm.  R.  Burge 


To-day's  Heritage 

By   William  R.  Burge 

I  suppose  we  have  all  felt  our  longing  for  free- 
dom from  "the  sin  that  doth  so  easily  beset  us,"  for 
peace,  for  better  conditions,  well  up  more  intensely 
during  recent  weeks.  This  is  a  natural  reaction 
when  we  survey  the  conditions  constantly  presented 
to  us.  Indeed  the  heritage  of  the  years,  the  por- 
tion for  which  those  hardy  souls  endured  so  much 
during  centuries,  all  seem  to  be  in  danger  of  de- 
struction; and  as  we  turn  to  our  radios  and  papers, 
we  might  feel  that  not  only  our  national  inheritance 
is  threatened,  but  that  personal  hope  that  we  all 
cherish  of  a  new  world,  upright  and  cleaner  life, 
either  here  or  hereafter,  is  also  being  sorely  buf- 
feted. We  each  of  us  have  nursed  this  hope  all  our 
lives.  It  has  been  a  comfort  to  us,  when  things 
have  gone  against  us,  and  it  seemed  to  burn  more  brightly  because  of 
our  adversity.  It  takes  a  different  form  in  our  individual  conception, 
but  it  is  based  on  our  religion,  the  expectation  and  realisation  of  a  hap- 
pier life  runs  right  through  our  doctrines.  It  is  with  feelings  of  pro- 
found thanksgiving  to  our  God  that  we  can  turn  to  the  scriptures  and 
read  therein  the  true  state  of  the  man  of  God  despite  material  evidence 
to  the  contrary. 

Every  chapter  in  the  Testaments  is  replete  with  promises  and 
assurances  of  God's  constant  nearness  to  man.  Every  chapter  proves 
to  us  that  only  God  triumphs  over  all;  that  God  is  the  originator  and 
dispenser  of  all  good;  that  it  is  only  God's  plan  which  is  being  worked 
out  in  the  world,  and  no  other.  It  follows  that  God  being  what  he  is 
« — without  shadow  or  turning — he  can  do  no  other  than  give  to  man  all 
ultimate  good.  The  man  who  has  his  heart  stayed  by  a  sure  abiding- 
conviction  of  his  relationship  as  the  son  of  God,  is  also  sure  of  his 
inheritance  of  peace  and  plenty,  that  the  unfolding  of  God's  plan  can 
bring  good  to  him.  He  is  not  swayed  by  the  thoughts  of  war  or  the 
results  of  war,  he  is  not  lead  by  fears,  ignorance,  censorship  or  man- 
formulated  creeds.  His  happiness  and  destiny  is  secure  in  the  Most 
High  and  he  is  content  that  his  Father's  ideas  should  be  worked  out 
for  the  good  of  all  mankind  including  himself. 
He  is  a  man  of  peace — at  peace. 

It  can  be  seen  that  a  man  may  be  at  peace  in  the  midst  of  war. 
Wo.  peace  of  God  can  remain  with  him,  his  security  founded  upon  his 
understanding  of  his  divine  sonship.  Peace  is  not  the  cessation  oi' 
hostilities.  It  is  the  letting  go  of  all  that  tends  to  disturb  or  disrupt 
our  harmony.  It  is  the  casting  out  of  fear,  jealousy,  petty  likes  and 
dislikes  and  a  closer  acceptance  of  honesty,  unselfishness,  purity  and 
love.  As  we  accept  and  express  these  qualities  we  draw  into  a  closer 
union  with  all  that  is  .u'<><>d.  The  state  of  peace  brings  healing  t<>  our- 
selves and  others,  wisdom  to  our  thoughts  and  acts,  love  and  co-opera- 
tion  in  our  relations  with  others.  It  gives  us  an  abiding  faith  in  the 
present  power  of  God  and  in  the  ultimate  recognition  of  and  obedience 
to  God  by  all   mankind. 

So  our  heritage  to-day,  which  others  would  have  us  believe  is  so 
besmirched  and  puerile,  is  for  us  an  accomplished  fact     an  ever-ready 

staff.      Renewal  of  strength  and  inspiration   for  each  day  is  to  he  found 
in  the   scriptures.      The    power   which    broughl    Daniel    from    the   din    <>f 

lions,  which  restored  Bight,  hearing,  Btraightened  limbs,  raised  the  dead, 

which    proved    the    supplier    of    the    widow's    needs,    is    not    dead;    is    not 
lost,    hut.    is   a   constant    source    of    endless    inspiration.       A.B    the    light    or 


726  TE  KARERE  Hurae,  1941 

realization  that  God  is  man's  life  fills  one's  heart,  the  sense  of  self- 
pity,  of  fear  of  the  future,  can  be  shed.  We  see  man's  oneness  with 
God  whose  wish  is  for  good  to  man,  and  we  can  claim  our  heritage 
as  the  sons  of  God.  We  need  not  wait  for  the  future  for  this  portion 
of  peace  and  happiness.  Time  does  not  enter  into  God's  conception 
of  life  since  good  is  infinite,  boundless,  knowing  neither  race  nor  creed. 
Let  us  grasp  our  God-given  dominion  (for  God  gave  us  dominion  over 
all  things)  to  secure  our  share  of  happiness.  More,  it  is  our  bounden 
duty  to  do  this  that  we  may  be  of  service  to  our  fellow-man,  who  like 
ourselves,  is  struggling  along  paths  where  all  familiar  landmarks  have 
disappeared,   all  former   standards  lost. 

Don't  let  you  and  I  just  wish  and  pray  that  God  will  do  something. 
That  attitude  savours  of  the  preacher's  favourite  illustration  of  drown- 
ing within  reach  of  a  lifebelt  and  wishing  that  the  lifebelt  would  help 
us.  It  will  and  God  will,  but  we  must  first  make  the  effort  ourselves 
to  be  calmer,  confident  and  of  good  cheer.  Then  we  can  assume  our 
true  inheritance  as  heirs  of  God. 

REPORTS  AND  SIX-PENNY  FUNDS 

Branches  throughout  the  Mission  that  are  late  with  reports,  etc.. 
are  again  reminded  to  forward  them  IMMEDIATELY.  Refer  back 
to  last  issue  of  Te  Karere  for  any  further  reference  regarding  reports 
and  six-penny  funds.  The  Sunday  Schools  that  have  reported  so 
far,  June  16th,  1941,  are: — 

First  Quarter. — Auckland,  Peterehema,  Mataraua,  Wanganui, 
Kaikohe,   Whangaruru,  Wairoa  Hauraki. 

Second  Quarter. — Taumarunui,  Wanganui,  Waipawa,  Matako- 
whai,  Whatawha.ta,  Whangaruru,  Te  Hauke,  Rahui,  Tokomaru  Bay. 
The  percentage  of  contributors  to  the  Six-penny  Fund  is  very 
small.     The  total  membership  of  the  Branch  should  be  the  contribu- 
tors to  this  fund. 

District  Presidents  are  here  asked  to  attend 
to  the  Sunday  School  work  in  your  districts, 
contact  your  District  Superintendency  and 
either  urge  them  to  work  or  see  that  some- 
one is  entrusted  with  this  important  work  who 

will  not  hide  their  light  under  a  bushel  of ? 

Branch  Presidents  are  as  responsible  for  the 
Sunday  School  work  within  the  Branch  as  is 
the  local  Superintendency.  Co-operation  and 
not  laziness  is  what's  needed. 
Due  to  the  fact  that  in  most  Branches  the  first  Sunday  of  the 
month  is  used  conjointly  with  the  Branch  the  amount  of  time  the 
Sunday  Schools  have  been  taking  is  very  short,  we  are  only  printing 
the  three  remaining  Sundays'  Lessons.  Use  your  time  in  some 
worthwhile  discussion  or  review  some  of  the  material  already  used. 
Next  month  we  hope  to  give  you  something  quite  definite  to  be  done 
in  ALL  Classes  during  one  Sunday  a  month. 

K.  HARRIS,  Secretary. 


Pioneer  Day  at 
Korongata,  Hast- 
ings, July  26th  and 
27th,  1941.  All  cor- 
dially invited.  Mis- 
sion President  will 
attend.  Come  with 
your  beards.  Spe- 
cial   prize    offered. 


Hurae,  1941  TE  KARERE  727 

SUNDAY  SCHOOL 


Theme — 

"OUR   HOMES   AND    CHAPELS    SHALL   BE   BEAUTIFUL" 
"For  Zion  must  increase  in  beauty  and  in  Holiness;  her  borders 
must  be  enlarged;  her  stakes  must  be  strengthened ;  yea  verily  I  say 
unto  you.     Zion  must  arise  and  put  on  her  beautiful  garments." 

(Doctrine  &  Covenants  82:  14.) 


SACRAMENT  GEM 
I  come  to  Thee  all  penitent, 

I  feel  Thy  love  for  me. 
Dear  Saviour,  in  this  Sacrament 

I  do  remember  Thee. 

CONCERT  RECITATION 
Proverbs  9:  9-10. 

"Give  instruction  to  a  wise  man,  and  he  will  be  the  wiser ;  teach 
a  just  man,  and  he  will  increase  in  learning.  The  fear  of  the  Lord 
is  the  beginning  of  wisdom ;  and  the  knowledge  of  the  holy  is  under- 
standing." 

KORERO  A  NGAKAU 

Nga  Whakatauki  9:  9-10. 

"Hoatu  te  mohio  ki  te  tangata  whakaaronui,  a  ka  neke  ake  ona 
whakaaro ;  whakaakona  te  tangata  tika,  a  ka  maha  ake  ana  kupu 
mohio.  Te  timatanga  o  te  whakaaro  nui  ko  te  wehi  kia  Ihowa ;  te 
matauranga,  ko  te  mohio  ki  te  Mea  Tapu." 

HYMNS 

"Nay,  Speak  No  111"   Page  88 

"Kia  Mahara  Tonu   ka" Wharangi  73 

LESSONS 

KINDERGARTEN   (4  and  5  years  oJ 

1.  "Who's  On  The  Lord's  Side."  Exodus  32  and  34.  "Objective  Do 
what  is  right.     Lei  the  consequence  follow." 

2.  "A  Temple  hi  The  Desert"   Exodus  35  to  40.   "Objective    God  blesses 
-  ho  reverently  worship  I  lim." 

3.  "Two  Against    Ten."     Numbers   [3  and   1-4.     "Objective    Gour; 
and  truthful  people  are  honoured  bj   (i<>d  and   Mm." 

PRIMARY   (6,  7,  8  and  9  years  oi 

1.    "Elisha  Restores  a  Utile  Lad  to  Life."    11  Kings  A.  18  38,    "Objective 
The  Lord  blesses  the  faithful  who  believe  in  I  lim." 


728  TE  KARERE  Hurae,  1941 

2.  "And  a  Little  Child  Shall  Lead  Them."  11  Kings  5:  1-19.  "Objective- 
Great  blessings  come  from  a  child's  faith." 

3.  "Gchazi  Punished."  11  Kings  5:20-27.  "Objective — Blessings  follow 
obedience  to  the  words  of  God's  servants." 

CHURCH  HISTORY   (10  and  11  years  of  age). 
Book  of  Mormon. 

INTERMEDIATE   (12,  13,  14  and  15  years  of  age). 

1.  "At  the  Well  of  Sychar."  John  4:1-42.  "Objective— To  teach  that 
the  Gospel  is  for  all  who  will  accept  it." 

2.  "Driven  From  Nazareth."  Matthew  13:54-58;  Luke  4:16-30;  Mark 
6:1-6.  "Objective — To  help  students  guard  against  accepting  false  doctrine 
from  strangers  and  rejecting  the  truth  that  is  spoken  by  their  own  associates." 

3.  "The  Draught  of  Fishes."  Luke  5:  1-11  ;  Mark  1  :  16-20.  "Objective — 
To  emphasize  the  fact  that  the  blessings  of  the  Lord  come  only  through  obedi- 
ence to  Him." 

A.  &  B.  DEPARTMENTS   (16,  17,  18  and  19  years  of  age). 

1.  "Adam  and  Eve  Driven  From  the  Garden  of  Eden."  Genesis  3  :  7-21. 
Problems — Why  were  our  first  parents  driven  from  the  Garden  of  Eden?  Was 
this  a  curse,  or  a  blessing  to  mankind?  Why?  Why  was  the  flaming  sword 
placed  to  guard  the  way?  What  were  the  causes  for  joy  and  sorrow  of  Adam 
and  Eve  ? 

2.  Discuss  this  lesson  using  refrences  found  in  Articles  of  Faith,  chapter 
2,  and  Jesus  the  Christ,  chapter  3. 

3.  "The  Story  of  Cain  and  Abel."  Genesis  4:  1-16.  Problems — Why  was 
Abel's  offering  more  acceptable  than  Cain's  ?  How  did  Cain  accept  his  sen- 
tence ?     Did  Cain  repent  ? 

C.  &  D.  DEPARTMENTS    (20  to  25  years  of  age). 

1.  "Baptism  of  Jesus  Christ  in  the  Jordan  River."  Matthew  3:13-17; 
Mark  1:9-11;  Luke  3:21-23.  Problems — How  did  Christ  meet  John's  objec- 
tion to  baptize  Him  ?  What  two  incidents  show  that  Jesus  was  the  Messiah  ? 
What  evidence  have  we  that  John  was  looking  for  such  a  witness  as  the  one 
referred  to  in  problem  2? 

2.  "The  Temptations."  Matthew  4:1-11;  Mark  1:12-13;  Luke  4:1-13. 
Problems — Show  that  these  temptations  of  Jesus  are  in  a  way  a  summary  of 
all  the  temptations  that  will  ever  come  to  man.  Show  how  Satan  is  still 
adhering  to  the  plan  he  proposed  in  the  council  in  heaven.  When  are  we  justi- 
fied in  claiming  God's  miraculous  intervention  in  our  behalf  ?  Show  by  refer- 
ence to  Christ's  temptation  that  God  provides  a  way  of  escape  from  every 
temptation  (see  Cor.  10:13).  How  was  it  possible  for  Christ  to  behold  all 
the  kingdoms  of  the  world? 

3.  Continue  on  with  the  above  lesson. 

ADULT  GOSPEL  DOCTRINE   (for  all  others  not  assigned). 

1.  "The  Division  of  the  Hebrew  Nation"  B.C.  975-955.  1  Kings  12  to  14; 
11  Chronicles  10  to  12. 

2.  "The  Northern  Kingdom  from  Jeroboam  to  Ahab"  B.C.  955-918.  1 
Kings   15,   16:1-28;   11   Chronicles  12  to  16. 

3.  "The  Era  of  Elijah"  B.C.  918-915.  1  Kings  17  to  19;  11  Chronicles 
18:1-9. 

MAORI  CLASS— as  printed. 


Hurae,  1941 


TE  KARERE 


729 


PRIMARY 


A  SUGGESTION  FOR 
TEACHERS 

One   there   was 

Known  throughout  the  ages 

And  over  all  the  world  .  .   . 

The   Great  Teacher, 

Who  leads  forever  to  the  light. 

His  name  I  bear. 

Oh,   wondrous  thought 

That  challenges  my  highest,  best. 

I  am  a  teacher. 

— Caroline  S.  Woodruff. 

MEMORY  GEM 
I  would  not  hurt  a  living  thing, 

However  great  or  small, 
The    beasts   that   graze,    the    birds 
that  sing, 
Our  Father  made  them  all. 

LESSONS: 

FIRST  WEEK 

Objective: 

We  may  be  with  Jesus  when  He 
comes  again  by  obedience  to  His 
teachings. 

Lesson    Story: 

AT  THE  SEA  OF  GALILEE 

(John  21: 1, 14) 

To-day  we  are  going  to  hear 
another  story  about  Jesus,  before 
He  went  back  to  heaven. 

Seven  disciples  of  Christ  were 
together  one  evening  on  the  shore 
of  the  Sea  of  Tiberias,  Galilee. 
They  were  Peter,  Thomas,  Nath- 
aniel, James,  John  and  two  others. 

Peter  said  to  his  fellow-apostles, 
"I  go  fishing"  ;  and  the  others  re- 
plied, "We  also  go  with  you." 

Without  delay  they  wont  into 
the  boat  and  put  off.  Night  is  the 
best  time  for  fishing,  but  all  that 
night  they  caught  nothing.  Every 
time  they  cast  the  net  over  the 
side  of  the  boat  and  drew  it  in  it 
was  empty.  They  did  not  catch  a 
single   fish. 

When  early  morning  came,  dis- 
appointed   and    discouraged,    they 

drew   near  the  land.      They  saw,   in 

the  faint  light  of  the  dawn,  a  man 
standing  on  the  shore,  He  seemed 
to  be  waiting  for  them.    He  hailed 

them    and    asked:    "Children,    have 


ye  any  meat?"  They  answered, 
"No."  It  was  Jesus  who  spoke  to 
them.  But  the  disciples  knew  not 
that  it  was  He. 

He  called  to  them  again,  say- 
ing: "Cast  the  net  on  the  right 
side  of  the  ship,  and  ye  shall  find." 
They  obeyed  and  in  a  moment  the 
net  was  so  full  of  fish  they  were 
scarcely  able  to  draw  it  in. 

At  once  they  remembered  that 
other  remarkable  draught  of  fishes 
when  Jesus  was  with  them.  Then 
John,  whom  Jesus  loved,  whis- 
pered to   Peter,   "It  is  the  Lord." 

Peter  answered  nothing,  but 
hastily  fastened  his  fisher's  coat 
around  him  and  sprang  into  the 
sea  and  swam  to  shore.  He  wanted 
to  be  the  first  to  greet  Jesus. 

The  boat  was  only  a  short  dis- 
tance from  land.  In  a  few  min- 
utes all  the  disciples  were  with 
their  Lord.  No  one  asked  "Who 
art  Thou" — because  now  they  all 
knew  it  was  Jesus. 

On  the  shore  they  saw  a  fire  of 
coals,  with  fish  broiling  on  it,  and 
some  bread  lying  near.  Jesus  said, 
"Bring  of  the  fish  ye  have  now 
caught."  Instantly  Peter  started 
up,  and  with  his  strong  arm  helped 
drag  the  net  ashore.  When 
counted,  they  found  that  there 
were  a  hundred  and  fifty-three 
great  fishes  in  it.  "And  for  all 
there  were  so  many,  yet  was  not 
the  net  broken." 

Then  Jesus  said,  "Come  and 
dine."  He  divided  and  passed  the 
bread  and  fish  to  each.  We  are 
not  told  in  the  Bible  that  Jesus 
ate  with  the  disciples  at  this  time. 

When  the  meal  was  finished. 
Jesus  talked  to  them.  He  told 
them  to  love  one  another  and  help 
one  another. 

This  was  the  third  time  Jesus 
showed    Himself   to    His   disciples, 

after  that  He  was  risen  from  flu1 
dead." 

JESUS     LAST    MESSAGE    AND 
THE    ASCENSION 

(  Matt.    US) 
Once     more    .lesus     eame     to     His 
disciples    in    Jerusalem.      He    knew 
t  hat    He  scon    niuM    leave   t  hem.    He 


730 


TE  KARERE 


Hurae,  1941 


told  them  the  same  things  many 
times.  Once  more  He  said  to 
them,  "Go  ye  into  all  the  world 
and  preach  the  gospel  to  every 
creature?  That  meant  that  they 
were  to  go  everywhere.  They  were 
to  tell  all  people  about  Jesus  and 
what  good  things  He  taught.  He 
promised  the  disciples  He  would 
be  with  them  always,  even  unto 
the  end  of  the  world. 

As  He  talked  to  them  He  led 
them  "as  far  as  to  Bethany." 
"Then  He  lifted  up  His  hands,  and 
blessed  them;  and  while  He  yet 
spake,  He  rose  from  their  midst, 
and  they  looked  upon  Him  until  a 
cloud  received  Him  out  of  sight." 

It  is  not  strange  that  they  could 
not  look  away  from  the  sky  and 
continued  to  gaze  with  the  hope 
that  they  might  have  one  more 
glimpse  of  Him  who  had  so  blessed 
them.  While  they  stood  gazing  up- 
ward, two  personages  clothed  in 
white  spoke  this  glorious  promise: 
"Ye  men  of  Galilee,  why  stand  ye 
gazing  up  into  heaven?  This  same 
Jesus,  which  is  taken  up  from  you 
into  heaven,  shall  so  come  in  like 
manner  as  ye  have  seen  Him  go 
into  heaven." 

After  praying  in  silence  the 
Apostles  returned  with  great  joy 
to  Jerusalem,  there  to  await  the 
coming  of  the  Comforter  (ex- 
plain) which  Jesus  had  promised 
them.  Then  they  would  be  ready 
to  do  the  work  He  had  given  them. 
Conversation    After   the   Story: 

Jesus  had  left  them.  Why  were 
they  happy?  What  had  He  pro- 
mised? (They  knew  it  was  true 
"That  He  would  be  with  us  al- 
way.")  Jesus  is  near  us  though 
we  cannot  see  Him.  He  loves  us 
and  takes  care  of  us.  He  wants 
us  to  be  kind  and  love  other  peo- 
ple. What  other  promise  did  Jesus 
give  us?  Only  people  who  are 
good  will  know  Him  and  be  ready 
to  meet  Him.  What  can  we  do  in 
order  to  be  good  enough  to  be 
with  Jesus  when  He  comes  again? 

SECOND  WEEK 

Objective: 

Help  to  keep  the  home  safe 
that  it  may  be  a  place  where  all 
may  be  happy. 


Suggestions  for  Teaching: 

The  common  dangers  in  the 
home  can  be  overcome  in  a  large 
measure  by  education.  Children 
should  be  trained  early  to  guard 
against  accidents.  This  lesson,  if 
properly  prepared  and  given, 
should  help  the  children  to  safe- 
guard themselves  and  others 
against  being  hurt. 

In  every  home  there  is  much 
work  to  do.  What  happens  when 
everyone  in  the  family  works  to- 
gether? We  all  want  happy 
homes.  Isn't  it  fun  to  help  make 
them  so?  Jesus  taught  us  a  very 
beautiful  way  to  work  together. 
He  said  to  love  one  another,  to 
help  one  another,  and  if  we  do, 
everyone   will   be  happy. 

To-day  let  us  talk  about  how  we 
can  keep  from  getting  hurt  in  our 
homes.  When  someone  gets  hurt 
that  makes  everyone  unhappy, 
doesn't  it? 

Let  us  talk  a  few  minutes  about 
these.  (Hold  up  a  pair  of  scis- 
sors.) What  are  they  for?  Do 
you  ever  use  scissors?  What  do 
you  cut?  It's  lots  of  fun  to  cut 
out  pictures,  isn't  it?  Who  knows 
how  to  carry  a  pair  of  scissors  pro- 
perly? Show  us  please,  Mary. 
Why  did  Mary  carry  them  with 
the  points  down?  Tell  us  another 
good  reason.  John,  please  carry 
the  scissors  properly  and  tell  us 
the  two  good  reasons  why  you 
carry  them  so.  (Other  children 
may  be  asked  to  demonstrate  and 
tell  reasons.) 

Peggy,  please  hand  the  scissors 
to  me.  Why  did  you  close  them 
first?  Why  did  Peggy  offer  me  this 
end    (indicate)? 

Let  other  children  demonstrate 
the  polite  way  to  pass  the  scissors, 
and  tell  why. 

Can  you  think  of  another  thing 
that  is  sharp  that  should  be  car- 
ried with  the  point  down?  (De- 
monstrate handing  a  knife  to  an- 
other.) Why  is  it  polite  to  offer 
the   handle?     Why   is   it   safe? 

A  few  days  ago  a  little  girl  was 
washing  the  knives  and  forks  and 
cut  her  finger.  This  is  the  safe 
way  to  wash  and  dry  a  knife. 
(Teacher  demonstrate.)  When  you 
help  mother  set  the  table,  how  do 


Hurae,  1941 


TE  KARERE 


731 


you  place  the  knife  by  the  plate? 
(Always  with  the  sharp  edge  to- 
ward the  plate.) 

If  we  break  a  glass,  why  should 
we  pick  up  the  pieces  immediately? 
How  should  we  pick  them  up? 
What  should  we  do  with  them? 
Yes,  they  should  be  thrown  away 
but  in  a  safe  manner,  how-ever,  so 
the  man  who  collects  the  garbage 
won't  get  cut. 

Here  is  a  good  way  to  handle 
glass.  Put  the  pieces  in  a  tin  can 
with  paper,  and  press  the  lid  of 
the  can  back  in  place.  The  lid  of 
an  empty  can  should  always  be 
pressed  into  place  to  prevent  cuts. 
(Have  articles  in  class  and  demon- 
strate so  the  children  will  get  a 
clear  idea  what  you  mean.) 

Lesson  Story: 

MARJORIE  AND  HER  FRIENDS 

One  day  as  Marjorie  was  hurry- 
ing along  the  street  on  her  way  to 
the  grocer's,  she  tripped  and  fell 
over  a  small  hoop  she  had  stepped 
on. 

"My!"  she  exclaimed,  as  she 
got  up.  "It's  a  good  thing  I  wasn't 
on  my  way  home  with  the  eggs 
mother  sent  me  for." 

As  she  walked  along,  Marjorie 
noticed  broken  milk  bottles  and 
jars,  and  plenty  of  old  tin  cans 
along  the  fences  and  on  edges  of 
vacant  lots.  This  set  her  thinking 
of  a  plan. 

The  next  day  at  recess  she  told 
her  plan  to  a  number  of  her  play- 
mates. She  told  them  all  about 
her  fall  and  then  went  on:  "Why 
can't  we  help  to  make  our  town 
safe  and  clean?  To-morrow  is 
Saturday.    What  do  you  all  say?" 

"Hurrah!  Of  course  we  can!" 
They  all  said  at  one  time. 

One  of  the  boys  was  made  the 
general  and  each  promised  to  do 
his  bit. 

The  next  morning  at  9  o'clock, 
about  ten  boys  and  girls  met  at 
the    bridge    and    set   to    work. 

They  picked  up  the  pieces  of 
f'ass  and  put  them  in  the  tin  cans 
and  pressed  the  lids  in  place. 
These  they  put  in  one  big  pile, 

By   noon   the   task    was    finished. 

"Oh,  look!"  exclaimed  Marjorie. 


"There  is  Bob's  father  with  his 
truck  to  haul  everything  away  for 
us." 

It  was  a  fine  thing  they  had 
done,  and  it  was  a  happy  half-day 
they  all  had  together. 

— Adapted. 

Conversation   After   the    Story: 

Ask  the  following  and  let  the 
children  tell  you  the  right  answer: 
The  point  of  the  scissors  should 
be  held  up  or  down  when  they  are 
being  carried?  The  blade  or  the 
handle  of  a  knife  should  be  offered 
to  a  person? 

Ask  similar  questions  on  other 
points  made  in  the  lesson. 

For  the  Children  to  do: 

Here  is  a  good  way  to  protect 
the  points  of  scissors  or  sharp 
knives.  Let  the  children  decorate 
corks  and  take  them  home  for 
mother    to    use. 

THIRD  WEEK 

Objective: 

To  help  the  child  to  love  and 
enjoy  the  beautiful  in  poetry. 

Suggestions   for  Teaching: 

"Poetry  is  music  in  words." — 
Fuller. 

"He  who  has  tuned  his  ear  to 
catch  the  sound  of  words  needs 
never  tie  bells  on  his  toes  to  have 
music  wherever  he  goes." 

Children  love  poetry.  They  will 
listen  to  the  same  poem  again  and 
again.  The  poems  suggested  for 
this  period  are  for  sheer  enjoy- 
ment. They  should  either  be  mem- 
orized by  the  teacher  or  read 
aloud  a  sufficient  number  of  times 
to  warrant  being  read  well  to  the 
class.  Introduce  each  poem.  Pic- 
tures will  be  useful. 

Poetry  for  children  is  a  special 
kind  of  poetry.  It  is  written  for 
them  not  about  them. 

Lesson    Approach: 

Let  several  children  say  poems 

they  have  learned  at  home  or  in 
class.    Talk  with  them  ahont   lovely 

stories     they     know.      Sometime 

people  tell  stories  in  pootry.  I A  t 
I  hem     say     some     of     the     nursery 


732 


TE  KARERE 


Hurae,  1941 


rhymes,  and  you'll  discover  that 
each  tells  a  story.  To-day  you  are 
going  to  hear  some  beautiful 
poems.  If  you  like  them  we'll  hear 
them  again  sometime. 

Poems: 

THE    COMING    OF    SPRING 

There's  something  in  the  air 
That's  new  and  sweet  and  rare — 
A  scent  of  summer  things, 
A  whirr  as  if  of  wings. 

There's  something,  too,  that's  new 
In  the  colour  of  the  blue 
That's  in  the  morning  sky, 
Before  the  sun  is  high. 

And  though  on  plain  and  hill 
'Tis    winter,    winter    still, 
There's  something  seems  to  say 
That  winter's  had  its  day. 

And  all  this  changing  tint, 
This   whispering   stir   and   hint 
Of  bud  and  bloom  and  wing, 
Is  the  coming  of  the  spring. 

— Nora   Perry. 

THE  TOAD 
The  toad  is  a  garden  helper 
With  eyes  so  round  and  bright. 
He  takes  his  sleep  in  the  daytime 
And  works  for  us  at  night. 

— Laura  B.   Young. 

APRIL  SHOWERS 
A  little  cloudlet  in  the  sky 
Was  lonesome  and  began  to  cry, 
And  every  place  it  dropped  a  tear 
A  flower  started  up,  my  dear. 

— Mary  Rose. 

THE  SWING 

How   do   you   like   to   go    up   in   a 

swing, 
Up  in  the  air  so  blue? 
Oh,   I   do   think  it  the   pleasantest 

thing 
Ever  a  child  can  do. 
Up  in  the  air  and  over  the  wall, 
Till  I  can  see  so  wide, 
Rivers  and  trees  and  cattle  and  all 
Over  the  country  side — 


Till   I   look   down    on   the   garden 

green, 
Down  on  the  roof  so  brown — 
Up  in  the  air  I  go  flying  again, 
Up  in  the  air  and  down! 

— Robt.  Louis  Stevenson. 

TULIPS 

Standing  just  like  soldiers; 

In  a  row, 
Standing  just  like  soldiers; 

So  they  grow. 
Holding  up  their  petals 

Like  a  cup, 
For  the  summer  sun 

To  fill  them  up. 
— James  T.  Harrity,  Jr. 

THE  DANDELION 

I  saw  a  little  dandelion 
With  a  head  of  gold, 
Trying  to  outshine  the  sun, 
That  little  flower  bold. 
I  saw  a  little  dandelion 
At  the  close  of  day, 
And  do  you  know,  that 

dandelion's 
Head  had  turned  grey. 

— Mary   Rose. 

THE   CHICKENS 

Said  the   first  little   chicken 

With  a  queer  little   squirm: 
"I  wish  I   could  find 

A  fat  little  worm.' 
Said  the  next  little  chicken 

With  an  odd  little  shrug: 
"I  wish  I  could  find 

A  fat  little  bug!" 
Said  the  third  little  chicken, 

With  a  small  sigh  of  grief: 
"I  wish  I  could  find 

A  green  little  leaf!" 
Said  the  fourth  little  chicken, 

With  a  faint  little  moan: 
"I  wish  I  could  find 

A  wee  gravel   stone!" 
"Now  see  here!"  said  the  mother, 

From   the   green   garden   patch, 
"If  you  want  any  breakfast, 

Just  come  here  and  scratch." 

— Selected. 


Hurae,  1941 


TE  KARERE 


733 


LADY  MOON 

Lady  Moon,  Lady  Moon,  where  are 
you   roving? 
"Over  the   sea." 
Lady  Moon,  Lady  Moon,  whom  are 
you  loving? 
"AH  that  love  me." 

Are  you  not  tired  with  rolling,  and 

never 

Resting  to  sleep? 
Why  look  so  pale   and  so  sad,   as 
forever 

Wishing  to  weep? 

Ask  me  not  this,  little  child,  if  you 
love  me 
You  are  too  bold, 
I  must  obey  my  dear  Father  above 
me, 
And  do  as  I'm  told. 

Lady  Moon,  Lady  Moon,  where  are 
you  roving? 
"Over  the  sea.' 
Lady  Moon,  Lady  Moon,  whom  are 
you  loving? 
"All  who  love  me." 

Conversation: 

Which  poem  should  you  like  me 
to  read  again?  (Let  several  child- 
ren choose,  and  read  the  favourite 
ones  again.) 

FOURTH  WEEK 

Objective: 

To  give  the  children  a  happy 
time  and  help  them  to  be  courte- 
ous and  kind  to  each  other. 

Suggestions    for   Teaching: 

During  this  hour  of  happy  asso- 
ciations many  of  the  most  valuable 
lessons  are  incidentally  learned. 
Shyness  and  self-consciousness  are 
overcome;  other  qualities  such  as 
courage,  confidence,  co-operation, 
and  fair  plav  are  wholesomely 
stimulated. — V.P.W. 

This  period  can  only  accomplish 
its  purpose  when  the  teacher  is 
well  prepared  with  the  games  and 
dances  to  be  played  and  has  the 
hour  well  planned.  Have  you  ever 
stopped  to  think  that  a  noisy  play 
hour  may  be  the  result  <>f  poor 
preparation  and  planning?  A  play 
leader  of  long  experience  says  that 
she   has    found    it    helpful    t<>    have 


her  programme  written  on  a  ca^d 
and  pinned  to  her  dress  where  she 
can  refer  to  it. 

Suggestive  Game: 

"Skating  Away."  (Music,  "Here 
We  Go  Round  the  Mulberry  Bush." 

SKATING  AWAY 

There  were  two  couples  a-skating 

away, 
Skating,  a-skating,  a-skating  away; 
There  were  two  couples  a-skating 

away, 
So  early  in  the  morning. 

The   ice   gave    away   and   they   all 

fell  in. 
They  all,  they  all,  they  all  fell  in; 
The   ice   gave   away   and   they   all 

fell  in. 
So  early  in  the  morning. 

The    old   swing    out   and   the    new 

swing  in; 
The    old   swing   out   and   the   new 

swing  in; 
The   old   swing   out   and   the   new 

swing  in; 
So   early  in  the  morning. 

Formation. — Players  join  hands 
in  a  single  circle.  Two  couples 
step  into  the  centre  to  start  the 
game. 

Action. —  (1)  Couples  in  the 
centre  form  a  right-hand  star. 
(The  two  men  join  right  hands, 
the  girls  join  right  hands  above 
the  men  and  at  right  angles.) 
While  everyone  sings  the  first 
verse,  they  skip  to  the  right.  At 
the  same  time  players  in  the  circle 
skip   counter-clockwise. 

(2)  Two  couples  in  the  centre 
change  to  left  hands  and  skip  in 
the  opposite  direction,  and  the 
circle  also  reverses  direction. 

(3)  Each  player  in  tin-  centre 
selects  a  new  player  from  the 
circle.  Swinging  with  both  hands 
twice  around  in  place,  they  retire 

to  the  circle  and  the  four  new 
ones  remain  in  the  Centre  for  tin- 
next  round.  ( On  third  verse,  play- 
ers  in   circle  stand   still   and   clap.) 

Story: 

One    selected. 


734 


TE  KARERE 


Hurae,  1941 


Mutual  Improvement  Association 


Cooking   for   Hui   Tau,   arranged 
by    Heni    Tengaio 
Adults: 

FRUIT  CAKE  (for  Overseas) 
1  lb.  Butter,  1  lb.  Flour,  1  lb. 
Sugar,  10  Eggs,  2  wineglasses 
Brandy,  Nutmeg,  Cloves,  Mall  and 
mixed  Spice  to  taste,  2  lbs.  Raisins 
and   Currants. 

Cream  the  butter  and  the  sugar, 
add  eggs  one  at  a  time,  beating 
well  after  each  egg  has  been 
added.  Stir  in  the  dry  ingredients 
and  lastly  add  the  fruit  and 
brandy.  Bake  in  a  moderate  oven 
for  five  or  six  hours.  This  cake 
will  keep  for  a  year. 

BANANA   CHUTNEY 

3  lbs.    Apples,    2    lbs.    Bananas, 

1  lb  preserved  Ginger,  1  lb  Raisins, 

2  J   pints  Vinegar,   I   oz.   Cayenne, 

1  lb.  Salt,  II  lbs.  Onions,  II  lbs. 
Brown   Sugar. 

Chop  up  ingredients,  put  every- 
thing in  pan  and  boil  for  2  hours. 

QUINCE   CONSERVE 

10  large  Quinces  cut  into  pieces, 

3  quarts  of  cold  water.    Boil  until 
it  jellies. 

Gleaner   Girls: 

CHOCOLATE    AND    WALNUT 
CAKE 

4  ozs.  light  brown  Sugar,  3  ozs. 
Butter,  6  ozs.  Flour,  2  Eggs,  2  tea- 
spoons Cocoa,  8  tablespoons  Milk, 

2  teaspoons  Baking  Powder,  J  cup 
Walnuts. 

Beat  sugar  and  butter  to  a 
cream,  add  eggs  one  at  a  time,  giv- 
ing the  mixture  a  good  beating, 
stir  in  other  ingredients  and  cook 
in  greased  tin  for  half  hour. 

Icing. — 1  cup  Icing  Sugar,  2  tea- 
spoons Cocoa,  few  drops  Vanilla, 
1  cup  Walnuts. 

PRESERVED  RHUBARB 
Boil  for  20  minutes  a  syrup  of 
sugar  and  water  in  quantities  of 
1  cup  sugar  to  1  cup  water.  Place 
rhubarbs  in  preserving  jars  and 
pack  tight;  put  in  oven  long 
enough  to  heat  jars  thoroughly. 
When   heated,   pour   in   the    syrup 


after  allowing  20  minutes  for  boil- 
ing, fill  the  jars  up,  screw  down  at 
once  and  stand  them  on  their  lids 
until  cold  and  make  sure  they  are 
airtight. 

BANANA  JAM 
12  large  Bananas,  4  Lemons,  6 
Oranges,  Sugar.  Large,  coarse 
bananas  not  too  ripe  should  be 
used,  and  the  little  slices  should 
remain  whole.  Put  into  rather 
thin  rounds.  To  each  pound  of 
sliced  bananas  add  S  lb.  of  sugar, 
the  strained  juice  and  pulp  of  the 
oranges  and  lemons.  Boil  slowly 
for  three-quarters  of  an  hour. 

Junior  Girls: 

GOOD  SPONGE  CAKE 
4  Eggs,  1  teacup  Sugar,  1  teacup 
Flour,  1  oz.  Butter,  1  teaspoon 
Baking  Powder.  Melt  butter,  beat 
in  with  sugar  and  eggs  till  light 
and  frothy.  Stir  in  flour  and  pow- 
der. Bake  in  flat  dish  quickly. 
Turn  out  on  damp  towel  or  paper 
with  icing  sugar  sprinkled  over  it, 
roll  at  once.  (Can  undo  roll  when 
cool  and  spread  jam  or  filling  in 
it,   does  not  crack  then.) 

YO-YO    3 

6  ozs.  Flour,  2  ozs.  Custard 
Powder,  2  ozs.  Icing  Sugar,  1  tea- 
spoon Baking  Powder,  i  lb  Butter. 
Cream  butter  and  sugar,  add  other 
ingredients.  Roll  into  balls  and 
press  with  a  fork,  put  together 
with  butter  icing. 

Bee-Hive:         GEMS 

3  ozs.  Butter,  2  ozs.  Sugar,  i 
teaspoon  Soda  dissolved  in  5 
tablespoons  Milk,  1  small  cup 
Flour,  1  teaspoon  Cream  of  Tar- 
tar, 1  Egg.  Cream  butter  and 
sugar  well,  add  egg  then  milk  and 
soda  and  lastly  flour  and  salt. 
Bake  them  in  gem  irons. 

FUDGE 
2  cups  Sugar,  |  cup  Milk,  1 
tablespoon  Butter,  1  tablespoon 
Cocoa.  Boil  about  10  minutes  or 
until  it  becomes  thick,  take  off 
fire  and  beat  well  until  it  is  very 
thick.    Pour  out  into  buttered  dish. 


Hurae,  1941 


TE  KARERE 


735 


NEWS  FROM  THE  FIELD 


AUCKLAND  DISTRICT 
Reported    by    Rona    V.    Attenborough 

"Zion  is  growing;  Hurrah!  Hurrah! 
and  we  don't  mean  maybe,  for  the  popu- 
lation of  this  fair  city  has  been  in- 
creased to  the  extent  of  two,  during  the 
last  week  or  ten  days.  First  of  all, 
Monday  morning,  June  2,  heralded  the 
birth  of  a  son  and  heir  to  Mr.  and  Mrs. 
Alex.  Wishart  of  this  branch.  But  wait 
a  minute,  not  to  be  otudone  by  this,  Mr. 
and  Mrs.  Pat  Rei  announced  the  birth 
of  their  daughter,  on  Monday,  June  9. 
Both  mothers  and  children  are  doing  fine, 
and  we  tender  our  congratulations  and 
best  wishes  to  parents  of  both  infants. 
We  also  wish  to  report  the  fine  progress 
of  Miss  Kellani  Harris.  My!  my!  what 
a  Primary  we  are  going  to  have — some 
day. 

The  enthusiasm  with  which  some  folks 
are  working  on  the  Church  Welfare  Plan 
leaves  almost  nothing  to  be  desired. 
Take  the  Auckland  Branch  Intermediate 
Sunday  School  class  for  instance.  On 
Sunday  morning  after  Sunday  School, 
heads  get  together,  pencils  speed  over 
the  paper,  plans  are  made,  and — 
PRESTO! — on  Saturday  last,  June  7,  did 
we  have  fun,  in  the  form  of  a  social 
gathering  held  at  the  home  of  Mr.  Reid 
(father  of  Bro.  Ivan  Reid).  Folks  who 
did  not  come  missed  a  whale  of  a  lot  of 
fun  Altogether,  with  donations  from 
some  who  couldn't  make  it,  we  cleared 
close  to  £2 — and  that's  not  all,  what  we 
are  not  going  to  do,  but  there — the  rest 
of  it  is  still  in  the  bag.  But  we  are 
going  to  it,  and  believe  me  when  I  say 
we  like  it.  We  are  not  the  only  ones, 
though  Our  Brothers  and  Sisters  of  the 
Onehunga  Branch  have  gone  to  work  in 
a  big  way — clearing  sections,  planting 
crops,  etc.,  and  they  are  all  in  on  it  and 
enjoying    it    too. 

It  seems  difficult  to  believe  that  at 
some  moment  of  the  day  a  very  large 
smile,  and  behind  it,  Bro.  Hepa  Meha, 
will  not  present  itself  at  the  door  of  the 
Chapel  here.  Hepa,  we  miss  you,  but 
wherever  you  are  we  wish  you  all  that 
you  would  wish  for  yourself,  and  may 
you  be  back  very  soon.  In  the  mean- 
time, we  are  looking  after  Mabel  for  you 
and   she   is   doing   fine. 

Another  <>f  the  Saints  from  this  Branch 
will  booh  be  departing  for  overseas.  He 
is  Bro.  Ernest  Montague  (Monty),  who 
has  been  in  Narrow  Neck  Territ  trial 
Camp  since  July  last  year,  but  who  has 
now  been  transferred  to  Papakura  Camp. 
We  have  not  seen  very  much  of  Monty 
becau  e    of    hie    duties    In    the    arm:      bul 

we  assure  him  of  our  love  and  be  I 
wishes  am!  pray  I  hat  he  will  be  pro- 
tected and  returned  safely  to  I  ho  e  h< 
loves.   That    is    A-a-all ! 

MANAWATU 

Reported    by    Polly    Wi    Nm.i 

The     Districl      Prei  Idencj      hi 

made   Its    presence   fell    In  visit      to  littl 

known     places    where    Saints     might     be. 


Brother  and  Sister  Peneamine  Wi  Neera 
visited  the  Plimmerton  members  during 
the  past  month  and  report  that  the  Gos- 
pel  is    still   paramount    in    their    lives. 

President  George  Katene  of  the  Pori- 
rua  Branch  has  been  an  inmate  of  the 
Wellington  Hospital  for  some  weeks,  and 
according  to  reports  should  be  home  with 
his  people  very  soon.  His  young  daugh- 
ter, Tiripa,  who  has  for  years  suffered 
from  poisoning  in  the  right  leg  from  an 
accident  while  attending  school,  is  now 
able  to  move  on  crutches.  Doctors  at 
one  stage  in  her  recovery  declared  her 
permanently  unable  to  use  her  leg;  so  far 
we  have  much  to  be  grateful  for,  which 
shows  what  determination  and  hard  work 
together   with    faithful   prayers    can    do. 

In  total  disregard  for  Wellington  usual 
weather,  the  Victory  Queen  Carnival  ter- 
minated its  drive  to  attain  its  quota, 
£100,000,  had  a  wonderful  day  to  show- 
off  the  impressive  and  entertaining  pro- 
cession as  the  "grand  opening"  on  Febru- 
ary 28th.  Of  special  interest  was  the 
participation  of  the  Ngati-Poneke  Maori 
Club.  This  group  aboard  a  5 -ton  lorry 
appropriately  bedecked  with  traditional 
regalia  of  ponga,  fern,  etc.,  presented  a 
grand  spectacle  embodying  the  age-old 
traditions  of  courage,  grace,  beauty  and 
honour  that  so  many  of  our  "boys"  are 
giving  their  lives  for  in  a  foreign  land. 
We  are  endeavouring  to  keep  the  faith 
with    our    "boys." 

To  the  Victory  Queen  Carnival  we  say 
"thank  you!"  Thank  you  for  the  moral 
urge  not  to  falter,  but  to  stand  strong 
and  true,  remain  steadfast  and  help  to 
give     England     the     "tools     to     finish     the 

MAHIA    DISTRICT 
Reported   by   Elsie   Loader 

District  officials  report  attendance  at 
all  church  meetings  for  the  past  months 
since  Hui  Tau  very  good.  Officers  of 
organizations  are  diligently  attending  to 
their  duties.  Of  particular  notice  is  the 
Nuhaka  Branch  Sunday  School  which  has 
increased  its  attendance  to  80  per  cent. 
of  total  branch  membership,  which  is  in- 
deed a  very  high  percentage  when  we 
learn  that  there  are  over  -100  people 
in    the   branch. 

The     local     missionaries     report 
part   in  very   fine  meetings  wherever  they 

have  visited.  Taka  Toroaiwhit  i  was  hon- 
ourably released  from  his  positions  in 
the  M.I. A.  and  Sunday  School  of  Nuhaka 
as  a  result  of  consenting  to  go  on  ■ 
'•year"  mi  [on  His  final  field  of  labour 
is  Indefinite  at  present  but  hopes  to  be 
able  to  labour  in  N  gapuh  I  \  e>  enini 
in  in  honour  was  attended  i>y  the 
Nuhaka  Saints,  where  appropriate  pre- 
sentations  were   made  by    the   Ml. A.  and 

Branch         Mr        and     Mr         I'  Nathan    of 

Kopuav  hara1  R         m,     "Bill,"     at 

pre  tent     I  rainii  over< 

■       i      s    new  com  ert       •    t  he    Church 

Appointment 

t<  acher    In     I  h<  ■  hool .     Hem  j 

«  in.  ty,       Mu  Ben  lamin 
r.M.M.I.A 


i  i    k  \ri:ki. 


Hurae,  l'Ml 


taira.      tad      Cuius,  Uor :      Rai 

tar     in      Y    \\    M    1   A    .      Mi!. 
tary ;     Kanvi      I 

in     Relief    Society.       Hen]     I 
honourably  released  from   I 

\-hl.y 

.'.   alana,    Ropiha    I 

bell     and      Reginald     Thompson      vi- 
llained   .!• 

POVERTY    BAY    DISTRICT 
Reported    by    Kangahina    Matenga    and 

Phil    Aspinall 
April   ISth,   1941,   marked  anothei 
in     the    journey     through     life     for     Hinei- 
triwai  after  ■ 
prolonged    ill'  I    which    time 

she  spent  in  hospitals,  covering  approxi- 
mately    t\V(>     | 

Whakahe       Matenga      of      the      District 
Superintendence    of    Sunday    Schools     in 

i-    now    at     the    Waipukurau 
Sanatorium,    alter    spending    a    fev. 
in  the  Cook   Hospital.  Gisborne,  Buffering 
from    pleurisy.     We    wish    him    well    and 

pray  that  he  will  soon  return  to  his 
family  well  and  able  to  brink'  joy  and 
happily  about    him       The    only 

two     Sunday     Schooll     f<>r     the     district      of 

•o      report      ar.       Tol 
Hay    and    Kahui.       What's    wrong    with    the 
others  7 

WAIKATO    DISTRICT 
Reported    by    Doug    Whatu    and 
Dave    Ormsby 
Refreshed     and      very     much     on     the     go 
ar.-    the   affairs    of    the   district    wit! 

dent  Henri  Marshall  superintending.  A 
lull    !'.'•  :.■.'    was    held    at    the 

home   of   Sister    Whatu,    April    20th,    die- 

fOr        till-         p  IO- 
NS oik      of      the      district.       B 
way.     we     sincerely     hope     Hr<>.     Tom     Reti 
ia    -till   strong    in    the    faith      boa 
roml       Kia     l.aha. 

The    I'uketapu    Branch    announ*  • 

appointment    ol 

of    th.      i:  ;  Vipiki 

Wilson,      A 

•  Uora  and  Secretary, 
and    I'irihira    Himiona   Treasurer. 

Norman    Sc-.tt.    brother    to     E.     \      I 
formerly   of   th<  Branch, 

and  now  resident   in   Huntly,  ia  no 
the    for  •  H 

•  on    December 
1940,  was  or. lamed  a   Priest   by   Pn 

i  !  ' 

the    Sunday    Schools    of    Wairoa    and    Tau- 

whare  ai  ted  for  in  the  km>w- 

rving   his   com 

April     16th,  ing     of     Hemi 

from   dropsy.      May    10th   beloved 

ter  of   Brothei  \hikaka   Puru, 

her   parents    at    Cambridge. 

HAURAKI    DISTRICT 

Reported    by    Joe    Kohu    znd 

William     Ormsby 

M.,..'n      complimentary      comment      and 
publicit]  i   by   the  Judes    Pla- 

I    men    commandfd    by 


Chsrlii  platoon    commander 

and     .lames      K.diu     as     Sergeant,     in     their 

adjudged    the 
most     advanced     group    la    the     B 
Plent] 

The      M.I.  A.      act  i\  it  ies      n 

appropriately    terminated,   which    Included 

.  Ing     t..     Ruth     Tawa     and     Sella 

Tawa    m    th.-    v  w  mi  a     and    to    Ronnie 

Tarawa    and    Dialtoa    Tawa    la    th.     ,>    M 

Ml   \     for    besl    attendance.      Th.-    ehoir 

doit  bit     hen     ■   ■:    there. 

and    was    prominent    in  a   farewell   to   troops 

leaving    for   overseas    where    Mr.    Doidgct 

Ml'.,      accorded      the      choir      much      to      be 
proud      of.  David      and      I» 

■  tertained  by  t  he  m  i   | 

Well      before      lea\llu'      for      oversea-      oil      the 

evening    of    June    6th,    1041,    where    the 

hall    was     pa.k.d     t,>    ,-. 

The    Church     Welfare     Plan    r.  c.ntl..     in- 
augurated     in      this       V; 

much    activity    smong    our    people.     Bro. 
Hohepa    Wharekura 

SldenCJ        recently       visited 

this     matter,    and     we    are     pleased     to    an- 
nounce   t hat    much    i  Here 

is    also    an    early    word     for 

that   we  ar.-  hoping   '  '  Ime  in 

September;   plan-   ar.-  already    under   way 
for   the  event,   which  •    coin- 

cide   with    our    Cold    and    Green    Hall. 

Mother's      Day.     at      8.80      a.m..      Eileen 
Ormsby.   daughter   of   brother   and 
i).   c.   Ormsbj    of  Te 

Tuna,     passed     away. 

In  her  leaving 

all   feel    her    lo 

pel        our        vri.  : 

•  1     by     the    joy    Jgj 

that    should    I"  ■ 

Eileen   was   called  or, 

m        th< 

Hauraki     district     in 

t  ransferred 
Poveri 
trict. 
Brant  h 

will     mi 

much   a 

I  tost     faithful   I 

-iv.       and       inspire-         — M        ^       , 

E.leen  Ormsby 

conducted     by     William     Ore 

May    12th.    Internment    was    at    the 
-day    Saint    c-  •■  :<ra. 

HAWKE'S    BAY    DISTRICT 
By    Dan    Williams 
April    2nd,    1 '.»  II .    marked 

the   body   of   Meafou    Pinal   Tupuivi 

•..     it  •     last     rest  in  •     place     in     t  he 

1      net ery   after 

h.  Id     i'  direction    of 

:  nf.  ar.  ..f  t  be  Heretaungs   B 
Presidency,  and  th.-  meeting  at   the  Koro- 

■ 
..f      th.'       Heretauni 
Southon.       M.afou     is     survived     ' 

Wife   and    three    children,    two   of   wh  [< 

l>einu     ordained      b 
Bringhurst,    Septemb.  i 


Chronology  of|Church  History 


December  23 — Joseph  Smith,  Jr.,  was  born  in  Sharon, 
Windsor   County,   Vermont,   U.S.A. 

1820 

Early  in  the  Spring  of  this  year  he  had  his  first  vision. 
Two  glorious  personages  appeared  to  him.  One 
called  him  by  name,  and,  pointing  to  the  other, 
said,   "This  is   My  beloved   Son,  hear   Him." 

1823 

September  21 — The  Angel  Moroni  appeared  to  Joseph 
Smith,  Jr.,  and  made  known  to  him  the  existence 
of  certain  metal  plates  containing  an  ancient  record. 

September  22 — Joseph  Smith,  Jr.,  first  visited  the  spot 
on  the  hill  Cumorah,  where  the  plates  were 
buried,  and  obtained  a  view  of  them. 

1824 

September  22 — Joseph  Smith,  Jr.,  again  visited  the  hill 
Cumorah  and  saw  the  plates.  This  visit  was  re- 
peated on  the  same  day  of  the  year,  for  two  sub- 
sequent   years. 

1827 

January  18 — Joseph   Smith,   Jr.,   married   Emma   Hale. 

September  22 — The  heavenly  messenger,  Moroni,  delivered 
to  Joseph  Smith,  Jr.,  the  plates  of  the  Book  of  Mor- 
mon, and  Urim  and  Thummim  with  which  to  trans- 
late them. 

December — Owing  to  persecution,  Joseph  Smith,  )v..  re- 
moved from  New  York  State  to  Harmony,  Penn- 
sylvania. During  this  and  the  following  month,  he 
translated  some  of  the  characters  of  the  Hook  of 
Mormon. 


H^^S^^Hs^^ 


7 


Are  We  Supporting 

TE 
KARERE 


^^^^"^£^\^^S^£^^^^^^^\^^fS^£^ 


Te  Karere 

Established  in  1907  W 

Wahanga   35  Akuhata,    1941  Nama   8  % 

Matthew    Cowley  Tumuaki    Mihana 

Kelly  Harris  Etita 

Eru   T.    Kupa       Kaiwhakamaori 

Waimate   Anaru  Kaiwhakamaori 

"Ko  tenei  Pepa  i  whakatapua  hex  hapai  ake  i  te  iwi  Maori  ki 
roto  i  nga  ivhakaaro-nui.' 

"Te  Karere"  is  published  monthly  by  the  New  Zealand  Mission  of  the  Church 
of  Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-day  Saints,  and  is  printed  by  TE  KARERE  PRESS,  No.  2 
Scotia  Place,  Upper  Queen  Street,  Auckland,  C.l,  N.Z.  Subscription  Rates:  3/-  per 
six  months;  5/-  per  year;  £1  for  five  years;  £2/10/-  for  life.  (United  States  Cur- 
rency:  $1.00    per   year;    $4.00   for   five   years;   $10.00   for   life.) 

Address    Correspondence,    Box    72,    Auckland,    C.l,    New    Zealand. 

CONTENTS 

I        Editorial —                                                                                           Page 
j        They  Twain      744 

|  Special    Features — 

Welfare  Plan     Covers 

The  1 1 1th  Annual  Conference   746 

United  Order  in  Ohio    748 

Latter-day  Saint  Singing,  by  William  Brosnan   751 

Hi  Mihana  Ta  Tatou,  na  Pte.  Ringa  B.  Herewini  756 

Hui  Pariha  i  Tu  Ki  Manaia — Taranaki,  na  Tenia  P.  Kewene ....   7S7 

Church    Features — 

Sunday  School      752 

( renealogy      7S{) 

Kai-Kauwhau  Mo  Pei  Whairangi    760 

M.I. A.    Sewing    760 

News  from  the  Field   761 


744 


II      K VRERE 


Akuhata,  1"41 


Editorial  .  .  . 


I     I)     RoMNE\ 


THEY     TWAIN 

"'I    want   1"  go   far,   tar  awa\ 

Int"    a    distant    land. 
But  darkest  night  would  be  each  day 

I  fnless   1   held  \  >  >nr  hand. 

I  want  t<>  sci-  a  people  new, 
Some  unknown  race  my  choice, 

But  I  should  wish  my  journey  through 
Unless  I  heard  your  voice. 

I    want   adventuring    I 

Bold  deeds   I'd  like-  to  do. 

But  deep  within  my  heart  I  know 
I'd  rather  stay  with  you." 


Sister  O.  I).  Romney  passed  away  on  June  13th. 
President  Romney,  not  to  be  deprived  of  the  companionship 
which  had  inspired  him  for  more  than  ?7  years,  joined  her 
only  three  days  later.  As  in  life  so  in  death  "they  twain 
shall  be  one"  Marriage  did  not  terminate  the  courtship  of 
these  two,  and  down  through  the  years  their  companionship 
intensified  their  love,  and  every  experience  was  punctuated 
with  romance.  When  the  end  came  the  devotion  of  the 
woman  and  the  constancy  of  the  man  had  so  welded  their 
souls  that   then-  two  hearts  could  not   heat   except   as  one 

President  and  Sister  Romne)  were  devoted,  not  only 
to  each  other,  but  also  to  then-  family,  their  friends  and 
their  Church.  All  other  interests  were  secondary  to  these 
institutions.  President  Romney  applied  himself  to  the 
utmost  to  lie  business  interests,  which  were  many,  hut  never 
did  he  hesitate  to  s{-t  aide  all  his  personal  affairs  when  the 
Church  calico!   for  his  services.     In   V>\\    he  was  called  to 

New  Zealand   Mission.     He  brought 
him  his  wife  and  family  and  all  served  as  missionaries  until 
1914.     It  was  during  the  incumb  'residenl   Romne) 

that  the  M.A.C.  was  built  at   Korongata.     It  was  typical  of 


Akuhata,  1941 


TE  KARERE 


745 


Sister  E.  P.  Romney 


the  Romney  life  and  character  that  in  the  construction  of 
the  buildings  of  this  institution  only  the  best  and  most 
durable  materials  were  used. 

President  and  Sister  Romney  loved  | 
the  New  Zealand  Mission.  In  the 
years  which  have  passed  since  their 
return  home  their  interest  in  the  Mis- 
sion never  diminished.  To  the  New 
Zealanders  who  have  emigrated  to 
America,  they  were  always  considerate 
friends. 

Their  mission  to  New  Zealand  was 
the  beginning,  if  not  the  continuation, 
of  a  series  of  "honeymoons"  which  they  enjoyed  together  at 
regular  intervals  down  through  the  years,  and  which  have 
now  been  carried  over  into  eternity.  They  loved  the  adven- 
ture and  romance  of  travel  and  together  they  saw  the  world. 
To  them  the  business  of  living  was  even  more  important 
than  the  complete  consecration  of  one'  life  to  business. 

In  their  posterity  they  found  that  happiness  which 
passeth  all  understanding.  They  were  proud ;  justifiably 
proud,  of  the  twenty-two  children  and  grandchildren  born 
to  them.  The  children  and  several  of  the  grandchildren 
have  served  as  missionaries  in  various  parts  of  the  world, 
and  never  were  President  and  Sister  Romney  so  proud  as 
when  one  or  more  of  their  children  or  grandchildren  were 
serving  the  Church  in  a  missionary  capacity. 

The  Romney  name  is  indissolubly  connected  with  the 
New  Zealand  Mission.  To  the  members  of  the  Family  who 
survive  their  noble  parents  and  grandparents — 1 'resident  and 
Sister  Orson  D.  Romney — the  New  Zealand  Mission  extends 
"Aroha  Nui"  in  their  bereavement. 


Mai  i hi w    l  n\\  ii  \. 


1  I.    KARERE 


Akuluta.  1(>41 


The   111th  Annual  Conference 


Each    Genera]    Conference   of    the   Church   is   alike   in    many 
ts  and  different  in  some  respects  from  all  others.     Therefore, 
it  we  can  point  out  the  differences  we  shall  largely  have  described 
the  characteristics  of  the  whole  for  those  members  of  the  Church 
who  arc  familiar  with  tin-  general  proceedings.     Some  of  the  dis- 
tinguishing features  of  tin-  111th  Annual  Conference,  held  in  Sal; 
Lake  City,  April  4,  5.  and  6,  1941,  stand 
out  clearly  to  all  who  witnessed  these  im- 
pressive c\  ents. 

First,  the  return  of   President  Grant 
to   active   conference   participation,   with 

hi>   unforgettable   testimony   at    the   open- 

—  ion.    gave    the    whole    conference 

a  deeply  impressive  character.     This  was 

followed    by    his    vigorous    declaration    at 

the  General  Priesthood  meeting  Saturday 
evening,  April  5.  in  the  Tabernacle,  and 
his  closing  statement  of  equal  vigour  and 

conviction  at  the  final  session,  Sunday 
afternoon.   April  6. 

Another  high  point  of  interest  .'it  the 
conference  was  the  appointment  of  Elder 
Harold  B.  Lee,  Managing  Director  of 
the  Church  Welfare  Plan,  to  fill  the  vacancy  in  the  Quorum  of  the 
Twelve  Apostle-  caused  by  the  death  of   Elder  Reed  Smoot. 

Five  other  appointments  of  newly-created  designation  came 
wholly  as  a  surprise  to  the  Church,  when,  on  Sunday  morning,  dur- 
ing the  sustaining  of  the  general  authorities,  and  general  officers  of 
the   Church.    President    Clark   announced: 

In  the  past  history  of  tin-  Church,  especially  in  President  Brig- 
ham  Y"oung's  time,  it  was  found  necessary  for  the  First  Presidency 
or  the  Twelve,  or  both,  to  call  brethren,  frequently  designated  as 
counsellors,  to  help  carry  on  their  assigned  work  in  the  Church. 

The  rapid  growth  of  the  Church  in  recent  times,  the  constantly 

increasing  establishment  of  new  wards  and  -takes,  the  ever-widening 

phical  area  covered  by  wards  and  stakes,  the  steadily  pressing 

ty  for  increasing  our  missions  in  numbers  and  efficiency  that 

the  Gospel   may  he  brought  to  all   men.  the  continual   multiplying  of 

Church   interests  and  activities  calling    for  more   rigid  and    frequent 

ation,  supervision,  and  direction,  .all  have  built  up  an  apostolic 

service  of  the  greatest  magnitude. 

The  First  Presidency  and  Twelve  feel  that  to  meet  adequately 
their  great  responsibilities  and  to  carry  on  efficiently  this  service 
for  the  Lord,  they  should  have  some  help. 


I  beb  J.  Grant 


Akuhata,  1941  TE  KARERE  747 

Accordingly  it  has  been  decided  to  appoint  assistants  to  the 
Twelve,  who  shall  be  High  Priests,  who  shall  be  set  apart  to  act 
under  the  direction  of  the  Twelve  in  the  performance  of  such  work 
as  the  First  Presidency  and  the  Twelve  may  place  upon  them. 

There  will  be  no  fixed  number  of  these  assistants.  Their  num- 
ber will  be  increased  or  otherwise  from  time  to  time  as  the  necessity 
of  carrying  on  the  Lord's  work  seems  to  dictate  to  be  wise. 

It  is  proposed  that  we  sustain  as  assistants  to  the  Twelve,  the 
following  named  High  Priests,  who  will  labour  under  the  supervision 
and  direction  of  the  First  Presidency  and  of  the  Twelve: 

Marion  G.  Romney,  president  of  Bonneville  Stake. 

Thomas  E.  McKay,  former  president  of  Ogden  Stake  and  act- 
ing president  of  the  European  Mission. 

Clifford  E.  Young,  president  of  the  Alpine  Stake. 

Alma  Sonne,  president  of  Cache  Stake. 

Nicholas  G.  Smith,  president  of  North-western  States  Mission. 

— Improvement  Era. 

MISSION  SECRETARY  TO  RETURN  HOME 

Brother  George  Watene,  a  former  member  of 
the  Mission  Sunday  School  Superintendency  and 
Counsellor  and  Secretary  in  the  Hauraki  District 
Presidency  was  called  by  President  Cowley  to 
assist  in  the  Mission  Office  after  the  Elders  left, 
at  end  of  October,  1940.  In  his  work  as  Mission 
Secretary,  Brother  Watene  has  done  much  to  en- 
able the  Mission  to  carry  on  under  exceptional 
circumstances.  His  release  from  this  responsible 
position  becomes  effective  July  31,   1941. 

The  father  of  a  young  family  having  lost  their 
mother,  Sister  Watene,  September  21,  1940, 
Brother  Watene's  presence  and  companionship  is 
sorely  needed  with  his  loved  ones,  especially  dur- 
ing the  winter  months,  the  time  when  the  dairy 
farmer's  ability  to  successfully  surmount  difficul- 
ties of  the  season  and  period  is  known.  George    Watene 

"Te   Karere"   and  the   Mission  generally  sin- 
cerely wish   Brother   Watene   and   his   brave   little  family  the   choicest 
blessings  of  the  Lord. 


BOUND  VOLUME  OF  "  TE  KARERE,"   1940 

A  limited  number  of  bound  volumes  of  the  L940  issue  of     j 
Te  Karere  is  now  available.   Place  your  orders  as  soon  as  pos- 
sible with  Te  Karere,  Box  72,  Auckland.    Price  8 


II     KARERE 


Akuhata,  I  •Ml 


United  Order  in  Ohio 

•  R<  ad  Sections  51,  5  I ) 

1.      The    Situation:       It    will    Ik-    recalled    that    the    Saint-    in    New 

York  State  moved  t<»  Ohio  in  the  spring  of   1881,  in  three  different 
companies.     "On  our  arrival  it  wa>  advised  that  the  ColesvilU    Branch 
remain  together,  ami  go  to  a  neighbouring  town  called  Thou.;. 
a  man  by  the  name  of  Copely  bad  a  considerable  tract  of  land  there. 

which   he  offered  to  let   the   Saint-   occupy.     Consequently   a  i 
d    upon,   and   we  commenced   work   in   good   faith." 

This  was  said  of  the  Colesville  Branch,  hut  it  was  true  also  of  the 
other  two  groups  that  came  from  New    York.      Only,  it  was  not  S3 

dvised  that   they  remain  together.     In  the  counsel  given  to  the 

Colesville  eompany  of  aboul  sixty  persons  there  was  not  a  lit''. 

ment.    on    the    part    of    the    Prophet    as    well    as    of    the    Saints. 

people,  in  addition  t<>  being  among  the  first  convert!   to  the  Church, 

had  rendered  Joseph  Smith  some  help  in  the 
year-  before.  This  was  true  especially  of  the 
Knight  family.  Thompson  was  a  township 
rather  than   a  town. 

"The  Saints  from  the  State  of  New  York 
began  to  come,"  says  the  Prophet  in  his 

tory,"  "and  it  seemed  necessary  to  settle  them. 
Therefore,  at  the  solicitation  of  Bishop  Part- 
ridge, I  inquired,  and  received  the  following" 
revelation.      Then    follows   Bection    51. 

Edward  Partridge,  a-  we  may  r<  call,  had 
just  been  appointed   Presiding  Bishop  of  the 

Church.  Ordinarily  the  settlement  of  the-" 
oncoming  Saints  would  not  have  proved  diffi- 
cult, hut  they  had  been  promised  that,  when 
they  gathered  to  the  new  home,  they  would 
be  given  the  Law  of  the  Church  at  that  place. 
"There    I    will   give    unto   you    my    Law.    and    you    shall    he   endowed    with 

power  from  on  high."     This  was  the  beginning  of  the  gathering  in  this 
dispensation.     11    is  not  difficult   to   imagine  the   feelings 

York  Saints  under  these  circumstances.     The  mysterious  refer* 
course,  was  to  the  Law  of  Consecration,  later  to  be  amplified. 

2.       Plurality  in  Unity:     Two  essential  errors  are  made  l»y  mankind. 

One   is  that    there   is  a  section   called    "Time"   and   another  section   called 

•  :ty."      The  truth   is  that   we  are  living  in   eternity  now.      Another 

error  is  the   division   into   the   "Material"   and    the   "Spiritual."      In   the 

Df  God  "all  things  are  spiritual."     He  gives  no  commandments  to 

us    for    time    merely.      One's    attitude    toward    the    law-    of    God    would 

.    different    from  what   it   now  is  if  one  applied  this  idea  in  daily 

affairs.      "It   wad   frae  mony  a  blunder   free   08,   an'   foolish   notion." 

In  at  least  three  dispensations  the  Lord  has  revealed  this  Law 
of  the  Gospel  to  His  people.  This  is  probably  because  it  is  generally 
the  "material"  that  generates   most    of  man's  selfish   acts   in   our  world. 

This  Law  was  given  to  Enoch,  the  seventh  from  Adam.  It  was  in 
effect  among  his  people  in  the  City  of  Enoch  for  365  years,  at  the  end 
of  which  period  the  Lord  took  the  City,  before  the  Flood.  "They 
were  of  one  heart,  we  are  told,  and  one  mind,  and  dwelt  in  righteous- 
ness; and  there  was  no  poor  among  them."  Thus  we  have  what  has 
been  called  "the  Order  of  Enoch"  or  the  "United  Order." 

The  ancient  Nephites,  too,  had  this  Law  of  Consecration.  It  was 
in   effect   among  them  for  about   one  hundred   and   fifty   years.      "The 


Auckland 
Aaronic       Priesthood 

under  the 
leadership  of  Harold 
\nd  Winiata 
Smiler  provided  an  <\r- 
cellent  concert  enter' 
tainment  in  //•■ 
la  ml  Chapel,  Tuesday, 
July  s.  1941,  which 
Hsiastically  re- 
ceived, in nds  in  aid  of 
Chapel  alterations  to 
benefit    Welfare    flan. 


Akuhata,  1941  TE  KARERE  749 

people  were  converted  unto  the  Lord,  upon  all  the  face  of  the  land, 
both  Nephites  and  Lamanites,  and  there  were  no  contentions  and  dis- 
putations among  them,  and  every  man  did  deal  justly  one  with  another. 
And  they  had  all  things  common  among  them;  therefore  there  were 
not  rich  and  poor,  bond  and  free,  but  they  were  all  made  free,  and 
partakers  of  the  heavenly  gift." 

In  the  Christian  dispensation,  across  the  sea  in  Palestine,  the  Law 
of  Consecration  was  put  into  practice  among  the  Saints.  "They  con- 
tinued steadfastly  in  the  Apostles'  doctrine  and  fellowship.  .  .  .  And 
all  that  believed  were  together,  and  had  all  things  common;  and  they 
sold  their  possessions  and  goods,  and  parted  them  to  all  men,  as  every 
man  had  need." 

It  was  this  Law  of  the  Gospel,  this  Law  of  Consecration,  the  Order 
of  Enoch,  or  United  Order  that  was  revealed  as  a  "privilege"  to  the 
Colesville  Branch  at  Thompson. 

3.  Principles  of  This  Order:  The  Law  of  Consecration  operated 
accordingly  to  some  very  definite  ideas,  which  are  given  in  the  Releva- 
tion  (section  51).      They  are  as  follows: 

(a)  Each  head  of  a  family  in  this  group  of  Saints  at  Thompson 
was  required  to  deed  over  to  the  Presiding  Bishop,  as  the  representative 
of  the  Church  or  community,  all  his  property.  A  deed  made  the  trans- 
fer legal,  so  that  in  case  of  dispute  there  could  not  be  a  law  suit  by 
either  party. 

(b)  After  this  deed  had  been  executed,  the  Bishop  then,  as  the 
agent  of  the  community,  deeded  back  to  the  head  of  the  family  such 
goods  and  implements  of  production  as  were  deemed  necessary  in  order 
to  carry  on  the  process  of  making  a  living.  It  might  be  less  than  he 
had  turned  in  or  it  might  be  more  than  that.  This  deed,  too,  made 
the   transaction   legal. 

(c)  In  case  of  rebellion  against  the  Order  or  of  transgression 
against  the  Church  or  community,  if  it  were  such  as  required  expulsion 
or  withdrawal  from  the  Order,  the  head  of  a  family  might  properly 
take  with  him  out  of  the  group  whatever  had  been  deeded  to  him,  but 
not  anything  else,  even  if  he  had  originally  deeded  to  the  Order  more 
than  that. 

(d)  If,  during  any  particular  year,  any  member  of  the  Order 
earned  more  than  he  needed  to  keep  himself  and  his  dependents,  he 
turned  everything  in  excess  of  this  amount  to  the  agent,  who  kept  it 
in  the  Storehouse,  erected  for  this  purpose.  This  was,  if  necessary, 
dispersed  for  the  benefit  of  the  Order.  The  agent  drew  on  this  for 
his  services,  since  he  devoted  all  his  time  to  the  community. 

(e)  The  underlying  principle  of  the  assignment  to  each  head  of  a 
family  was  the  principle  of  "need."  For  instance,  a  man  with  a  large 
family  would  necessarily  require  more  for  his  living  than  a  man  with 
a  small  family.  And  then,  too,  assignments  would  differ  with  the  busi- 
ness of  each  man  in  the  Order.  A  storekeeper  would  need  more  capital 
than  one  who  taught  school. 

4.  Motivating  Force  in  the  Order:  More  than  one  attempt  has 
been  made  in  the  history  of  the  world  to  establish  an  "ideal  order,  and 
many  books  have  been  written  on  the  subject.  It  is  not  possible  here 
to  even  outline  such  "utopias."  One  thing,  however,  may  be  said  about 
them:  Other  than  those  endeavours  mentioned  above,  they  have  all 
lacked  the  essential  element  of  success — religion. 

When  it  comes  to  what  we  call  material  things,  selfishness  becomes 
very  prominent.  This  selfishness  (perhaps  we  should  say  Belf -inter est), 
is  due  to  the  nature  of  a  social  order  based  on  Individualism.  People 
must  live.  Not  only  must  they  live  now,  hut  they  must  live  when  they 
get  to  the  non-productive  ago   ami   when   they   arc   Incapacitated    for 


• 
from    .  lucklam  I 

vhiie     visiting 

Saints  in  the 
Island.  They  left 
Auckland  on  Thursday 
evening,  loth  July,  by 
tin-  Limited.  A  little 
over  three  months  ago 
saw  them  there  the 
first  time  si  nee  the 
leaving  of  the 


IT.    KARERI  Akuhata,  1941 

work.     This  requires  thai  they  earn  more  than  if  they  did  not  has.-  to 
provide  against  sickness  and  <>l<l  age.     Probably  if  sickness  and  old  age 
were  taken  care  of,  selfishness,  or  self-interest,  would  not  be  so  mani- 
The   United   Order  takes  care  of  these  contingencies. 
Bin  elf- 

interest,  is  not  the  ideal  condition.  What 
element  can  be  introduced  into  human  life  to 

modify    or    eliminate    this    element    of 

The   answer    is,    Love,    and    Love   only — love 

Of  one  another  and  love  of  God.  The  reply 
Of  Jesus  to  the  lawyer  still  hold.-.  "Thou 
Shalt  love  the  I.ord  thy  Cod  with  all  thy  heart, 
and  with  all  thy  soul,  and  with  all  thy  strength, 
and  with  all  thy  mind;  and  thy  neighbour  as 
thyself." 

was  at  the  core  of  the  Restored  Goa- 

Del,   a.-   He   was  of  tin-  Gospel   in  the   Christian 

dispensation.  The  Colesville  Branch  had  al- 
ready made  two  kinds  of  sacrifice  in  order  to 

gather  with  the  Saints  in  Ohio.  First,  they 
had  Bold  their  property  in  their  home  town  at  much  less  than  it  was 
worth.  Newel  Knight  tells  us  this.  And  then,  second,  they  suffered 
the   ill   will   of  their   fellow-townsmen   <>n   account   of  their  having  joined 

the  New  Movement.     "Having  made  the  best   arrangements  we  could 

for  our  journey."   says    Knight,   "we   bade   adieu   to  all   we   held   dear   on 

this  earth."     They,  with  others,  did  this  because  of  religion,  and  they 

red   the    United    Order    from    tlie   same    motive. 

Love,  after  hunger,  is  the  strongest  motive  in  mom     Not  only  is 

this  true   of  the   love   of  a   man    and   a   woman    for   each   other   and   the 
parents    and    children    for    one    another,    hut    it    is    true    also    of 
the    love    of    men    and    women    for    God.       Indeed,    the    love    of    C 

been  known  to  over-ride  all  other  loves.     But  the  Gospel  requin 

we  love  our  neighbour  as  ourself.    (Not  more,  mark,  hut  only  as  much.) 

5.       Breaking    Up   of    the   Order:      While    the    Colesville    Branch    had 

been  told  t<»  establish  the  Order  as  a  "privflei    .  of  its  mem- 

bers,  notably   Leman   Copely  and    Ezra   Thayre,   did   not   regard   it   as 

such.       According  to  section  54,  tin-  "covenant"  was  broken.      Confusion 
followed.      Newel    Knight   called   on   the    Prophet,   who   was   in    Kirtland. 
.hat    should    he   done.       A    revelation    explained   the   situation,    in 
which    Knight   was   told    what   to   do. 

t,  he  was  assured  that   the  revelation  was  from  Je 

rd,    Alpha    and    Omega,    Him    who    was    crucified    for    the    sins    of 
the   world. 

Dnd,    Newel    was    informed    that    he    should    "stand    fast    in    the 

office"    to    which    he    had    been    appointed.       He    was    the    leader    of    the 

Colesville  Branch,  who  looked  to  him  for  guidance  under  the  Presiding 

hp. 

Third,   he  was   instructed   to   take  the   Colesville   Saints  and   "flee  to 

Missouri,  lest  your  enemies  come  upon  you."     A   statement  had  been 

made  to  the  Ohio  Saints,  through  the  Prophet,  that  "Zi«.n"  was  in  Mis- 
souri. "We  now  undei  Newel  Knight,  "that  this  (Ohio) 
Ol  the  land  of  our  inheritance,  hut  that  Missouri  was  the  place 
chosen  for  the  gathering  (d*  the  Church,  and  several  were  called  to 
lead  the  way  to  that   Sti 

ordingly,  soon  after  the  June  Conference  of  the  Church,  the 
Thompson  group,  under  the  leadership  of  Newel  Knight,  went  to 
Jackson  county. 


Akuhata,1941  TE  KARERE  751 

Latter-day  Saint  Singing 

By   William  Brosnan 

"For  the  song  of  the  righteous  is  a  prayer  unto  vie  .  .  ."   (D.  &  C.) 

The  Latter-day  Saints  of  to-day  have  inherited  a  wealth  of  beauti- 
ful and  inspiring  hymns.  Most  of  us  know  that  many  of  these  were 
composed  under  unusual  and  stirring  conditions.  Some  tell  the  tale 
of  outstanding  incidents  in  the  early  history  of  the  Church.  Others 
disclose  the  deep  and  grateful  feelings  of  a  reverent  people  to  the 
God   they   worshipped. 

Do  these  same  deep  sentiments  exist  in  our  song  worship  of  to-day? 

Are  the  attributes  of  truly  sincere  gratitude,  praise  and  reverence 
still  manifest  when  we  unite  in  song? 

When  we  consider  our  singing  in  the  perspective  of  what  it  should 
be,  we  must  confess  that  we  have  vast  room  for  improvement.  Do  you 
think  that  Latter-day  Saints  are  fully  aware  of  the  peculiar  oppor- 
tunities existing,  to  really  unite  as  one  in  heartfelt  worship,  set  to 
music?  Or  is  it  that  a  great  many  merely  regard  the  singing  of 
hymns  as  a  convenient  "fill-in"?  Perhaps  we  are  all  prone  to  become 
too  mechanical.  It's  a  pity,  because  we  lose  half  the  blessings  that 
might  be  ours. 

How  many  of  us  really  look  at  the  words — do  we  see  them  just 
as  words,  or  as  thoughts  and  ideas?  Are  our  Sacramental  songs  sung 
with  a  delicate  refinement  of  softness  and  reverence?  Do  we  sing 
our  joyful  hymns  of  praise  and  worship  with  vigour  and  abandon? 
Or  is  all  our  singing  bellowed  in  exactly  the  same  strain.  Does  cor- 
rect tempo  mean  anything  to  us,  or  do  we  weary  ourselves  and  our 
listeners,  too,  with  the  same  monotonous  drag? 

Choristers  and  organists,  the  responsibility  rests  with  you.  The 
right  shade  of  expression,  the  exact  time,  the  exact  degree  of  volume — 
are  the  ingredients  of  good  music  which  must  be  portioned  out  by  you. 

Before  a  new  hymn  is  brought  before  a  congregation,  it  should 
be  painstakingly  studied  at  home.  Try  a  hymn  different  ways.  Be 
critical — don't  be  afraid  to  experiment  and  you  will  notice  improve- 
ment in  no  time.  Another  thing,  be  tactful  in  conducting  song  exercise. 
NEVER  correct  an  audience  outside  the  allotted  practice  period — many 
visitors  may  be  in  the  audience.  It  is  essential  to  have  not  only  the 
attention  of  the  congregation,  but  also  the  goodwill.  Congregations 
please  try  and  co-operate  with  your  choristor  or  organist.  Nothing- 
is  so  discouraging  as  the  indifference  and  lack  of  support  on  your  part. 
Even  if  you're  not  quite  in  the  mood  to  burst  into  song,  please  try  lor 
the  benefit  of  the  others.  Indifference  is  contagious.   So  is  enthusiasm. 

Another  thing:  Do  you  have  to  keep  repeating  the  same  songs 
every   Sunday? 

Leaders  of  meetings,  you  can  have  too  much  of  a  good  thing. 
This  applies  to  some  of  our  most  popular  hymns.  Many  intelligent 
and  otherwise  willing  singers  are  bored  before  they  start,  mainly 
because  they  have   the   same    old    musical    dish    served    up   so    often. 

Within  the  covers  of  our  song  hooks  are  wonderful  hymns  and 
Stirring  music.  Exploit  what's  Wet  ween  the  covers.  That's  what  they 
are   there  for. 


I  I     K  UlERE  Alrahata,  1541 

SUNDAY  SCHOOL 


Theme — 

"OUR    HOMES   AND   CHAPELS   SH  U  I     BE    BEAU!  11 

"For  Zion  must  increase  in  beauty  ami  in  Holiness;  her  borders 
must  he  enlarged;  her  stakes  must  be  strengthened}  yea  verily  I  say 

you.     /ion    must   arise  ami  put   on    her   beautiful   garments" 

I  I )...  trine  8  Covenants  82  :  14.) 


SACRAMENT  GEM 
I  [elp  us,  (  >  ( Sod,  to  realize 

The  great  atoning  sacrifice : 
The  gift  of  Thy  Belo>  ed  Son, 

The  Prince  of  I  ,ife,  the  I  [oly  (  »nr 

CONCERT  RECITATION 

Romans  12:  21 . 

"Be  ii"i  overcome  of  evil,  but  overcome  evil  with  good." 

KORERO   A   NGAKAU 
Roma   12:  21. 

hinga  1n,;c  i  te  kino,  engari  kia  hinga  te  Kino  i  tou  pai." 

HYMNS  FOR  PRACTICE 

•     Hoa,  Arahina  Wharai 

•     •.   song  that  has  never  been  sung  in  your  branch 

SUNDAY  SCHOOLS  —  LESSON  WORK.  ETC. 

Will    all    SuikI  Superintem  ■••    the    following 

instructions  regarding  REPORTS  and  Classwork. 

ALL  REPORTS  are  the  direct  responsibility  of  the  Superintend- 
ency  of  the  Branch,  Branch  Presidency  and  District  Superintendence; 
by  this  h  Superintendences  mu  i    reports  out 

on  time.  Branch  Presidencies  Ml'ST  ••<■  that  their  Superintendences 
attend  to  these  reports  on  time.  District  Superintendencies  have  the 
same  responsibility  as  the  Branch  Presidencies  for  all  the  Schools 
within  the  district.  When  these  people  fail,  then  the  condemnation 
belongs   to   the    District    Priesthood    Presidencies — it    is   their   duty   to 

iel    plan    is   adhered   to. 

H<  re  are  the  reports  to  hand  for  1941: — First  Quarter:  Auckland, 
para,  Wairoa  Hauraki,  Whangaruru,  Kaikohe,  Peterehema,  Mata- 
anui.  Second  Quarter:  Auckland,  Horotiu,  Te  Hapara, 
Whangara,  Te  Karaka,  Ohalri,  Tautoro,  Opoutama,  Tokomam  Bay, 
Rahui,  Te  Hauke,  Whangaruru,  Whatawhata,  Matakowhai,  Waipawa, 
Wanganui,  Taumarnnui,  Maromaku,  Awarua.  Whangarei,  Waikare, 
Takahiwai,   Wairoa,   Hauraki. 


Akuhata,  1941 


TE  KARERE 


753 


1829 

May  15,  Joseph  Smith, 
Jr.,  and  Oliver  Cowdrey 
lucre  ordained  to  the 
Aaronic  Priesthood  by 
John  the  Baptist.  They 
also   baptized  each  other. 

In  the  latter  part  of  this 
month  or  in  the  following 
month  of  June  they  were 
ordained  to  the  Melchisc- 
dek  Priesthood  by  Peter, 
James  and  John.  In  this 
month  (June)  a  revela- 
tion was  given  to  Joseph 
Smith,  Jr.,  making  knozvn 
the  calling  of  the  Twelve 
Apostles  in  these  last 
days. 


Six-Penny  Funds  Received.  —  1941 
period  ending  May:  Te  Hauke,  Wm.  Ed- 
wards and  family,  Taumarunui,  Maketu, 
Waipawa,  Matakowhai,  Whatawhata,  Toko- 
maru  Bay,  Rahui,  Te  Hapara,  Ohaki,  Auck- 
land, Maromaku,  Kaikou,  Tautoro,  Opahi, 
Whananaki,  Ruatangata,  Tamaki  H.B. 
Under  instructions  from  the  new  Super- 
intendent of  Mission  Sunday  Schools, 
Superintendents  will  please  follow  as 
closely  as  possible  the  following: — Your 
Statistical  Report  Form  begins  with 
numerals  1,  2,  and  so  on  to  22.  Where 
a  School  has  a  Maori  Class,  put  12A,  below 
12,  and  insert  Maori  Class;  don't  change 
any  of  the  other  numbers  or  names.  Where 
you  are  combining  some  of  the  classes  don't 
put  the  number  according  to  age  in  their 
proper  classes,  put  them  all  together  to 
correspond  with  classes  bracketed;  for  in- 
stance, you  have  three  children  Kindergar- 
ten age  and  four  Primary,  if  you  want  to  combine  them,  bracket  Kinder- 
garten and  Primary  and  put  your  total  of  seven  to  correspond  with  the 
name  you  want  for  your  class,  either  Primary  or  Kindergarten,  and  so 
on.  The  suggested  age  grouping  for  the  Mission  Sunday  Schools  will  be : 
Cradle  Roll — Time  of  blessing  until  3.  Kindergarten — 4  and  5.  Prim- 
ary— 6   to    9.      Church   History — 10   to    11.      A   Department — 12   to    15. 

B  Department 16  to  19.    C  Department 20  to  25.    Gospel  Doctrine 

All  others  not  assigned.  Maori  Class — Maori  members  not  already 
assigned.  REMEMBER:  Arrange  your  classes  for  the  best  of  your 
School,  endeavouring  as  much  as  possible  to  follow  the  outlined  lessons, 
and  most  IMPORTANT  in  your  reports  fill  in  the  number  of  your  actual 
classes  and  not  just  to  fill  in  every  item  on  the  report  form. 

At  the  top  of  the  report  forms  under  "Instructions"  you  are  in- 
structed to  fill  in  TWO  forms,  one  for  the  District  and  one  for  your- 
self. The  Instruction  is  out,  and  is  here  again  for  all  to  see — "Fill  out 
reports  in  triplicate  (three  copies),  one  to  be  sent  immediately  to  the 
Secretary  Mission  Sunday  Schools,  Box  72,  Auckland,  C.l,  one  to 
your  District  Superintendency,  and  the  other  for  your  own  and  Branch 
Presidency  use. 

The  Third  Quarterly  Reports  are  due  at  the  end  of  this  month — 
AUGUST.  Let's  have  every  Sunday  School  in  the  Mission  report  be- 
fore 20th  September,  1941.  Here's  a  job  for  the  District  President, 
District  Superintendent,  and  Branch  President  and  Superintendent  to 
see  that  each  of  you  will  be  held  blameless.  You  have  all  been  letting 
someone  else  do  your  work  for  you.  As  far  as  Sunday  School  records 
are  concerned,  each  of  you  has  a  definite  responsibility — don't  SHIRK 
it  as  in  the  past. 


LESSONS 

KINDERGARTEN.  (Arrange  your  material  given  here  to  cover  the 
month.)  Thoughts  for  teachers:  "Unselfishness,  Loving  and 
Giving." 

"The    Birth    of    Christ."    (Luke    1,    2;    Matt.    1.) 

"Visit   of   the   Shepherds."    (Luke   2.) 

"Visit   of    the   Wise    Men."    (Luke    2.) 

"Flight   into   Egypt."     (Matt.   2.) 


754  IK    KARERE  Akuhata,  1941 

PRIMARY.    (Arrange  your  l<  iver  the  whole  month.) 

"Our    First    Parents."      (Gen.    2.        j    MOM!     1.1 

Thought:  "Penalty  follows  the  breaking  of  God'i  law-." 

"Offerings    Unto    the    Lord."     (Gen.    4j    Moses    5.) 

Thought:  "The  Lord   permits  us  to  prove  our  love  for  Bina 
through  sacrifice." 

"Biggest    Rain    Storm    in    the    World."     (Gen.    7.    g, 

Thought:  "The  Lord  fulfils  His  promises  alike  to  the  good  and 
to  the  evil." 

CHURCH   BISTORT— "Book  of  Mormon." 

A  and  B  DEPARTMENTS.    (Arrange  lessons  to  cover  wh.de  month.) 

"The  Man  Who  Walked  With  God."    (Gen.   Bj    II.  h.    1  1  j  .hide    1  |    1.,. 

Problems:   How  do  von  account   for  Enoch's  companionship  with  God 
00   years?     What   do  you   understand   hy   Enoch's  translation   as 

related    in    Heb.     11:5.       Who    will    come    with    the    Lord    according    to 

Enoch's  prophecy? 

"The   Faithful  Teacher."    (Cen.   .",,   C,   7,  8,  9,        Pi     Mem<:   What   WSJ 

the  result  of  Noah's  preaching?    Distinguish  between  expr. 
of  God"  and  "Sons  of  Men"?     What  was  God's  promise  to  Noah?     Con- 
trast  the  curse  upon   Ham  through  Canaan   with  the  blessing  Shem   and 
Japheth?      How  might  Noah  be  referred  to  as  the  Becond  Adam? 

c    DEPARTMENT.     (Arrange  lessons  to   cover  whole   month.) 

"John  the  Baptist  as  a  Witness  at  Bethabara.  '  (John  1  ;  D.  &  C. 
27.)  Problems:  Why  did  the  Jews  who  visited  John  ask  if  he  was  Elias 
(Elijah)? 

"Beginnings  of   the  Manifestations  of   Power  through  Jesus  Christ." 

(John  2.  >  Problems:  Name  the  men  who  accepted  the  man  Jesus  as 
the  promised   Messiah,     How  did  our  Saviour  know  Nfathanael  before 

they  met?  Explain  why  Christ  refer-  to  Himself  as  "Son  of  Man." 
GOSPEL  DOCTRINE.     (Arrange  lessons  to  rover  whole  month.) 

"Wars    of    Ahab    and    Ben-Hadad"     (B.C.    901).  (1     Kinus.    20.) 

"The   Close   of   Ahab's   Reign."    (1     Kings,    21.    22;    2    Chr.m.    1-.) 
"Wars   of   Jehoshaphat."    (2    Kings,    1.    2;   2    Clinm.    19,    20.) 

.MAORI    CLASS— 

RATAPU    TUATAHI 

MO  TE  HARA.      Totahi  at  u  aim  o  nga  poropitl  Xiwhai  i  ana  korero 
mo    te    hunga    kua    mate    i    mea:    "Kia    kokoti    ai    ratou    i    0    ratou    utu    e 
rite   ana    ki    a    ratou    mahi    ahakoa    pai    ahakoa    ranei    kino,    kia    kokoti    ai 
i    te    hari    man    tonu,    i    te    pouri    mau    tonu    ranei.    e    rite    ana    id 
wairua   i   whakarongo   ai   ratou.    ahakoa   wairua   pai.   wairua   kino   ranei." 

A   Hamuera  he   Ramana  i  huri  ki  te  whakapono,   i  tau   hoki  ki  runga 

kia  ia  to  wairua  0  Dga  poropitl  i  whakatupato  i  .ma  hoa  i  te  ahua 
e  whai  ake  nci:  "Tena  mahara,  mahara  e  aku  teina  ko  te  tangata  6 
mate  ana.  6  mate  ko  ia  ake;  ko  te  tangata  e  mahi  he  ana  e  m.-atia  ana 
kia  ia  aim,  ta  to  mea  hoki  e  watea  ana  koutou  o  tukua  ana  kia  koutou 
te  tikanga  mo  te  mahi  mo  koutou  ake;  ina  hoki  kua  hoatu  e  te  Atua 
kia  koutou  he  matauranga  a  Nana  ano  koutou  i  mea  hei  herekore. 

Nga    Patai: 

1.     Pehea  te  korero  a  tetahi  poropiti  o  nga  Xiwhai   mo  nga  mano 
mano   kua  mate? 

_'.     He  aha  te  mea  nui  i  homai  e  te  Atua  ki  te  tangata? 


Akuhata,  1941  TE  KARERE  755 

RATAPU  TUARUA 

MO  RUTIPA  ME  TE  HEREKORETANGA.  I  te  wa  e  wananga 
ana  i  te  rangi  mo  nga  tauira  hanga  i  te  whenua  whakanohonoho  tangata 
hoki  ki  runga  i  whai  a  Rutipa  ki  te  raupatu  i  te  herekoretanga  a  te 
tangata,  ma  roto  atu  i  te  whiwhi  mana  ki  te  aki  i  nga  uri  tangata 
kia  whakarite  i  tana  i  pai  ai,  me  te  oati  atu  ki  te  Matua  ma  taua 
ahua  ka  ahei  ia  ki  te  hoko  mai  i  nga  tangata  katoa,  e  kore  rawa  hoki 
tetahi  e  ngaro.  Ko  tenei  whakaaturanga  kahore  i  paingia,  a  ko  ta 
te  Matua  i  whakaaro  tuatahi  ai — "ma  runga  i  te  tauira  o  te  ata  tono 
atu  me  nga  whakahaere  tika  me  te  manawanui  ki  te  pehi  i  nga  whaka- 
aro taikoha  o  nga  hunga  o  te  whenua  me  te  waiho  atu  ia  ratou  i  runga 
i  te  herekore  ki  te  whiriwhiri  i  ta  ratou  ake" — i  whakaaetia  tenei  e  te 
ropu  e  wananga  ana,  a  ko  Ia  e  huaina  nei  ko  te  Tama  Kotahi  i  Whiri- 
whiriia  ko  Ia  te  tino  mea  hei  raroto  atu  e  tutuki  ai  te  whakaaetanga. 

Nga  Patai: 

1.  Ko  wai  a  Rutipa? 

2.  He  aha  te  mahi  a  te  runanga  i  huihui  ki  te  rangi? 

3.  Na  wai  te  tauira  i  whakaaetia  hei  mahi? 

4.  Ko  wai  i  whiriwhiriia  hei  whakatutuki  i  te  tauira  pai  nei? 

RATAPU  TUATORU 

TA  TE  TANGATA  WHAKAUTU.  Te  whakautu  ki  te  tangata 
mo  ana  ake  mahi  e  rite  pu  ana  ki  tona  herekoretanga,  kei  aia  ano  te 
whakaaro  mo  ona  ake.  Te  tino  tutukitanga  o  nga  mahi  pai  he  hari, 
te  tukunga  iho  o  nga  mea  kino  he  pouritanga;  ko  enei  mea  e  aru  ana 
i  nga  tangata  katoa  i  roto  i  to  ratou  oranga  he  mea  na  nga  ture  kahore 
nei  e  taea  te  whakatuapeka.  Tera  he  tauira  o  te  whakataunga  kua  oti 
noa  atu  te  whakatakoto  e  te  Atua,  e  karangatia  ai  tena  me  tena  tangata 
ki  te  whakautu  mo  ana  mahi,  e  hara  hoki  mo  nga  mahi  anake  engari 
mo  ana  kupu  ano  a  tae  atu  ki  nga  whakaaro  o  tona  ngakau.  "Na,  ko 
Taku  kupu  tenei  kia  koutou,  me  korero  e  nga  tangata,  i  te  ra  whakawa 
te  tikanga  o  nga  kupu  pokanoa  katoa  e  puaki  ia  ratou.  Ko  a  te  Ariki 
ake  kupu  enei:  "Kaua  hoki  e  whakaaro  a  he  kino  i  roto  io  koutou 
ngakau  ki  tona  hoa  ki  tona  hoa,  kaua  ano  e  arohaina  te  oati  teka,  no 
te  mea  e  kinongia  ana  enei  mea  katoa  e  Ahau,  e  ai  ta  Ihowa."  A 
Hoani  Whakakitenga  i  whakawhiwhia  kia  ako  i  roto  kitenga  i  etahi  o 
nga  mea  e  kitea  ana  ka  pa  i  te  ra  whakamutunga,  i  tuhia  e  ia  "I  kite 
ano  ahau  i  te  hunga  mate,  i  te  hunga  ririki,  i  te  hunga  nui,  e  tu  ana 
i  te  aroaro  o  te  Atua,  na  kua  whakatuwheratia  nga  pukapuka  kua 
whakatuwheratia  hoki  tetahi  atu  pukapuka,  ara  o  te  ora.  Kei  nga 
mea  hoki  i  tuhituhia  ki  aua  pukapuka  te  whakawa  mo  te  hunga  mate, 
he  mea  whakarite  tonu  ki  a  ratou  mahi." 

Nga    Patai: 

1.  He  aha  i  whai  koanga  ai  te  tangata? 

2.  He  aha  te  tauira  o  te  whakawhakanga? 

3.  He  aha  nga  pukapuka  i  kitea  nei  e  Hoani? 

RATAPU  TUAWHA 

MO  TE  WHAKAWAKANGA.   Kahore  te  whakaritenga  i  te  whaka- 

wakanga  mo  te  tangata  e  mahia  i  nga  wa  katoa  i  nuiri  tat  a  iho  i  te 
whakataunga,  nga  mahi  pa  hoki  kahore  etahi  i  whakautua  tonu  i  taua 
wa,  a  ko  tenei  ahua  kei  runga  tonu  i  to  to  Atua  niatauran.ua,  mea  hoki 
kihai  i  penei,  ko  te  tirohanga  i  ton  ahua  one  tou  tu  mo  to  whakamatau 
i  te  whakapono  mo  ona  ahua  hoki  to  tangata  i  tukua  mai  noi  ki  tenei 
oranga  ka  tino  whakarapopototia  to  wa  mona  i  to  mea  ko  to  tuturu- 


II      K  MvlK'l  Akuhata.  1941 

o  nga  hiahiatanga  ngahau,  nga  mamaetanga  ranei  ma  nga  mea 

e   Diahia   ana   i   tana   ua   e   whakaatu    tona   v.  hakawhirinakitan^a   Id   tenei 

ki  tera  ranei  o  enei  mea.     Noreira   ko  be  whakaritenga  o  te  arhaka- 
wakanga  i  nekehia,  kia  whai  talma  ai  tena  tangata,  tenei  tangata  ki 

te  whakaatu   i  aia.      Te  tangata  tika  kia  tipu   nui  haere  tumi  atu 

te  tika,  te  tangata  hara  kia  whai  taima  ai  mo  te  ripeneta  me  te  whaka- 
piki  haere  ake  ia  ia.  Be  iti  nga  ara,  i  hohoro  tona  te  whakawhe 
i  taua  wa  ano,  ara  te  horo  o  te  putanga  mai  o  nga  manaakitanga,  t<- 
horo  ranei  o  nga  whin  mo  nga  mahi  he.  Ko  taua  whakawakanga  anake 
taua  wa  mo  te  tangata  tera  atu  ano  ranei  tetahi  atu  kahore  he 
tikanga.  lie  iti  nga  tnponotanga  penei  i  poto  i  nga  whakahaeretanga  ■ 
•  ia. 

Nga    Patai: 

1.  E    whakatutukitia   ana    ranei   te   whakawakanga   mo   te   tangata 

i   taua   wa  aim   i   mahia  ai? 

2.  He  aha  te  he  o  te  horo  o  te  arhakamahinga  i  te  whakawnakanga? 

3.  Ina   whiua   te   tangata    i   taua   wa   ano   0   te    mahi    he,    whiua   am. 

ranei  i  tera  o  te  whakawakanga? 

Hi  Mihana  Ta  Tatou 

Pte.  Ringa  B.  Herewini,  Maori  Batallion 

iwi  tena  koutou.     Tona  aim  koutou  i  raro  i  nga  whakahaere 

te  Kawanatanga  o  Niu  Tireni  nei,  a  i  roto  hoki  i  te  rongo  mura- 

o-te-ahi — o-te-po   e  tangi   mai   nei   i   tera  taha  o  te  ao.     Kia  ora   mai 

ano  koutou.     Tenei   ahau   tetahi   o  a  koutou   mokai   hoia  e  ako  ana  i 

Papakura  te  tuku  atu  nei  i  enei  korero  kia  koutou. 

I  •     3  o  Hepetema  1939  ka  uru  te  Emepaia  o  [ngarangi  ki  roto  i  te 
a,  ka  haere  o  tatou  boa  tamariki  ano  hoki  i  runga  i  to  karanga 

a     to    ture.       Ka     wohe    atu     ratmi,     toe     mai    ko    tatou     hoi     iwi     mo    te 

kaenga   (kainga).     E  tv  iwi,  ia  tatou  e  mahue  nei  kei  to  aha  tatou? 
Koia  nei  to  putake  o  enei  kupu. 

Aku  lioa.  taku  iwi  Maori,  e  aku  teina,  tuakana  i  roto  i  to  RongO- 
pai,  kua  uru  ra  to  iwi  .Maori  ki  into  i  to  hohonutanga  <>  tenei  pakanga 
nui.  Kua  reiv  nga  toto  aroha.  toto  whakarongo,  toto  whakapono,  toto 
maia,  toto  Maori  ki  nga  whenua  ko.  Kei  to  pikau  o  tatou  boa,  tama- 
riki, teina,  tuakana.  tunc,  matua  hoki.  i  tetahi  pikaunga  nui  kia  man 
tonu  to  tatou  herekoretanga  kia  taea  ai  «•  tatou  te  mahi  ki  to  tangata 

ki    te    Atua   hoki    i    ta   tatou    e    pai    ai.       Kei    te    mohio   tatou    ki    nga   take 

nui  e  tarewa  ana  i  runga   i  to  taunga  o  tenei  pakanga.     Kei  to  pehea 

o    tatou    whakaaro    mo   enei   mea.       Kei    to    aha   tatou? 

Ho  mihana  kua  mahue  kia  atOU.  Tuatahi.  he  tono  i  roto  i  te 
pono  me  te  humane  ki  te  Matua  i  te  Rang]  kia  manaakitia  te  tika,  kia 
whiwhi  kaha  te  taua,  kia  aroha  hoki  kia  tatou  kei  muri  nei  e  manako 
ana  kia  hoki  mai  aim  o  tatou  hoia.  no  te  mea  ko  la  anake  te  "kakahu 
ora"  mo  o  tatou  hoia  i  roto  itenei  pakanga  kino.  Tuarua,  mahia  n^a 
mahi  o  te  Rongopai  kia  tino  rite  ia  tatou.  ia  tatou  e  noho  pani  nei 
i    "kaumatua"    me   0   tatou    hoa   arolia   kei   to    pakanga.      Whaka- 

ki   nga  tonutohn   a  nga  Timuakitanga  <>  runga   ake   ia  koutou. 

Tuatoru,  ko  to   hapai   i   nga  ture  0  t<'  whenua  i   raro   i   to  tatou    Kawana- 
Tautokona  nga  kohikohi  me  nga  ahua  mahi  katoa  hei  hapai  i 
ar  effort." 
Ko   tenei   te  mihana  ma  tatou   katoa.      Whakatan^ata  ia  tatou  kia 

kaha. 

Kia  ora  mai  ra  koutou  katoa. 


Akuhata,  1941  TE  KARERE  757 

Hui  Pariha  i  Tu  Ki  Manaia -Taranaki 

14   me    15   o   Hune,    1941 

Na  Tema  P.  Kewene 

Ko  ia  nei  tetahi  hui  tino  pai  rawa  atu.  I  reira  hoki  etahi  tangata 
rangatira,  ara  ko  te  kingi  o  Whanganui  nei  Te  Morehu  Takarangi  me 
tetahi  o  nga  tino  rangatira  o  Taranaki  ara  a  Te  Rangi-i-huuna  Ropi- 
hana.  Na  raua  etahi  korero  nunui  i  whakatakoto  ki  taua  marae,  e  pa 
ana  ki  tetahi  poropititanga  mo  tenei  Hui  Pariha.  Ko  taua  poropiti- 
tanga  na  tetahi  rangatira  ko  Te  Kahu-pukoro  te  ingoa,  ka  rua  tekau 
pea  nga  tau  o  tona  matenga  atu  ka  irimai  nei  i  reira,  na  tenei  Hui 
Pariha  ka  tutuki,  ko  te  whakaturanga  ote  Tumuakitanga  ote  Takiwa 
o  Taranaki.  Ko  Tukino  Hakopa,  te  Tumuaki  Takiwa,  ko  Turaki  Manu 
te  Kaunihera  tuatahi,  ko  Wi  Katene,  te  Kaunihera  tuarua,  ko  Elder 
Stinson  te  Hekeretari  o  taua  Takiwa.  Noreira,  i  puta  i  konei  etahi 
mea  whakamiharo  mo  to  Rongopai  ete  Hunga-tapu,  mehemea  he  whaka- 
manamana  nou  kaore  hoki  e  taea  te  pewhea  itemea  e  tu  ana  koe  i 
runga  ite   kororia   ate   Rungarawa. 

I  timatangia  taua  Hui  ite  po  ote  Rahoroi  ki  nga  mahi  ate  Parai- 
mere  raua  ko  te  Miutara.  E  rua  hoki  nga  wild  o  etahi  kotiro  no  te 
peka  o  Porirua,  ko  Sister  Ami  Katene  me  Sister  Polly  Wineera,  e  ako 
ana  i  nga  taitamariki  ki  etahi  mahi  ngahau,  a  i  roto  i  aua  mahi  ngahau 
ko  etahi  waiata  e  penei  ana  me  te  whakaahua  nei  te  koreromai  i  runga 
ite  ahuatanga  whakaatu  ite  whakarihariha  o  tenei  mea  ote  harihari 
korero  a  ngau-tuaraa.  E  whakaatumai  ana  ite  ahua  ote  harihari 
korero,  ite  tuunga  ote  mata  i  mamae  ai  te  tangata  e  ngaua  atu  raka  ite 
tuara.  Te  kiteatanga  he  tito  noa  iho  taua  korero  raka,  mete  matenga 
ite  whakama  ote  wahine  nana  i  timata  taua  harihari  korero.  Heoi 
ko  tenei  putake  e  haere  ana  i  runga  ite  korero  a  Paora  te  Apotoro 
e  ki  nei  "Ko  te  arero  ia  e  kore  e  taea  te  whakararata."  Noreira  e 
Hui-atawhai  ma  puta  noa  tenei  mihana,  he  rehana  nui -tenei  kia  tatou, 
ko  tetahi  o  ana  ingoa  "he  paihana,"  noreira  e  aku  tuahine,  rangatira 
hoki  kia  tupato,  kia  kaha  hoki  kia  tatou,  na  te  Atua  te  mahi. 

Ite  9  karaka  ite  ata  ote  Ratapu,  ka  tu  ko  te  Hui  Tohungatanga, 
me  te  Hui  Atawhai.  Heoi  kaore  i  riromai  i  ahau  te  ripoata  ote  Hui 
Atawhai,  engari  to  te  Hui  Tohungatanga  i  reira  hoki  ahau,  na  Tumuaki 
Peka  Turaki  Manu  i  whakahaere.  He  mea  whakatuwhera  ki  te  himene 
104  "Koutou  katoa  ra."     Na  mane  Taurau  te  inoi. 

Ko  nga  tangata  i  tu  ki  te  korero. 

1.  Tukino   Hakopa. 

2.  Wi  Katene. 

3.  Pourewa  Mokena. 

4.  Taka   Toroiwhiti. 

5.  Tumuaki  Matiu  Kauri. 

Ehoama  kapai  ano  ra  nga  mahi  a  te  Tumuaki,  ngotongoto  ana  ki 
te  whatu-manawa,  he  oti.  Heoi,  i  whakamutua  ki  te  himene  57  "E 
te   Atua  whakamutua"   na   Wi   Katene  te   inoi. 

Ite  11.0  onga  haora  ka  tu  te  Kura  Hapati,  hemea  whakapuare  ki 
te  himene  72   "Kia  hari  tatou."      Na  Taka  Toroiwhiti  te  inoi. 

Ka  mutu  te  korero  ote  Hakarameta  me  te  Korero-a-ngakau  kat alii 
ka  karangatia  ki  te  korero,  a 

1.  Tema  P.  Kewene. 

2.  Sister  Waitokorau  Tamihana  te  Aweawe. 

3.  Hori  Hooro    (o  Tauranga). 

4.  Tumuaki  Kauri. 


758  TE    KARER]  Akuhata.  1941 

l:«      L2.80    Ka    tu    te    Karakia    Whakapapa.       Na    Tenia    P.    Kewene 
i   whakahaere.       Kaore  a  Te   A.0   \\  'irihana  i  ahei  ki  te  haere  Id  tenei  hui 

aoreira  ka  tukua  e  ia  a  Bro.  Kewene  hei  mea  i  ana  mahi  i  reira.  Heoi 
ko  tenei  karakia  he  mea  whakahaere  ano  I  raro  ite  Tumualritanga 
Whakapapa  o  Bro.  Tuati  Meha,  ko  ia  tonu  i  tetahi  pito  ote  tepu  k<» 
Rawiri  Kaniau  i  tetahi  taha  o  Bro.  Kewene.  Ko  etahi  wahi 
nunui  i  roto  i  tenei  karakia  ko  nga  patapatai  a: — 
1.     \\'i   Katene. 

'2.      Turaki    Manu. 

:;.     Tukino  Hakopa. 
No    nga    whakautu    i    nga    patai    a    enei    tangata.    ka    whakamiharo 
rawa  nga  iwi  o  Taranaki  ki  to  marama  ote  whika  a  to  Atua  ite  ahua- 
tanga   mo  taua  mo  te  tangata  e  ora  tonu  ai  ngai  tana  mo  ake  ake 

Amino. 

[te    -   0    nga   haora   ka   tei   to    Karakia    Kauwhau.   na   Tumuaki    I'oka 
Turaki    Manu    i   whakahaere. 

Nga  tangata  i  karangatia  ki  te  kauwhau  ko: — 

1.  Mane  Taurau — Tumaki  Takiwa  0   Manawatu  mo  Wairarapa. 

2.  Rawiri  Kamau.  Katahi  ia  ka  haere 
ki  tetahi  hui  hui  poroporoaki  na  to  Tairawhiti 
ki  o  ratOU  tamariki  e  haere  ana  ki  to  pakanga 
i  tawahi  Ho  maha  nga  minita  nunui  0  tona 
hahi  o  tena  hahi  ara  0  Qga  hahi  katoa.  I 
reira  hoki  te  Pihopa  o  Aotearoa.  Ka  tu  tetahi 
tangata  no  to  hahi  Mihinare  ko  Hori  Tupaea 
ko  tana  korero  he  penei  me  te  tangi  ki  tetahi 
.Minita    ki    te    Pihopa    tonu    ranei    hei    manaaki 

i  nga  tamariki  o  haere  nei  ki  to  whawhai  ara 
kia  kore  ai  pea  e  whara  ite  pakanga.  Katahi 
ka  taria  to  whakautu  kaore  rawa  i  taea,  katahi 

ka   tu   mai   ko   tetahi   Roia   ka   patai    mehemea 

ranei  toia,  tetahi   minita  e  whai   mana  ana  ia 

ki   to   manaaki.      Ka  tu  atu  ko   Rawiri   Kaniau 

ka  kii  atu  ae  ko  ia.      Ka  titiromai  to  Roia  nei 

kia  Rawij-i    Kaniau,    ka  mutu   ka  titiro   ki    nga 

tantrata    o    mohio    ana    ia   ko    to    Atua    tonu    to 

rite.     Ina  ra   hoki   ko  wai   ano  ki   runga  atu 

ito  pihopa,  ka  monomono  ki   to  kata,   katahi   ka  karan.u'amai   to   Roia  nei 

kia  Rawiri  Kaniau,  i  ahumai  i  whoa  tou  mana.     Katahi  ka  hoatu  tonu 

atu    e    Rawiri    Kamau    to    whakahokomai    o    tana    tohungatanga    mai    ia 

Te  Karaiti,  kia  Pita  ma.  ratou  kia  Bohepa  Mete  raua  ko  Oriwa  Kautere 

ka  heke  iho  ai  kia  ia  kia  Rawiri  Kamau.      To  Hun.u'a-tapu.  ho  wahi  kotalii 

aoa  tenei  korero  i  roto  i  nga  korero  papai  o  tenei  hui. 

i'uati    Moha.       Ka    papai    hoki    nga    kororo    a    tenei    ranirat ira. 

1.    Te  Morehu  Takarangi  o  Putiki.  Wanganui,  ko  ia  tetahi  o  nga 
rangatira  <»  tenei  motu,  e  rite  ana  tenei  tangata  he  kingi  tonu  ia.  Bngari 
he  tangata  tino  whakapapaku  ia  ia  kei  runga  i  tenei  tangata  te  nohoa- 
•    kupu  a  to  Tumuaki   "Kia   Ngawari."     Kei   te   mohio  tatou  te 
tapu    ki    tone    i    korero.    noroira    me    manaaki    tenei    tangata   tino 
to  tatou    Matua  ito  rangi. 
5.   Te  Rangi-i-huna  Ropihana  ko  ia  nei  tetahi  o  nga  tangata  ranga- 
tira o  Taranaki  ake.      Nana  etahi  tino   niihi  nunui   mo  nga  iwi  i  eke  ki 
o  Taranaki.  ka  mutu  koi  a  ia  to  kete  kororo  a  <»  tatou  tupuna. 
I    konei    ka   tu    a   Tumuaki   Kauri   ka   panuimai   tetahi   reta  kia 
ia  he  mea  haina  na  to  Archbishop  ote  Hahi  Ingarrangi,  nato  Pihopa  ote 
Katorika,    natc    Kaiwhakahaore    o    etahi    atu    hahi.      Ko   te    reta    nei   he 
mea  mai  kia  panuitia  kei  roto  tata  i  nga  ra  nei  ka  tu  tetahi  Hui  ma  nga 
kai-arahi  o  nga  hahi  katoa  ote  motu  nei,  kia  whakatikatikangia  te  ahua- 


Poratene  Edwards 
ami  Tuihaia  Edwards 
of  Korongata  arc  the 
frond  parents  of  an- 
Other  dauuhtcr,  honi 
to  them  June  II,  VII. 

Mary  Edwards,  the 
"  beauty  competition 
winner"  acknowied  m 
March  issue  of  "Te 
Karcrc."      spent      two 

luckland 

with    the    "three    Har- 

>>s'."  I  wonder  if  she 
enjoyed  herself'  I 
wonder  I 


Akuhata,  1941  TE  KARERE  759 

tanga  me  te  karakia  ki  te  Atua.  Ko  te  take,  katahi  ano  ratou  ka  kite 
e  he  ana  ta  ratou  whakakaupapatanga.  Noreira,  itemea  e  he  ana, 
heoi  ano  tona  rongoa  me  tahuri  ratou  nga  kai-arahi  o  aua  hahi  ki  te 
whakatikatika. 

Ite  7  karaka  ko  te  huihui  whakamutunga  o  taua  Hui  Pariha.  Ko 
te  wahi  tuatahi  ite  Hui  Atawhai,  na  Sister  Waitokorau  i  whakahaere. 
Ka  mutu  te  himene  tuatahi  me  te  inoi  whakapuare,  ka  tu  ko  te  Tumuaki 
tonu  ote  Hui  Atawhai  o  Manaia  ki  te  korero  ara  ko  Sister  Kaaro  Turaki 
Manu.  I  muri  i  tena  he  waiata  na  Sister  Polly  Wineera.  I  muri  i 
tena  he  waiata  rongopai  na  Pourewa  Mokena,  Sister  Kaaro  Turaki 
Manu,  me  Sister  Damon.  Tino  pai  ta  ratou  waiata,  ki  toku  mahara 
ka  paahi  ratou  i  etahi  whakataetae  nunui.  I  muri  i  tena  ka  tu  ko 
Sister  Tarati  Matewai.  He  wahine  mohio  tenei  ki  te  korero.  I  muri 
i  tena  ka  tu  ko  Sister  Kauri  ka  korero  ia  i  tetahi  mahi  mo  te  heihei  e 
tino  roa  ai  ratou  e  kite  ana  ite  maramatanga  ko  te  take  kia  maha  ai 
nga  haora  ite  rangi  kotahi  e  tahuri  ana  ki  te  ketuketu  ko  te  take  kia 
noho  ai  ki  te  rua  me  te  toru  whanautanga  heeki  ite  rangi  kotahi  ara 
kia  eke  ki  te  tino  whaipainga  o  tenei  mahi  ote  atawhai  tikaokao,  me 
peratahi  hoki  tatou  kia  maha  nga  mahi  papai  e  oti  ia  tatou  ite  rangi 
kotahi.     Ki   ahau   nei  he   matauranga  tino   nui  tenei. 

Ite  8  karaka  ka  riro  ite  Tohungatanga  te  karakia  ka  karangatia 
hoki  e  Tumuaki  Kauri  a  Tuati  Meha  ki  te  uiui  i  nga  ahuatanga  me 
nga  mahi  o  roto  ite  Tohungatanga,  heoi  na  runga  i  nga  patapatai  me 
nga  whakautuutu  ka  tino  pai  rawa  atu  tena  hui.  Noreira,  kua  kite 
ahau  ko  ia  tenei  tetahi  mea  tino  pai  mo  roto  i  nga  Hui  Pariha  katoa. 
Ma  tena  ahua  e  whai  mahi  ai  te  katoa,  e  kite  ai  hoki  te  rawaho  ite 
tino   ote   ataahuatanga  o   to  taonga   ete   Hunga-tapu. 

No  tenei  wahi  i  runga  ano  i  nga  korero  ate  Tumuaki  katahi  ka 
whakapangia  nga  tangata  ote  Tumuakitanga  Takiwa  o  Taranaki  i 
whakaaturia  ake  ite  timatanga  ote  ripoata  nei. 

Etehi  kupu  tino  nunui  i  rongo  ahau  i  roto  ite  whakapanga  o 
Tumuaki  Takiwa  Tukino  Hakopa  i  roto  i  nga  kupu  manaaki  ate  Tumu- 
aki Mihana  i  penei,  "e  Brother  Tukino  Hakopa,  kei  mea  koe  ko  koe 
anake  te  Tumuakitanga  Takiwa  o  Taranaki  engari  ko  koutou  tokotoru 
ara  ko  koe  me  o  Kaunihera  e  rua  noreira  i  roto  i  nga  mea  katoa  me 
ata  whakariterite  e  koutou  tokotoru."  Ehoa  ma,  he  akoranga  tino 
nui  kei  roto  i  enei  korero.  Ko  te  take  ka  pa  tenei  akoranga  ki  nga 
tumuakitanga  katoa,  ahakoa  he  tumuakitanga  takiwa,  he  tumuakitanga 
peka,  he  tumuakitanga  hui  atawhai,  he  tumuakitanga  miutara,  etahi 
atu  tumuakitanga  ranej,  ka  tino  u  nga  kupu  nei. 


GENEALOGY 

By  Tcao  Wirihana 
THE    WAY   TO    PERFECTION 
Cottage    Meetings    for    August. 

Aug.      7 — Lesson   1,   "The  Way  to  Perfection." 

21 — Lesson   3,   'The  Inheritance  of  Greatest  Worth." 
14 — Lesson   2,   "Between   Two    Curtains." 
28 — Lesson   4,   "Organized  Intelligences." 
Kei  te  tino  puhoi  te  Mahi  Whakapapa,   ahakoa   ta,   kei   te 
nui    nga    whakapawera    i    enei    ra.      Kia    noho    mahara    ki    to 
hunga  mate  kei  to  talari    mai    ratou   i  tua  o  to   Arai   kia   malua 
o  ratou  ingoa  i  te  Temepara. 

Whakatauki:  "Muri  malii  mauri-ora,  mauri  mangoro  niauri 
mate." 


Tohungotanga     mm 

kui  tu  ki  Kail 
27  <>  I /(•/>«'/.•;>/</.  Haiti 
mat  kouion  nga  kau 
kauwhau  ki  te  ripoata. 
Haere  mat  hoki  koutou 
nuiu    (/)/(/    ;    ti 

Tohungotanga. 


i  l.    KARERE  Akuhata,  1941 

KAI-KAUWHAU   Mo   I'KI   WHAIRANG1 

Wiki   Tuarua    me   te   wiki   Tuarima   o   Akuhata. — Hohepa    Heperi    nic 

Hemi    Witehira   Id    nfatauri    Bay   me   Takahue.     Hare   Nehua   me   Pita 

Nehua  Id  Kaikohe.      Boorj  Ruwhiu  me  Hare  Herewini  Id  Waimamaku. 

Nopera  Otene  me  Ngakete  Otene  Id  Waihou. 

Mahuika  Otene  me  Jamea  Joyce  Id  Panguru. 

Haua    Witehira    me   Tetauahika    Witehira    Id 

Utakura. 

Wiki   Tuatoru   o   Akuhata   me   te   wiki    tua- 
rua   o     Hepetema. —  Hirini     Heremaia     I 

Alui  Wihongi  ki  Ngawha.  Pita  Heperi  me 
Himi  Hapeta  ki  Rftangamuka.  Haua  Witehira 
me  Tetauahika  Witehira  ki  Utakura.  Kawa 
Erueti  me  .Mick  Heremaia  ki  Ifataraua.  Hi- 
rini Wikaira  me  Wiremu  Ngakuru  ki  Waima. 

Wiki    tuawha    o    Akuhata    me    te    wiki    tuatoru    o    Hepetema.  —  1 1  •  •  <  >  r i 

Ruwhiu  nu'   Hare   Herewini   ki   Whirinaki.     Mahuika  Otene   me  Jamei 

Joyce  ki   Panguru.      Kawa   Krueti   me   .Mick   Heremaia  ki   (Haua.      Wite- 
hira  Wihongi   me   Tom    Heremaia   ki    Ifataraua. 

Kia  kaha  koutou   ki   te  whakarite  i   enei   karangatanga.       Haere   mai 
ki    to    tatou    Tohungata    ki    te    ripoata    ia    koutou    mihana. 

M.I.A.    SEWING 

(Arranged  by  Una  Thompson) 

Knitting;,  Knitting,  Knitting  with  a  prayer  In  every  row.  Knitting 

and  Balaclavas,  singing  as  w< 
Women  of  the  M.I.A.,  what   are  you  doing  for  the  BOYS 

What  could  be  better  than  knitting  for  a  Church  project  after 

which    the    articles   could    be    given    for    patriotic    pun 

Por  L942  Hui  Tau  we  want  loo  per  cent,  entries  in  the  following: 

cks   in   khaki   or   navy. 
GLEANERS.— Mittens  and   Balaclavas  in  khaki  and  navy. 

JUNIORS.— Scarves  in  khaki  or  navy. 


r 


In  accord  with  a  request  from  President  Matthew  Cowley. 
President  Rufus  K.  Hardy,  of  the  First  Council  of  Seventy 

former    Now    Zealand    Mis-ion    President,    sent    by    "air    mail"    a 
Copy  of  the  programme  conducted  at  the   funeral   for  President 

0.  D.  Romney. 

Quoting  President  Hardy — 

elude  by  Marion  Lyon.  Singing  was  furnished 
by  the  White  Chapel  Quartette,  who  furnished  three  numbers. 
Invocation  was  offered  by  Elder  T.  S.  Tingey,  a  returned  mis- 
sionary from  New  Zealand.  The  first  speaker  was  Mr.  R.  c. 
Wilson.  S'  nior  Vice-Presidenl  of  the  First  National  Bank,  fol- 
lowed by  II.  J.  Halton,  George  J.  Cannon,  and  Rufus  K.  Hardy. 
The  benediction  was  pronounced  by  Bishop  Joseph  L.  Wirthlin 
of  tlie  Presiding  Bishopric.  The  services  were  conducted  by 
Brother  Orville  Fox  of  the  Bishopric  of  the  South  20th  Ward, 
and  the  grave  in  the  Salt  Lake  City  Cemetery  was  dedicated 
by   John    Russell. 

In  attendance  at  this  funeral  were  such  old-timers  as  Mere 
Whaanga,  George  Romney,  Dr.  Heber,  J.  Sears,  Heber  K. 
Aldous,  Louis  J.  Hoagland  and  Benjamin  Hollingsworth." 


Akuhata,  1941 


TE  KARERE 


761 


NEWS  FROM  THE  FIELD 


SOUTH    ISLAND 

Reported    by    Sisters    Beatrice    Dalziel   and 

Ruby     Thomspon 

Although  still  missing  the  Zion  Elders, 
the  Dunedin  Branch  is  endeavouring  to 
do  their  best.  Meetings  are  well  sus- 
tained and  we  feel  that  we  are  going 
forward. 

Owing  to  the  black-out  and  overtime 
war  work,  our  M.I. A.  has  not  been  able 
to  hold  regular  meetings  as  heretofor. 
Every  third  Sunday,  however,  under  the 
control  of  our  president,  Sister  Eve  Pur- 
vis, the  M.I. A.  give  addresses  at  the 
evening  meeting,  which  are  appreciated 
by    all   who    attend. 

Sunday,  June  8,  was  a  special  day, 
when  our  youngest  Sunday  School  mem- 
ber, little  Myra  Coburn,  bravely  entered 
the  waters  of  baptism  and  became  a  real 
Latter-day    Saint. 

Sister  Jane  Eleanor,  widow  of  Brother 
Chris  Harvey  of  Athol,  Central  Otago, 
passed  through  the  same  ordinance. 
Through  her  late  husband,  we  feel  that 
we  have  known  Sister  Harvey  for  a  long 
time.  It  was  a  joy  to  welcome  both 
these  new  members. 

We  send  our  heartiest  congratulations 
to  Brother  and  Sister  Perriton  of  Christ- 
church    on    the    birth    of    their    little    son. 

To  Brother  Luxford  Peeti  Walker  we 
offer  our  heartiest  welcome  to  Dunedin 
and  look  forward  to  a  lot  of  fine  work 
from  him.  Brother  Don  Ross,  who  has 
long  been  connected  with  our  Church  and 
Sunday  School  work,  has,  owing  to  in- 
different health,  had  to  resign  as  Church 
Secretary,  and  Sister  Eve  Purvis  has 
been    appointed    in    his    stead. 

We  are  sorry  to  report  that  Brother 
Fred  (Snow)  Wright  is  reported  missing 
in  Greece,  our  sympathy  goes  out  to  his 
parents,  sister  and  brother.  We  also  wish 
to  extend  our  sympathy  to  all  readers 
and  Church  members  who  have  lost  loved 
ones    in    the    present    conflict. 

Away  with  the  first  echelon  are  three 
of  our  male  members,  which  leaves  with 
us  brother  Enoka  McDonald,  who  is  at 
present  a  student  at  "Technical  College." 
His  sporting  activities  are  but  carrying 
on  the  traditions  of  his  family.  He  cap- 
tains the  first  rowing  team  of  the  Col- 
lege, is  a  member  of  the  Firsl  XV.  foot- 
ball team  and  captains  the  Second  XI. 
cricket   team. 

The  picture  "Brigham  Young"  is  being 
released  here  shortly,  and  we  hope  to 
have    very    favourable    comment's    upon    it. 

WAIRAU     DISTRICT 
Reported   by  Sister  Huitau   Elkington 

President    Tun    Ruruku    has    been    visit- 
ing    in      Marlborough     for     three     wee! 
among    the    Saints.      He    reports    favour- 
abl       on     tiic     condil  ion     of     ( he     pe  >ple. 
Olive   Elkington   1 1  ippolil  e,  who  ii    in 
al  Helen's,     Wellington,    spent     two 

w<cks     on     vacation     with     her     parents. 
Aim.-.     Kawharu     of    the     Madaen     M.l  A. 

Presidency    was    instrumental    iii    the    for- 


mation of  the  first  Maori  hockey  team 
(women)  in  Nelson,  with  Mrs  Hiwi 
Davis  as  captain.  This  team  is  really 
making  a  fine  name  for  itself. 

Bob  Hippolite  and  Tony  Walker  have 
been  posted  as  missing  from  operations 
in  Greece.  Sympathy  and  condolences 
are  extended  to  loved  ones.  Mr.  A.  G. 
Gosling  of  Pleasant  Point,  Timaru,  has 
returned  from  Fiji  and  spent  some  time 
in  Madsen.  Brother  and  Sister  James 
Elkington  are  pleased  to  announce  the 
engagement  of  their  daughter,  Hariata 
Rangikauia,  to  Albert  George  Gosling  of 
Pleasant   Point. 

MANAWATU    DISTRICT 
Reported    by    Polly    WiNeera 

Last  month  an  evening  was  held  to 
farewell  two  more  of  the  "lads,"  Tiori 
Daymond  and  Ngaro  Solomon,  who  al- 
ready has  a  brother  serving  with  the 
Middle  East  Forces.  Suitable  presenta- 
tions were  made.  A  great  deal  of  excite- 
ment was  caused  when  the  news  was 
told  of  the  marriage  of  Tiori  Daymond  to 
Edna  Te  Hiko  of  Porirua,  which  took 
place   last   month. 

A  letter  has  been  received  by  the 
parents  of  Sergt.  George  Katene,  Jnr., 
in  which  he  writes  of  the  "boys  in  Greece 
and  Crete,"  and  tells  in  a  most  interest- 
ing manner  of  their  many  experiences 
in  this  Great  War.  George,  who  was 
reported  wounded  and  in  hospital,  is  now 
fit   and    well    and   out   of   hospital. 

On  the  week-end  of  5th  and  6th  July 
Sister  Paeroa  Wi  Neera  visited  the  Wai- 
rarapa  District  to  attend  a  Hui  Atawhai 
Board    Meeting. 

HAWKE'S   BAY  DISTRICT 
Reported    by   John    T.    Meha 

With  his  excellent  sense  of  humour, 
President  Cowley  made  himself  very 
popular  at  the  "Twenty-first"  birthday 
party  held  at  the  Oddfellows'  Hall.  Dan- 
nevirke,  in  honour  of  Manahi  Nitania 
Paewai,  only  son  of  Brother  Nireaha  and 
Apikara  Paewai.  Among  the  assembled 
guests  were  Mr.  E.  N.  Hogben,  princi- 
pal of  the  Dannevirke  High  School,  and 
his  entire  staff,  and  Mr.  McDonald,  mem- 
ber of  the  Education  Board.  Mr.  Hog 
ben,  in  reviewing  Nitama's  career  a1 
school,  paid  tribute  to  his  teachings  and 
training    received    as   a    Patter-day    Saint, 

commenting  very  favourably  on  the  hon- 
our and  distinction  attained  hy  N  i  I  :i  ma 
upon  being  the  fir8l  Maori  Head  Prefect 
Of    the    School. 

Tin  Tamaki  Branch  Hui  Atawhai  are 
working  zealous lj  at  the  Church  Welfare 
Plan.  As  an  addition  to  the  assembly 
hall  thej  have  erected  a  storehouse  which 
thej    hope    to    fill    before    very    long. 

Piftec  n      member ;      of      the      Tamaki 

\   \v  mi. a.    who    have   i ii   Btudyina    foi 

t  he    annua]    home    nui    ii  ■■    exarainat  Ion 

uccessBful  in  at  taining  i  00  per  cent 

pa     ins   marks,  ent  ii  lino   I  hem  to  a   Home 


TE    KARERE  Akul.ata.  1941 

.  .■   a    v •  ■« »«i   old    hak.i 

form  of  1  benefit 
nprecendented 

:    Kirl>.    which    was    highly  com-       Goodwill,     Allen,      D                         ler     and 

ipoa   by   local  eothoi  itting  on.     v. 

feel  ur- 

OVERSEAS  end    hakas.       If 

Reported    by    Sybil    Duckworth  >""    u:i"'     '"    ,m,i    :i    ll"    "f    N< m    Zealand 

and    brother,     I 

t  hat    he    baa    errii  ''<i    In       ■   fa  . 
end    li    plenty    glad    to   iee    land  Iwil]     on 

Fter  baking  end  sweltering  In  the       your    marria  t,    K.-.i- 

i    haven'1    wasted       dington,     Wallace,     Radd     and     i 

much.     Hep.    and    trutl     y..u    ere  Mir.      you     bfl 

enjoying   yoor   new    lift-.  wish   of  your  friend-   "down   and 

two     globe     trottei  Our    si     >ping     report*  r 

Jackman  and  Jeanne  Porteous,   have  non  Wrid<                          tatlon  and   Is  alao  do* 

commenced  their  studies  at   the  Brigham  ing                             ebool     ••«    fen     gallons, 

Ybnng    Uniyersity,    and    from    all    reports  Elder    Wride.      w*e    could    do    with    them, 

are  doing  fine.     How's  the  Creative  Dane-  Elders    Aldous    and    Hendersoen    we    hope 

injf,   Jeanne.      Thej    report    Zion    Is    •  Naval    Air    Corj 

thing    th<                              to    be    and    they  Utah     National     Guard     Unit     has     also 

really   appreciate  all   that    has    been   done  shanghaid     Elders     Curtis     and 

for    them    by    the    Saints.        Their    good  Congratulations,    too,    Elder    Crandall    an 

ire     sent     to     all     their     friends     in         winnil  hip     to     Harvard     I'ni- 

New     Zealand     ami     they     often     Vet     home-  v.  r 

LATE  NEWS— Sunday  School 

Reports:     First    Quarter       Kiri    Kiri-Omahu.    Nuhaka.    Gladstone,    Ana.    I'uk. 
Hahoenui,      Whatawhata,     Te     Awamutu,      Matakowbai.      Second     Quarter — Kiri      Kiri- 
Omahu.     Kohunui.    Te    Awamutu.     Puke    Tapu.    Nuhaka.       Six    Penny     Fund       Gladstone, 
Kohnnui,    Kiri     Kiri-Omahu. 

JUST   HAPPENED 

Monday,    July    21,    1941 

"Unto  us  this  day,  a  son  is  bom  ..."  is  pleasantly  applicable 
to  the  Ifeha  family  throughout  the  world. 

Before  noon,  Sister  Mabel  Ifeha  gave  birth  to  a  seven-pound  baby 
boy — the  "son  and  heir" — thus  bringing  to  fruition  the  hope  of  "L.A.C." 
II.  M.  Meha  of  the  R.N.Z.A.F..  training  in  Canada. 

"Te    Karere"   convoys   congratulations   and   extends   the   hand   of 

welcome  and  fellowship  to  the  new  arrival.  May  he  too  be  accorded 
m  due  time  the  tribute  we  now  extend  to  his  father,  Hepa — "Well  and 
faithfully    done    ..."    my    friend. 

I  ** 

:    a   prolonged   illness.  Sister  Tangihaere   Barclay,  a 

indefatiguable    Church    worker   of   the   Tamaki    Branch    H.B., 

d  away  on  the  morning  of  May  Huh.  1941,  at  the  Danne- 

♦         virke    Public    Hospital.      She    is   BUrvived    by   her   husband.    Bro. 
Frank  Barclay,  one  son  and  seven  daughters.     The  last   rites 

were  under  the  supervision  of  Brother  YViremu  Mihaere  of  the  { 
i         Tamaki   Branch  Presidency.    Her  burial  took  place  at  the  Taho-         ♦ 

raiti  Cemetery. 

Aroha  and  sympathy  are  extended  to  the  family  she  loved       I 
and    reared.      Her   one   desire   was  to   serve   God.      Her   hopes 
for   all    associated    with    her    were    to    Serve    Him    also. 
I  I 

ATTENTION,  ALL  CONTRIBUTORS!  Your  co-operation  is 
needed.  Kindly  send  in  your  material  for  publication  before  the  5th 
of  each  month.  By  complying  with  this,  you  will  greatly  assist  the 
Editor  in  his  endeavours  to  give  you  "Te  Karere"  on  time,  and  with 
something    worthwhile. 


m  § 


€  KAR€R€ 


Wahanga   35  Hepetema,    1941  Nama   9 


Septembw  22  ...arks  one  hundred  and  fourteenth  year  since 
Book  of  Mormon  records  given  to  the  custody  of  the  world! 


Our  President 


More  than  three  years  ago,  Presi- 
dent Matthew  Cowlej  with  his  wife 
and  daughter  arrived  in  this  land  to 
guide  and  direct  this  Mission  of  the 
Church  of  Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-day 
Saints.  As  President  of  the  Mission, 
every  thought  and  action  has  been 
serve  to  the  best  of  his  ability  his 
Church  and  God.  It  is  needless  to  tell 
oi  hi>  work  among  the  Saints  in  the  land.  Having  been 
here  during  the  Great  War  of  1914-18  as  a  missionary,  his 
grasp  of  the  problems  and  conditions  now  extant,  and  his 
ability  and  strength  of  spirit  and  health  enabling  the  proper 
discharge  of  his  obligations  arc  better  appreciated. 

During  this  present  term,  more  than  sixty  missionaries 
from  Zion  have  laboured  under  him  at  one  time.  Nearly 
twelve  months  ago  Zion  Elders  were  recalled.  'The  preach- 
ing of  the  Gospel  in  this  land  was  suddenly  disrupted.  The 
work  of  the  Church  devolved  upon  local  administration.  So 
Far  the  Saints  have  rallied  to  the  standards;  however,  their 
work  has  in  the  main  been  with  already  organized  Branches 
and  Districts.  The  task  of  proselyting  has  not  been  theirs. 
To  our  Mission  President,  his  wife,  Sister  Elva  Cowley, 
and  their  daughter  Jewel,  that  task  has  been  borne.  <  Hnerous 
as  the  administrative  obligations  have  been,  "our  Presi- 
dents)" have  brought  the  Gospel's  message  to  as  many,  it" 
not  more  hearts  than  during  the  last  year  with  the  Elders. 
This  is  not  in  any  way  belittling  tin-  momentous  and  eternal 
accomplishments  attributed  to  our  "Kaninatnai  S  )".  It  points 
OUt  the  magnitude  and  thoroughness  of  the  work  our  modern 
pioneers  an-  doing.  Their  strength-  spiritually,  mentally  and 
physicall)  is  being  expended  exclusivel)  to  the  task  of  ser- 
vice. The  wonderful  thing  about  it  all  is  tin-  fact  that  they 
arc-  being  invited  to  speak  to  large  concourses  of  people  upon 
the  Church  of  Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-day  Saints. 

President  Cowley  spoke  for  more  than  two  hours  on  one 
occasion  to  a  group,  covering  the  beginning  of  the  Church 
in  this  day.  It  thrilled  me  personally  to  hear  him  tell  just 
what  he  told  that  audience.  It  made  me  feel  I  was  being 
converted  to  the  truth  of  the  Gospel's  message  and  purpose 
( Continued  Inside  Back  I 


ic  ti     mm    mm    m  n    mm    mm    m  n    jra   jftflt   jr  #l   Jtt  m.  so.  m.  so. 


\^v. 


I  Te  Karere   I 


Wahanga    35 


Established  in  1907 
Hepetema,    1941 


Nama    9 


^^^^i^fi-^^-l^^-^^^f^^^^i^^^i 


Matthew    Cowley 
Kelly  Harris 
Eru   T.    Kupa 
Waimate   Anaru 


Tumuaki    Mihana 
Etita 

Kaiwhakamaori 
Kaiwhakamaori 


"Ko  tenei  Pepa  i  whakatapua  hei  hapai  ake  i  te  iwi  Maori  hi 
roto  i  nga  whakaaro-nui.' 

"Te  Karere"  is  published  monthly  by  the  New  Zealand  Mission  of  the  Church 
of  Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-day  Saints,  and  is  printed  by  TE  KARERE  PRESS,  No.  2 
Scotia  Place,  Upper  Queen  Street,  Auckland,  C.l,  N.Z.  Subscription  Rates:  3/-  per 
six  months;  5/-  per  year;  £1  for  five  years;  £2/10/-  for  life.  (United  States  Cur- 
rency:  $1.00    per   year;    $4.00   for   five   years;   $10.00    for   life.) 

Address    Correspondence,    Box    72,    Auckland,    C.l,    New    Zealand. 


CONTENTS 

Editorial —  Page 

Teach  Tithing  in  September    768 

Special    Features — 

Nga  Rongo  Korero  o  Te  Whawhai    770 

Church  Welfare      771 

j        Why  the  Blessings  ?      773 

j        Etahi  o   Nga  Whakaaro  i   Mau    775 

I         Church    Features — 

j         Notice  to   All    Primary   Officers    774 

j        Nga    Matenga        777 

!        Genealogy         777 

Mutual  Improvement  Association   77$ 

Sunday   School       77<-> 

I 'ritnary           783 

News   from   the    Field    788 


II     KARERE 


rlepetema,  I'M l 


Editorial 


TEACH  TITHING  IN  SEPTEMBER 

In  every  home  and  in  every  chapel  of  the  New  Zealand 
Mission  the  principle  of  tithing  should  be  discussed  along 
with  the  other  principles  of  the  Gospel.  We  cannot  exclude 
the  I. aw  ni"  Tithing  from  the  Gospel  and  still  claim  that  we 
have  tin-  Fullness  thereof.    Too  many  of  us  attempt  to  love 

tlu-  l.<»rd  on  the  instalment  plan.  We  obey  only  those  prin- 
ciples   which    are    Convenient     for    lis    to    obey    and    expect    to 

receive  the  same  returns  for  this  partial  obedience  as  do  those 
who  "love  the  Lord  with  all  their  might,  mind  and  strength." 

"'What  does  the  ("lunch  do  with  the  tithing?"  i>  a  ()nes- 

tion  that  is  frequently  asked.  The  question  is  generally 
asked  1>\  those  who  do  not  pay  tithes,  and  then-  is  an  im- 
plication that  the-  money  is  not  being  used  for  the  benefit 
of  the  members  of  the  Church  and  for  the  building  of  the 
Kingdom  of  ( iod  in  the  earth. 

To  satisfy  the  curiosity  of  the  non-tithe-payer  and  for 
the  information  of  all,  then-  follows  the  Financial  Statemenl 
of  the  Church  for  the  year  1939.  The  statement  for  the  year 
1940  has  not  yet  been  received  but  was  published,  as  usual. 
at  the  April  Conference  of  this  year. 

THE   EXPENDITURES   BY   THE  CHURCH    FOR   THE 
YEAR  1939 

Stake  and  Ward   Purposes — 

For  the  erection  of  meeting-houses  and  for  Ward 

and  Stake  maintenance  expenses  . .      £463,307    K    o 

Missionary  Work 

For  the  maintenance  and  -  peration  of  all  tin-  Mis- 
-l. -us  and  t'<T  the  erection  of  places  «'t'  worship 
and  "thrr  buildings  in  the  Missions      ..       ..      £351,381   is    <> 
Education — 

Expended  for  the  maintenance  of  Church  school 

system  £240,424  10    0 

Temples — 

Expended    for    the    maintenance    and    operati 

Temples  £71,837    2    0 

I  [ospitals 

Expended   for   tin-  erection   and   improvement   of 

hospital    buildings  £4,554  is    o 

■ 
For  direct  aid  in  the  care  of  the  worthy  poor  and 
other    charitable    purposes,    including    hospital 
treatment  £128,994  is    0 

Total    ..   £1,260,500  14    0 


Hepetema,  1941 


TE   KARERE 


769 


which  has  been  taken  from  the  tithes  and  other  Church  funds  and  re- 
turned by  the  Trustee-in-Trust  to  the  Saints  for  the  maintenance  and 
operation  of  the  Stakes  and  Wards,  Mission  activities,  for  the  mainten- 
ance and  operation  of  Church  schools  and  Temples,  for  hospital  build- 
ings and  relief  assistance. 

At  the  April  Conference  of  the  year  1940,  President 
J.  Reuben  Clark,  in  referring  to  the  finances  of  the  Church, 
spoke  as  follows  : — 

We  have  felt  that  it  was  important  that  the  Church  should  live 
within  its  income,  not  only  for  itself  as  a  Church,  but  for  an  example 
to  the  community,  the  state,  the  nation,  and  to  the  individual  members 
themselves. 

Such  a  course  of  the  Church  involves  problems  which  are  not 
incident  to  civil  administration,  which  is  primarily  dependent  upon 
taxes  that  can  be  accurately  forecast.  Therefore  there  are  in  govern- 
mental activities  few  occasions  when  an  unbalanced  budget — that  is 
when  more  is  spent  than  is  taken  in — is  not  created  by  some  deliberate 
act. 

With  the  Church  the  matter  is  wholly  different.  Over  the  last 
four  years  approximately  87%  of  the  total  Church  income  has  been 
the  tithing.  This  being  a  purely  voluntary  contribution,  its  amount 
cannot  be  accurately  forecast.  Its  volume  depends  wholly  upon  the 
faithfulness  of  the  people.  Thus,  where  the  governmental  agencies 
have   relative   certainty   in   income,   the    Church   has   uncertainty. 

The  only  money  the  Church  has  is  what  has  been  saved  out  of  the 
tithing  you  have  given  it  in  the  past  and  the  tithing  you  are  now 
giving  it,  and  approximately  87%  of  the  total  annual  income  comes 
from  you  from  year  to  year. 

We,  the  Authorities  of  the  Church,  must  therefore  be  extremely 
careful  as  to  our  commitments,  else  we  shall  find  ourselves,  as  wc 
have  occasionally  in  the  past,  spending  more  than  our  income. 

Because  of  the  turmoil  existing  in  the  world  and  be- 
cause of  an  apparent  disintegration  of  the  financial  structure 
of  the  nations  of  the  earth,  the  people  of  God  should  look 
to  Him  for  security.  In  no  uncertain  terms  He  has  admon- 
ished us  to  honour  Him  with  our  substance ;  to  pay  our  tithes 
and  offerings  that  we  may  be  numbered  among  His  people 
upon  the  earth.  To  be  numbered  among  the  people  of  God 
in  these  uncertain  times  is  to  find  security. 

During  the  month  of  September  teaeb  the  Law  of  Tith- 
ing in  your  homes,  your  Primaries,  your  Mutuals,  your  Sun- 
day Schools,  your  Priesthood  quorums  and  your  Sacrament 

meetings.      Above   all    pay    your   Tithes.      Invest    now    in    the 

economic  plan  of  the  Lord. 

A  I  A  I   I  II  IV     (    n\\  LEY. 


II".  KARERE  Hepetema,  1«M1 


EDITOR'S  NOTE: 

Sister  Edith  Pryer,  now  of  Hamilton,  is  very  well  known  to 
many  people,  particularly  the  missionaries  who  have  returned  to 
Zion.     Of  particular  memory  arc  ti  •  of  her  travels  with 

President  and  Sister   w la  throughout  the   Dominion,  and   her 

very  generous  Christmas  presents  of  "A  Big  Christms 

the    Elders,    which    came    regularly    t<>    Headquarters    at    each 

Yuletide. 

Sister  Fryer  will  always  be  remembered  by  all  who  have 
known  her,  both  here  and  abroad.  Her  influence  for  good  baa 
always  been  an  outstanding  characteristic  of  her  fine  spirit  and 
nature.     President  Cowley  has  mentioned  to  me  that  "she 

of  the   most    spiritual    pakeha   women    I    have   ever   met."      'To   this 

I    heartily    B| 

The  little   message  Bhe  lias  kindly  sent  t<»  "Te   Karen 

very  indicative  of  her  spirit  and  standing  in  the  Church  and  life. 

"The  life  of  a  Latter-day  Saint  has  much  \o  do  with  COHVersi 
tin-  outside  world.  If  we  live  as  we  Profess,  example  becomes  the  best 
medium  of  preaching  the  Gospel  of  L'hnst.  This  can  be  shown  iii  our 
homes,  when  we  meet  people  not  belonging  to  the  Church  who  may  be 
noticing  things  about  us,  without  our  knowledge,  by  the  lives  we  lire. 
By  the  Holy  Spirit  -within   us.  we  are  able  to  show  to  the   WOrl  I 

mankind.  1  his  we  do  sincerely  and  truthfully  only  by  the  way 
we  lire,  even  as  Christ  did — by  example.  Example  and  action  and  not 
long  faces  arc  needed  now." 


Nga  Kongo  Korero  o  Te  Whawhai 

\'.\  Paepae  Witehula 

Kua  ahua  whakata  inaianei  te  [ngarihi  i  te  whawhai  kia  Tiamana  i 
te  urunga  mai  o  Ruhia  ki  te  pakanga,  Kua  ahua  maha  nga  wiki 
inaianei  o  te  whawhai  a  Tiamana  raua  ko  Ruhia.  E  kii  ana  DgS 
whakaaturanga  e  7  miriona  te  nui  o  nga  tangata  e  pakanga  ana,  he 
nui  hoki  te  mate  0  tetahi  taha  me  tetahi  taha.      Ko  te  korero  a  Hitara 

i  te  tuatahi,   LO  nga  ra  ka  mutu  te  wahi  kia  Ruhia,  otira  kua  maha 

n^a  wiki  e  kaha  ana  a  Ruhia.  te  ahua  m  i  i  paoro  ia  ki  te  hoa  uaua. 

Kua  mate  ia  Ruhia  anake  i  tenei  wa  poto  nuku  atu  i  te  kotahi  miri- 
ona nga  hoia  o  Tiamana.  ko  ona  tata  ki  te  hawhe  miriona.  Ko  nga 
mea    pakanga   a   Tiamana   kua   ram    ia   Ruhia   e    •*!    mam-    (tanks)    'l')    ran 

ere-rangi,  o  Ruhia  e   19   ran  nga  mea  rere-rangi,  e  22  raa   nga 

(tanks).  Kahore  i  pau  te  marama  0  ta  raua  whawhaitan^a  kua  hanga 
tiriti  a  Ruhia  raua  ko  Engarangi,  kaua  e  mutu  tetahi  te  whawhai  kia 
Tiamana,  ma  te  whakaae  ra  ano  0  tetahi  ki  tetahi  ara.  a  Engarangi  kia 
Ruhia,   kia    mate   ra   ano   a   Tiamana. 

Ka  nui  te  hemanawa  0  Hitara,  kua  tonoa  kia  hopukia  tana  tino 
hoa  ake.  a  Koringi  (Goering)  i  te  kore  e  han^ai  o  te  hikoi  i  tana  i 
hiahia  ai.  Kua  tae  mai  tana  tono  kia  Hapani  kia  whakaaroaro  engari 
kua  pa  he  raru  ki  te  Kawanatanga  <>  tera  iwi.  Kua  wehewehea  noreira 
kahore  e  matauria  ka  huri   pehea. 

Kaati    mo   tenei    wa. 


Hepetema,  1941  TE   KARERE  771 

Church  Welfare 

By  A.  Dudley  Amadio 

As  most  of  us  are  aware,  our  President  inaugu- 
rated and  appointed  leaders  for  the  Church  Welfare 
Programme  at  the  last  Hui  Tau.      While  many  of  us 
knew  of  this  "plan";  had  some  knowledge  of  its  suc- 
cess in  the  stakes  of  Zion;  and  possibly  anticipated 
the   introduction   of  the   "plan"   here,   none   had   ex- 
plored  its  potentialities  in   New   Zealand,   either  for 
the  present  or  the  future.      Speaking  generally,  the 
Welfare  Programme  was  regarded  as  a  glorified  way 
of    helping   the    poor    and    needy — badly    needed    no 
doubt  in  America,  but  in  this  country  with  its  Social 
Elder  Amadio       Security  legislation,   not  especially  necessary  at  the 
moment. 
That  our  Father  in  Heaven  was  guiding  President  Cowley  when  he 
introduced  this  work  I  have  no  doubt.      That  we  may  and  do  need  its 
benefits  more  than  the  Saints  in  Zion,  I  am  firmly  convinced. 

The  Mission  Director  of  the  Programme,  Brother  Wi  Pere  Amaru, 
has  suggested  that  we  do  two  things  as  a  start  in  this  great  work. 
The  first — "that  we  pay  our  tithes  and  fast  offerings  regularly,"  and 
the  second — "that  we  make  our  homes  and  chapels  more  beautiful." 
The  payment  of  tithes  and  offerings  has  long  been  commanded  of  God. 
Adam  and  his  sons  presented  offerings  at  the  command  of  God.  I 
believe  that  most  of  us  are  cognizant  of  the  daily  blessings  obtainable 
through  adherence  to  the  law  of  tithing,  but  I  doubt  if  we  all  fully 
realise  the  value  of  the  future  blessings  in  store  for  those  who  are 
faithful  in  their  keeping  of  this  law.  Malachi  3:  10-12  says:  "Bring  ye 
all  the  tithes  into  the  storehouse  that  there  may  be  meat  in  mine  house, 
and  prove  me  now  herewith,  saith  the  Lord  of  Hosts,  if  I  will  not 
open  you  the  windows  of  heaven  and  pour  you  out  a  blessing  that  there 
shall  not  be  room  enough  to  receive  it.  And  I  will  rebuke  the  devourer 
for  your  sakes,  and  he  shall  not  destroy  the  fruits  of  your  ground; 
neither  shall  your  vine  cast  her  fruit  before  the  time  in  the  field,  saith 
the  Lord  of  Hosts.  And  all  nations  shall  call  you  blessed;  for  ye  shall 
be  a  delightsome  land,  saith  the  Lord  of  Hosts."  If  you  have  read 
this  passage  attentivey,  you  will  find  a  multitude  of  blessings  therein. 
The  promises  made  by  the  Lord  through  Malachi  to  the  saints  of  his 
day  are  just  as  effective  to  the  saints  of  this  era,  as  many  of  our  people 
are  able  to  testify.  Among  the  things  revealed  to  Joseph  Smith  upon 
the  subject  of  tithing  are  the  following  passages  from  the  Doctrine  and 
Covenants  64:  23 — "  .  .  .  and  verily  it  is  a  day  of  sacrifice  and  the  day 
of  tithing  for  my  people;  for  he  that  is  tithed  shall  not  be  burned  at 
His  coming."  In  85:4-5,  speaking  of  those  who  do  not  pay  tithing, 
the  Lord  says — "  .  .  .  neither  is  their  genealogy  to  be  kept,  or  to  be 
had  where  it  may  be  found  on  any  of  the  records,  or  history  of  the 
Church;  their  names  of  the  children  written  in  the  book  of  the  Law  of 
God,  saith  the  Lord  of  Hosts."  In  subsequent  verses  of  the  same  sec- 
tion, the  Lord  explains  that  those  whose  names  are  not  writ  ton  in  the 
book  of  the  law  shall  have  no  inheritance  among  the  Saints.  In  these 
passages,  blessings  enough  are  promised  to  induce  anyone  to  obey  the 
law,  but  I  think  these  promises  are  only  a  beginning  <>f  the  things  the 
Lord  has  in  store  for   us. 

In  the  early  days  of  the  Church,  tithing  was  not  the  financial 
law.  A  higher  law,  that  of  consecration,  of  Order  of  Enoch,  was  given 
to  our  people.      In  short,   it  consisted   of   having  all   things   in   common. 


772  ll    K  \KI  RE  Hepetema,  1941 

t hiit  there  would  be  no  rich  or  i r.     This  timl  law,  and 

will  again  be  Had  during  the  millenium.     As  tl 

er  law.  that  of  tithing 
as  a  schoolmaster  to  teach  the  way  to  the  higher  law.     The  law  • 
secretion  has  never  been  abrogated,  but   is,  so  the  revelation  t\ 
"...  not  required  at  tin-  time  .  .  .  ."     It  should  be  plainly  and* 
that  the  non-tithe  payer  shall  not  be  given  the  opportunity  to  live  the 
law    of  consecration.     If  we  cannot   live  the  leaser  law,  we  certainly 
the  higher  law. 
It'  this  be  the  trend  of  the  Welfare  Programme,  so  far  as  tithing 
is  concerned,  let  us  make  hast   to  obey,  so  that   we  shall  not   be  like 

Let   us   new   see   where   the   Instruction   to   make   our   homes   and 
more  beautiful  will  lead  us.     The  gospel  of  Christ  is  to  give  us 
life   and   that    more   abundantly.     The   whole  tenor   of  the   command- 
Is  toward   the   end   of   making   as   more   comfortable   hero   and 
i  distressing  fact  that  a  large  portion  of  our  people 

are   living    in   homes,   to   say   the   least,   are   overcrowded    and    unhealthy. 
If    our    people    will    combine    together    and    repair   their    own    homes    and 

the  homos  of  their  brethren,  paint  and  generally  beautiful  them,  they 

will   certainly   make  a  direct    Contribution   to  the   health   and   comfort    of 

the  people. 

It  has  been  found  in  Zion,  when  the  Priesthood  work  together  on 

projects  of  this  kind,   and   do   it   humbly,   a  -pi lit   of  appreciation   of  One 
another's    talents    is    obtained,    and    that    oftentimes    ill-feelings    are    dis- 
pelled.    The  beautification  of  homes  Is  only  a  beginning.     I  read  that 
-•hood  often   help  to  put    farms  and  businesses  "ii   a 

more  productive  ba8i8.      As  these  improvements  in  homos,  farms,  chapcN 
and    bu  PS    carried    out.    our    self-respect    will    he    raised;    our 

will   be  improved;  our  debts  will  gradually  be  paid — then   we 

shall  be  free  from  the  bondage  and  better  able  to  worship  the  Lord. 

To  be  able  to  U'vd  and  clothe  our  needy  In  the  difficult  times  ahead. 

we  must  pay  our  fast  offering  and  put  our  storehouses  In  order.     The 

an    collect    and    repair   clothes,   linen   and    furniture.      In 

they  will  be  able  to  conserve  fruit  and  vegetables,  i 

I  have  heard  it  said  by  some  of  our  leading  brethren  that  there 
are  no  needy  among  the  saints  of  their  districts.  This  may  or  may 
not  be  so,  but  this  I  do  know,— there  Is  not  any  district  in  this  Mission 
in  which  there  are  no  saints  whose  standard  of  living  cannot  be  con- 
Biderably  raised.  While  it  is  impossible  to  foresee  all  the  uses  to  which 
we  will  put  our  homes,  storehouses  and  offerings,  I  believe  they  will  be 
used  in  a  manner  we  have  never  before  thought  of.  It  seems  feasible 
that  if  war  comes  to  this  land  and  our  cities  are  bombed,  our  homes 

and    Storehouses    will    serve    to    comfort    the    unfortunate.       Full    store- 
house- and   cupboards  are  s   necessity   for  the   future. 

accomplish  only  what  I've  just  related  would  of  itself  .i 
the  introduction  of  the  Welfare  Programme,  but  I  believe  the  Lord  has 
than    this    in    mind.      Our    people   generally    are    of   the    House    of 
Israel    and   they   have    been    promised    that    they   will    he   gathered   in   the 

days.  Most  of  the  prophecies  and  promises  have  been  fulfilled 
in  a  natural  manner.  Our  beautifying  campaign  should  give  our  homes 
a  more  ready  market  value  to  provide  for  this  gathering,  and  parting. 
Results  subsequent  to  the  execution  of  this  programme,  we  will  have 

d   how  to   work  with  our  neighbour  without   jealousy   or  COVetOUS- 

H  ntly  upon  our  arrival  at  the  land  of  our  inheritance 
we  will  he  fit  to  establish  the  Order  of  Enoch. 

In  conclusion,  I  believe  tithing  to  be  the  primary  of  the  school 
for  the  Order  of  Enoch,  and  the  Welfare  Programme  proper  the 
semondary   phase   of   instruction   for  the   Order. 


Hepetema,  1941  TE   KARERE  773 

Why  the  Blessings  ? 

By  George  Watene 

Blessings  are  Heavenly  Father's  Gifts, 
Given  to  man  as  the  Lord  seemeth  fit. 
For  every  man  that  dwelleth  on  earth, 
God  poureth  blessings  from  his  birth. 

We  are  all  God's  children,  and  because  of 
this  truth,  we  are  all  entitled  to  receive  blessings 
from  Our  Father  in  Heaven.  The  first  command- 
ment given  to  man  was  to  multiply  and  replenish 
the  earth,  and  because  Adam  obeyed  this  very 
George  Watene  important  commandment,  the  world  was  blessed 
with  children  patterned  after  the  image  of  God, 
and  was  due  to  receive  gifts  and  blessings  by  reason  of  their  obedience. 
God  opened  up  the  Book  of  Life,  and  commenced  to  write  down 
the  history  of  His  blessings  for  each  and  every  one  of  His  children 
here  upon  the  earth.  Man  was  commanded  to  keep  record  of  God's 
dealings  with  him  ever  since  creation.  For  example :  "Moreover,  thou 
son  of  man,  take  thee  one  stick,  and  write  upon  it  for  Judah  and  for 
the  children  of  Israel,  his  companions:  then  take  another  stick,  and 
write  upon  it  for  Joseph,  the  stick  of  Ephraim,  and  for  all  the  house 
of  Israel,  his  companions.  And  join  them  one  to  another  into  one 
stick;  they  shall  become  one  in  thine  hand."  (Ezekiel  37:  16,  17.) 
These  two  sticks  represent  prophecy  concerning  the  coming  forth  of 
the  Bible  and  the  Book  of  Mormon.  Read  them  carefully,  and  they 
will  show  you  the  pre-existence  or  first  estate  of  man ;  his  earthly  or 
second  estate  existence;  his  existence  or  third  estate  after  death: 
and  you  will  find  further  the  blessings  that  followed  and  will  follow 
in  each  of  these  estates  of  man's  existence. 

God  did  not  pour  out  his  blessings  through  these  books  alone,  nor 
through  his  prophets,  but  He  did  bless  his  people  also  through  other 
worthy  men,  who  unconsciously  fulfilled  certain  laws  of  God.  Hence 
we  sense  the  value  of  vision,  of  obedience  as  expressed  in  Solomon's 
Proverb  29:18 — "Where  there  is  no  vision,  the  people  perish;  but 
he  that  keepeth  the  law,  happy  is  he."  Hence  we  appreciate  the  law 
of  obedience  these  men  must  have  observed,  when  they  were  caught 
up  in  the  realms  of  spiritual  affinity  for  something  they  were  searching, 
for  the   mutual   benefit   of   man. 

Can  we  fully  realise  the  trials,  tribulations  ,  persecutions  suffered 
by  these  great  inventors,  scientists,  who  are  so  numerous  to  mention 
in  their  search  for  truth?  Do  we  appreciate  them  enough,  when  they 
starved,  because  of  lowly  circumstances;  when  they  burnt  the  mid- 
night oil,  because  they  had  great  faith  in  their  convictions  and  in  their 
theories;  when  they  even  sacrificed  their  lives,  because  they  knew  the 
work  they  are  doing  is  not  for  their  personal  gain,  but  for  the  welfare 
and  service  of  humanity?  Can  you  show  me  an  example  of  father  and 
mother  who  do  not  love  their  children,  and  do  not  express  added  joy 
when  their  children  obey  them?  Show  me  reason  why  God  should  not 
bless  these  worthy  men — scientists,  inventors,  writers,  philosophers, 
other  benefactors  of  humanity,  whose  unconscious  aits  reached  the 
doors  of  Heaven  and  unlocked  its  very  windows,  because  o\'  their 
service,  sacrifice,  and  love  for  their  fellow-men.  "Praise  God  from 
whom  all  blessings  flow"  is  a  fitting  tribute  to  the  memory  of  these 
inspired  men,  whose  immortal  lives  arc  forever  written  "on  the  sands 
of  time." 


77  A  TE  KARERE  Hepetema,  1(M1 

We,  as  Latter-day  Saints,  have  everything  to  be  grateful  for  be- 
sides the  comforts  of  living,  travel,  education,  progression  in  all  its  full- 
ness as  enjoyed  throughout  the  whole  world.  We  have  a  Gospel  that 
teaches  the  Word  of  Wisdom — a  commandment  revealed  through  the 
Prophet  Joseph  Smith  for  the  benefit  of  health  to  our  bodies;  the 
law  of  tithing — instituted  of  the  Lord  as  far  back  as  Abraham  for 
the  purpose  of  enhancing  the  spirit  of  giving;  the  law  of  Fast  Offerings 
— similar  in  degree  to  offerings  required  of  Adam,  wherein  we  go  with- 
out a  meal  on  first  Sunday  of  each  month  and  contribute  its  value  for 
the  help  of  our  worthy  poor;  then  this  year,  we  have  the  Welfare 
Programme,  wherein  we  are  required  to  store  sufficient  food  for  a  year 
or  two  for  times  of  famine  that  are  to  come,  especially  following  the 
aftermath  of  war.  Then  in  reviewing  the  Bible,  Book  of  Mormon, 
together  with  Doctrine  and  ovenants,  we  have  a  Gospel  that  embraces 
ordinances  revealed  therein  for  our  temporal  and  eternal  salvation, 
and   also   numerous   blessings then   why,    oh   why   the   blessings. 

There  is  a  law  irrevocably  decreed  in  Heaven,  before  the  foundations  of  the 
world,  upon  which  all  blessings  are  predicated :  And  when  we  obtain  any  bless- 
ing from  Cod,  it  is  by  obedience  to  that  lay  upon  which  it  is  predicated. 
(  Doctrine  and  Covenants  130:20,  21.) 

NOTICE  TO  ALL  PRIMARY  OFFICERS 

Re   PRIMARY  REPORTS 

There  seems  to  be  much  misunderstanding  in  connection  with 
the  new  report  forms,  and  while  this  is  only  natural,  we  want  I 
the   matter   straightened   out   with   the   least   possible   delay    so   that 
Primary  work  in  New  Zealand  will  be  in  full  accord  with  thai 
done  in  Zion  and  other  parts  of  the  world. 

FIRSTLY,  the  Branch  Monthly  Report,  which  is  WHITE,  is 
filled  in  each  month  by  the  Branch  Secretary  and  forwarded  without 
delay  to  the  District  Secretary.  This  white  form  is  the  only  one 
with  which  the  Branch  is  concerned. 

SECONDLY,  the  District  Monthly  report,  which  is  YELL<  >W, 
is  made  out  from  the  Branch  reports  received  each  month  and  is 
kept  by  the  District  Secretary,  and 

THIRDLY,  the  District  Quarterly  Report,  which  is  BLUE,  is 
made  out  from  the  three  District  Monthhly  Reports  which  will  have 
accumulated  over  the  quarter.  This  District  Quarterly  Report  is 
the  only  one  which  is  sent  to  the  Primary  Secretary,  as  it  is  the 
one  which  contains  the  full  account  of  the  work  accomplished  by  the 
Primaries  in  each  District  over  the  quarter. 

We  do  not  want  either  the  white  or  the  yellow  forms  sent  to 
us — these  are  for  your  own  special  reference  and  record.  The  only 
one  that  concerns  us  is  the  Blue  report  from  the  District  Secretary. 

We  hope  that  this  will  clear  up  any  doubts  and  that  you  who 
have  been  lax  will  co-operate  to  the  fullest  degree,  and  that  you  who 
have  been  co-operating  so  splendidly  will  continue  to  do  so. 

—THE  MISSION  PRIMARY  BOARD. 


Hepetema,  1941 


TE   KARERE 


775 


Etahi  o  Nga  Whakaaro  i  Mau 

XA  WIREMU  TAKANA,  PAKEKE,  KUA  MATE 
(Te  mutiinga) 

Xa  te  Etita. — Kei  roto  i  nga  Karere  o  Maehe,  Aperira  me 
Hunc  o  tenei  tau  nga  t'nnatanga  o  enei  korero  hei  whakaarotanga 
ma  tatou. 

Ma  i  boki  atu  ia  ki  reira  ia  tau,  ia  tau,  mo  nga  tau  e  wha,  me 
te  tutaki  ano  ki  a  ia,  i  aua  tau  e  wha,  o  taua  poropiti  Maori  ona- 
mata.  No  reira,  i  homai  ai  nga  papa  ki  a  ia.  Xa,  ka  timata  te 
whakamaori  i  reira  a  ia ;  me  tetahi  tangata  he  awhina  i  a  ia  ki  te 
tuhituhi,  i  a  ia  e  whakamaori  ana. 

I  homai  aua  papa  i  te  tau  1827  i  te  marama  o  Hepetema,  te  22-o 
nga  ra.  Ko  te  whakamaoritanga,  he  mea  ra,  na  te  homaitanga  o  te 
Wairua  Tapu  a  te  Atua  ma  roto  i  etahi  kohatu  e  rua  e  kiia  nei  e  te 
Pakeha,  he  Urimi  he  Tumimi,  e  rite  ana  pea,  ki  nga  kohatu  i  roto 
i  te  whare  Wananga,  ki  te  Huka-a-tai,  me  te  Rehumoana  nga  whatu 
o  o  tatou  tupuna. 

Na,  ka  haere  te  whakamaoritanga,  a,  taea  noatia  te  marama  o 

Mei  1829.     I  a  ia  e  whakamaori  ana  i  aua  papa  ka  tae  ki  tetahi  kupu 

penei  na,  "Kua  whakamanatia  ahau  e  Ihu  Karaiti,  ka  iriiria  koe  e 

an  i  runga  i  te  ingoa  o  te  Matua,  o  te  Tama,  o  te  Wairua  Tapu, 

Amine."    Xa  tenei  kupu,  na  te  mana  ra,  ka  tino 

oho  tona  ngakau  ;  kaore  hoki  ia  i  tino  marama 

he  aha  tenei  mea  te  mana,  a  hiahia  tonu  raua 

kia  mohio  ki  te  putake  o  taua  korero  i   pera 

ai,  ara,   "mana."     XTa,  i   haere  atu   raua,  i  te 

awatea  tonu  a  te  ra,  ki  tetahi  wahi  motu  ke, 

inoi  ai  ki  te   Matua  ma  runga  i  taua  take  ara. 

te  mana.     \a,  ka  puta  mai  a  Eioani  Kai  Iriiri. 

ki  a  raua.  ka  whakapa  takitahi   ona  ringa  ki 

^^A*%  I     runga  i  o  raua  mahunga  me  te  hoatu  i  te  Tohu- 

P' **>/■•.:        I    ngatanga  a  Arona  ki  a  raua.  kei  reira  te  mana 

|H|     e  ahei   ai    i   a    raua   te   iriiri    nnnaki   hei    inuru- 

H  I     nga  liara.      No  taua  \va  ano.  ka  whakahau  atu 

a  lloani  Kai   Iriiri  i  a  raua  kia  iriiri  raua,  tetahi 

i  tetahi,  hei  murunga  i  <>  raua  hara  ake.     Xa. 

heoi  ano.  i  te  mutunga  <>  tenei,  ka  haere  tonu 

whakamaoritanga.     Xa.  i  te  marama  o  Hune  Ka 

haere  mai  ano  a   Pita  ratou  ko  Hemi  ko  rloani,  hoatu  Ki  a  raua  te 

mana  <>  Ihu  Karaiti  e  karangatia  nei  te  Tohungatanga  <>  Merekehe- 

reke,  he  mea  na  te  whakapakanga  o  o  ratou  ringaringa  ki  runga  ki  <> 

raua   mahunga. 

No    reira    raua    i    wlnwhi    ai    ki    te    mana    mo   te   hom    itanga    0   te 

Wairua  Tapu,  ma  roto  i  te  whakapakanga  ringaringa.     Kahore  he 
mn  nga  marama  i  muri  ka  oti  te  perehi  o  te  whakamaoritanga  o  taua 


W'lKI.M  I     T.\  KA  NA 

ta    raua    nrihi    o   \v 


776  TE  KARERE  Hepetcma,  1941 

pukapuka.  No  te  ono  o  nga  ra  o  Aperira,  i  te  tau  1830,  i  whaka- 
tungia  te  Hahi,  ko  nga  mema  i  tana  ra,  e  ono  tangata. 

\a.  mehemea  i  tika  te  homaitanga  o  tana  Tohungatanga  Tapu 
a  te  Atua  ki  te  tangata,  ka  whai  nga  tohu,  ara,  te  mana  whakaora,  me 
nga  mana  katoa  i  whakaaria  mai  e  tc  Karaiti  i  mua,  tera  noa  ake  ka 
hiritia  i  roto  i  te  ngakau  o  ia  tangata  ka  oti  nei  te  iriiri,  me  te 
whakapa  ringaringa,  hei  homai  te  tino  kaha  o  te  Wairua  Tapu  o  te 
Atua.  Ko  ia  tonu  te  take,  i  tupu  ake  te  1 1  alii.  a.  e  naere  nei  ki  nga 
wahi  katoa  o  te  ao.  E  whakaatu  ana  nga  tangata  kua  urn  ki  roto. 
ae,  ko  ia  ano  tenei,  ko  te  Hahi  tika  tenei  o  te  Atua.  no  tc-  mea,  kua 
tino  whai  mai  nga  tohu  o  te  mana  o  te  Atua  ki  nga  tangata  e  whaka- 
pono  ana. 

Xa.  E  tc  iwi.  Kei  roto  i  taua  pukapuka  e  kiia  nei.  te  Puka- 
puka o  Moromona,  te  tino  maramatanga  o  nga  tikanga  katoa  o  te 
Atua.  E  tautoko  ana  tenei  pukapuka  i  te  Paipera,  a,  e  tautoko  ana 
hoki  te  Paipera  i  tenei  pukapuka.  Otira.  ko  te  tino  taonga  nui  o 
taua  pukapuka,  kei  reira  nga  kupu  whakaari  nui  mo  te  iwi  Maori. 
Kei  reira,  e  whakamarama  ana  i  te  wahi  i  puta  mai  ai  nga  Maori, 
ara,  te  peheatanga  i  hono  atu  ai  te  iwi  Maori  ki  a  Hohepa.  Kei 
reira  ano  hoki  te  whakaaturanga,  tera  ka  puta  mai  tenei  pukapuka 
i  roto  i  te  ringa  o  tetahi  tangata  o  nga  Tauiwi,  a  mana,  ara.  ma 
ratou  ia  e  kawe  atu  ki  nga  uri  o  Hohepa  e  noho  marara  nei  ki  nga 
moutere  o   te  moana. 

Xa.  e  ki  ana  te  poropiti  Maori  onamata  mo  te  wa  ka  tae  atu 
tenei  pukapuka  ki  nga  morehu  o  te  whare  o  Iharaira.  TT.  Niwhai, 
30- te  4  ,  me  te  5,  me  te  6  o  nga  rarangi. 

"4.  Katahi  te  toenga  o  o  tatou  uri  ka  moliio  ki  a  tatou,  ki  te 
putahga  mai  o  tatou  i  roto  i  Hiruharama.  ki  a  ratou  ano  hoki  he 
uri  no  nga  Hurai. 

"5.  A  ka  whakapuakina  te  Kongo  Pai  o  Ihu  Karaiti  i  roto  i  a 
ratou  ;  no  reira,  ka  whakamohiotia  ano  ratou  ki  te  mohiotanga  ki  o 
ratou  matua,  ki  te  matauranga  ano  hoki  i  matau  ai  o  ratou  matua  ki  a 
Ihu  Karaiti. 

"6.  Ko  reira  hari  ai  o  ratou  ngakau:  no  te  mea  ka  mohio  ratou 
ki  tenei  he  manaakitanga  ki  a  ratou  na  te  ringaringa  o  te  Atua  :  ka 
timata  ka  marere  iho  enei  unahi  pouriuri  i  o  ratou  kanohi :  a  e  kore 
e  maha  nga  whakatupuranga  i  roto  i  a  ratou  e  pahemo  kua  riro  ratou 
hei  iwi  kiritea,  e  painga  ana." 

Heoi  ra,  E  te  iwi.  Kua  tae  mai  enei  tangata  ki  te  motu  nei. 
He  nui  nga  kupu  poropiti  o  0  matou  matua  Maori  i  puta  i  mua  i  a 
ratou,  e  tino  homai  ana  ki  a  tatou  i  nga  tohu  o  tenei  iwi  i  whakaritea 
nei  e  te  Atua,  hei  kawe  atu  ki  te  whare  o  Iharaira  te  mana  me  te  ora 
o  o  tatou  matua.  XTa,  e  haere  ana  ratou  ki  nga  motu  katoa,  kahore 
he  tono,  kahore  he  utu.  Kei  te  hanga  ratou  inaianei  he  Temepara 
Tapu  kei  Hawaiki.    (Kua  oti.) 

Kati  ake  i  kone.i  Kua  whakahokia  te  patai  nei.  Kei  te  tino 
mohio  matou  katoa.  ki  te  mea  ka  hiahia  pono  te  tangata  kia  mohio, 
e  tika  ana  ranei  tenei,  ka  homai  e  te  Atua  ki  a  ia  taua.  mohiotanga  ki 


Hepetema,  1941  TE   KARERE  777 

te  mea  ka  rapu  te  tangata  i  runga  i  te  ngakau  inoi.  Me  tenei  ano, 
e  niohio  ana  matou  ka  nui  te  kaha  o  te  Rewera  ki  te  ki,  ki  nga 
tangata  katoa,  "Ehara  tenei,  e  kore  e  taea  ranei."  Otira,  E  te  iwi, 
kei  konei  te  kaha  me  te  niana  e  taea  ai  e  tatou  te  whakaroa  i  to 
tatou  noho  i  tenei  ao,  e  hari  ai,  e  koa  ai  o  tatou  ngakau,  a,  kei  konei 
ano  te  ora  mo  te  wa  e  tutaki  ano  tatou  ki  to  tatou  Matua  Ora  Tonu 
i  te  Rangi. 

Xa,  ma  te  Atua  tatou  katoa  e  whakakaha,  e  whakamarama, 

Xa  to  koutou  teina  i  roto  i  a  te  Karaiti, 

XA  WIREMU  TAKANA. 

NGA  MATENGA 

URUPAINA  KATI  AIURUPARA. 

Kua  mate  a  Urupaina  Ka.ti  Murupara  o  te  Peka  o  Kerepehi. 
Takiwa  o  Hauraki  i  te  1  o  nga  ra  o  Hurae,  1941,  ki  te  hohipera  o 
Thames.  Ko  tana  tinana  i  ma.ungia  mai  ki  te  Hoe-o-tainui  takoto  ai. 
XTo  te  3  o  nga  ra  ka  tapukena  tana  tinana  i  raro  i  te  whakahaere  o 
Tatana  Arona. 

Haere  ra  e  tama,  haere  i  runga  i  nga  kupu  whakarite.  Xa 
Ihowa  i  homai,  na  Ana  ano  i  tango  atu. 

— Xa  H.   Houctana  i  ripoota. 
HORA  MOKEXA. 

Xo  te  4  o  Hurae  ka  moe  a  Hora  Mokena  i  te  moenga  roa.  He 
wahine  hoki  e  arohatia  ana  e  nga  kaumatua  e  kauwhau  ana  i  rut"  i 
Taranaki. 

Na  Taka  Toroaiwhiti  i  ropoata. 
HARIATA   IIAIKA. 

I  mate  a  Hariaia  Haika  o  te  Peka  o  Ngawha  i  te  ra  i  mnri  mai 
te  whanau  tanga  o  tana  peepi  i  te  3  o  nga  ra  o  Hune,  1941.  He 
tino  aroha  tona  matenga.  Kei  muri  nei  ko  tona  hoa  tane  a  Nfgareta 
Haika  me  a  raua  tama-riki  e  ono.     Haere  ra  e  h<>a.  Haere. 

Na  Hinehou  Nchua  i  rop 

!       GENEALOGY 

i  By    I  eao  W  ii<  i  ii  a  \  \ 

THE    WAV    TO    PERFECTION 
I  Cottage    Meetings    for    September. 

Sop.     1      Lesson   5,  "The  Way  of  Life." 

I  ,,     11 — Lesson  6,  "lYr  mortal    Preparation." 

IS — Lesson    7,    "Appointment    of    Lim 

25 — Lesson   8,  "These  I  will  make  my  Rulers." 

♦  E  nga  ropu  main  whakapapa  o  ia  peka  o  ia  peka  whaka         i 
haeretia  nga  po  Taite.     Te  -M    Hepetema  me  wehe  te  nei  ra 

I       hei    whakamaharatanga    ki    \r    Propiti    Elohepa    Mete,    me    if 

•  homaitanga  kia   ia  e  '<•   A.nahera  e   Moronai   nga  papa  koura       t 
(K(,l<l  plates)  o  to  pukapuka  a  Iforomona. 

i  Slogan:  "Ko  to  kororia  o  to  Atua  ko  to  mataun 

! 


77*  TE  KARERE  Hepetetaa,  ll>41 

Mutual  Improvement  Association 

CIRCULAR 
Greetings  to  M.I. A.  Officers. 

The  purpose  of  the  Mutual  [mprovement  Association  is  to  help 
establish  in  the  hearts  of  the  people  of  the  Church,  and  of  interested 
non-members,  a  testimony  of  the  truth  of  the  Restored  Gospel  of 
Jesus  Christ— especially  as  expressed  in  their  daily  lives — thai  is, 
to  help  make  true  Latter-day  Saints  of  them,  and  to  bring  tin's  about 
by  providing,  in  the  Spirit  of  the  Gospel,  means,  guidance,  and 
direction  for  developing  the  native  talents  of  the  members  and  for 
satisfying  their  natural  desires  for  recreational,  cultural  and  religious 
activities. 

To  impress  upon  all  our  activities  the  divinely  inspired  M.I.A. 
purposes  may  not  always  be  easy;  but  in  achieving  it  fully,  or  in  part, 
the  organization  will  render  its  greatest  service.  Indeed  its  very 
existence  depends  upon  its  so  doing.  To  join  with  all  agencies  [in- 
human betterment  without  relinquishing  this  high  purpose,  offers 
a  stirring  challenge  to  the  best  efforts  of  M.I.A.  leaders;  as  the 
officers  are  thus  charged  with  the  responsibility  of  leadership  in 
recreation  for  the  entire  Church  above  Primary  age,  operating,  of 
course,  under  the  direction  of  the  Priesthood,  it  behoves  all  officers 
to  enter  upon  their  duties  with  a  determination  to  serve  as  long  as 
possible,  as  it  is  through  the  continued  service  of  faithful  officers  that 
the  organization  is  most  benefitted — again  serve  with  all  your  might. 

With  these  thoughts  uppermost  in  our  minds,  we  ask  of  you, 
"Is  your  Association  functioning?" 

Owing  to  the  monthly  reports  not  being  sent  in  to  us  regularly. 
we  feel  that  many  branch  organizations  are  dormant;  and  so  we  beg 
of  you  officers  to  get  together  immediately  and  discuss  your  problems 
with  a  view  of  becoming  active  once  more. 

All  branches  should  send  in  their  monthly  reports;  instead  only 
seven  are  doing  so  at  present — 1  from  the  Hauraki  District.  1  from 
the  Bay  of  Islands,  3  from  Hawke's  Bay,  and  2  from  Whangarei. 

Re  Gold  and  Green  Balls. — Tt  is  the  desire  of  the  Board  that 
they  be  carried  out  as  usual,  endeavouring  always  to  maintain  their 
usual  high  standard.  However,  the  nett  profits  are  to  be  divided 
as  follows:  One-third  sent  to  the  Board's  Office;  one-third  to  aid 
Patriotic  Purposes;  one-third  retained  in  the  Branches. 

N.B. — Please  send  the  dates  of  your  balls  as  soon  as  possible 
to  Sister  Una  Tamihana.   Box  61,  Dannevirke. 

In  conclusion  we  wish  to  remind  you  to  take  care  in  advertising 
so  as  not  to  mislead  the  people  that  the  proceeds  of  your  balls  arc- 
all  for  Patriotic  purposes. 

Kia  Kuita  —  Kia  Toa  —  Kia  Ora  Katoa. 

,  Most  sincerely, 

July  16,  1941.  MUTUAL  BOARD. 


Hepetema,  1941  TE   KARERE  779 

SUNDAY  SCHOOL 

Theme — 

"OUR   HOMES   AND    CHAPELS   SHALL   BE   BEAUTIFUL"        j 
"For  Zion  must  increase  in  beauty  and  in  Holiness;  her  borders        J 
must  be  enlarged;  her  stakes  must  be  strengthened ;  yea  verily  I  say 
unto  you.    Zion  must  arise  and  put  on  her  beautiful  garments." 

— Doctrine  &  Covenants  82 :  14. 

SACRAMENT  GEM 
The  law  was  broken,  Jesus  died 

That  justice  might  be  satisfied. 
That  man  might  not  remain  the  slave, 

Of  death,  of  hell,  or  of  the  grave. 

CONCERT  RECITATION 
"  .  .    As  for  me  and  my  house,  we  will  serve  the  Lord." 

KORERO  A  NGAKAU 
"...  Ko  ahau  ia  me  toku  whare,  ka  mahi  matou  ki  a  Ihowa." 

HYMNS 

For  both  Maori  and  Pakeha — learn  two  new  opening  hymns. 

N.B. — Is  it  si  range  that  no  text  has  been  given  with  the  Concert 
Recitation?  If  it  is  strange,  then  it  is  an  opportunity  for  you  to  find 
and   read.     This   much    is  given — from    Old    Testament. 

— S.S.  Superintendent.      j 

REMEMBER ? 

Third  Quarterly  Reports  to  be  posted  BEFORE  September  20th, 
1941.  Read  pages  752  and  753  of  August,  1941,  issue  of  "Te  Karere" 
for  reference. 

IMPORTANT! 

All  Sunday  Schools  throughout  the  Mission  will  please  follow  out- 
lined lessons  as  printed  in  "Te  Karere."  Schools  already  complying 
are  commended  for  their  desire  to  conform  to  the  suggested  thought. 
All  Schools  are  asked  to  use  lessons  printed  as  from  September  7th. 
L941.  District  Superintendents  and  Mission  Board  members  are 
directly  responsible  for  this  instruction   being  carried  out. 

REPORTS. 

For  tic  Firsl  Quarter  of  this  year,  L8  Sunday  Schools  reported. 
For  the  Second  Quarter  of  tins  year.  :;i  Sunday  Schools  reported. 

All     Homo    or    Subsidiary    Sunday    School8     (Schools    organized    in 

homes  or  localities  imt   are   part   of  :m  organized   Branch)    are 

to   forward   immediately   to   their   parent    body    (organi      :    Branch   of 

which    they    arc    8    part)    a    completed    report     not     later    than    FIVE    days 

after  the  last    Sunday   in  each  quarter.     This  report   will   be  checked 

by    the    parent    body    for    "L.D.S.    Population"    to    eliminate    duplication. 


780  TE  KARERE  Hepetema,  1941 

and  sent  back  immediately,  after  which  the  Home  or  Subsidiary  School 
will  fill  out  TWO  other  forms,  sending  one  to  the  Mission  Secretary, 
Sunday  School,  Box  72,  Auckland;  one  to  the  District  Superintendency 
and   the  other  for  their  own  use. 

Every  Sunday  School  that  has  so  far  been  organized  must  send 
in  a  report. 

To  bring  our  Schools  reporting  up  to  date — First  Quarter,  Koro- 
ngata;  Second  Quarter,  Korongata,  Heretaunga,  Huria.  This  makes 
the  total:   First   Quarter,    18;   Second   Quarter,   31. 

Sixpenny  Funds  received  since  last  "Karere"  are  from — Korongata, 
Heretaunga,  Te  Horo,  Huria,  Nuhaka  and  Puketapu. 


Sunday  School  Mis- 
sion    Superintendency 

and  Board  Members 
named  by  /'resident 
Cowley  at  Korongata, 
July  27, 1941:  Superin- 
tendency —  Kelly  Har- 
ris, Joseph  Hay,  lint 
T.  Kitpa.  Board  Mem- 
bers —  Sydney  Craw- 
ford, Rakaipaka  Puriri 
and  Joseph  R.  Tengaio. 


LESSONS 

KINDERGARTEN.      Thoughts    for    teachers: 
"Obedience."       (Arrange    your    lesson 
material  to  cover  the  month.) 
"Joseph    and    His    family    Return    to    Their 
Own    Country."    (Matt.    2.) 

"Childhood   of   Jesus."    (Luke   2.) 
PRIMARY.     (Lessons   to    cover   month.) 

"A    Strange    Attempt    to    Reach    Heaven.'' 
(Gen.  9.) 

Thought:   "Boasting  is  a  dangerous  thing 
and  not  pleasing  to  the  Lord.) 

"A     Youth     of     Chaldea."     (Gen.     12,     13. 
Pearl  of  Gt.  Price,  Abraham  1,2.) 

Thought:  "Obedience  brings  the  blessings 
of  the  Lord." 
"A   Child   of    Promise."    (Gen.    17,    18,    19.) 
Thought:  "Any  blessing  is  possible  with  the  Lord." 

CHURCH   HISTORY— Book  of   Mormon. 

A  and  B  DEPARTMENTS    (Lessons  to  cover  month). 

"People  United  in  Folly."    (Gen.   11;  Matt.   6.) 

Problems:  What  is  the  proper  way  to  get  into  heaven?  Did  the 
Lord   oppose   unity   or  purpose?      Conditions   after  the   flood. 

"The  Father  of  Nations."    (Gen.  11,  12.) 

Problems:  What  kind  of  parental  influence  did  Abraham  live  under 
while  in  Chaldea?  Why  did  the  Lord  call  Abraham?  Quote  the  bless- 
ings given  to   Abraham? 

C  DEPARTMENT  (Lessons  to  cover  month). 

"At  Jerusalem — Attending  the  Feast  of  the  Passover."  (John  2, 
3.)  Problems:  How  do  you  account  for  the  fact  that  Jesus,  a  young 
despised  Galilean,  could  cleanse  the  temple  without  help?  What 
were  the  prevailing  interests  of  the  Jewish  rulers  as  illustrated  in  the 
events  of  this  lesson?  What  excuse  did  the  Jews  have  for  being  in  the 
Temple  doing  their  trading?  What  must  they  do  with  the  temple  and 
with  themselves  to  become  fit  for  the  kingdom  of  God?  What  does 
it  mean  to  be  "born  again"? 

"At  Jacob's  Well  and  at  Sychar."  (John  4).  Problems:  Give  thr  e 
good  reasons  why  the  woman  of  Samaria  was  amazed  when  spoken  to 
by  Christ?  Cite  examples  in  this  lesson  in  which  Christ  shows  that 
He  is  divine  and  that  He  is  human? 

GOSPEL  DOCTRINE   (Lessons  to  cover  month). 

"Era  of  Elisha."     (B.C.  895.)      (11  Kings  2,  3,  4.) 

"The   Siege  of   Samaria."    (B.C.   894-892.)      (11    Kings   5,   6,   7.) 

"The  Accession  of  Jehu."      (B.C.   884.)      (11   Kings  8,  9,   10.) 


Hepetema,  1941  TE   KARERE  781 

MAORI  CLASS— 

RATAPU   TUATAHI 

Mo  te  WHAKAWAKANGA.  Kei  a  Ihu  Karaiti  te  mana  ki  te 
whakawa  i  te  tangata,  e  whakahaeretia  e  la  tenei  kia  rite  ano  hei  tatu- 
tanga  pai  mo  ana  mea  katoa,  ko  aua  mea  nei  ano  hoki  ko  a  Tona  Matua 
e  pai  ana.  Kua  tuhituhia  e  Hoani  nga  kupu  a  te  Karaiti — "E  kore  hoki 
te  Matua  e  whakawa  i  tetahi,  engari  kua  tukua  e  la  nga  whakawa 
katoa  ki  te  Tama,  kia  rite  ai  te  whakahonore  a  nga  tangata  katoa  i  te 
Tama  ki  ta  ratou  whakahonore  i  te  Matua,  ki  te  kahore  tetahi  e  whaka- 
honore i  te  Tama  e  whakakahore  ano  ia  i  te  honore  mo  te  Matua 
nana  nei  Ia  i  tono  mai."  A  ia  Pita  e  whakamarama  ana  i  te  Rongonai 
ki  te  tangata  whakapono  o  nga  Tuiwi  kia  Koroniria  e  mea  ana  mo  Ihu 
Karaiti  ara:  "Ko  Ia  ta  te  Atua  i  whakarite  ai  hei  kai-whakawa  mo  nga 
tangata  ora,  mo  nga  tangata  mate."  Mo  te  mate  mo  te  hunga  kino 
kua  takoto  mai  mo  te  ra  whakawa  he  maha  nga  poropiti  kua  whai 
whakaaturanga  a  me  te  Timuaki  o  nga  kai  whakawa  o  taua  whakawa- 
kanga  whakawehi  kua  homai  he  whakaaturanga  nana  ake  nga  kupu 
ano  te  marama  me  te  u  e  kore  e  taea  te  karo.  Ko  nga  wairua  katoa 
e  karangatia  ana  ki  te  whakaatu  i  te  tika  o  nga  whakaaturanga  mo 
ona  me  te  whakaae  ki  te  whakataunga  mo  ana  mahi.  Nga  kupu  a  te 
Ariki  me  a  ona  poropiti  e  tino  marama  ana.  E  hara  ia  i  te  kai  whaka- 
pai  kanohi,  a  ko  te  whakatuara  ki  tetahi,  e  poka  ke  ana  i  to  tika  e 
tau  hou  ana  ia  ki  tera  ahua.  Ki  tenei  whakawakanga  ko  te  hunga 
tutu  ripeneta  kore  anake  e  ahei  kia  wehi.  Ki  te  hunga  tika  ia  he 
koanga. 
Nga    Patai: 

1.  Kei  a  wai  te  mana  mo  te  whakawakanga  o  nga  tangata  katoa? 

2.  E  pehea  ana  hoki  tana  whakataunga? 

3.  He  aha  i  riro  ai  mana  e  whakawa? 

RATAPU  TUARUA 

MO  TE  HARA.  He  aha  te  ahua  o  te  hara?  Mo  tenei  patai  koia 
tenei  te  whakautu  a  Hoani  te  Apotoro.  'Te  tangata  e  mea  ana  i  te 
hara,  he  takahi  tana  i  te  ture;  he  takahi  hoki  te  hara  i  te  ture."  I 
roto  i  te  reo  tuatahi  o  nga  whakaaturanga  o  te  Paipera,  he  maha  nga 
kupu  i  huaina  mo  ta  tatou  kupu  kotahi  mo  te  hara,  otira,  katoa  enei 
kupu  kotahi  ano  te  tatunga  atu  o  nga  tikanga  ara  he  pokanga  ketanga 
i  ta  te  Atua  i  pai  ai.  I  te  mea  ko  te  Atua  te  toputan.ua  o  nga  mea 
tika  katoa,  ko  taua  pokanga  ketanga  he  whakakahore  i  nga  tikanga 
mo  te  haere  whakamua  he  whakamaunga  atu  ki  nga  meatanga  e  tika 
atu  hei  ki  te  tapokotanga.  Ko  te  hara  ahakoa  ko  tehea  ahua.  te  kore  e 
whakarite  i  nga  mea  e  ahei  ana  kia  whakaritea  ko  te  whakarite  ranei 
i  nga  mahi  kahore  nei  e  whakaaetia  kia  mahia,  ko  taua  ahua  te  aupiki- 
tanga  0  to  te  tangata  wairua,  i  te  mea  ko  te  huarahi  tika  e  maro  atu 
ana  ki  te  oranga  tonutanga,  waihoki  ko  te  hara  e  kukuuio  aua  ki  to 
pouritanga  o  te  matenga  tuarua.  Ko  te  hara  he  mea  whakamohio  mai 
ki  te  ao  e  Hatana;  otira,  na  to  Atua  to  whakaaot anga  ki  to  tangata  kia 
tukua  kia  tutaki  ki  te  hara,  to  mohiotanga  ki  te  rereketanga  o  te  kino 
me  to  pai  he  mea  kite  i  te  tutukitanga  atu  ki  aua  mea. 

Nga    Patai: 

1.     He   alia   te   whakautu    a    llnani    mo   tonoi       lie   aha   to   hara'.' 

-.    Ki  ta  nga  korero  karaipiture  he  aha  te  tino  tatutanga  o  tenei 

mea   0   te   hara'.' 

RATAPU   TUATORU 

M()  TE  HARA   A\<>.     Te  tikanga  mo  te  kupu  hara  i  rungi 
tirohanga  matauranga,  he  tututanga  i  te  ture     i  ranga  i  tenei  I 
ko  te  hara  he  whakamahinga  i  runga  i  te  mohio  i  te  kore  mohi< 


782  TE  KARERE  Hepetema,  1(M1 

E  tino  marama  ana  hoki  i  runga  i  nga  whakaakoranga  karaipitun*  mo 
i  tga  pikaunga  ma  te  tangata,  i  runga  hoki  i  te  tika  tuturu  o  te  Atua, 
ara  i  roto  i  ona  haranga  i  roto  ranei  i  ana  mahi  tika.  Ka  whakawakia 
te  tangata  i  runga  ano  i  te  kaha  o  tona  mohio  me  te  ngohengohe  ki 
nga  ture.  Ki  te  tangata  kaore  nei  ano  kia  whakamohiotia  ki  nga 
ture  o  runga,  ko  te  whakamahinga  o  aua  ture  e  kore  e  pa  nui  kia  ia. 
Ko  nga  hara  hoki  i  mahia  i  runga  i  te  kore  mohio — ara,  mo  nga  ture 
i  tututia  i  runga  i  te  kuare,  he  takawaenga  he  mea  whakarite  mai  ; 
ko  te  ripekatanga  o  te  Karaiti;  a  ko  nga  mahi  o  te  hara  i  runga  i 
tenei  ahua  kaore  e  pa  te  whakawakanga  kia  ratou,  otira,  e  hoatu  he 
wahi  kia  ratou  hei  akonga,  hei  whakaaetanga  hoki  hei  whakakahore  ranei 
i  te  Rongopai. 

Nga    Patai: 

1.  He  aha  te  tikanga  o  te  kupu  i  runga  i  te  tirohanga  matauranga? 

2.  Ka  peheatia  te  whakawakanga  i  te  tangata? 

3.  He  aha  te  wahi  i  hoatu  ki  te  hunga  takahi  ture  i  runga  i  te 
kuaretanga? 

RATAPU    TUAWHA 

MO  TE  HARA  ANO.  I  whakaakona  e  Hakopa  tenei  whaka- 
akoranga.  "Noreira  kua  homai  e  ia  he  ture,  a  ki  te  kahore  he  ture 
i  homai  ki  tetahi,  kahore  ano  hoki  he  whiunga,  a  ki  te  mea  kahore  he 
whiunga,  kahore  ano  hoki  he  whakahenga;  a  ki  te  kahore  he  whaka- 
henga,  ka  whai  tikanga  nga  mahi  tohu  a  te  Mea  Tapu  O  Iharaira  ki 
runga  kia  ratou,  he  mea  na  te  houhanga  a  rongo ;  no  te  mea  ka  whaka- 
orangia  hoki  ratou  e  tona  mana,  ma  te  whakamarietanga  hoki  e  whaka- 
rite nga  tono  a  tona  tika  ki  nga  tangata  katoa  kihai  nei  i  hoatu  taku 
ture  ma  ratou,  a  e  whakaorangia  ratou  i  taua  tarakona  nanakia,  i  te 
mate  raua  ko  te  reinga,  me  te  rewera  me  te  roto  ahi  whakariki,  koia  te 
whakamamaetanga  mutunga  kore;  a  ka  whakahokia  ano  ratou  ki  taua 
Atua  nana  ratou  i  whai  manawa  ai,  koia  nei  te  mea  Tapu  o  Iharaira. 
Ina  poka  ke  ka  tapiritia  mai  e  te  poropiti:  "Otira  aue  te  mate  mo  te 
tangata  e  hoatu  nei  te  ture  kia  ia,  ae  ra,  mo  te  tangata  kei  a  ia  nei 
nga  ture  katoa  a  te  Atua,  penei  me  tatou,  a  takahia  ana  e  ia,  me  te 
maumau  ano  i  nga  ra  o  tona  oranga,  he  tu  wehi  rawa  hoki  tona.  E 
tino  pa  tuturu  ana  tenei  ki  nga  whakaakoranga  a  Paora  ki  te  hunga  o 
Roma.  "Te  hunga  hoki  i  hara  ture  kore,  ka  ngaro  ture  kore  ano  hoki ; 
me  te  hunga  i  hara  i  runga  i  te  ture,  kei  te  ture  ano  he  whakahe 
mo  ratou.  A  ko  nga  kupu  o  nga  karaipiture  o  naianei  e  pera  ana 
ano  te  tututanga,  no  te  mea,  kua  kiia  mai  kia  tatou,  i  roto  i  nga 
whakakitenga  ki  te  Hahi  i  enei  wa,  ara  i  roto  i  nga  mea  kua  whiwhi 
ki  nga  manaakitanga  mo  te  hokonga  a  te  Karaiti,  ko  ratou  ko  nga  mea 
"i  mate  ture  kore,"  ka  uru  mai  ki  enei  te  hunga  mohoao  (heathen), 
kua  whakaaria  mai  nei  kua  hokona  ratou  me  te  kupu  tapiritia  mai  "A 
ko  reira  ora  ai  nga  iwi  Atua  kore,  me  te  hunga  kaore  i  matau  ki  te 
ture  ka  whiwhi  wahi  ratou  i  roto  ite  aranga  tuatahi,  ko  te  wahi  mana 
hoki  mo  ratou. 

Nga   Patai: 

1.  Pehea  te  ahua  mehemea  kahore  i  homai  he  ture? 

2.  Pehea  te  kupu  whakaari  mai  mo  te  hunga  mohoao? 


Mission    heads    of    Sunday    School,    Y.M.M.I.A.,    Y.W.M.I.A.,  j 
J      Relief    Society,    and    Primary,    named    by    Mission    Supervisor    of 

I      Church  Vv  elf  are  Programme,  Elder  Wi  Pere  Amaru,  at  Korongata  j 

J      Pioneer    Celebrations,   July    27th,    1941,    as   members   of   Mission  j 

♦      Council  directing  Welfare  Programme.  » 


Hepetema,  1941  TE   KARERE  783 

PRIMARY 

MEMORY   GEM 
"Love   your   enemies,   do   good   to   them  that   hate   you." 

LESSONS: 

FIRST  WEEK 

FAITH  AND   TRUST   IN   GOD 
Objective: 

To  find  out  that  God  will  care  for  us  if  we  put  our  trust  in  Him. 
Suggestions   for  Teaching: 

The  test  of  the  love  of  God  is  keeping  His  commandments.  It 
becomes  our  duty  then  as  teachers,  to  early  direct  the  children  to 
increase  their  faith  by  doing  good  things. 

A  WOMAN'S   FAITH 
(Text:    Matt.    9:20-22;    Mark   5:25-34) 

One  day  Jesus  was  on  his  way  to  Capernaum  to  heal  a  little  girl 
who  was  very   ill. 

As  He  started  through  the  crowd,  many  people  came  forward  to 
speak  to  Him  or  to  ask  Him  questions.  Every  moment  of  delay  made 
the  worried  father  more  anxious.  He  felt  that  if  Jesus  did  not  arrive 
at  his  home  soon  it  would  be  too  late. 

In  the  crowd  there  was  a  poor  woman  who  was  so  ill  that  she  had 
given  up  hope  of  ever  being  well  again.  She  had  spent  all  her  money 
for  doctors,  but  instead  of  getting  better  she  was  worse,  and  had  now 
become  very,   very  poor. 

She  had  heard  of  Jesus  and  the  people  who  had  been  healed  by 
Him.  Even  though  she  had  often  been  near  by  when  He  had  performed 
a  miracle,  she  did  not  have  the  courage  to  go  up  to  Him  and  ask  Him 
to  make  her  well.  When  she  saw  how  kindly  He  smiled  at  Jairus, 
she  longed  more  than  ever  to  be  healed. 

"Perhaps,"  she  thought,  "He  will  never  notice  me  in  all  this 
crowd.      If  I  can  touch  His  clothes,   I  shall  be  whole." 

So  she  quietly  crept  nearer  and  nearer,  and  at  last  managed  to 
reach  out  her  hand  and  touch  His  clothes.  That  very  moment  she  felt 
strong  and  well  again.  Trembling  with  excitement,  she  tried  to  slip 
back  into  the  crowd.  But  Jesus  turned  quickly  and,  looking  round, 
he   said,    "Who  touched   me?" 

The  disciples  were  surprised  that  He  should  ask  such  a  question. 
The  crowd  was  so  great  that  there  were  many  people  touching  Him 
almost  all  the  time.  But  Jesus  knew  that  the  touch  of  the  woman 
was  different  from  the  pressure  of  the  crowd,  for  she  had  touched  Him 
with  a  prayer  in  her  heart  that  she  would  be  healed  and  had  trusted 
that   He   could   heal   her. 

The    frightened    woman    fell    down    before    Him    and    told    Him    her 

story. 

Then  JeSUS  said  to  her,  "Thy  faith  hath  made  thee  whole.  Go  in 
peace." 

SECOND  WEEK 

Objective: 

To  give  the  children  an   hour  of  joyous  sell'  expression. 
Suggestions    for    Teaching: 

"Everyone,  from  the  King's  son  downwards,  should  learn  to  <\^ 
something  finely  and  thoroughly  with  his  hands."     Ruskin, 


784  TE  KARERE  Hepctema,  1(M1 

"Every  child  is  known  by  his  doings,  whether  his  work  be  fine  and 
whether  it  be  right." 

Sometimes  we  get  in  a  hurry  and  are  careless  and  the  result  is  not 
very  nice  work.  Sometimes  we  get  weary  before  a  task  is  completed 
and   miss  the  joy  of  a  task  well-done. 

People  judge  us  by  what  we  do  and  say. 

Story: 

SALLY'S    CLEAN    APRON 

A  lady  wanted  a  trusty  little  girl  to  help  her  take  care  of  her  baby. 
Nobody  could  recommend  one,  and  she  did  not  know  where  to  look  for 
the  right  kind  of  girl.  One  day  she  was  passing  along  the  street  and 
saw  a  little  girl  with  a  clean  apron  holding  a  baby.  She  was  sitting 
in  the  door  way  of  a  small  house. 

'That  is  the  very  girl  I  should  like  to  take  care  of  my  baby,"  said 
the  lady.      She  stopped  and  asked  the  girl  for  her  mother. 

"Mother  has  gone  to  work,"  was  the  reply.  "Father  is  dead  and 
mother  has  to   work." 

"Should  you  like  to  come  and  take  care  of  my  baby  sometimes?" 
asked  the  lady. 

"I  should  like  to  help  my  mother  in  some  way." 

The  lady,  more  pleased  than  ever,  called  to  see  her  mother;  and  the 
end  was  that  the  little  girl  was  to  go  several  days  a  week  to  care 
for  the  lady's  baby. 

The  lady  found  what  she  expected  to  find — that  the  neat  appear- 
ance of  the  girl  showed  that  her  mind  was  clean  and  orderly,  too.  She 
had  no  careless  habits;  she  folded  and  put  things  away  carefully  and 
was  neat  in  all  that  she  did.  The  lady  smiles  when  she  says  "Sally's 
recommendation  was  her  clean  apron." 

THIRD  WEEK 

JOSEPH   AND   HIS    BROTHERS 

Objective: 

In  order  to  please  the  Lord  we  must  have  a  forgiving  spirit. 
Suggestions   for  Teaching: 

How  dull  my  pupils  seemed 

The  day  that  I  forgot 
To  look  at  them  with  kindly  eyes  and  smile. 
And  yet,  on  other  days 

When  I  was  glad  and  matched 
My  zest  for  life  with  theirs,  they  seemed  so  bright! 

— Marie  Hays  Spence. 
Lesson   Approach 

Fill  a  small  glass  bottle  with  wheat  and  another  with  corn.  Pass 
to  the  children  and  let  them  look  at  them.  What  is  it?  Show  picture 
of  a  wheat  field,   or  a  corn  field,   or  both  if  possible. 

To-day  we  are  going  to  hear  how  the  grain  that  Joseph  stored  in 
Egypt  helped  his  brothers.  First,  I'll  tell  you  part  of  our  last  week's 
story  again. 

Lesson   Story: 

BROTHERS  GO  TO  EGYPT 

Remember,  Joseph  lived  in  Egypt — far,  far  away  from  his  father 
and  brothers.  He  could  not  go  home,  much  as  he  wished  to,  so  h"e  did 
the  very  best  he  could  there.  He  worked  hard,  and  Heavenly  Father 
blessed  him  so  that  he  grew  to  be  a  good  and  wise  man. 

He  was  as  wise  that  even  Pharaoh,  the  king  of  Egypt,  heard  about 
him.      And  when  Pharaoh  was  in  trouble  he  sent  for  Joseph.    Heavenly 


Hepetema,  1941  TE   KARERE  785 

Father  caused  Pharaoh  to  have  two  strange  dreams.  He  knew  that  they 
must  mean  something,  but  none  of  his  wise  men  could  tell  him  the  mean- 
ing of  them.  For  days  Pharaoh  was  greatly  troubled.  Then  one  day 
he  sent  for  Joseph.  Joseph  stood  before  the  king  and  listened  to  his 
dreams. 

"Both  of  your  dreams  mean  the  same,"  said  Joseph.  "For  seven 
years  there  will  be  plenty  of  food  throughout  the  land  of  Egypt.  Then 
seven  years  of  famine  will  follow.  During  the  seven  good  years,  food 
and  grain  must  be  stored  up  so  that  the  people  will  not  starve  during 
the  years  when  the  corn  will  not  grow." 

"That  will  be  a  wise  thing  to  do,"  said  the  king.  Whom  did  the 
king  choose  to  gather  up  and  store  the  grain  during  the  seven  years 
of  plenty? 

Joseph  was  very  busy  after  that.  He  had  big  store  houses  or 
granaries  buiilt  in  which  to  store  the  grain.  He  had  the  farmers  plant 
all  the  corn  and  wheat  they  could.  Then  when  the  grain  was  ripe  he 
had  them  store  what  they  did  not  need  in  the  granaries.  For  seven 
years  everybody  worked  hard.  Heavenly  Father  sent  sunshine  and 
rain  and  the  grain  grew  plentifully. 

Then  there  came  a  time  when  the  seeds  that  were  planted  could  not 
grow  for  the  sun  was  hot  and  no  rain  fell.  The  people  were  hungry. 
Joseph  opened  the  granaries  and  sold  them  food. 

Far  away  from  Egypt  in  Joseph's  old  home  there  was  no  food. 
His  father  and  brothers  were  hungry.  Jacob  said  to  his  sons,  "I  have 
heard  there  is  corn  in  Egypt.  Go  down  and  buy  so  we  will  not  die 
of  hunger."  So  ten  of  the  sons  took  donkeys  and  started  for  Egypt 
to  buy  food.  Jacob  would  not  let  Benjamin  go.  He  was  afraid  some 
harm  might  come  to  the  boy,  and  kept  him  at  home. 

The  ten  brothers  went  to  Joseph  to  buy  corn.  They  did  not  know 
that  this  great  man  was  their  brother  whom  they  had  sold  so  many 
years  before. 

When  they  came  into  the  large  room  where  Joseph  was,  they  bowed 
down  before  him.  When  Joseph  saw  them  he  knew  who  they  were, 
and  thought  of  his  dream.  Do  you  remember  it?  His  dream  had 
come  true.  Joseph  did  not  let  his  brothers  know  that  he  knew  them. 
He  might  have  sent  them  away  without  food  to  punish  them  for  their 
unkindness  to  him  when  he  was  a  boy.  But  what  do  you  suppose  he 
did?  Of  course,  he  forgave  them.  Before  he  gave  them  corn  to  take 
home,  he  asked  them  where  they  came  from.  They  said  that  they  came 
from  Caanan  to  buy  corn.  Joseph  pretended  not  to  believe  them  and 
said,  "Ye  are  spies."  "Oh,  no,"  they  said,  "we  are  brothers.  There 
were  twelve  of  us;  one  Benjamin  is  with  our   father,  and  one  is  not." 

Joseph  longed  to  see  Benjamin  again  for  he  loved  him.  He  said, 
"I  shall  keep  one  of  you  here.  The  others  may  go  back  with  the  corn, 
When  you  come  again  you  must  bring  Benjamin  with  you.  If  yen  do 
(his,   then   I  shall   believe  that  what    you    have   said    is   true." 

The  brothers  were  sad.  Joseph  was  sad,  too.  His  eyes  Ailed  with 
tears.  He  went  away  from  them  and  wept.  After  awhile  he  talked 
with  his  brothers  again.  He  chose  Simeon  to  stay  and  told  the  others 
to  get  ready  for  their  journey.  Thm  he  told  his  servant  to  till  his 
brother's  sacks  with  coin,  and  on  top  of  the  corn  to  put   the  money 

they   had    paid    for   it. 

After  the  long  journey,  the  nine  brothers  reached  homo.     They 

told    their    father    all    that     had    happened    --how    the    great     ruler    would 

not  believe  them;  how  he  had  kept  Simeon  in  Egypt  and  had  said  that 
they  must  m>t  c<nnc  again  to  buy  com  unless  they  brouj  hi  Benjamin 
with  them.     And  when  they  opened  thru-  sacks  of  corn  what  did  they 

find  They  kmwv  that  the  corn  was  a  present  and  they  Could  not  under- 
stand. 


TE  ECARERE  Hepetema,  1941 

We  must  wait  for  the  next  story  about  Joseph  to  know  what  hap- 
pened the  next  time  the  brothers  went  to  Egypt  to  buy  corn. 

Conversation   After   the   Story: 

How  did  Joseph  treat  his  brothers  when  he  had  a  chance  to  "gel 
even"  with  them?  Jesus  said,  "Love  your  enemies,  do  good  to  them 
that  hate  you."  If  we  remember  this  story,  how  will  we  treat  our 
playmates  when  they  are  unkind  to  us?      (Teacher  give  examples.) 

FOURTH  WEEK 

THE  POWER  OF  PRAYER 
Objective: 

The  prayer  of  faith  brings  comfort,  help  and  protection. 
Suggestions  for  Teaching: 

One  of  the  greatest  needs  of  the  world  to-day  is  more  faith  in 
our  Heavenly  Father  and  a  greater  willingness  to  seek  His  divine  guid- 
ance through  prayer.  The  teachers'  attitude  and  spirit  will  do  much 
to  impress  the  truth  of  this  lesson. 

Lesson  Story: 

NOT  ALONE 

Andy  stepped  out  of  the  little  one-room  house  with  the  dirt  floor 
and  stood  watching  the  sun  go  down.  This  was  the  hardest  part  of  the 
day  for  him,  to  have  it  grow  dark  and  to  be  alone  out  on  this  big,  lone- 
some ranch.  Of  course  he  wouldn't  have  admitted  it  to  anybody. 
Far  from  it.  But  still  for  a  boy  of  eleven  to  stay  alone  on  the  ranch 
to  take  care  of  the  stock  was  pretty  much  of  a  job  and  he  was  looking 
forward  to  the  time  when  his  brother  would  be  better  and  Dad  could 
come   back  and   be  with  him. 

He'd  felt  proud  the  way  Dad  had  looked  at  him  when  he  said  he 
would  stay  and  take  care  of  the  ranch.  That  ranch  was  a  very  im- 
portant place.  There  were  eight  big  teams  that  they  used  on  the  con- 
tracts that  Dad  took  from  time  to  time,  and  then  there  was  a  cow  to 
milk,  chickens  to  take  care  of,  and  then  somebody  had  to  keep  watch 
and  drive  out  the  cattle  that  were  all  around  the  place  and  kept  getting 
in  the  grain  and  corn. 

They  had  just  finished  dinner,  the  day  before  yesterday,  and  were 
coming  out  of  the  house  when  a  messenger  came  galloping  up. 

"Mr.  Andrews,  your  youngest  son  is  very  ill  with  diphtheria.  Your 
vife  wants  you  to  come  to  town  at  once.  Unless  there  is  a  turn  for  the 
setter  he  won't  last  long." 

"I'll  have  to  get  some  one  to  stay  with  the  stock  and  keep  any 
strays  from  getting  in  the  field.  I'll  ride  over  to  the  Gonzalas'  place 
and   see   if   one   of  their  men  will   come   over." 

Andy  was  surprised  to  hear  Dad  say  that.  He'd  heard  him  say 
before  that  he  didn't  like  those  people  on  the  place  for  they  usually 
carried  off  enough  things  to  make  them  rather  unsatisfactory.  Nello 
must  be  pretty  sick. 

"Maybe  I  could  stay  with  the  place."  Andy  had  said,  a  little  sur- 
prised to  hear  himself  say  it. 

"I'm  afraid  that  would  be  a  little  too  much  for  you,  Son,"  said 
his  did.  "This  is  quite  a  lonesome  place,  you  know,  and  there's  lots 
to  be  done.  I'd  better  go  get  a  man,  I  guess.  You  might  stay  with 
one  of  them  and  kinda  help  watch  things." 

"But,  Father,  I  don't  like  to  stay  with  the  Mexicans.  They  smoke 
in  the  house  and  I  can't  understand  them  and  they  talk  about  me  and 
laugh.      I  can  stay  aione.      Honest  I  can.      I  can  grain  the  horses  and 


Hepetema,  1941  TE   KARERE  787 

milk  the  cow  and  with  old  Tip  to  help  I  can  drive  any  old  cows  out  of 
the  corn  if  they  get  in." 

"All  right,  Son.  Go  bring  the  horses  up  and  put  them  in  the 
corral  so  I  can  saddle  Flash.  I'll  let  the  stirrups  out  and — "  It  was 
the  way  Dad  had  looked  at  him  then  that  made  Andy  feel  good  inside. 
"Hurry.      I  must  get  started." 

Andy  hadn't  said  much  as  his  father  rode  off.  He  didn't  dare  to. 
Just  kissed  him  goodbye  and  stood  watching  him  until  he  galloped  out 
of  sight  a  mile  and  a  half  away.  That  was  more  than  two  days  ago 
and  so  far  he'd  kept  things  going  fine.  But  now  it  was  almost  night 
again  and  he'd  have  to  drive  the  horses  to  the  big  springs  for  water. 

He  liked  that  job.  The  horses  seemed  to,  also;  especially  when 
they  weren't  working,  like  now.  They'd  gallop  along  and  pretend  to 
kick  and  bite  at  each  other,  and  old  Tip  would  run  along  and  bark 
playfully  at  them.  It  was  just  a  mile  to  the  big  springs  and  he  some- 
times wished  that  he  had  to  take  them  oftener  than  twice  a  day. 

The  big  springs  were  funny.  Some  called  them  hot  springs  but 
they  weren't  hot.  Just  warm.  Just  right  for  swimming,  and  when 
some  other  kids  were  there  they  had  a  lot  of  fun.  But  Dad  didn't  want 
him  to  swim  in  them  when  he  was  alone. 

Dad  had  said  that  they  were  really  holes  in  an  underground  lake. 
That  the  lake  was  all  over  under  the  ground  and  was  covered  with  a 
layer  of  lime  rock.  Anyway  all  the  ropes  they  had  tied  together  with 
a  rock  on  the  end  wouldn't  touch  the  bottom,  so  they  were  pretty  deep. 
And  you  could  take  a  stick  and  poke  it  back  under  the  edge  of  those 
springs  and  the  stick  wouldn't  touch  anything.  They  didn't  do  much 
diving  in  the  springs  because  if  a  fellow  came  up  back  under  that  wall 
it  would  be  just  too  bad. 

Andy  galloped  along  easily  after  the  horses.  He  liked  to  watch 
Dad's  favourite  team.  Two  big  mules,  Bill  and  Tom.  They  stood 
fourteen  hands  high  and  Dad  said  they  could  do  more  work  than  two 
ordinary  teams  of  horses.  Bill's  long  ears  looked  like  they  were  loose 
the  way  they  wobbled  back  and  forth  as  he  walked. 

When  they  got  nearly  to  the  springs  the  horses  all  began  to  gallop 
harder  because  the  days  were  hot  and  they  were  all  thirsty.  Old  Tom 
and  Bill  arrived  at  the  big  spring  and  were  drinking,  but  evidently  they 
weren't  through  playing.  Bill  .nipped  at  Tom  and  Tom  jerked  back  and 
he  must  have  slipped.  Anyway  Andy  heard  a  big  splash,  and  the  next 
instant  Tom  was  out  in  that  big  spring  swimming  around  and  trying  to 
climb  out.  But  every  time  he  put  his  feet  on  the  bank  where  there 
was  a  low  place,  his  hind  feet  went  under  the  bank  and  he'd  splash 
under  all  over. 

Andy  stood  watching  him  for  a  minute.  It  was  easy  to  see  he 
couldn't  keep  that  up  long.  Pretty  soon  he'd  tire  out  and  go  under, 
then  Dad's  favourite  team  would  be  broken  up.  Andy  didn't  even  have 
a  rope.  And  it  was  nearly  dark.  The  nearest  help  was  the  Mexican 
houses  about  three  miles  away  and  something  told  him  that  that  would 
be  too  long  a  wait  even  if  they   would  come  and   help  him. 

Well,  maybe  if  he  made  this  saddle  horse  go  as  fast  as  he  could, 
he  could  get  to   the   house   and   get    a    rope   and    maybe    help   a    little. 

The  next  instant  he  was  in  the  saddle  and  tiding  full  speed.  A 
hundred  yards  away  he  stopped  and  looked  kirk.  II,  -till  could  Bee 
old  Tom  BWimming  around.  He  jumped  on  the  horse  and.  holding  the 
reins   over   One   arm,    he   dropped    on    his   knees, 

"Please,  Father  in   Heaven,  don't   lot   old  Tom  drown.     Help  me 

to   know    what    to   do   to   gel    him    out.       Ami    please   don't    let    him    drown 

'cause    I    want    to   take   | I   'air   ofthingSlintll    Dad  gets   kirk." 

He   jumped   to   his    feet    ;ind    in    fifteen    muni!,  kirk 

from    the    house    with    a     rope.       It     was    getting    darker.       He     rode    fast 


788 


TE  KARERE 


Hepetema,  \l)A\ 


and  straight  to  the  big  spring,  llv'd  get  a  rope  on  the  mule's  Qeck 
and  then  tie  it  if  he  could  so  he  wouldn't  go  under  and  then  go  for  help. 

And  then  he  was  so  startled  he  almost  fell  off  the  horse.  For 
there  right  in  the  road  was  old  Tom.  He  was  still  very  wot,  but  he 
was  grazing  along  as  if  nothing  had  happened.  Andy  jumped  off  his 
horse  and  knelt  down  again.  He  was  so  thankful  that  it  felt  like  his 
heart  came  right  up  in  his  throat  and  he  had  to  keep  blinking  his  eyes. 

When  he  got  in  sight  of  the  house  there  was  a  light.  He  raced 
gladly  to  welcome  Dad.  He  gave  him  a  big  hug  and  was  turning  away 
to  put  the  horses  in  the  pasture  when  Dad  said,  "Well  how  do  you  like 
staying  alone,  Andy?      Nello  is  a  lot  better." 

"It  wasn't  bad,  Father,  because  I  found  out  that  I  wasn't  as  much 
alone  as  I  thought." 

Then  he  told  about  old  Tom. 

Conversation    After    the    Story: 

Are  our  prayers  always  answered?      Let  us  see  why? 

NEWS  FROM  THE  FIELD 


AUCKLAND     DISTRICT 

The  news  is  not  so  much,  but  still  it 
is  Rood  stuff.  President  Cowley  and  his 
jrood  wife  have  been  "doing  the  town  in 
fine  style"  lately.  Why,  just  to-night, 
after  returning  from  a  meeting  of  the 
English  Speaking  Union,  they  both  were 
very  pleased  to  have  been  able  to  accept 
the  invitation  to  attend.  According  to 
Sister  Cowley — "Why  President  was  right 
up  there  with  all  the  high  society,  etc." 
— there  was  former  Mayor  Sir  Ernest 
Davis,  His  Grace  former  Archbishop 
Averill  of  the  Church  of  England,  who, 
by  the  way,  introduced  Mr.  Matthew 
Cowley  as  the  speaker  of  the  e-vening, 
Canon  Coats,  Mr.  Eady,  Mr.  Groeninger 
(American    Consul),    and    many    others. 

The  Auckland  Branch  Singing  Mothers 
made  their  first  public  appearance  at  a 
Branch  Concert  held  in  the  Chapel, 
Queen  Street,  promoted  by  Brothers 
Harold  Stokes  and  Walter  Smith  in  aid 
of  Branch  funds.  The  concert  was  the 
result  of  "repeat  request"  of  a  concert 
held  about  a  month  previously.  Takings 
were  indeed  very  gratifying.  The  Relief 
Society  of  the  Branch  were  responsible 
by  way  of  a  "Bazaar"  in  adding  to  the 
patriotic  funds  account  the  amount  of 
£30.  This  is  indeed  a  fine  effort  and 
was  thankfully  received  and  appreciated 
by  the  Patriotic  Council.  It  is  also 
worthy  of  mention  that  the  Branch  Re- 
lief Society  is  a  really  active  and  grow- 
ing  organization      Keep   it   up. 

Peter  A.  Smith  of  Whakaki  was  bap- 
tized by  Kelly  Harris  at  Auckland  Sun- 
day, August  3rd,  1941,  and  President 
Cowley   voiced  the  confirmation. 

WAIKATO    DISTRICT 

Reported    by    Dave    Ormsby    and 

Douglas  Whatu 

In     the     past     quarter     the     number     of 

meetings     held     throughout     the     District 

have    increased    in    value    spiritually    and 

otherwise.      Sunday    School    meetings    are 


held  regularly  in  all  of  the  regularly 
organized  Branches.  Because  of  the  cen- 
sus carried  out  so  far,  much  contact 
has  been  made  with  the  Saints.  The  work 
of  visiting  with  the  Saints  is  an  import- 
ant work  that  is  being  carried  out  every- 
where, and  special  mention  is  made  of 
the  work  accomplished  by  brother  Howard 
Osborne  and  his  associates  in  Taumarunui 
in  holding  meetings  and  visiting  the 
people. 

The  District  Presidency  is  looking  to 
all  branches  to  respond  to  the  call  to 
work  more  sincerely  and  diligently  in 
their  various  organizations.  What's  hap- 
pened to  the  Sunday  Schools  in  this  dis- 
trict? 

We  are  gratified  at  the  marked  im- 
provement in  the  condition  of  Maisie 
Turinui  who  has  been  an  inmate  of  the 
Waikato  Hospital  for  the  past  two  years, 
the  major  portion  of  which  she  has  been 
bed-ridden.  The  fact  that  she  is  now  able 
to  walk  must  be  attributed  to  her  strong 
faith,  irrespective  of  the  advances  made 
to   her   from   other   sources. 

Brother  and  Sister  John  Paki  announce 
with  pride  and  unbridled  joy  the  birth  of 
"another  girl,"  which  makes  the  ninth 
of  a  family  of  11.  Congratulations.  But 
my,  are  they  all  going  to  be  nurses. 
John? 

By  the  way,  all  Branch  Whakapapa 
boards,  send  in  the  accounts  of  your 
work.  We  would  be  pleased  to  hear  from 
SEVEN    Boards    instead    of   just    THREE. 

We  hope  that  Brother  Stockman's 
family  will  recover  very  quickly  from 
the  physical  ailments  now  bothering  them. 
Kia    kaha    e    hoa    ma 

MAHIA  DISTRICT 

Reported   by   Elsie   Loader 

Reporter's    apologies    for    the    omission 

of  news  from  this  district  for  the  August 

issue,    however    here    we    are    again. 

Appointments. — Y.W.MI.A.:  Heni  Te- 
ngaio,  1st  Counsellor;  Ira  Mataira,  2nd 
Counsellor;     Rangi     Tengaio,     teacher     of 


Hepetema,  1941 


TE   KARERE 


789 


Junior     Girls.  Welfare     Officer:      Tuati 

Whaanga  for  Nuhaka.  Deacons:  Tahinga 
Winiana,  Ropiha  Campbell  and  Reginald 
Solomon.  Baptisms:  Jimmy  Harete  Smith 
(8),  son  of  Dave  and  Ripeka  Smith  of 
Tahaenui ;  Te  Hirata  Watene,  daughter  of 
Maehe  and  Rumatiki  Watene  of  Waima- 
rama  by  Lester  Harris.  Births:  Ngatua- 
hine  0.  Wai  Kingi,  daughter  of  Sonny 
Kingi  of  Tahaenui.;  Tuati  Egypt  Smith, 
son  of  Patricia  and  Willie  Smith  of 
Whakaki. 

Preparations  are  well  in  hand  for  the 
Gold  and  Green  Ball — Queen  candidates 
being  Miss  Joan  Kireka  (Camp  Queen) 
and  Miss  Ira  Mataira  (Nuhaka  Queen). 
Sid  Kamau's  orchestra  from  Korongata, 
Hastings,  will  be  playing  for  the  Ball. 
A   very   successful   evening  is   anticipated. 

We  regret  to  hear  that  Pte.  Poneke 
Te  Kauru,  son  of  Hohepa  and  Heni  Te 
Kauru,  is  now  a  prisoner  of  war.  Pte. 
Tom  Waerea  is  safe,  well  and  happy. 
Brothers  Riki  and  Cleo  Smith,  George 
Pomana  and  Tom  Mahanga  are  training 
at  Papakura.  Quite  a  number  of  our 
Mutual  members  are  patiently  waiting  to 
enter  camp,  having  already  been  medi- 
cally passed. 

The  Nuhaka  football  team  were  again 
successful  in  winning  the  senior  cham- 
pionships and  are  scheduled  to  play  the 
winning  team  of  the  Napier-Hastings 
competitions.  Brothers  Eru  and  Joseph 
R.  Tengaio,  with  Sisters  Milly  and  Rangi 
Tengaio,  were  visitors  to  the  Pioneer  Day 
Celebrations  held  at  Korongata  July  27th 
and  28th.  Hearty  congratulations  are  ex- 
tended to  Joseph  R.  Tengaio  upon  his 
annointment  to  the  Mission  Sunday  School 
Board.      Kia   kaha   brother. 

The  last  week  of  July  has  brought 
much  sorrow  to  Saints  and  friends  in 
Nuhaka,  there  being  three  deaths  in  one 
week  July  26th,  Sister  Mihi  Whaanga 
Toroaiwhiti  (77),  daughter  of  Mere  and 
Hirini  Whaanga  and  mother  of  Presi- 
dent Hirini  Christy,  passed  away  peace- 
fully after  having  been  confined  to  her 
bed  for  nearly  four  months.  The  same 
day,  Mary  (7),  daughter  of  William  and 
Api  Ropitini,  died,  preceding  her  brother 
Henry  who  died  on  the  27th;  four  other 
members    of    this    family    are    inmates    of 

the  Wairoa  Hospital.  Funeral  service  for 
Mary     Ropitini     was     held     in     the     I'reshy- 

terian    Chapel    on    Sunday,    conducted    by 

Rev.     Lawton.      Bro.     William     Christy    was 

privileged  to  speak  at  this  service. 
Henry's  last  rites  were  conducted  in  the 
I..D.S.  Chapel  with  Rev.  Lawton  con- 
ducting a  verv  [nspiril i  lc<  ,  Sis- 
ter   Mihi's    funeral    service   CODlSie I    im- 

mediately  following  I  he  meet  ins  eon- 
ducted  by  Rev.  Lawton.  Bro  Tamahau 
ii.ii onga,  assist,  d  by  Eru  Tei 
Walker  an. I  William  Christy,  were  in 
charge  of  thi  ei  i  Ice,  durins  which  Te 
Wai  I  [aronga  conl  ribut  ed  ■  <  teal  tol  •  . 
a  ml  i  he  Bins  Ins.  Mot  her  i  ndered  a 
r in . i  ii  .  addre  e  w<  e  given  bj  Eru 
Tengaio  and  William  <  Ihri  1 1  Heart  \ 
sympathy  from  ail  are  extended  to  the 
relatives  of  the  d<  cea  •  d      ■••  hil»   ■■    - 

and     prayers    are    Tor    the    speed)     r-  ■ 

..I  Mi.,  tour  little  Ropitini  childn  n  no*  in 
ho  pital 


Thu 


HAURAKI    DISTRICT 
Reported    by    Rose    Watene 

Hui     Parihi     held     at     Kiri     Kiri, 


Thames,  May  17  and  18,  was  very  suc- 
cessful June  15  marked  the  passing  of 
James  Watene,  elder  brother  to  George 
and  son  of  Pirimona  Watene.  The  pass- 
ing of  brother  Murupara  is  announced  in 
the    Maori   notices    in   this    issue. 

Sister  Anne  Whatu  Young  is  grieved 
at  the  loss  of  her  5-months  baby  boy 
on  July  22.  The  baby  was  buried  at  the 
Totara   Cemetery. 

August  2nd,  1941,  was  the  occasion  of 
the  83rd  birthday  celebrations  for  Sister 
Payne  of  Thames  and  her  twin  sister, 
Mrs.  Fisher,  which  took  the  form  of  a 
party  at  the  home  of  Sister  Payne,  where 
a  very  large  gathering  joined  in  the  en- 
joyable   spirit    of    the    occasion. 

MANAWATU  BRANCH 
Reported   by   Polly    WiNeera 

The  newly-organized  Branch  at  Awa- 
puni,  Palmerston  North,  seems  to  be  do- 
ing fine,  and  has  only  recently  been 
visited  by  members  on  the  District  Pre- 
sidency and  also  the  Relief  Society.  Sis- 
ter Paeroa  WiNeera  also  visited  the  Wel- 
lington Relief  Society  and  reports  that 
one  of  the  finest  Branches  of  the  District 
are   carrying   on    their   work    there. 

Member  of  the  Relief  Society  of  the 
Porirua  Branch  packed  and  sent  13  par- 
cels to  the  boys  from  this  Branch  now 
serving  with  the  Middle  East  Forces 
overseas,    on    July    30th 

Sister  Emily  Mark,  of  the  Madsen 
Branch,  is  now  in  our  midst.  Welcome 
Emily,  now  that  you  are  one  of  us  (we 
hear  that  you  are  here  permanently)  ; 
we  expect  big  things  from  you.  What 
is    Madsen's    loss    is    surely    our    gain. 

On  August  1st  a  party  was  held  by 
the  family  of  Leo  I'arata  to  honour  him 
on  his  loth  birthday.  Friends  and  rela- 
tives gathered  there  to  wisli  him  the 
best. 

HAWKE'S    BAY 
Reported    by    John    T.    Meha 

Brother    Taylor     Mihaore    is    at     present 

labouring  in  the  Taranaki  Districl  with 
Brother    Take     Toroaiwhiti,    where    they 

are     doing     some     tine     work. 

Takerei   Ihaia  is  tin-  name  given  to  the 

"ii     Lorn     to     brother     and        i  .< ,  r     Cliarl. 

Solomon   of    Wandermere,   Opapa 

.i able   comment    w as   made   in   t he 
i  .  •  •      I  .nice     concernins     the     series     of 
pat  riot  Ic    funct  Ion  ■    hi  id    under    t  hi    aus- 
■  i    the    Tapairu 

of     Waipawa.      Of     particular     men,  ion     was 

H,. ■    Black-out     Hail.     Worth: 

and 

on    the   com- 
mittee.    Who     ar  .■     ;il    ,.     t  he     Btromol  .  I 

irer. 
•rh.-    winner    of    th< 

which 

.•ni  u    1 1.  i.i   .,  •    i 
Rakaipaka    I'm  i 
in      competitor   In   a    fold   of   twentj      Ri 

i     entitled   t,.   tl,..    iptcial   pi  i   .    offered   bj 


7"|, 


II.  KARERE 


Hepetema,  1941 


President  Cow  h  y.  Bven  if  Ha  hail  not 
w.n  lu-  deserved  ■  prise  for  genera]  ap- 
pearance, as  his  heard  was  grown  with  a 
view  to  catching  the  eye.  How  aboul  it. 
girla  ? 

TARANAKI  DISTRICT 
Reported  by  Zena  M.  Stent 
The  Cribfa  family  living  up  the  river 
(Wanganui)  were  visited  by  Presidents 
Tukino  Hakopa  and  Wi  Katene  of  the 
District  Presidency  on  July  6th,  1941. 
Sister  Cribb  has  been  ill,  her  recovery  is 
gradual  and  sure.  We  hope  and  pray  for 
your  full  measure  of  strength  and  happi- 
ness, Sister  Cribb.  Sister  Katene  has  also 
been  ill  lately,  and  due  to  the  adminis- 
trations of  the  Priesthood  is  now  up  and 
about  again.  The  Wanganui  Branch  is  on 
the  rise,  particularly  financially.  We 
hope  that  all  things  will  work  out  for  the 
best    always. 

Missionaries,  Brothers 
Mihaere  report  having 
i  the  north  and  south 
Taranaki,  which  includes  Waitara,  New 
Plymouth,  Parihaka,  Opunake  and  Manaia. 
The  Primary  Presidency  of  the  Manaia 
Branch  has  been  released  and  a  new  one 
set  up.  Honourably  released  were  Sis- 
ters Martha  Morgan,  Rita  Nuku,  Bessie 
Daymond  and  Alice  Manu.  New  appoint- 
ments were  Sisters  Rita  Nuku  (Pres.), 
Bessie  Daymond  and  Doris  Manu,  coun- 
sellors, and  Caroline  Manu  secretary. 
The  vacancy  in  the  Relief  Society  was 
filled  by  Sister  Martha  Morgan,  necessi- 
tated by  the  death  of  the  Sister  Ihipera 
Henare. 


The      District 
Toroaiwhiti    and 

'isited     Saints 


OVERSEAS 
Reported   by    Polly    WiNeera 

Eunice    I)    Smith,    daughter    of    Mr...    and 

Sister  Weston  .1.  Smith,  formerly  of  Pal- 
merston    North,    now    of    Preston,    Idaho. 

was  married  to  Rohert  Lewis  Heesley,  a 
former  missionary  of  New  Zealand,  by 
President  Quinney  in  the  Logan  Temple. 
Elder  Be<  Bley  has  been  appointed  to  the 
permanent  staff  of  the  Union  Pacific  Rail- 
ways. It  seems  as  though  this  young 
married  couple  found  little  else  to  d  i 
the  day  after  their  marriage  except  plan. 
six  thousand  tomato  plants  in  a  two-acre 
lot  which  his  father  made  over  to  them. 
Their    home    is    in    Ogden,    Utah. 

We  have  to  congratulate  the  following 
Elders  On  their  recent  marriagi  s  :  Elders 
Westenskow,  Price,  Taylor,  Richard  Lam- 
bert and  Kirkland,  who  is  now  in  the 
clothing  business  in  Salt  Lake.  We  have 
to  congratulate,  also,  the  following  for 
being  such  proud  daddies:  Elders  Parker. 
Hutchinson,  Pendleton  and  Cannon  Lam- 
bert, who  is  running  a  large  Auto  Park 
called  "Evergreen."  It  is  outfitted  with 
fancy  water  fountains  and  in  the  small 
lakes  which  he  has  made  he  has  bred  a 
large  number  of  ducks  which  float  on  the 
water  all  day  long,  and  this  sight  seems 
to  be  quite  effective  in  the  heart  of  a 
busy   city. 

Elder  Mason  has  been  called  to  the 
United  States  Army,  where  he  will  serve 
Uncle    Sam    for    two    years. 

Weston  J.  Smith  also  reports  that 
Stanley  Pentecost,  formerly  of  Palmer- 
ston  North,  is  a  very  prosperous  person 
over    in    the    land    of    Zion. 


Whangarei  District  Hui  Pariha  to  be  held  at  Mokau,  October  25th 
and  26th,  1941.      A  cordial  invitation  is  extended  to  all. 

— Wiremu  Kingi  Rapata 
Morore  H.  Piripi 
Wiremu  Pita 
Pita  Reihana  Pene 
GRATITUDE. 

Sincere  appreciation  and  thankfulness  is  extended  to  Tetana  Te 
Hira  of  Whatawahata,  and  to  Louis  Lanfear  of  Hastings  for  their  kind 
thoughts  and  assistance.  — Kelly  Harris. 

M.I.A.  Dance  to  be  held  in  the  Huntly  Town  Hall  on  October  2nd. 
George   Brown   Regent   Dance   Band. 


SPECIAL: 

GOLD  AND  GREEN  BALL—Judea,  Friday,  26th  Sep- 
tember. 1941.  This  event  commences  the  HUI  PARIHA 
of  the  Hauraki  District  to  he  held  at  Judea,  Saturday  and 
Sunday.  27th  and  28th  September,  1941.  Everyone  is  cordially 
invited  to  attend  these  functions. 

Roy  Matthews   /'ranch  President. 


-Mr   -?k  -Mf   "m  -iff   "W   W   "W   itf"ttr   ttt"2tr   "ttf  W   ttf  W   Ttf  W   Ttf  V    ~ttf  V   Ttf 


(Continued  from  Inside  Front  Cover.) 

again.  At  the  Auckland  Travel  Club,  his  talks  have  all  been 
requests  on  some  phase  pertinent  to  Mormonism,  its  doctrines 
and  principles.  The  Church  Welfare  Programme  has  re- 
ceived much  commendation  from  the 
numerous  audiences  hearing  of  it  and  its 
purpose.  The  last  gathering  addressed  by 
President  was  August  7th,  1941,  convened 
under  the  auspices  of  the  Auckland 
Women's  Luncheon  Club,  and  again  here, 
the  Gospel  was  preached. 

Sister  Cowley  in  her  talks  to  the 
various  women's  organizations  —  "Higher  /; 
Thought  Temple,"  "Y.W.C.A.,"  "Travel  I 
Club,"    etc,   has   told   of    Church   Welfare  <f 

Programme  and  other  vital  topics  pertain-  BJRki*.       I 

ing  to  the  Gospel.    All  of  these  privileges    A  tm&^k  *J*k 
have   been    requested   of   them,    and    their 
values  can  never  be  assessed  too  highly,  for  the  responsibility 
of  preaching  the  Gospel  is  as  high  as  the  highest  in  the  sight 
of  God. 

Jewel  Cowley  is  to  be  commended  very  highly  for  her 
consistent  work  with  her  small  group  of  primary  children 
that  meet  with  her  every  Saturday  morn- 
ing.  Her  task  is  by  no  means  easy.    Presi- 
dency organizations  before  her  have  given 
up  the  work  in  despair  at  the  lack  of  sup- 
port from  parents  and  children.    Persistent 
efforts,  however,  have  rewarded  Jewel  with 
a  small   but   loyal  group  of   children   who 
have  attended    regularly    for   months   past. 
In  humbleness  and  with  a  prayerful 
heart  this  is  written,  more  than  ever  mind- 
ful   of    the    onerous    tasks    that    are    ours. 
Thankful   to  our   President,  his  wife  and 
'  daughter  in  'heir  shouldering   lor  and  with 
US  onr  obligations.     Tena  koutOU.     Trna  koutOU. 

Although  the  time  is  past,  Te  Karere  and  the  Mission 
wish  to  he  associated  in  extending  congratulations  and  best 
wishes  lo  President  and  Sister  ('<>wle\  on  the  occasion  of 
their  wedding  anniversary,  celebrated  in  Dunedin  July  13th, 
and  also  the  besl  wishes  to  President  on  his  birthday, 
August  2nd. 

— Kl'I.I.Y    1 1      tRIS. 


m     mm     mm     mm     rarti     m  rti     mm     mm     mm     rr  ti     mm     mm     mm     m 


Te  Karere   I 

Established  in  1907 
Wahanga   35  Noema,    1941  Nama    11 

Matthew    Cowley  Tumuaki    Mihana 

Kelly  Harris  Etita 

Eru   T.    Kupa       Kaiwhakamaori 

Waimate   Anaru  Kaiwhakamaori 

"Ko  tenet  Pepa  i  whakatapua  hex  hapai  ake  i  te  iwi  Maori  hi 
roto  i  nga  whakaaro-nui.' 

"Te  Karere"  is  published  monthly  by  the  New  Zealand  Mission  of  the  Church 
of  Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-day  Saints,  and  is  printed  by  THE  BUSINESS  PRINTING 
WORKS  LTD.,  55  Albert  Street,  Auckland,  CI,  N.Z.  Subscription  Rates:  3/-  per 
six  months;  5/-  per  year;  £1  for  five  years;  £2/10/-  for  life.  (United  States  Cur- 
rency:  $1.00   per  year;    $4.00   for  five   years;   $10.00   for   life.) 

Address    Correspondence,    Box    72,    Auckland,    C.l,    New    Zealand. 


CONTENTS 

Editorial —  Page 

Our   November   Prophets    824 

Special    Features — 

Ko  Te  Hokinga  Tuarua  Mai   O  Te  Karaiti    826 

Young    New   Zealand    Missionaries    829 

Te   Ngakau   Mahaki    831 

The   (all   of   The   Shepherd    832 

Church  Features — 

( renealog}         828 

\kn   I  [aerenga   830 

Sundaj    Scln.nl    836 

Primary    839 

Matenga   

News  from  the  Field  846 

Sundaj    S«  hool   Reports   


824  TE   KARERE  Noema,  1941 


Editorial  .  .  . 


OUR  NOVEMBER  PROPHETS 

The  month  of  November  is  the  birth  month  of  three  of 
the  seven  presidents  of  the  Church  of  Jesus  Christ  of  Latter- 
day  Saints.  John  Taylor,  the  first  of  the  three,  was  horn  on 
November  1.  L808,  in  Westmoreland  County,  England.  Of 
the  seven  presidents  he  is  the  only  one  who  was  horn  beyond 
the  present  boundaries  of  the  United  States.  In  his  early 
youth  in  England  he  became  a  Methodist  preacher  and  his 
proselyting  service  for  the  Methodist  cause  continued  after 
the  removal  of  his  family  to  Canada  in  the  year  1832.  His 
constant  search  for  truth  convinced  him  that  the  doctrines  of 
Methodism  did  not  square  with  Holy  Writ  so  that  when  the 
message  of  the  Restoration  came  to  him  he  recognized  in  it 
"The  Power  of  God  unto  Salvation."  He  was  baptized,  con- 
firmed and  ordained  an  Elder  in  the  Church  in  the  year  1836. 
From  that  date  until  his  death  on  July  25,  1887,  his  life  was 
surrendered  completely  to  the  will  of  God. 

That  spirit  which  impels  men  to  lay  down  their  lives  for 
their  fellows  kept  him  at  the  side  of  the  Prophet  Joseph 
Smith  while  he  was  incarcerated  in  the  Carthage  Gaol,  and 
only  a  miracle  saved  him  from  the  bullets  of  the  murderers. 
The  shadow  of  martyrdom  which  the  death  of  the  Prophet 
cast  about  him  was  never  lifted.  His  love  for  the  Prophet 
Joseph,  his  loyalty  to  Brigham  Young,  his  devotion  to  his 
family  and  his  obedience  to  eternal  truths  exposed  his  life 
to  the  hatred  of  assassins,  to  the  hazards  of  pioneering  in 
the  wilderness,  to  the  persecutions  incident  to  missionary 
activities,  to  the  unscrupulous  chicanery  of  politicians,  and 
to  the  unwarrantable  cruelty  of  Government  officials.  Against 
this  background  of  martyrdom  the  brilliance  of  his  soul  and 
the  majesty  of  his  character  stand  out  in  dazzling  relief. 

Joseph  F.  Smith,  the  sixth  President  of  the  Church  and 
the  second  of  the  three,  was  born  November  13,  1838,  at  Far 
West,  Caldwell  County,  Missouri.  At  the  time  of  his  birth 
and  at  the  place  where  he  was  born  persecution  against  the 
Saints  was  so  vicious  that  it  seemed  as  if  the  gates  of  Hell 
would  prevail  against  the  Church  of  God.  Mob  violence 
drove  innocent  men  from  the  sanctity  of  their  homes  to 
prison  dungeons.  Innocent  victims  of  these  outrageous  out- 
laws were  dragged  before  courts,  which  had  respect  for 
neither  justice  nor  legal  proceedure,  and  charged  with  the 


Noema,  1941 


TE  KARERE 


825 


foulest  offences  against  the  peace  and  dignity  of  the  foulest 
fiends  that  ever  besmirched  the  frontiers  of  freedom.  Among 
these  victims  was  Hyrum  Smith,  the  father  of  the  future 
President.  He  was  hailed  before  the  court  and  condemned 
to  be  shot.  From  such  an  untimely  end  he  was  spared ;  but 
not  for  long.  On  June  27,  1844,  Hyrum  died,  with  his 
brother  the  Prophet,  from  the  powder  and  ball  of  assassins. 

The  trials  and  hazards  of  pioneering  which  John  Taylor 
experienced  as  a  mature  man,  Joseph  F.  Smith  passed 
through  in  infancy,  childhood  and  early  youth.  At  the  age 
of  ten  he  drove  two  yoke  of  oxen  across  the  plains.  At  the 
age  of  fifteen  he  was  ordained  an  Elder  and  called  to  the 
Hawaiian  Islands  as  a  missionary.  The  responsibilities  of 
manhood  were  so  crowded  upon  him  in  his  tender  years  that 
he  was  denied  much  of  that  freedom  of  motion  to  which 
youth  is  entitled. 

Upon  the  death  of  Lorenzo  Snow,  he  succeeded  by  call 
and  by  ordination  to  the  Presidency.  He  was  the  first  of 
the  Presidents  to  be  born  within  the  Church.  His  qualities 
of  leadership  directed  by  the  Divine  Will  commanded  the 
respect  and  admiration  of  all  men.  As  peace  came  to  a  war- 
torn  world  the  mortal  eyes  of  this  noble  mar.  of  God  were 
closed  against  a  world  which  had  been  both  cruel  and  kind 
to  him.     He  died  November  19,   1918. 

Heber  J.  Grant,  the  seventh  and  present  leader  of  the 
Church,  and  the  third  of  our  November  Prophets,  was  born 
in  Salt  Lake  City  on  the  twenty-second  day  of  November, 
1856.  Just  as  John  Taylor  was  the  first  of  the  Presidents 
to  be  born  in  a  foreign  land  and  Joseph  F.  Smith  the  first 
to  be  born  within  the  Church,  so  President  Granl  is  the  first 
to  have  been  born  in  the  valley  of  the  Great  Salt  Lake.  Like 
Joseph  F.  Smith  he  was  reared  by  a  noble  mother,  the  father 
having  died  soon  after  the  birth  of  the  son.  For  more  than 
sixty  years  he  has  held  positions  of  great  responsibility  in 
the  Church.  En  October,  1882,  he  was  called  by  revelation 
to  President  John  Taylor  to  fill  a  vacancy  in  the  Quorum  of 
Twelve  Apostles;  and  since  November,  1918,  he  has  been 
the  revered  President  of  the  Church.  He  has  builded  solidly 
and  permanently  upon  the  foundation  laid  h\  the  Prophet 
Joseph  Smith.  That  which  he  sets  his  hand  to  do  he  does 
with  all  his  might.  In  all  dealings  with  his  fellow  men,  both 
within  and  without  the  Church,  he  is  the  soul  of  honour  and 
righteousness. 

M  \  1 1  ii  i  w  Cowley. 


826  TE    KARERE  Nbema,  1941 

Ko  Te  Hokinga  Tuarua 
Mai  O  Te  Karaiti 

Na   Erata   M.  W.   Mi  n 

He  kape  cud  korero  no  te  taanga  o  Hune,  19,  1918, 
o  "Te  Karere"  i  te  wa  ko  Nitama  Ramapata,  Tinui- 
aki  Mihana,  ko  Hori  R.   Kowhira,   Etita. 

E  /v  ana  ki  enei  wa  nga  kupu  nei. 

"E  mohio  ana  hoki  ahau  kei  te  ora  toku  kai 
hoko,  a  i  nga  wa  i  muri  nei  ka  tu  ki  runga  ki 
te  whenua;  a  ahakoa  i  muri  i  toku  kiri  ka  pau 
tenei  tinana,  ka  titiro  ano  ahau  i  roto  ano  i  toku         Erata  M    //'    Mutt 
kikokiko  ki  te  Atua.      E  titiro  ano  ahau  ki  a  ia, 

ahau  nei  ano;  ma  oku  kanohi,  e  kore  ano  e  waiho  ma  te  tangata  ke  e 
matakitaki  atu ;  pau  rawa  oku  whatumanawa  i  roto  i  a  au."  (Hopa 
19:25-27.) 

O  nga  mahi  nui  katoa  meake  ka  puta  mai,  ko  tenei:  ko  te  hokinga 
mai  o  te  Karaiti  ki  te  whenua.  I  mohio  tonu  a  Hopa  i  nga  wa  o  muri 
nei,  ka  tu  Ia  ki  runga  ki  te  whenua.  I  te  mea  he  maha  nga  Karaipiture 
e  tautoko  ana  i  tenei  take,  kei  te  titiro  nga  hahi  Karaitiana  katoa  i  nga 
tohu,  ara  i  nga  pakanga  me  nga  rongo  pakanga,  nga  ru  whenua  me 
nga  mate  uruta,  ki  te  tini  o  nga  wahi,  me  era  atu  tohu  i  whakaaturia  e 
te  Karaiti  i  mua  i  Tona  kakenga  ki  te  rangi,  otira  kahore  ratou  e 
marama  ana  ki  enei  mea  e  toru.  Tuatahi,  nga  poropititanga  kia  tutuki 
i  mua  i  Tona  taenga  mai;  tuarua,  ka  pehea  ranei  Tona  hokinga  mai; 
tuatoru,  ka  hoki  mai  Ia  ki  whea,  ki  a  wai  ranei. 

Mo  te  take  tuatahi  e  penei  ana  te  korero  a  Pita,  "A  ka  tonoa  e 
ia  a  Ihu  Karaiti  i  kauwhautia  nei  ki  a  koutou  i  mua:  kua  takoto  nei 
te  tikanga  kia  noho  ia  ki  te  rangi,  kia  tae  mai  ra  ano  nga  wa  o  te 
whakahokinga  mai  o  nga  mea  katoa,  o  ta  te  Atua  i  korerotia  e  nga 
mangai  o  ana  poropiti  tapu  katoa,  o  te  timatanga  ra  ano  o  te  ao." 
(Nga  Mahi  3:  20-21.)  Na,  he  aha  etahi  mea  kia  whakahokia  mai  i  mua 
i  Tona  hokinga  mai,  no  te  mea  kua  takoto  te  tikanga  kia  noho  Ia  ki 
te  rangi  kia  tae  mai  ra  ano  taua  wa?  Me  titiro  tatou  ki  te  korero  a 
Paora  ki  te  hunga  o  Teharonika.  "Na,  he  mea  tenei  na  matou  ki  a 
koutou,  e  aku  teina,  mo  te  taenga  mai  o  to  tatou  Ariki  o  Ihu  Karaiti 
.  .  .  kei  tinihangatia  i  tetahi  mea  e  te  tangata,  e  kore  hoki  e  tae  wawe 
mai  kia  matua  tae  mai  te  takanga  atu;  kia  whakakitea  mai  ano  hoki 
te  tangata  o  te  hara,  te  tama  o  te  whakangaromanga."  Katahi  ka 
mohio  tatou  e  kore  hoki  Ia  e  tae  wawe  mai  kia  matua  tae  mai  te 
takanga  atu,  no  reira  ka  marama  tatou  ka  noho  Ia  ki  te  rangi  kia  tae 
mai  ra  ano  te  wa  o  te  whakahokinga  mai  o  te  Rongo-pai  i  taka  atu. 
Me  tenei  ano  i  kite  a  Hoani  Whakakitenga  i  tetahi  anahera  e  rere  ana 
i  waenganui  o  te  rangi,  kei  a  ia  te  Rongo-pai  mau  tonu  hei  kauwhau 
mana  ki  nga  iwi  katoa  e  noho  ana  i  te  whenua.  Mana,  ara  ma  taua 
anahera  te  Rongopai  e  whakahoki  i  mua  i  te  hokinga  mai  o  te  Karaiti 
ki   te    whenua. 

Ka  tukua  mai  hoki  e  te  Atua  tetahi  karere  kia  whakapaia  te 
huarahi  mo  Tona  taenga  tuarua  mai;  kia  rite  hoki  ki  Tona  taenga 
tuatahi  mai.  Ko  Hoani  Kai-iriiri  te  tangata  nana  Tona  huarahi  i 
whakakatika.  Na  Maraki  tenei  poropititanga,  "Tenei  te  unga  atu  nei 
e  ahau  taku  karere,  mana  e  whakapai  te  ara  i  mua  i  a  au,  a  kitea 
rawatia  ake  kua  tae  te  Ariki,  e  rapua  nei  e  koutou,  ki  tona  temepara, 


Noema,  1941 


TE  KARERE 


827 


te  anahera  o  te  kawenata,  ta  koutou  e  ngakau  nui  na:  nana,  tera  ia  ka 
tae  atu,  e  ai  ta  Ihowa  o  nga  mano.  A  ko  wai  e  u  i  te  ra  e  tae  ai  ia? 
ko  wai  hoki  e  tu,  ina  puta?  e  rite  ana  hoki  ia  ki  te  ahi  a  te  kai  tahi 
para,  ki  te  horoi  a  te  kai  horoi:  ka  noho  ano  ia,  ka  rite  ki  te  kai  tahi 
para,  ki  te  kai  whakapai  hiriwa,  a  ka  whakapaia  e  ia  nga  tama  a  Riwai, 
ka  whakahemokia  to  ratou  para,  ano  he  koura,  he  hiriwa:  kia  tapaea 
ai  e  ratou  he  whakahere  ki  a  Ihowa  i  runga  i  te  tika.  Ko  reira  te 
whakahere  a  Hura  raua  ko  Hiruharama  rekaina  ai  e  Ihowa,  ka  rite 
ki  nga  ra  o  mua,  ki  nga  tau  onamata."  Mo  Tona  taenga  tuarua  mai 
tenei  poropititanga,  no  te  mea  i  Tona  taenga  tuatahi  mai  i  whanau  mai 
Ia  i  runga  i  te  ahua  o  nga  peepi  katoa.  Engari  ko  wai  e  tu  i  Tona 
taenga  mai?  "e  rite  ana  hoki  ia  ki  te  ahi  a  te  kai  tahi  para,  ki  te 
horoi   a  te   kai-horoi." 

Nga  poropititanga  mo  te  kohikohinga  o  Tana  Hunga  Tapu  i  nga 
ra  whakamutunga,  "I  rongo  ano  ahau  i  tetahi  atu  reo  i  te  rangi,  e  mea 
ana,  puta  mai  koutou  i  roto  i  a  ia,  e  toku  iwi,  kei  uru  tahi  koutou  ki 
ona  hara,  kei  pangia  koutou  e  ona  whiu."    (Nga  Whakakitenga  18:4.) 

Me  te  rima  tekau  o  nga  waiata  a  Rawiri  te 

6  i     rima   o   nga   rangi,    "Huihuia   mai   ki   a   au 

HUI  PARI  HA  O  k  toku  hunga  tapu,  te  hunga  i  whakarite  ka- 
wenata ki  a  au  i  runga  i  te  patunga  tapu." 
Na,  e  mohio  ana  tatou  ko  enei  mea  katoa 
he  poropititanga  mo  nga  ra  o  muri  nei,  aia 
mo  nga  wa  e  ki  ana  a  Paora,  "Ka  whaka- 


HUI  PARI  HA  O  j 
WAIKATO.—Ka  tu  ki  \ 
Puke  Tapu,  Iluntly  a  te  J 
22  me  te  23  o  Noema,  i 
1941.     Taerc    mai    e    nga  \     . 

iwi,  e  ng  a  hapu.  Haere  j  kitea  mai  ano  e  ia  ki  a  tatou  taua  pa  i 
mai  ki  te  zvhakarongo  ki  \  ngaro  ra,  mo  te  tikanga,  ina  rite  nga  wa, 
kia  huihuia  nga  mea  katoa  i  roto  i  a  te 
Karaiti;  nga  mea  i  te  rangi  me  nga  mea 
i  te  whenua,  i  roto  ano  i  a  ia."  Ka  tonoa 
hoki  e  te  Atua  a  Iraia  Poropiti  i  mua  i 
te  taenga  mai  o  te  ra  nui,  te  ra  whakama- 
taku  o  te  Ariki,  mana  e  whakatahuri  nga 
ngakau  o  nga  matua  ki  nga  tamariki  me 
nga  ngakau  o  nga  tamariki  ki  nga  matua. 
Kei  haere  mai  ia,  patua  rawa  te  whenua 
ki  te  kanga.  (Titiro  Maraki  4:  5-6.)  E  ki 
ana  a  Ihaia  Poropiti,  i  nga  ra  whakamu- 
tunga ka  whakaputaina  ta  Ihowa  whare  i 
roto  i  te  tihi  o  nga  maunga,  a  ka  re  re  nga 
iwi  ki  reira.  "Ka  whakaarahia  ano  hold 
e  Ia  he  kara  ki  nga  iwi  tawhiti;  ka  whio- 
whio  ano  ki  a  ratou  ki  te  pito  o  te  whenua. 
Nana,  hohoro  tonu,  kakama  tonu,  ta  ratou 
haere  mai."  (Ihaia  5:26.) 
E  te  Hunga  Tupu  me  nga  hoa  aroha  katoa  e  penei  ana  etahi  0 
nga  mea  kia  matua  puta  mai,  a  ka  hoki  mai  a  Ilui  Karaiti  ki  te  whenua. 
E  kiia  ana  <•  te  IIun.ua  Tapu  <>  n.ua  ra  0  muri  nei,  kua  whakahokia 
mai  to  RongO-pai)  kua  rere  taua  anahera  i  kitea  e  Iloani  W'hak.ikit  en.ua  : 
kua  puta  mai  hoki  te  Kareiv  a  te  Atua.  kia  whakapaia  e  ia  te  huarahi 
mo  te  Karaiti;  kua  tae  mai  a  Iraia  Poropiti  ki  te  wheua,  me  te  homai 
ano  hoki  i  nga  kii  mo  te  mahi  i  nga  whakapapa  o  nga  matua  kua  ngaro 

ki    te    po,    kia    mahia    nga    tikan.ua    0    te    Kongo- pai    hej    whakakapi    im> 
ratOU.       No     reira,     kua     whakatahuri     nga    n.uakau    0    nga     matua     ki    a 

ratou  tamariki,  ara  ki  a  tatou,  kia  whiwhi  hoki  ratou  i  tenei  mea  te 
oranga  tonutanga.     Kei  hoki  mai  te  Karaiti,  a  petua  rawa  te  whenua 

ki    te    whenua    ki    te    kanga.       Kei    waenganui    i    a    tatOU    tetahi    '■ 

inaianei  ko  Erata  Etuihi  Sokarana  tona  ingoa.     K«>  tana  mahi  he  kimi 
whakapapa  «>   nga  tupuna  kua   ngaro  atu;   no   reira   kua   whakatahuri 

nga  ngakau   0   nga  tamariki   ki   nga   matua;   kei   te   huihui   Imki   te    llunua 

Tapu  ki  roto  ki  te  tihi  o  nga  maunga.     Kei  te  titiro  tonu  nga  iwi  o 


nga  korero  a  "Kauri"  to  $ 
Timuaki. 

A  te  12  o  nga  haoro  o  \ 
te  22,  ka  tu  he  huihuinga  j 
mo  nga  Apiha  me  nga  I 
Kai-whakaako  o  te  Kura  | 
liapati  i  raro  i  te  whaka-  J 
haere  o  te  Timuakitanga  i 
Mihana.  Timuaki  Peka  j 
era  atu  e  hiahia  ana  ki  te  I 
ako  nga  mahi  mo  te  ] 
Kura    liapati    haere    mai.  J 

Henare   Maiho,         j 
Timuaki  Takiwa.  ! 

Matiu  Kauri,  i, 

Tim ua ki    Mihana.   j 


828 


TE    KARERE 


Noema,  1941 


tawhiti  ki  te  kara  kua  whakaarahia  e  te  Atua  me  te  whiowhio  ano  ki  a 
ratou  kia  puta  mai  ratou  i  roto  i  a  ia,  kei  uru  tahi  ratou  ki  ona  hara, 
kei  pangia  ratou  e  ona  whiu,  "No  te  mea  ko  te  Ariki  pu  ano  e  heke 
iho  i  te  rangi  me  te  karanga  ano,  me  te  reo  o  te  tino  anahera,  me 
te  tetere  a  te  Atua;  a  ko  te  hunga  kua  mate  i  roto  i  a  te  Karaiti  e 
ara  ki  mua."  (1  Teharonika  4:  16.)  "Ka  whakaritea  he  whakawa  mo 
nga  tangata  katoa,"  a,  "ka  riri  hoki  te  hunga  karakia  kore  katoa."  Ko 
reira  wehewehea  ai  e  Ia  Ana  hipi  i  nga  koti,  ara  te  hunga  kua  akiritia 
e  ratou  nga  tikanga  o  Tana  Rongo-pai.  Ka  tino  ohorere  ratou  i  Tona 
taenga  mai  i  te  haora  e  moe  ana  ratou.  No  reira  e  te  iwi  ma,  kia 
mataara  tonu  tatou,  kia  whakaki  hoki  tatou  i  o  tatou  rama,  kia  rite  mo 
te  taenga  mai  o  te  tane  marena  hou.  E  ki  ana  te  Karaiti,  "kia  mata- 
ara rapea  koutou,  e  kore  hoki  koutou  e  mohio  ki  te  ra,  ki  te  haora 
e  puta  mai  ai  te  Tama  a  te  tangata."  Oho  ake  e  katoa,  rongo  mai 
ki  tenei  ki,  kua  tata  te  ra,  ae  ra,  kei  nga  kuwaha.  "Ki  te  whakama 
hoki  tetahi  ki  a  au  me  aku  korero,  i  tenei  whakatupuranga  puremu, 
hara;  ka  whakama  ano  te  Tama  a  te  tangata  ki  a  ia,  ina  haere  mai  i 
runga  i  te  kororia  o  tona  Matua,  ratou  ko  nga  anahera  tapu."  (Maka 
8:38.) 

I  te  wa  o  Tona  kakenga  ki  runga,  ka  tu  nga  apotoro  e  titiro  mata- 
tau  atu  ana  ki  te  rangi,  a  tokorua  nga  anahera  e  tu  ana  i  to  ratou 
taha,  e  mea  ana,  "E  nga  tangata  o  Kariri,  he  aha  ta  koutou  e  tu  mata- 
kitaki  atu  na  ki  te  rangi?  Ko  tena  Ihu  kua  tangohia  atu  na  i  a  kou- 
tou ki  te  rangi,  ka  pera  ano  tona  haerenga  mai  me  ia  i  tirohia  atu  na 
e  koutou  e  haere  ana  ki  te  rangi."  Katahi  ka  mohio  tatou  ka  hoki  mai 
taua  Ihu  ano,  taua  tinana  i  kake  atu  nei.  Ka  hoki  mai  ki  Tana  teme- 
para,  ka  kingi  tahi  Ia  me  te  hunga  tika.  Ko  te  hunga  ka  whai  wahi  i 
roto  i  te  aranga  tuatahi,  ko  ratou  kua  kite  i  Ona  ara  tika,  kua  ngohe- 
ngohe  hoki  ki  Ana  tikanga,  a  ka  kingi  tahi  ratou  me  Ia  kotahi  mano  tau. 
(Tirohia  nga  Whakakitenga,  te  rua  tekau  o  nga  upoko.)  A,  ko  reira 
ka  kite  tahi  tatou  me  Hopa  i  to  tatou  Kaihoko,  ahakoa,  i  muri  i  enei  kiri 
ka  pau  enei  tinana  ka  titiro  atu  ano  tatou  i  roto  ano  i  o  tatou  kikokiko 
ki  te  Atua.      Ma  o  tatou  kanohi  tonu  e  kite  ai. 


GENEALOGY 


By  Tcao  Wirihana 


THE  WAY  TO  PERFECTION 
Cottage  Meetings  for  November. 

Nov.      6 — Lesson   11,   Early-day    Succession    in    the 
Priesthood." 
13 — Lesson   12,   "Ancient  Books  of  Rememberance." 
20 — Lesson   13,   "The    Covenant    of    the    Lord    with 

Abraham." 
27 — Lesson   14,   "Thy  Seed  shall  be  like  unto  these." 
Slogan. — "Ko  te  kororia  ote  Atua  ko  te  Matauranga." 
Nga  ripoata  o  ia  takiwa  o  ia  takiwa  kaore  ano  kia  tae  mai 
ki  te  tari   o  te   Mihana.      E  nga  Timuaki-takiwa  o  te   Mihana 
whaka-korikori  i  nga  mahi  whakapapa  me  nga  ripoata.      Kua 
tae  mai  te  reta  mai  o  Hiona  a  te  Timuakitanga  o  te  Hahi  mo 
te  nei  take. 

All   Genealogical   Reports   should   be   sent  to   the   Mission 
Office  before  the  end  of  this  month. 


Noema,  1941  TE  KARERE  829 

"Young  New  Zealand  Mission aries" 

PORTRAYAL   OF   MAORI   LORE 

Remembrances  of  Maori  Aroha 
By  former  Associate  Editor 

Elder  Barry  T.  Wride 

The  22nd  day  of  October,  1941,  celebrates  the  first 
anniversary  of  the  departure  of  the  Zion  Elders  from  this 
Mission.  Since  their  leaving,  reports  of  their  activities 
both  spiritually  and  otherwise  have  been  received  from 
lime  to  time.  The  accompanying  article  by  one  of  "them" 
and  about  them  is  particularly  pleasant  coming  at  this 
time,  and  Te  Karere  is  privileged  to  remember  them. — Ed. 

The  Mission  spirit  and  the  love  for  the  New  Zealand  people  have 
by  no  means  been  relegated  to  the  memories  of  a  dim  past  in  the 
minds  of  the  returned  missionaries.  Those  of  us  who  have  returned 
during  the  past  three  years  carry  impressions  of  Maoriaom's  contribu- 
tions throughout  the  country.  Wherever  we  have  gone,  New  Zealand  and 
Maoriland  have  been  distinctive  features  of  our  presence  and  welcome. 

When  the  last  of  the  Elders  returned  in  November,  1940,  a  com- 
plete organization  was  set  up  to  keep  us  in  the  mission  spirit  and  to 
carry  forth  in  the  work  we  had  been  in  for  the  past  two  and  three 
years.  Meetings  are  held  fortnightly  where  a  little  business  transpires 
after  which  mission  experiences  are  related,  songs  in  the  Maori  tongue 
are  sung,  and  other  action  songs  and  hakas  are  entered  into  for  our 
entertainment.  We  have  received  much  commendation  and  pra 
the  work  of  exhibiting  the  arts  and  culture  of  the  Maori  people  to  the 
clubs  and  different  organizations  in  and  around  Salt  Lake  City. 

Early  in  June,   six  of  our  group  went  to   California  to   put  on  a 
show  for  the  British  War  Relief.      The  troupe  was  met  by  th  ■   Elders 
resident  in  California  before  continuing  to  the  Riviera  Country  Club  in 
Hollywood,  where  they  received  much  praise   and  the  good   wishes   of 
the   British   and   New  Zealand   Consuls,   particularly   so   after   the    per- 
formance which  was  so  enthusiastically  acclaimed  by  all.      The  ( 
heartily  thanked  the  troupe  for  their  patriotic  contribution   on   behalf 
of  their  countrymen,  the  Maoris,  and  their  nation   the   British,  and  in 
particular   was   this    mentioned    in    view    of    the    fact    thai 
travelled   and   were   billeted   at   no    expense    to    the    War    Relief 
(carrying  on  the  mission  custom  of  paying  their  own  way). 

In  the  latter  part  of  -June  we  gave  our  show  in  the  Hotel  Utah  for 
the  Intermountain  Credit  Men's  annual  banquet.  Here  we  were  privi- 
leged to  meet  Jonnie  Peterson,  a  Hawaiian  Hand  lender,  who  invited 
us  to  put  on  a  (il'teen-ininute  programme  in  Bingham,  where  he  and 
his  hand  were  entertaining;  here  again  we  were  acclaimed  enthusi- 
astically and   royally. 

July  24th  marked  another  verj    pleasanl  trip  for  the  troupe,  which 
at  (his  time   consisted   of   Elders   Langton,    Lambert,    Wallace, 
gaitner,  Wride,  Addous,  Henderson,  Evans  and  Ramsaj      when  w< 
called  to  put  on  the  floor  shew  at  the  Pioneer  Day  celebrations 
croft,  Idaho.     The  celebrations  committee  as  ociated  with  form 
sion  President   Alvin  T.   Man-han  of  Grace,   Idaho,  made 
representing  a  "Whare  Raupo"  and  stockade.     We  rode  the  float  in  full 
native  dress  and  gave  the  spectators  a  real  thrill  with  the  Maori 
and  hakas.     in  the  evening  we  again  entertained  for  forty  minufc 

hakas,   action    sole.-:,    .\Ia<oi    games   and    a    Whai    Kotero. 


830  TE    KARERE  Noema,  1941 

Apart  from  the  entertainments  we  have  given  throughout  the  coun- 
try, we  have  been  to  many  of  the  branches  in  Zion,  taking  the  entire 

Sacrament  Meeting   programmes,   conduct-  -»,»,»»«,»»».»,,»«»» 

ing,   praying,   singing  and   speaking  in   the  f       pidZ  Wilinrd  V  ?m."*fc  1 

Maori   tongue.    Presenting  to   these   people         •    /  ,        '  ,llt''li  Ly)»"th  ' 
the   love   the    Saints   of   New   Zealand   hold         ,s  ^tcmaUy  pleased I  to  an- 
in  their  hearts  for  them.  '//'""/'  the.  ***/!  ™  « 

We,  'The  Young  New  Zealand  Mission-  %\  3  £?;*■*  ^f^T 
aries,"  will  continue  to  carry  that  great  ™e.  h^y  /rc"' L  **S 
aroha  in  our  hearts  for  the  people  of  New        f»{    *»%".*>    194L    a"( 

Zealand    which    possessed    our    souls    while  |  f^  !'V    7^  Y 
among  you.    We  feel  that  through  our  lab-         We,  ^°fr    U!chl  !,,jt   t*' 
ours  here   we   are  able  to  transmit  to  the        set*e{    )y    Af'k,ara  J  "£ 

people    of    Zion   the    "aroha   nui,"    culture,  j  ""    frfe".  EXdfT   S™\h 
arts    and    customs    we    learned    from    you         le%*  £    u  Pt™*™*'; 

pe0ple  y  I        Te  Karere    joins  with 

May   we    all    ever   be   prayerful,    may     |  your  frU^f  Elder  Smith, 

we  be  humble,  may  we  ever  be  mindful  of     j  ^^fj^  y°"  and  yo'"'S 

the  evils  and  the  dangers  that  exist  around     j^ 

us,  and  may  we  strive  to  live  the  Gospel. 

The  time  may  soon  come  again,  that  the  New  Zealand  Mission  be  again 

open   to   the   missionaries. 

We  all  send  our  love  and  best  wishes  to  the  Saints  and  friends 
there.  May  the  Lord  bless  each  and  every  one  of  you  is  our  constant 
prayer. 

AKU  HAERENGA 

Xa  Tukino  Hakopa,  Timuaki  o  Taranaki 

I  te  wehenga  i  ahau  hei  Timuaki  mo  te  Pariha  o  Taranaki  ka 
timata  taku  haere  ki  te  torotoro  i  taku  Hunga  Tapu,  a  ki  nga  Hui 
Pariha  o   etahi  atu  Takiwa  hoki. 

Ka  haere  maua  ko  Taka  ki  Puke  Rangiora,  ki  Bell  Block,  Waitara, 
Manama,  Wanganui,  a  atu  i  konei  ka  haere  ahau  ki  Korongata  ki  te 
Hui  Paiania,  a  i  ahau  i  reira  e  mahi  whakapapa  ana  ki  te  taha  o 
Rawiri  Kamau  he  maha  nga  aitua,  ara  nga  matenga  i  pa  ki  reira.  Atu 
i  kona  ka  haere  ahau  ki  te  Hui  Pariha  o  Mahia  i  tu  ki  Nuhaka,  a  hoki 
mai  ano  ki  taku  Takiwa. 

Kei  te  pai  te  Hunga  Tapu  o  Taranaki.  I  tino  torotoro,  noho  hoki 
ahau  ki  waenganui  ia  ratou  katoa,  ae  ra  i  kite  kite  ahau  ia  ratou. 

KAI    KAUWHAU    MO   TE    PEI    WHAIRANGI 

Hohepa  Heperi  me  Hemi  W.  Witehira  ki  Matauri  wiki  5  o  Noema, 
Takahue  wiki  3  o  Tihema. 

Kawana  Erueti  me  Miki  Heremaia  ki  Mataraua  wiki  3  o  Noema 
me  te  wiki  3  o  Tihema  ano  hoki. 

Ngatihaua  Witehira  me  Tauahika  Witehira  ki  Whirinaki  wiki  2  O 
Noema,  Kaikohe  wiki  2  o  Tihema. 

Hare  Nehua  me  James  Joyce  ki  Mangamuka  wiki  3  o  Noema  me 
te  wiki  3  o  Tihema  ano  hoki. 

Kerei  Otene  me  Paikaraihe  Otene  ki  Waihou  wiki  2  O  Noema  me 
te  wiki  2  o  Tihema  ano  hoki. 

Manga  Tau  me  Witehira  WiHongi  ki  Ngawha  wiki  3  O  Noema  me 
te  wiki  3  o  Tihema  ano  hoki. 

Pita  Heperi  me  Eru  Patone  Heperi  ki  Utakura  wiki  2  o  Noema  me 
Tihema. 

Eru  Kupa  me  Nopera  Otene  ki  Waimamaku  wiki  1  o  Tihema. 

Kia  kaha  ki  te  whakarite  i  enei  karangatanga.  Haere  mai  ki  to 
tatou  Tohungatanga  ka  tu  ki  Kaikohe  a  te  27  o  Tihema.  Haere  mai 
koutou  nga  Kai  Kauwhau  ki  te  ripoata.  Haere  mai  hoki  koutou  katoa 
e  mau  ana  i  te  Tohungatanga. 


Noema,  1941  TE  KARERE  831 

"Te  Ngakau  Mahaki" 

Na  Tukotahi  Tirua  Ranana 

HE  MIHI. — Tena  koe,  te  tinana  e  pikau  nei  i  te 
ahuatanga  o  o  tatou  aiiua  e  hinga  mai  na  i  kona,  e 
king  a  atu  nei  i  konei.  Tenei  ano  tetahi  man  e  pakawe 
atu,  kia  rongo  ai  ona  karanga  maha  puta  noa  ki  nga 
hvi   o   Ngati-Maraeroa. 

I  te  ata  o  te  24   o  Hepetema  ka  wehe  atu 
te  wairua  o  ta  matou  tamaiti,  mokopuna  a  David 
Tahau,    e    13    ona   tau.      I   whakahonoretia   tona 
David    Tahau  tinana    mate    ki    te    kainga    o    tona    matua,    Te 

Hoeroa  Tahau,  Hastings.  Te  ra  muri  mai  ka 
tukuna  atu  tona  tinana  ki  te  kopu  o  te  whenua.  Nga  whakahaere 
katoa  mo  te  ahuatanga  o  tenei  tamaiti  i  te  wa  ia  ia  e  oke  ana  taeno- 
atia  ki  te  manaakitanga  o  tona  rua  i  raro  katoa  i  te  whakahaere  o  te 
Timuakitanga  o  te  Peka  o  Heretaunga — President  James  Southon. 
Nui  atu  nga  korero  nunui,  nga  korero  hohonu  e  pa  ana  mo  tenei  tama- 
iti.     Ma  koutou  e  whakaronga  mai. 

I  whanau  mai  tenei  tamaiti  me  tona  mate  utonga — (Hole  in  the 
Heart).     Kua  korero  nga  rata  kahore  ia  e  ora  roa. 

Kia  mohio  mai  koutou,  ko  te  whanau  o  tenei  tamaiti  e  hara  ke 
i  te  Hunga  Tapu,  cngari  i  nga  ra  o  tona  tamarikitanga,  kaha  atu  ia  ki 
te  haere  ki  nga  huihuinga  Hunga  Tapu — Paraimere,  Hui  Atawhai,  Kura 
Hapati.  Tekau  ma  toru  ona  tau  ka  puta  tetahi  maramatanga  kia  ia, 
ka  whakapa  atu  ia  i  tona  whakaaro  ki  tona  matua:  "I  know  this  is  the 
true  Church  of  Gcd  and  I  want  to  be  baptized  so  that  I'll  be  clean 
and  pure."  Ko  nra  korero  enei  a  te  tamaiti  nei  ki  tona  matua.  I 
ahua  ohorere  te  prpa  i  te  putanga  atu  o  tenei  whakaaro  i  te  mangai 

0  te  paku  o  ana  tamariki.  I  whakaae  ia  kia  uru  tona  tamaiti  ki  roto 
nga  wai  o  te  iriirnga.  I  taua  wa  ano  ka  hoatungia  te  mana  o  te 
Tohungatanga  o  Arona,  ara  te  wahi  e  pa  ana  ki  nga  mahi  Rikona  kia 
David  Tahau. 

E  rua  marama  i  muri  mai  ka  tangohia  tona  wairua  e  te  Kai-hanga. 

1  mua  atu  o  tenei  kotahi  wiki  ia  e  takoto,  e  oke  ana.  I  tae  atu  nga 
Kaumatua  ki  te  whakawahi  ki  te  Hinu  Tapu.  I  tona  ra  whakamu- 
tunga  ka  mea  ake  ia:  "Oh,  it's  better  for  me  to  go  on,  than  to  suffer  in 
this    world    like    thic." 

I  runga  i  tona  ngakau  marama  ka   moe  iho   ona  whatu. 

Haere  ra  e  tama,  kua  oti  noa  atu  te  taunaha  mai  he  mahi  man, 
e  kore  e  tino  roa  ka  puawai  o  tapuae  i  tenei  ao.  Ahakoa  i  mate  tama- 
riki  koe,  ko  koe  te  "Matamua"  mo  o  tuakana,  matua,  tae  atu  ki  o  tipuna. 
Mahia  mai  nga  mahi  i  tua  o  te  arai,  ma  matou  hoi  takahi  atu  i  tenei  RO 
tangotango,  kia  tutuki  ra  ano  tatou  ki  roto  i  nga  whare  tapu  a  te  Atua. 

Na  Elder  Tukotahi  T.  Randell  i  whakahaere  nga  whakaritenga 
mo  te  nehunga,  Nui  atu  nga  mihi  aroha  i  tae  mai  ki  te  kiri-mate  na 
nga  hoa  Maori  tae  atu  ki  nga  noa  Pakeha.  Na  to  Timuald  Takiwa — 
Eriata  Nopera  i  whakatapu  tona  rua  i  to  nrupa     Hastings  Cemetery, 

E  whai  ake  nei  to  whakapapa  o  tenei     "Matamua." 

Ko    Mawakonui,    ko    Mawakotoa,    ko    .M.iwakolaupo,   ko 

Tuwharetoa,  ko  Rongomaipatuiwi,  ko  Taniwha,  ko  Wai 
kari.  ko  Pakira,  l^<>  Tutemahuta  (tuatahi),  ko  Te  R 
kapipi,  ko  Tutemahuta  (tuarua),  ko  Tuatara,  ko  Riki,  ko 
Ngawaka,  ko  Tahau,  ko  Paora,  ko  Te  Hon, .a  ko  David 
Tahau    I  dec  taaed  ) . 


TE   KARERE  Noema,  1941 

The  Call  of  The  Shepherd 

"Come   Out   of    Her,   My   People." — The   Dispersion   of   Israel   has 

for  its  complement  the  Gathering-  of  Israel;  the  prophets  who  predicted 
the  one  likewise  foretelling  the  other.  The  Saviour's  personal  visits 
to  the  various  branches  of  the  Israelitish  race,  before  or  after  His 
resurrection,  were  prophetic  of  a  general  restoration  of  the  Lord's 
people  to  their  ancient  lands,  and  the  folding  of  the  scattered  sheep 
into  one  great  flock,  with  him  as  the  Shepherd  over  all. 

Prophecies  of  the  Gathering. — The  more  notable  of  the  Hebrew 
prophecies  pertaining  to  the  Gathering  are  as  here  given : 

Isaiah:  "And  He  shall  set  up  an  ensign  for  the  nations,  and  shall 
assemble  the  outcasts  of  Israel,  and  gather  together  the  dispersed  of 
Judah  from  the  four  corners  of  the  earth."  .  .  . 

"They  shall  fly  upon  the  shoulders  of  the  Philistines  toward  the 
West."  .  .  . 

"And  there  shall  be  an  highway  for  the  remnant  of  his  people, 
which  shall  be  left,  from  Assyria;  like  as  it  was  to  Israel  in  the  day 
that  he  came  up  out  of  the  land  of  Egypt."* 

Jeremiah. — "I  will  take  you  one  of  a  city,  and  two  of  a  family, 
and  I  will  bring  you  to  Zion."  .  .  . 

"Therefore,  behold,  the  days  come,  saith  the  Lord,  that  it  shall  no 
more  be  said.  The  Lord  liveth,  that  brought  up  the  children  of  Israel 
out  of  the  land  of  Egypt; 

"But,  the  Lord  liveth  that  brought  up  the  children  of  Israel  from 
the  land  of  the  north,  and  from  all  the  lands  whither  he  had  driven 
them ;  and  I  will  bring  them  again  into  their  land  that  I  gave  unto  their 
fathers. 

"Behold,  I  will  send  for  many  fishers,  said  the  Lord,  and  they  shall 
fish  them;  and  after  will  I  send  for  many  hunters,  and  they  shall  hunt 
them  from  every  mountain,  and  from  every  hill,  and  out  of  the  holes 
of  the  rocks."  .  .  . 

"Behold,  I  will  bring  them  from  the  north  country,  and  gather 
them  from  the  coasts  of  the  earth.  .  .  . 

"For  I  am  a  father  to  Israel,  and  Ephraim  is  my  first  born. 

"Hear  the  word  of  the  Lord,  O  ye  nations,  and  declare  it  in  the 
isles  afar  off,  and  say,  He  that  scattered  Israel  will  gather  him,  and 
keep  him,  as  a  shepherd  doth  his  flock." 

Jesus  Christ. — "And  again  this  gospel  of  the  kingdom  shall  be 
preached  in  all  the  world,  for  a  witness  unto  all  nations,  and  then  shall 
the  end  come,  or  the  destruction  of  the  wicked." 

"And  He  shall  send  his  angels  with  a  great  sound  of  a  trumpet, 
and  they  shall  gather  together  his  elect  from  the  four  winds,  from  one 
end  of  heaven  to  the  other." 

The  Saviour  also  predicted  to  the  Nephites  the  gathering  of  the 
House  of  Israel;  and  John  the  Revelator  forsaw  the  same  event 
in  his  great  vision  on  Patmos. 

*Isa.   11  :  12,   14,   16.      See  also  5:  26  ;  35  :  10  ;  43:  5,   6.  The  same  Prophet  declares: 

'And  it  shall  come  to  pass  in  the  last  days,  that  the  mountain  of  the  Lord's 
house  shall  be  established  in  the  top  of  the  mountains  and  shall  be  exalted  above  the 
hills  :  and  all  nations   shall  flow  unto  it. 

"And  many  people  shall  go  and  say,  Come  ye,  and  let  us  pro  up  to  the  mountain 
of  the  Lord,  to  the  house  of  the  God  of  Jacob;  and  he  will  teach  us  of  his  ways, 
and  we  will  walk  in  his  paths:  for  out  of  Zion  shall  go  forth  the  law;  and  the  word 
of   the  Lord   from   Jerusalem."    (Isa.    2:2,3.) 

This  prophecy,  however,  seems  to  refer,  not  so  much  to  a  gathering  of  Israel,  as 
to  an  Israel  already  gathered,  unto  whom  the  nations  will  come  to  learn  the  ways  of 
the   Lord. 


Noema,  1941  TE  KARERE  833 

The  Realization. — How  marvellously  and  how  rapidly  these  pre- 
dictions are  being  fulfilled,  the  history  of  the  past  hundred  years 
plainly  tells.  The  Angel  with  the  Everlasting  Gospel  has  flown  from 
heaven  to  earth,  and  the  message  borne  by  him  is  being  preached 
''again"  in  all  the  world,  as  a  final  witness  to  the  nations. 

Isaiah's  reference  to  the  setting  up  of  an  Ensign  for  Israel's  gather- 
ing finds  its  fulfilment  in  the  restoration  of  the  Gospel  and  the  Priest- 
hood, and  in  the  organization  of  the  Church  of  Christ  in  this  dispensa- 
tion. Then  and  there  was  raised  a  rallying  standard  for  the  sons  and 
daughters  of  Ephraim,  the  first  scions  of  Jacob's  household  to  be  "born 
again,"  to  embrace  the  ancient  faith  in  modern  times — the  first  of  the 
broken  off  branches  of  Israel's  "olive  tree"  to  be  "grafted  in  again" 
and  bear  good  fruit. 

Keys  of  the  Gathering  Restored. — Before  there  could  be  a  com- 
plete gathering  of  the  chosen  people,  the  Keys  of  the  Gathering  had  to 
be  restored.  Accordingly,  when  the  time  was  ripe,  they  were  con- 
ferred upon  the  founder  of  the  Latter-day  Church.  Moses,  who  held 
those  keys  at  the  time  of  the  Exodus  from  Egypt,  was  the  messenger 
who  now  restored  them.  The  place  of  restoration  was  the  Kirtland 
Temple ;  the  time,  April,  1836.  Joseph  Smith  and  Oliver  Cowdery 
testify  that  "the  veil"  was  taken  from  their  minds,  and  they  "saw  the 
Lord,"  even  Jehovah,  who  proclaimed  to  them  his  identity  with  the 
Saviour  of   Mankind.      The  record  then  continues: 

"After  this  vision  closed,  the  heavens  were  again  opened  unto  us, 
and  Moses  appeared  before  us,  and  committed  upon  us  the  keys  of 
the  gathering  of  Israel  from  the  four  parts  of  the  earth,  and  the  lead- 
ing of  the  ten  tribes  from  the  land  of  the  north." 

First  Latter-day  Saints. — Then  began  the  great  work  for  which 
these  keys  had  been  restored.  All  preceding  it  was  but  preparatory. 
"Mormonism's"  first  converts  had  been  made  in  the  region  where  the 
Church  arose — the  farming  districts  of  Western  New  York  and 
Northern  Pennsylvania.  But  Kirtland,  Ohio,  was  the  cradle  of  the 
Kingdom.  There  a  Temple  was  built,  and  the  Priesthood  more  per- 
fectly organized,  preliminary  to  the  sending  of  the  Gospel  to  foreign 
nations,  and  the  gathering  Qf  scattered  Israel  to  the  Land  of  Zion. 
Up  to  the  summer  of  1837  the  "fishers  of  men"  were  busy  only  in  the 
United  States  and  in  Canada.  Now  they  crossed  over  to  the  British 
Isles,  and  later  to  the  continent  of  Europe.  Instant  and  marvellous 
was  their  success.  In  parts  of  England — notably  Lancashire  and  Here- 
fordshire— whole  villages  and  congregations  were  swept  into  the  Church 
by  the  unlettered  yet  divinely  empowered  Apostles  of  the  new 
dispensation. 

Earliest  Immigrants. — A  small  Company  of  Latter-day  Saints,  num- 
bering bul  forty-one  -the  first  to  "gather"  from  abroad — sailed  on  the 
ship  "Britannia"  from  Lievrpool  for  New  York,  in  June,  L840.  They 
woe  bound  for  Nauvoo,  Illinois.  Bach  succeeding  year  ended  its  quota 
to  the  fast-growing  nucleus  of  the  Saviour's  kingdom,  Thus  was  set 
in  motion  the  mighty  tide  of  immigration  which,  swelling  the  numbers 
of  the  Saints  in  the  Mississippi  Valley,  eventually  peopled  with  the 
skilled  mechanici  and  hardy  yeomanry  of  Great  Britain,  Scandinivia 
and  other  European  countries,  the  mountains  and  valleys  of  the  Great 
We  t. 

The  Impelling  Motive.  How  different  the  motives  impelling  these 
people,  from  the  motives  generally  imputed  to  them!  It  was  not  for 
gold  and  silver,  flocks  and  nerds,  nor  any  of  "the  good  things  of  this 
world,"  that  they  forsook  home  and  country  *»d  "gathered"  to  the 
Land  of  Zion.  it  was  not  to  better  their  temporal  condition,  that  they 
abandoned  comforl  and  in  Bome  cases  affluence,  crossed  the  stormy 
ocean,  dragged  rickety  hand-cart     over  parching  plains  and  sno*  capt 


834  TE   KARERE  Noema,  1941 

mountains,  to  settle  in  a  barren  wilderness  and  endure  hardships  and 
privations  innumerable,  while  redeeming  the  wastes  and  dotting  it  with 
cities,  farms  and  vineyards.  It  was  for  God  and  his  Kingdom — noth- 
ing less;  and  it  was  the  love  of  Truth  that  inspired  and  impelled  them. 

Character  of  the  Saints. — Utah's  early  settlers  were  stigmatized  as 
ignorant  and  malicious.  It  was  ignorance  or  malice  that  so  stigmatized 
them.  "Scum  of  the  earth,"  "off-scourings  of  civilization,"  were  some 
of  the  pet  names  bestowed  upon  them  by  their  enemies.  How  utterly 
unjust  these  epithets,  how  grotesquely  misapplied,  everyone  must  know 
who  has  any  knowledge  of  the  facts.  In  reality,  they  were  among  the 
best  men  and  women  of  their  time.  Many  of  them  were  descended 
from  the  Pilgrims  and  the  Patriots  who  founded  this  nation,  and  in 
their  veins,  as  Children  of  the  Covenant,  flowed  the  blood  of  priests 
and  kings,  illustrious  through  a  thousand  generations.* 

Not  slaves,  but  free  men  and  free  women,  founded  the  Church  of 
Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-day  Saints.  They  were  of  the  sheep  that  knew 
the  Shepherd's  voice,  and  when  put  to  the  test,  they  showed  "the  mettle 
of  their  pasture." 

"One  of  a  City  and  Two  of  a  Family." — Jeremiah's  prediction 
was  uttered  at  a  time  when  families  (tribes)  were  much  larger  than 
they  now  are — large  enough  for  one  tribe  to  fill  several  cities.  Other- 
wise, the  prophet  might  have  changed  his  wording  to  read:  "One  of  a 
family  and  two  of  a  city."  Phrased  either  way,  the  forcast  has  been 
literally  fulfilled  in  the  painful  and  pathetic  experiences  of  many  Latter- 
day  Saints,  including  women  and  children,  turned  out-of-door  by  parents 
or  guardians,  for  daring  to  be  "one  of  a  city"  or  "two  of  a  family,"  in 
identifying  themselves  with  a  people  everywhere  "spoken  against." 

"The  Shoulders  of  the  Philistines." — This  phrase  translates  itself 
into  the  facilities  for  far  and  rapid  transportation  owned  and  operated 
by  the  Gentiles,  but  utilized  by  the  God  of  Jacob  in  bringing  his  people 
from  foreign  snores,  and  up  into  the  tops  of  "the  high  mountains  of 
Israel."  "They  shall  fly  upon  the  shoulders  of  the  Philistines  toward 
the  West."  When  Isaiah  wrote  those  words,  he  was  gazing  with  pro- 
phetic eye  upon  this  very  period.  He  beheld  the  ships  and  railroads 
of  the  Gentiles,  likewise  the  Land  of  Zion,  now  occupied  by  the  Gen- 
tiles, but  formerely  peopled  by  the  Nephites  (Joseph  and  Judah)  and 
included  in  the  lands  that  God  gave  to  their  forefathers.  Israel  needs 
the  help  of  the  Gentiles — their  wealth,  their  power,  their  wonderful 
insight  into  and  command  over  material  things,  their  intelligence  and 
skill  in  manipulating  temporalities.  How,  without  the  children  of 
Japheth,  could  the  children  of  Jacob  be  gathered  out  from  the  nations? 

The  Lost  Tribes. — It  is  maintained  by  some  that  the  lost  tribes  of 
Israel — those  carried  into  captivity  about  725  B.C. — are  no  longer 
a  distinct  people;  that  they  exist  only  in  a  scattered  condition,  mixed 
with  the  nations  among  which  they  were  taken  by  their  captors,  the 
conquering  Assyrians.  If  this  be  true,  and  those  tribes  were  not  intact 
at  the  time  Joseph  and  Oliver  received  the  keys  of  the  gathering,  why 
did  they  make  so  pointed  a  reference  to  "the  leading  of  the  ten  tribes 
from  the  land  of  the  north?"  This,  too,  after  a  general  allusion  to 
"the  gathering  of  Israel  from  the  four  parts  of  the  earth."  What  need 
to   particularize   as  to  the   Ten   Tribes,   if  they  were  no  longer  a  dis- 

♦Talent  and  genius,  brain  and  brawn,  from  every  part  of  tbe  world  came  in  the 
early  immigrants  to  Salt  Lake  Valley — farmers,  labourers,  tradesmen,  mechanics, 
merchants,  manufacturers  and  business  men,  with  a  liberal  sprinkling  of  artists, 
musicians,  writers  and  other  professional  people.  "In  their  degree  the  pick  and  flower 
of  England,"  was  the  comment  passed  upon  a  ship's  company  of  "Mormon"  emigrants, 
by  Charles  Dickens,  the  great  English  author,  in  his  sketch  "The  Uncommercial 
Traveller,"   published   in   1863. 


Noema,  1941  TE  KARERE  835 

tinct  people?     And  why  do  our  Articles  of  Faith  give  those  tribes  a 
special   mention.* 

The  Highway." — Isaiah's  reference  to  the  "Highway"  points 
directly  to  the  lost  tribes,  respecting  whose  return  from  "The  North 
Country,"  his  fellow-prophet,  Jeremiah,  promises  an  event  that  shall 
so  far  eclipse  in  scope  and  grandeur  Israel's  exodus  from  Egypt,  that 
the  latter  will  no  more  be  mentioned. 

Joseph  the  Seer  must  have  had  the  same  thing  in  mind  when  he 
wrote:  "And  they  who  are  in  the  north  countries  shall  come  in  remem- 
brance before  the  Lord,  and  their  prophets  shall  hear  his  voice,  and 
shall  no  longer  stay  themselves,  and  they  shall  smite  the  rocks  and  the 
ice  shall  flow  down  at  their  presence,  and  an  highway  shall  be  cast  up 
in  the  midst  of  the  great  deep." 

Already  he  had  foretold  the  removal  of  the  Latter-day  Saints  to 
the  Rocky  Mountains — then  a  desolate,  uninhabited  region — and  was 
evidently  pondering  that  thought  when  he  further  declared:  "And  in 
the  barren  deserts  there  shall  come  forth  pools  of  living  water;  and 
the  parched  ground  shall  no  longer  be  a  thirsty  land." 

Ephraim  and  the  Returning  Tribes. — It  was  Ephraim  who  lifted 
the  Ensign  for  the  Gathering.  It  is  to  Ephraim  that  the  returning 
tribes  will  "bring  forth  their  rich  treasures,"  receiving  from  him  their 
spiritual  blessings.  "And  the  boundaries  of  the  everlasting  hills  shall 
tremble  at  their  presence." 

Judah  and  Jerusalem. — The  same  prophecy  mentions  the  tribe  of 
Judah,  whose  gathering  place,  however,  is  not  the  Land  of  Zion,  not 
the  New  Jerusalem,  but  Jerusalem  of  old,  yet  to  be  rebuilt  upon  a 
scale  of  magnificence  paralleled  only  by  the  splendour  of  her  sister 
city  and  twin  capital  of  Christ's  Kingdom.* 

Even  as  the  Waters. — Hear,  0  Israel!  Children  of  Jacob!  The 
night  of  dispersion  is  past.  The  day  of  gathering  has  dawned.  The 
tempests  that  broke  above  the  heads  of  your  ancestors  have  spent  their 
fury,  and  the  clouds  have  parted  and  are  rolling  away.  The  barren 
ground,  refreshed  by  the  fearful  visitation,  has  brought  forth  abund- 
antly, and  a  ripened  harvest  awaits  the  reaper's  cycle.  The  revivifying 
rains,  having  fulfilled  their  mission,  must  now  return  to  the 
whence  they  were  taken.  Such  is  the  meaning,  the  symbolism,  of  the 
scattering  and  gathering  of  Israel. 

•Th<-  fad    that    Arctic   explorers    have   found   no   such   people  at    the   North    Pole 

where    some    theori  ts    have    persisted    in    placing    them     due-    not    prove    thai    the 

"Ten   Tribes"   have  IqbI    their  Identity,      it    was   tradition,   not    revelation,   that    located 

then    at     the    North     Pole.       "The    north    country. l'he    land    of    the    north."    these    are 

lie-     criptural  de  Ignations  of  their  unknown  abode.      All  the  rest   is  inference.    Those 

tril.es    could    still    he    intad.    and    JTel    much    of    their    blood    he    found    among    the    northern 

nation  ,     Borne  of  the  pilgrims   i hi   ea   ilj    have  mixed  with   the  people  encountered 

bj    them    while  Journeying    toward    then-   ultimate   destination;   ami    thai    Ephraim    did 

,.   mix,    H"  ea    I  he   Prophet    <  t  :  9  >    dech 

♦Isa.   2  ■.  :l     In   April    L840,   Or  on    Hyde  and  John    B.    Page,    both    \\->  ties,   were 

-■lit    from    Illinois   on   a    ml     to    Pah    bine,    to    bit        the   soii,    thai 

mlghl   deparl   and  the  was    be  opened   for  th<    re  toratioi  to  their  ancient 

homeland.     John   E.   Page  faltered  and  fell  bj    the  way, 

[on      On    the    24th    of    October,    1841,    from    the    summll    of    the    Mount    of 
iverl  oking  Jeru  alem,  he  offered  t.,  the  God  oi    I  »n1   and  eloquent 

pra]  i  i    In    behalf   of    hi      do*  a  I  rodden    people.     He    bl< 
might    ono     more    become    fruitful,    and    thai    Judah    might    n 
Elder    Hyde  afterwards    predicted   thai    the    British    nation   would 
[n  (he  redemption  of  Pale  tin<  fulfilled  during   th«    \ 

iv,    idem    Georgi     I    Smith   wenl   with  ■  party   from  Bait 
eated    the    Holy    Land    for   the   return   oi    the  h  ■■■      and    the   rebulldlm 

ACKNOWLEDGMENT.     Sitter   Cowley    b    plea  ed   to 
Tamaki,    H.B.,    Branch    Primarj    for  their  contribution  of   B8   towards 
\  he  Primary  Fund  fo    I      on  publ  cat  ione, 


836  TE    KARERE  Noema,  1941 

SUNDAY  SCHOOL 


Theme — 

"OUR  HOMES   AND   CHAPELS   SHALL  BE   BEAUTIFUL" 

"For  Zion  must  increase  in  beauty  and  in  Holiness;  her  borders 
must  be  enlarged;  her  stakes  must  be  strengthened;  yea  verily  I  say 
unto  you.    Zion  must  arise  and  put  on  her  beautiful  garments." 

— Doctrine  &  Covenants  82 :  14. 


SACRAMENT  GEM 
"Let  not  the  heart  be  sad  at  trials  here, 

But  sense  how  e'en  the  Saviour  suffered  ill ; 
He  bore  the  cruel  thorn,  the  galling  spear, 

To  glorify  His  Father's  holy  will." 

CONCERT  RECITATION 
Mark  8:  38. 

"Whosoever  therefore  shall  be  ashamed  of  me  and  of  my  words 
in  this  adulterous  and  sinful  generation:  of  him  also  shall  the  Son 
of  man  be  ashamed,  when  He  cometh  in  the  glory  of  His  Father 
with  the  holy  angels." 

KORERO  A  NGAKAU 
Maaka  8:38. 

"Ki  te  whakama  hoki  tetahi  ki  ahau,  ki  aku  korero,  i  tenei  whaka- 
tupuranga  puremu,  kino ;  ka  whakama  ano  te  Tama  a  te  tangata  ki 
a  ia,  ina  haere  mai  i  runga  i  te  kororia  o  Tona  Matua,  ratou  ko  nga 
anahera  tapu." 

SONG  PRACTICE 

"The  Uord  is  My  Shepherd"   Page  212 

"He  Hepara  Toku"    Wharangi  2 

LESSONS 

KINDERGARTEN.      Thought:   Helpfulness. 
"The  First   Miracle."    (John   2) 
"Feeding    the    Five    Thousand."     (Matt.    14) 
Miraculous  Draught  of  Fishes."    (Luke  5) 

PRIMARY. 

"Sold  by  his  Brothers."   (Gen  37))      Thought:  "God  protects  those 

who  love  Him  and  trust  Him." 
"A     Hebrew    becomes     Governor    of     Egypt."        (Gen.     39,     40,     41) 

Thought:   "Faithfulness  will   be  rewarded." 
"A  Feast  by  Governor  Joseph."  (Gen.  42,  43)    Thought:  "The  Lord 

moves  in  a  wonderful  way." 

CHURCH  HISTORY— Book  of  Mormon. 


Noema,  1941  TE  KARERE  837 

A  and  B  DEPARTMENTS. 

"The  Story  of  Abraham — His  life  at  Bethel."  (Gen.  18,19) 
What  to  look  for — Abraham's  friendly  association  with  divine  mes- 
sengers. The  reason  for  the  destruction  of  Sodom  and  Gomorrah. 
Abraham's  plea  for  the  cities.  Problems:  Why  wasn't  the  city  of  Zoar 
destroyed  as  were  the  cities  of  Sodom  and  Gomorrah?  How  did  mar- 
riage among  strangers  cause  the  destruction  of  Lot's  family? 

"His  Testing  in  Offering  Isaac."  (Gen.  22)  What  to  look  for: 
Abraham's  great  love  for  Isaac.  Abraham's  obedience.  Problems: 
About  how  old  was  Isaac  at  the  time  of  the  sacrifice?  What  blessing 
did  the  angel  of  the  Lord  give  Abraham  after  he  had  offered  the  ram 
as  a  sacrifice? 

C  and  D  DEPARTMENTS. 

"At  the  Sea  of  Galilee,  in  Capernum,  and  in  other  Cities  of 
Galilee."  (Luke  4  and  5;  Matt.  1  and  8;  Mark  4)  Problems:  What  two 
incidents  indicate  that  the  first  four  men  called  to  the  ministry  believed 
implicitly  in  Jesus?  Why  did  the  evil  spirits  know  more  about  the 
divinity  of  Jesus  than  did  the  people  among  whom  He  was  working? 
Why  did  people  wait  until  sundown  to  bring  their  sick  to  Jesus?  What 
incident  shows  the  dependence  of  Jesus  on  God  even  at  a  time  of  great 
success?      What   did  the  law  demand   of   a  cured  leper? 

GOSPEL  DOCTRINE. 

"The    End    of    the    Kingdom    of    Israel."    (11    Kings    15-17) 

"The   Lost   Tribes   and   Modern    Revelation."    (Deut.    30;  Jer.    3,    16, 

31;  and  any  other  relevant  information  from  the   Bible  and 
Church    literature.) 
"The  Reign  of  Hezekiah."    (11  Kings  18-20;   11   Chron.   29-32) 

MAORI   CLASS. 

RATAPU   TUATAHI 

MO  TE  WHIU  MO  TE  HARA.  I  te  mea  kua  pa  ki  te  nuinga  te  he 
o  te  whakaakoranga,  e  hara  nei  i  ta  te  karaipiture  e  he  ana  hold,  ara, 
mo  te  mamaetanga  mutunga  kore,  e  rite  mai  ana  mo  ia  tangata  hara. 
QOreira  kihai  ano  te  hahi  ki  aata  whakaturia  i  tenei  0  nga  wa,  ka  tukua 
mai  e  te  Ariki  he  whakakitenga  ma  roto  mai  i  te  poropiti  ia  Eiohepa 
Mete,  e  pa  ana  mo  tenei  take,  i  nga  korerotanga  e  whai  ake  nei. — 
"A  he  pono,  me  tino  ripeneta  nga  tangata  katoa,  me  mamae  ranei, 
no  te  mea  ko  Ahau  ko  te  Atua,  kaore  <>ku  mutunga,  no  reira  e  kore 
Au  c  whakakore  nga  whakawa  e  whakataua  ai  e  Ahau.  erangi  ka  putt 
atu  he  aue,  he  tangihanga,  he  nhunga  me  te  teteatanga  o  nga  niho,  ae 

ra,  ki  te  hun.ua  e  kitca  ana  ki  toku   ringa   maui,  ahakoa   'a.  kaore  i  tuhi- 

lulia.  kaore  he  mutunga  o  tenei  whakamamaetanga  e  rangi  kua  oti 
i«'  tuhituhi,  In-  mamaetanga  mutunga,  mutunga  kore.  A  tenei  hold 
kua  oti  !<■  tuhituhi  he  whakawakanga  mutunga  kore  No  te  mea  he 
mutunga  kore  Ahau.  a  ko  t<-  whiunga  e  hoatu  ai  e  Toku  ringa,  he 
whiunga  mutunga  kore,  no  t«'  mea  ko  "Mutunga  kore  Toku  I 
Noreira,  ko  ta  te  Atua  whiunga  he  whiunga  mutunga  kore.  he  whiunga 
mutunga  kore  ;i  te  Atua  whiunga." 

Nga    Patai: 

l.    He  aha  t«'  whakaakoranga  he  I  pa  nui  ki  te  katoa'.' 

:'.      h'apua    c    ina    ake    nga     patai. 

RATAPU    TUARUA 

\1' i    II  VI    \\\.      lie    maha    nga    wa    i    aim    atu    ai    lira    kortlD    I 

kaihanga  o  )<■  kino  i  waenganui  i  te  ta  i  tena  ko   i; 

ko  te  hoa  riri,  me  te  kai  whakatutuki  ki  te  Ariki.  ko  te  rai 
i  poke,  e  kiia  nei  ano  ko  te  Etewera,  ko  Perehepura, 
niha  o  nga  Rewera,  ko  te  whakangaromanga  ko  Periara,     Ko  nga  kupu 


838  TE   KARERE  Noema,  1941 

karanganoa  ara,  te  tarakona,  te  nakahi — i  eke  ki  runga  kia  Hatana  i 
te  wa  o  tona  takanga  atu.  Na  te  kupu  whakakite  mai  ka  mohio  tatou 
ko  Hatana  i  mua,  he  anahera  no  te  maramatanga,  e  mohiotia  ana  i  taua 
wa  ko  Rutiwha,  te  tama  o  te  ata,  engari  na  ona  hiahia  whakahirahira 
i  mea  ai  ia  kia  riro  ia  ia  te  kororia  me  te  mana  o  te  Matua,  e  whiwhi 
ai  ka  whakahaeretia  e  ia  tona  take  he  me  hoko  katoa  mai  nga  hunga  o 
te  ao  i  runga  i  te  tikanga  aki,  te  korenga  i  whakaaetia  o  tona  take  ka 
riro  nana  i  arahi  he  ropu  tahuri  atu  ki  te  Matua  me  te  Tama  whawhai 
ai,  kumea  atu  ana  e  ia  te  wahi  tuatoru  o  te  rangi  ki  tenei  ropu  whaka- 
rongo  kore  ki  te  Atua. 
Nga   Patai: 

1.  Ko  wai  etahi  o  nga  ingoa  o  te  kai  mahi  o  te  kino? 

2.  No  tehea  wa  i  mau  ai  te  ingoa  tarakona,  nakahi  ranei  ki  runga 
ia  ia? 

3.  He  aha  tona  turanga  i  mua  atu  o  tona  takanga? 

RATAPU   TUATORU 

MO  HATANA.  Ko  enei  wairua  whakakakake  he  mea  pei  mai  i  te 
rangi,  mai  ra  ano  kua  aru  tonu  i  te  tokonga  ake  o  ratou  whakaaro  tai- 
kaha  ki  te  rapu  he  tangata  hei  arahanga  ma  ratou  ki  roto  ki  te  pouri- 
tanga  kia  rite  ki  to  ratou  ake  ahua,  ko  ratou  ko  te  Rewera  me  ona 
anahera.  Ko  te  mana  kei  ia  koe  ano  tou  ake  whakaaro  i  puritia  i  tau- 
tokona  hoki  i  runga  i  te  whawhai  o  te  rangi,  i  kauparea  atu  hoki  te 
aheitanga  o  te  whakahaere  i  tenei  mahi  rewera  e  tapoko  atu  ai  ki  te 
po ;  ko  te  kaha  ia  o  enei  wairua  tikanga  heke  ki  te  whakawai  me  te 
totohe  e  tino  whakahaeretia  kahatia  ana.  I  whakawaitia  a  Iwi  e 
Hatana  kia  takahi  i  te  ture  a  te  Atua;  Nana  ano  hoki  i  whakamohio  atu 
kia  Kaina  te  tikanga  kohuru  e  whai  taonga  ai  ia  i  noho  nei  ia  he  kai 
kohuru  no  tona  teina. 
Nga   Patai: 

1.  I  peheatia  nga  wairua  whakakakake  ki  te  Atua? 

2.  No  nahea  i  timata  ai  a  ratou  tikanga  taikaha? 

3.  Pehea  te  ahua  o  te  tikanga  kei  ia  koe  ake  te  mana  mou  ake 
whakaaro? 

4.  He  aha  te  mana  kei  te  mau  i  enei  wairua  taikaha? 

RATAPU   TUAWHA 

MO  HATANA.  E  whakahaeretia  ana  e  Hatana  tona  mana  ki 
runga  i  nga  wairua  kua  poke  nei  i  ana  tikanga  taikaha;  Ko  ia  te  tua- 
tahi  o  nga  anahera  i  peia  mai,  me  te  kai  pehi  ki  te  he  o  ratou  kua 
taka  atu  nei  i  tenei  oranga.  E  rapu  ana  ia  ki  te  whakararu  me  te 
arai  atu  i  te  tangata  i  nga  mahi  pai,  i  runga  i  tona  whakawai  kia  hara; 
i  te  whakahaere  ranei  kia  pangia  ia  e  te  mate,  kia  hemo  tonu  atu 
ranei.  Otira  i  roto  i  enei  wThakahaere  kino  e  kore  e  hipa  atu  i  te  nui 
o  te  he  o  te  tangata  tona  mana,  i  runga  ranei  i  te  matauranga  o  te 
Atua  e  ahei  ana  kia  pera;  i  nga  wa  katoa  tera  hoki  e  whakakorea  tona 
mana  e  te  mana  kaha  ake  o  te  Atua.  Ae  ra,  ahakoa  te  whakamahinga 
rapu  utu  e  taea  te  whakatuapeka  hei  whakatutuki  i  a  te  Atua  mahi. 
E  ai  ta  nga  karaipiture  kia  tatou  e  whakaatu  tuturu  ana  ko  te  wa  o 
to  Hatana  mana  kua  tatauria.  Ko  te  mate  mona  kua  whakataua,  a 
hei  ta  te  Ariki  ake  wa  e  tino  whakakorea  ai  tona  mana.  Ka  hereaia 
i  te  wa  o  te  kingitanga  mo  te  mano  tau,  a  i  muri  atu  i  te  mano  tau 
o  te  rongomau  ka  tukua  ano  ia  mo  tetahi  wa  poto,  a  muri  atu  ka  tino 
kore  mana  ia  me  tona  kaha  i  runga  i  nga  tamariki  a  te  Atua,  ka  tino 
hatepea  atu. 
Nga  Patai: 

1.  Ko  wai   e  whakahere  ana  i  te  hunga  kua  poke,  kua  taka  atu 
hoki   i  tenei   oranga? 

2.  Pehea  nga  ahua  e  rapua  ana  e  te  Rewera  hei  whakapa  ki  fce 
tangata? 


Noema,  1941  TE  KARERE  839 

PRIMARY 

MEMORY   GEM 
"Love  your  enemies,  do  good  to  them  that  hate  you." 

FIRST  WEEK 
To    the    Teacher: 

It  is  not  easy  to  be  a  Primary  teacher,  but  it  is  a  glorious  privi- 
lege. There  are  four  important  requirements  for  a  teacher  in  this 
work.  Faith,  love,  preparation  and  application.  All  that  she  gives 
of  these  she  has,  and  the  more  she  gives  the  more  she  has. 

A  LITTLE  GIRL  LEARNED  IN  HER  HOME  TO  HAVE  FAITH 
Text:  II.  Kings  5:  10. 

Objective:   Faith  in   God  is  necessary  to   obtain  His  blessings. 
Song:    "Jesus  Unto  Thee  I  Pray." 
Lesson    Story: 

Long  ago  there  lived  in  a  village  near  Samaria  the  capital  of  Israel, 
a  little  Jewish  maid  of  such  great  faith  that  a  story  is  written  about  her 
in  the  Bible.  We  think  she  must  have  been  beautiful  and  we  know 
that  she  was  kind  and  loving.  The  mother  of  this  little  girl  loved  her 
very  dearly  so  she  showed  her  how  to  find  the  gift  that  would  bring 
her  the  greatest  happiness  in  life.  Do  you  know  what  the  gift  was 
that  this  good  mother  wanted  her  child  to  find?  It  was  the  gift  of 
faith.  So  she  talked  to  her  often  about  the  Father  in  Heaven,  His 
power  and  His  goodness. 

As  you  know,  in  the  land  of  the  Bible,  most  of  the  houses  have 
rooms  built  upon  the  roof  far  above  the  hot  plains,  even  above  the 
tree  tops.  And  in  these  rooms,  with  only  the  night  sky  for  a  covering, 
the  people  spend  most  of  their  evenings. 

So  in  the  warm  summer  evenings  this  little  girl  would  sit  with 
her  mother  in  this  room  on  the  housetop  and  together  they  would  look 
up  at  the  stars,  which  seemed  so  near  to  them,  and  talk  about  many 
things.  And  the  mother  would  often  tell  her  child  about  the  God  of 
Israel   who  made  Heaven  and  Earth,  the  sun,  the   moon  and   th< 

"My  child,"  she  said,   "it  was  God,   the   Father  of  all,  who  ci 
the    moon    and    stars    for    us   and    the    earth    and    the    sun    that    warms    it. 
That  is  why  we  must  never   forget    Him,   nor  tail  to  pray  to   Him  night 
and    morning    and    thank     Him     for    all    our    blessings.      And. 
must  ever  remember  thai   it   was  Jehovah  who  led  our  people,   I 
from  the  cruel  bondage  of  the  Egyptians  and  brought  us  to  this  lovely 
land,  this  land   of   Promise." 

"But  mother,"  the  little  maid  asked,  opening  her  dark  eyea  wide, 

"why   do    we    have    enemies   today    which    our    God    doea    m-t    -la;. 

know  armies  come  over  from  Syria  and   fight   our  soldiers  and  kill   many 

and   some  are   carried   aw  ay   ca|>l  11 

"Yes,  l  know,  my  child,"  the  mother  answered,  "but  our  people 
have  not  alwaya  obeyed  God.  They  d«>  m-t  always  trust  in  Him  as 
i  mild,     hut  we  mv  rve  Him,     For  you  and  me  there  la 

no  happine  i  except   In  I  he  Loi  d1    way." 

Then  one  da)  the  Syrian  oldiex  came  down  from  the  north  with 
their  horsea  and  their  chariots.     And  the  sold  rael  were  not 

strong  enough  to  drive  them  back  and  so  they  came  far  Into  the  land 
of  Israel,  even  to  the  village  near  Samaria,  where  the  little   H 

maid   dwelt    with    h.  r    father  and    mother   and   th<  "ine   o\ 

the  children   of  the   village,   and   among   them   the   little   maid   whose 
mother  had  so  carefully   taught  her.     ii   wa    the  custom  In  those  days 
to  cany  the  e  captive  children  to  the  slave  market  and  sail  them  as 
to  anyone  w  ho  a  I  bed  to  buy  them. 


<s-i  I  TE  KARERE  Etoema,  1941 

Now  it  chanced  that  a  great  captain  of  the  king's  army,  Naaman, 
saw  this  little  maid  and  took  her  into  his  own  home  to  wait  upon  his 
wife.  Naaman  was  a  great  man  and  a  brave  man.  The  king  loved 
and  honoured  him.  He  had  riches  and  a  fine  house  and  many  servants, 
but  he  was  sad,  for  he  had  a  disease  called  leprosy. 

His  wife  was  sad  also  and  she  would  often  sit  and  weep,  for  she 
knew  there  was  no  cure  for  her  husband.  The  little  captive  maid 
had  come  to  love  her  mistress  and  she  felt  sorry  to  see  her  grieve. 
She  felt  in  her  heart  that  she  knew  how  Naaman  could  be  cured  of  his 
sickness. 

"I  am  sorry  that  you  weep,"  the  little  maid  said  to  her  mistress 
one  day.  "I,  too,  am  sad  because  of  the  master's  illness;  but  I  know 
there  is  one — who  can  heal  him." 

"How  could  that  be,"  her  mistress  answered;  "hath  you  master  not 
been  to  all  the  great  physicians  throughout  the  land?" 

"I  know,  mistress,  but  He  of  whom  I  speak  can  even  make  the 
dead  to  live.  I  know  because  my  mother  told  me,"  the  little  maid  said 
in  her  quiet  but  earnest  way. 

The  mistress  thought  many  times  of  the  words  of  the  little  maid. 
Then  one  day  she  called  her  husband  to  her  and  said,  "My  lord,  the 
little  captive  maid  that  is  of  Israel  doth  speak  of  a  Prophet  of  her  God 
that  can  heal  one  of  leprosy.      He  dwells  in  the  city  of  Samaria." 

Naaman  went  to  the  king  and  told  him  what  the  little  maid  of 
Samaria  had  said.  The  king  loved  Naaman,  and  when  he  heard  the 
story  he  answered,  "Go,  and  I  will  send  a  letter  to  the  King  of  Israel." 

"And  Naaman  departed  and  took  with  him  ten  talents  of  silver 
and  six  thousand  pieces  of  gold  and  ten  changes  of  raiment"  for  gifts 
to  the  king.  The  king's  letter  said:  "I  have  sent  Naaman,  my  servant, 
to  thee  that  thou  mayest  recover  him  of  his  leprosy." 

When  the  king  read  the  letter  he  said:  "Am  I  God  to  kill  and  to 
make  alive  that  this  man  doth  send  to  me  to  recover  a  man  of  his 
leprosy?  And  he  rent  his  clothes,  for  he  thought  the  King  of  Syria 
sought  a  quarrel  with  him  and  he  feared  his  people  were  not  strong 
enough  to  withstand  the  Syrian  hosts. 

"When  Elisha  the  man  of  God  heard  how  the  king  rent  his  clothes, 
he  sent  to  the  king  and  said:  'Wherefore  hast  thou  rent  thy  clothes? 
Let  him  come  now  to  me  and  he  shall  know  that  there  is  a  Prophet 
in  Israel.'  " 

So  Naaman  came  with  his  horses  and  with  his  chariot  and  stood  at 
the  door  of  the  house  of  Elisha.  And  Elisha  sent  a  messenger  unto 
him  saying:  "Go  wash  in  Jordan  seven  times  and  thy  flesh  shall  come 
again  to  thee,  and  thou  shalt  be  clean." 

"But  Naaman  was  wroth,  and  went  away,  and  said,  'Behold,  I 
thought,  He  will  surely  come  out  to  me,  and  stand,  and  call  on  the 
name  of  the  Lord  his  God,  and  strike  his  hands  over  the  place,  and 
recover  the  leper.  Are  not  the  rivers  of  Damascus  better  than  all 
the  rivers  of  Israel?  May  I  not  wash  in  them  and  be  clean?  So  he 
went  away  in  a  rage.'  " 

But  one  of  his  servants  came  to  him  and  said,  "My  father,  if  the 
prophet  had  bid  thee  do  some  great  thing,  wouldst  thou  not  have  done 
it?   How  much  rather  then,  when  he  saith  to  thee  'Wash  and  be  clean.'  " 

Naaman  listened  to  the  advice  of  his  servant,  and,  going  to  the 
river,  he  "dipped  himself  seven  times  in  Jordan,  according  to  the 
saying:  of  the  man  of  God;  and  his  flesh  came  again  like  unto  the  flesh 
of  a  little  child,  and  he  was  clean.  Then  he  returned  to  the  man  of 
God,  he  and  all  his  company,  and  came  and  stood  before  him;  and  he 
said,  'Behold,  now  I  know  that  there  is  no  God  in  all  the  earth,  but 
in    Israel.'  " 

Naaman  offered  Elisha  the  rich  gifts  which  he  had  brought,  but 
Elisha  refused  saying,  "Go  in  peace."  So  Naman  departed  to  his  own 
country. 


Noema,  1941  TE  KARERE  841 

SECOND  WEEK 
TRUST  IN  GOD  BRINGS  JOY 
Objective:  The  Lord  blesses  those  who  believe  and  trust  in  Him. 
To  the  Teacher: 

Blessed  is  that  man  that  maketh  the  Lord  his  trust.  Psalms  40:  4. 
Story:   Lost  and  Found. 

"Therese,  it  is  so  dark,  I  am  afraid!"  sobbed  little   Gretchen. 

"Let's  sit  down  and  rest,"  suggested  Hans.      I'm  so  tired." 

"We  shall  surely  see  the  light  very  soon,"  said  Therese  bravely  ; 
but  we  will  rest  a  little  if  thou  art  tired. 

So  the  older  sister  sat  down  on  the  grass  and  took  Gretchen  on  her 
lap,  while  Hans  nestled  close  to  her  side. 

They  had  come  out  to  gather  wild  flowers,  and  had  wandered  so 
far  into  the  woods  that  when  Therese  said  they  must  go  home,  they 
looked  in  vain  for  the  path  by  which  they  had  come.  While  they  were 
trying  to  find  the  way  home,  it  grew  so  dark  that  the  little  ones  were 
frightened,  and  even  ten-year-old  Therese  had  hard  work  to  keep  the 
tears  from  her  voice  as  she  tried  to  comfort  them. 

"We  never  shall  find  our  home,"  said  Hans,  gloomily. 

"0  Therese,  shall  we  never  again  see  the  dear  mother?"  wailed 
Gretchen. 

"Yes,  little  one,  thou  shalt  see  her;  never  fear.  Thou  hast  for- 
gotten, Hans,  that  the  dear  Lord  takes  care  of  us.  Let  us  ask  Him 
to  show  us  the  way.      Mother  says  that  He  always  hears." 

"Will  He  send  a  shining  one  to  take  us  home,  as  He  did  to  Peter 
when  he  was  in  prison?"  asked  Hans,  eagerly. 

"I  should  like  to  see  a  shining  one,"  said  Gretchen,  clasping  her 
fat  little  hands.      "Ask  him,   Therese." 

So  three  little  heads  bowed,  and  three  pairs  of  small  hands  were 
clasped  as  Therese  prayed:  "Dear  Lord  Jesus,  we  have  lost  our  way. 
and  the  mother  will  be  so  afraid  about  us.  Please  send  an  angel  to 
take  us  home." 

"Will  the  sky  open  and  let  the  angel  through?"  asked  Han-,  gat- 
ing up  into  the  darkn< 

"Perhaps  we  shall  riol  see  the  angel,"  said  Therese.     "Moth<  i 

that  they   arc   often   near,    but    people   do    not    see   them,    now." 

Just  then  the  faint  tinkle  of  a  bell  broke  the  Bilence  of  tin-  forest. 
"Are  the  shining  ones  coming?"  asked  Little  Gretchen  in  an  awed 

Voice. 

Tinkle,  tinkle,  came  the  sound  of  the  bell,   nearer  and   nearer. 

"Thai's  our  old   Brownie!"  exclaimed   Bans. 

And   sure   enough,   there   was  their  own   old   cow   coming  toward 

them    through    the    woods. 

"She   will   know  the  way   home;  we  will   follow  her!"  cried  Th< 

springing  up. 

"Hut    where    i>    the    angel?"    a-ked    (jrelch.n.    anxiously.  ! 

helped    her    along    the    dark    path. 

They   followed   the  old  co*    till  they   recognised  an   n\i\   familiar 

path;  and  there  indeed  was  the  light    from  the  Cottage,  and  their  mother 
at     the    door. 

-Hut  i  did  war  I  mini'  one,"    aid  in  i.   <  }ret< ;  i  n,  ■ 

ate   her   bread   and    milk.     "Did   the   dear    Lord    foi  rid   one. 

niol her?     Perhap    t hey  were  all  t <><>  bu 

"No,  little  one,"  answered  the  mother,  softly  stroking  the  vellow 
curls;  "the  Lord  Ji 
thou  couldsl    le-t    see   him.     Twa     he  that    led    Brownie  t<>  ti  . 

K aided  the  poor  bet  I     afely  home.     Remember  that  th<    Lord  always 
eai  • 


842  TE   KARERE  Noema,  1941 

THIRD   WEEK 

Text:    Matt.    19:16-30;   Mark   10:17-31;   Luke    18:18-30. 
Objective: 

To  help  the  boys  and  girls  to  realize  the  responsibilities  of  making 
right  choices;  for  on  the  right  kind  of  choice  both  success  and  happi- 
ness depend. 

Prayer:    One  of  the  boys. 
Lesson  Story:   The  Rich  Young  Man. 

Jesus  and  his  disciples  were  travelling  southward  from  Galilee  to- 
ward Jesusalem.  What  a  wonderful  journey  for  the  disciples  for  all 
along  the  journey  were  experiences  to  build  their  faith. 

As  they  passed  along  the  street  a  strange  thing  happened.  Usually 
those  who  came  to  Jesus  were  poor;  but  on  this  day  a  rich  young 
ruler  ran  out  to  greet  the  Master;  a  young  man  already  made  famous 
by  his  strict  compliance  with  the  letter  of  the  law  and  his  great  riches. 
When  he  reached  Jesus  he  knelt  at  His  feet.  "Good  Master,"  he  cried, 
"what  good  thing  shall  I  do,  that  I  may  have  eternal  life?" 

Jesus  looked  upon  him  with  tender  eyes  of  sympathy  and  under- 
standing as  he  replied  in  the  gentle  way  in  which  He  always  spoke: 
"Why  do  you  call  me  good?  There  is  none  good  but  one,  that  is  God; 
but  if  you  would  enter  into  life  keep  the  commandments." 

The  young  man  did  not  expect  to  hear  this.  He  thought  that 
some  other  great  thing  would  be  asked,  so  in  surprise  he  said:  "Which 
commandments  do  you  mean?"  "Thou  knowest  the  commandments," 
said  Jesus,  "Thou  shalt  not  steal.  Thou  shalt  not  kill.  Thou  shalt 
love  thy  neighbour  as  thyself." 

With  satisfaction  to  himself  the  young  ruler  looked  frankly  into 
the  eyes  of  the  Great  Master  and  answered,  "All  these  things  have  I 
kept  from  my  youth  up."  There  must  have  been  in  his  heart  a  con- 
sciousness of  failure  in  something  because  he  added,  "What  lack  I  yet." 

Jesus  was  now  filled  with  compassion  and  beholding  him  loved  him 
and  with  firm  tenderness  said:  "If  thou  will  be  perfect,  go  and  sell  that 
thou  hast,  and  give  to  the  poor,  and  thou  shalt  have  treasure  in  heaven." 
Then  He  added,  "and  come  follow  me."  But  when  the  young  man 
heard  the  saying  he  went  away  sorrowful;  for  he  was  very  rich. 

Conversation  After  the  Story: 

Show  the  picture  of  the  Rich  Young  Ruler.  Have  the  children 
discuss  with  you  the  words,  "he  was  very  sorrowful."  Why  does  hap- 
piness depend  so  much  on  the  right  choice.  Have  the  class  name  for 
you  some  of  the  things  in  their  everyday  lives  about  which  they  must 
make  a  choice,  such  as  between  duty  and  pleasure.  (Use  specific 
illustrations.) 
Story:  Jack  Decides. 

Jack  had  done  something  that  was  wrong.  His  father  had  found 
out  about  it  that  morning  and  Jack  had  been  worried  and  afraid  all 
day.  He  had  been  puzzled  too,  because  his  father  had  asked  him  to 
go  for  a  ride,  and  he  wondered  more  than  ever.  His  father  had  said 
nothing  about  where  they  were  going  but  talked  of  other  things.  At 
last  they  reached  the  city  which  was  about  twenty  miles  from  their 
home,  but  instead  of  going  down  to  the  business  district,  as  they  usually 
did,  his  father  turned,  went  up  a  long  winding  hill  and  stopped  outside 
some  huge  gates  which  were  set  in  a  great  stone  wall. 

Jack's  heart  almost  stopped  beating.  He  knew  this  was  the  peni- 
tentiary or  the  "pen,"  as  it  was  commonly  called.  They  had  passed 
it  a  number  of  times  but  they  had  never  stopped  before.  He  knew 
that  this  was  the  place  where  "bad  men"  were  kept.  For  one  wild 
moment  he  thought  that  his  father  had  brought  him  here  for  the  thing 
that  he  had  done. 


Ncema,  1941  TE  KARERE  843 

His  father  seemed  to  know  what  he  was  thinking  because  he  put 
his  arm  around  Jack's  shoulders  and  said,  "It's  all  right,  Jack.  I'm 
going  in  here  for  just  a  few  minutes,  do  you  want  to  come  in  with 
me  or  would  you  rather  wait  here  in  the   car?" 

Jack's  voice  trembled  a  little  as  he  said,  "I'll  wait  here,  father." 

As  he  was  waiting  a  car  drove  up,  and  three  men  go  out  of  it. 
Jack  noticed  that  one  of  the  men  had  handcuffs  on  his  wrists. 

After  a  few  minutes  Jack's  father  came  out  and  they  drove  off 
to  the  city.  This  time  they  stopped  in  front  of  a  big  building.  Jack 
had  seen  this  building  many  times  before.  On  the  big  plate-glass  doors 
it  said  "First  National  Bank." 

"Come  on  Jack,"  his  father  said.  They  went  in  together  and 
in  a  few  minutes  they  went  through  a  door  marked  "James  Graham, 
President."  Here  Jack's  father  made  him  acquainted  with  a  tall  man 
with  smiling  blue  eyes.  This  was  Mr.  Graham,  but  Jack  noticed  that 
his  father  called  him  "Jim." 

On  the  way  home  Jack's  father  told  Jack  a  story.  It  was  about 
three  boys ;  a  boy  named  "Jim,"  who  was  now  the  president  of  the 
First  National  Bank  and  a  boy  named  "Frank,"  who  had  been  in  the 
penitentiary  for  five  long  years,  and  himself,  when  he  was  a  boy.  He 
told  how  they  played  together  when  they  were  boys  and  some  of  the 
things  they  did  as  they  became  older. 

When  the  story  was  finished,  Jack  thought  for  a  little  while  then 
he  said,  "Father,  I'm  going  to  try  to  be  like  you  and  Mr.  Graham." 

Why  do  you  suppose  Jack's  Father  took  him  to  these  places? 

Our  Father  in  Heaven  has  given  us  something  to  help  us  choose  the 
right  thing  to  do.  Discuss  conscience.  What  happens  when  we  con- 
tinue to  disobey  our  conscience?  How  does  obeying  our  conscience 
make  us  stronger.  What  are  some  of  the  ways  that  help  us  to  know 
the  right  from  the  wrong.  Why  can  mother  help  us  to  decide  what  is 
right  and  what  is  wrong?  Why  does  prayer  help  you  to  decide  when 
in  doubt? 

Read  from  the   Bible,  James   1 :  5. 

"If  any  of  you  lack  wisdom,  let  him  ask  of  God,  that  giveth  to  all 
men  liberally,  and  upbraideth  not;  and  it  shall  be  given  him."  Let  the 
children  memorize  part  of  it. 

FOURTH  WEEK 

Objective: 

To  make  the  child  realize  the  importance  of  a  bright,  happy,  smil- 
ing luce. 
To    the    Teacher: 

Stress  the  fad  thai  a  smile  is  appreciated  i»y  everyone.  A  child 
can  contribute  much   by  cultivating  ;i  cheerful  disposition   in-trad  of 

frowning  and   pouting. 

Teach  the  Bong  "You   Can   Smile,"   from  the   .M.I. A.   Song   Book. 

TWO   LITTLE   SMILES 
For    the    Lesson    on   Our    Faces 

Once    there    were    two    little      iinle-   that    wanted    t<>    fad    a    home. 

One  day  they    av  ;i  bright     an  binj   hou  e  and    aid,  "Thl    looks 
like  ;i  rood   place.     Let1     trj    tin    one."     So  in  they   wren!   and  were 
very    happy   to   find   'wo   little   boys,    Bobbie   and    rater.     0n< 
jumped   into  each   boy'     face.     You     bould   have   leen   i 
everyone  was,  even  the  boj  , 

When    mother    called.    '"Hurry    hoy.,    eoine    down    to    hi.:! 
away.*'   they   an    wend.    "All    right,    mother,"   and   came    with   BUCfa   Milling 

that   mot  her    tniled  I "". 


844  TE   KARERE  Noema,  1941 

When  they  went  out  to  play,  the  neighbour  boys  said,  "What's 
happened?  Something  nice?"  Peter  and  Bobbie  answered,  "Some- 
thing  nice    is   always    happening."      Then    all   the   boys   laughed. 

There  was  something  funny  about  those  smiles.  Who  ever  saw 
them,  smiled  back.  Even  their  dog  wagged  his  tail  and  jumped  up 
and  barked  when  the  boys  looked  at  him.  It  seemed  as  though  there 
were  smiles  everywhere  just  because  those  two  boys  smiled. 

One  day  Peter  said,  "Bobbie,  I'm  going  to  quit  smiling." 

"Why?"   asked   Bobbie.      "Don't   you   like   to   smile?" 
"Oh,  I  guess  I  like  it  all  right,  but  I'm  tired  of  hearing  everyone  say, 
'What  a  happy  little   boy!      You're  always  smiling.'  " 

And  Peter  stopped  smiling  and  began  to  frown.  It  was  really 
very  hard  though.  A  smile  would  start  to  pull  up  the  corners  of  his 
mouth  and  he  would  have  to  stop  it  quickly  and  pull  the  corners  down 
again.  Just  think  of  the  smile  that  was  shut  up  in  Peter's  face.  It 
tried  and  tried  to  get  out  but  Peter  wouldn't  let  it.  Then  one  day 
Peter  opened  his  mouth  and  out  popped  the  smile  and  ran  over  to 
Bobbie.  Just  then  Bobbie  smiled  and  Peter's  smile  jumped  right  in 
beside  Bobbie's  smile. 

"I'm  coming  to  live  with  you,"  said  Peter's  smile.  "I  can't  stand 
it  with  Peter  any  longer.  He  keeps  me  locked  up  all  the  time.  I'm 
glad  I  got  out  to-day.      I  was  getting  so  thin  I  was  afraid  I'd  die." 

"But  how  can  we  both  live  here?"  asked  Bobbie's  smile. 

"Let's  try  for  a  while,"  said  Peter's  smile.  "Then  maybe  I  can 
find   another   home." 

Now  this  was  hard  for  Bobbie.  With  two  smiles  he  must  keep 
smiling  all  the  time.  When  he  tried  to  talk  to  anyone  he  smiled,  then 
smiled  again  instead  of  saying  anything.  Some  people  thought  he  was 
laughing  at  them,  but  of  course  we  know  he  wasn't. 

Wherever  Peter  went,  he  kept  the  frown  on  his  face.  Boys  came 
to  play  with  him,  took  one  look  at  his  face,  then  went  over  to  play  with 
Bobbie.  Their  dog  came  running  and  wagging  his  tail,  looked  at 
Peter's  face,  then  down  went  his  tail  between  his  legs  and  he  walked 
over  to  Bobbie. 

Worst  of  all,  though,  was  when  Aunt  Mayme  brought  little  Jimmie. 
He  couldn't  talk,  but  he  loved  to  play  with  Peter  and  Bobbie.  The  boys 
were  always  trying  to  see  which  one  Jimmie  liked  the  best. 

Peter  ran  over  to  him  and  really  tried  to  smile  but  he  had  kept 
the  corners  of  his  mouth  down  so  long  that  they  wouldn't  come  up. 
Baby  Jimmie  gave  one  good  look  at  Peter  then  he  puckered  his  little 
mouth  and  began  to  cry. 

Bobbie  ran  to  him  and  said,  "Don't  cry,  Jimmie.  Peter  isn't  really 
cross,  he  just  doesn't  want  to  smile."  Then  Bobbie  smiled  and  smiled 
until  baby  Jimmie   smiled,   and  then   laughed   out  loud. 

"Oh  what  shall  I  do?"  asked  Peter.  "I  really  can't  smile  any 
more.  I'm  sick  of  frowning.  Nobody  likes  frowns.  I  wish  I  could 
smile   again." 

"Hurray!"  called  Peter's  smile.  "Now  I  can  go  to  my  own  home," 
and  in  he  jumped  into  Peter's  mouth.      Peter  laughed  out  loud. 

"See,  Bobbie.  I  can  smile  after  all,"  said  Peter.  "I  am  never 
going  to  get  tired  of  smiling  again." 

So  the  two  boys  played  with  cousin  Jimmie  all  day,  and  Peter 
didn't  once  frown. 

HUI  PARIHA. — The  Waikato  District  invites  your  attendance 
at  Huntly,  November  22  and  23,  1941.  Come  before  noon  on  Satur- 
day. Sunday  School  workers  throughout  the  district  are  asked  to 
meet  at  NOON  on  Saturday  in  a  Sunday  School  Officers'  and  Teachers' 
Meeting  under  the  direction  of  Kelly  Harris. 


Noema,  1941  TE  KARERE  845 

NGA  MATENGA 

HAUHAU  MAPI. 

I  mate  a  Hauhau  Mapi  i  te  30  o  nga  ra  o  Hune  1941  ia  ia  ko  19 
ona  tau.  Itae  mai  a  Rahiri  Harris,  a  naana  ia  i  manaaki  i  mua  atu  o 
tona  moenga.     Haere   e  tama.     Haere  i  roto   i  te   Ariki. 

— Na  Kura  Anaru   i   ripoata. 
TANGIWHARAU  MANUIRIRANGI. 

He  mokopuna  tuatahi  na  Turake  Manuirirangi  raua  ko  Tuhitia 
Hikaka.  Tona  pakeke  e  rua  marama.  Ona  matua  ko  Kapua  Manu- 
ririrangi  me  Willis  Katene.  No  te  10  o  nga  ra  ka  tukua  atu  tana 
tinana  ki  te  kopu  o  te  whenua  ki  te  kaenga  tuturu. 

Haere  e  te  mokai  iti  rawa.  Na  te  Matua  koe  i  homai  na  Ana  ano 
koe  i  tango  atu.  Heoi  i  muri  nei  he  aroha  he  roimata  te  hoa.  Haere 
i  runga  i  te  waka  a  o  Tupuna,  ma  matou  e  haere  atu. 

— Na  Taka  Toroaiwhiti  i  ripoata. 
TE  AUE  WIRIHANA. 

I  mate  i  te  20  o  Akuhata  1941.  He  wahine  kaha  tenei  ki  nga 
mahi  o  te  Hahi.  I  a  ia  i  mate  e  35  ona  tau.  Ona  hapu,  ko  Ngatitu, 
Ngatitai  me  Ngatikahungunu.  Ona  matua  ko  Katene  raua  ko  Poutu 
Pene  Kupa.  No  te  23  o  nga  ra  ka  nehua  tana  tinana  i  raro  i  te 
whakahaere  o  Elder  E.  A.  C.  Scott  a  na  Kio  Tarawhiti  i  whakatapu 
te  rua. 

— Na  Riringi  Huki  Ponga  i  ripoata. 
POKAIA  ROTANA. 

I  te  3  o  Hurae  1941  ka  mate  a  Pokaia  Rotana.  Ona  tau  e  24. 
He  tamaiti  kaha  hoki  tenei  i  roto  i  nga  mahi  o  te  Rongopai.  He  Rikona 
ia  o  te  Peka  o  Puketapu.      Na  Ngaha  Rotana  i  whakahaere  te  nehunga. 

— Na  Riringi  Huki  Ponga  i  ripoata. 
RUIHA  WAEREA. 

He  tamahine  tenei  na  Hemi  Waerea  raua  ko  Hana  o  te  takiwa 
o  Nuhaka.  I  mate  ia  ki  Korongata  i  te  28  o  Akuhata,  1941,  he  mate 
manawa.  Ko  nga  hapu  o  tenei  wahine — Ngati-Rakaipaka.  Ngati-Tu- 
wharetoa,  a  e  uru  ana  ona  whakapapa  ki  roto  i  nga  waka  katoa.  Ona 
tau   e   78.      He  mema   ia   no   te   Hui   Atawhai   o   Korongata   nei 

— Na  Rawiri   Kamau    i   ripoata, 
HONETERI  PAERATA  HAPI. 

I  mate  ia  i  te  4  0  nga  ra  o  Hepetema  L941  ki  Korongata  ia  ia  6 
7  1  nei  ona  tau.     He  timuaki  tau  hit*,  ia  no  tenei  Peka  o  Korongata  i  te 

tau  L904.  Ko  tana  mate  be  tuku-toto.  E  '20  tau  ia  e  kapo  ana  tae 
QOa  mai  ki  tenei  w  a  <»  tana  hemonga.  I\<>  ana  hapu  ko  Ngati-Rakai- 
paka, Ngati-Poporo,  Ngati-Tuwharetoa.  Kei  te  ore  ona  tamariki  e  torn, 
»•  iua  nga  tane,  kotahi  (<•  tnea  wahine.  <>na  mokopuna  e  36,  e  i  nga 
tnea  tuarua,  hui  katoa  n».  Ko  tona  matua  ko  Hapi  Ngakao,  tona  whaea 
Ifare   Werahiko. 

— Na  Rawiri  Kamau  i  ripoata, 
LORRAINE    MAKo    KARIPA. 

He    tamaiti    tenei    na    Paki    karipa    raua    k<>    Rupi    Uanin... 
tau    ka   mate   nei    ia   i   te   7   «>   Oga    I  :i   0    Hepetema,    1941.       Nuku    atu    i   te 

:»  marama  ia  <■  takoto  ana  i  te  hohipera. 

Mihi    mai.    tatu-i    mai    «■    nga    matua    nm    nga    whana  . 

— Na    Rawiri    Kamau    i    rfp 

HONORIA    w  ERBT  \. 

I  mate  tenei  wahine  i  te   L8  -  Hepetema   1941.     lie  wahine  tenei 
arohaina  «•  ona  matua,  e  tona  hoa  tane  me  ana  karanga  mahi 
ana  tamariki,  mokopuna  hoki.     Haere  ra   Honoria.     h 

— Na  Tukinoa  Hako] 


846  TE   KARERE  Noema,  1941 

NEWS  FROM  THE  FIELD 

"  Farewell  to  Trainees  Going  to  Camp" 

By   Rawiri  M.   Kamau 

Editor's  Note. — The  Editor  takes  full  responsibility 
for  the  publishing  of  this  article  as  written,  not  be- 
cause of  its  apparent  grammatical  and  other  journal- 
istic as  zuell  as  aesthetic  discrepancies,  but  to  portray 
Rawiri  Kaniau,  familiarly  known  as  "Maraki."  He 
is  proud,  generous,  humorous  and  enthusiastic.  He\ 
is  honest  and  courageous.  His  effort  here  is  really 
remarkable  and  is  definitely  typical  of  the  old  man. 
"Over  one  hundred  of  our  Maori  stalwarts 
from  all  parts,  as  far  as  Ngatiporou,  Gisborne, 
Mahia,  Nuhaka,  Whakaki,  Wairoa,  Mohaka  me 
Heretaunga,  were  farewelled  by  a  crowd  of  over 
500.  Before  12.30  a.m.  the  railway  station  was 
crowded  with  spectators. 
Rawiri  Kamau  The    Hastings    Silver    Band    led    the    H.B. 

soldiers  in  the  procession  to  the  depot  to  meet 
the  express  train  from  Napier  five  minutes  before  its  arrival.  They 
halted  along  the  platform,  then  the  train  slowed  down,  and  stopped. 
Aboard  were  78  Maori  soldiers  from  the  East  Coast.  Just  then  Sid. 
D.  Kamau,  with  his  smart  set  of  fourteen  players,  played  the  fare- 
well medley,  "Bless  'Em  All,"  in  waltz  time.  The  echo  of  the  tune 
struck  the  hearts  of  all  that  were  present  and  just  about  set  them 
waltzing  the  main  street,  and  the  cheers  from  everywhere — a  great 
reception.  The  Mayor  of  Hastings  Town,  Mr.  Rainbow,  honoured 
Mr.    S.    D.    Kamau. 

The  wording  of  the  song  is  given  here:  "Bless  'em  All.  Bless  'em 
All.  The  long  and  the  short  and  the  tall.  Bless  all  sergeant  and 
double  V.O.  ones,  Bless  all  the  corporals  and  their  blinkin  sons,  Cause 
we're  saying  goodbye  to  them  all.  When  back  to  their  blighty  they 
crawl,  You'll  get  no  promotion  this  side  of  the  ocean,  So  cheer  my 
lads,    Bless   'em   All." 

Second  part  of  song  in  foxtrot  time:  "So  wear  a  great  big  smile 
and  sing  a  song  when  things  go  wrong.  When  it's  raining  don't  com- 
plain for  the  sun  will  shine  again.  Just  put  those  little  worries  on 
the  shelf  and  start  right  in  to-day,  To  wear  a  great  big  smile  and  sing 
a  song  and  brush  your  troubles  away."  This  ended,  the  farewell  train 
moved,  all  the  soldiers'  encore  sounded  everywhere — great  day  of  aroha 
nui. 

OVERSEAS     NEWS  Co.;    Milton    Baumgartner,    Royal    Baking 

wwat    twttv     apt?    nniMr  Co- '    Milton    Ramsey,    salesman;     W.     W. 
WHAT    THEY    ARE    DOING  Goodwill,    Phil.    Peterson,    Lloyd   J.    Allen, 
Author's  Note. — If  any  of  the  mission-  J.    Taylor    Later,    Jarvis    Keddington    are 
aries   are  omitted   in  this   article  it  is   due  all    in    airplane    factories;    Mark    Wheeler, 
to    lack    of    information    on    hand.  c.    S.    Johnston,    with    the   Coca-Cola    Co. ; 
Married     List.  —  Elders    Richard    Lam-  Richard     Lambert,     credit     manager     and 
bert,    A.    Harper    Wallace,    Glen    L.    Rudd,  salesman;  Frank   K.  Aldous,  Manager  Im- 
W.  E.  Smith,  Lamont  F.  Toronto,  Charles  perial    Oil    Co. ;    Garn    S.    Henderson,    em- 
H.    Felt,    Wilford    W.    Goodwill,   Claude   D.  ployee   Imperial   Oil   Co.;  Haven   R.    Burn- 
Kirkland,   D.   V.   Taylor,   L.   Garn   Dastrup,  ington,     rail     road;     Robert     E.     Crandall, 
Mark   Wheeler,   Gleyre  Frederickson,  C.  S.  rail  road;  Vincent  Haslam,  bank;  Lamont 
Johnston,     G.     P.     Langton,     Jarvis     Ked-  F.    Toronto    Insurance;    Claude    D.     Kirk- 
dington.  land,    Sears    Roebuck    Co.;    Robert    Card- 
Army    Life. — Elders    Warren    S.    Ottley,  well,     auto     salesman ;     David     M.     Evans, 
C.    Burnett    Mason,    George    R.    Biesinger,  Barry    T.    Wride,    service    station    lee-sees 
Mark  J.   Udy.      A.   Bonner   Fitzgerald.  and     operators ;     William     Grange,     J.     C. 

Occupations. — Elders    A.    Harper    Wal-  Penny    Co. 
lace,    Utah    Poultry;    Glen    L.    Rudd,    Utah  Engagements. — Elders     Frank     K.    Aid- 
Poultry;    Gerald    P.    Langton,   J    C.    Penny  ous   and    Garn   S.    Henderson. 


Noema,  1941 


TE  KARERE 


847 


MANAWATU    DISTRICT 
Reported    by    Polly    Wi    Neera 

Greetings!  It  has  been  officially  an- 
nounced that  Sergt.  George  Katene,  Jnr., 
has  been  decorated  with  a  Military  Medal 
for    gallantry    in    the    Greek    campaign. 

Bro.  Len  Nehua  of  Ngapuhi,  who  was 
a  member  of  the  advance  party  to  board 
the  troopship  for  overseas  service,  from 
Papakura,  spent  time  off  with  his  friend 
Petra  Ropata  at  the  home  of  Petra's  re- 
latives,   in    Wellington. 

We  would  remind  listeners,  who  find  it 
possible,  to  listen  in  to  Station  2ZB  Wel- 
lington every  Sunday  morning  at  11 
o'clock.  A  special  broadcast  of  the  Taber- 
nacle choir  has  been  arranged  for  the 
Commercial  Broadcasting  Stations  in  New 
Zealand.  The  choir  with  its  300  voices 
is  conducted  by  J.  Spencer  Cornwall  with 
Dr.  Frank  W.  Asper  at  the  organ,  and 
the  spoken  words  are  by  Richard  L. 
Evans.  Don't  miss  hearing  this  fine 
broadcast  of  music,  which  comes  to  you 
from  the  Cross-Roads  of  the  West,  Salt 
Lake   City. 

Among  the  number  of  visitors  to  our 
Branch  at  Porirua  during  the  past  month 
were:  Bro.  Parata  Pirihi  of  the  Welling- 
ton Branch;  Taylor  Mihaere  of  Danne- 
virke,  now  employed  in  the  Land  and  In- 
come Tax  Dept.,  Wellington;  Bro.  Smiler 
of  Gisborne,  now  employed  on  the  staff 
of    Woolworths    Ltd.    in    the    capital    city. 

In  the  2YD  Sports  Club  session  on 
Thursday  night,  25th  September,  the  fol- 
lowing broadcast  was  heard:  "This  com- 
ing Saturday  N.Z.  University  will  be 
playing  Wellington  representatives  in  a 
Rugby  final.  N.Z.  University  halfback 
will  be  M.N.  Paewai,  a  nephew  of  Lou 
Paewai  of  All  Black  fame..  Paewai  is 
definitely    Otago's    No.    1     halfback,    and 

after  week  he  lias  turned  oi 
football.  .  .  .  Playing  for  University  'A' 
in  the  final  against  Zingari-Richmond  Ias1 
Saturday,  lie  was  the  outstanding  player 
on  the  field  and  scored  His  usual  try.  .  .  " 
Nitama  was  a  member  of  the  New  Zea- 
land Universitj  team  which  played  Wel- 
lington the  following  Saturday. 
I    had    the    privilege    of    b 

on    board    th<     convoy    "I.eander"    when    she 

arrived   in    Wellington   for   the   first    time, 
and    of   being   a    vrftnese    to    the   welcome 

ber      "i"     th( 
Poneke  Club.    The   Hon.    Mr.    Paikea   pr<  - 
i  n     u  [1  h    a     korowal 
i  Maori  chieftain'     •  loak  >  on  behalf  of  the 
Maori    race;  tl  ;  I  ended 

by    t  he  Ad  in 

<  >nc<    again    Bro     Peneamin<     v. 
d«  hi     no .oi  hly  visit       o  1 1 
punl    Branch,    Palmer  ton    North,   and    re« 

MAHIA  DISTRICT 

RCPOI  ted       hy       !    lie       I    n.ldel 

turima 

!    i   irinia    and     familj      V 

tl,.-, mi.   all   tho  ■  o    Byd- 

•i,    gift      and 

tnd    guide    him 
i       in       family1       and     frlem 

Word    h:,      |  other 

Pont  |    Te    Kaui  u,    m ho    n  i      wounded    In 

i  ed   up  b)    I  he  Qi  ,  man   Red 


Cross,  and  was  flown  to  a  hospital  in 
Greece,  and  is  now  a  prisoner  of  war 
in  Germany.  Bro.  Ponty  reports  that 
he  is  well  treated,  and  wishes  to  be  re- 
membered  to  all. 

We  are  proud  to  announce  that  another 
group  of  our  Nuhaka  boys  have  left  for 
Papakura  Camp,  including  Benjamin 
Christy,  Tilly  Whaanga,  John  Smith,  Stan 
Smith,  Edgar  Smith,  George  Haronga, 
Rajah  Karangaroa.  Bro.  Tuehu  Smith 
now  has  four  sons  in  camp,  Cleo  is  a  cor- 
poral, while  Riki  has  been  transferred  to 
Trentham,  where  we  understand  he  is  to 
be  given  the  rank  of  2nd  Lieutenant. 
Congratulations  boys!  Nuhaka  is  proud 
of   you   all. 

Bro.  Jerry  Orikena  (overseas)  is  the 
proud  daddy  of  a  bouncing  baby  boy, 
while  Bro.  Peter  and  Sister  Kui  Campbell 
are    equally    proud    of    their    new    son. 

Mrs.  Mary  Pilmer  Matawai  has  been 
visiting  relatives  in  Nuhaka.  First  time 
her  husband  Joe  knew  what  a  good  cook 
he    is,    and    how. 

Our    Relief    Society     Sisters     have    for- 
warded  about   twenty   parcels   to   the  boys 
overseas;   besides    this    they    are    v, 
tive    in    their    other    duties    of    the    Relief 
Society. 

Bro  Stuart  Whaanga  is  doing  his  ut- 
most to  promote  the  Church  Welfare  pro- 
gramme in  this  Branch,  the  results  thus 
far  are  not  too  encouraging,  but  kia  kaha 
Brother,  Nuhaka  always  comes  to  light 
in    good    time. 

HAURAKI    DISTRICT 

Reported    by    Wm.    Ormsby    and 

Francie  Greening 

Following     the     Hui     Pariha    at     Huria. 

September    2(;th    and    liTth.    the    District 

Presidency    along    with    the   Sunday    School 

Superintendency  have  been  busy  visiting. 
At    t  lie  home  of  Brother  Re 

Maketu,     Saints     from     Rotorua.     Te     Puke 

and  Wairoa  gathered,  where  the  follow- 
ing were  carried  out  :  Baptisms  \\ 'aika- 
riri  Hoko,  Berepia  Hohaia,  Alvia  Tauma- 
loto,   Omarumutu    Palamalu,    ValihV 

\pril   Palamalu,  and    i: 
by    Elder    Wharekura      Blessiaga     Turns- 
nua   Deies   Palamalu.  by   Elder  T.  Ormsby, 
Charlen  1 1  iru*  aka    by 

Elder     I 

by    Elder   Wl 

Rang!    Hap.  (a    to    Diana    Tarawa    of    Huria 

at    Maketu   by    Elder   Wharekura,  October 

Mh.    mil. 

Satin  L6th,    l '.» 1 1 .    marked 

•    in  Whan  kui 

ter  of    Elder    H  tnd   his 

dear   u  te,   of   the    Horohoro 

Branch      Tin  nether 

ii    be   in    death  iddened 

with    thi  nd    bve.      I" 

he  family    of    Brof  I  ■ 

and    abide    In    the    hope    h, 

i 

little    daughter. 

u  UKATO   DI3TRH  l 

Ray  oi  tad  i>v  Joka  w    Amti  and 

i » ,\  i,     t>,  m,  b) 
nual  Qold  and  Ore<  n   Ball 
Id     In     the     n 
i 
the    mo 


848 


TE  KARERE 


Noema,  1941 


sponsors.  (Sister  Una  Thompson  has 
advised  that  this  is  also  the  most  suc- 
cessful, financially,  throughout  the  Mis- 
sion for  this  year.)  Thanks  and  praise 
for  this  wonderful  climax  of  Mutual  effort 
is  due  to  the  local  officers  and  Hunga 
Tapu,  Sister  Una  Thompson  and  the 
Huria  Missionary  party  who  were  very 
materially  assisted  by  the  local  towns- 
people. 

After  retiring  on  the  night  of  23rd 
August,  Sister  Tamati  Amoketi  of  Wai- 
ngaro  was  suddenly  awakened  one  night 
to  find  her  home  in  flames.  The  tragedy 
did  not  physically  injure  seriously  any  of 
the    occupants. 

The  Waingaro  Branch  is  improving  in 
activities  and  is  creating  an  interest 
among  members  to  foster  the  work  of 
the   Lord.      Keep   it   up. 

Hamilton  has  obtained  a  hall  for  their 
Church  meetings.  All  who  may  be  in- 
terested in  these  Sunday  gatherings  are 
asked  to  communicate  with  Brother 
Myers,  Sister  Fryer,  or  Superintendent 
Horace  Forbes  as  to  time  of  meetings,  etc. 

August  28th  marked  the  parting  of 
Polly  Hopa,  beloved  daughter  of  Sister 
Eliza  Whatu  Apiti  of  Frankton,  which 
occurred  at  the  Public  Hospital,  Hamil- 
ton. Deceased  was  buried  at  the  Hamil- 
ton East  Cemetery,  with  Bro.  Douglas 
Whatu  Apiti  directing  the  services  and 
John   Apiti   dedicated    the   grave. 

MAROMAKU   BRANCH 
Reported    by    Lois    Going 

Bro.  Raymond  Going  of  the  Maromaku 
Branch  is  now  in  the  Air  Force,  sta- 
tioned at  Hobsonville,  training  for  over- 
seas service.  Bro.  Stanley  Hay,  who  has 
already  served  in  territorial  training,  has 
since  been  called  in  the  last  overseas 
ballot. 

HAWKE'S   BAY   DISTRICT 

The  Gold  and  Green  Ball  held  at  Aotea 
House,  Tamaki,  August  27th,  was  another 
outstanding  event.  Miss  Emaraina  Ta- 
kerei  was  crowned  queen  of  the  Gold  and 
Green  Ball  of  1941  by  President  Cowley. 
Wi  Larkin's  orchestra  from  Palmerston 
North  played  spirited  music  for  the 
evening. 

At  last!  Sister  Rangi  Wilson  and  her 
family  have  finally  caught  up  with  Bro. 
Teao.  From  reliable  sources  information 
is  to  hand  that  the  happy  couple  and 
their  welcome  children  have  sustained 
themselves  at  Mangere,  Auckland.  (I 
warned   you,  Joe!) 

TARANAKI   DISTRICT 

Reported    by    Zena    M.    Stent    and 

Taka    Toroaiwhiti 

Brother  (Pte.)  Henry  Robinson  of 
Wanganui  visited  the  home  folks  for 
probably  the  last  time  before  embarking 
for  overseas  service.  Many  farewells 
were  held  in  his  honour.  It  is  with  heavy 
hearts  that  we  bid  farewell  to  Brother 
Robinson. 

President  Hakopa  and  Bro.  Toroaiwhiti 
are  doing  much  that  is  good  in  the 
northern  part  of  the  district,  and  we  are 
expecting   them   any   time   now. 

Sister  Katene,  after  a  very  long  and 
serious  illness,  is  back  on  her  feet  again, 
and  her  presence  at  the  meetings  is  cer- 
tainly   appreciated. 


Mick      Stinson      never     sc-ems      to      know 

exactly  where  he  belongs,  as  we  think 
he  belongs  right  here  with  us.  He  is  here 

lor  a  while  at  any  rale,  and  do  we  need 
him  ? 

The  Manaia  people  under  the  direction 
of  the  local  M.I. A.  Presidency  have  held 
Farewells  for  their  soldier  members.  A 
very  creditable  affair  was  held  in  honour 
of    Sapper    l'uhi     Kei. 

Cottage  and  regular  Branch  meetings 
are  being  held  in  the  Manaia  area  of  the 
district,  under  the  guidance  of  President 
Turake  Manu.  Brother  Taylor  Mihaere, 
who  has  been  labouring  in  this  district., 
is    now   in    Wellington. 

WAIRAU  DISTRICT 
Reported  by  Huitau  Elkington 
Brother  Turi  Ruruku,  who  has  been  ill 
in  the  Nelson  Hospital,  has  fully  recov- 
ered and  is  now  visiting  in  Shannon. 
Sister  Lucy  Taylor,  also  an  inmate  of  the 
Nelson  Hospital,  is  improving  markedly. 
Brother  Martin  Taylor  is  the  proud 
father  of  a  baby  daughter.  Brother  and 
Sister  Ben  Hippolite  are  happy  at  the 
reunion    with    their    infant    son. 

The  Wakatu  Maori  Women's  hockey 
team  was  successful  in  winning  the  Nel- 
son Molar  Cup. 

Members  of  the  Madsen  Relief  Society 
are  busy  helping  the  Red  Cross  of  the 
French  Pass  district  to  knit  comfys  for 
the   boys   overseas. 

Esther  Elkington  and  her  infant  son 
Herbert  Elkington  of  Nelson,  family  of 
Sam  Elkington  were  for  two  weeks  the 
guests  of  Sister  and  Bro.  James  Elking- 
ton. 

Sam  Elkington,  who  is  in  the  Sig- 
nallers Corps  at  Papakura  training  camp 
was  for  a  few  days  at  home  on  special 
leave. 

A  farewell  social  and  dance  was  held 
in  the  French  Pass  schoolroom  for  Bro. 
Arthur  Elkington,  Q.M.S.  and  Pte.  Amara 
Hope.  Mr.  Leon,  who  presented  gifts  of 
money  from  the  people,  expressed  words 
of  praise  and  admiration  for  the  part 
pakeha  and  Maori  are  doing  together 
overseas.  In  response,  Arthur  Elking- 
ton said,  "I  am  going  to  join  those  of  my 
kin  who  are  already  in  the  front  line. 
Those  of  you  who  remain  behind  are  the 
supporters  of  us  in  the  front  line,  with- 
out you  we  cannot  succeed.  So  put  all 
your  efforts  to  your  work  on  your  lands 
and  help  the  boys  in  front."  Applause. 
A  very  favourable  report  was  received 
from  Herbert  Elkington,  who  is  with  the 
Middle  East  Forces  overseas,  of  his  box- 
ing bout.  In  his  own  words:  "It  was  an 
inter-division  championship  fought  in  a 
N.Z.  Division  Base  Camp,  and  my  oppon- 
ent was  an  artillery  man  who  was  an 
amateur  champ,  back  in  N.Z.,  with  6  wins 
to  his  credit  and  one  win  on  board  ship. 
Well,  we  had  three  2-minutes.  The  first 
round  my  second  said  to  me,  'You  fight 
your  own  battle.'  Well,  I  did,  and  did 
pretty  good,  too.  In  the  second  round 
he  told  me  to  blast  hell  out  of  my  man. 
Well,  I  did.  In  the  third  and  last  round 
I  slugged  into  him  and  the  fighting  was 
most  strenuous.  I  had  blackened  one  of 
his  eyes  and  pumped  his  nose  so  much 
that  his  face  was  covered  in  blood.  I 
don't  know  how  it  came  about,  but  I 
came    out   of   it   unmarked,    but    I   was    so 


Xoema,  1941 


TE  KARERE 


849 


done  up  I  could  hardly  walk.  Both  of 
us  were  half  carried  out  of  the  ring. 
Anyway,  after  we  finished  our  fight  and 
went  back  to  our  corners  the  referee 
declared    me    winner    on    points." 

Herbert  also  mentions  that  he  has  met 
many  of  his  Ngatitoa  tribesmen,  and 
George  Katene  is   his  Camp  S.M. 

Much  sorrow  was  felt  by  the  people 
of  Madsen  at  the  death  of  Rangikapua, 
infant  son  of  Bro.  Rangi  and  Sister  Lucy 
Elkington.  Funeral  service  was  held  in 
the  Madsen  Hall  under  the  direction  of 
Turi    Ruruku. 

A  Home  Guard  Committee  was  organ- 
ized at  French  Pass  and  Bro.  James  R. 
Elkington   was    elected    Secretary. 

The  Home  Guard  is  now  functioning 
under  the  capable  leadership  of  Mr.  John 
Kawharu. 

AUCKLAND  DISTRICT 

The  Mangere  Branch  held  a  very  suc- 
cessful Branch  Conference  commencing 
Friday,  October  10th,  until  the  12th. 
The  activities  of  this  "Hui  Peka"  were 
a  credit  to  the  district.  Their  Gold  and 
Green  Social,  sponsored  by  the  M.I. A., 
was  well  attended  on  Friday  night,  and 
on  Saturday  evening  the  Conference  pro- 
per commenced  with  the  Primary  child- 
ren, followed  by  the  M.I. A.  Sunday 
morning  Priesthood  and  Relief  Society 
meetings  were  held  before  Sunday  School, 
which  was  well  attended.  The  afternoon 
session  found  the  hall  packed  to  enjoy 
the  spirit  prompted  by  those  present  and 
particularly  the  speakers.  President  Cow- 
ley was  present  at  all  meetings,  and  his 
talks  of  the  Gospel  were  well  received 
as  they  filled  all  with  the  inspiration  to 
worship    God    with    our   lives. 

The  Auckland  Branch  is  pleased  to 
welcome    Brother    Don    Robs    of    Dunedin. 

Don    is    an    acquisition    to    any    community. 

Ear    the    presiding    brethren    have 

D.01      lei      any      "grass      grow     under     their 

f.-ei"  because  Don  now  heads  the  talented 
"Children's  choir"  comprising  the  pupils 
of  the  Sunday  School  from  the  "A"  De- 
partment to  the  Primary.  This  choir 
made  11 1  debul  at  t  be  Relief  So 
hei.i    in    the    chapel.    Thursday,    October 

16th!        They     and     their     Nader     were     the 

'Mine. 

Em  llj      Mark     of     Porirua     and 

Mad    •  '  I       or     two     With      the 


Cowley's  at  the  Mission  Home,  prior  to 
leaving  for   summer  work  in  H.B. 

Brother  Douglas  Fraser,  a  recent  con- 
vert to  the  Church  and  a  generous  sup- 
porter of  all  Branch  activities,  lost  his 
father,  who  passed  away  suddenly  on 
Saturday,  October  11th,  1941.  We  asso- 
ciate ourselves  with  all  who  have  been 
actuated  by  this  sudden  cause  of  grief 
to  extend  consolation  and  condolence  to 
Douglas    and    his    mother,    Mrs.    Fraser. 

Ernie  Cormier,  now  of  the  R.N.Z.A.F., 
formerly  a  member  of  the  M.I. A.  and  a 
staunch  supporter  of  its  activities  locally 
and  at  Hui  Taus,  was  seen  to  advantage 
in  his  uniform  when  he  visited  the 
Saints  while  in  the  city.  Another  Air 
Force  member  of  our  Branch  is  Mateen 
Jensen,  now  L.A.C.  who  is  unfortunately 
in  hospital  suffering  from  a  foot  ailment. 
L.A.C.  Jensen  is  scheduled  to  attend 
Levin  Training  School  early  this  month. 
His  brother,  Carl  B.,  now  in  a  territorial 
camp,  won  fame  for  the  name  of  Jensen 
when  he  scored  above  the  CO.  in  a  re- 
cent   "target    shoot." 

Miss  Kere  M.  Morris  (Meha  clan), 
now  residing  with  the  President  and  his 
familv  at  Headquarters,  has  just  com- 
pleted her  musical  examinations  at  the 
University,  the  complete  results  of  which 
will  not  be  to  hand  until  some  time  in 
the  early  part  of  the  New  Year.  Miss 
Morris  feels  confident  that  the  important 
ones  at  least  will  show  creditable  if  not 
outstanding  effort.  Her  life  is  a  busy 
one.  with  school  and  teaching  some  40 
or    more    pupils,    etc. 

Brother   William    Brosnan  now  dons  the 

uniform    and    insignia   of   the   "Coastal   De- 

I'nit."     stationed     across     the     hay. 

From    the   look   of  things,    Bill   is   looking 

better  and  BO  is  his  dear  wife.  Joyce. 
Their      frequent       attendance      at       Church 

should    be    an    incentive    to    all 

and  sundry  that  newly  weds  are  still 
happy.  be    happier,    and    are 

doing  their  bit  to  make  others  happy. 
(Observe  ye  Harris',  Rei's  and  \  A 
m.  ha's.  i 

B,     who     will     marts 

,t    Auckland,   October   H.'.th.    with 

•  i     Cowley    officiating,    was    bap- 

k.iiv    Harris   on   October   22nd, 

1941.  The  happy  COUple  will  reside  at 
their    horn,'    at     Koval    Oak. 


THINGS   AM  >NEY  C  \.VT   BUY 
M-mic,  can't  buy  a  clear  conscience     square  dealing  is  the  price 


Money  can't  buy  happiness     happiness  is  a  mental  attitude  and 
(•in-  ma\  be  as  happy  in  a  cottage  as  in  a  mansion, 

Money  can't  bu)  sunsets,  songs  of  wild  birds  and  the  music  of 
the  wind  in  the  trees     th<   <•  are  as  free  as  the  air  we  breathe. 

Mone)   can't  buy  inward  peao  the  result  of  a  con- 

sti  uctive  philosoph)  of  li  Ee. 

Money  can't  buj  charactei     character  is  what  we  are  when  we 
are  alone  w  ith  our  elves  in  the  dai  k. 

— The    Associated  Dispatcher. 


850  TE   KARERE  Noema,  1941 

SUNDAY  SCHOOL  REPORTS 

The   First  Quarter  begins — December,  January  and   February. 

The  Second  Quarter  begins— March,  April  and  May. 

The  Third  Quarter  begins — June,  July  and  August. 

The  Final  Quarter  begins — September,  October  and  November. 
Send   Final  Quarterly   Reports  by   December  20th. 
Reports  on  Hand — 

Third  Quarter,  1941. — Auckland  District — Tamaki  and  Man- 
ge iw  Hawker's  Bay — Korongata,  Te  Hauke  and  Heretaunga.  Wai~ 
vara  pa — Kohunui,  Rangiotu  and  Gladstone.  Waikato — Kopuku, 
Hoeotainui.  Mahoenui,  Horotiu,  Whatawhata,  Taumarunui,  Puke- 
tapu,  Maukoro,  Te  Awamutu,  Matakowhai.  Mahia — Opoutama  and 
Xuhaka.  Wairau — Madsen.  Poverty  Bay — Kopua,  Muriwai,  Te 
Hapara,  Tokomaru  Bay.  Hauraki — Iluria,  Wairoa,  Te  Puke  Home, 
Horo  Horo.  Taranaki — Wanganui.  Ngapuhi — Ruatangata,  Manga- 
muka,  Ngawha,  Maromaku,  Opahi,  Tautoro,  Awarna  and  Mataraua. 
Total  X umber  of  Schools  Reported — 38. 

Branches  whose  names  do  not  appear  on  this  report  cannot  blame 
the  District  Superintendencies  for  failure  to  report.  Each  Sunday 
School  has  been,  and  is  still,  asked  to  forward  ONE  copy  of  their 
TRIPLICATE  report  to  the  Mission  Sunday  School,  Box  72,  Auck- 
land ;  then  send  ONE  to  the  District  and  KEEP  the  other  ONE 
for  own  use. 

SIX  PENNY  FUND  RECEIVED 

Period  1939.— Gladstone  9/-. 

Period  Ending  1940.— Tamaki  (Auckland),  8/6;  Mangere  6/6; 
Te  Hauke  £1;  Mangamuka  £1;  Waimamaku  10/-;  Peterehema 
3/-.     Total   £3/17/-/ 

First  Half-yearly  Period,  1941.— H.B.:  Te  Hauke,  £1/2/-, 
Waipawa  8/-,  Win.  Edwards  and  family  4/-,  Tamaki  £2/17/-, 
Korongata  £2/10/-,  Heretaunga  7/6.  Waikato:  Matakowhai  10/-, 
Puketapu  £1,  Hoeotainui  £1/19/-,  Aria  18/,  Taumarunui  6/-, 
Horotiu  completed  for  vear  11/-,  Whatawhata  completed  for  year 
12/-.  Hauraki:  Maketu  3/-,  Tahawai  10/-,  Ohaki  4/6,  Kirikiri- 
Omahu  12/-,  Huria  16/6,  Wairoa  £1/6/-,  Te  Puke  Home  5/6. 
Povcrtx  Bay.  Tokomaru  Bay  14/-.  Rahui  5/-,  Te  Hapara  £1/16/-. 
Auckland:  Auckland  £1/3/-.  Ngapuhi:  Maromaku  15/6,  Kaikou 
10/-,  Tautoro  16/5,  Opahi  8/-,  Whananaki  2/6,  Ruatangata  17/6, 
Te  Horo  £2/3/6,  Waiomio  £1/1/-,  Whangarei  3/-.  Wairarapa: 
Gladstone  14/-,  Kohunui  £1/1/-,  Rangiotu  10/-.  Mahia:  Nuhaka 
£2/14/-.    Opoutama  complete  for  year  £1/12/-.    Total  £33/8/11. 

REMEMBER.— The  final  Quarterly  Report  is  due  the  last 
Sundav  of  November,  1941,  and  so  is  the  Last  of  your  SIX  PENNY 
FUND. 


I   €HAR€R€ 


"<&$& 


Wahanga   35 


Tihema,    1941 


Nama    12 


I'lS 


P-$t 


f 


<•> 


® 


SPECIFICATIONS 


iu  will  build  a  wall  about 
That  hate  cannot  get  through, 
That  will  turn  back  distrust  and  doubt. 
They  need  not  trouble  you. 

It'  you   will  build  a  little  fence 

To  keep  all  hard  words  in, 
You   will  receive  this  recompense — 

To  keep  the  friends  you  win. 

[f  you  will  build  yourself  a  gate 
Through  which  Love  only  goes, 

will  be  the  friends  who  wait; 
Disarmed  will  be  your  foes. 

If  you  will  cut  a  window  view 

From  which  the  eye  can  see 
Only  the  beautiful  and  true, 

How  fair  the  world  will  be! 

— Clarence  Edwin  Flynn  in  New  York  Times. 


®^8&$&tS$&'< 


® 


Te  Karere 


Wahanga    35 


Established  in  1907 
Tihema,    1941 


Nama    12 


Zt&->Z&>&F>&F>£&>&&>£&>Z&i  <£&>£ 


Matthew   Cowley 
Kelly  Harris 
Eru   T.    Kupa 
Waimate   Anaru 


Tumuaki    Mihana 
Etita 

Kaiwhakamaori 
Kaiwhakamaori 


"Ko  tenei  Pepa  i  whakatapua  hei  hapai  ake  i  te  iwi  Maori  ki 
roto  i  nga  whakaaro-nui.' 

"Te  Karere"  is  published  monthly  by  the  New  Zealand  Mission  of  the  Church 
of  Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-day  Saints,  and  is  printed  by  THE  BUSINESS  PRINTING 
WORKS  LTD.,  55  Albert  Street,  Auckland,  CI,  N.Z.  Subscription  Bates:  I  -  per 
six  months;  5/-  per  year;  £1  for  five  years;  £2/10/-  for  life.  (United  States  Cur- 
rency:  $1.00    per   year;    $4.00    for   five    years;    $10.00    for   life.) 

Address    Correspondence,    Box    72,    Auckland,    C.l,    New    Zealand. 


CONTENTS 

Editorial — 

P<  ace  on  Earth   

856 

Special    Features — 

858 

Marj    1  [annah   Wadham    

\\  li.it   1    Know   of  the  Mormons   

.  . .   861 

K;i    Whakatuwheratia    Nga    Urupa     \    K 

AJce    Ano 

Te 

1 1  unga    Mate   

\\l,.-,t  Should  a  Man's  Religion  Do  For  H 

Church   Features 

Mush    For  Sa<  i amenl   Sei  \  i<  i 

Relief   So<  iet)    '  entennial    ,  , 

Sunda)    S<  hool    

Primal  j    

News   From  the   Field 

TE  KARERE  Tihema,  1941 


Ottortal  •  • . 


PEACE  ON  EARTH 

The  Following  editorial  is  from  the  facile  pen  of  the  late 
Elsie  Talmage  Brandley,  who,  prior  to  her  passing  in  1935, 
was  Associate  Editor  of  the   Improvement   Era. 

Christmas  is  on  its  joyous,  holly-bedecked  way.  Every 
thought  is  turned  towards  the  great  holiday  of  the  world: 
the  day  which  commemorates  the  birth  of  the  Saviour.  In 
the  rush  and  struggle  of  every-day  life,  the  ideals  of  Jesus 
help  its  to  make  the  decisions  and  choose  the  path  which  lead 
to  happiness  and  salvation,  if  we  but  take  the  time  to  make 
them  a  part  of  our  philosophy  of  living.  And  if  we  do  not 
consciously  sit  down  to  ponder  on  the  meaning  of  the  truths 
He  taught  during  the  brief  three  years  of  His  ministry, 
there  is  still  power  in  them  which  makes  them  a  part  of  us, 
even  though  an  undefined  part. 

The  world  to-day  is  different  from  the  world  of  even 
a  century  ago.  The  materialistic  attitude  of  many  people 
has  resulted  in  such  an  abundance  of  things  to  be  wanted, 
and  such  a  feverish  attempt  to  secure  them  for  ourselves, 
that  calm  tranquility  is  a  characteristic  more  frequently 
envied  in  others  than  possessed  by  the  average  girl  and  boy. 
Hours  of  thoughtful  contemplation  of  life  and  its  meaning 
are  crowded  out  by  the  innumerable  interruptions  and  diver- 
sions which  appear  continuously  all  day  long,  and  so  the 
joy  of  understanding  life  as  well  as  living  it  is  diminished. 

During  the  Christmas  holidays  there  might  be  a  few 
moments  in  which  to  think,  or  talk  about  the  real  things  of 
existence.  Shows,  automobiles,  dances,  and  fine  clothes  are 
not  the  greatest  blessings  to  be  attained,  but  sometimes  in 
the  effort  to  secure  them,  we  leave  ourselves  no  time  to 
place  real  values  upon  the  real  things.     Gifts  for  Christmas 


Tihema,  1941 


TE  KARERE 


857 


are  selected  with  a  mental  comparison,  and  an  unvoiced 
idea  of  what  will  be  given  in  return  ;  the  shepherd.-  and  the 
wise  men  expected  nothing  in  return  tor  their  gifts  that 
first  Christmas. 

The  youth  of  the  Church  constitutes  a  tremendous 
power.  You  are  the  ones  whose  responsibility  it  is  to  in- 
sure the  faith  and  unwavering  trust  in  the  Gospel  which  is 
your  heritage.  At  Christmas  time — on  Christmas  Day,  it 
no  other  time  is  promising — take  a  few  minutes  with  your- 
self to  find  out  what  preparation  of  soul  and  mind  you  are 
making  to  earn-  on.  The  future  of  the  Church  depends 
upon  you;  the  great  gifts  which  have  been  in  the  "family" 
for  a  century  are  yours  to  preserve,  untarnished.  And  so, 
on  the  very  eve  of  the  new  century  of  "Mormonism'  'take 
inventory,  and  see  that  you  understand  the  stock,  and  know 
what  your  part  is  in  its  preservation.  May  a  clearer  under- 
standing of  its  incomparable  value  to  you,  individually,  and 
to  the  generations  to  follow,  be  yours  this  Christmas-tide. 


CHRISTMAS  GREETINGS 
To  the  Elders  who  have  laboured  in  the  W\\  Zealand 
Mission;  to  the  stalwart  nun  who  preside  over  the  districts 
and  branches;  to  the  noble  women  who  direel  the  Relief 
Society  ;  to  the  officers  and  teachers  of  all  auxiliar)  organisa- 
:  to  the  men  in  uniform,  at  home  or  overseas;  to  all 
Church  members,  both  European  and  Mann,  both  weak  and 
strong;  to  <>uv  many  friends;  t<i  everyone,  everywhere,  we 
send  our  greetings  and  "aroha  nui." 

May  tin-  Light  which  -till  shines  so  brightl)  in  what  i^ 
still  left  ol  .'in  erstwhile  Christian  world,  continue  t->  illumin 

an-  nui    w.i,    mi,   uf  the  difficulties  whi< 

1/,/,','/;,  . 


858 


TE  KARERE 


Tihema,  1(M1 


Sister  Cowley 


"GREETINGS" 

WOMEN'S    AUXILIARY    ORGANIZATIONS 
By  Sister  Elva  T.  ( 'owley 

As  we  approach  the  anniversary  of  the  birth 
of  our  Lord  and  Saviour  we  find  the  agents  of 
death  and  destruction  still  rampant  in  the  world. 
The  youth  of  nations  is  devoting  its  intelligence 
and  skill  to  the  methods  of  taking  human  life,  of 
sinking  ships,  bombing  cities,  burning  homes,  rain- 
in-  shell  upon  innocent  women  and  children- — 
yet  the  beautiful  simplicity  of  the  story  of  the 
Nativity  of  Christ  as  told  by  Luke  in  the  gospels 
will  continue  to  grip  the  imagination  and  touch 
the  hearts  of  countless  millions  the  world  over.  The  Christmas  hells 
still  echo  those  sacred  words.  "Fear  not,  for  behold  I  bring  you 
good  tidings  of  great  joy,  which  shall  he  to  all  people.  For  unto 
you  is  horn  this  day  in  the  city  of  David  a  Saviour  which  is  Christ 
the  Lord." 

The  spirit  of  hope,  peace,  spiritual  love,  of  divine  forgiveness 
and  of  life  everlasting  symbolized  in  these  words  can  never  die. 
For,  although  mankind  is  doing  his  best  to  destroy  the  basic  struc- 
ture upon  which  Christianity  is  built,  truth  and  righteousness  will 
triumph.  Jesus  said,  "I  am  the  light  of  the  world,  he  that  follbweth 
me  shall  not  walk  in  darkness,  but  shall  have  the  light  of  life."  The 
promise  in  these  words  and  all  others  spoken  by  the  Master  will 
be  fulfilled.  Already  there  is  a  sign.  So  many  things  which  sinned 
unimportant  have  now  become  important  in  the  universal  struggle 
for  life  and  liberty.  There  is  a  universal  pity  for  those  bowed 
down  by  misfortune.  Every  appeal  for  aid  meets  a  quick  response. 
The  rich  and  poor  are  rubbing  shoulders  and  experiencing  a  common 
suffering.  The  spirit  of  brotherhood  is  being  planted  in  the  hearts 
of  men.  The  process  may  be  slow  and  the  way  long,  but  God's 
promises  will  be  fulfilled  if  we  will  do  our  part. 

Men  may  create  their  "isms,"  exalt  the  state,  destroy  churches 
and  human  life,  but  that  divine  quality  in  man,  which  is  eternal,  will 
eventually  rise  out  of  the  fog  to  adapt  itself  to  God's  Plan. 

Those  in  the  world  who  question  the  authenticity  of  that  beauti- 
ful story  of  the  birth  and  resurrection  of  Christ  and  His  Church 
must  still  admit  its  influence  for  good  in  the  lives  of  men.  As  one 
critic  has  said,  "It  has  made  life  livable  for  millions  of  harried  souls. 
It  has  taken  rich  and  poor,  learned  and  ignorant,  white,  red.  yellow 
and  black ;  it  has  taken  them  all  and  tried  to  show  them  a  way  to 
salvation.  To  all  in  pain  it  has  held  a  balm — to  all  in  distress  it 
has  offered  peace.  To  every  man  without  distinction  it  has  said, 
''Jesus  died   for  you !"     To  every  human  creature  on  earth  it  has 


Tihema,  1941 


TE  KARERE 


859 


said,  "You  too  can  be  saved."  And  therein  lies  Christianity's  highest 
virtue.  It  has  helped  make  the  weak  strong  and  the  dejected  happy. 
It  has  stilled  the  fear  that  howls  in  man's 
breast,  and  crushed  the  unrest  that  gnaws 
at  his  soul.  In  a  word,  "It  has  worked — 
in  a  measure." 

At  this  of  all  seasons  when  we  should 
turn  our  thoughts  and  hearts  to  the  Great 
Nazarene,  I  desire  to  extend  you  sin- 
cerest  greetings  for  a  Joyous  Yuletide. 
May  we  also  remember  that  the  real 
Christmas  lies  in  the  echo  of  this  promise. 
"I  am  the  resurrection  and  the  life;  he 
that  believeth  in  Me,  though  he  were 
dead,  yet  shall  he  live.  And  whosoever 
liveth  and  believeth  in  Me  shall  never 
die."    John  11:25-26. 

May  the  Lord  bless  you  in  your  efforts 
to  keep  Mis  commandments  and  promote 
lli-  work  in  this  mission.  It  is  my  con- 
stant desire-  that  the  Latter-day  Saints  be 


APPRECIATION' 
I       Sister  Rona   Attenbor- 

I    ough   has   been   honorably 

J   released   as   Secretary    of 

I  the  Mission  Primary  As- 

[   sociation.      She    has    rcn- 

!   dered  faithful  service  and 

♦   has    been   devoted    to    the 

J   Primary  cause  for  several 

I   years.    She    has    the    love 

j   and    respect    of    all    who 

j   know    her,    and    zve    will 

I   always  be  indebted  to  her 

j   for    the    contribution    she 

\   has    made    to    the    New  \ 

j   Zealand  Mission  Primary 

Association,    and   for    the 

service    she    continues    to 

give  in  other  departments  j 

of  the  Church. 

— Mission   Primary  j 
Presidency. 


first  and  foremost  in  the  spreading  of 
the  Gospel  of  Peace,  of  Goodwill  and  Brotherhood  to  all  mankind. 
Also  that  each  individual  life  be  a  sermon  and  a  witness  of  the 
Divinity  of  Christ  and   His  Gospel. 

"To-day    well   lived    makes    every    yesterday    a    dream 
of  happiness,   and   (-very   morroow  a   'vision   of   hope." 


Brigham  Young  said : 


Compiled  by  Heber  (J.  Hale 

(From  his  public  addresses  as  recorded  in  the  "Journal  of  Discourses." 
The  volume  mid  page  arc  indicated  after  each  quotation;  as  also  the  year 

in    which    uttered.) 

Man  ma)  propose,  bul  God  will  dispose.     13:308  (1870), 

*  *  * 

In  m\  youth  I  was  called  an  infidel,  ami  I  was  an  infidel.    What 

t".     I  In     Bible?    No,  t<»  false  creeds,  and  to  professing  without  pos- 

e    in-.  ...  I  ask  the  infidel  world  what  the)  can  give  in  exchange 

i"i  the  faith  I  have  in  fesus  (  hrist  and  the  religion  I  believe  in  and 

practice.     13:215,  219  I  1870). 


I  am  prepared  to  prov<    i  rom  all  the  facts  that 
that  now  exi  i  in  all  branch*    of  human  affairs,  that  unioi 
and  that   divi  ion  is  weakn<       and  confusion.     13:267   (187< 


TE   KARERE 


Tihema.  1(M1 


Mary  Hannah  Wadham 

In  the  passing  of  Mary  Hannah  Wadham  at  the  Masterton  Hos- 
pital  on  October  20th  the  Church  lost  one  of  its  noble  women;  one 
whose  every  act  was  motivated  by  the  Gospel  of  Jesus  Christ.     As 

she  closed  her  eyeS  to  mortality  she  was  conscious  of  an  impending 
awakening  in  another  sphere  of  activity  and  progress.  Her  under- 
standing of  eternal  values  robbed  death  of  its  Sting  and  so  to  her 
it  was  but  another  adventure  along  the  pathway  of  life  everlasting. 
As  a  wife,  mother  and  saint  she 
measured  up  to  every  virtue  of 
those  sacred  appointments.  She 
was  small  in  physical  stature  but 
her  vitality  was  prodigious  and 
her  personality  fairly  beamed 
with  kindness  and  joy.  She 
loved  beauty  in  both  nature  and 
humanity  and  she  never  side- 
stepped an  opportunity  to  con- 
tribute to  that  beauty.  Her  home 
and  environs  were  immaculate. 
There  was  ever  a  spiritual  atmo- 
sphere in  her  home  which  was 
uplifting,  and  her  presence  sanc- 
tified her  surroundings. 

Because  of  distance  she  had  little  opportunity  to  affiliate  with 
organized  branches  of  the  Church,  but  this  did  not  deprive  her  of 
the  blessings  of  religious  devotion.  She  worshipped  in  her  home 
and  wherever  she  went  she  lived  in  the  strictest  compliance  with  the 
principles  of  her   faith. 

In  1939  she  went,  with  her  two  daughters.  Ivy  and  Mary,  to 
the  Hawaiian  Islands,  and  there  in  the  beautiful  Temple  of  Laie 
she  was  sealed  for  eternity  to  her  good  husband,  who  had  preceeded 
her  in  death.  This  was  the  greatest  joy  of  her  life.  During  her 
final  illness  she  expressed  a  desire  to  recover  so  that  she  might 
return  again  to  tin-  Temple  and  render  more  vicarious  service  for 
her  kith  and  kin.  This  unfinished  business  she  has  now  left  to  her 
children,  and  this  work  as  they  carry  it  on  will  bring  their  wonderful 
mother  close  to  them  and  assure  them  that  she  still  lives. 

The  Wadham  home  at  Masterton  was  always  a  sanctuary  for 
the  Missionaries  and  they  were  as  welcome  as  if  they  were  members 
of  the  family.  Hundreds  of  Elders  will  for  ever  bless  the  memory 
of  this  wonderful   mother. 

The  funeral  services  were  conducted  at  the  home  in  Masterton 
and  at  the  graveside.  President  Cowley,  assisted  by  Elder  A.  D. 
Amadio,  had  charge  of  the  service.  President  Cowley  and  Mr. 
Maxted,  a  friend  for  many  years,  spoke  at  the  home  and  paid  tribute 


Mary  Hannah   Wadham  and  her  dau- 
ghters   Ivy    and    Mary    (from    right). 


Tihema,  1941  TE  KARERE  861 

to  Sister  Wadham's  beautiful  character  and  her  reputation  in  the 
community  as  a  pioneer,  neighbour  and  citizen.  Elder  Amadio 
delivered  an  appropriate  scriptural  discourse  at  the  grave.  Friends 
and  neigbhours  of  every  walk  of  life  attended  to  pay  their  last 
respects,  and  the  many  letters,  telegrams  and  floral  offerings  were 
conclusive  evidence  that  she  was  not  only  widely  known  but  also 
loved  by  everyone  who  knew  her. 

Sister  Wadham  is  survived  by  a  son,  E.  C.  Wadham  of  Carter- 
ton, and  two  daughters,  Mary,  a  beloved  member  of  the  Auckland 
Branch,  and  Airs.  Ivy  Emery,  who  was  not  only  a  devoted  daughter 
but  also  a  constant  companion  and  "pal"  to  her  mother.  She  was 
predeceased  by  her  husband,  Mr.  Edward  Wadham,  23  years  ago. 

What  I  Know  of  the  Mormons 

Ernie  Cormier,  originally  from  Canada,  and  late  of  Auckland,  is  now  with 
the  Overseas  Services  in  the  Air  Force  in  his  homeland..  .Although  a  non- 
Mormon,  Ernie  was  as  jealous  of  Mormon  activities  as  any  Elder  during  his 
association  with  the  Church.  He  will  be  particularly  remembered  for  his 
presence  at  most  of  the  Hut  Taus  during  his  three  years  association,  which  has 
only  been  terminated  in  this  land  because  of  the  war. 
Good  luck,   Ernie.    Many   happy   landings. — Ed. 

This  is  a  belated  but  nevertheless  sincere  expression  of  my  grati- 
tude to  President  Cowley  and  the  good  people  of  the  Mormon  Church 
in  New  Zealand  for  the  kindnesses,  courtesies  and  friendships  extended 
to  me  for  three  years. 

It  has  been  more  than  a  mere  pleasure  to  be  associated  with  the 
Latter-day  Saints.  It  has  been  a  real  education  in  religion  to  see  a 
sincere  effort  in  your  teachings  and  every-day  life  to  really  practise  the 
ideal  Christian  religion  as  originally  intended  by  the  One  True  Teacher. 

I  am  proud  to  be  numbered  among  the  many  boosters  and  friends 
of    the    Mormons    in    New    Zealand    and    will    make    it    a    point 
acquainted  with  Mormons  wherever  they  may  be  in  parts  of  the  world 
where  my  occupation  will  take  me. 

I  can  sincerely  say  that  the  Elders  I  have  known  are  just  about 
the  finest  hoys  it  has  been  my  good  fortune  to  associate  with,  and  if 
my  luck  is  good  I  pray  I  shall  meet  many  more.  I  shall  make  every 
effort  to  personally  contact  that  very  finest  of  fellows.  Hepa  Bfeha,  as 
I  know  f  shall  benefit  from  his  company  as  I  have  benefited  in  the  past. 

In  closing  I  wish  to  extend  my  Bincerest  wishes  that  the  Latter-day 
Saints  enjoy  every  hlessing  that  their  efforts  t<>  teach  Christianity  meet 
with  every  success  possible. 

I   am  grateful   indeed   for  having  experienced  the   pleasures  and 

goodwill  and  fellowship  of  the  Hui  Taus.  and  may  they  urow  and  gTOW 
until    everyone    in    New    Zealand    will    want    to   attend. 

A    Well  wisher. 

ERNIE  CORMIER 


BOU 

XI) 

VOLUME 

()I< 

"TE 

KARERE/'   l 

•11 

\  limited 

It-  K  or  ere  is 

possible    w  ill) 

number  of 
now    availa 
/,•  Karere, 

bound  volumes  <> 
ble.    Place  youi 

'.     \iiiklan. 

the    1941 

orders  as 

.       I'm-    8 

isSUC   «>t" 

soon  as 

862 


TE  KARERE 


Tihema,  1(M1 


Pres.  Matthew  Cowley 


KA  WHAKATUWHERATIA    NGA  URUPA  A  KA 
ORA  AKE  ANO  TE  HUNGA  MATE 

He  whakamaoritanga  o  stain  o  nga  tuhituhinga 
a  Erata  Hani  li.  Taramete,  Apotoro  (kua  mate). 
Ko  Erata  Matin  Kauri  tc  kai-whakdmaori  ia  ia  i 
konei  i  mau.—Etita. 

"He  aha  koutou  te  whakapono  ai,  tera  ka 
whakaarahia  ake  e  te  Atua  te  hunga  mate?" 
(Nga  Mahi  a  nga  Apotoro  26:8.)  Koia  ta 
Paora  patai  ki  a  Kingi  Akaripa  i  a  ia  e  here- 
here  ana,  a  e  whakawakia  ana  ia  i  tona  aroaro. 
Kua  pahemo  i  taua  i  taua  wa  nga  tau  e  toru 
tekau  i  muri  i  te  aranga  ake  o  to  tatou  Ariki 
i  te  mate,  a  i  te  tukinotia  tonutia  hoki  te  Hunga 
Tapu  me  nga  Apotoro  i  aua  wa,  he  mea  na  te 
pumau  tonu  o  to  ratou  whakapono  ki  te  Ripe- 
katanga  me  te  Aranga  mai  o  te  Karaiti.  Ko  te 
iwi  mohio,  ko  nga  Haruku,  kahore  tahi  o  ratou 
whakaponotanga,  he  tika  te  Aranga  mai  i  te  mate,  a  ahakoa  i  mea  o 
ratou  hoa-tautohe,  ara  nga  Parihi,  he  tika  tonu,  ko  nga  tangata  anake 
i  whakapono  kua  ara  mai  te  Karaiti  i  te  mate,  ko  te  hunga  kua 
meinga  nei  ratou  he  Karaitiana,  he  mea  na  te  whakapono  me  te 
ripenetatanga. 

E  tautokongia  ana  e  nga  Tuhituhinga  Tapu,  ko  te  Wairua  o  Ihu 
Karaiti  i  whakahokia  mai  i  te  ao  wairua  ki  roto  ki  taua  tinana  ano  i 
takoto  nei  i  roto  i  te  urupa.  I  te  awatea  tonu  o  taua  Ratapu  e  kore- 
rotia  ake  nei  kei  roto  i  nga  Tuhituhinga,  i  kite  a  Meri  Makarini  i  a 
la  me  etahi  atu  i  whakaaetia  kia  whawha  ki  Ona  waewae.  A  i  te 
ahiahi  ka  tu  Ia  i  waenganui  i  nga  Apotoro  me  te  whakamarie  i  o 
ratou  ngakau  wehi;  na  Ana  kupu:  "Tirohia  oku  ringa  me  oku  wae- 
wae, ko  ahau  ano  ia:  whawhatia  ahau,  kia  kite  ai  koutou;  kahore 
hoki  i  te  wairua  kikokiko,  wheua  ranei,  me  oku  e  kitea  nei  e  koutou. 
(Ruka  24:  39.) 

Na  te  mau  tonu  o  nga  puta  me  nga  nawe  ki  te  tinana  ka  mohio 
ratou  koia  ko  taua  tinana  nei  ano  o  te  Ariki  i  a  Ia  e  ora  ana  i  wae- 
nganui i  a  ratou.  Otiia  kia  tino  tatu  ai  nga  ngakau  o  aua  hunga  kia 
mohio  ai  hoki  ratou  ehara  Ia  i  te  atarangi  noa  iho,  engari  he  tinana 
ora  Tona,  ka  mea  Ia,  "He  kai  ranei  ta  koutou  i  konei?"  A  mauria 
mai  ana  e  ratou  he  ika  me  etahi  atu  kai,  "a  kainga  ana  e  Ia  i  o  ratou 
aroaro." 

Ko  te  Karaiti  te  matamua  o  nga  tangata  katoa  i  whakakotahitia 
nei  o  ratou  wairua  ki  nga  tinana,  a  puta  ake  i  roto  i  nga  urupa  he 
tangata  ora;  no  reira  e  kiia  ana  ko  Ia,  "hei  matamua  mo  te  hunga 
kua  moe,"  me  "te  whanau  matamua  i  roto  i  te  hunga  mate,"  me  tenei 
ano,  "ko  ia  nei  te  putanga  matamua  o  te  hunga  mate."  (1  Koriniti 
15:20;  Korohe  1:18;  Kitenga  1:5.)  He  nui,  he  marama  hoki  nga 
korerotanga  o  onamata  mo  te  whai  wikitoria  o  te  Kaihoko  o  te  ao, 
i  runga  i  te  mate.  Kei  te  pera  tonu  hoki  te  whakamarama  a  nga 
Karaipiture,  tera  ka  ara  mai  ano  nga  tangata  katoa  kua  mate  i  runga  i 
te  whenua. 

E  rua  nga  whakaarahanga  i  te  mate  e  whakamaramatia  ana;  ko 
te  aranga  tuatahi  tetahi  me  te  aranga  whakamutunga,  ara  ko  te 
aranga  mai  o  te  hunga  tika  me  te  aranga  mai  o  te  hunga  kino.  Me 
whakarongo  ki  nga  kupu  a  te  Karaiti  pu  ake  mo  to  ratou  aranga  mai: 
"Meake  ka  puta  te  wa,  e  rongo  ai  i  Tona  reo  nga  tangata  katoa  i  roto 
i  nga  urupa,  a  ka  puta  mai;  ko  nga  kai  mahi  o  te  pai  ki  te  aranga 


Tihema,  1941 


TE  KARERE 


863 


Hui  Pariha  ka  tu  ki 
Tamaki,  II. B.,  a  te  24 
me  25  o  nga  ra  o  Hanu- 
ere,  1942.  He  powhiri 
tenci  ki  te  katoa  kia  haere 
mai  ki  to  tatou  Hid.  Tera 


Rdhiri    Harris. 

Timuaki  Peka. 
Eriata   No  per  a, 

Timuaki  Takiwa. 
Matin   Kauri, 

Timuaki  Miliaua. 


o  te  whakaoranga;  a  ko  nga  kai  mahi  o  te  kino  ki  te  aranga  o  te  whaka- 
wakanga."      (Hoani   5  :  28-29.) 

I  timata  te  aranga  tuatahi  i  taua  aranga  mai  o  Ihu  Karaiti,  a 
ka  haere  tonu  a  muri  iho.  Ina  hoki  ko  enei  kupu  e  kiia  nei:  "Tuwhera 
noa  hoki  nga  urupa;  a  he  maha  nga  tinana  i  ara  mai  o  te  hunga  tapu 
kua  moe;  a  puta  ake  ana  i  nga  urupa  i  muri  iho  o  tona  aranga  mai, 
haere  ana  ki  roto  ki  te  pa  tapu,  he  tokomaha  hoki  te  hunga  i  kitea 
ai  ratou."  (Matiu  27:  52-53.)  Ka  tutuki  te  aranga  mai  o  te  hunga  tika 
ina  hoki  mai  te  Ariki  i  runga  i  te  kororia,  otira  kua  tau  te  ritenga  kia 
ara  ratou  rite  tonu  ki  o  ratou  ake  ahua; 
e  ki  ana  a  Paora,  "Ko  tenei  kua  ara  a  te 
Karaiti  i  te  mate,  kua  waiho  hei  matamua 
mo  te  hunga  kua  moe.  Na  te  tangata  nei 
hoki  te  mate,  waihoki  na  te  tangata  te 
aranga  o  te  hunga  mate.  I  roto  hoki  i  a 
Arama  ka  mate  katoa  nga  tangata,  wai- 
j  hoki  i  roto  i  a  te  Karaiti  ka  whakaorangia 
pea  etahi  take  nunui  e  pa  katoatia.  Qtiia  tenei,  tenei,  i  tona  ake  tu- 
ranga;  ko  te  Karaiti  te  matamua;  muri  iho 
.  ko  te  hunga  o  te  Karaiti  i  tona  haerenga 
j   korero.  Haere  Mai.  Haere   I    maL„    (1    Koriniti    i5:20-23.) 

Ka  timata  te  kingitanga  o  te  Karaiti 
mo  te  kotahi  mano  tau  hei  whakawhiti- 
tanga  mo  te  hunga  tika  i  te  mate  ki  te 
ora,  e  penei  ana  te  korero  mo  ratou :  "Hari 
tonu,  tapu  tonu  te  tangata  he  wahi  nei 
tona  i  te  aranga  tuatahi:  e  kore  te  ma- 
tenga  tuarua  e  whai  mana  ki  a  ratou; 
engari  he  tohunga  ratou  ma  te  Atua,  ma 
te  Karaiti  hoki,  a  kotahi  mano  nga  tau  e  kingi  tahi  ai  ratou  me  ia." 
(Kitenga  20:6)  Ma  te  hunga  kino  e  penei  ana:  "A  kihai  i  ora  ake  te  toe- 
nga  o  nga  tupapaku,  a  taha  noa  nga  tau  kotahi  mano."  (  Kitenga  20:  5. ) 
Kia  mataara,  kia  marama  ake  hoki  te  ngakau  mo  Tona  hokin.ua 
mai  me  Tana  wehewehe  i  te  whakaarahan.ua  o  te  hunga  tika  me  to 
hunga  he,  kua  mea  te  Ariki  i  roto  i  to  whakakiton.ua  i  enei  fa  o  muri 
nei;  "whakarongo  koutou,  no  te  mea,  nana,  kua  tata  mai  to  ra  nui  a  to 
Ariki.  No  to  una  kei  to  haere  mai  to  ra  o  puaki  mai  ai  to  reo  0  to 
Ariki;  ngaueue  ai  hoki  nga  rangi,  o  wiri  ai  to  whonua  me  to  tetere  a 
te  Atua  o  roa,  o  kaha  tona  tangi,  mo  to  mea  atu  ki  nga  iwi  e  moe  ana. 
c  koutou,  e  te  Hunga  Tapu,  maranga,  ara  ake  hoki:  e  te  hunga  hara 

e     tioho,     kia    tuaruatia     fa    aim     taku     karan.ua."      (Akoran.ua     m< 

Kawenata  43:  L7-18.) 

Kei    te    kaha    hoki    to    whakainarama    i    roto    i    te    Pukapuka    a    M 

mona  mo  to  aranga  mai  o  nga  tangata  katoa:  "Na,  ho  mate  ano 

o  karangatia  nei  ko  to  mate  o  to  tiana;  a  ma  to  matenga  <•  to  Karaiti 

c    wcuctc  nga  here  o  tenei   mate  o  to  tinana.   kia  whakaarahia  ai  te 

katoa    i    tenei    mate    0    to    tinana;    a    ko    to    wanna    raua    ko    to    tinana    ka 

w  hakakotahil ia   ano   ki   tona   alma;   ka   whakahokia   ko   to    iwi,    I 

pona,    ki    tona    wahi    tika,    ki    tona    wahi    tika.    am-    to    nioa    koi    a    tatou 

nei  inaianei,  a  ka  kawea  tatou  kia  tu  ki  to  araaro  o  to  Ann,  ko  reira 

tatOU   mataii   ai   mo  tatou   o  inatau    noi   inaianoi,   a   koi   a   tatou   ho   n.uakau 

mahara  rawa  ki  o  tatou  ho  katoa.     Na,  ka  puta  mai  tenei  whakah 

mo    to    katoa.    mo    to    kau  mat  ua.    mo    to    t  a  i  t  a  mariki.    mo    to    horo.    mo    to 

here-kore,  mo  !.•  tane,  mo  to  hunga  ho,  mo  to  hunga  tika;  .-i  e  kore 

o  rite  ki  to  nui  o  totahi  makawo  ..  ratOU  mahunva  to  una  6  ngaTO,  hooi 
ka  whakahohia  katoatia  ano  nga  noa  K  i  tona  wahi  <•  nto  ai.  uio  to  nioa 
inaianoi,   ara    i    lot,,    i    to   tinana.    a    kaw.a    :ina    whakatuna   ana    ki    '• 

aro  o  to  nohoanga  whakawa  o  to  Karaiti  to  Tama  ^  to  Atua.  to  Ifatua.  o 
to  Wanna  Tapu,  ko  in  nei  ho  kotahi.  ho  Atua  ora  tonu.  kia  whakawakia, 

kia    rite   K  i   a    ratou    main,   ahakoa    pal,   ahakoa    kino."'    lAianu    11:    I 


864  TE  KARERE  Tihema,  1941 

What  Should  a  Man's  Religion  Do  for  Him? 

By    Elder    Barry    T.    U'ndc 

It  has  been  one  year  since  the  missionaries  were  called  from  New 
Zealand.  We  have  been  rather  neglectful  in  sending  news  and  articles 
to  "Te  Karere."  I  am  writing  this  article  in  the  form  of  a  speech  to  you. 

My  Brothers,  Sisters  and  friends,  we  live  in  trying  times,  Chris- 
tianity is  on  trial.  Whole  nations  have  reflected  it  and  the  whole 
world  seems  to  be  divided  on  its  value  as  a  saving  force. 

Religion  is  the  great  conservator  of  all  the  forces  that  make  righte- 
ousness and  peace  in  the  world,  the  source  of  solace  and  comfort  for 
the    distressed;    of    inspiration    and    power    for    those    who    battle    for 

E  justice  and  truth  in  the  earth.  When  the  pres- 
sure of  want  is  removed,  when  opulence  and  in- 
dependence come  to  men,  they  are  prone  to 
forget  God  and  regard  religion  only  as  a  refuge 
for  the  poor.  Wherever  or  whenever  the  major- 
ity of  mankind  do  this,  they  rob  it  of  its  potency, 
the  forces  of  social  decay  set  in  and  the  whole 
moves  backward.  This  is  the  verdict  of  the 
centuries. 
The  fate  of  the  world  rests  upon  faith  in  its 
Creator,  morality  centres  in  religion,  and  with- 
out its  saving  influences  democracy  cannot  sur- 
vive. True  religion  should  make  a  definite  con- 
tribution to  the  lives  of  all  who  live  it — the 
strong  and  the  weak.  None  is  beyond  the  need 
of  its  beneficient  influences. 
Elder    Wride  To    come    directly    to    the    question,    "What 

should  a  Man's  Religion  do  for  Him?"  Here 
listed,  in  my  judgment  are  a  few  of  the  things  a  satisfactory  religion 
should  supply.  First,  it  should  give  rational  and  satisfactory  answers 
to  one's  spiritual  and  religious  questions,  of  which  there  are  many:  (1) 
Is  there  a  Creator?  (2)  What  is  He  like?  (3)  What  is  my  actual 
relationship  to  Him?  (4)  Why  am  I  here?  (5)  Do  I  really  live  after 
death,  if  so,  what  do  I  do  in  that  estate?  (6)  How  will  my  life  here 
influence  my  life  hereafter?  Mormonism  answers  these  and  the  many 
other   questions  that   confront  us. 

IS  THERE  A  CREATOR?  The  Latter-day  Saints  bear  to  the 
world  the  message  and  assurance  that  in  this  dispensation  God  has 
revealed  Himself,  also  that  God  lives  and  is  the  creator  of  the  heavens 
and  earth  and  all  that  is  in  them,  that  He  is  a  glorified  perfected  and 
exalted  personality  with  an  identity  as  definite  as  man's.  We  also 
affirm  that  man  in  this  latter-day  has  not  only  heard  His  voice  but  has 
looked  upon  His  face  and  felt  the  radiance  and  power  of  His  divine 
personality.  He  is  our  Heavenly  Father;  we  are  His  children  made  in 
His  image. 

WHY  AM  I  HERE?  We  are  not  here  as  a  result  of  chance,  but 
for  a  wise  and  glorious  purpose.  We  believe  in  the  great  doctrine  of 
eternal  progression,  we  lived  before  we  were  born  and  we  will  live 
after  we  die.  We  came  as  spirits  from  a  pre-existent  world  into  mor- 
tality to  conquer  the  problems  of  a  mortal  life  and  prepare  for  a 
higher  and  better  world.  We  believe  that  the  spirit  of  man  is  im- 
mortal and  eternal  and  at  death  it  goes  to  the  paradise  of  God,  where 
it  remains  until  the  resurrection,  when  it  will  be  united  with  the 
resurrected  and  immortal  body.  This  union  constitutes  the  immortal 
soul  of  man.     We  do  live  after  death. 


Tibema,  1941  TE  KARERE  865 

HOW  WILL  MY  LIFE  HERE  INFLUENCE  MY  LIFE  HERE- 
AFTER? We  affirm  that  all  mankind  is  saved  through  the  grace  of 
God,  but  exaltation  and  glory  rest  upon  individual  achievement.  In 
Joseph  Smith's  writings  we  find,  "What  ever  principle  of  intelligence 
we  attain  unto  in  this  life,  it  will  rise  with  us  in  the  resurrection.  If 
one  man,  by  his  diligence,  attains  more  knowledge  than  another  he  will 
have  so  much  the  advantage  in  the  world  to  come.  Man  is  saved  no 
faster  than  he  gains  knowledge.  It  is  impossible  for  a  man  to  be  saved 
in   ignorance." 

Mormonism  affirms  that  family  ties  may  be  renewed  and  sanctified 
in  the  world  to  come.  Husband  will  be  with  wife,  children  with  their 
parents,  and  family  with  family.  The  most  comforting  doctrine  ever 
preached  is  that  little  children  are  inno-  .,,.,,.,..,„,»,,.,»_»»,_,.,_._« 
cent  and  will  be  saved  regardless  of  bap-    | 

tism.     Upon    what    progress    we    make    in    \       ['/''"lcru    ,2V.  """•'    * 
this  world  is  with  what  measure  we  will  be    j    ^"^*£*   ~5*  V*  '  • 

judged.  j    thc   R-X-Z-A.l-.,   tratmng 

We 'believe  that  a  man's  religion  should    I    "}   Canada,  spent   several 

give    a    satisfactory    answer   to    these    and        £a-v*  u'!!h  -V  ?  o       ,     i 
~:~:i j..- u.-j.    •.*.    _i u    j.    !    Sister  David 'A.  Smith  of 


the  Canadian  Mission,  and 
writes  that   lie  was  most 


similar  questions,  but  it  should  do  more  » 
than  answer  his  spiritual  questions.  It  j 
should  give  him  greater  powers  than  those    ! 

with    which    he    is    naturally    endowed.     In    !    «*?«?"«  «•  W9~ 
the   past   ages   by  the   exercise   of  faith   in    j     ""^on-home  spin   there 
God,    through    humility    and    supplication    J    whtch   was1  ^"'.^0'   thc 
men   have   wrought   powerfully   for  righte-    J    s°",c  ^    he    enjoyed    in 
ousness.       They    have    been    divinely    sus-        Ne™  *™land;    . 
tained    and  "inspired    from    on    high.      The  TJ   Karere    "n'"l's   lts 

names  of  all  the  men  of  God  are  not  re-  "cadc!'s  *°  "?*' .'°  "'"' 
corded  in  Holy  Writ,  many  are  written  on  W  '"  *he  Services.  An 
the  pages  of  history.  ""/''"'-v   '','   th"  °^ce1  \e' 

Leaders,  inventors,  men  such  as  Edison,       9ardt1*  the  address  of  the 
Lincoln,   and   many   other   such   men,   have    !    V?™™  '',"'" lwlU  rece%Vt 

had  this  power  in  their  work.    This  divine    \J^  .  .  .„* 

aid  is  not  only  limited  to  people  of  public  — — — — 

renown.  The  humblest  soul  living  in  this  earth  may  be  sustained  by 
the  spirit  of  Christ. 

There  is  another  great  power  that  man  can  have,  that  is  the  power 
of  the  Holy  Ghost.  The  Holy  Ghost  is  conferred  upon  the  repentent 
and  baptized  believer.  Its  mission  is  to  be  a  special  help  to  all  who 
receive   it.    The   power  of   the    Holy   Ghost    makes   men   greater   than 

themselves  and  increases  their  wisdom;  it  gives  them  faith,  hope  and 
charity.      This    is    the    peculiar    and    precious    gift    which    the    restored 

Gospel  offers  to  all  who  will  obey  its  precepts  and  conform  to  its 
requirements.     The   Holy   Ghost   can   be   bestowed   upon   men  only  by 

the  power  of  the  priesthood  of  Cod  \\C  as  mormons  hold  that  priest- 
hood; it  was  restored  in  this  dispensation  in  the  Bpring  o['  L829  upon 
the    heads   of   .Joseph    Smith    ami    Oliver    Oowdery.    by    John    the    Baptist 

and   by  the  ancient    Prophets,   Peter,  .lames  ami  John. 

Moioioiii.  in  declares  that  man  belongl  to  a  race  Of  deities,  that 
he    has    within    him    the    potentialities    of    Godhood,    that    h<     p 

embryo  all  the  faculties  ami  attributes  that  shine  in  glorious  perfection 

in    Dirty.     Clothed    with   the   authority    and    DOWSr   Of   tin-    priesthood    it    i^ 

the  privilege  of  every  man  t«.  develop  his  Intellect  and  spirituality  to 
the  point  where  elements  ami  the  universe  arc  at  his  will. 

Mormonism   regard)    man*     welfare  at    the  chief  concern   ^(  the 
world.    The  earth  wai    created  for  his  dwelling-place  ami  he  e 
here  with  his  own   free  agency  to  choo  s  good  or  evil,     The   * 

confers  upon    him   the   power  of  choice,   and   la\  -   QDOn   him   the   r< 


TE  KARERE  Tihema,  1<M1 

bility  with  divine  assistance  of  working  out  his  own  destiny.  The  best 
test  for  a  religion  is  the  importance  which  it  attaches  to  man,  the 
place   it    gives   him,    in   life. 

A  religion  that  is  effective  must  he  practical,  and  must  cover  one's 
daily  life;  it  must  motivate  men  in  all  that  he  does.  It  should  inspire 
men  to  business  achievement,  to  cultural  growth,  and  to  social  advance- 
ment. Mormonism  recognizes  and  directs  these  incentives  and  aspira- 
tions; it  teaches  man  how  to  live  every  day,  how  to  take  care  of  his 
body  that  he  may  be  healthy,  and  how  to  fit  into  society.  We  believe 
that  we  were  sent  into  an  unfinished  world  to  co-operate  with  our 
creator  in  making  it  beautiful.  Mormonism  teaches  man  to  develop 
every  power  God  has  given  him  so  that  he  may  gain  knowledge  from 
whatever  he  undertakes  to  accomplish. 

There  are  at  least  five  fundamental  things  that  a  satisfactory 
religion  should  do  for  one:  (1)  It  should  answer  his  religious  questions. 
(2)  Supply  sound  standards  by  which  he  can  best  live.  (3)  Give  to 
him  greater  powers  than  those  with  which  he  is  naturally  endowed. 
(4)  Provide  him  with  incentives  for  personal  achievement.  (5)  Make 
his  life  full,  happy,  abundant  and  inspiring  to  others.  Added  to  all 
of  this,  rising  above  it,  permeating  man's  thinking,  filling  his  days  with 
power  and  purpose  must  be  the  impelling  conviction  in  his  soul  that 
God  lives.  This  conviction  rests  upon  a  settled  faith  in  Him,  in  His 
matchless  goodness,  and  unfailing  love  for  mankind.  It  is  upon  this 
rock  that  the  religion  of  the  Latter-day  Saints  rests.  May  I  ask,  are 
you  receiving  these  benefits  by  helping  your  religion  to  help  you? 
Work  diligently  in  these  times,  remember  God,  and  may  the  time  come 
once  again  that  we  may  meet  each  other. 


GENEALOGY 

By  Teao  Wirihana 
THE  WAY  TO  PERFECTION 
Cottage  Meetings  for  December: 

!Dec.     4 — Lesson   Review  from   chapters   1   to   7. 
11 — Lesson  Reviewr  from  chapters  8  to   14. 
Slogan:  "Ko  te  kororia  ote  Atua  ko  te  Matauranga." 
He   mihi   atu   ki   te   Mihana   kua  tae   tenei   ki  te   marama 
whakamutunga  o  te  tau.      Aha  koa  ona  maemaetanga  me  ona 
i        pouritanga  kaore  e  mutu  te  karanga  ate  Manu  nei  a  Te  Karere 
Huihui  a  mai  o  koutou  whakapapa  ko  nga  ra  te  nei  o  te  whaka- 
|        pawera,  kua  kino  te  moana-nui-a-kiwa,  inga  mea  whaka  mate 
♦        ate  hoariri.      He  aha  ra  te  mea  mo  te  Tauhou  kua  ngaro  e  tahi 
o  tatau  ki  tua  o  te  arai  ki  te  kauwhau  i  te  rongopai  ki  te  hunga- 
1        mate  e  mate  mai  nei  ite  pae  ote  pakanga. 


Life  is  dual:  the  body  and  the  spirit,  the  real  and  the  ideal,  the 
loaf  and  the  song.  There  is  the  everyday  practical  you  that  must  be 
fed  and  clothed  and  sheltered;  there  is  the  spiritual  you  that  rises 
on  the  wings  of  inspiration  to  commune  with  the  Most  High.  There 
is  the  you,  who,  like  Martha  of  old,  is  "cumbed  with  much  serving"; 
and  the  you,  who,  like  Mary,  takes  time  to  sit  at  the  Master's  feet 
to  be  taught  of  Him. 

— Leila  Marler  Hog  gun. 


Tihema,  1941  TEvKARERE  867 

Music  for  Sacrament  Service 

THOUGHTS  AND   SUGGESTIONS 
By  Alfred  M.  Durham 

The  question  concerning  proper  music  during  the  administration 
of  the  Sacrament  in  our  Church  is  one  which  should  receive  more  care- 
ful consideration  than  is  sometimes  given. 

During  this  sacred  period,  all  that  is  done  should  tend  to  make  one 
conscious  of  the  purpose  for  which  the  Sacrament  was  instituted, 
namely,  the  Sacrifice  and  Atonement  of  the  Saviour  of  the  world,  and 
His  injunction  to  worthily  partake  of  these  sacred  emblems  in  remem- 
brance of  Him. 

Anything  which  detracts  from  this  purpose  is  not  only  out  of 
place,  but  is  a  positive  hindrance  to  the  proper  observance  of  this  most 
important  part   of   our  worship. 

As  far  as  possible,  everything  connected  with  the  service  should 
be  impersonal.  For  example,  if  the  choir  sings  a  number,  it  should 
be  done  without  ''show,"  either  by  the  chorister  or  choir  members; 
and  preferably  the  members  should  remain  seated  during  the  rendition. 
Solos,  either  vocal  or  instrumental,  should  in  most  cases  be  avoided, 
for  the  simple  reason  that  the  attention  of  the  congregation  is  more 
often  focused  upon  the  performer  than  upon  the  message  he  may  try 
to  give  through  music. 

Organ  music,  if  properly  played  and  wisely  selected,  seems  to  be 
best  suited  for  use  during  the  passing  of  the  Sacrament. 

Many  organists  do  net  properly  sense  the  need  of  making  suitable 
selections  for  this  purpose.  If  music  is  used  which  has  a  title,  or  is 
accompanied  with  words,  in  either  case  the  selection  should  be  in  har- 
mony with  the  service.  It  should  then  he  played  with  a  quiet  etVective- 
ness  which  will  inspire  the  listener  to  centre  his  thoughts  on  the  pur- 
pose   of    the    Sacrament. 

Many  beautiful  compositions  are  written  .  of  a  thought  provoking] 
contemplative    mood,     which    are    wholly     unsuited     in    this    COnn'e 

they   arc  associated   with   secular   ideas,   and   lead   away,   rather 
than   to  the  objective. 

The  names  of  some  of  these  frequently  n-ed  are  as  follow*-:  List's 
"Uroai. i   of   Love";   "Drink  to    .Me   Only    With   Thine    Eyes";   "Al; 
at  Thy  Sweel   Voice,     from  "Samson  and  Delilah";  "Nevin 
"The  Swan";  "Prayer?1   from   "Hansel  and   Gretel";  "Juanita"; 

"id";  BrahmH  "Lullaby";  "Sweet  and  Low"  and  others  of  this 
type.     (Imo, i   music2     5fes,   bul    i    I    for  a  Sacrament   service;   b< 
the  text  and  thoughl  lead  far.  far  away  from  the  desired  trend  during 
the   passing  of  the   bread   and   water. 

v  beautiful  hymns  may  be  used  to  good  effect  by  pr< 
Cation  ami  arrangement,  a  few  of  which  arc  here  suggested:    "N 
My  Cod  to  Thee";  "A   Po<  r  Wayfaring    Man  of  Grief"; 
Humble  Birth";  "How  Greal   the   Wi  dom  and  the   I 
Soul,  Arise";  "< >h  It   Is  Wonderful";  "Reverently  and   Meekly   [ 
"Behold   the   Cicat    Redeemer   Die."     Thee   are    found   either   in   the 
"De  i  ret  Sunday  School  Songs/'  or  "The  Latter-day  Saint   Hyi 

The  "Schreiner"  Organ  Boole  is  in  every  ward  of  the  Church, 
from   t  kit     Mm  ce  :i   few  number    are   h<  • 
uitable  Sacrament   Music;  "Supplication"  Schreiner;  "When  Tl 
Near"  Bach .  he  Lord*'  Mend< 

"<  mr  i:<  de<  mer  and  <  tar  Lord"  Schrein*  i       I 
Sacred   Head   Once   Wounded"   Bach-Schreiner.     The  above  men! 
hymn     and     election     will   enrich   the   period   while  the   Sai 
heme   admini  tered. 


TE  KARERE  Tihema,  1941 

Relief  Society  Centennial 

By  Sister  Elva  T.  Cowley 

The  17th  of  March  marks  the  Centennial  of  the  Women's  Relief 
Society  of  the  Church  of  Latter-day  Saints.  One  hundred  years 
ago  the  Prophet  Joseph  Smith,  with  eighteen  women,  organized  this 
Society  for  charitahle  purposes.  From  that  small  beginning  the 
organization  has  grown  and  developed  until  it  has  become  national 
and  international  in  scope  and  influence. 

At  the  close  of  1937,  when  the  membership  was  approximately 
75.0CO,  a  campaign  was  launched  for  a  Church-wide  increase  of 
25.000  additional  members,  in  order  to  bring  the  enrolment  to 
100,000  by  1942.  Only  a  few  months  remain  before  the  goal  must 
be    reached.      What   are   you   doing   in   the   support   of   this   drive? 

For  the  past  two  years  the  general 
board  has  been  thinking,  planning,  and 
writing  to  make  this  Centennial  a  great 
event  in  the  history  of  the  Relief  Society 
throughout  the  Church.  It  therefore  has 
been  recommended  that  all  wards  and 
branches  plan  some  special  programme  to 
commemorate  this  anniversary.  In  view 
of  this  request  I  take  this  opportunity  to 
remind  the  branches  in  the  mission  to 
make  plans  and  preparations  now,  for  the 
17th  March.  Celebrations  might  be  held 
in  each  branch  separately,  or  conjointly 
in  the  districts. 

You  could  use  the  historical  part  of 
the  Relief  Society  handbook,  old  minute  books  and  historical  records 
as  background  material  for  dramas,  stories,  recitations,  etc.,  as  well 
as  biographical  sketches  of  the  pioneers  of  the  Society  in  the  Mission. 
The  singing  mothers  should  be  outstanding  in  their  feature  on 
this  programme.  It  would  be  advisable,  therefore,  to  choose  suit- 
able songs  now  and  practise  them  at  regular  weekly  meetings  in  order 
to  be  well  prepared. 

For  some  years  past  the  General  Board  has  conducted  a  Memo- 
rial Prize  Poem  Contest.  In  as  much  as  the  women  of  New  Zealand 
to  my  knowledge  have  never  participated,  I  would  like  to  suggest 
that  wre  have  a  Centennial  Poem  and  short  story  contest  of  our  own. 
The  theme  of  the  poem  and  short  story  shall  be  Relief  Society  Cen- 
tennial, or  something  to  that  effect.  The  poem  should  not  exceed 
more  than  thirty  lines  or  the  story  2,000  words.  The  contest  to  be 
open  to  anyone,  young  or  old.  We  would  welcome  the  literary 
efforts  of  "Relief  Society  Fathers  and  Sons." 


Acknowledgment.— 

Thanks    and    appreciation 
to  the  Korongata  Branch 
Primary  for  their  contri- 
bution of  £3  to  the  Prim- 
iary    Fund.    The    Tatnaki 
Branch     Primary,     H.B., 
I     should     not     be     satisfied 
with  their  inability  to  sub- 
j    scribe       to    the       Mission 
♦    Primary    Fund,    but    are 
J    urged    to    redouble    their 
!    efforts   and    remit    to    the 
\    Mission  Office  an  amount 
J    that  will  cover  the  exist- 
0     ing    obligation. 


Tihema,  1941  TE  KARERE  869 

If  this  suggestion  is  approved  of  by  the  branches  the  competi- 
tions should  be  handed  to  the  committee  in  charge  of  the  celebrations 
not  later  than  the  first  week  in  March  so  they  can  be  used  in  the 
various  programmes.  Then  if  you  will  send  in  your  poems  and 
stories  to  the  headquarters  a  selection  will  be  made  for  publication 
in  the  "Te  Karere,"  and  prizes  will  be  awarded  to  the  winners. 
So  do  your  best. 

The  General  Board  also  recommended  the  planting  of  R.S. 
Centennial  memorial  trees  on  the  church  grounds.  Xot  only  will 
they  add  beauty  to  the  grounds,  but  they  will  be  a  living  monument 
to  R.S.  throughout  the  years.  A  tree  deep  rooted  in  the  earth  with 
its  numerous  branches  stretched  invitingly  to  all  mankind  typifies 
the  noble  purpose  and  service  of  the  Relief  Society.  This  sugges- 
tion for  the  year,  to  make  our  "homes  chapels  and  maraes  beautiful." 

A  Centennial  tree  adorning  the  grounds  of  our  Chapels  or  even 
on  the  gardens  would  stand  as  a  living  testimony  of  our  faith  in  the 
cause  of  this  great  organization. 

Let  us  not  forget  our  Church  Welfare  nor  our  Hui  Tan  hand 
work.  The  First  Presidency  of  the  Church  is  constantly  urging-  the 
Saints  to  have  enough  clothing  and  food  on  hand  for  a  year  in 
advance. 

May  we  all  CO-Operate  and  make  this  Centennial  an  occasion  to 
be  remembered  by  old  and  young  in  the  Mission  throughout  the 
years.  May  our  Society  grow  and  progress  in  its  educational  as 
well  as  its  charitable  activities  to  the  memory  of  the  great  Founder, 
the  Prophet  Joseph  Smith. 


NEW   SECRETARY   APPOINTED 

Elder   Kelly  Harris  has  been  appointed   Secretary  of  the 
\(  w  Zealand   Mission  as  from  the  6th  day  of  November.      Be 
will  continue  as  Editor  of  "Te  Karere"  and  also  as  President 
and   Secretary   of   the    Mission    Sunday    Schools.     Until   other 
plans  are  effected  he  will  also  handle  the  secretarial  work  of 
the  Mission  Primaries.     All  communications  pertaining  to  work 
in  these  respective  organizations  should  be  addressed  to  him, 
I  ask  for  him  your  faith  and  prayers  and  your  assistance  in 
•  ■very  repsect.     The  efficiency  of  his  office  depends  upon  the 
support  he  receives  from  the  di  trid  secretaries  of  the  respec 
tive  organizations,    if  there  are  any  whose  time,  or  la 
interest,  will   not   permit   of  efficient  service  ai  district 
taries  of  the  auxiliary  organizations,  I  am  asking  you  to  i 
Immediately   so   that  maj    be   appointed    who   will 

carry  on  and  co-operate  with  our  ne*    Mission  Sen 

M  \TI  I1KW     COW  I  IN  . 

dent 


870  TE  KARERE  Tihema,  1941 

SUNDAY  SCHOOL 

I        Th  j 

"OUR  HOMES   AND   CHAPELS   SHALL   BE   BEAUTIFUL"  j 

"For  Zion  must   increase'  in  beauty  and  in  Holiness;  her  borders  J 
must  be  enlarged;  her  stakes  must  be  strengthened;  yea  -eerily  I  say 
unto  you.    Zion   must   arise  and  put   on  her  beautiful  garments." 

—Doctrine  &   Covenants  82:  14.  J 


SACRAMENT  GEM 

'Tis  sweet  to  sing  the  matchless  love 
Of  Him  Who  left   I  lis  home  above, 
And  came  to  earth — ()  wondrous  plan — 
To  suffer,  bleed  and  die   for  man. 

CONCERT  RECITATION 
James  I:  26. 

"If  any  man  among  you  seem  to  be  religious,  and  bridleth  not 
his  tongue,  hut  deceiveth  his  own  heart,  this  man's  religion  is  vain." 

KORERO  A  NGAKAU 
Menu  1:26. 

"Ki  te  mea  he  ahua  karakia  to  tetahi  i  roto  ia  koutou,  ki  te  kore 
e  parairetia  e  ia  tona  arero,  he  tinihanga  hoki  nona  ki  tona  ngafcau, 
he  mauniou  karakia  tana." 

SUGGESTED  HYMNS  FOR  SINGING  PRACTICES 

"The  Lord  is   My   Light"    Page  106 

rE  Kore  Ahau  e  Mataku  Xoa"    Wharangi  62 

SUPERINTENDENTS: 

The  third  Sunday  in  December  is  Christmas  Sunday  and  we  sug- 
gest you  take  the  initiative  to  arrange  a  suitable  Sunday  School  Pro- 
gramme. Have  a  very  well  prepared  programme.  Use  the  time 
as  you  see  best  to  portray  the  "Christ  Theme"  to  your  people. 

RE  HUI  PEKA   PROGRAMMES: 

The  responsibility  for  your  Sunday  School  programmes  when- 
ever there  is  a  HUI  PEKA  (Branch  Conference)  belong  to  the 
Branch  President  and  his  Superintendent,  always,  however,  with  the 
knowledge  that  due  deference  and  respect  be  given  to  the  District 
and  Mission  Sunday  School  authorities  if  the}-  wish  to  participate. 
Any  information  or  assistance  in  preparation  of  the  programme 
desired  of  the  higher  Sunday  School  organizations  will  be  gladly 
given. 


Tihema,  1941  TE  KARERE  871 

RE  HUI  PARIHA  PROGRAM  MRS: 

The  District  Presidency  and  Superintendency  are  responsible  for 
these  programmes  and  they  may  prepare  their  activities  without  any 
waiting  for  a  programme  from  the  Mission  Sunday  School.  Due 
respect  is  to  be  accorded  Mission  officers  and  Board  members. 
Arrangements  must  be  made  for  suitable  time  for  instructional  work 
during  the  Conference,  which  will  be  carried  out  by  the  District 
officers  with  the  assistance  of  any  Mission  worker  present. 

There  are  several  Districts  who  fail  to  prepare  proper  pro- 
grammes. If  you  have  anything  to  do  at  all  affecting  Sunday  Schools, 
please  try  and  have  it  well  prepared.    Begin  your  meeting  on  time. 

REPORTS : 

The  last  quarterly  report  is  due  20th  December,  1941.  Please  try 
and  get  your  reports  mailed  before  the  above  date.  Every  Home  and 
Branch  Sunday  School  that  has  been  organized  under  the  direction 
of  the  Priesthood  in  the  Xew  Zealand  Minimi  is  asked  to  send  in 
a  report.  All  Priesthood  authorities  throughout  this  Mission  who 
were  responsible  for  the  organization  of  Sunday  Schools  whether 
Home  or  Branch,  are  asked  to  visit  those  said  Sunday  Schools  and 
see  that  a  REPORT  is  made. 

Reports  are  made  out  in  Triplicate.  One  to  the  Mission  Secre- 
tary, Box  72,  Auckland;  one  to  the  District  Officers,  and  the  other 
one   lor   Branch  use.     Look  up  past   issues  of   Te  Karere   for  the 

-ary  added   information   regarding  your   Reports. 

SIX-PENNY    FUND: 

With  this  last  report  should  come  the  second  "Six-penny  Fund" 
-allotment.  There  are  no  "envelopes"  for  your  contributions. 
Branches  are  asked  to  record  the  names  of  contributors  on  their 
roll  books.     There  is  a  special  column  in  the  rolls  for  this  purpose. 

All  Sunday  Schools  are  asked  to  prepare  to  commence  the  New 
Year  of  1942  the  First  Sunday  of  December,  L941.  Hiis  means 
thai  your  rolls  must  be  redrafted;  and  a  word  t»>  Branch  Presidents, 
if  you  are  to  make  any  changes  in  your  Sunday  School  Superin- 
tendents u  would  be  for  tbe  best  of  your  School  if  the  change  be 
effected  at  die  beginning  of  the  year.  Roll  books  are  available  at 
tin-  Mission  Office  at  2  per  copy  (English).  These  books  are 
not  die  same  as  have  Used  in  the  past,  but  are  of  local  manu 
Eacture  and  therefore  do  nol  have  the  \\  ritti 

old  one-,  have.        I  lie  books  have  a  place   for  cwrythii. 

SEND  i.\  v<  m  k  "SIX  n:\.\Y   rwds." 

i il   difficulties  encountered  in   In 

abilil      mi    ill,-   (  Inn,  li    Id  I,,,  •,    i  ,|s    o'|    Mormon." 

tins  issue  will  bring  you  something  we  hope  will  prove  .1  satisfaction 
t«.  the  Saint  . 


872  TE  KARERE  Tihema,  1941 

REMEMBER,  even-  Sunday  School  officer  and  teacher  cannot 
expect  to  carry  on  the  Sunday  School  work  without  YV  Karcrc.  Sub- 
scribe  now  ! 

Brother  Charles  E.  Billman  of  the  Auckland  Branch  has  been 
given  the  right  whereever  he  goes  in  the  Mission  to  seek  out  those 
officers  and  teachers  of  the  Sunday  Schools  he  may  he  privileged  to 
attend,  who  are  without  Te  Kareres  and  endeavour  to  have  them 
subscribe. 

LESSONS 

KINDERGARTEN.      Thought:  "The  Re-awakening." 
"Raising   the   Widow's   Son   at   Nain."    (Luke    7) 
"Raising    of    Lazarus."    (John    11) 
"Raising    of   Jarius'    Daughter."    (Matt.    9    and    Luke    8) 

PRIMARY. 

"The   Long   Lost   Son."    (Gen.   44   and   46)      Thought:   "The   Lord 

helps  a  loving,  dutiful  son,  He  over-rules  evil  for  good." 
"Saved    by   a    Princess."    (Exodus    2)      Thought:    "The    Lord    can 

save." 
"A  Mighty  Leader  for  God's  People."   (Exodus  11  to  15)    Thought:. 

"The  Lord  uses  Humble  People  for  great  Things." 

CHURCH  HISTORY 

"Lehi  Leaves  Jerusalem."  (1  Nephi  1:  1-20  and  2:  1-8)  Thought: 
"Obedience."  Facts:  The  Lord  tells  Lehi  that  Jerusalem  will  be 
destroyed.  Lehi  prophesies.  The  Jews  seek  his  life.  Lehi's  family 
commanded  to  flee.  They  leave  much  wealth  and  depart  into  a 
wilderness. 

"The  Liahona."  (1  Nephi  16:9-16,  26-33)  Thought:  "Faith." 
Facts:  Lehi  finds  the  Liahona — the  spindles  point  the  way  to  travel — 
they  work  according  to  faith. 

"Building  of  the  Ship."  (1  Nephi  17:5-17  and  18:1-9)  Thought: 
"Knowledge  can  be  obtained  by  faith,  as  also  by  study.  Facts:  The 
command  to  build  a  ship — Nephi  digs  ore — he  makes  tools — opposed 
by  his  brothers — he  completes  the  work. 

A  and  B  DEPARTMENTS. 

"The  Story  of  Isaac."  (Gen.  17:15-22,  21:1-12,  22:1-18,  24  to 
27)  What  to  look  for:  Isaac  fore-announced;  the  promise  of  his  life. 
Incidents  in  his  youthful  life.  How  he  secured  a  wife.  His  preference 
of   sons. 

NOTE. — Consider  the  consistency  of  prayer  in  Gen.  24  and  dis- 
cuss the  importance  of  the  great  care  needed  in  selecting  a  companion. 
The  happiness  and  success  of  parents  depend  upon  the  perpetuation 
of  a  noble  lineage.  (Gen.  26:34-35,  27:46,  and  28:1-5)  Note  also 
in  the  story  of  the  sacrifice  that  God  does  not  command  Abraham  to 
slay  Isaac,  but  to  present  him  as  an  offering  on  the  altar.  There  is 
no  justification  in  this  story  for  human  sacrifices  as  has  been  alleged. 

C  and  D  DEPARTMENTS. 

"At  Jerusalem  Attending  the  Feast  of  the  Passover."  (John  5) 
Problems:  What  evidence  do  you  find  that  Jesus  was  not  yet  well 
known  in  Jerusalem?  Did  Jesus  believe  that  sickness  is  sometimes  due 
to  sin?  What  proof  did  Jesus  give  for  His  divinity?  For  what  evi- 
dence did  He  hold  them  responsible? 

Arrange  for  some  discussions  on  New  Testament  Scripture  as  it 
affects  present-day  happenings,  etc. 


Tihema,  1941  TE  KARERE  873 

GOSPEL  DOCTRINE. 

"Isaiah,   the   Prophet  of   Judah.     (Is.    1   to   6) 
"Isaiah's    Prophecies   of    Immanuel."    (Is.    7    to    12) 

"Isaiah's    Prophecies    of    the    Last    Days."  (Is.     2:1-4;     18:1-7; 

29:  2-4,  11  to  14,  18  to  24,  35:  1-10;  45  to  48  and  65:  17-25) 

MAORI   CLASS. 

RATAPU  TUATAHI 

TE  TAKANGA  ATU  O  0  TATOU  MATUA  TUATAHI  I  ERENE. 

Ko  te  hanganga  o  te  tangata  kia  rite  ki  te  ahua  o  tona  Matua  Wairua, 
te  Atua,  he  karaunatanga  no  nga  mea  katoa  i  kitea  i  te  hanganga  o 
te  ao.  Hei  whakanui  mo  te  whakanohanga  o  te  tangata  tuatahi  he 
mea  ata  whakarite  mai  e  te  Kaihanga  he  wahi  tino  pai  o  te  whenua, 
he  mea  whakapaipai  ki  nga  mea  ataahua  o  runga  i  te  whenua  hei 
whakakoa  i  te  ngakau  o  tona  "kainoho."  Ka  whakatokia  e  Ihowa  e  te 
Atua  tetahi  kaari  ki  Erene  ki  te  taha  ki  te  rawhiti,  a  whakanohia  iho 
ki  reira  te  tangata  i  hanga  e  la.  Muri  tata  iho  i  te  nohanga  o  te 
tangata  ki  te  whenua  ka  hanga  e  te  Ariki  he  hoa,  he  kai  awhina  mona  i 
mea  hoki  ia  e  kore  e  pai  kia  noho  te  tangata  koia  anake.  Noreira  te 
tane  me  te  wahine,  a  Arama  me  tana  wahine  me  Iwi  ka  whakanohia 
ki  te  kaari.  Kua  meatia  raua  hei  rangatira  mo  nga  ika  o  te  moana, 
mo  te  manu  hoki  o  te  rangi,  a  mo  nga  mea  ora  katoa  hoki  e  ngokingoki 
ana  i  runga  i  te  whenua.  I  te  taha  o  tenei  mana  nui  i  whakapiria  mai 
etahi  whakahau.  Ko  te  mea  tuatahi  nui  rawa  hoki:  "Kia  hua  kia  tini 
kia  kapi  te  whenua,  kia  mate  hoki  ona  tara  ia  korua;  kia  kaua  raua 
e  kai  kia  kaua  ranei  e  pa  ki  te  hua  o  tetahi  rakau,  te  rakau  o  te  matau- 
ranga  ki  te  pai  ki  te  kino  e  tupu  ana  i  waenganui  pu  o  te  kaari :  otira 
o  era  atu  hua  rakau  katoa  e  ahei  ana  raua  ki  te  kai."  Ko  Qga  kupu 
a  te  Atua  mo  tenei  whakahau  me  te  whiu  ina  takahia  e  penei  ana.  "A 
ka  whakahau  te  Ariki  te  Atua  i  te  tangata  ka  mea — kainga  noatia  nga 
hua  o  nga  rakau  katoa  o  te  kaari  ko  te  rakau  ia  o  te  matauranga  ki 
te  kino  kaua  e  kai  i  ona  hua;  otiia  kei  a  koe  te  tikanga  ki  te  whiriwhiri 
mou  ake,  kua  hoatu  na  hoki  kia  koe,  engari  kia  mahara  kua  rahuitia 
tena  e  Ahau  no  te  mea  i  te  ra  ano  e  kai  ai  koe  i  tetahi  0  ona  hua  ka 
mate   rawa  koe." 

Nga    Patai: 

1.     0    nga   mea   katoa    i    te    han.uun.ua   0   te    ao,    he   aha   te    mea   nui 

rawa'.' 

'2.    lie  aha  te  mea  i  whakaritea  hei  whakanui  mo  te  tangata? 

3.  !!•'    aha    i    han^aia    ai    te    wahine".' 

4.  He    aha    Qga    whakahau    ki    te    tane    raua    ko   to   wahine? 

RATAPU    TUARUA 

TE  MURERE  0  HATANA.  I  muri  tata  Iho  I  te  whakahau  ■  te 
At  u a  kia  [wi  raua  k<»  Arama,  ka  puta  mai  he  whakawa\nga  hei  takahi 
i    taua    whakahaunga.        Ka    whakatata    mai    a    Hatana    ia    ia    ki    mua 

ia   Iwi    i   roto   i   te   kauri,   u   ka   korero   mai   ma  te    tl  •     nukalu.   ka 

in  la  mo  nga  whakahau  a  te  Atua  mo  te  rakau  o  te  matauranga  ki  te 
pai  Id  te  km".     I  whakahokia  <•  iwi  kahore  <■  whakaaetia  kin 
uiu  ki  te  hua  o  te  rakau,   ka  mute  rawa  ina  totohe.     Ka  tnhuri  u  Hatana 
Id  te  maminga  I  te  wahine,   ki  \<-  raupatu  hoki  i  te  kupu  ■  te  Atua  me  te 

mea    aim    e    kOM    to    mate    o    |>a    mai    i    muri    iho    i    to    takahanea    «•    taua 

tikanga  ■  te  Atua;  otira,  i  tetahi  ahua.  Id  te  maatia  <•  raua  ta  te  Atua 

i    kihai    ra    i    kai    kia    1 1 1  •  ■ ;  1 1  ia.    k;i    nlr    raua    ko    tona   tane    ki    Qga    Atua.    ka 

mohio  ki  te     pai  nc  te  kino.     i  enel  korero  tonu  ka  riro  te  wahine; 


874  TE  KARERE  Tihema,  1941 

a  i  tona  hiahia  kia  whiwhi  ia  i  nga  painga  i  whakaaturia  ra  e  Batana 
ha  takahia  e  ia  te  whakahau  a  Ihowa  B  kain.ua  ake  te  hua  o  te  rakau 
rahui.  Kahore  ia  i  wehi  i  te  kino  i  te  mea  kahore  ano  ia  i  mohio  noa 
ki  te  kino.  Na,  ka  korerotia  e  ia  kia  Arama  tana  i  mea  ai,  me  te  tohe 
at u  kia  kai  ano  ia  i  te  hua  o  te  rakau. 

Nga   Patai: 

1.  I   te   mea  kua  puta  nei  nga  tohutohu   mai  a  te  Atua  kia  Iwi 
raua  ko  Arama  he  aha  te  mea  i  tupono? 

2.  He  aha  nga  kupu  whakapati  a  Hatana  ki  te  wahine? 

3.  He  aha  te  wahi  korero  a  Hatana  i  ahuareka  atu  ki  te  wahine? 

4.  He  aha  te  wahine  i  kore  ai  e  wehi  ki  te  kino  i  taua  wa? 

RATAPU   TUATORU 

TO  ARAMA  WAHI  I  ROTO  I  TE  TAKAHANGA  O  TE  KUPU. 
Kua  kite  iho  a  Arama  e  kore  e  ahei  ia  ki  te  whakarite  i  nga  whakahau 
e  rua  a  te  Atua.  He  mea  whakahau  mai  raua  ko  tona  wahine  kia 
hua  kia  tini,  kia  kapi  te  whenua.  Kihai  ano  a  Arama  kia  taka  atu 
ki  te  ahua  o  te  kikokiko  engari  ia  a  Iwi,  a  e  kore  e  pai  ta  raua  noho 
tahi  ina  pera  te  ahua,  e  kore  hoki  e  mana  te  whakahau  ra  "kia  hua." 
Ina  hoki  whakarongo  ia  ki  ta  Iwi  ka  takahia  e  ia  tetahi  o  nga  whakahau. 
Noreira  i  ata  takahia  e  ia  i  runga  i  te  mohiotanga,  a  kai  ana  ano  i  te 
hua  o  te  rakau  e  ea  ai  ia  ia  te  whakahau  tuatahi,  te  mea  nui  rawa. 
I  te  mea  i  ata  whakaritea  e  Arama  tenei  ahua  i  runga  i  te  mohiotanga 
e  tautokoria  ana  e  nga  karaipiture.  I  nga  tuhituhinga  a  Paora  kia 
Timoti,  e  whakamarama  ana  i  mea:  'kihai  ano  hoki  a  Arama  i  tini- 
hangatia,  ko  te  wahine  ia  i  tinihangatia,  a  takahi  ana  i  te  ture.'  Te 
poropiti  a  Rihai,  ia  ia  e  whakamarama  ana  i  nga  karaipiture  ki  ana 
tama,  ka  mea  'I  taka  ai  a  Arama  kia  puta  ai  he  tangata,  a  i  puta 
nga  tangata  kia  whiwhi  ai  ratou  ki  te  koa.' 

Nga   Patai: 

1.  Pehea  ta  Arama  whiriwhiringa  i  te  mea  kua  pa  nei  a  Iwi  ki 
te  hua  o  te  rakau? 

2.  I  te  mea  kihai  ano  nei  a  Arama  kia  kai  i  te  hua  o  te  rakau 
rahui  a  ko   Iwi  kua  pa  whakamaramatia  o  raua  ahua? 

3.  I  taea  ranei  a  Arama  te  tinihanga  e  te  Rewera,  kei  hea  hoki  o 
te  karaipiture  te  kore  whakamarama  mo  tenei? 

RATAPU  TUAWHA 

TE  RAKAU  O  TE  ORA.  Tera  ano  tetahi  atu  rakau  tino  pai  nei 
ona  hua,  i  roto  i  te  kaari  o  Erene;  ona  hua  e  whakawhiwhi  ana  i  te 
oranga  ki  nga  mea  e  kai  ana.  Ia  Arama  raua  ko  Iwi  e  noho  ana  i 
roto  i  te  harakoretanga,  kahore  hoki  te  mate  i  te  pa  kia  raua,  kaore 
tenei  rakau  i  araia  ia  raua  otira  i  te  mea  kua  hara  nei  hoki  raua,  i  te 
mea  hoki  inaianei  kua  pa  te  whakataunga  a  te  Atua,  ka  pa  te  mate 
kia  raua,  na  e  ahei  ana  kia  kore  e  whawha  raua  ki  te  rakau  o  te  ora. 
Noreira,  ka  peia  atu  raua  i  te  kaari  a  he  kerapima  me  te  hoari  mumura 
e  tiaki  i  te  huarahi  atu,  kei  hoki  atu  te  tangata  ki  te  Atua  i  roto  i  tona 
ahua  kaore  ano  kia  whakahoua. 

Nga    Patai: 

1.  He  rakau  atu  ranei  i  waho  atu  o  te  mea  mo  te  mohiotanga  ki 
te   kino   me   te   pai? 

2.  He  aha  i  whakaturia  ai  he  anahera  hei  tiaki  i  tenei  rakau? 

3.  He  aha  raua  i  peia  ai  i  te  kaari  o  Erene? 


Tihema,  1941  TE  KARERE  875 

PRIMARY 

LESSONS: 

FIRST  WEEK 

THE   SUN   IS  GOD'S  GIFT  TO   US 
Objective: 

Let  us  be  grateful  for  the  sun — God's  gift  to  give  us  light  and  life. 

Prayer: 

One  of  the  older  children  of  the  group  may  now  be  able  to  say 
the  prayer  without  help. 

Approach: 

Talk  with  the  children  about  the  beautiful  gardens  they  have  seen ; 
about  trees,  flowers,  and  birds.      Let  them  repeat  the  gem: 

All  things  bright  and  beautiful, 

All  creatures  great  and  small, 
All  things  wise  and  wonderful, 
The  Lord,  God,  made  them  all. 
Story: 

Long,  long  ago  Heavenly  Father  made  this  beautiful  world  we 
live  in.  The  very  first  story  in  the  Bible  tells  how  the  world  was  made. 
The  first  thing  Heavenly  Father  made  was  light  and  darkness  so  that 
we  would  have  daytime  and  nighttime.  What  makes  it  light  in  da\  - 
time?  What  makes  it  light  at  night?  Can  we  see  the  sun  all  the 
time?  Where  does  it  go  at  nighttime?  (Illustrate  with  a  ball  to 
represent  the  earth  and  a  small  ball  as  the  sun  to  show  how  the  sun 
gives  daytime  to  some  while  others  have  nighttime.)  Tell  me 
the  things  the  sun  does  for  us.  It  gives  us  light  to  see  the  beautiful 
things   around   us   doesn't  it? 

Do  you  know  that  it  does  even  more  than  that?      Everything  that 

I  ets  its  colour  from  the  sun.     Eave  you  ever  lifted  a  hoard  and 

found  the  grass  under  it  pale  yellow  and  sickly  Looking?     Ask   your 

mother  to  let  you  plant  a  bean  and  put  it  in  a  dark  closet.  If  you 
give  i'  water  it  will  grow,  hut  the  leaves  and  stalk  will  he  almost  white 
and  look  sickly.  Then  if  you  put  it  in  the  sunlight,  the  stalk  and 
haves    will    turn    green,    and    the    plant    will    grow    strong   and    beautiful. 

So  you  Bee  the  sun  sends  his  colour  fairies  to  make  the  trees  and  grass 
green.     What  colour  do  the  sunshine  fairies  make  the  roses,  the  butter- 

eups   and    viol  it    nice    that    the    great,    round    sun    makes    the 

earth  so  hea  lit  1 1  n  1  for  US  to  enjoy?  It  not  only  gives  lovely  colours  to 
the  flowers  and  trees,  hut  it  help  them  to  gTOW.  Whom  else  do  you 
think     it     helps?       It     keeps    the    animals    Btrong    and     well,     the     horses, 

dogs    and    cats    and    all    other    animals. 

It    helps   people,  too — grown   people  and   little  children.     Doesn't 

it  make  you  happy  to  play  out  in  the  bright  ■un-liiiio  and  wouldn't  it 
he  hard   if  tin-     un  COUld   not    be     e<  n  and  we  had   rainy  days  all   t  hi"  time? 

What    el  e  does  tie    sun   do   he  ides  •.i\nie    w     light   and   helpii 
to    crow'.'       Some    da\       it     i      cold    in    tin-    morning,    but    aft 
in    the   BUnshine    for   a    little    while   you   get    warm.       Isn't    thai 

we  can    as   I  he    un  keep    u     a  ai 

<>n  whom  doe    ti"'    on  shine.'     Does  It  shine  on  jual  a  few  people 
and  leave  <'\  «i  \  one  el  e  In  t  he  dark  and  cold? 
little  girl  who  ha    been  naughts   to-day,  I  will  not  shine  on  hei 
"I  don't  like  tin    farmer,  I  will  not     nine  and  make  his  wheat  •.■■ 
The  lun  trie    to  make  the  whole  world  bright,  and  warm  and  bea 


*7<<  TE  KARERE  Tihcma,  1941 

Whom  shall  we  say  "thank  you"  to  for  the  sun?  Let  us  te1! 
Heavenly  Father  in  our  prayers  how  much  we  like  the  sun  and  the 
sunshine. 

Teacher  may  use  the  following.  It  is  an  old  song.  If  you  know 
the  tune,  sing  it  two  or  three  times  slowly  and  the  children  will  join 
in  with  you.    Actions  may  be  suited  to  the  words: — 

Good  morning,  merry  sunshine, 

Why  did  you  wake  so  soon? 
You  scare  away  the  little  stars, 

And  shine   away  the  moon. 
I  saw  you  go  to  sleep  last  night, 

Before  I  ceased  my  playing. 
How  did  you  get  way  over  there, 

And  where  have  you  been  staying? 
I  never  go  to  sleep,  dear  child, 

I  just  go  round  to  see 
The  little  children  in  the  east, 

Who  rise  and  watch  for  me. 

Story: 

Ruth  was  going  on   an   errand  for  her  mother. 

"It  looks  like  rain,"  said  mother.  "Don't  you  think  you  had  better 
take  an  umbrella,  Ruth?" 

"Yes,"  said  Ruth,  and  when  it  rained  she  was  glad  she  had  taken 
one.  "How  does  God  make  it  rain?"  Ruth  asked  her  father  when  she 
returned  to  the  house. 

"He  does  not  do  it  alone,"  father  answered.  "God  has  made  many 
helpers.  The  sun  is  one  of  His  helpers.  The  sun  warms  the  water 
and  it  goes  up  in  the  sky  and  forms  clouds." 

"Wind  helps  make  rain,  too,"  said  father.  "It  blows  the  clouds 
in  the  same  way  that  it  blows  your  sailboat.  The  wind  drives  it  along 
the  sky  until  it  strikes  some  cold  air.  Then  the  little  drops  of  water  in 
the  clouds  get  so  heavy  that  they  fall." 

"They  fall  on  the  flowers  and  the  grass,"  said  Ruth,  "and  that  is 
why  they  are  so  fresh  and  beautiful." 

"Yes,"  said  father,  "and  that  is  why  we  say,  'Praise  ye  the  Lord, 
who  covereth  the  heavens  with  clouds,  who  prepareth  rain  for  the 
earth.'  " 

"Oh,  look!"  said  Ruth,  "the  sun  is  shining  again.  I  love  the  bright 
sunshine.  I  love  to  play  outdoors  when  the  sun  is  shining.  It  seems 
to  shine  brighter  after  a  rain." 

"Yes,"  said  father,  "the  sunshine  brings  us  daylight.  It  makes  us 
glad  and  happy.  Mother  says  sunshine  is  like  God's  love,  because  it  is 
everywhere  and  it  makes  everyone  happy." 

SECOND  WEEK 

BROTHERS  AND  SISTERS 
Objective: 

To  help  the  children  to  love  and  to  be  kind  to  their  brothers  and 
sisters. 

Prayer: 

In  concert,  led  by  the  teacher. 

Approach: 

I  read  a  story  one  day  that  made  me  very  happy.  It  said:  A  little 
girl  was  walking  down  the  street.  She  was  carrying  her  little  brother 
who  was  really  much  too  heavy  for  her.      A  lady  met  her.      She  felt 


Tihema,  1941  TE  KARERE  877 

sorry  for  her  and  wanted  very  much  to  help  her,  "Let  me  carry  the 
baby,"  she  said,  "he  is  too  heavy  for  you  to  carry." 

"No,  thank  you,"  replied  the  little  girl,  "he  isn't  too  heavy,  he  is 
my  brother." 

Why  do  you  think  she  thought  he  wasn't  heavy?  Do  you  love  your 
little  brother?  Do  you  love  your  sister?  Do  you  tell  her  so  some- 
times? 

Here  is  a  poem  about  a  boy  who  had  a  very  little  brother.    It  says: 

I  am  a  sister  of  him 

And  he  is  my  brother, 
He   is  too  little  for  us 

To  talk  to   each  other. 

So  every  morning  I  show  him 

My  doll  and  my  book, 
But  every  morning  he  still  is 

Too  little  to  look. 

(The  teacher  may  here  tell  any  experience  of  seeing  children  kind 
and  helpful  to   each  other.) 

Story: 

TWO    SISTERS 

Janet  and  Margie  were  two  sisters  who  helped  each  other  and 
played  together  every  day.  Janet  was  eight  but  Margie  was  just  five 
and  was  a  rolly-polly  little  girl.  She  was  a  good  sister  and  liked  to 
help  Janet.  One  night  Janet  was  taking  her  dolls  to  bed.  She  had 
five   in  her  arms  and  couldn't  turn  the   light  on. 

"Wait  a  minute,"  said  Margie.  "I'll  turn  it  on  for  you."  She 
couldn't  reach  the  switch  so  she  pushed  a  chair  to  tin-  wall,  climbed 
up  and  on  went  the  light. 

One  day  when  Janet  and  Margie  went  to  school,  the  sun  was  -bill- 
ing, but  when  they  started  home  the  wind  was  blowing.  "Woo-oo," 
went  the  wind,  and  both  girls  buttoned  their  coats  up  tight.  Soon  .Mr. 
Wind  came  harder.  "Woo-oo,  woo-oo,"  lie  said,  blowing  right  into 
their    faces. 

"That  hurts  my  cheeks  and  nose."  said  Margie. 

"It  goes  right  through  my  coat,"  said  Janet.  "Let's  try  walking 
backward-.'' 

They    tried    that    a    little    way    hut     Man-ie    stumbled. 

"Oh    dear!"    she    cried,    "we    can't    gel    home." 

"Yes  we   can,"   .aid  Janet.       "Come.    I'll   take   your   hand." 

Then     Air.     Wind     became     tierce.       "Woo-OO,     woo,...     w .."     he 

shrieked.  lie  pushed  so  hard  that  Margie's  little  feet  just  couldn't 
gO,   and   she   began   to   cry.      -Janet    felt    like   crying  too,    but    >he   thought, 

"I   mustn't.     I   must  get    Margie  home."     So    he  said  "No*  just  duck 

your  head  like  this  so  the  wind  won't   hit   yOUI  lac    10  hard.       So. 

nearly  to  tie-  corner.       When   we  turn   up  the  in  \t    Btreet    mnyhc  the  wind 

won't   be    o    trong." 

So  they  went  on.  one  Btep,  then  another,  then  another,  until  they 
reached   the  corner.     The   wind   wa  n't    nearly   bo   bad   en   that    block, 

and    then,    they    Were    home. 

Mother    had    them       it     l>.\     a    nice    warm    lire    and    -a\e    them    warm 

milk  to  drink.     Soon  they  were  feeling  fine  aj 

"I  wonder,"    aid   Margie,  "what   the  other  children  did.  the 

that    don't    ha\e    a      i    ter    like    Janet    I"    help    Ihem    home'."' 

(Show  picture  of  children  helping  each  other  and  direct  the 
children1    attention  t"  what     hould  be    aid  when  h<  them.) 


878  TE  KARERE  Tihentt,  1941 

Here  is  another  story  of  how  a  big  sister  helped: 

Gladys  lived  in  a  big  house  in  a  big  city.  She  had  a  little  brother 
and  sister.     She  loved  them  very  much  and  was  very  kind  to  them. 

One  day  when  Gladys  had  been  on  an  errand  for  her  mother  she 
heard  sounds  coming  from  the  playroom.  She  ran  to  the  dour  and 
there  were  her  brother  and  sister,  each  pulling  on  the  arm  of  a  doll. 

"I  want  it!"  cried  little  Brother. 

"It's  mine,  and  I  want  it,"  cried  little  Sister. 

Just  then  little  Brother  gave  a  hard  jerk  and  the  poor  doll's  arm 
came  right  off.      Both  Brother  and  Sister  fell  to  the  floor. 

Gladys  said,  "Oh,  dear  me,  what  is  the  matter?"  Then  both 
Brother  and   Sister  tried  to  talk  at  once. 

"Let's  see  if  we  can  find  something  else  for  little  Brother  to  play 
with,"  said  Gladys.  So  they  hunted  about  until  little  Brother  found 
a  ball.  Then  Gladys  sat  down  and  sewed  the  arm  on  the  doll,  just 
as  it  had  been  before,  and  the  two  children  played  together  again  and 
were  as  happy  as  could  be.  Have  you  a  big  sister  or  a  big  brother? 
Tell  how  they  help  you.     What  do  you  say  to  them  when  they  helo  you? 

Game: 

Let  the  children  dramatize  being  big  brother  or  sister.  Help  the 
children  to  remember  to   say   "thank  you." 

Cut  pictures  of  brothers  and  sisters  and  paste  them  in  their  scrap- 
books.  Do  not  expect  perfect  work  but  encourage  the  children  to  do 
their  best. 

THIRD  WEEK 

OUR   EYES 
Objective: 

To  help  the  children  to  appreciate  their  eyes  as  a  precious  gift 
of  our  Heavenly  Father. 

Prayer: 

To  get  the  children  in  the  right  attitude  for  prayer  the  following 
is  suggestive: — 

What  shall  we  thank  Heavenly  Father  for?  What  did  we  say 
"Thank  You"  for  last  Primary  day?  Let  a  child  find  a  picture  that 
tells  what  he  is  thankful  for.  Another  child  may  remember  that  we 
thanked  Heavenly  Father  for  our  fathers  and  mothers,  too.  When 
the  children  are  ready,  the  children  repeating  the  words  after  her. 

Approach: 

This  simple  exercise,  with  the  hands  may  help  to  get  the  boys  and 
girls  in  listening  position. 

Open,  shut,  open,  shut, 

Give  a  little   clap; 
Open,   shut,   open,  shut, 

Fold  them  in  your  lap. 

Now,  will  you  all  look  at  me  for  a  moment?  I  can  see  lovely  blue 
eyes  and  brown  eyes.  Heavenly  Father  has  blessed  everyone  of  you 
with  bright,  sparkling  eyes.  What  has  He  given  them  to  you  for? 
Let  us  name  some  of  the  things  our  eyes  help  us  to  see.  Our  Heavenly 
Father  made  all  the  beautiful  things  we  can  see,  and  He  gave  us  our 
eyes  to  see  them. 

Teacher  may  repeat  the  following  poem.  The  children  know  the 
first  stanza,  let  them  say  it,  and  then  the  teacher  may  continue. 


Tihema,  1941  TE  KARERE  879 

ALL   THINGS   BRIGHT   AND   BEAUTIFUL 

All  things  bright  and  beautiful, 

All   creatures  great   and  small, 
All  things  wise  and  wonderful, 

The  Lord  God  made  them  all. 

Each  little  flower  that  opens, 

Each  little  bird  that  sings, 
He   made   their  glowing   colours, 

He   made   their   tiny   wings. 

The  cold  wind  in  the  winter, 

The   pleasant   summer   sun, 
The  ripe  fruits  in  the  garden, 

He  made  them  every  one. 

He  gave  us  eyes  to  see  them, 

And  lips  that  we  might  tell 
How  great  is   God   our  Father 

Who  has  made  all  things  well. 

Game: 

Place  several  pictures  around  the  room,  let  the  children  look  at 
them.  Have  them  close  their  eyes  while  you  take  one  away.  Have 
one  child  tell  which  one  is  missing.  This  may  be  repeated  several 
times. 

Have  all  the  children  close  their  eyes.  How  would  you  feel  if 
you  were  like  that  every  day?  Do  you  know  there  are  some  people 
who  cannot  see  all  the  beautiful  things  we  can  see?  They  are  blind. 
What  do  blind  people  have  to  help  them  go  about?  Talk  briefly  about 
the  "white  cane"  used  by  the  blind.  Tell  also  about  the  "seeing  eye" 
dogs  that  have  been  so  helpful  to  the  blind.      Tell  the  following  story: 

THE    BROOM    MAN 

Mary  and  Fred  were  going  to  the  library  for  a  story  book.  Mother 
said,  "You  may  go  by  yourselves  it'  you  will  watch  the  lights.  A  red 
light  moans  Stand  and  Wait.  A  green  li.u'ht  moans  Cross  the  street 
Carefully.     Can  you  remember?" 

"Yes,  we  will  remember,   a   rod   lighl    means   Stand   and    Wait,   and 

a  green  light  means  Cross  the  street  Carefully.     And  away  they  went 

down  the  side  walk. 

"Let's  play  a  game,"  said  Mary.  "Try  who  can  Bee  the  most 
things.       I    see    some    lords." 

•|    ee  them  eating  seeds  on  the  lawn,"  said  Fred. 

"I  see  them  fly  away,"  said  Mary, 

"I  see  a  red  r«.se  in  that   garden,"  saiil  Fred. 

"I   see  a    red    light    that    says   Stand   and    Wail."    -anl    Mary. 

So  they   waited,  and   Fred     aid.  "l   Bee  a  man  coming  down  the 

street." 

"I  see   he   is  earryin-      omething  on    hi        h.oilder."   -aid    Mary.         I' 

broom  .     It*    ;i  broom  man.     He  i    carrying  a  white  cane  too.     i  should 
think  a  bundle  of  brooms  on  his  shoulder  would  be  enough  without  a 

tut,     in    the    other    hand." 

Fred  was  watching  him  too.     "He  I    pattinj  the  fane  around  on 

the    sidewalk    in    trout    of    hun.       I    wonder    w  hy    he    d06fl    that'."* 

"o  Fred!"    aid   Mary,  "I  do  believe  the  man  Is  blind.     Look  he 

is  feeling  the  walk  to    ee  whore  to    top." 


880  TE   KARERE  Tihema,  1(M1 

In  the  street  the  light  had  gone  red,  and  green,  and  red  again,  but 
Mary  and  Fred  did  not  see  it.  They  watched  until  the  man  came  up 
close  to  them.  Then  they  knew  that  he  was  blind.  When  he  stopped 
at  the  crossing,  Fred  said,  "May  we  help  you  across  the  street '  " 

"Yes,  thank  you,"  the  man  answered.      I  can't  see  the  lights." 

Fred  took  the  man's  arm  and  they  all  three  crossed  together. 
Then  the  broom  man  thanked  them  and  went  on,  tapping  the  walk  in 
front   of   him. 

Fred  said,  "Let's  close  our  eyes  and  try  how  it  feels  to  walk 
without  seeing." 

They  both  closed  their  eyes  and  took  a  few  steps.  They  bumped 
into  each  other  and  stubbed  their  toes. 

"O,  how  thankful  I  am  for  my  eyes!"  said  Mary  as  she  opened 
them  and  the  children  walked  into  the  library. 

"So  am  I,"  said  Fred.  "When  I  say  my  prayers  to-night  I  am 
going  to  thank   Heavenly  Father   especially  for  my   eyes." 

FOURTH  WEEK 

To  Teacher:  Review  last  week's  lesson.  Impress  children  again 
with   importance   of  taking  care   of  their   eyes. 

Story: 

THE    BLIND    MAN    BY    THE    ROADSIDE 

A  long,  long  time  ago  in  a  country  far  away  there  lived  a  man 
who  was  blind.  He  had  never  seen  his  mother  or  father.  He  had 
never  seen  a  flower  or  a  tree.  He  had  never  seen  the  blue  sky  or 
the  beautiful  sunlight.  The  world  was  all  darkness  to  him.  He  had 
never  worked  because  no  one  had  ever  taught  him  to  use  his  fingers. 
So    day   after   day   he   sat   by   the   roadside   begging   for   money. 

One  day  Jesus  passed  that  way  on  his  way  from  the  temple. 
He  saw  the  blind  man  and  wanted  to  help  him.  Jesus  did  not  have 
any  money  to  give  him,  but  he  gave  the  man  something  worth  ever 
so  much  more  than  money.  Do  you  know  what  it  was?  This  is 
what  Jesus  did.  He  took  some  clay  from  the  ground  and  moistened 
it,    and    put    it   very   gently    on   the    blind    man's    eyes. 

Then   He   said,    "Go   wash   in   the   Pool   of   Siloam." 

The  blind  man  knew  where  the  pool  was  and  did  as  Jesus  told 
him.  He  had  to  feel  his  way  very  slowly  with  his  cane.  After  he 
had  washed  the  clay  from  his  eyes  what  do  you  think  happened? 
He    could    see! 

He  saw  the  birds  and  flowers  and  the  green  grass.  He  saw  his 
neighbours. 

The  neighbours  and  those  who  had  known  him  before  did  not 
know  him  now.  Some  asked  who  he  was,  and  he  told  them  that  he 
was  the   one  who   begged   by  the   roadside. 

"How    were    thine    eyes    opened?"    they    asked. 

He  answered,  "A  man  that  is  called  Jesus  made  clay  and  put 
on  my  eyes,  and  then  told  me  to  wash  in  the  Pool  of  Siloam.  I 
went  and  washed  as  he  told  me  and  I  can  see." 

Then  he  left  the  neighbours,  for  he  wanted  to  see  his  father 
and  mother.      Can   you   think  how  glad  he   was  to   see  them? 

All  the  people  who  had  seen  the  blind  man  wondered  at  the 
things    Jesus    had    done. 

Song: 

One  the  children  choose. 
Prayer: 

By   one   of   the   boys. 


Tihema,  1941 


TE  KARERE 


881 


NEWS  FROM  THE  FIELD 


MANAWATU    DISTRICT 
By    Polly    Wi    Neera 

Greetings  !  Here  we  are  again,  report- 
ing the  activities  of  this  District  for  the 
past    month. 

On  the  week-end  of  the  11th  October, 
Bro.  and  Sister  Peneamine  Wi  Neera 
of  Porirua  and  Bro.  Parata  Pirihi  of 
Wellington,  visited  the  McDonald  family 
of  Hokio  Beach,  Levin.  This  was  the 
first  occasion  on  which  this  Branch  had 
been  visited  for  many  years,  and  the 
result  was  that  Bros.  Adam  and  Tuiti 
McDonald  together  with  their  families 
gathered  together  to  listen  to  rhe  mes- 
sage that  these  brethren  carried  to  them 
— about  50  members  of  the  McDonald 
family  were  present  at  the  meetings.  A 
very  successful  time  was  spent  with 
them  and  the  gospel  is  still  paramount 
ill    their    lives. 

Sister  Wi  Neera  also  visited  the  Wel- 
lington Branch  Relief  Society  and  spent 
a  very  enjoyable  afternoon  with  the  sis- 
ters there  and  the  work  is  going  for- 
ward under  the  guidance  of  t^e  officers 
and    members. 

Private  Ritchie  Tatana  of  Auckland 
and  Waikato.  now  serving  with  the  Maori 
Battalion  in  the  Middle  East,  sends 
rigs  hack,  per  medium  of  "Te 
Karere,"  to  all  his  friends  in  the  North 
island.  lie  reports  that  he  is  well  and 
that    the    land    of    the    I'haroahs    is    all    thai 

i  d    it    to   be. 

Sister      YViki      Katei f      the      I'orirua 

Branch  is  kepi  very  busy  now,  taking 
pupils  in  the  Capita]  City  who  intend 
sitting   for    Elementary   and    Intermediate 

On      Monday     nights     she 

tld     Wednesday 
nights  I  [ome     N  ui-sine..      Bach 

I  .     -".II     pupils 

ho  pita]      hip    arrived     in 

arrying     invalided     soldiers     of     the 

\  /  I  !.F.    from    t  he    Middle    Baal  ;    among 
them    were    numbered    nine   of   the    Maori 
Battalion.    The  Sydney   Streel    Hall,    Wel- 
lington ally  for 
ins    t  he   Maori   boj      '>n  such  occa- 
lons.      On    i  he    Friday    morning,    people 
had   gathered   there  from   all   part-  of  the 
to    assist     in     the    preparations. 
At    ii  80   a.m.    i  hi    boj      arrh  ed    mid    I  he 
i  in  ir  people  and  to  I  he  crj 

I    lis       Mai      te      \\  al  ■  I"      rend.  | 

m<  mi..  in    Poneke  Club,   led 

by      Mr:;.     Oka      llek.ta.         A  |     I  he     I.,   | 

t  hen    place     a  nd   th< 

rho    a. -ted    ■ 

ii,  t  heir  "v.  n  language  and  i  hen  called 
on  the  Hon  P.  1  Paikei  who,  on  behalf 
of    th.     Maori    people   welcomed    th< 

to    i  ti.it     relative      and    homeland. 

01  her      ,,.  :,l  .  ' 

.     Hoi      Mi      I 
..i    Di  renc< 

puhii 
l    ii  poral   v. 

i    to    at  know  ledge    th< 

1 1  nded     I  h<  m"   bj    I  b<    pi  sviou       pi 


n- 


i  hi 


brothers,  fathers  and  relatives  over  there 
have  no  need  to  fear  while  they  are  under 
the  care  of  Colonel  Ditmer,  their  leader, 
a  man  well  respected  and  one  whose 
words  are  held  in  high  esteem  by  the 
boys.  .  .  ."  Private  P.  W.  Kohere  of 
East  Cape  also  replied  by  saying  that 
there  was  no  doubt  about  the  manner  in 
which  the  Maori  Batallion  were  being 
looked  after.  They  were  given  the  finest 
care  by  their  superior  officers  and  leaders. 
He  mentioned  the  name  of  Brigadier  Har- 
gest.  Both  these  lads  spoke  in  their  own 
language  and  Mr.  M.  R.  Jones,  Secretary 
to  the  Native  Minister,  acted  as  trans- 
lator. The  other  boys  who  returned  were 
Pte.  W.  Larkins  te  Awe-Awe,  of  Rangi- 
otu,  Palmerston  North;  Pte.  H.  Eria, 
Paki  Paki,  H.B.;  Pte.  H.  Mano  and  P. 
Mare,  Whangarei,  North  Auckland:  Pte. 
W.  A.  Kenny,  Picton,  South  Island;  Pte. 
H.  Rangi  Hika,  Whakatane;  Pte.  P.  Mau- 
heni.    Rangitukia. 

This  is  your  District  Correspondent 
signing  off,  but  before  doing  BO,  I.  to- 
gether with  the  Saints  of  the  District, 
would  like  to  greet  you  one  and  all  by 
wishing  you  a  Merry  Christmas  and  a 
Happy    New    Year: 

HAWKE'S    BAY   DISTRICT 
By    Olive    Edwards    and    Patu    Wairama 
Korongata      M.I. A.      held      their     annual 
Gold    and    Gre<  n     Ball    in    I  he    Assembly 
Ball,     Hastings,     September     19th, 
Mary    Tahau     representing     the    Gleaners 

Was      crowned      Queen     of      th.'      Hall.       The 

newly  organized  orchestra  under  tin  di- 
rection of  Syd  Kamau  was  considered  a 
vers     attractive    combination    a-    a    draw 

for     the      Ball.        Mission     officer  8      present: 

■it     Wi    Duncan   and    his    counsellors. 

Richard    Marsh    and    Kru    TengaiO    and    Sis- 

i.  i    ii   in    I am  of  the  Ybum    w  omen's 

i  i icy. 

August     28th     Peter     Bdwards    entered 

military       trainiuc       camp      at       Pain 

North    for    l" 

trainin  Guard    duties. 

Tiie    M.I. A.  of    tie     >  Branch 

ended    11  rk    v.  it  h    much 

mi    the    minds 

of   everyone    '  he    tine     pun    of   •■.. 

I  mn    .nil..,,.'     i  I,. 
in'  im:,' 

I    i         I 
;i«  aid.  d 

\  ice    in    at  t  ending    n 

rj      function     held     t--     a 
fund 

ant  hoi  v 

tell..  \ 

Mi  I 

i 

Kami.  II 

i      : 


882 


TE  KARRRK 


Tihema,  1941 


w;is  collected  from  the  many  stalls,  etc. 
The  children  were  wonderful  in  their  <i i s - 
play    of    mass    marching    and    drill. 

The  Chapel  Committee  is  working  on 
the  "beautification  of  the  grounds"  and 
are  also  working  on  the  erection  of  the 
M.A.C.  Memorial  Gate.  Information  to 
hand  discloses  that  grounds  about  the 
Chapel  are  in  potatoes.  We  mean,  pota- 
toes have  been  sown  in  the  grounds 
about  the  Chapel  and  the  funds  derived 
from  the  sale  of  potatoes  will  go  into  the 
cost    of    the    beautification,    etc. 

The  Te  Hauke  Branch  M.I. A.  an- 
nounces another  successful  M.I. A.  Gold 
and  Green  Ball.  The  success  of  this 
great  event  is  due  to  the  wonderful  co- 
operative spirit  among  the  officers  and 
the  people  of  the  community.  The  finan- 
cial figures  touched  the  century  mark. 
Very  good  indeed.  Keep  it  up.  The 
crowning  ceremony  was  performed  by 
District  President  of  the  M.I.A.,  Peter 
Edwards,  and  the  winning  Queen  candi- 
date was  Miss  W.  Thompson  of  Puke- 
hou,  and  her  attendant  Princesses  were 
Misses  Delia  Tutaki,  Ada  Hapuku  and 
Maureen  Hedley.  Two  orchestras  were 
in  attendance.  Mita  Carter's  combina- 
tion accompanied  by  Syd  Kamau  and  his 
orchestra    supplying    the    extras. 

The  Korongata  people,  through  the 
Chapel  Committee,  are  desirous  of  ex- 
tending to  Mr  C.  Tahau  of  Hastings 
their  thanks  and  appreciation  for  his 
contribution  to  the  beautification  pro- 
ject of  the  "posts"  which  add  very  much 
indeed  to  the  beauty  of  the  Chapel 
grounds. 

AUCKLAND    DISTRICT 
Reported    by    Ivan    P.    Reid 

The  sisters  of  the  Relief  Society 
showed  the  Branch  just  what  could  be 
done  when  they  conducted  the  Evening 
Service  in  the  Chapel,  November  2nd. 
The  programme  was  well  prepared  and 
many  of  the  sisters  took  active  part, 
including  Sister  Birgette  Purcell  (nee 
Jensen),  who  gave  a  very  inspiring  ad- 
dress, and  it  was  good  to  hear  her  sweet 
soprano  voice  again  as  she  sang  the  solo 
in  "Jesus  I  My  Cross  Have  Taken,"  ac- 
companied by  the  Singing  Mothers.  Sis- 
ter Cameron  gave  a  review  of  the  work 
accomplished  by  the  Society  during  the 
past  year,  which  was  indeed  a  credit  to 
them.  Bro.  Billman  of  the  Branch  Pre- 
sidency reports  that  the  sisters  are  work- 
ing every  spare  moment  making  goods 
for  their  forthcoming  Bazaar  on  Friday. 
November  21st,  and  if  it  is  anything  like 
their  last  one  we  are  then  assured  of  its 
success. 

21st  Birthday  Greetings  this  month  go 
out  to  L.A.C.  Mateen  Jensen,  and  live- 
wire  of  the  Mangere  Branch,  Mabel 
Kewene.  'Te  Karere'  congratulates  them 
and  wishes  many  happy  returns.  Mateen 
who  has  been  in  hospital  with  foot  ail- 
ment was  discharged  from  hospital  treat- 
ment in  time  to  celebrate  the  event  at 
his  home  on  November  1st.  He  is  ex- 
pected to  return  to  Levin  in  the  near 
future  to  undergo  further  intensive  train- 
ing and  studies.  Mabel  will  celebrate  her 
cominer-of-age  with  a  party  at  the  For- 
resters' Hall,  Onehunga,  on  Friday,  No- 
vember  14th,  and  we  know   she  will  have 


:i  good  time  with  her  many  friends. 
i  From  first-hand  information  the  party 
waa  outstanding  in  entertainment  and 
elegance.  I 

One  thing  about  this  war — everyone 
gets  a  uniform.  Hepa  Meha,  Mateen  Jen- 
><ii.  Krnie  Cormier,  Krnie  Montague, 
Matt  Chote,  Bertel  Jensen,  Hill  Brosnan, 
Dea  I'.illman  all  have  one,  and  now  Ros- 
si r  Perrott  has  one.  A  nice  blue  one 
with  birds  on  each  shoulder  and  lnass 
buttona  down  the  front.  Yes,  Rosser  is 
in  the  Air  Force.  Although  he  volun- 
teered last  year,  Rosser  only  left  for 
training  at  Levin  on  November  10th  to 
train  as  a  pilot,  and  with  him  goes  our 
good  wishes  for  happy  landings  and 
prayers  for  his  safety.  He  is  a  man  we 
will    miss    in    the    Branch. 

Under  graduate  Win  Smiler  of  Gis- 
borne,  who  has  been  attending  Auckland 
University,  finished  his  exams  for  the 
year,  and  has  since  returned  home.  In 
the  five  months  between  courses.  Win 
intends  to  do  some  shearing,  etc.  But 
when  one  goes  another  comes,  and  this 
time  it's  Fritz  Kru^er,  formerly  of  the 
Wellington  Branch,  who  has  just  re- 
turned to  Auckland  after  two  years  in 
Rarotontra  Fritz  intends  to  stay  in  Auck- 
land   for    some    time    before    leaving. 

Visitors  to  the  Mission  Secretary's 
office  cannot  miss  seeing  the  notice  that 
now  hangs  on  the  wall  above  President 
Cowley's  desk.  President  tells  me  that 
no  one  takes  any  notice  of  it:  those  who 
read  it  cannot  fail  to  get  it's  meaning. 
The  sign  reads:  "Quiet  Please,  Genius 
at   Work." 

The  Auckland  Choral  Society  may  sign 
up  tenor  Don  Ross  to  take  the  lead  in 
their  Christmas  presentation  of  Handel's 
Messiah.  This  is  not  definite  as  yet, 
but  we  hope  it  will  become  a  reality.  Don 
had  one  week  in  which  to  learn  his  en- 
tire part  as  the  audition  waa  scheduled 
for  a  specific  time.  One  of  Don's  big 
ambitions  is  to  sing  with  the  Salt  Lake 
le    Choir    in    America. 

NEWS  FLASH— AMERICA.  A  cab]  ■ 
d  Bazel  Smith  of  Auckland,  for- 
merly of  Palmerston  North,  of  the  death 
of  his  mother  and  the  injury  of  his 
father,  Brother  and  Sister  Weston  J. 
Smith,  who  left  New  Zealand  some  tirro 
ago  to  make  their  home  in  Zion.  We  join 
in  sympathy  with  the  loved  ones  at  this 
sudden    and    sad    parting. 

TARANAKI   DISTRICT 
Reported    by    Zena    M.    Stent 

October  19th  reminds  us  of  the  visit 
of  Turake  Manu  of  the  District  Presi- 
dency and  Taka  Toroaiwhiti,  Missionary 
to  Wanjranui.  President  Hakopa  was 
unable  to  be  present  as  he  was  called 
away  to  a  tangi.  Even  so,  in  the  after- 
noon at  Bro.  Wi  Katene's  home  a  meet- 
ing of  the  Presidency  was  held,  at  which 
a  report  of  the  District  was  given.  We 
feel  that  with  this  meeting  of  the  Presi- 
(l<  ncy  thintrs  will  be  run  even  more 
smoothly  in  the  District  than  in  the  past. 

An  Addition  to  the  Overseas  News. — 
Married  —  Elder  Beesley  to  Eunice  D. 
Smith,  formerly  of  Palmerston  North. 
Occupations  —  Elder  Beesley,  railroad; 
Elder  Loy  W.  Watts,  ferrying  planes  to 
England;    Elder    Delbert    Curtis,    army. 


BRANCH  PRESIDENTS  AND 
TE  KARERE  AGENTS 


Subscribers  will  notice  that  where  they  are  in 
a  community  we  have  sent  their  issues  to  an  * 
which  was  made  necessary  because  of  the  high 
of  paper  and  also  at  a  request  from  the  Government 
to  curtail  as  far  as  is  possible  the  necessary  use  of 
paper.    It  also  serves  a  better  purpose  in  the 
that    'agents'    with    the    full    co-operation    of    sub- 
scribers and  particularly  Branch  Presidents  ma 
able  to  follow   up   subscribers   whose   subscripl 
have  lapsed  and  actually  be  a   mean  sonal 

contact  in  the  matter  of  securing  subscrib* 

Branch  Presidents  are  asked  to  i 
act  with  the  'agents'  printed  on  this  page,  and  w] 
there    are    no    'agents'    Branch    Presidents 
quested  to  act  in  that  capacity  as  it  affects  the  mem- 

of  his  Branch — in  a  particular  manner 
apply  to  all  Officers  and  Teachers  of  Sunda;    ; 
and  Primaries.    A  drive  should  ; 
direction  of  each  Branch  Pr< 

is    a  home    in    his    Branch. 

reporter  and  ' 

AGENTS  as  at    present  : — 

Auckland,  Branch  Presidency;  Onehun^a, 
ataiti;    Pipiwai   P.O.,    Ben    Armstrong;   Awarua 
R.M.D.,   Patrick   WiHongi;    Kaikohe  Box  23,   I 
iii-u;    Kawhai    P.O.,    John    I'aki;    Huntly    \\ 

Ngaha  Rotana,  Whatawhata  P.O.,  Tu] 
Manunui,    Howard    Osborne;    Kopu    Thami 
Watene;  Korongata,  Takap;  0 

H.B.,    Patu    Wairama;    Waipawa    Box    58,    R< 
Meha;  Opoutama,  H.B.,  Enu  Nuhaka  P.O., 

William   Christy;   Kopuawhara   No.  3  Camp,   » 
lotte    N.    ]  :    Tologa    Bay. 

Judea,  Tauranga,  James  Kohu. 


® 


<§> 


" THERE  IS  A  LAW" 


By    IK  A    J.    .MARK  HAM 


All  good  things  in  this  life  and  in  eternity 
are  governed  by  law.  The  quickest  and  surest 
way    to   reach    any    desired   goal    is   to    disdover 

and  live  in  harmony  with  the  laws  that  govern 
the  attainment  of  that  goal. 

There  is  a  law,  irrevocably  decreed  in  heaven  before 
the    foundations   of   this   world,    upon    which    all    blessings 

arc    predict  I 

And   when    we    obtain   any   blessing   from    God,   it   is 
by   obedience   to   that   law   upon   which   it   is   previa 
— D.   &   C.   130:  20-21. 

This  fundamental  philosophy  of  the  Church 
of  Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-day  Saints  appeals  to 
thinking  men  and  women  of  all  lands.  Many 
good  people  are  anxious  to  develop  and  grow 
in  mind  and  spirit.  They  find  in  this  philosophy 
a  fundamental  law  of  growth.  It  explains 
nothing  else  can  the  remarkable  progress  that 
is  made  by  people  who  have  been  converted 
to  the  true  Gospel  of  Jesus  Christ. 

Laws  were  not  placed  on  earth  to  test  the 
fidelity  of  man  but  to  give  him  a  fundarm •: 
basis  of  growth  and  development.    Eternal  laws 
cannot  be  changed.     Obedience  to  eternal  laws 
and  living  in  harmony  with  them  brings  the  re- 
quired change  in  man.    It  is  a  doctrine  of  p 
tive  activity  wherein  the  individual  progn 
fastest  who   goes   "from   perfection  to   perfec- 
tion" by  complete  obedience  to  spiritual  laws. 


® 


<S>